Out of the Mist

Prologue

Somewhere, on a plain featureless and heavy with mist, a conversation resumed.

“Rollo? How are you feeling?”

There was no reply from the smaller figure, who continued to sit, silently sulking.

“All right, I understand. This hasn’t been easy on either of us.” The tall figure turned and started to walk away.

“Wait. You…you’ve been looking out again, haven’t you, Teacher?”

The tall one sat down beside him. “Yes, I have. I just finished a few minutes ago.”

“Did you…see anything different? Does it look like they’ll come soon?”

“I’m afraid not. They—”

“I knew it!” The small one sighed, placing his head between his knees. “We’re totally helpless. They’ll never get here.”

“Now, Rollo, you know what I’ve told you. I cannot observe anything away from our world. I have tried, believe me, but—”

“Our world? Yours, maybe, or what used to be yours. This is all the world both of us know, or will ever know.”

“Rollo, please. You must believe that this cannot last. Nothing lasts forever, you know.”

“No. I don’t know. You’re always telling me about the world outside, what it’s like out there. What good will any of that knowledge do me if I’ll always be here?”

“Rollo, Rollo…have you so soon forgotten what your two visitors told you?”

“No, I haven’t, and I haven’t forgotten what I did either. I tried to say your name, and look what happened.”

“And that means you should give up trying? You’ve come a long ways since then, whether you realize it or not.”

“How long has it been ‘since then’? Has it been a…a month yet? That’s when they said they’d be back. You understand time better than I do. Has it been a month yet?”

“Well, it…”

“It has been, hasn’t it?”

The tall one sighed. “Yes. It has been. But—”

“I knew it! They’ll never come back.”

“Rollo, listen to me. They promised they’d be back, and I can vouch for the sincerity of at least one of them. When he says he’ll be back, you can believe he will keep his promise.” The tall one’s tone was still patient but ever-so-slightly sterner.

“But why is it taking so long?”

“There may be any number of reasons. I’m sure they’ve been very busy and simply lost track of time. Believe me, Rollo, when they do arrive, you’ll be ready. In fact, I daresay if they were to arrive tomorrow, you’d do beautifully.”

“You really think so?”

“You know I could never lie to or mislead you.”

“Just…scratching in the dirt would be enough, then?”

“Perhaps. But we must keep practicing your verbal abilities as well, just to be absolutely certain. And you must keep in mind all that awaits you as well.”

Rollo sighed. “All right, Teacher. I’ll do my best. I just…I know none of this is your fault, but…to just keep going on and on like this, while you keep telling me it will change soon…I just wish that you could tell me exactly when.”

“My feelings precisely, my young friend. Now, let us resume your lessons.”

Chapter 1 - Anticipation

The midmorning stillness along the forest trail was gradually being interrupted by the sounds of arriving traffic. Though this area had long been, and continued to be, sparsely populated, this trail had, in recent days, seen more traffic than it ever had; and as this latest party of travelers drew ever closer to its destination, excitement grew anew among its younger members.

The mode of transportation was typical for this part of the world. There were two carriages, each carrying one family and drawn by a haisk’ve—a widely domesticated animal not originally indigenous to these parts, vegetarian but powerfully built. To human eyes, they might appear bearlike in overall body shape but with a short coat of russet fur with large beige spots and a head almost lizard-like in overall shape.

“Phoooeeet!” came the shrill whistled command, and with an accompanying flick of the reins from the driver, the lead haisk’ve increased its pace slightly. The other soon followed suit.

Inside the lead carriage, the faster pace drew an immediate response. “We’re almost there, aren’t we, Dad?”

“We sure are. Not out of the forest yet, but once we are, it shouldn’t be too much longer.” Though he was looking forward to reaching their destination as much as his children, he couldn’t help feeling some slight anxiety, which he again tried to dismiss.

“Sithpha! Children! Come out and see, we’re almost out,” came the voice of the one holding the reins. Again there was a response, one even more immediate, as the children scrambled for the front of the carriage to get a good view of what lay ahead, heads bobbing up over their mother’s shoulders and on either side of her. From there, they could see the vegetation flanking the trail thinning out, and already the landscape beyond could be seen.

“Is that it, Mom? Is that the edge?” asked Bointha.

“Yes, it is, dear.”

“What’d you think it was, silly?” said Eephray.

“At ease, buddy,” said Sithpha. “We’re all a bit cranky from all this riding, but it’ll be all over with soon.”

Dinilom glanced over her shoulder to smile at her husband, with whom she’d shared the driving duties since they’d departed their home the day before, along with their friend Pinphila. They and the other family had traveled almost nonstop since, the only pause of real length being an overnight one, when both carriages had spent the night in a trailside clearing. Now, both families were very much astir, their interest in the outcome of this trip renewed by its imminent finish.

“Get ready to shield your eyes, everyone,” said Dinilom, who carried the youngest, Gwinthri, on her lap. Abruptly, the forest canopy seemed to fall away as they emerged into this radically different environment which the children greeted with open-mouthed disbelief, for all their parents had prepared them for it. Dinilom gave the reins a tug, bringing the haisk’ve to a full stop. The other carriage pulled up alongside them and stopped, and the two families exchanged small greetings and thankfulness for the near-end of their journey; then, with everyone shielding eyes from the sunlight, they gazed back and forth, scanning from horizon to horizon what lay before them.

It was a broad, almost-entirely flat and nearly featureless and arid-looking rust-colored plain which now welcomed them. The edge of the forest stretched away to the left; and as they gazed slowly across the horizon to the right, low hills could be seen, then more forest, joining with the forest’s edge on the right. Their greatest concern, though, was with what lay almost directly in front, still a good half hour’s ride away: a large plateau, or what appeared as such from this vantage point, rising abruptly from the plain, as if it had just fallen from the sky one day—an impression that had more than a ring of truth about it.

“Well, Morobphra,” called Sithpha towards the other carriage, “is everyone over there ready?”

“When you are.”

“Let’s roll, then.” With that, both Dinilom and Morobphra spurred the haisk’ves into motion.

“Are you sure that’s it, Dad?” asked Eephray.

“It sure doesn’t look like much from here,” concurred Tuintwom.

“Well, unless we got our directions completely messed up, that’s it dead ahead.” Sithpha turned to Pinphila, grinning. “Just kidding, buddy.”

“Next time I’ll be sure to lead us straight into Thaveras Gorge,” Pinphila retorted, taking Sithpha’s barb in stride.

Gwinthri was more concerned with their more immediate surroundings. “Daddy, where’d all the trees go?”

“They just don’t grow too well in this kind of ground, sweetie,” replied Sithpha. Indeed, no one was quite sure why landforms like this existed in the world, with fertile land abruptly giving way to virtual deserts. There was some plant life here; most noticeable were the scattered scrubby, stunted, windblown trees that looked barely alive, most growing singly.

As everyone else discussed what they were expecting from this trip, or what they knew of their destination and its inhabitants, Sithpha thought again of his own experiences with some of those inhabitants. Again he felt a small amount of anxiety, which he knew was related to the prospect of seeing them again. But why? He and his family had become good friends with them in the brief time they’d spent together, over two years past, at the home of their sorcerer-friend Gwinthrayle; and so they’d jumped at the chance of again seeing not only them, but their entire community as well. But there were other experiences that still pained him to remember, that were associated with that first meeting. None of them were the fault of his new friends, and he was sure that whatever unpleasant memories he still retained from those days, they would not affect his enjoyment of this visit. After all, he was genuinely looking forward to this reunion; and, though the planning for this cultural exchange had already triggered memories that he’d rather have left behind forever, they hadn’t stopped him from moving forward with the trip, which he was positive would be nothing but life-enriching.

The small caravan rolled on; and though the sun shone quite brightly out here, it wasn’t significantly hotter either. The closer they approached the “plateau”, the more they could see how much it appeared to be part of the surrounding landscape, in spite of how out of place it appeared at first, and actually did still.

“It’s just like you described it, Pinphila,” observed Dinilom. “The outside looks just like the rock surrounding it, and they even seem like they’re part of each other, like the whole thing sprang up out of the ground.”

Sithpha stared at the place. “…sprang up out of the…” He found that his wife’s words, though casually spoken, triggered some uneasiness in him. He closed his eyes, shaking his head. Get ahold of yourself, man. You were told about this, you expected it.

“Sithpha? What’s wrong?”

“Uh…nothing, Dini. I’m all right. I knew what to expect, but…this is reminding me of so much, good and bad. But don’t worry, I knew from the start this might happen. This is all going to work out fine, you’ll see.”

The carriages advanced slowly, too slowly for some of the children, since they could continually see their destination, standing out so prominently on this flat, otherwise near-featureless plain, but it always seemed too far out of reach. Soon, though, they were approaching the point where the ground—really mostly-bare rock—began to ever so slightly curve upward. By now Sithpha found that what uneasiness he’d felt was significantly reduced, as they all noticed what appeared to be large windows in the wall, through which daylight could be seen. It increased everyone’s curiosity to see what lay within, and apparently it was mutual: small figures were visible at the windows, waving arms in greeting, some with light-colored cloths in their hands. Their visitors waved back eagerly.

As they drew closer, they all looked up, marveling at the sheer rock walls, anticipating all the more their first look at what lay within. Pinphila and his friend Dornphinsal—who accompanied Morobphra’s family in the other carriage—had told them it was like a whole different world, though they hadn’t elaborated too far, not wanting to spoil the surprise. Of course, Sithpha and his family knew well that it was literally true.

As the carriages drew to within about a hundred thilm of the plateau’s base, they began concentrating on seeking a way in, since it was not immediately obvious. Knowing they were assured of there being an easily-accessible entrance, they directed the haisk’ves to circle the place until it came into view.

“Mom! Dad! There it is! Do you see it?” shouted Eephray. They all did. “It” was actually “them,” two features that stood out prominently. The first was an unexpectedly even- and smooth-sided chamber, set into the side of the bluff, raised slightly above plain level. The garage, Pinphila had called it, the space designed for the express purpose of storing their carriages. On closer approach, they could see it was indeed wide enough for both of them, side by side. The second was the covered ramp that traveled up the side of the bluff, which would take them to their destination, the entrance of which was nearby. Due to the bluff’s roughly-circular shape, the top of the ramp couldn’t yet be seen, but it was still an impressive sight.

Both drivers gave the haisk’ves slight tugs on their reins. As they drew nearer at a slowed pace, they briefly wondered if anyone was going to meet them there, since no one was immediately visible.

Then, two figures emerged from the garage, waving in greeting; two whose physical appearances contrasted greatly from their visitors’ slim, graceful build and smooth, light blue skins…but also were notably different from each other. Though all in the party were prepared, the sight of these two drew many fascinated stares, though not at all apprehensive, including those from Morobphra and his family, who were the only ones who hadn’t seen these people before. Sithpha’s earlier anxieties were all but left behind now as he recognized his two old friends. He was more certain than ever that nothing would spoil this reunion.

The two greeters were different in size but shared many common characteristics. The bodies of both were covered in brown or grey fur; had faces with elongated snouts with longer and thicker hairs on either side, prominent ears and front teeth, and long, thin, nearly hairless tails; and bodies that overall seemed better suited to quadrupedal locomotion, yet they seemed to have no difficulty with walking upright. The larger one wore a brown and white tunic, and the smaller one was dressed similarly, though his garment was fashioned much like the ones Sithpha and the other male visitors wore—a sight pleasantly familiar to Sithpha and family, since it was one of the vests he’d taken to wearing during his previous stay on this world, styled like that of his own people. Both now came forward as both carriages came to a complete stop.

“Greetings, one and all,” the tall one said cheerily, with arms spread. “My name is Justin, for those of you who don’t know me.”

“And I’m Johnathan Brisby. Welcome to our home.” Sithpha and Morobphra and their families were already disembarking, and once everyone was out, Pinphila and Dornphinsal began unhitching the haisk’ves from the carriages after greeting Justin and Johnathan. Outside, the introductions and reintroductions continued as the two drivers/guides unloaded the two families’ bags.

Sithpha came forward first, grinning broadly. “Wow. It’s sure been a long time, Justin…Johnathan. You guys haven’t changed a bit.” He and Dinilom embraced each of them, followed by their three oldest children, who greeted the pair like favorite uncles. The fourth was a little more shy; her mother scooped her up and introduced her as Gwinthri. Her parents introduced Morobphra and his family, none of whom could hide their fascination for their hosts’ appearances, especially the children.

“You have lots of hair, like a haisk’ve,” observed Gwinthri, staring round-eyed at Justin as her mother held her.

“Gwinthri! That’s not polite,” said Sithpha.

“It’s all right,” said Justin. “It’s all part of learning about each other, and that’s what this visit’s all about.” He allowed Gwinthri to reach out and touch his arm, and explained how he and Johnathan represented the two races living here, Rat and Mouse respectively.

With introductions done, Justin said, “Well, there’s no reason to stay here much longer. We’ll leave the carriages parked down here, and the haisk’ves can come upstairs with us, bringing your bags with them.” This had become the regular practice in previous visits. The two animals rested in a crouch, waiting patiently as Pinphila and Dornphinsal secured the bags across their backs with netting. The same two animals had been employed on previous trips and seemed to anticipate what would follow.

As Justin and Johnathan led their guests toward the ramp entrance, Sithpha noticed something that had escaped his attention in the midst of their reunion—something hanging from around Johnathan’s neck. “Johnathan, that…that pendant you’re wearing, with the red jewel… It’s the one from…from before, isn’t it?”

“That’s right, Sithpha. And it’s at work right now, too, enabling us to communicate like before. There’s a lot more to tell about it, and us, but right now let’s get upstairs and get everyone situated.”

Pinphila and Dornphinsal had just finished pushing the carriages into the garage, and now led the haisk’ves at the rear of the group making their way up the ramp that spiraled up the side of the mount. It was a completely enclosed tunnel, some four feet wide and four tall, with several windows to provide daylight. The pathway wasn’t at a uniform incline all the way, but instead alternated between inclined and level, to give climbers plenty of chances to rest where it was level and overall make for a less tiring climb. Some of the children began charging up the ramp ahead of the others, and their parents told them to slow down and not stray out of sight.

On the way, Justin and Johnathan discussed the previous cultural exchanges conducted over the past two months. The first one was precipitated when two curious Rusay—the dominant race of this world, Lahaikshe—made their way here one morning a few days after its sudden appearance there, where they were quickly noticed by two of their sentries. “That was before the Wall was made, and the ramp under our feet,” Johnathan remarked. The pair’s arrival also precipitated the creation of the Wall, a project given top priority after one of the sentries, Darwin, took an unexpected spill while standing too close to the plateau’s raw edge, which was susceptible to soil giving way. Johnathan used the amulet to bring Darwin and the two natives “upstairs,” and over the next three days the two Rusay were treated as honored guests. Their hosts explained how the inhabitants of this land had all come from far away, and, after some of them had previously spent some time on Lahaikshe and taken quite a liking to it, hoped to be able to make their home here permanently, assuring their guests they meant no harm to them or anyone else. The pair was so impressed by their hosts’ hospitality and generosity that they invited some of the “colonists” to come back with them and spend some time in their home community of Timphon. It seemed only logical, and paralleled their own plans; since, if they intended to make this world their permanent home, getting to know the natives was essential, even though they were rather isolated geographically. In their native world, they felt compelled to stay hidden from the dominant race, humans, believing that, by and large, they wouldn’t be accepted as they are, despite their being equal in intelligence. The main problem was that humans are so much larger in size and had held sway over their world for many millennia, whereas these creatures had only been in existence in their present form for a few years, the product of human experimentation that had succeeded too well, and would therefore be considered unnatural and be subject to fear and suspicion. But on this world there would be no such preconceptions; and with the Rusay being equal in stature, it would be much easier to go out and meet them as equals. This had already been done, in fact, during those previous visits Johnathan and others had made to Lahaikshe, but it had been on a very limited basis. Since their arrival, the council had agreed that more extensive visits could and should be arranged, which were hoped to become true cultural exchanges.

This hope had since been borne out. The first two visitors were, of course, Pinphila and Dornphinsal, who returned to Timphon, bringing a Rat family with them. They returned to the colony with a report of a highly enlightening and informative visit, one which made it seem more certain than ever that these Rats and Mice would be welcome here. Subsequent exchanges quickly graduated from a few individuals staying a few days to the present one, with two entire families staying two to three weeks. Pinphila and Dornphinsal had, all the while, been serving as drivers/guides for these exchanges, shuttling Rusay and “colonists” alike back and forth; and would be doing the same with the latest party, which was set to leave shortly after this group’s arrival.

Following this explanation, Sithpha came up to Johnathan to talk privately. “Johnathan, there’s something I need to know right now. Was…all this created by the Stone, the Wall and everything surrounding your land, just like it did with…the prison Ghormfisk created?”

“Yes, it did. I hope that doesn’t upset you too much. I knew it might bring back some painful memories for you.” He fingered the pendant that lay against his breast, in which was set the object commonly referred to as simply “the Stone.”

“Well, it kind of did, a little. But I guess I’ve pretty much dealt with it already. In fact, I guessed on the way over here that’s probably how it was done. It’s good that you were able to use it for something that’ll benefit everyone.”

“As long as my wife and I are in charge of it, that’s the only way it’ll ever be used.”

“Great. How is she, anyway? Mrs. Brisby?”

“She’s fine. She’s really looking forward to seeing all of you again.” Johnathan made to add something else, but the conversation was interrupted by some of the children’s entreaties for a lift so they could see out the window. By now they were almost halfway up the ramp, and they paused on a level section, where Sithpha, Morobphra, and Justin obliged the childrens’ request, allowing them to see across the plain to the low hills on the horizon, a view which impressed them very much.

“When we get all the way inside,” said Johnathan, “You’ll be able to look from the top of the Wall, and it’s an even better view from up there.” They all resumed the climb.

Finally they could see the light at the end of the tunnel; not directly, but visible from where it made a left turn a few more feet ahead. All hastened their paces slightly, and Justin took the lead. “In our old world,” he explained, “we didn’t have a real name for our community; generally, we simply called it The Colony. But now that we’re here, and a true part of this world, and especially since we’re not hiding anymore, we thought it only fitting and proper that we give ourselves a more proper name. And so…”

He led everyone around the bend, where everyone could see the tunnel finally giving way to open space. They all gathered underneath the arch, viewing the scene before them—in the case of the newest guests, with wide-eyed disbelief at the vista.

“Friends…welcome to Freethorn.”

Chapter 2 - Coming to Freethorn

They all stood on a ledge from which a panoramic view of the entire colony could be seen. Freethorn was roughly circular, entirely enclosed by the rock wall which, from the outside, gave virtually no hint as to what lay within. On the west side lay a good-sized lake. On the east side, the rock wall was lined with windows and appeared different in color and texture from the rest of the Wall. There was much vegetation, which not only was strange in appearance to the visitors’ eyes, but seemed oddly proportioned as well, as if most of it were too large. On the south side, directly opposite them, another entrance arch like the one they stood under could be seen through the foliage. At ground level, about two feet below, a sizable crowd had gathered, others like Justin and Johnathan, many waving and calling out in greeting.

It was completely unlike anything the Rusay visitors had ever seen before, as if they had suddenly entered a completely different and alien world, and all were gaping, speechless. Of course this initial impression was quite accurate; and as with past exchange parties, Johnathan and Justin were reminded of their own reactions when each had his first look at Lahaikshe. They now led their guests down another short ramp to ground level, Pinphila and Dornphinsal still leading the haisk’ves.

As they made their way down the short incline, Sithpha again sidled up to Johnathan. “It really did all of this, didn’t it, Johnathan? The Stone! It brought all of you here, and all this land, too, and made the Wall!”

“That it did, Sithpha, and a lot more. You’ll all get the full lowdown later. Right now, let’s meet your new temporary neighbors.”

The size of today’s welcoming committee was a little larger than usual; knowing who would be in this latest group, many were curious to meet the Rusay family who had befriended and shared an adventure with the party that had traveled to Lahaikshe over two years ago to bring Johnathan home. Likewise, Sithpha and Dinilom quickly recognized some familiar faces.

“Hey, Sithpha!” called out one Rat, arms spread in greeting. “Remember me? Willis?”

“Sure do. How’ve you been, old buddy?” The two gave each other a big hug, and then Dinilom and their children greeted him likewise.

“And now…this gorgeous creature is my wife Sabrina.”

“Hello, Sithpha…Dinilom.” Sabrina clasped both their hands. “Willis has told us so much about you. Welcome to Freethorn.” More quietly, she added, “Willis wanted to call it ‘Son of Thorn Valley’.” She rolled her eyes, smiling, as Willis chortled to himself.

Sithpha looked puzzled and was about to say “I don’t get it,” but then both Rats introduced their children: Fergus, Rico, Marlene, and Tori. The last two were still just babies, three months old now; and though they and their brothers were by now accustomed to their Rusay visitors, they were all round-eyed with fascination for them, especially since there were children in this latest party.

“Oh, look, Sithpha!” called Dinilom, pointing. “Here’s Melvin and his family!”

“Great to see you again, Mel! How’re you doin’?” Sithpha and Dinilom greeted Melvin and Judith eagerly. Unlike the others in that first party that came to Lahaikshe over two years ago, this was actually the third time Melvin had met the Rusay family, since he, Judith and their six children—Spencer, Mia, Cecilia, Kyle, Ford and Hollis—formed the very first exchange party from Freethorn two months ago. While in Timphon, the Rat family had dropped in on their old acquaintances and invited and encouraged them to sign up for a future visit to their old-but-new home on Lahaikshe.

Morobphra and his family—wife Miatati, sons Iadorpha and Thamayle, daughters Tisphi and Duphinss—were also meeting their new neighbors. None could resist reaching out to touch each other, to compare skin texture, especially the children. Their differences in clothing were noted as well. The male Freethorners wore mostly long tunics or vests together with shirts, both long- and short-sleeved, and the females wore dresses of varying lengths, or skirt-and-blouse sets, or simple robes tied about the waist. The Rusay were firm believers in dressing for the weather, favoring clothing that left arms, legs and midriffs bare: the males in short trousers and vests tied at the bottom; the females in vests styled more like halters, and either short trousers or skirts; and all wearing footwear that looked like fairly simple sandals but were well-designed for extended walking. The Rusay in this part of Vitrono, the continent on which they lived, were widely noted for their expertise in making footwear that was both comfortable and functional.

Presently Justin’s wife Isabella and their children Ferdinand, Greta, and Mina joined the welcoming party, helping to introduce their guests to more of their temporary neighbors. Some of the Rat children were already making plans for activities they and their young guests could share later, some even now initiating them in games, which they took to with curiosity and eagerness. These feelings were fully shared by their parents; indeed, throughout these initial get-acquainted meetings, there was utterly no sense of reluctance among the Rusay visitors, once more affirming what the Freethorners had known for some time now: of the high degree with which the Rusay were unthreatened by and accepting of people unlike them in appearance, with next to no xenophobic tendencies.

They were now hearing how the newest residents of Freethorn, all Mice, were found and brought here by use of the amulet, and they were also meeting some of them: Patricia and Kimball Davis, some of their children and grandchildren, and others who were the children of the now-deceased Vincent. Among them was one family who had much in common with the Rusay visitors: Patricia and Kimball’s oldest son Norman, and his children Martha, Carla, Lisa, and Todd. They, along with a Rat family, were the ones who would be departing later today for the Rusay town from which the visitors came. The visitors were naturally curious about Kimball’s missing leg, and he was forthcoming about telling him that a dangerous animal was responsible, adding that creatures of that sort was part of why they were thankful to be living here on Lahaikshe now, where there were none such.

The two haisk’ves were quite aware that these were completely different surroundings, gazing upward quizzically at the tall grasses and weeds, smelling them and sampling a nibble here and there. They were still being attended by Pinphila and Dornphinsal, who had already unloaded the visitors’ baggage from the animals’ backs and would keep an eye on them until it was time to leave. These two had been employed on most of the previous trips and so were familiar with these alien surroundings, and likewise most Freethorners had been acquainted with them too. Those that hadn’t were encouraged to come forward and meet them, assured they were friendly and docile.

The Rusay were equally amazed at the differences with their native foliage. They’d already gotten the impression that everything was oversized, and Willis explained that this was very much the case, that on their native world, all plant and animal life was proportioned differently. Even the smaller plants here were analogous to the tsuraph, minphiss, and other plants that grew small and low to the ground on the “outside.” They were told more about the local plant life, in particular the ones grown and cultivated especially for food in Freethorn’s garden areas. Some of them yielded edible portions that the Rusay would find enormous, like corn, tomatoes and celery. They were also told of the measures necessary after their arrival here, to ensure they could continue to successfully grow food.

“…and then Gwinthrayle got that spell underway; and so now, nothing that grows here will grow in native Lahaikshe soil, and vice versa.”

“Uh-huh. Was it really that necessary, though, Johnathan?”

“Well, you see, Sithpha, sometimes on Earth humans would introduce plant and animal species to other parts of the world that they’re not native to, and sometimes they can really disrupt things, throw the whole local ecosystem for a loop, even overrun the place.”

“In the parts we came from,” added Willis, “there’s a vine like that, called kudzu. We never got it in Thorn Valley, but…”

Willis was interrupted by the appearance of several other Mice, approaching them from further up the nearby trail and calling out greetings. Sithpha’s expression brightened at the sight of the one at the head of the group.

“To those of you who haven’t met her,” said Johnathan, “I’d like you all to meet my lovely wife Madeline. Maddie, I know you remember Sithpha and Dinilom and their kids…”

Madeline Brisby, wearing her favorite pale green dress, smiled radiantly, arms spread wide in greeting. “Oh, I certainly do. It’s wonderful seeing all of you again.”

Sithpha was already on his knees, ready to give her a big hug. “Mrs. Brisby—I mean Madeline. I sure can’t forget how kind you were to me, when…all that rough stuff happened,” he said as they embraced.

“It was an awful experience for us all, but so much good came out of it.” They smiled with great affection at each other as they came out of their embrace. Madeline greeted Dinilom and their children with equal affection, surprised and pleased to find that there was a new addition to the family.

Both Rusay families and the others in the Mouse group were introduced to each other. In the latter were the Brisby children: the four older ones, Martin, Teresa, Cynthia, and Timothy, and their younger siblings Shawna, Lyndon, Vanessa, and Kirk; Teresa’s young sons Tyler and Eric Jr.; their family friend Sarah; and three more of Patricia and Kimball’s children: Karen, who was married to Martin, Michael, and Lucy.

Shortly they prepared to show the visitors to the guest quarters, so several in the ever-growing welcoming party picked up the two families’ bags. As they set off, Pinphila and Dornphinsal stayed to keep an eye on the haisk’ves until it was time for the returning exchange party to leave.

As she walked alongside Sithpha and Dinilom, Madeline said, “So Gwinthri was born after we saw you last.” She looked up at the little Rusay girl riding on her father’s shoulders and sucking her thumb, surveying her surroundings. Her eyes met those of Mina, riding on her father Justin’s shoulders, and the two waved and smiled at each other, giggling.

“That’s right,” said Dinilom. “I guess you could call her our little love child.”

“Well, all of them were, really,” said Sithpha, looking over to Eephray, Tuintwom and Bointha, smiling. “But you know how it is.” Madeline thought he sounded almost embarrassed. “We were so happy to be home and safe again after everything that happened, and, well…”

“Oh, yes, we do know. That’s how it was with Johnathan and me, when we were back together. And a few weeks later, along came Shawna and Lyndon, and later Vanessa and Kirk. Ah…her name’s a lot like Gwinthrayle…”

“We were going to name her after him, if she’d been a boy, but since she’s a girl, we called her Gwinthri. After all he did for us, we had to honor him in some way that was lasting and would always remind us of him, after all that business with Ghormfisk.”

“Ah, yes, Ghormfisk…” said Justin. “Some of us were still a little bitter about him and what he’d done to us.” He glanced over to Melvin, who only nodded in agreement.

“I can’t blame you guys, Justin. But we’d seen the other side of him, Dini and the kids and me, while he was staying with us. We still think about those times, and you might think it sounds funny, but that’s what we concentrate on if we think about him at all. We were actually glad to learn that it really wasn’t his fault.”

They all knew the story well, how Ghormfisk had been the last hope for the remnants of his people, the Sut’hrim, on their dying extradimensional world, Ihrvass; but the sorcerous powers he employed to bring them all to a new one where they could thrive—which happened to be Lahaikshe—had gone awry, sending them all to what he’d believed to be their deaths. The resulting psychological trauma caused him to develop a second personality, Uhrstegg, one dedicated to making mischief and creating chaos. He migrated to Lahaikshe and deceived his way into taking control of the Stone, the red amulet, an object of great power, by impersonating the Rusay sorcerer Gwinthrayle and purloining it from his fellow sorcerer Birantha. This led to his coming to Earth and becoming involved with Johnathan Brisby and the Rats of NIMH. His ambitions shifted and his mind alternated between the two personas during this period, but his stay there ended with his return to Lahaikshe, sent there by the Stone. With him went Johnathan, for reasons still unclear to him and his family, leaving everyone to believe him dead. While on Lahaikshe, Johnathan was taken in by Gwinthrayle as a houseguest. Ghormfisk’s personas continued to switch back and forth, and during an extended period when the more docile one was in control Sithpha’s family took him in as their own guest. When the search party led by Madeline made the extradimensional jump to seek out Johnathan, Uhrstegg took charge and ensorcelled Sithpha into leading the party to him, whereupon he retook the Stone and used its rock-shaping capability to entrap the search party. They were rescued by Gwinthrayle, Johnathan was happily reunited with his wife and friends, and Uhrstegg was confronted and the Stone retaken. Gwinthrayle was able to heal Ghormfisk’s mind of its dual personalities, and after he told his story some important truths were revealed: the soul-self of the Stone’s creator, Pharsal, had been residing within the Stone, directing some of its actions from within; and Ghormfisk’s people were alive and well after having been redirected—exactly how remaining a mystery—to another extradimensional world, where they had since thrived. Though still troubled by the memories of his actions, Ghormfisk had little other choice but to rejoin his people, so Johnathan sent him to “New Ihrvass” via the Stone, and he and his wife and friends were free to return home.

“We’ve always wondered how he’s done since then,” said Dinilom. “Have you found out anything, Johnathan?”

“I’m glad you asked. We’ve used the Stone to look in on him from time to time, and he appears to be doing quite well. He’s married now with a family, and appears to have given up using magic, just as he said he would.”

“That’s great, Johnathan,” said Sithpha. Their children were pleased to hear it as well, since they’d all seen Ghormfisk’s gentler side, having remembered him best this way. “But have you actually visited him there?”

“We’d considered it, off and on, but we’ve always concluded that it’d be better to just leave him be.”

“Yes,” agreed Madeline. “He’s happy where he is now, and we think seeing us again might be troubling for him, and that he’d rather leave the past behind completely.”

“You’re probably right,” agreed Sithpha. “And we don’t know how his people would react to others not like them. ’Course, there’d be only one way to find out.”

Johnathan chuckled. “That’s true. You know, Sithpha…there’s something I was going to mention before: you seem…well, a bit more worldly now. Less of a…well…”

Sithpha laughed. “Less of a country bumpkin, eh? Well, you’re right. After all I learned from you, your coming from another world, and Ghormfisk too, I realized I wasn’t content to just be concerned with my own small corner of the world, and how little I knew of the rest of the world; and that’s just this world, too, never mind all those others that are out there. So I set out to learn all I could; both of us did, really, learning alongside our kids. We read every book we could lay our hands on, and did a lot more traveling, too, as much as we were able.”

“That’s great, Sithpha. It’s always important to never stop learning.”

“That’s something we all know well,” added Justin, “considering that we’ve only been around, in our present form, for a few years.”

“That still seems so strange, all that you’ve told us about that,” observed Sithpha. “But we’ve all seen for ourselves what you’re like, the kind of people you are, so that’s good enough for us.” Dinilom and their older children voiced their agreement.

“We heard plenty about you before we signed on,” added Morobphra. “And we knew Sithpha and Dinilom had a lot of experience with you all already. If they vouch for you, that’s just as good for us too.”

“Thanks, all of you,” said Justin. “We really appreciate that. But we definitely aren’t like most rats and mice on Earth. In fact, none of them are like us now, because we’ve managed to gather together here all those that are. And since then, we’ve continued to learn and grow, in a lot of ways.”

“You can say that again, Justin,” said Karen with a laugh, patting her abdomen, swelled beneath her maternity top.

“She’s due to deliver any day now,” added Madeline. “That’s what Mr. Ages said, didn’t he, Karen?”

“That’s right.” Karen looked over fondly to Martin, who rubbed noses with her.

“We didn’t know you were having a baby, dear,” said Dinilom. “I guess we still need to recognize that in your people.”

“That’s okay. And actually, I’m probably carrying two.”

“Twins! Really?”

“Uh-huh. That’s the way it is with us.”

“Twins are actually the norm around here,” explained Johnathan. “Maddie and I have had four sets of them, believe it or not.”

By now the group was passing by the Mouse community, and Johnathan explained how the amulet was used for most of the digging and reshaping here, as well, adding that they’d come to the guest quarters soon, and that the amulet was used there, too. They continued their explanation of their birthrates, how all of the Original 22—the group that escaped NIMH long ago—quickly found twins to be the norm when they began having children, though there was the occasional single birth and a few sets of triplets, as well. Justin and Isabella, for example, had one set of twins and a single—so far.

“Well, here it is,” announced Justin after he handed Mina over to Isabella, “your home-away-from-home for the next two weeks. It’s gotten rave reviews from our previous guests, so we’re sure you’ll be pleased with it too.” At first glance, the guest quarters appeared to be a free-standing structure alongside the rock wall, but upon closer examination it could be seen to have been “grown” from the rock, as Johnathan mentioned. The walls were of solid stone, two stories high with a flat roof, and even had thick plate-glass windows. “We made it like this because we thought you’d feel more at home in a house out in the open than in guest quarters within our colonies, which are almost completely underground.”

He and Johnathan led the Rusay families inside, showing how there were two separate apartments, one for each family, upstairs and down. “Take all the time you need in getting settled,” said Johnathan, “and as soon as you’re ready, we’ll give you the full guided tour.”

After the two families made their choices—Sithpha’s family upstairs, Morobphra’s down—they began unpacking. As they did, Sithpha took Johnathan and Madeline aside, admitting that he’d felt a bit hesitant about staying here, knowing of the Stone’s use in its creation, but feeling certain it wouldn’t trouble him now. Madeline told him of similar misgivings she’d had over the idea of their home here being created the same way—which in the end it wasn’t—and how she’d rationalized the same way, that this capability of the Stone was being used in positive ways.

With everyone moved in, all agreed to get the tour underway, since none felt especially tired from that morning’s short stretch of travel, and all were eager to see more. It began with the Rats’ community, where the visitors were shown living quarters, manufacturing and food storage areas, spaces for dining and recreation, the amphitheater-shaped main assembly hall which doubled as the usual chamber for council meetings, and more. Throughout the tour, the Rusay visitors met more of the Rats, though of course they wouldn’t be able to put everyone’s names to faces right away. They were amazed at the architecture of the place, with its confusing-seeming maze of corridors, and at the fact that such an elaborate community had been set up underground. Justin explained how it was all related to the fact that natural rats and mice live either underground or otherwise hidden from sight, and that this tendency simply carried over from that. Although, he pointed out further, that since they’d lived in Thorn Valley, and even more so since moving to Lahaikshe, their lifestyles had changed considerably, marked by much more time spent above ground in broad daylight.

This part of the tour concluded with everyone being treated to lunch at the dining hall, where the Rusay visitors had their first experience with Earth food.

Chapter 3 - Unexpected meetings

After lunch, the tour resumed with the visitors being shown all around the exterior, including the garden areas, Lake Nicodemus, Oak Park and other areas set aside for recreation, the ground-level observation posts that they’d seen from the outside, and the Mouse community. Shortly afterward, it was time for the exchange party from Freethorn to leave, and their just-arrived Rusay counterparts were among the group gathered at the north entrance to see them off. Pinphila and Dornphinsal had finished loading the party’s baggage on the haisk’ves’ backs and now were bidding them farewell, reminding them that they would return in around fifteen days; then they led the haisk’ves down the ramp to ready them and the carriages for the return trip. There were many goodbyes for Norman Davis and his family, and for the Rat family—Jordan (Isabella’s twin brother), Portia and their children Lena, Alison, Doris, and Conrad. Among the well-wishers was one who took Norman aside to say goodbye in private, out of sight of the others behind a nearby tree.

“Teresa,” said Norman as they sat on a round stone together, “you’ve really done a lot for us; getting us prepared for this trip and everything, the bits of advice. It’s really going to help us a lot.”

“It was my pleasure, Norman, thank you. That’s nice of you to say. I’m…really going to miss you.”

“I’ll miss you, too. You know, I…really don’t quite know how to say this, but…well, since Vera died, I’ve wondered if would ever feel as strongly for anyone again, and…since I met you, I’ve really begun to think that…”

“Daddy!” called out Carla from the opposite side of the tree. “You almost done? We’re all ready to roll out here!”

Norman laughed. “Maybe this wasn’t such a good time after all.”

“We’ll definitely talk later, after you all get back, won’t we?”

“Count on it. Now, you take good care of those two little ankle-nippers of yours, won’t you?”

Teresa laughed. “Always. And all of you have a good time out there, but be careful, too.” They gave each other a goodbye hug and returned to where the rest of the party waited.

All of the Davis clan was now present. “’Bout time, big bro,” said Bertie with a grin and a wink.

“Down, boy,” said Lucy.

“Be sure to take plenty of notes,” said Jessica, Norman’s twin sister. “We wouldn’t want you to miss any details.”

Norman rolled his eyes. “Yes, Mother.”

“Even if you don’t see anything as exotic as the place where Martin and I had our little honeymoon retreat,” said Karen. “They say Timphon’s a pretty ordinary place, as Lahaikshean towns go.”

“Well, it’ll all be new to us, so…”

“Hey, look who decided to join us,” said Bertie. Everyone turned to see three more mice approach: Boris, one of Vincent’s children, and his wife Seelah had been expected to show up, but the presence of the one accompanying them prompted a few raised eyebrows. It was Boris’s half-sister Lilia, shading her eyes and squinting against the bright light, but looking pleased at seeing everyone.

“Without her shadow, no less,” added Bertie under his breath.

Ellis nudged him in the ribs. “Let’s not make a big scene about her being here.” He and most of the others, though, wondered what measures had to be taken to get her away from Reuben for a while, knowing well how protective her twin brother was of her, in spite of how unnecessary it was here.

“I agree,” said Timothy quietly. “I’ll bet this is a sign that things are improving for them.”

Boris and Seelah greeted the departing group effusively, wishing them a fun-filled and educational trip; and Lilia, predictably, said little, but didn’t seem reluctant or to have been coerced into coming. Rather, she looked as cheerful as she did upon her and Reuben’s arrival in Freethorn, smiling and waving to everyone. And again, as on that day, she seemed especially pleased to see Ellis, seemingly reserving her most audible greeting for him, which he returned, adding that it was nice to see her. She again replied only with a smile, and continued to glance his way over the next few minutes as farewells and well-wishings continued. No doubt, something was mutual here, thought Ellis; but what? He couldn’t drive the matter away, as he watched her meet the Rusay visitors. There was mutual fascination there, too, since her snow-white coat was unique among the citizens of Freethorn. Ellis wondered if now would be a good time to simply ask her to spend some private time, once they’d seen off the exchange party.

The Rusay visitors gave the departing group some more bits of advice; and soon, the two families were on their way down the ramp to the awaiting carriages. Most of the group, including the Rusay, went to the nearest observation post, or else opted to climb to the Rooftop—actually the top ridge of the New Wall—to watch the carriages’ departure across the plain. Sithpha began taking notes with the pen and pad he’d brought, saying that he would try to record his impressions of their stay as much as he could. Thinking she should avoid direct sunlight, Lilia opted to watch the departure from the observation post with her friends, which she did quietly but eagerly.

Many watched until the carriages were mostly out of sight, though most had other duties to return to before then. When they were finished watching, Lilia said quietly to Boris and Seelah as they were leaving the observation post, “I wish…I could go out there too, sometime.” She sighed.

“Well, there’s no good reason why not,” said Boris, noting the tone of resignation in her voice. “Johnathan says we should all get a turn eventually.”

“Oh, I don’t know if that’ll…ever happen…”

“Why not?” asked Seelah. “You shouldn’t have to worry about—”

“Lilia! There you are!” Approaching them was Reuben, to little surprise from anyone present. “You shouldn’t be out here like this, in all this sunlight! You know it’s not good for you!”

“She hasn’t been out here that long, Reuben,” said Boris. “She’s all right.”

“How do you know that? I know what’s good for her better than anyone!”

“Reuben,” Boris said patiently, “we’re not your enemies. I’m your brother, in fact, and hers, in case you’d forgotten. All right, half-brother, but as far as I’m concerned, it’s all the same. We’re all family, and we all want what’s best for each other.”

“That’s right,” added Lucy. “Stop being such an old stick in the mud.”

“We know you care about her very much, Reuben,” said Timothy. “But like Boris said, we all want what’s best for both of you.”

“Please,” said Lilia, “don’t…don’t make a fuss over me. I really shouldn’t be out so long.” She came up to Reuben, who took her arm and started to lead her away.

“Well,” said Boris with a baffled shrug, “if that’s what you really want…”

“Now wait a minute!” Lucy stepped up to Reuben and Lilia. “Lilia, this is nuts! This is the first time since you two have been here that we’ve been able to get together for more than a few minutes, and you’re cutting it short now?”

“Take it easy, Lucy,” said Timothy, hand on her shoulder. “It’ll be okay.”

“Lucy, please,” said Lilia, “it…it’s all right. I’m glad I was able to see this much. We…we’ll get together again soon.” She waved goodbye to everyone, Reuben’s expression remaining stern and impassive as they turned to head back to the Mouse community. Lilia glanced back and smiled at Ellis one more time, leaving behind a mixture of disappointment, bafflement, and disbelief.

“How long has it been now…five weeks, six, that they’ve been here?” Lucy shook her head as the group headed down the trail.

“You would think they’d have loosened up more by now, especially Reuben,” agreed Dana, a rat friend.

“But it’s hardly any different than when they first got here,” said Bertie.

“Not quite,” said Boris. “We did get Lilia out here for a while, and she came willingly. She actually seemed eager to get away for a while.”

“Hmph. I think we should’ve sat on Reuben to keep him from dragging her back so soon.”

“Oh, come on, Bertie.” Lucy rolled her eyes. “In case you didn’t notice, she did go back with him willingly. And she said herself she’d probably spent enough time in the daylight.”

“That’s right,” agreed Boris. “She would know best, wouldn’t she?”

“I’ll admit,” said Timothy, “that I was hoping this meant Reuben had willingly let her go with you, but even so, it’s still a good sign. Maybe this’ll help to give her the will to assert herself more in the future; hopefully the very near.” The others nodded or voiced their agreements; Timothy had become, for this circle of friends, something of an “elder statesman,” owing partially to his well-known intuitive ability: to sense a positive outcome in a crisis situation. Lucy even teased him about this sometimes, calling him her “old wise one” and such; but this was one situation she took every bit as seriously.

Bertie grunted. “I still say it’s not fair. That’s no way for her to live, always jumping when Rube-boy says jump.”

“It may not be fair, Bertie,” said Boris, “but he was right about one thing: he knows her better than any of us. They’ve been together their whole lives. A few weeks are nothing, compared to that.”

“Still sounds like a crock to me, if you—”

“What’s all the hubbub?” Everyone turned to see a group coming down from the Rooftop, led by Johnathan, who had spoken, followed by Madeline, Cynthia, Michael, and some of the younger mouse children. Boris explained how, after afternoon classes were dismissed early so that anyone who wished to could welcome the arriving and see off the departing exchange parties, Reuben and Lilia had gone straight home instead, to little surprise. Boris and Seelah had decided to visit them to try to convince them to join them out here, but Reuben had just stepped out on an errand; and so, after some deliberation, they had cajoled Lilia into joining them by herself. The others joined in describing how Reuben had come and left with her, and their uncertainty in knowing how to deal with the situation. Cynthia was disappointed at having missed her.

Only Ellis was silent, the memory of Lilia’s (seemingly) special attentiveness toward him still fresh in his mind. He’d been thinking about her more and more in recent days, and accordingly his patience was wearing thin. How much longer would he have to wait for Reuben to “loosen up,” since he seemed to be so firmly in charge of his sister? Would she assert herself and tell him that she was going to live her own life and not always defer to him? Was either of them even capable of changing? The latter question was the most pessimistic view, no doubt; and he was starting to consider it a definite possibility, in spite of his wholehearted support of Timothy’s assertions that it would all work out eventually.

“Well,” said Johnathan, “remember what you’ve all been told about free choice.”

“Of course, Johnathan,” said Lucy. “‘As long as no one is hurt, and the community as a whole isn’t jeopardized’…”

“Sure,” allowed Bertie, “but after all this time, why does Reuben still have to constantly hang over Lilia like that? She doesn’t deserve it.”

“I’m with Bertie, for once,” Ellis finally said. “She doesn’t seem to have a whole lot of free choice herself.”

“Can we really say whether that’s true or not, though?” asked Johnathan. “It may not be our place to judge the way they live their lives. I agree it’s odd that they haven’t changed their ways much since coming here, but give them time. Maybe they just need more than the rest of us to adjust.”

“Tim’s been telling us the same, and I agree,” said Boris. “Lilia was quite happy about being able to come out for a while, to mingle and enjoy the view. She’s definitely starting to come out of her shell.”

“I know she wants to,” said Cynthia. “I could see that back when I first met her and Reuben. I think the more we keep encouraging her, the better.”

“What about Reuben, though?” asked Ellis. “He’s still the ‘constant chaperone.’ He hasn’t changed at all.”

As the discussion continued, it was Bertie who was silent this time, uncharacteristically for him. Some of Johnathan’s words had struck a responsive chord within him, reminding him of another matter near to his heart. He now excused himself, leaving quickly.

“Funny that he’d take off so quickly,” said Lucy. “He sure had some loud opinions about all this.”

“He must be late for an important appointment,” said Timothy. Or perhaps a date?

“I’ll bet I know what he has in mind,” said Cynthia lightly, “or rather who.”

Lucy nodded. “Oh, yeah…boy, that still seems pretty strange, those two getting together like that.”

“Maybe, but…as long as no one is hurt, right, Daddy?”

“That’s true,” said Johnathan. “And overlooking the obvious, it’s no different than the rest of us.” Cynthia nodded, smiling at Michael.

Alongside the lake, a young rat walked through a thick grassy grove, negotiating her way carefully, knowing the ground would drop off suddenly. She didn’t want to go for a sudden, unexpected dip in Lake Nicodemus, like the first time she stumbled across this spot. Though she knew it couldn’t possibly be a “secret” place, she still liked to think of it that way.

Soon, she came up to the edge, where she looked down to the small patch of bare ground below. She gave a quiet whistle, waited for a reply; and, confident that she wouldn’t be landing on anyone’s head, jumped down. She looked around. This patch of ground lay within a tiny inlet of the lake with overhanging sod above. Not only was it hidden from sight on this side of the lake, but it was largely hidden from the opposite side as well.

She sat down, sighed, and waited, thinking about how the day had gone so far; then, after about five minutes, she heard rustling in the grass above. She stood up and looked, craning her neck to see who it was, though she couldn’t see too far onto the bank without stepping out into the water, where she would be sinking a bit. Soon she could make out the top of the figure’s head. “Come on down, I know it’s you. I’d know that forehead anywhere.”

“Oh, thanks a lot, Sherlock. You take the fun out of everything.”

She laughed. “You know you can’t sneak up on me that easily. And what do you mean, ‘everything’?”

“Ahem, well…”

“That’s what I thought you meant. Now, will you come down here already?”

“Only if you promise to catch me.”

“Oh, all right.” She took a couple steps backward into the nearby shallow. “Go ahead.”

The smaller figure stepped off the edge of the sod bank right into the rat’s arms. She promptly lost balance and tumbled backwards into the lake.

They crawled back on shore on all fours, soaking wet, laughing. “Well, that was perfect. Sort of brings back memories, doesn’t it?”

Tara shook herself. “Oh, Bertie, just come over here, will you?” The two sat down together, Bertie on Tara’s lap, his head against her chest, her arms around him.

After sitting silently thus for a minute, Bertie looked up and said, “You’re beautiful when you’re wet.” He nuzzled against her torso.

“And you’re just stinky.” Tara nuzzled his ear. “So how was your day? Did you go to see your brother and his kids off?”

“Yeah. Hope they have fun out there.” After a pause he added, “You won’t believe who showed up. You know Lilia, the white mouse? Boris and Seelah got her away from Reuben for a while, but after Norm and the others left, Reuben showed up and took her away with him. Can you beat that?”

“What did she have to say about it?”

“That’s the weird thing. She didn’t seem to mind at all, she just went along with him, all smiles. Heh…I think she’s sweet on Ellis, though. No accounting for taste, I guess.”

“Speak for yourself, shorty.” Tara laughed and gave him a squeeze.

“So how’d swim class go?”

“Great. We just graduated Susanna, my niece. You should see her, she’s just like a fish. She swims so far out now, and all the way to the bottom of the cove too. You’d swear she’s grown gills, she’s so much at home in the water. Right now, Regina Ages is the ‘senior’ swimmer. She’s almost ready to graduate herself. We had a couple new students just starting today too.”

“Mm-hm. Are you going to bring in some of the Rusay kids too?” Some of the earlier exchange parties included children that hadn’t learned to swim yet, and they were allowed to participate in swim class as well.

“Maybe. That’s always kind of a challenge, because they have different bodies than ours, more like humans, so they use different techniques of moving about in the water.”

“Mm-hm.” Bertie’s tone was at once thoughtful and playful. “Speaking of ‘different bodies’…” Bertie nuzzled Tara’s neck, caressing her chest and belly and making “hungry” noises.

“You little maniac.” Tara laughed, responding in kind to his ministrations, bringing her face down to his so they could kiss.

After a few minutes, Bertie said, “You know…I still feel like we’re trying to hide…almost.”

“Why? Just because we want a little privacy, to be alone for a while?”

“It’s not that. I mean, we did stop trying to hide, and we’ve let everyone see us together, but, well…I don’t think anyone really believes that we’re…well, this close. They think we’re just good friends.”

“That’s probably true, in spite of our telling anyone who asked that we are in love. We haven’t exactly gone out and announced it. Then again, would we need to? We love each other, Bertie. Let’s just let that be.”

“That sounds good, but…would everybody else let it be?”

Tara sighed. “I know what you mean. Everybody’s pretty accepting about a lot of things around here, but…I can’t help wondering if there’d be some, at least, who wouldn’t want us to be together.”

Both continued to hold each other, and to think back to that day, nearly a month before. Bertie had just had an argument with Ellis and Lucy, the latest in a long series. How it started he barely remembered now, but he’d stormed off to be alone, and eventually made his way to the lake—though not this “private” place—and sat down along the shore, not far from the swimming cove. After about twenty minutes, Tara came by, on her way home after class was dismissed for the day. She saw him sitting and sulking, and just to be polite asked what was wrong, calling him by name, which was as far as she knew him. You wouldn’t understand, he replied. Her reply Bertie initially thought sounded patronizing, and so he dismissed her. As she was leaving he reached out with his foot, tripping her as she walked in front of him—again, for reasons he couldn’t explain well or scarcely even believe now. She reacted just in time to prevent herself from possibly injuring Bertie’s foot, but since she was right on the edge of the bank, it was enough to throw her off-balance and send her into the water. She emerged sputtering and fuming, demanding why he’d do such a thing, since she’d never meant him any harm. He replied that since she’d spent all day in the water, a little more shouldn’t hurt her any. She just gave an indignant grumble and stalked off, leaving Bertie to think that it served her right, since she shouldn’t have been poking her nose where she had no business.

After a few minutes, though, after trying in vain to work out his earlier problems, he found himself feeling bad about the way he treated her, realizing that she’d only wanted to help. He resolved to do the mature thing and try to put things right with her. He also felt inclined to make up with his siblings, and so spent the rest of the day with his family.

The next day, though, he met Tara at the same time and place, telling her, not without a little nervousness, that he was sorry for dunking her, and she was surprisingly agreeable to his apology. They took a walk, and ended up spending the next few hours together, talking about many things, and finding out how much in common they had. For instance, she too would sometimes get impatient with others. Bertie asked if this was a good way to be for someone who works with children. Point well taken, Tara agreed; but she added that with children, she has no problem, because their minds and personalities are still growing, and so they’re expected to not understand everything right away. With adults, she figured, she shouldn’t have to take as much time in getting a point across, especially one she believed to be obvious. She admitted that this is an unpleasant trait, and one which has made her feel isolated and alienated from friends and family at times. Bertie admitted to being much the same way, and feeling the same sense of isolation sometimes, and wishing he could control it better. They both felt a degree of relief at being able to confess to each other like this, and pleasant surprise over how comfortable they were in each other’s presence.

They resolved to keep on seeing each other, and over the next few days, they spent as much time as they could together. Bertie would sit in on swim class, and watch Tara at work, admiring her more and more. It gradually dawned on both of them that there was a connection stronger than mere friendship here; and, some two weeks after their first meeting, admitted that it was true love. The absurdity of it was hardly lost on them, but neither cared. After all, they rationalized, the Rats and Mice of this colony were intellectual and emotional peers, with no real differences in their thought processes. Why, then, should their love be wrong? They realized, of course, that there would surely be some who would object, for no other reason than species difference. This was why they hadn’t been especially vocal about it to everyone since then, though they appeared together in public often and did admit it to anyone who asked outright. Everyone in Bertie’s family knew, and seemed to approve and wish them well. Tara’s older siblings admitted how strange it seemed to them, but thought much the same as her; that if it was genuine, then why shouldn’t it be? Her parents Derek and Claire felt much the same way as well, but expressed doubts out loud whether it could truly last, especially considering they couldn’t conceive children. Perhaps not, the young lovers admitted; but for now, they’d do all they could to make it last, just as anyone in love would do. There seemed to be a largely favorable reaction throughout Freethorn; yet, in spite of this amount of approval, they’d often sensed an undercurrent of objection, taking the form of whisperings as they passed by, or forced nonchalance. At least, this was how it looked to them.

Now, the two of them discussed what they should do about this, if it was as serious a matter as they thought. Soon, they agreed that they would make their love as obvious as anyone else would, and let the chips fall where they may.

“Well, this sounds like a good plan, all right,” said Tara. “But…I don’t know, there’s something about it that still bothers me…”

“Nothing to worry about,” said Bertie, standing up. “Darn it, Tara, we love each other, and I don’t care who knows it. If anyone gives us any grief about it, we’ll deal with it.”

“You’re right.” Tara smiled as she got up. “How bad can things get, anyway?”

“That’s the spirit.” They joined hands and began making their way up the bank. “Come on, let’s make ourselves obvious.”

“Our first day in Freethorn is at an end, and it’s been every bit the learning experience we expected it to be. Those feelings of uneasiness I had before we arrived are totally gone, and I can concentrate fully on absorbing all I see and hear around me. And is there ever a lot to absorb! All the strange vegetation, these people’s way of life, the fact that it was all brought here from another world, another dimension. Probably the wildest of all, though, was the story of not only how they came to be here, but of how they came to be. We learned much of the story two years ago, when we were all guests at Gwinthrayle’s house.

“As I’m writing now, we have just returned from the home of Justin, his wife Isabella, and their children. There, they, Johnathan, and some of the other Rats and Mice gave us the story in even greater detail, beginning with the time they spent in that laboratory, kept prisoner by those scientists who performed experiments on them that gave them intelligence and lifespans far beyond what they had before. They were able to escape, educate themselves and found their first colony. Their old leader Nicodemus had gained unusual abilities like being able to move objects with his mind, and may have had magical abilities as well; they said he had never given his fellows a straight answer on that. We already knew well the story of how Johnathan found the red amulet (which they usually call simply the Stone), which played such a large part in later events, especially what he calls his “exile” period, when he was stranded here on Lahaikshe for several months while his family and friends believed him dead. Madeline and Justin told us more of the time she came to the Rats for help, not knowing of Johnathan’s connection to them, and in the process saved them all and found her own ability to command the Stone; the Rats’ move to a new home where they would be undisturbed for two and a half of their years; how Madeline discovered Johnathan’s true fate and how to follow him to Lahaikshe.

“I remember well what happened afterwards, since I was involved directly: she, Justin, Melvin, Willis and I were trapped by Ghormfisk, another traveler from another dimension that Dinilom and I took into our home just because he seemed lost and needed a friend, but then his personality changed and he forced me to act against these strangers so that he could take over the Stone’s power. This all ended well, with the arrival of Johnathan and the sorceror Gwinthrayle (who we named our youngest daughter, Gwinthri, after). We found out why Ghormfisk behaved the way he did, and soon everyone was back where they belonged, and the Stone was back in Johnathan and Madeline’s hands, apparently for good.

“Though we knew some of the preceding story from that time, we only learned today all that’s happened since. The Brisbys made their own home in Thorn Valley alongside their good friends the Rats. They continued to prosper there, and things went well for them until just a few months ago, when they learned that humans threatened them again. They learned it from one of their own: Kimball Davis, a mouse they had thought long gone. Ultimately, the whole affair turned out to be a blessing in disguise. Johnathan’s son Martin and a friend had left Thorn Valley for a while on a trek to see the place where their people had become what they are. He brought the Stone with him, to prevent his parents from finding out where they were really going. As it turned out, they really could have used it after Kimball found their colony, almost dying to get there, and warned them of the danger they were in. Martin discovered the danger for himself, and hurried back to the colony, with Kimball’s wife Patricia and daughter Karen, whom he’d met on the trip. They returned safely and just in time to allow Johnathan to use the Stone to bring the entire colony here, to Lahaikshe, the first time it had been used for such a huge task. It was then used to track down the rest of Kimball and Patricia’s children, and their mates and children; and the children of Vincent, another old comrade who, unfortunately, was himself found to have died only recently. The colony, which they’ve renamed Freethorn, has since continued to prosper in its new location, becoming more and more a part of this world, and, they say, less and less connected to the old one.

“These cultural exchanges are a big part of it all, and though our differences are many, we’ve all been finding much to like in these Rats and Mice from Earth. This isn’t just my opinion: we’ve all agreed that there are far more similarities than differences. We have found some, though, that we don’t find shocking but still might take some getting accustomed to. For example, there is less reserve in displaying affection openly in public. It’s a difference most of us really hadn’t thought about much or at all before coming here. From what we’ve seen so far, it seems more common among the Mice than the Rats. Speaking for myself, I hadn’t thought about it being a matter of being more or less modest; I guess it was just accepted in our society that we’re a bit more private about such things, with not much else to compare it to.

“It really first came to the attention of Dini and myself earlier this evening. We were taking a stroll along a trail further away from the Rat and Mouse communities, one that we’d been told was being called “Lovers’ Lane” these days. We saw two of the mice—Cynthia, the second Brisby daughter, and Michael, one of the Davis sons—sitting on a rock, locked in a loving embrace, carrying on as if no one else were around. They were kissing, caressing and nuzzling each other without a care in the world. We almost said something out loud to them, but instead we chose a spot to sit—another rock a little further away—and observe from a distance. We told each other that it was to see how others reacted to this, but I think we were both embarrassed to admit how fascinated we were by the sight. We didn’t want to be voyeurs about it, but, I think we both told ourselves, we couldn’t completely turn away either. When we discussed it later, we justified ourselves by saying that they weren’t exactly trying to hide anything; and, after all, this is why we’re here, to learn about these people and their ways and customs.

"At any rate, those that passed by took it pretty casually. Some hardly seemed to notice at all. Others would just smile, and a couple of times some younger ones would nudge each other and then whisper and giggle. These two seemed completely oblivious to it all. Finally, after a while, they suddenly got up, and without saying another word to each other, took each other’s hand and ran off quickly. We didn’t have to wonder why for very long; obviously they needed to get to someplace more private quickly. We realized that they weren’t completely without modesty, or what we consider modesty.

“This was surprising enough, but after we’d gone a bit further down the same trail, here was a really unexpected sight: another pair of young lovers, again in plain view of everyone, but with a major difference. One was a Rat, whom we’d met earlier: Tara, one of the swimming instructors. The other was a Mouse: Bertram, or Bertie, one of Michael’s brothers. Again we stopped to observe passersby; Dini felt that maybe we shouldn’t, saying it didn’t feel right; but I reminded her that we were here to observe the customs and everyday lives of these people. We both wondered if this were commonplace here; I thought it probably wasn’t, since there weren’t many mice here until recently. But we both agreed that it might be more interesting to observe the reactions these two would get.

“That quickly proved true. Only a few took it casually; everyone else showed some surprise, either doing a double-take and moving on, or stopping for a moment to stare; one female Rat even stopped, looking as if she were going into shock and would start shouting out loud at them any second, before leaving in a huff, shaking her head. Obviously this sort of thing doesn’t happen every day. For our part, there was no sense that these two were doing anything wrong; how could there be? Yet, we couldn’t help but wonder if more of their fellows might react more strongly. I’d rather hope not; maybe that one woman’s reaction was in the minority, but could others feel the same, but be keeping it to themselves? I’d hate to think of an incident like this leading to some kind of trouble. I guess time will tell.”

Sithpha paused from his writing, took a deep breath, yawned, got up from the desk and walked to the open window. He gazed out at the half-moon, shining beautifully, as if needing to be reminded that he was still on Lahaikshe. Then again, there is a moon much like this where the Freethorners come from, he remembered them saying; so this one probably reminds them of their old home as well.

Might as well call it a night, he thought; though he was finding it difficult to stop writing when there was so much more he wanted to express. He’d have to force himself; but after tiptoeing into the next room and seeing Dinilom already asleep, he knew it wouldn’t be too hard. Just the sight of her reminded him to take things more slowly and not overwork himself; they were, after all, here to enjoy themselves as well as learn. He removed his clothing and slipped quietly into bed beside her. There’ll be plenty of time to get everything down, he thought as he lightly kissed his wife’s forehead. She moaned quietly as he settled in beside her. Soon both were asleep.

Chapter 4 - Child of the moon

The moon continued its nightly watch over this out-of-place patch of land like a roving sentinel. Though most of Freethorn slept, a few of its residents were active—mostly members of the Guard, who these days were beginning to question the continued need for their roving patrols. Others, though, actively sought the nighttime as their preferred time of day. While this could be attributed to the fact that the Freethorners’ natural counterparts on Earth gravitate toward night, any of these Rats or Mice would say if asked that they simply felt more comfortable, and that’s that. Many are drawn by the beauty of a starry sky, finding it inspirational in many ways. For others, there is the occasional bout with insomnia, a result of their systems still adjusting to Lahaikshe’s 29-hour cycle; or else brought on by problems and uncertainties which, they would hope, a nighttime stroll would help them solve.

This night, one from the latter category was making his way along the trail past the Rat community’s main entrance up to the meadow on the south side of the lake. Ellis Davis didn’t have the meadow, or any other specific place, in mind for a destination. All he wanted was to try to make sense of the day’s events. Several times, he’d asked himself if he really needed to, since it didn’t affect him directly. It was something for those two to work out themselves; or was it? Should everyone just accept that they’d both loosen up more eventually and become more a part of the community, as Johnathan and Timothy maintain, or should there be a more active role taken in bringing them out? One thing was clear: seeing Lilia today, brought out to meet her fellow Freethorners only to be dragged back by Reuben, was definitely having an effect on him. Was Bertie right? Should they have forcibly kept Reuben from taking her away? Yet, she did appear to leave entirely willingly; but could that be because she felt she had no other choice? Does Reuben have that much of a hold over her, that whatever he says goes? He thought about how much protest Bertie raised over the matter, and he couldn’t help smiling; he never thought he’d be agreeing with Bertie so much. And yet, his contention made perfect sense: she only needs to be shown that she can make up her own mind. Could it really be that simple, though?

As he approached the blackberry thicket that lay on the edge of the meadow, he felt no closer to an answer. He looked up to the sky, as if the moon and stars could provide it. Other matters were momentarily forgotten as he admired the view. He stopped for a moment to take it all in. Gazing upon the moon, he studied its features, comparing it with the one seen from Earth, hanging up there in the night sky, glowing white like…

He brought his gaze back down to earth level. Admit it, Ellis, he almost said aloud. Like Lilia. Ever since the day she arrived, there hasn’t been a day when—

He gave a start, as something moving about in the meadow caught his eye; something decidedly out of place. He ducked down among the bushes, wincing as a thorn poked him in the side. He let no sound escape, though; the almost-instinctive need to conceal himself from possible danger was too strong. Through the briars, he sought to keep the anomaly in his sight. There it was still, something pale and wispy, moving from side to side. An afterimage of the moon? He closed his eyes; there was one still there, but it had faded greatly, too much for what he still saw upon looking out over the meadow again. No, something was definitely there, something which still made him feel apprehensive, though he knew it wasn’t necessarily anything that posed any danger. He wondered: there are said to be areas in this world where strange manifestations crop up at night, such as the ones Karen and Martin described in that place where they had their honeymoon. There hadn’t been anything remotely like that reported here, and yet…

Wait a minute… He raised his head for a clearer view. This was no magical manifestation, no wispy wraith. This was definitely something flesh-and-blood; another mouse, no more than three feet from where he still concealed himself. Could it be, possibly… No, it couldn’t be her. It was the moonlight making this one’s fur appear so pale. Yes, it had to be; he couldn’t imagine her behaving this way, dancing with such abandon, body swaying to and fro, spinning around with arms spread upward, sinking down to the ground and suddenly springing up again, as if to snatch the stars from the sky.

For his part, Ellis was transfixed, hardly aware of himself anymore, so fascinated was he by this display, to the point where he was no longer making any great effort to keep out of sight. He had, in fact, almost completely emerged out into the open; and suddenly, he realized that this could indeed be only one person after all. No one else here has fur that would appear this way at night; no one but…

Suddenly the mouse’s gyrations ceased. She turned her head and was now looking straight toward him. “Ellis! You came! How wonderful!”

Ellis’s surprise was great, not only because the identity of this midnight dancer was now confirmed, but also because he was in no way prepared for such a greeting from her, one in which there wasn’t a hint of hesitation or inhibition, nor any surprise at seeing him. It was enough to leave him staring in open-mouthed silence for several seconds; then he answered, “Ah…uh…Lilia! What are you…uh…I mean, I never…expected anything like this.”

Lilia laughed, but her tone wasn’t at all mocking. “You startled me! But that’s all right. I’m really glad to see you.” The two approached each other.

Ellis’s confusion was by no means abated. He startled her? She stood smiling in front of him, dressed in nothing but her own fur. He looked her up and down as if still needing to confirm that this was truly her. Like all the recently-arrived Mouse residents of Freethorn—including himself—Lilia had only just begun wearing clothing, especially when at class or work or otherwise doing business in and around the Rat community, but obviously old habits or tendencies were hard to break—not that going unclad was ever completely frowned upon here. Ellis had seen her this way before, of course, from her first day here, but somehow it was so much different now.

She seemed oblivious to the effect she was having on him as she spun herself around, sighing deeply and gazing upward. “Oh, isn’t it just the most beautiful night?”

“Er…it sure is, Lilia. Listen, I was wondering…”

She seemed to ignore him, continuing to dance and leap about, as if it were her sole reason for living. Ellis was equally confused and fascinated now. What could have changed her so drastically? He never would have imagined such behavior from her before now, and could even now scarcely believe what his eyes and ears told him.

“Lilia,” he said more emphatically, coming up closer to her, “would you please…hold still for a minute? I want to talk to you.”

“Oh, of course, Ellis.” She stopped and quickly dropped to the ground, stretching out on her side. She smiled up at him coquettishly and patted the ground beside her invitingly.

Ellis accepted her invitation, sitting down. “Lilia, I…don’t quite know where to begin. I never expected to see you like this. I mean, I know you spend some time out and about at night, but…I didn’t think this is how you spend it.”

Lilia laughed, again in a manner that seemed completely carefree and innocent. “How could I not spend it this way, Ellis? I love the night, and everything about it.” She sighed. “The stars are so different here, so clear and sharp. And the moon…sometimes, I feel like it was made just for me, and I for it.” Again she sighed, gazing up at the celestial orb, stretching arms out and bringing them in, as if embracing it to her breast.

Ellis was too fascinated to say a word as Lilia suddenly got to her feet and urged Ellis to join her in her nocturnal celebration. He found himself actually wanting to join her, forgetting momentarily any unanswered questions; after all, he well knew, he could use a little “loosening up” himself. He got up even as she had already resumed her cavorting, and spun himself around.

“That’s the way, Ellis,” said Lilia, taking his hands and encouraging him further.

As they spun each other in circles, Ellis found himself laughing with her, actually losing himself in the spontaneity of the moment, as if whatever it was that inspired Lilia toward this behavior was having the same effect on him. Shortly, though, he became aware of himself again, how he would look to anyone observing, and felt a touch of embarrassment. It wasn’t quite enough to make him cease dancing and frolicking completely, but he did remember some still-unresolved matters.

“Lilia,” he began as he continued dancing with her, “I’d still like to know…well, how it can be that you were so shy before, hardly saying a word to anyone, and you’re so completely different now? And when I first came upon you here, you weren’t the least bit surprised to see me. It was almost like you were expecting me, and you weren’t even embarrassed about my watching you, like I thought you’d be.”

Lilia laughed. “What’s there to be embarrassed about? I love dancing at night. I feel so secure, just like I’ve felt more secure about everything since coming here.”

“Well, I can understand that, but…what about the rest?”

Again she laughed, something Ellis was quickly becoming accustomed to hearing before she spoke. “Well, I guess I’m just coming out of my shell. Hmm?” She giggled and turned a cartwheel.

Ellis felt a bit embarrassed; obviously she, and probably Reuben as well, hadn’t been oblivious to what others had been saying about them. He fumbled for a few seconds, then said, “Well, that’s…that’s good, really good. I mean, don’t get me wrong, I’m not complaining. I like this change in you, I really do. It’s just that it’s…so sudden.”

“I can’t really explain why myself. I can only go by what I feel, and this is how I feel.” She leaped straight up in the air; and upon landing, appeared to collapse upon the ground, all in one graceful, fluid movement.

Ellis felt he needed to catch his breath just from watching her. Something about this entire night, especially Lilia’s uninhibited manner, was stirring something within him he couldn’t articulate. He glanced up at the moon, then at her; and for a moment, it seemed they really were as one. She seemed so far removed from the one he saw this afternoon so briefly, before being led away by…

He clenched his eyes shut for a second, shaking his head. “Say, Lilia…” he began as she got to her feet again, quickly following suit himself, “what about Reuben? Does he know you…you’re doing this? Or that you’re even out here?” He could scarcely believe that this was the first time since seeing Lilia tonight that Reuben had entered his thoughts at all.

“Oh, we needn’t worry about him. Can you do this?” Lilia broke into a sprint across the meadow, then gave a graceful leap several inches in the air, making a complete turn and landing equally gracefully, then dashing back over to Ellis, though the image lingered still in his mind. Again she seemed far removed from her more familiar self, and not even so much a mouse as a sprite, a pixie, a creature of human mythology. By now Ellis felt certain that if she were to sail upon the wind like a dragonfly, it wouldn’t surprise him.

“Wow…Lilia, that was amazing. I couldn’t even touch that, not anywhere as good as you.”

“Thank you, Ellis. If you liked that, then—”

“Lilia! There you are!”

Though the voice gave Ellis a start, it was hardly unexpected. Déjà vu, he thought as Reuben approached.

“Are you crazy, girl, prancing about in the open like this? You never know what could suddenly spring out or swoop down! Come along with me, now!”

“Oh, all right,” said Lilia, again seeming entirely willing, taking this intrusion—as Ellis saw it—very casually, as a matter of course. She took his hand and started to leave with him.

Again Ellis was dumbstruck. After all this, even now, she still allows him to order her around like this? Certainly it proved that she was very much the same Lilia, but still…

He started after them. “Now, wait a second, you two!” The siblings stopped briefly, Reuben looking impatient, Lilia still looking perfectly content; but, Ellis noted, definitely not as she did this afternoon, when Reuben led her away before. This seemed like only a momentary distraction to her, one which she would not allow to dampen her spirits.

“Come on, Reuben,” continued Ellis, “you know it’s not like that at all here, not like on Earth. Nothing’s going to jump out of the shadows and snatch anyone. It’s perfectly safe for her to be out here. And besides…it’s night and so she’s not being exposed to sunlight. Isn’t that your usual excuse?” It was incredible to him that Reuben would use either excuse, especially the one about predators.

“Just how sure are you that it’s safe? Do you know everything about this world, and everything that’s out here?” He seemed to ignore Ellis’s latter point.

“No, I don’t, but there are others who do, and they’ve had a lot of firsthand experience. Johnathan, Madeline, Justin, Melvin, Judith, several others…and they’re the leaders of this community. If they say it’s safe, that’s good enough for me.” That should do it, Ellis thought. What could he possibly say to that? Indeed, Reuben looked as if he were considering the point deeply and thoughtfully.

“Well…maybe it is for you, but…even they can’t know everything. Come along, Lilia, let’s go home.” They turned to walk away.

Ellis’s disbelief and astonishment had never been greater as he watched them depart. He shook his head. How could he still be that way, denying and defying all logic and reason? And if this was how he regarded his new surroundings and his new neighbors, who should be his friends as well, then why was he even here?

He felt close to anger and almost shouted that very question out loud to him; but as he made to, something else unexpected happened. Lilia turned her head, apparently unnoticed by Reuben, and gave Ellis a nod and a wink, gesturing with her hand toward him with a knowing smile; or pointing actually, and more toward the ground than toward him. Ellis frowned, and almost asked out loud what she meant; but since she apparently didn’t want Reuben to notice, he kept silent. But what was that all about?

He sat down, watching the receding figures, and tried to sort it all out. So much about those two made no sense. Here was one who almost seemed to have two personalities which were polar opposites of each other, and another who was protective of her to an irrational, even fanatical degree. The more he thought about them, the more determined he was to explore the mystery further. He wondered if he weren’t the first one in Freethorn to become this involved with them; even Boris or Seelah didn’t seem to know about Lilia’s little nighttime celebration, and they’d seemed to have gotten closer to her than anyone else. Maybe tonight was the first time she’d behaved this way.

Ellis thought back to her parting gesture. Wait a minute…could she have meant that she’d be here again tomorrow night, and that she wanted me to meet her then? Yes, that made sense, and it was just the sort of thing she wouldn’t want Reuben to hear. He looked up to the sky again, mind drifting back to their shared revelry of only a few minutes ago, and was pleased to find that the near-enchanted mood of this night had not been entirely destroyed by Reuben’s abrupt entrance.

“All right, Lilia,” he said quietly. “I’ll be here.” He considered whether or not to tell anyone else about this, and quickly decided to keep this between himself and Lilia for the time being, feeling that it should be a private matter, as he was sure Lilia wanted it. There were no doubts left in him that there was a mutual attraction here, one which he felt strongly compelled to explore further. He began making his own way home, mind still filled with the unforgettable images this night had left him with.

Chapter 5 - Tribute and celebration

“All right, Teacher. I’m ready to start again.”

The tall figure smiled. “Excellent, Rollo. But I’ve told you, you’re welcome to address me by name.”

“I know. But I feel I should show you that much respect, after all you’ve done to help me, especially lately; and especially after all the times I haven’t shown you much respect. But…I do remember all you’ve taught me about respecting others, and treating others with kindness when they’ve shown kindness toward me.”

“You’ve learned well, very well indeed. And now…since you are ready…”

Rollo sat down, growing still and erect. He closed his eyes, concentrating intently. Teacher did the same. Soon, a new setting was visible to Rollo, as if he were viewing it through another set of eyes completely—which in fact he was, in a manner of speaking. The new view was completely different from the featureless, mist-shrouded landscape that had been home to them both for so long. It was fairly typical for a mouse’s den: dimly lit, very sparsely furnished. In its midst sat its occupant, rocking slowly back and forth, as he became aware of other sensations, particularly the sudden cold, which aided him in focusing his thoughts on what to do next. Soon, he abruptly got to his feet and walked to the entrance. Outside, there was a thin layer of newly-fallen snow on the ground, and he went to an area where there was flat and smooth dirt underneath. His attitude was now full of purpose, much different than before he’d gotten up, when he’d seemed barely aware of his surroundings. He crouched down, picking up a nearby twig. With it he began scratching at the snow, but not randomly; he very slowly and carefully made figures in a very methodical fashion, figures which to some would be recognizable and very familiar, as they were to the one observing now from his most unusual vantage point. The mouse scratched one straight line, another at an angle, another straight line; still another straight line separate from the previous ones; another which he had initial difficulty with, seemingly unsure of which direction to take it, then bringing it down to form a semicircle; and finally, one which he had the greatest difficulty with, which started much as the previous one, but which ended, with one continuous line, back where it began, a full circle. He then drew his hand back, and his attention seemed to waver; then, apparently forgetting all about what he’d done and the work he’d put into it, he suddenly got up and walked back inside, where he went to his food stores, selected a weed seed, sat down and began eating.

The tall figure opened his eyes. Again he looked upon the misty terrain, and then at Rollo, who still sat still and quiet, but was even now coming out of his state of intense concentration.

He looked up. “Teacher? Did you see? How did I do?”

The tall one crouched down in front of him, hands on Rollo’s shoulders. “You did very well, Rollo. Excellently, in fact.”

“Really? I did four this time, didn’t I? Were they all right?”

“I already said you did excellently, Rollo. Yes, you did four, and they were very legible. You’re definitely on your way.”

“Wow…I never thought I’d get that far! But will it be enough?”

“It may well be. I cannot give a definite answer. When your visitors return, they may look at four figures, and understand your meaning. But perhaps it would be best if you continue your practice until you’re up to five or six, just to be safe.”

Rollo sighed. “I guess you’re right. I can stay in control a lot longer than I could at the beginning, but…it’s still tiring.”

“I know you’ve been giving it your all. But it will pay off, and soon, I assure you.”

“Yes…I guess so.”

The tall one smiled and embraced Rollo. “You rest for a while, and then I’ll have some more stories to tell.”

Rollo smiled. Teacher’s stories of his past life always enthralled him, and not only provided some relief from the constancy of his existence, but gave him much to look forward to when that long-promised change finally arrived. He sighed, lay down and curled up in a ball, and closed his eyes.

Dawn saw most of Freethorn up and about bright and early, including the Rusay visitors. Both families dressed and left the guest house together, where they would have breakfast at the Rats’ dining hall after a brisk morning stroll. Along the way, they observed much activity: Rats gathering acorns under the oaks; Rats and Mice in the garden areas, tending to newly-planted corn, radishes, peanuts and other crops, weeding, adding liquid nutrients and spraying organic repellents for insect pests; early-morning swimmers starting the day with a dip in Lake Nicodemus; two young Rats busily bringing building materials up a beech tree—“For a treehouse, of course,” they replied when asked about it. All the while, they asked plenty of questions, and Sithpha and Morobphra took plenty of notes—especially Sithpha, though Dinilom told him he should slow down a bit, reminding him that they were here to enjoy themselves as well as learn. As with the previous day, all that they saw and everyone they talked to were giving them the impression that things were going quite well here, and that everyone was happy here and optimistic about the future. Sithpha again wondered if the incident he and Dinilom witnessed, with Tara and Bertie and the reactions of others to their being together, could possibly trigger some kind of trouble within Freethorn; though it hardly seemed possible, with all they were seeing now. Later on, they would attend the general meeting Justin told them of, which they knew should prove especially enlightening.

“Mother Pat! Are you ready?”

“In a moment, Lula, dear.”

Soon, the two were making their way from their home in the Mouse community, toward a location opposite the way to the Rat community. This had become a frequent ritual for most of the Mice, and some of the Rats as well; but for these two—the matriarch of the largest extended Mouse family, and this young adolescent girl who had been essentially adopted into it—it was a daily ritual. Along the way, Lula chattered away almost incessantly, making all manner of observations, asking all manner of questions, hardly giving her foster mother a chance to answer them. But Patricia didn’t mind at all; as one who’d raised thirteen children of her own and was currently helping to raise fifteen grandchildren (with more to come), there was probably nothing where children in general were concerned that was outside her ability to deal with.

“I still can’t get used to the idea that we’re in another world. Every time I look out over the red plain, I have to remind myself it’s true. You seem to be used to it, Mother Pat, how do you do it?”

“Well, I guess I just keep reminding myself, just like you.”

“I guess you’re right, I know it’s silly. It’s as real as anything else I’ve seen, isn’t it?”

“Yes, that’s right; though sometimes, I—”

“Wow. Just think of what Norman and his kids are seeing right now. I can’t wait to go out there myself sometime, and…oh, did I interrupt you again? I’m so sorry, I can be stupid sometimes…”

“Oh, no, Lula, you’re not stupid. You’re just…excitable, a bit high-strung. You’re also very sensitive and caring. If you weren’t, we probably never would’ve brought you here.”

Lula smiled and shrugged. “If you say so. Oh, look, we’re almost there.”

Their destination was a mostly-hidden grotto ringed by a rock wall that was partly natural, partly “amulet-grown”. Lula took Patricia’s arm as they passed through the narrow archway. The air was heavy with the scent of wildflowers, some of which had grown here naturally, others which had been specially planted and cultivated. While this was certainly a beautiful and tranquil place where one could pause in reflection, the true purpose for their visit lay a bit further within.

A smooth, rectangular slab of granite with rounded corners and sides stood close to the rear of the grotto, flanked on either side by others that were similarly shaped. All bore inscriptions with names and other words. To human eyes, this whole setting would appear as no less than a cemetery, a final resting place where one could pay respects to departed loved ones. Further actions by these two would certainly confirm the impression, as they kneeled down in front of the monument they approached.

They closed their eyes and spent several minutes in silent prayer and reflection, all in remembrance of the one interred here: Desmond Davis, the third-born son (with his litter-mates Orland and Karen) of Kimball and Patricia, who had passed away far from and unseen by the rest of his family. Fortunately, he hadn’t died alone; or—presumably—unloved, as Lula’s family had taken him into their home after he’d become separated from his traveling companion Orland and needed a place to stay overnight. Temporary though the arrangement was, it was long enough for Desmond to win a place in their hearts, most notably with one of the children, Lula, who’d become so enamored of him that she slipped away from her family in the morning and followed Desmond as he resumed his journey. He convinced her to return to her family, but while escorting her back they were attacked by a weasel. Desmond was able to drive it off, but not before sustaining serious injuries which, after he was able to return Lula home, ultimately proved fatal. He was mourned and buried nearby; and after his family learned of his fate, Johnathan, Patricia and Orland came to visit Lula and see Desmond’s grave. Lula had been cast out by her family, and with no other place to go and having been touched so deeply by Desmond’s brief time in her life, she was brought back to Freethorn, becoming unofficially adopted by the Davises.

Presently the pair opened their eyes, looking at the headstone again. They smiled and hugged, and Patricia told Lula one more funny anecdote about Desmond. Soon, with both feeling cheered, Patricia and Lula got to their feet and prepared to leave, taking another look at the surrounding headstones, some of which marked the actual graves of those whose names and epitaphs were inscribed upon them, others there solely to honor their memories, even if they had never lived in Thorn Valley or Freethorn.

Finally, they again regarded the most recent addition to the memorial garden, the one that read, “DESMOND, THE LITTLE CHARMER. MISSED GREATLY BY FATHER, MOTHER, BROTHERS AND SISTERS, AND THE ONE TO WHOM HE’D GIVEN HIS LIFE TO SAVE.”

The two mice exchanged sad smiles, embraced, and turned to leave the garden.

Not far away in Oak Park, beneath the shade of the big burr oak, a young mother spent a peaceful, if not especially quiet interlude with her children. Teresa Brisby rolled around on the grass, laughing as Eric Jr. and Tyler climbed all over her and crawled in circles around her, giggling and shrieking all the while. She gave a mock growl as she lifted Eric Jr. above her as Tyler clung to and mouthed her leg.

In a few minutes, the youngsters had settled down and indicated they were both hungry; and so their mother undid the blouse she wore, arranged them on her lap and held them close so they could suckle. She stroked their heads, cooing to them as they quietly nursed. “It’s getting a bit crowded down there for both of you. You’re both growing so fast.” The pair were two weeks old—that is, two Earth-weeks—and increasingly energetic and rambunctious. Teresa sighed as she thought about how, not so long ago, she and her siblings would play-wrestle with their own parents, right up to the time they were all fully grown. She couldn’t help feeling sad as she again thought of the boys’ father, and wished he could share this moment, here at the place where they first confirmed their love for each other. But she knew she could take great consolation from the fact that his sons were perfect pictures of health and had displayed none of their father’s aversion to living on Lahaikshe.

Her thoughts fell to other new Mouse parents in Freethorn. Michelle and Brummie, and Myrna and Stollie became new parents just last week, within two days of each other: the former had twin girls Jillian and Megan, the latter a single baby boy, Liam. And, nearer and dearer to her heart, there was Martin and Karen. The word on her, for the past five days, had been “any day now.” Being married to her and preparing for fatherhood was obviously doing her brother a world of good; in the eight days since her and the boys’ return, she’d never seen him so happy and content.

She looked down at her sons, who had finished nursing and were curled up on her lap, dozing. Her thoughts fell to her own future here; after discussing the point with Simone, the principal at Thorn Valley School and her erstwhile boss, they’d agreed that she’d put her teaching career on hold for the time being, at least until after the boys were weaned. The boys’ aunt, Sarah, who lived with them, was growing surprisingly independent of Teresa, finding new friends and throwing herself wholeheartedly into her schoolwork; every day lately she would happily chatter Teresa’s ear off about what she’d done and learned.

She thought again about Karen’s impending birth, smiling as she pictured the boys playing with the cousins they’d soon gain; and then, something out of the corner of her eye brought her attention upward. She gave a small start, soon relaxing as she saw the mhys’haspa circling low over the treetops. Knowing she had nothing to fear, she watched its graceful aerial ballet and sighed, recalling her family’s friendship with Jeremy and Beatrice back on Earth, and how she particularly enjoyed the rides the two crows would give to them, soaring above the highest trees and over the hills and mountains, so high that the rivers and streams looked like shining ribbons, the forest like a bed of moss. She wondered if it were possible to make friends with a mhys’haspa, and fly with it as she did with the crows. Gwinthrayle once mentioned that only a few Rusay had succeeded in that. Mhys’haspas are peaceful vegetarians that had never been known to intentionally do harm to Rusay or any other animal life; yet, in spite of their docile nature, and though they were big—about the same size as a crow, in fact—and strong enough with sufficient lift to carry an adult Rusay, they didn’t take to passengers very well, and so were notoriously hard to “break.” No, Teresa decided, it would definitely be too risky. Oh well, one can always dream.

Suddenly, something in her peripheral vision again caught her attention. The mhys’haspa had come down to ground level and was now browsing in the tall grass in the nearby meadow only a few yards in front of her. Teresa instinctively drew her arms around her sons, though she was certain they were in no danger. A more realistic concern was over the fact that mhys’haspas, having sometimes voracious appetites, were something of a problem the first few weeks after Freethorn’s arrival on Lahaikshe. They had found some of the Earth vegetation to be pleasing to the palate, and would have to be chased out of some of the trees, where they would eat the leaves and other parts, and away from some of the grasses and shrubbery as well. The restoration of the garden areas was still in the beginning stages, and there was some concern over there being a possibly larger mhys’haspa problem once these crops were well underway. Fortunately, they were found to be largely cooperative; communication with them proved to be almost as easy as with many of the Freethorners’ fellow Earth creatures, and the Rats managed to impress upon them that though they were welcome to visit anytime, they would be doing too much damage if they were to partake of the colony’s flora.

The one who had now chosen this Freethorn meadow to settle upon was definitely proving to be one who had already gotten the message, apparently only wanting to use it as a rest stop. He groomed himself almost like a cat, just taking idle nibbles at the grass in between finding impurities in his coat and carefully smoothing the fur down afterwards. Tyler and Eric Jr. had by now also taken notice of this visitor, staring in wide-eyed wonder, and Teresa decided to give them all a closer look. She gathered up the boys in her arms and stood up, approaching the great winged beast who paused to watch them for a few seconds before returning to his grooming. They came to a large boulder which was only about eight feet from the mhys’haspa and afforded a better view above grass level; and so Teresa lifted each child up to it before climbing up herself. She noted how this boulder was the same which Eric had fled to and hidden underneath just after the colony’s arrival on Lahaikshe. She pushed the thought back, returning her attentions to the magnificent creature in front of them.

From this vantage point, they could better see the mhys’haspa’s sleek build, the large, leathern bat-like wings folded at its side, its blue-black and russet pelt and head that was close to horse-like in overall shape, but with almost lizard-like features, including a mouth fixed permanently in a dolphin-like grin. With its forelimbs and mouth he continued grooming himself with great care, pausing again to gaze at the three mice, appearing to take to their presence very casually. Teresa was reminded of descriptions of dragons of earthly lore, though she supposed that no one imagined a dragon that was furry and ate plants.

Eric Jr. squealed with excitement and gestured toward the “dragon,” but Tyler seemed more cautious, watching quietly but with just-as-keen interest. Teresa smiled. It was a bit ironic; she could easily imagine their father reacting more like Tyler if he were here now, rather than his namesake. Though he wasn’t really the inhibited type, he was cautious about things unfamiliar to him. All at once she was lost in thought, hardly even noticing the mhys’haspa; but after about a minute, another shriek from Eric Jr. brought her back. She shook her head. She’d been trying to avoid reminiscing about Eric too much, but she couldn’t help it. It wasn’t that she was trying to forget him; far from it. It seemed that thinking about him was—it was hard to say—holding her back, perhaps. Certainly she’d had plenty to do since coming here; being a new parent was enough of a full-time job, and she greatly looked forward to resuming teaching. Yet, she’d found herself wanting more. She thought about Norman, and how she’d felt as if she needed to have some kind of definite answer for him upon his return to Freethorn. But an answer to what? They’d spent a fair amount of time together since she and the boys had arrived here just over a week ago; and lately she’d been wondering if she and Norman would, one of these days, become more than just good friends, and was sure that he’d been thinking along similar lines. Neither had been forcing the issue, though, or were trying to rush the other into any decision of that nature. Still…were memories of Eric holding her back from taking her relationship with Norman any further? Could his memories of his late wife, Vera, be having the same effect upon him? All along, she’d been telling herself what her parents had advised her and her siblings long ago: to allow things to grow naturally, and not force anything. She sighed. Maybe things were proceeding at a natural pace; maybe the situation would change by the time Norman and his family returned, and her feelings for him clearer…or maybe not. For now, perhaps it would be best if…

This time it was Tyler who returned her attention to the here and now. He was fixing his attention to something behind them; or someone, as she found out. Another family of mice—including one that continually glanced nervously at the mhys’haspa, who still quietly groomed himself, another that held his arm and walked with the aid of a stick, and two little girls—were approaching from in back of them. “Hi, Louann. Hi, Teelo…Sharla…Tess. Come on up here and join us, there’s plenty of room.” Noting the apparent caution in their approach, she added, “Don’t worry about the mhys’haspa, he’s just passing through.”

“That’s really a mhys’haspa out there, Teresa?” asked Louann as Teelo helped her up, before he and the girls followed.

“Sure is. Looks like he just wanted to stop for a rest.” Teresa moved herself and the boys over to make room.

“I don’t know if I’ll ever get used to having those things around,” said Teelo. “Brrr! They give me the willies.”

“Sure wish I could see it better,” said Louann. Sharla and Tess began describing it to her. Teresa still marveled at how casual their mother could be about her near-total blindness, uncertain if she’d be able to handle it as well.

Over the next few minutes, many others—Mice, Rats, and Rusay—had gathered at the site. Most Freethorners hadn’t seen a mhys’haspa up close before, and so this one was creating quite a stir. The object of their attention remained nearly oblivious, and by now had curled up and dozed off.

With everyone assured of their safety in this creature’s presence, some got quite brave. Siblings Torrance and Hazel, two of Vincent’s children who were in their early adolescence and quite the adventurous pair, came right up to him and touched him on the side. The mhys’haspa made a low rumbling sound almost like a cat’s purr, and turned one eye toward the two curiosity-seekers, who backed off slightly. He only turned his head the other way and continued his slumber. The two exchanged gleeful smiles and fell back to join their friends, to whom they excitedly related their escapade.

Over the next hour, those present had taken this gathering from simple, curious observation to a spontaneous, celebratory affair in honor of this native visitor who chose this place to rest his bones. An ever-increasing number of Rats and Mice, coming from their daily tasks in midafternoon, were joining in, many bringing picnic meals. Youngsters who’d finished their classes began organizing games which were, for the most part, as loose and freewheeling as this whole affair. The Rusay visitors were also quick to join in, seeing firsthand what they’d already been told: that the Freethorners were very freely given to celebration, and would use almost any occasion as an excuse, especially since their arrival on Lahaikshe.

One who was especially thrilled at this visit was Patricia Davis, who, once she’d gotten the word, rushed out here as fast as she could, bearing pencils and sketchpad. She’d largely forewent her artful pursuits for her first few weeks here as she and the rest of her family adjusted to their new lives in Freethorn, but had always intended to pick it up later. Now, she happily joined those other artistically-inclined Rats and Mice in putting to paper their images of this magnificent creature. During the years when her family lived in close proximity to humans in the town of Sampson—home to the NIMH facility that had been their previous, unwilling home—Patricia had sketched many pictures of her family and other mice, as well as other species of animals, even humans. She’d had little opportunity to do the same with native Lahaikshean species, though; she hadn’t even had the opportunity to sketch a haisk’ve, despite the several times they’d been here to help shuttle the exchange parties. The one mhys’haspa drawing was of a distant silhouette, floating in midair high above Freethorn; but now here was the real thing before her, as big as life, an opportunity not to be missed. Her husband, children, grandchildren and others shuttled in and out behind her, watching the portrait’s progress, knowing not to distract her overmuch but thrilled at watching it take shape. Timothy, whose own art had also taken a backseat lately, was working on his own creation and attracting an audience, primarily Lucy.

The mhys’haspa paid little heed to any of this and, when he took any notice of the goings-on, seemed barely interested or at best indifferent. Eventually he got to his feet, stretched, yawned, and flexed his wings. He flapped them several times, and after pushing himself upward, was airborne. Below, his departure hardly went unnoticed. There were many shouted goodbyes, but it certainly didn’t mark an end to the revelry. Any celebration, Justin and Johnathan had explained to the Rusay visitors, was really in honor of their continued good fortune in this world, and hope for more of the same.

The Rusay found it odd that the Freethorners seemed to regard the mhys’haspa almost as an equal, whereas they considered creatures like them to be essentially wild beasts, much as humans consider any form of animal life. Not that the Rusay didn’t carry a degree of respect for their fellow creatures—it was actually quite considerable—but it still seemed odd to them. It was Sithpha who voiced this matter aloud to Justin; and in reply, Justin reminded them that they were not originally as advanced as they are now, but still consider themselves to be contemporaries of natural rats and mice in many ways. Though they could read and understand at least one language of humans, they could also still communicate with their ordinary counterparts and many other animals as well. Since coming to Lahaikshe, they found they could do the same with some of the native animal life, including mhys’haspas. The degree of respect accorded to them was simply an extension of attitudes well established for years.

In the wake of the mhys’haspa’s departure, several of the children were pretending to be mhys’haspas and other Lahaikshean animals. Willis was one of the adults getting into the act, giving a “haisk’ve” ride to Lula and Stuart, oldest son of Jessica, walking on all fours with a heavy, lumbering gait and grunting as their friends rolled on the ground laughing. Nearby, Patricia and Jessica watched, laughing and applauding. The two families who had “begun” this gathering had since come down from the rock and joined them. Many came by to admire Patricia’s finished sketch of the mhys’haspa, a more detailed version of which would follow, and she was looking forward all the more to seeing more of the local plant and animal life.

They also commented on how fond Lula and Stuart were of each other, as they’d been since shortly after Lula’s arrival. Though they certainly approved, there were still lingering concerns over how well Stuart would treat Lula. Patricia (and others) still couldn’t help feeling protective of her, since she was a natural mouse with no connection to anyone here other than her professed love for Desmond, and so had been a total stranger to the ways of the Freethorners. Jessica, especially, had been concerned that Stuart might not be sensitive enough in dealing with Lula, knowing how brusque and even rude he could be to his own siblings and “close” cousins (Norman’s children). However, he often confided in his mother, especially since his father’s death, sharing his feelings with her to a degree the others would find surprising; and though he was clearly becoming more interested in members of the opposite sex outside of his family, it wasn’t really known just how he’d behave with one. Now, he was surprising everyone with the great patience and kindness he was displaying toward Lula, helping her with her schoolwork and doing a considerable part in orienting her to life here. He was the perfect gentleman, and she’d become very fond of him as well, though it clearly wasn’t the same as with Desmond. Thus far, she regarded Stuart as a close friend, far differently than with Desmond, as if she were consciously taking things more slowly with him; obviously she was quite happy and content with that.

Nearby, Teresa, Louann and Teelo were keeping a close watch on their children’s playing together, to make sure it didn’t get too rough for the little ones. Presently, two other mice approached.

“Hello, Michael and Cynthia,” greeted Patricia.

“Sit down and join us for a while,” invited Jessica. The pair had arrived on the scene just before the mhys’haspa’s departure, having been detained by duties elsewhere.

After they complied, Patricia said with a wink, “Well, is there any, oh, announcement you’d like to make?”

Michael gazed upward. “Oh…perhaps,” he said with a knowing smile.

“Mother! Don’t embarrass them,” said Jessica.

“That’s all right, Jessie,” said Cynthia quickly. “What were you talking about just now?”

“Oh, ah…about how well Lula has adjusted to living here, and how well Stuart’s been treating her. It’s almost hard to believe.”

“I knew he had it in him to be a gentleman,” said Michael. “I think he was ready for it.”

“He reminds me of Martin at that age,” said Cynthia, “and look at how he’s turned out.”

“I guess so,” said Jessica. “It’s almost as surprising how well Lula’s adjusted, considering how little she’d really had to do with the rest of us.”

“Yes,” said Michael distantly. “Reminds me of old ‘No-Name’. I’ve been thinking about him a lot lately. I wonder how he’ll adjust, if he ever decides to come here…if he’s ever really able to decide.” He paused, briefly recalling his unsuccessful assignment to convince this unnamed child of Vincent, the only one living that wasn’t presently living in Freethorn, to come here.

“It’s too bad you couldn’t convince him,” said Jessica. “I’d like to meet him.”

The others voiced agreement; then Michael said, “I wish we knew more about his exact condition. Then maybe, next time, we’d have a better idea of how to deal with him. He seemed to be in his own world, and we had no idea how much of what we were saying was getting through.”

“Tallus said it could be…autism, right?” said Cynthia.

“That’s what he thought.”

“I’ve read about that,” said Patricia. “It’s supposed to be not an uncommon condition among humans.”

“That’s right,” added Jessica. “But there’s no precedent for it among mice, is there?”

“There’s a first time for everything,” said Michael with a small laugh.

“And we’re all living proof of that,” said Patricia.

“True, but…I can’t help thinking…if I hadn’t grabbed him and shouted at him like I did, after we escaped from that cat, he might not have said no.”

“I still don’t believe that, Michael,” said Cynthia. “After all you’d told him about Freethorn, why would he refuse just because you yelled at him? And you did apologize, didn’t you?”

“Yeah, I did. Maybe that is silly, but…there’s one thing I’m sure of. There was definitely something more he wanted to tell us, but he couldn’t make himself understood. When Johnathan and I left him, when we were leaving his den…I looked back at him one last time, and he was sitting there again, like he did so much of the time. Only this time, I could swear his expression was different, almost like he was…sad, like there was more he wanted to say, but couldn’t. I thought at the time that when he said ‘no’, he might not have been actually replying to our offer. I still think that’s possible.”

“Well, whatever the case, it’s almost that time again, isn’t it?” asked Jessica.

“For us to check on him again? I guess, though it’s hard to tell if it’s been a whole month yet, with this Lahaikshean time.”

“Would he know the difference?”

“Maybe not, Jess. But we did tell him we’d see him in about a month, and a promise is a promise. I’ll bring it up to Johnathan next time I see him.”

“I hope you can bring him here this time,” said Jessica. “I’m willing to bet we have the resources here to help him in any way he needs. He just sounds so pathetic and hopeless; he definitely needs our help.”

Conversation turned to lighter fare. Presently Kimball joined them, and everyone continued whiling away the afternoon. Shortly, Michael and Cynthia left, having appeared a bit restless and preoccupied before, leaving in their wake a bit of discussion on their behalf.

“Everyone knows how crazy they are about each other,” said Patricia. “And they make such a great couple. I don’t know why they don’t just come out and announce it.”

“Oh, relax, Mother,” said Jessica, patting her mother’s arm. “They’re probably just playing a game with us. When they’re ready, they’ll announce it. And in a big way, too, I’ll bet.”

“Oh, I know, Jessie. But can you blame me? We never really got the chance to see any of you children fall in love, and take a mate. Oh, there was Karen and Martin, of course, but the circumstances were so different with them, what with our frantic rush to get to Thorn Valley, and not knowing what we’d find…brrr! I wouldn’t want to go through that again for the world, despite all the good that came from that whole debacle.”

“Not the least of which, dear,” pointed out Kimball, “is the fact that it brought all of us together, including Michael and Cynthia. For all that, I can honestly say it was worth everything I went through, including losing my leg, for us to be able to relax like this now, all of us together, without fear of being suddenly snatched away and eaten, or captured, or anything to keep us from living free.”

“But if there had been an easier way, Dad,” said Jessica, “you would have taken it, wouldn’t you?”

“In a heartbeat, Jessie,” replied Kimball with a hearty laugh. “In a heartbeat.”

As the group continued watching the children’s games and chatting about other subjects, Jessica became lost in thought. Talking about Michael and Cynthia had reminded her of what was missing in her life. Although there was the stimulation of new surroundings, a new career, new friends, new challenges, she was sure she was ready for a new love affair herself. There was a marked shortage of eligible males, though; and although there had never been rules set down about having more than one mate, and the practice wasn’t frowned upon for the handful of Rats who did, she wasn’t too fond of the idea when applied to herself. Oh well, she thought, maybe the cliché about good things coming to those who wait does apply here. She wondered briefly if she weren’t being a bit selfish; then thought, no, not at all. Everyone needs to feel close to someone, the way she did with Harley. She knew he would want her to find someone new; he told her this himself, not long before his death.

Nearby, Teresa’s babies were napping on a blanket as their mother conversed with Hermione, her closest friend among the Rats, and her fiancé Garner. Jessica found herself feeling a pang of jealousy as she thought about how close Teresa and Norman were becoming these days. Surely, she was happy for them, and yet…

“Hey, here comes another happy couple,” said Hermione.

“They don’t look too happy to me,” observed Teelo.

“Who is it?” asked Louann.

“It’s Bertie and Tara,” said Teresa. “I wonder what the trouble is.”

As the two approached hand-in-hand, everyone could tell they were upset; yet, for all they genuinely wanted to help, and though none in this group disapproved of their being together, some still had to make an effort to be nonchalant about it since, after all, they were still quite the odd couple to look at.

As they drew closer, Patricia made to ask what the trouble was; but before she got in a word, Bertie said urgently, “Has anybody here seen Justin?”

“It’s really important,” added Tara. “We need to see him right away.”

“He and Isabella and the kids came by a little while ago, just for a few minutes,” said Jessica. “Why? What’s wrong?”

“Yes, why would you need to see him so urgently?” asked Patricia.

Bertie sighed, sounding exasperated. “We just do, okay?”

“Now, Bertram,” Kimball said patiently, “I don’t know why you think Justin should be the only one to hear you, but you know you can tell us anything. We are your parents.”

“Yes,” added Patricia, “and I think you really do want to.”

Bertie looked befuddled. If there was anyone who knew him as well or better as he himself did… He looked at Tara and shrugged. She nodded, and they both sat down.

“Well,” began Tara, “we were just finishing up swim class, and had just excused everyone…”

“And I was just sitting there, watching and waiting for her to finish.”

“I finished drying off and I saw where Bertie was waiting for me, and then I waved to him; and then Thurman—you guys know him, right?” Tara indicated Hermione and Garner, who nodded; Garner, in fact, was Thurman’s nephew, though they were close to the same age. “He came up to me and said…he said, ‘Hey, why don’t you stick to your own kind?’ And then he just walked away.”

“And I was right there, within earshot,” added Bertie. “And he just says this like I’m not even there.”

Tara continued: “I…I didn’t know what to do for a moment, then I hollered back at him, ‘Why, you lousy little…I’m gonna get you!’ But then Jarman and Lothar came up to me, and they tried to calm me down. They’d heard what Thurman said too, and they know me when I’m angry. They said to just let it go, that he was just being a loudmouthed jerk and that it wasn’t worth getting this upset over. Well, I managed to cool down a bit, but I couldn’t just let it go, not completely.”

“I wanted to give him a piece of my mind, too, but then she said she had a better idea, that this is something the council should know about.”

“That’s right, take it right to the top. I don’t know exactly what they might be able to do, but we’ve got to nip this in the bud.”

Reactions were mixed; there was silent head-shaking, expressions of sympathy, and others were already weighing possible implications.

“Tara,” said Patricia, “I assume you know Thurman quite well already. Are you sure he really meant any harm?”

“That’s just it, Patricia. I’ve known him since we were little more than babies, since we could walk. We grew up together, we were always playing together. I…I feel like I’ve been stabbed in the back. He’s never talked to me that way before.” Tara tried hard to keep tears from her eyes. Bertie laid his hand on her arm.

“So…” ventured Teresa, “how did you conclude that the council should know this?”

“It’s not just Thurman,” said Bertie. “Every day since we’ve been going together, it’s whisper, whisper, whisper, and snicker, snicker, nudge, nudge, wink, wink. You all know what I’m talking about.”

“Yes, we do, but not everyone’s like that,” said Jessica.

“That’s right, we’re not,” added Louann.

“But you still think it’s strange, don’t you?” said Bertie. “A rat and a mouse getting cozy like this…”

“Of course it’s unusual, son,” said Kimball. “And I’ll be the first to admit that I’m still finding it a bit hard to get accustomed to. But that doesn’t mean we don’t approve, or aren’t happy for you, or wish the both of you every happiness in return.”

Bertie’s feelings were mixed. Surely, as well as he knew his own family, he could hardly accuse them of laughing at Tara and him behind their backs. Still… “What about everyone else, though? It may be okay with you, but…if that’s Thurman’s attitude about it, how many others are out there who feel the same way, but are keeping it to themselves?”

Kimball gave a thoughtful sigh. “You do have a point there…”

“Sure, some of this whispering and nudging and pretending to be nonchalant might not be anything, but…some of it’s got to mean something more serious.”

“And it could be a sign of something really unpleasant, that most of us wouldn’t have believed was possible here,” said Patricia.

“Or maybe not,” added Kimball. “But you were right, Bertram, to think that this was something worth bringing before the council. However serious this is, or isn’t, it should be brought out into the open.”

“We’re glad to hear you say that, Kimball,” said Tara with genuine respect. “I guess we can’t do much more here…”

“I’ll talk to Thurman, if that’ll help,” offered Garner. “He and I have always gotten along well, and I know he’ll listen to me.”

“Thanks, Garner,” said Tara, patting his shoulder. “Guess we’d better get going here.”

As she and Bertie made to leave, Teelo spoke up. “You know…for what it’s worth, you guys, I think it’s all right. I mean…there’s a lot about the ways of everyone here—the way you all understand and go about things, and so on—that’s still strange to me, but I’m learning to live with it, just as I’ve learned to live with Louann, and she’s one of those that’s different than me. And I love her and Sharla and Tess more than anything. I guess what I’m trying to get at is that, to me, it’s just another different way of doing things here, you two being together.” He looked down at his daughters, tickling each of them, to which they responded with squeals and giggles.

“You know something, buddy?” said Bertie. “I think you’ve hit the nail on the head. Thanks.” He patted Teelo on the back and stood. “Come on, Tara, let’s go find Justin.” The two left, looking considerably more optimistic and in better spirits than when they arrived.

For some of those in this group, though, the mood was near-opposite. Discussion continued about this new situation, and it was definitely causing some uneasiness, as most realized its possibly very serious implications. There were expressions of hope, though, that it would be resolved without too much trouble.

Chapter 6 - Inspirations by moonlight

For the second time in as many nights, a rendezvous by moonlight would be made, though this one was entirely planned. Ellis made his way along a route which would eventually bring him to the meadow on the south side of the lake, close to the garden areas. This was not one of the more highly-traveled pathways; it really wasn’t a pathway so much as an obstacle course, winding around close-set shrubbery, through tangled briars, over roots and stones. If asked, he wouldn’t be able to say precisely why he took this route. Certainly, he wanted some extra time for solitary reflection on the day’s events before going to see this new one through. He thought about Bertie and Tara, and their determination to have this crisis of theirs—as they saw it—taken seriously and right to the top. He hadn’t been there when they discussed the matter with their parents—though he had seen the mhys’haspa—but he’d heard plenty afterwards, including how they’d gone straight to Justin with their concerns. He could well understand why they were taking it so seriously, though his view on their pairing was much like Teelo’s. Strange, unexpected things were happening these days since they’d all found each other in this displaced piece of Earth, something Ellis knew very well.

He paused to gaze upward; it was every bit the beautiful, star-filled night that it was the night before. Looking upon the half-moon, he was again reminded of Lilia. He took a deep breath. He couldn’t help feeling a bit nervous. Lilia’s behavior last night was so unexpected and out of character that several times today he could have sworn he’d dreamed the whole experience. He’d wondered if she would approach him some time during the day; but she never did, and he in turn didn’t deliberately seek her out, though he’d glimpsed her coming to and from classes. He’d felt compelled to keep their meeting a secret, and had apparently succeeded, since he’d heard nothing to indicate that anyone else besides Lilia and Reuben knew about it.

Now, as he moved on, he tried to analyze the nervousness he felt now. Was it possible that Lilia was playing some kind of game, or pulling some trick on him? Perhaps she planned on standing him up, fooling him into showing up at the meadow and making him wait and seeing how long before he’d give up. That, he realized, was the main reason he was taking this out-of-the-way route, to stay out of sight in case her intentions weren’t entirely on the up-and-up, and he might catch her if she and possibly others were planning something more elaborate and devious. But was Lilia capable of something so conspiratorial? He thought of her words and actions last night, her attitude of complete innocence and honesty and wanting only to have fun and enjoy the night. No, Ellis decided, Lilia honestly did want to see him again, here tonight, and he wanted to see her. She’d had an effect on him that, though he still couldn’t define it, was so compelling that he couldn’t resist coming here if he tried. He recalled fondly her smile, her laughter, her beautiful scent, her gracefulness, and that coy and rather cryptic final gesture she’d given him.

Now here was a new source for uneasiness. What if he’d misinterpreted whatever she was trying to tell him? He thought it through, picturing the incident in his mind again, walking himself through it step by step. No, he concluded, it couldn’t have meant anything else. He was sure she wanted to see him again; and she’d enjoyed being out here so much, that this had to be where she wanted them to meet. Okay, Mr. Logic, he thought, let’s not worry anymore. If, by some chance, she’s not there, then we’ll wait a half hour or so, then leave. He hoped he hadn’t misunderstood her, but if so, it wouldn’t be his fault. She didn’t come right out and say what she wanted, and he did the best he could. Of course, he wished otherwise, because he wanted to find out more about her, find out why she behaved as she did, just…be with her.

There was still Reuben, though. What if he showed up to drag her away again? Well, just let him try, Ellis thought. He would intervene this time, do all he could to convince Reuben that his sister was in no danger and could go where she pleased, even if it meant wrestling him to the turf and sitting on his chest until he gave in. Ellis snickered at the absurd image, but he would do it if he had to.

He moved further out into the open, by now much more certain that there was nothing untoward going on and that Lilia would be waiting for him. Though uncertain of precisely what this night would hold in store, his anticipation rose.

Finally, he approached the thicket in which he’d hidden last night. Rounding it, he was again looking upon the meadow, though Lilia was nowhere in sight. He walked out a little further, scanning back and forth. Okay, he told himself, this is nothing to throw a fit over; there’s no reason why she should show up at the exact same time; though he did somehow believe that she’d be waiting for him, and already dancing up a storm. He sighed, looking at the moon again. Looks like I’ll be waiting after all, he thought; might as well get comfortable. He made to sit down.

“Ellis! You came!”

He literally jumped straight up, almost stumbling as he touched ground. He recovered quickly enough, though, and turned to face the voice’s source. “Lilia! I was…I mean—” Before he could say more, she rushed to him, embracing him and nuzzling his ear. Ellis was completely at a loss at how to respond, at least verbally; for now, he simply went with the moment, embracing her in turn. He thought about how her abrupt greeting was just one more unexpected turn in the exploration of the mystery that was her and Reuben. He was soon distracted, though, by the scent and feel of her nearness, her breath in his ear, her heart beating close to his—and the fact that she was again going “nude.”

He found himself thinking about exploration of another kind; then, she suddenly broke away, as if this passionate-seeming embrace were just her way of saying hello. “Oh, I’m so happy you came, Ellis. I think tonight’s even more beautiful, don’t you?”

Ellis fumbled in his reply, trying to regain his composure. “Yeah, uh…yeah, Lilia, I…I suppose it is. Right. Uh, listen, did you have to…” Again he found it hard to maintain a straight line of thought, as Lilia launched into a series of handsprings, somersaults, and simple rolls along the ground. Ellis was once again enthralled by her, and silently watched her performance for over a minute before remembering his “place”.

“Lilia,” he said with a laugh, “you’re getting away from me again.” He took hold of her arm.

“Oh, I’m sorry, Ellis. Were you going to say something?” She sat down, wearing the same coquettish expression as before.

Ellis joined her. “Yes, I was wondering…did you have to…well, sneak away from Reuben?”

“Oh, he was no problem at all,” she replied with her characteristic laugh. “He probably doesn’t even know I’m gone.”

Ellis nodded, wondering how she could be so certain of that, knowing of Reuben’s diligence in keeping track of her whereabouts; but he decided not to ask it aloud for now. “Lilia, I…still can’t help wondering…how you can be so different than before. I mean, not different than last night, but…well, you know. Before that.” He sighed. “I know, I sound like a broken record.”

“You can say anything to me, Ellis, I don’t mind.” Lilia grabbed her ankles, rocked back and forth twice, and did a backwards somersault back onto her feet. “I just feel free here, and secure, like I can do anything I wish. I can’t explain it any other way.”

Ellis stood up. “That’s what you said last night, too, and…it’s not that I don’t believe you, but you just let Reuben drag you away like that. It just didn’t seem to follow.”

“I was just humoring him, Ellis.” Lilia took his hand, and they began walking together across the field. “He’ll see things more my way eventually. In the meantime, why waste the night?” She suddenly began running across the field; and Ellis followed, without losing his grip.

Why indeed, he thought. The question that was on his lips, about whether she would allow Reuben to interrupt them tonight, was quickly forgotten as he allowed himself to be gloriously lost in the magic of this night. The two young mice continued running and dancing across the meadow, hand in hand, laughing with the carefree attitude of two that only lived for the moment.

Amidst it all, Ellis was able to step back and observe himself; not enough to stop his revelry, but enough to make him wonder: what if someone else did come upon them? What would either of them say? He thought that Lilia would possibly ask them to join in too, and he decided that he would say the same in that event. He hoped that wouldn’t happen, though; he wanted this moment to be shared only by the two of them. He even supposed that some might have seen them already, perhaps last night too. There were others who spent some time out and about at night, including members of the Guard on their roving patrols. Freethorn wasn’t that large, after all. None of that mattered to him right now, not while he was with this one who had inspired him to such a degree, who had showed him how spontaneous and unconstrained he could be. He had yet to find out, though, just how high a degree.

Finally, Lilia separated herself from Ellis, spun herself around in a graceful pirouette, and seemed to collapse upon the ground, though Ellis quickly realized it was entirely intentional. She stretched out full, sighed deeply and reached out with both arms towards the moon above. She drew them in again with eyes closed, as if she imagined she’d just plucked the moon from the sky like a berry, and were now clutching it to her breast.

Ellis was transfixed at the sight. His breathing was still a bit labored from the past several minutes’ non-stop cavorting; but now, it was increasingly so from seeing Lilia as she was now, with feelings and desires never before felt so strongly for anyone coming to the fore. His heart leapt as Lilia began running her hands over her entire body, her own breath quickening as much as his own, though he knew it wasn’t from the past few minutes’ activity, but from the same feelings in her that were rising within himself, as much as he knew there had been something mutual between them all along. He placed hand over chest, feeling his heart beating like a triphammer.

Lilia let out a gasping sigh, then opened her eyes. She looked straight at Ellis and smiled, expression almost pleading, arms outstretched. Her eagerness, her arms welcoming him in, her scent, and all that had preceded this moment… It had all become overwhelming for him, and he could no longer control his actions if he tried. He sank down onto the meadow beside her, drawing arms around her, feeling the heart inside her lean, athletic body beating as fast as his own as she threw her arms around him, drawing him in tightly.

Lilia gave an unrestrained cry of joy and passion as Ellis nuzzled her neck and ear and the side of her face. “Oh, Ellis, yes! Oh, I need you so much…” Hardly any further words were spoken as the two continued their celebration of the night, with no further concerns over anyone else seeing them here, with thoughts of any kind of interruption completely irrelevant. Their whole world consisted of each other and their own mutual pleasures.

Near the swimming cove on the east side of Lake Nicodemus, two others sat close together, watching the dappled reflection of the moonlight on the water.

One sighed and leaned her head on the other’s shoulder. “Oh, Tim, I could sit here like this all night.”

“It is beautiful, isn’t it, Lucy?”

“Yeah. It’s just too bad…that even though we can have moments like these, there still has to be any kind of trouble at all here.”

“You mean, like with Bertie and Tara?”

“Yeah. I know you said not to worry about it, and that it’ll turn out all right, but…ooh, I’d like to give…what’s-his-name there a piece of my mind. ‘Your own kind’…Uhhrrgh! I mean, what is it with guys like that? Why do they want to deliberately cause a lot of bad feelings, especially when no one’s done anything to deserve it?” She sighed again. “Sorry, Tim, I guess…now I’m the one who’s bringing things down.”

“That’s all right, Lucy. Bertie’s your litter-mate, you don’t want to see him hurt. I’ve felt the same way when someone made some thoughtless remark to Cynthia. Anyway…let’s try not to worry about anyone or anything else for a while, okay?”

“Okay. Still…there’s something…not about Bertie and Tara, but about Ellis. I don’t know, I’m not really worried, but something’s going on with him too, I’m sure of it.”

“How do you mean?”

“Whenever I saw him today, he seemed to have something on his mind that just preoccupied him totally. A couple of times he’d go spacey right while we were talking, just forget what he was saying.”

“So now you’re wondering what my intuition has to say about him.”

“Well, yes. So tell me, O wise one, O great fountain of wisdom, what does the future hold for my dear brother Ellis?”

Taking her teasing in stride, Timothy replied, “Well, let me think about him, and picture him in my mind the last time I saw him today…” He closed his eyes, concentrating intently; and Lucy, despite her mild sarcasm, was genuinely concerned, and interested in hearing the answer. Upon opening his eyes, Timothy said, “Well, I…don’t quite know how to describe what I’ve just felt.”

Lucy frowned. “But…Ellis is in no kind of trouble, is he?”

“He’ll be all right, I’m sure of that. But there’s something else…it doesn’t seem to be related to what Bertie and Tara think might be a problem, but…it’s something that’ll affect everyone here, and…I can’t say if it’ll be in a good way or not. Maybe it’s too early to tell. I can say that someone, one individual, or possibly two, are at the center of it. But I can say for sure that Ellis isn’t one of them.”

“And there’s nothing more you can tell right now?”

“Wellll…there is one thing I’m worried about…”

“Oh?”

“I’m worried about what might happen if you keep teasing me like you were a minute ago while we’re sitting this close to the water.”

“Oh, really? And what might happen, O great exalted guru of the mountain?” She shifted position next to him.

“Oh, perhaps something like…this, maybe!” They were sitting at a spot where the bank rose about a foot above the water, unlike at the cove where a sloping beach had been maintained over the past two-plus years. So now, having caught her just off-balance enough, Timothy was able to tilt Lucy right over, in the direction that would take her right over the bank. Right in mid-teeter, though, Lucy was able to reach out a hand and grab Timothy’s foot. Thus partially stabilized, she was able to reach out her other hand, grab his other foot, and send both of them tumbling over the bank.

It quickly became clear to each of them that the other had expected a course of action like this. Neither really cared, though, as they filled the next few minutes with laughter and frolicking in the shallows. They swam and dived, splashed each other, and otherwise—in their own way—celebrated this night’s near-magical quality.

After climbing back on the bank, they shook off as much excess water as they could, then sat down together again and took turns toweling each other dry. “This is so amazing, Tim,” said Lucy as he dried her back. “I still can’t get over how we can do all this at night, without worrying about being attacked by anything.”

“I know, right? Not even in the relative security of Thorn Valley could we have a moonlight swim.” He sighed as he spread the towel out on the grass. Both sat down on it, arms around waists, gazing up at the starry sky. “Mom and Dad always like to tell us about how much they loved starry skies, and the effect it had on them.”

“Mm-hm. So did my folks.” They looked upon each other, smiling; then an errant breeze came their way, making them both shiver slightly. They laughed, hugging each other more tightly. They gazed into each other’s eyes again, and in a moment of sheer spontaneity pressed their lips together. They kissed gently, tentatively at first but feeling increasingly comfortable even as they felt their whole beings tingle with the newfound sensation.

“Did you like that?” asked Timothy when they’d finished.

“No,” said Lucy, looking uncertain; then she dropped the façade. “I loved it.” They quickly picked up where they’d left off.

When they paused this time, Lucy said, “Oh, Tim…I had no idea you could kiss like that.”

“You’re not so bad yourself, lady.” Timothy grinned, rubbing her nose playfully. “Actually, I didn’t know I could kiss like that.”

“That was your first? Wow, I’d never have guessed. Wasn’t there ever…anyone else?”

“No, not really. The closest was…boy, you won’t believe this. When we first came here, I had…a big crush on Isabella when she was our chief babysitter.”

Lucy gaped, shaking her head and giving Timothy’s shoulder a push. “Get out! Isabella? Our First Lady, married to Justin?”

“The very same. She was just so…so nice, there’s no other way to put it. I’d never met anyone like her, mouse or rat. I knew I’d never have a chance with her, especially when she and Justin made it clear to everyone that they were a real couple. But I guess…that’s why I want to see Bertie and Tara accepted as a couple. They should be able to make it work just like any of us.”

“I feel the same way. And does that include…you and me?”

“You bet.” They kissed again, and then resumed looking out over the lake and sky. They were silent for the most part, but both were thinking about others in their families who were in loving relationships: Martin and Karen, who were as deeply and passionately in love as their own parents were in the beginning and very much still; and Cynthia and Michael, and how serious they were becoming about their love affair. Though they were happy for their respective siblings, they both felt, without actually discussing it aloud, that they were in no hurry in their own relationship, taking things easy, letting things grow and develop without forcing anything, as their parents had long advised. But just because they didn’t put their mutual feelings on display to the degree their siblings did, or hadn’t yet taken it to such a physical degree, didn’t mean their love was any less strong, or getting stronger.

When both started yawning, they agreed it was time to call it a night. They gathered their things and began a slow and easy stroll back to the Mouse community.

Chapter 7 - A rude awakening

Still half-asleep and unaware of his surroundings, Ellis stirred, making low grumbling sounds. He stretched out and felt a slight chill, which brought him to complete wakefulness. Upon opening his eyes, he was disoriented for a moment at seeing the open sky above and the grass that surrounded him; then he realized he’d spent all night here, and in another instant realized why. Lying on his right side, he could see that the sun had already risen, though it wasn’t yet visible over the Rooftop ridge.

He turned to his left and immediately saw her, though she wasn’t lying down; she was already awake and sitting upright on her haunches, with her head down. Ellis smiled as he recalled what they’d shared last night. “Lilia…good morning,” he said quietly as he sat up. But there was no apparent reaction from her. Maybe she’s still asleep, he thought; maybe she normally sleeps sitting upright. “Lilia…are you awake?” he said a bit louder. “It got a bit chilly overnight, didn’t it?” Still no reaction. Ellis came up beside her, touching her arm. “Lilia…what’s the matter? Are you all right?” She raised her head slightly, turning one eye toward him, and shrank away from him.

Ellis was incredulous, in no way prepared for this kind of reaction. “Lilia, please talk to me. Tell me what’s wrong.”

Without warning she shot to her feet and started away, sprinting on all fours toward the colonies. Ellis instantly began to follow. “Lilia, wait! Why are you leaving?” He suddenly found he had to run to catch up with her. When he did, he took her arm, bringing her to a standstill. “Lilia, please tell me what’s wrong.” He put both hands on her shoulders, facing her directly, but she wouldn’t look him in the eye. “Was it me? Did I hurt you in some way? If I did, you…you have to believe I didn’t mean to. I thought that you and I…both wanted to…”

Lilia backed away from him. “I…I really have to go. Please…just leave me alone.” She darted off again, leaving Ellis’s mind in a jumble and too mystified to follow her; at least at first. What just happened? What went wrong? After all they’d shared last night, all of which they’d both done willingly, even eagerly, how could her attitude toward him have changed so radically? It was as if she were repulsed by his very touch; indeed, by his very presence. Was he responsible? He had to have answers.

With renewed determination, he resumed following her, calling out her name. He still had her in his sight; he saw her approach the end of the blackberry thicket, and go completely around it and out of his sight for a few seconds. Ellis put on a burst of speed to catch up again, but when he rounded the thicket himself, Lilia was nowhere in sight. He glanced back and forth, scratching his head as he slowly scanned the area. It was a mostly open area, so she shouldn’t have been able to slip away from his sight so quickly. Unless…maybe she ran around the other end of the thicket, and would double back to try to throw him off. He made for the other end, rounded it…and suddenly met with something solid which shouldn’t have been there, which sent him sprawling.

It quickly became clear that this was someone, not something. Lilia? But another moment made it clear; it was another mouse—but not just another mouse—who sat on the ground in front of him, rubbing at his forehead where it had connected with Ellis’s.

“Whoa…Reuben. Didn’t expect to see you here.”

“You should watch where you’re going.” Reuben got to his feet, brushing himself off. “You shouldn’t go rushing around blind corners like that.” His tone was no different from the usual: flat, unexpressive, austere.

“Hey, I’m sorry, okay? You know I didn’t mean it. I was looking for Lilia, I thought she might have…” He paused, noticing the expression on Reuben’s face—not angry or accusatory, but still very stern and intense—and simultaneously realized, with a sinking feeling, what Reuben’s presence right here and now might mean. “Uh, Reuben, did you…I mean, were you here…uh, last night, when…” What, or how much he’d actually seen Ellis could only guess.

Reuben only nodded, expression still grim, as if he would explode in anger any moment.

Ellis sighed, resigned to not being able to talk his way around the matter. “So I guess…you know already about Lilia and me. Look,” he added quickly, words tumbling out and over each other, “I never meant for any of that to happen, it…it just happened. All the dancing and everything, the sky, the moon and…and her. She was just so…so beautiful, so…enticing. I didn’t force her into any of it, you gotta believe me; any more than she forced me. Come on, Reuben, say something. Don’t just stare like that.”

Abruptly Reuben’s expression softened, showing more confusion than anger or resentment. “I…don’t understand, I just don’t understand…” He walked past Ellis, seeming to ignore him.

Ellis followed. “What…what don’t you understand?”

Reuben glanced at Ellis, looking annoyed at the question. “I don’t know what’s happening with her lately. This is not like her at all, this sneaking out at night without my knowing. And now this.”

“Maybe she’s just…coming out of her shell since coming here.” Ellis knew how lame this sounded, and by now clichéd, but didn’t know what else to say.

Reuben shook his head. “All I know is she needs help. I’m not sure exactly how, but I’ve got to try.”

“Well, let me help, too. There’s a lot of us that want to.”

Reuben stopped and looked directly at Ellis. “She’s my responsibility. I’m her brother, I know her better than anyone.”

“Are you really sure of that? You just said she isn’t acting like herself lately.”

Reuben glared at Ellis and started to walk away again. Ellis followed again. “I’m sorry, that was uncalled for. The point is, you’re not the only one who wants to help her, and I think you know that as well as I do.”

“Ellis, please just leave us alone. Don’t try to see her anymore.”

Reuben increased his speed, and Ellis stood confused, at a loss for what to say or think as he watched Reuben race away. Now what? There were still too many unanswered questions, and he knew his mind would not be at ease until they were no longer so. He thought of last night, the moments of passionate tenderness they’d shared, after which they’d curled up together staring up at the star-filled sky before falling asleep. He could not comprehend how it all could have led to her rejection of him just minutes ago. Maybe this is all due to some change within her that would have taken place regardless of whether or not they’d met. But he still couldn’t help feeling he himself was at least partially responsible. He thought of how he’d regarded Lilia and Reuben the night before last—as a mystery to be explored. He never would have believed he’d become this involved—intimately involved, no less. And he hadn’t a clue as to what to do next.

He again thought of Lilia, of how small and terrified she’d looked just minutes ago, and felt close to tears at the thought that he might be responsible. The last thing he wanted was to hurt her, in any way, and he had to reach out to her, somehow. But Reuben said not to see her. All right, Reuben, he thought, maybe that would be best. For now, at least. But what about himself, and all that he was going through now? He had to talk to somebody about this. Reuben said nothing about not telling anyone else about this, not that Ellis would let that stop him if he had.

He sighed as he approached his clothing, lying where he’d shed it last night. He was already late for breakfast; and as he put his tunic on, he recalled how he’d told his parents that he’d probably be staying out late, and he knew they likely wouldn’t be worrying too much about his whereabouts all night. Maybe—no, make that definitely—they should be the ones he should talk to. It may not be easy—at least for himself—but he could see no alternative. He was certain that if he were honest about everything, they’d understand.

“And that’s about it, really. I couldn’t do anything but just stand there for a minute, and then I knew the best thing would be to talk to you.” Ellis sighed and finished his floor-pacing, joining his parents on the divan. “I just can’t help feeling responsible, somehow. I wish I’d never come that way the night before last. I just saw her, and…and I couldn’t turn away. That first day, when she and Reuben arrived, there was something there, some connection. I’d only seen her a few times after that, very briefly, but each time…there was still something there. I knew she was interested in me. I was never sure why, but…she fascinated me, too. And when I saw her out there, acting like I’d never expected her to act, I just…” He paused, shaking his head. “I don’t know what to think now.”

Kimball and Patricia looked at each other thoughtfully. Of course they were well aware of their son’s fascination for Lilia since her arrival, and had advised him as they had all their offspring when pursuing a possible love interest. He’d promised them he’d be kind and patient with her—not that there was any doubt—and in light of how little she and Reuben had changed since their arrival, they and others could understand if his patience was starting to wear thin. But when Ellis quietly asked to talk to his parents privately at breakfast, after which they returned to their quarters and he told them all about what happened last night and this morning, including the more personal details, they found these new developments just as baffling as Ellis.

“Ellis,” said Kimball, “what…exactly did Reuben say when you saw him this morning? About Lilia, I mean.”

“Well…he said that even he didn’t understand the way she’d been. And he’s the one who’s supposed to know her better than anyone. That’s the weirdest thing about all this. And he still thinks he’s the only one who can help her.”

“Whatever is wrong with her,” added Patricia, “It has to be something serious, something that Reuben won’t be able to deal with on his own.”

“That’s exactly what I thought. I want to help her, but when he said to stay away, I thought that, well, maybe he could help her on his own, in some way. But if he can’t, how long before he’ll admit it to anyone? If she’s hurting, I couldn’t stand the thought of that going on any longer than it has to.”

Patricia patted her son’s hand. “We’re so proud of you, dear, for being so compassionate. But…I think we should consider Reuben’s feelings too. It sounds like he’s worried sick over Lilia, just like you are. And he is her brother.”

“And he knows her better than any of us, I know.” Ellis sighed, nodding.

“This may seem an abrupt question, Ellis,” said Kimball, “but just how do you feel about Lilia? Do you love her?”

“I…really can’t say, Dad. I do care for her; after last night, how could I not care for her? I know that you’re…probably not too crazy about…what we did, that we both should have been sure we were in love first…”

“No, that’s all right, Ellis. It’s not the same for everyone, and we’re not going to judge you on that. Look at Vincent; he’d mated with all those females, and he apparently had no desire to be a husband to any of them.”

“And Lilia’s his daughter,” added Patricia. “I wonder…is there some connection there? With all those things that seemed odd about Vincent… Ah, I’m…not sure how to put this…”

“I think I know what you’re trying to say, Mom,” said Ellis. “Most of Vincent’s children seem pretty normal—Boris, Torrance, Hazel, the younger ones—but these two are definitely something different. But I’ve already decided that I can’t turn away from them, Lilia or Reuben. I’ve become too involved in their lives, whether Reuben likes it or not. I’ve got to see this through.”

“So what do you plan on doing, right now?”

“I don’t know, Dad. I said I’d stay away from them for the time being, but how long should that be?”

“Perhaps,” suggested Patricia, “You should give it at least a day, dear; and we should, too, as well. I know how much you want to help her, but we should also respect Reuben’s wishes. Maybe he can help her, in some way.”

“Yeah, maybe. All right, I’ll try to take it a day at a time.”

“Things will be clearer tomorrow, son,” said Kimball. “I really believe that.”

“I guess. Say, that reminds me: has there been anything new found in Vincent’s notes? Something that might shed some light on what’s going on lately?”

“Very good question.” In recent days, research and organization of Vincent’s notes had resumed after a several-week period of relative inactivity, during which other matters took a higher priority. The last major discovery had been that of Vincent’s outside activities during which he’d fathered several offspring; and now that work on his notes had picked up again, Kimball had been one of those that had all but taken over the task, along with Johnathan and occasionally Ages. “It’s something we’d suspected before, but some notes we’ve recently discovered would seem to confirm it. In most of them he’s not very forthcoming about his feelings, but we found a few pages in which he articulates them very well, in at least one case to a…rather disturbing degree. Based on these, we believe he might have been agoraphobic.”

“Meaning he had a fear of…”

“Of open areas, and leaving home. Of being too far away from where he felt the most safe and secure.”

“And that would be inside a place like NIMH? Go figure. Still, it does explain quite a bit.”

“Indeed. Not the least of which is why I could never convince him to come live with us.”

“Or why he wouldn’t come with you to Thorn Valley,” added Patricia. “The prospect of such a long trip must have been terrifying.”

“It’s just another thing he couldn’t tell me,” said Kimball, sighing. “He said that his ‘mission’ had to go on, but he might have been trying to cover his fear of leaving home. He might have been too ashamed to tell us the truth.”

“And not even in that last message that he left for me, that Karen, Martin and I found. It’s all so sad. He should be here now, with us, with the children he never knew. I just know he’d be proud of them.”

“I know he would too. Every time I visited him, he’d always extend his best wishes to our whole family, and one time he said he envied me for the domestic life I had.”

Ellis nodded thoughtfully. “I guess, then, he’d want us all to take care of his kids, to look after them, and help them if they were in any kind of trouble.”

Kimball smiled, putting a hand on Ellis’s shoulder. “There’s no taking your mind off the subject, is there? That’s quite all right, though. We’re proud that you’re willing to take on this kind of responsibility.” He gave his son a quick hug.

“We certainly are,” added Patricia, following suit. “But you still won’t try to see Lilia today, though?”

“No. I’ll give it at least another day. Uh, Mom, Dad…I really appreciate all this. It wasn’t easy, admitting all this stuff.”

“You know you can tell us anything, anytime,” said Patricia. “And we’re glad you did.”

Most human observers would surely find much of the content of the preceding conversation to be hard to believe, even outrageous. But in contrast to much of human society, these creatures have little or no problem with discussing such matters openly. By and large, parents will very readily accept their children’s sexuality as a matter of course, as much a part of life as eating or sleeping, work or play; and when a true attraction is there, they will accept that as well, with little interference.

“Thanks, Mom,” Ellis now said. “Well…I’ve got a few classes to get to, and I’ll probably help out with some planting today, too. So I guess there’s plenty to keep my mind off this for a while.”

“All right, son,” said Kimball. “But don’t forget the general meeting. It’ll start just after lunch.”

“Oh, yeah. Thanks for reminding me. See you later. Love you guys.” He waved goodbye, and walked out the front door of their quarters. As caught up in his own problems as he was, he had almost forgotten about Bertie’s situation with Tara, and the matter they felt warranted a general meeting. Though he and Bertie were often at odds and didn’t always see eye to eye, Ellis wouldn’t dream of not supporting his brother in his time of need.

Chapter 8 - Encroaching ills?

Justin cast his gaze all about the amphitheater-styled assembly hall, smiling as he regarded the crowd. The overwhelming majority of the Rats were present, of course, as were most of the recently-swelled Mouse community, and many children accompanied their parents. This time, the Rusay visitors, gathered in a small cluster in the lowermost seats, added to the variety. This increased diversity reminded Justin of the principal subject of this meeting, and how some among the council were skeptical about the Rusay’s participation and about children attending. There could be some unpleasant truths revealed, it was argued, that could taint the image that had been projected to previous visitors. But, it was further argued, no one here had been trying to present Freethorn as a completely idyllic society, without so much as a cross word between two individuals. It was true that most would try to be on his or her best behavior when any of the Rusay was around, but that was simply part of everyone’s inclination to show hospitality. However, it was widely agreed that there shouldn’t be a concentrated effort made to gloss over or try to put a façade on any internal problems that may exist. They had nothing to hide from their visitors; this was their world, after all, and too much secrecy could be misinterpreted as a plot toward something sinister or harmful. So ultimately it was agreed to let the visitors sit in, and let the chips fall where they may. Indeed, it should prove enlightening; it would be an excellent showcase for how the Freethorners went about finding solutions to their problems.

On the floor and around the dais, some councilmembers carried on some conversation before taking their seats. One approached Justin. “Well, Justin, I think it’s about time, don’t you?”

Justin turned. “I guess so, Colbert. It looks like anybody who’s going to show up has already.” He looked toward the ones whose concerns prompted this meeting, seated on the lowermost row, and they exchanged nods. He stood up, and the steady buzz of conversation in the chamber began to die down.

“Good afternoon, everyone. We’re glad you were all able to come. Now…it would be my guess that most of you don’t know why this meeting was called. But instead of my telling you, I’ll now turn the floor over to someone better qualified, whose firsthand experiences have led to our being here today. Most of you know them: Bertram and Tara.”

The pair, seated in the lowermost row, stood up and walked to the dais, amid renewed whispering and muttering, as well as some applause. Bertie climbed up on a chair so he could be seen a bit better, Tara beside him; and as they faced the assemblage, both felt some butterflies, and swallowed hard. They’d been determined to see this through, but now that they were here, they couldn’t help feeling some apprehension.

“Let’s not forget, Bertie,” Tara said quietly. “I know it feels like we’re being judged, but we’re not on trial here. Our complaint’s legit, one hundred percent. Let’s not forget that for a second.”

“Yeah. Okay…” Bertie turned to face the crowd. “Can everyone hear me out there? Okay. Something happened to me ’n’ Tara yesterday, and we thought the council should know about it. Then, they decided everyone should hear about it. So…here goes.”

Each of them took turns describing the incident, though not mentioning Thurman by name. Afterwards, Tara said, “Now we know all of you think it’s unusual for us to be this way. We think so too, honestly. We didn’t mean for any of it to happen; but how is that different from anyone else here? Did any of us plan to fall in love? Of course not. But that’s what has happened here, just like any of you. We are in love, and it’s as genuine as it is with any of you who are in love with one of ‘your own kind’.” Tara paused as she and Bertie moved closer to embrace each other; then she went on: “That’s why we wanted it all brought out in the open like this, so that there wouldn’t be any doubts in anyone’s mind about what’s going on with us.”

“And now that that’s done,” said Bertie, “I think there’s somebody else here who has something to share with everyone…and he knows who he is.” They both looked straight toward one particular face in the crowd, having already picked him out.

By now, there were others who were aware that he was the “culprit” in this incident, either as witnesses, like Jarman and Lothar, or by word of mouth. Now, Thurman found himself the target of a growing number of eyes in the room, and it was having a noticeable effect. He glanced back and forth nervously, fidgeting. His own friends and relatives quietly encouraged him; and soon, realizing he’d been backed into a corner with no other way out, he stood up to face the one he’d wronged. He glanced down to the lower rows, spotting his parents Orson and Lucretia looking up at him, offering their own silent show of support.

Clearing his throat, he began, “Uh, look, Tara, I…I didn’t think you’d be that upset. I—I’m sorry. Really.”

“All right. I guess I can accept that. But why’d you say it in the first place? If you didn’t mean to hurt my feelings, then what were you thinking? What were you trying to prove?”

Thurman looked up, appearing genuinely unsure of how to answer. “I don’t know. I’m just…I’m sorry. I don’t know what else to say.” He shrugged and sat down. Numerous quiet discussions ensued throughout the chamber.

Tara herself was unsure of what to say or do next. Though she was glad to have gotten a very public apology out of Thurman, she felt unsatisfied. Looking at Bertie, she could tell he felt much the same. They both turned to the councilmembers seated in front of them. Tara’s parents Derek and Claire and older brother Godfrey, and Bertie’s parents and siblings gave smiles and nods of approval and encouragement.

Then Justin stood up and called for everyone’s attention. “Friends…I know some of you are thinking, ‘What more needs to be said? He apologized, didn’t he?’ Well, we didn’t encourage everyone to attend this meeting if we thought that nothing more than an apology was in the offing. That much we agreed upon last night, when Bertram and Tara came to us with their problem. No, we believe this may go beyond one individual’s thoughtless remark. We’ve heard evidence that there are those who may harbor attitudes that could prove unhealthy to the harmony and stability of this colony, and we want to get to the bottom of them, and bring them out into the open.”

Bertie and Tara, who had since returned to their seats, exchanged knowing glances.

“We have reason to believe that there are others who, for whatever reason, resent the idea of a relationship like that of these two, but unlike Thurman, aren’t as vocal about it. Now, everyone has a right to his or her opinion, and we don’t want to pin accusations on anyone or persecute anyone for them. All we want is an exchange of ideas here, to try and understand why anyone might feel that way. So, to anyone who does…we want to hear from you.” Justin looked back and forth across the chamber. Everyone was doing the same, waiting for someone to stand.

One young female rat stood. “Well…I think it’s all right, that Tara and Bertie are going together, if they really feel that way about each other. But at the same time…it seems almost wrong, just because they’re of two different species, and couldn’t have children together. I don’t know why, but I can’t help feeling that way.” She shrugged and sat down.

“All right, Veronica,” said Justin. “That’s perfectly valid. Anyone else?”

Two others stood and admitted that they felt much the same; then, from among the council seated at the center of the room, another stood and announced she had something to add.

“Go ahead, Velma,” said Justin to his mother-in-law.

She cleared her throat. “I have…no especial problem with these two being together, but…well, must they be so…so open about it?” This question met with a curious murmur throughout the crowd. “I mean, there they were the other night, carrying on without a care, right where everyone can see…”

“Ah, Velma, my dear,” said Colbert, who came up beside her, “I don’t recall your having any objections to you and me behaving in a like manner when we were courting.”

“But we never carried on that…that obviously.”

In the stands, Sithpha and Dinilom exchanged glances, having witnessed for themselves Velma’s display of indignance two nights previous.

“But haven’t we always shown affection publicly, without worrying about what others think?” brought up Charlotte.

“Yes, that’s never been an issue before,” said her husband Norriss. “Why should it bother you now, Velma?”

“Or does it only bother you in this case?”

Velma looked aghast. “Charlotte! What are you accusing me of? Am I the one who’s on trial here?”

“You needn’t be so defensive, dear,” said Colbert. “No one’s accusing you.”

“I guess I should remind you, Velma,” said Justin, “That we’re only trying to arrive at some mutual understanding, or at least acceptance here.”

“I do wonder, though,” said Norriss, “why you would make it sound as if someone is on trial.”

Velma glanced among their faces. “Why, I didn’t mean it like that. I only meant…I was just…” She put her head down, her shoulders visibly sagging. “All right. I admit it. I do have a problem with Tara and…and Bertram being together like that. It just…seems wrong. I can’t really explain it. A rat and a mouse who can’t have children together, who can’t do anything except…”

“…Except give each other all the love and affection they have,” finished Colbert. “Just like yours and mine.”

“And which your daughter and I share,” added Justin, smiling at Isabella.

Chastened and more than a little embarrassed, Velma was unsure of what to say for a moment. “So…what great conclusion have we made from all this?”

“Well, I had one small idea,” said Tallus, standing. “It’s that same old bugaboo, that’s cropped up time and again since we founded our first colony.”

Johnathan Brisby joined him. “You mean, that old instinctive feeling, that because we’re two different species, there’s only so much we can do together, and living in close quarters to each other being foremost among those things we can’t do…or perhaps, think we can’t do.”

“Exactly, Johnathan. And yet…perhaps this is only my observation, but I think that since the Mouse population has grown so much larger of late, it’s an inclination that has proven to be largely irrelevant. We work together in our shops and fields. We Rats have all made close friends among the Mice. Our children attend classes and play together the day long. Why, except for our living quarters being separate, ‘that old instinctive feeling’ has virtually fallen by the wayside.”

“Obviously, though,” added Johnathan, “it remains stronger in some of us than in others.”

“Would you say then, Velma,” said Justin, “that Tallus’s theory holds true in your case?”

“Oh, I suppose it does. I mean, I understand the point of it all, intellectually. But it still bothers me.”

“Ask yourself this, then:” said Tallus. “If Bertram and Tara were merely friends instead of lovers, would you be as bothered?”

“Why, no. Of course not.”

“Consider, then, this too: we’ve long agreed that this instinct is derived from the way our ordinary counterparts relate to each other. Natural rats and mice don’t coexist the way we do; so why do we cling so tenaciously to this idea when it comes to actually living close together, or being more than friends? We do so many other things unlike our ordinary counterparts; why, then, should this still be a problem?”

Simone stood up next. “I was thinking back to a discussion we had long ago, just after the Escape, when we first tried to decide where we’d go and what we’d do now that we were free. We agreed that we couldn’t go back to where we came from before NIMH captured us, because it wouldn’t seem like home anymore to us, because everyone we knew would be gone. It was Jenner who brought up the more relevant point: that we couldn’t go back to the way we lived before, because we were no longer rats or mice; we were the creations of the NIMH scientists. In the nearly three years that we were the subjects of their experiments, we had ceased to be as we were before. Essentially, we had died and were reborn. We’d all realized, in that time, that we’d never be the same again, but it wasn’t till we’d had that discussion that we knew how much we all shared that same realization.

“And look at how it’s been borne out since then. If we thought our lifestyle became removed from that of natural rats while we lived on the Fitzgibbons farm, look at how much further it went after we moved to Thorn Valley, and even more so since we came to Lahaikshe. Since we’re no longer on Earth, we no longer live in fear of human discovery. Consequently, we spend more time outdoors in broad daylight. As time goes by, we’ll eventually be as far removed from our natural counterparts as humans are.”

The point touched off many small discussions throughout the hall, with others lending much support to Simone’s point.

From Brutus, Captain of the Guard: “We still maintain the Guard, and conduct our roving patrols day and night. But with the greatest threat here being an occasional ‘pantry raid’ by a mhys’haspa, there’s been talk of disbanding it. With everyone feeling so safe and secure, with nothing to guard against, is it still essential? But I suppose that could be the subject of a whole other meeting.”

From Tallus: “Three of my grandchildren are working on a treehouse, which they say one or two of them might actually move into permanently one day. When they first told me this, I thought: rats living in trees, like squirrels? Whoever heard of such a thing? Yet, the more I thought about it, the more sense it made, for the very reasons we’ve discussed today.”

From Anna: “We spend so many more hours these days outdoors, day and night. This was certainly a case where we made a conscious and determined effort to change old habits. There’s less and less that we think and do that could be attributed to instinct.”

From Teresa Brisby: “When we first came to Thorn Valley, just before Dad returned to us, we wondered how much we’d have in common with all the Rat children. It didn’t take long to realize how much we were the same. And since then, it’s only gotten better.” She reached out to join hands with some of her Rat friends.

From Boris: “It’s been the same with us, Seelah and me, and my siblings, just in the short time that we’ve been here. I’d never have believed before that I could make friends with any rats so easily.”

Finally Bertie Davis added: “You know, yesterday someone told me something that I thought hit the nail on the head. I told him that, and I still think he’s right. He said that Tara and I being in love is just another example of how things are different here. It was Teelo, my sister Louann’s husband, who said that. And he’s one of those that some of you call natural or ‘ordinary’.”

Some in the chamber, including some in the council, seemed a bit embarrassed, not wanting to admit that they’d been talking as if they’d forgotten that several naturals—mostly mice, but a handful of rats as well—made their homes here. Still, there was widespread agreement of Teelo’s observation, with many saying so out loud.

Justin thought briefly of how fond he’d become of Madeline Brisby on the occasions when she’d come to him for help so long ago; even musing, at one time, that if he’d been a mouse, or she a rat, that they could have been more than just the best of friends. In those days, he’d never have seriously entertained the notion of their being lovers; but what love he did have for her manifested itself in unselfish ways: in his concern for her family’s welfare when their home was threatened, for her safety when she volunteered for “Dragon duty” and was captured in the process, when Jenner threatened her over possession of the Stone; and, once Johnathan was determined to be still alive, for he and her being reunited. He had been open with both of them about this, and they understood, with no jealousy or tension on anyone’s part. Though he thought it probably inappropriate to bring up now, the foregoing discussion inevitably brought it to mind.

“Well,” said Simone, “I’d say we’ve come to a definite conclusion now.”

“I agree.” Justin addressed the crowd. “All right, then. If no one else has anything to add…” He paused for a moment. “Then let me conclude by saying—”

“Excuse me? Justin?” came a voice from the crowd, a bit hesitantly.

“Oh! Go ahead, Veronica.”

“Well…” The young girl-rat cleared her throat. “I understand the point of all this, and it really makes sense. I never would have thought that old instinctive thing ever applied to me in any way. But it just doesn’t seem to explain…some other things I’ve heard.”

“What other things?”

“Well…remarks here and there, about there being so many more Mice around here now.”

There were many surprised expressions throughout the hall, especially among the Mice. What could she mean? There had been nothing to indicate, since their arrival, that they’d been anything but welcome with open arms here. Everyone quieted down to better hear what else Veronica had to say.

“I mean, most of the things I’ve heard said about the mice in general have been complimentary, and I’ve heard a lot of good things said about individual ones. And I’ve made friends among them myself. But I’ve also heard things like, oh…‘Boy, there sure are a lot more of them around here lately’, said in a tone of voice that didn’t show a lot of approval. Or, ‘Every time I turn around, I’m tripping over them,’ or—this is the one I can hardly believe—‘Those little twerps always seem to be underfoot everywhere.’”

There were many very audible gasps, and other signs, verbal and visual, that this was disturbing news indeed. Justin and other councilmembers brought everyone to order to allow Veronica to continue.

“Now, I consider some of the Mice to be friends as good as some of the Rats I grew up with. I didn’t think much of Bertie and Tara’s relationship; I said it bothered me, but I understand why now. But I would never say anything like that. That’s just, like, downright hateful.”

“Veronica, why didn’t you ever say anything about this before?” asked her mother Zora, seated next to her.

“I wasn’t sure if it meant anything really important. But after everything else we talked about here, I thought it might after all.”

“Well, you were right to bring it to our attention, Veronica,” said Justin. “Thank you. Now…” He again cast his gaze across the chamber. “I think, just as Thurman was big enough to own up to his indiscretion, someone else has something to say right about now.” He made a sweeping gaze around, seeing a lot of heads turning this way and that curiously. After nearly a minute, one young rat stood, waving tentatively to gain Justin’s attention; one whose identity came as little surprise to some.

“I might have known,” Cynthia Brisby whispered to her mother, instantly recalling her run-in with this same individual, over an indiscretion which she already suspected would be similar to the one he was about to admit to.

Herbert, oldest son of Jemial and Francine, scratched his arm nervously. “Yeah, uhm…I was the one who said that they…you know, the mice, seem to be underfoot everywhere.”

“I see,” said Justin. “Tell us, then, Herbert…how exactly did you word that statement? Just as Veronica described?”

Herb looked down, fidgeting. He sighed. “Okay, so I did. I won’t deny it. But what of it? Those’re just words, I didn’t mean anything by them.”

“Didn’t you now? Just as you didn’t mean anything by some other statements you’ve been known to make, including that one while we were in the middle of the Hiding Plan, when we all had to especially cooperate with each other and rely on each other? Sure, we were all tired and feeling uncertain and on edge then, but still…”

“But I already apologized for that one. I don’t know what else I can say, Justin. Besides, you heard Veronica. I’m not the only one who’s said things like that.”

“He is right,” said Tallus, joining Justin on the dais. “And I’m beginning to wonder if it’s not symptomatic of certain things of which we discussed the possibility yesterday. We thought the incident with Bertram and Tara could possibly mean more than simply one person’s thoughtless remark, and…” He shook his head sadly. “…this new information would seem to lend credence to that theory.

“Now, we’ve long prided ourselves on being above the human race in many ways. Yet, for all their sophistication, their history is continually rife with cases of gross inhumanity, terrible things that they’ll do to each other. And why?” Tallus began pacing the floor, gesturing as he spoke. “Because of the perceptions of one group of people toward another, that they are superior because their customs and beliefs are so much better or ‘higher’ than those of the other group, or because they consider themselves inherently superior due to racial or ethnic differences, or ‘chosen’ or ‘favored’ by their deity. They think this perceived superiority justifies treating the other group as if they were less than human. None of it changes the fact that they are all human, and yet it all goes on, year after year, century after century; not only the attitudes, but what they lead to as well: wars, riots, mass starvations, grudges held for many generations. Admittedly, there are many who are willing to get to know each other as individuals, and not as one of a ‘superior’ or ‘inferior’ group…but not nearly enough to enable them to completely overcome their differences.”

“So, Tallus,” said Justin, “your point?” He knew full well, though, where Tallus was going with this discourse.

Tallus nodded, smiling confidently. “We, on the other hand, have actively taught our children to respect the differences of others unlike us, and emphasize what we hold in common over our differences. We have our ways, they have theirs, and we let it be. But with this new information, we must face the possibility that, along with intelligence and emotional makeup that is more humanlike, we may also have gained some of the ills that plague humankind. If this is true, then ‘gain’ is definitely the wrong word. It would be a loss—a terrible, tragic loss.” Tallus abruptly stepped down to take his seat, and for almost a minute hardly anyone spoke out loud as his words took effect.

Then Justin again spoke. “Friends…if this theory holds true, then you don’t need me to tell you how potentially serious it is. I’m not going to call for anyone else who has expressed sentiments like Herbert’s to come forward; at least not yet. But if you’re out there, it’s you I’m speaking to, and you know who you are. Now, there is the possibility that this is one more attitude that can be attributed to ‘that old instinctive feeling.’ I’d rather hope that it is; and yet, isn’t it also possible that we’re using that as a too-convenient excuse these days, something to fall back on instead of admitting to our shortcomings? Either way, it’s something that’s got to be overcome. Just as we’re bearing less and less resemblance to natural rats and mice, we must also not allow ourselves to fall prey to the darker aspects of humanity. We’ve always considered ourselves above all their social ills, and that we’re not so short-sighted as to let them befall us; we’ve even been a bit smug about it at times. Let’s keep it that way—preferably minus the smugness. You’ve all been taught that this is true; and I don’t believe there’s a single Rat or Mouse here who wants to live where there are those who resent others, openly or not, just because they look different or have different ways.”

Herbert was now standing and waving, looking like someone desperate to be heard. “Look, I don’t know about anyone else who might have said something like this, but I don’t think of mice that way. I don’t mean anyone any harm, and I sure don’t hate them. Yeah, I called them little twerps, and all that other stuff, but I didn’t mean to be insulting. I was just…kidding around, honest.”

“So it didn’t even occur to you,” said Johnathan, “that some of us, Mice and Rats alike, might find such words offensive or insulting? Laughter at the expense of others is not my idea of kidding around.”

Tallus stood again. “You can say, Herbert, that you weren’t serious, and we won’t dispute that. But you must realize that many statements made in jest won’t be interpreted that way by some, and sometimes the consequences can be serious, even tragic. You’ve been told before about how small disagreements or misunderstandings can feed upon themselves and grow into large ones. I’m not saying that’s inevitable here, or even remotely possible. Just food for thought; that’s all I’m offering.”

Matilda spoke next. “This reminds me of Jenner, and how we all thought his protest of the Plan was all his doing. We all know about Ghormfisk, the ‘mystery creature,’ now, but if he hadn’t tampered with Jenner’s mind, would everything have happened just the same? I thought I’d gotten that whole matter settled long ago, but all this talk now…it’s gotten me wondering all over again.”

From the stands, another stood to voice his views. “As you all know,” began Lambert, “when Martin and I made our trip to Sampson, we got separated, and I was forced to run with a gang of rats who could be really mean and vicious, to mice as well as other rats. Not all of them were that bad, of course; some believed they had no other choice except to be a part of the gang. But others—especially their so-called leader, who was no more than a common bully—could be really cruel. I saw firsthand their handiwork, some while it was being committed, and I couldn’t do a thing to stop it, though I did manage to convince them to go easy a couple of times. I’ll tell you now, there’s absolutely no way I’ll go through anything remotely like that ever again. Maybe there’s no one here who seriously thinks that all the mice shouldn’t be living here, just because they’re a different species; but if there is—and there are a lot of us who feel this way—then someone’ll be packing his bags, and it won’t be me.”

Many cheers of agreement greeted Lambert, who went on: “There’s no room here for that kind of intolerance. We plan on starting our family soon, Bertha and I…” He glanced down at his fiancée, who beamed back. “…and our kids are not going to grow up in an atmosphere like that.” He made to sit down, then added: “Oh, and by the way…I thought I’d mention in passing that these two sitting next to me are probably my two closest friends, next to Bertha.” Lambert sat down, clasping hands with Martin and Karen.

Nearby, Teresa stood. “Lambert took the words right out of my mouth. I didn’t bring my babies here to have them grow up with that kind of prejudice…or any kind of prejudice. If there is anyone who really does feel that way, then…stop. Please…just let it end.”

Colbert spoke next. “And if there are any of you who truly resent their presence, for whatever reason, might I remind you that if it weren’t for the sacrifice and enormous suffering one of them made for you—and for all of us—there’s a very good chance none of us would be having this discussion now. Rather, some or even all of us would be dead or in captivity. Think on that!” As his final words, delivered sharply but without anger, reverberated throughout the hall, Colbert looked toward Kimball in the lowermost row, and the two gave each other an approving nod.

Simone came out to the dais again. “And if you try, and still find having mice living among you intolerable, then please feel free to leave anytime, just as Lambert said.”

“I agree,” said Justin, “but let’s keep a proper perspective on this, everyone. We don’t want to turn this into a witch hunt.”

Another mouse stood. “This may be straying from the subject,” said Marie Davis, “but in my travels after I left home, there were several times where I saw how bad some humans could be to others. Once, I saw a man threaten another that if he didn’t hand over his wallet and other things, he’d shoot him. I could see the gun in his hand. Even though the other man did as he was told, he still got hit very hard over the head with the gun. Maybe that was better than if he’d been shot, but it still hurt him badly. Someone called for an ambulance, so I suppose he did recover. I don’t know why that man would do such a thing, what would drive him to it, just for a few material things. But the thought of any of us turning as bad as that, showing such coldness or disregard for others…it just chills me to the bone.”

“Yes,” continued Tallus, “listen to this young lady, everyone. She and her whole family have lived close by humans all these years that the rest of us regularly saw only one family of them, so she knows whereof she speaks. Even I, for all my professed wide body of knowledge, have little or no firsthand experience in many areas in which I’ve been called an expert.”

“I know beyond a doubt that Marie has witnessed some bad things,” said Johnathan. “But it seems to me that throughout this whole meeting, we’ve painted rather a bleak and negative picture of humankind…and we all know that’s not the whole picture.”

“Yes,” added Teresa, “They’re not all that bad; in fact, most aren’t. Look at Howard Travis.”

One of Tallus’s sons, Eamonn, mathematics teacher at Thorn Valley School, stood. “Yes, and I was one of those who thought that we shouldn’t have become so friendly with him while he was here. By the time he left, I had to admit that he wasn’t at all what I’d expected. I said to Jenni-Lynn that he would have made a good rat.”

There was some laughter from the crowd; then Johnathan said, “And of course, there was that spell of Gwinthrayle’s, which placed Howard’s and my minds in rapport. There are many specific details I’ve forgotten about that whole experience, but I can say without qualification that Howard is one of the finest examples of humanity there is: kind, helpful, generous, considerate of others, close to his family. He’s not perfect by any means; he doesn’t think of himself that way. He’s made many mistakes in his life—things he said out of turn, times when he was sure about his way and later seeing where he went wrong. But he was never intentionally cruel to anyone. Most of the things he’d done wrong could be chalked up to youthful inexperience.”

This elicited some more low discussion; then Colbert spoke. “You know, that reminds me of an incident from long ago, during our journey from NIMH. We were following a road, staying out of sight, when several humans, all children, approached from the opposite direction, walking along the shoulder. There were four of them, all boys, as I recall, and one of them was walking ahead of the others, and looking rather upset. Simone, you remember this, don’t you? We were the ones who were closest to the road.”

“Yes, I do, now that you mention it. Those other kids weren’t very nice, were they?”

“That was my immediate impression. The first one looked as if he only wanted to be left alone, but the other three just wouldn’t oblige. They called him all manner of rude names, they threw stones at him, said ugly things about his family, and even I knew they couldn’t be all true. I had to wonder, what had he done to those other three boys to warrant such cruelty? There were no clues obvious to us; to look at him, he didn’t seem especially different from them in any obvious way. I couldn’t help but wonder if the lad had to endure this sort of thing every day, and about the effect it might have on him in later years. We both concluded that the others were heartless, pathetic little wretches who had some perverse need to cause pain. But later on I realized that they probably just hadn’t received proper guidance from their elders, that they hadn’t been taught to respect the feelings of others. It’s not something they’re born with innately.”

There was more quiet discussion in the chamber; then Justin said, “Well, everyone…it’s just possible we have reached a conclusion now.”

“So,” ventured Norriss, “is that also true with some of our children? That any untoward remarks made about mice can be attributed to youthful indiscretion? And…that perhaps some of us have failed to teach them properly?”

“I don’t have a definite answer. I don’t think any of us do. But at least we’ve brought these matters out before everyone and discussed them openly. As Tallus said, we’ve given everyone food for thought. To reiterate: if there is anyone who honestly believes that Rats and Mice shouldn’t be sharing Freethorn, then remember free choice. As long as no one is hurt and the community as a whole isn’t placed in danger, then everyone is free to do as he or she will. Since our earliest days at the Rosebush Colony, this has been our foremost edict. I think we all agree that such attitudes as we’ve discussed fall outside both categories. But whether anyone seriously feels that way or not, we all need to be more careful in what we say to each other, and make sure that we’re not misunderstood when we really don’t mean any harm. So…does anyone have any other comments?”

Willis stepped forward. “Just one. I don’t want anyone to think I’m making light of this whole matter, because I’m not. But there’s an element to all this that we seem to have overlooked. Is it possible that, sometimes, we take the words of ourselves and each other too seriously or too literally? Just a little?” He turned and sat down, leaving more discussion in his wake.

Bertie and Tara looked at each other, wondering if this didn’t apply to them. Had they been too thin-skinned? Neither was a stranger to having friends and family tell them they needed to lighten up.

Justin smiled to himself, and his eyes met Madeline Brisby’s; she smiled back, both having been reminded of his own contention, back when they’d first met, that the Rats tended to take themselves too seriously. He, and others, came to realize how true that was; and while it was widely recognized that they were overall less reserved and more carefree these days, it was possible that they still had a ways to go. “Well, on that note,” Justin finally said, “I can only say we now have more food for thought. This meeting is now adjourned.”

Rats and Mice began filing out of the chamber, though the Rusay visitors still remained, the adults still busily engaged in note-taking, though some of the children were a bit restless. Many small discussions continued, and the overall mood was upbeat; few seemed to believe that the subjects of the past hour’s discussion entailed any real crisis.

As Bertie and Tara made to leave, she remarked with amazement on how their relationship managed to spark so much lively discussion. Bertie was about to reply when Ellis caught up to them.

“Hey, you guys, that was really something, the way you stood up for yourselves back there.”

Tara thanked him, then Bertie said, “Yeah, Ellis, I wasn’t sure that, well…that you cared that much.”

“Are you kidding? It’s not like there was ever really any bad blood between us. You know I’d support you, especially in a matter like this. You know I’m happy for you both. And this whole thing has definitely given me something to think about. So I’ll see you later, okay?”

After goodbyes, Tara said, “Did it seem to you like he was in a hurry?”

“Yeah. And all day yesterday, he seemed to have something on his mind.”

“Maybe he’s meeting someone.”

“Can’t imagine who. Unless…no, that’s impossible. Reuben would hardly let him so much as look at her.”

“Oh, you mean Lilia. You did say that they’d been making eyes at each other from day one.”

Any further discussion of the matter was postponed as other friends and family members of both came up to them to offer their encouragement and congratulations. Amidst this, though, Tara found herself thinking about Thurman, and how he’d appeared genuinely sorry. She wanted to believe it, since the two had been longtime playmates and friends, but she vowed to be cautious. Perhaps if he made no more such remarks, and kept a civil tongue, she would be able to accept his apology as thoroughly in her heart as she’d expressed aloud to him.

Chapter 9 - Ellis takes action

In the past several weeks since its creation, Freethorn’s Rooftop had become more than an observation post for viewing the colony’s interior or the outlying lands. Certain areas had been established as flower or vegetable gardens after soil and sod had been trucked up there, following suggestions that to leave it as just bare rock would make it too drab and dull, not to mention hard. These Rooftop gardens were becoming steadily more popular as spots where one could spend a quiet moment or two; families, young couples, or someone desiring solitude were equally welcome to enjoy them, provided they were willing to make the climb. They had been lovingly tended and nurtured, and those visiting them were respectful of the work being put into them, taking care not to sit on or trample or uproot new sprouts.

One particular spot’s current visitor lay on his back, lost in thought, idly gazing at the clouds drifting past, as he’d been doing for over an hour. All afternoon Ellis had tried to concentrate solely on his school- and gardenwork, but nothing could completely banish the unresolved matters from this morning.

Presently, he sat up. Oh, that does it, he decided. Enough lying about, it’s time to take action. He’d given himself plenty of time to decide the best course of action; and so now, full of purpose, he literally sprang to his feet and began making his way down the trail to ground level. On the way, he thought back to the general meeting. Though he couldn’t precisely define how the matters discussed and conclusions reached related to his own situation with Lilia and Reuben, he felt that attending helped him work things out. It was possible that, just as the reasons for the untoward remarks from Thurman and Herbert shouldn’t necessarily be taken at face value, perhaps Lilia really did want his help in spite of her apparent rejection of him this morning. It’s possible that even Reuben wouldn’t mind his intervention, or would even welcome it. There was only one way to find out, and so he now resolved to pay a call on them today. Yes, he’d told his parents that he’d wait till tomorrow at the earliest. But they’d also told him how proud they were of his sense of responsibility in this matter. He genuinely wanted to help Lilia, but there was also his own peace of mind at stake. He couldn’t rest till he knew whether or not he was responsible, if only by a small fraction, for the state Lilia was in. Her anguish and apparent fear this morning still weighed heavily on his mind, and he knew it would continue to haunt him until there was some kind of resolution. It just couldn’t wait until tomorrow.

This kind of maturity, this willingness to put others’ needs ahead of his own, was actually not uncommon among those of Ellis’s ilk. Though he and his litter-mates Lucy and Bertie were as mature physically as human children of 14 or 15 years, he and many other Mouse and Rat children of Freethorn far outshone their human contemporaries in emotional and social maturity.

Once on the ground, Ellis took the trail along the perimeter which would bring him to the Mouse colony. Just coming up was the memorial garden, and he decided to make a stop there. Inside, he paused to look over the stone markers and admire the colorful and fragrant wildflowers growing there. He stepped in quietly, quickly coming upon Vincent’s marker. Standing in front of it, he silently addressed the one it memorialized. Your son and daughter are going through a difficult time and need help. I’m not entirely sure what I can do, but I’m going to try.

Suddenly, he was aware of someone else’s presence in the garden; someone was speaking low a few feet away. Curious, he quietly moved toward the voice’s source. There, on the ground in front of another headstone were Boris and Seelah, sitting close together and quietly conversing. He made to quietly announce his presence, but they saw him first.

“Ellis! Come on over and join us a minute.” Boris patted the ground beside him. Seelah waved hello, looking pleased.

“Okay. I thought for a second I might be intruding.”

“Oh, not at all. We were just reminiscing over some good times we had.”

Ellis looked up at the marker, the most recent to be placed here, and read its inscription silently to himself: DORIS. BELOVED SISTER TO BORIS. GREATLY MISSED BY HER BEST FRIENDS AND FELLOW TRAVELERS IN LIFE. He looked up at the pair it referred to. “Wow. That’s beautiful. This is the first I’ve seen it since it was put in.”

Boris nodded. “You know, I still miss her a lot…”

“Both of us do,” added Seelah.

“…but we don’t feel quite so sad anymore about her, especially now that we have this. Now, if I ever feel down, I look at it, and it lifts me right up. It reminds me of all the good times we had together.”

“I can imagine,” said Ellis. It was common knowledge how close the two siblings were.

“There was a game we often played, where after I’d have one of my visions, I’d describe it to her, and she’d make up a story about it. It would get really elaborate and drawn-out sometimes, but never boring. I just don’t know where she’d get it all from.” Boris shook his head, smiling.

Their story was well known by now, of how Doris had known Seelah for a short while before introducing her to her brother. The two took to each other readily, but shortly afterwards Doris was killed by a fox, a tragedy witnessed by Boris. He was devastated, but Seelah was there to comfort him; and as their mutual sorrow eased, so their love for each other grew. Boris wondered if Doris had introduced Seelah to him because she knew the two were right for each other, and even possibly because she knew she would die soon and didn’t want him to be alone. Just as he experienced visions that seemed to be definite, clear-cut images of other places, so Doris would have intuitive feelings or hunches about how a situation would turn out, similar to Timothy’s. They would almost always come true; and Boris wondered to this day if she’d had a premonition of her own death, and was so sure that it couldn’t be avoided that she kept it from him to spare him any worry or anxiety about something he couldn’t prevent. Some of what had been revealed about their father, especially his apparent premonition of his own demise, made it seem all the more likely.

Boris and Seelah continued describing to Ellis things that Doris had said and done; then, about fifteen minutes after entering the garden, Ellis remembered his mission. He made to excuse himself, but then he decided it might be worthwhile to tell someone else of his intentions. He felt the need to confide in someone other than his parents, and these two had become good friends to him since their arrival here, and so were perhaps better candidates than anyone, especially since they’d managed to get close to Lilia, by a small degree. So after asking for and receiving their confidentiality on the matter, at least until some greater resolution was reached, he told them of his experiences with Lilia over the past two days and nights, and what he hoped to accomplish now.

“Ellis,” Boris said afterwards, “our prayers are with you. I can’t imagine what it is that’s troubling her, but I hope you can help. And if you need our help, we’ll be there.”

“Thanks, Boris…Seelah. Well…I guess this is it. See you later.” He embraced both of them and swiftly exited the memorial garden.

Minutes later, Ellis stood in front of a door in the Mouse community, raising his hand to knock upon it. There was a moment’s hesitation; should he wait till tomorrow, after all? He did, after all, promise his parents he’d wait, and that was turning out to be, essentially, a lie. But no, he decided, it’s now or never. Steeling himself, he rapped upon it, waited… Unsurprisingly, there was no immediate answer. He knocked a second time, and this time the doorknob was seen and heard to be turning slowly. The door opened just a crack, enough for Ellis to see an eye and little else.

“What do you want?” came the greeting.

“Can I come in, Reuben?”

After a pause, Reuben replied, “I told you already, I don’t need your help.”

“Look, I just want to know how Lilia’s doing. Is she feeling all right?”

“She’s…she’s fine. Just…go away, please.”

For a moment, Ellis considered doing just that; then he said, “Well, can she come to the door? At least let me say hello to her.”

“She’s in her room, she doesn’t want to be disturbed. Now will you leave us alone?” Reuben started to close the door.

But Ellis was undaunted. He’d noticed the hesitancy and hint of worry in Reuben’s voice, distinguishable from the flat, inflectionless tones he normally spoke in; and he was sure that things weren’t any more right with Lilia now than they were this morning. He wouldn’t give up until he’d at least seen her with his own eyes. He hoped his persistence wouldn’t make him an enemy to Reuben, and that he could succeed in making him understand that he was doing this because he genuinely cared for Lilia. So he stuck his foot in the door. Reuben was clearly not expecting this much persistence, and hardly resisted as Ellis pushed himself in the rest of the way.

“Now look, Reuben,” said Ellis quickly, not allowing Reuben to try dissuading him further, “we both know she’s not all right, and keeping her cooped up like this isn’t going to make her any better. And I wouldn’t be this insistent if I didn’t care for her. I think you know that.”

Reuben sighed heavily. “Why can’t you just leave us be? I’ve taken care of her all these years, and I don’t need anyone’s help now.”

“I just told you why,” said Ellis patiently, “and I’m not leaving till I at least see her.”

Reuben glared silently at him, looking ready to explode; then, after about a half minute, his expression softened, as if he were ready to give in. He sighed again and sat on a nearby couch, suddenly appearing resigned to Ellis’s continued presence. Ellis joined him.

“She’s…been in there all day,” Reuben began hesitantly, voice conveying more feeling. “I brought her food, but she hardly touched it. I asked her what was wrong, but all she would say was that she wanted to be left alone.” After a pause, he added, “She’s always been happy and contented, I just don’t understand any of this.”

How could she be happy and contented, the way he keeps her hidden away? He almost said it aloud, but instead said, “Well, how about you at least let me look in on her, and if she says to go away, then…then I will.”

“I…don’t know…”

“Reuben…you know I want to help her. I couldn’t make it any clearer. I think…I might possibly have something to do with…the way she is now.”

Reuben stared hard at him. “Then maybe that’s all the more reason you should leave.”

“Reuben, give me a break here! I don’t know how much you saw last night, but…uh… Wait a minute, how much did you see?”

Reuben continued to stare silently at him a bit longer; then he looked to one side and said, “When…I got there, at first I just saw her, dancing around; and I almost called out to her, but then I saw you. I saw her fall to the ground, and…reach out for you. Something kept me from calling out. I guess I was so surprised, shocked even, that I couldn’t. Then you…joined her on the ground, and…I couldn’t look anymore. I just sat down among the bushes, trying to understand why she’d behave this way, and eventually I fell asleep there. I woke up when I heard you calling out to her, when she ran from you.”

“And…when you caught up with her, what did she say?”

“She just said…nothing except she wanted to be alone.”

“Then she didn’t say anything about me, or if I’d hurt her, or anything like that?”

“No. She didn’t. That should satisfy you, shouldn’t it?”

“Reuben, like I told you this morning, I didn’t force myself on her. She wanted me to join with her. If I’d known that any of this would happen, I would have resisted. Look, I told you I’d leave if she wanted me to. At least let me look in on her.”

Reuben stared into space for a moment, then said, “All right. Go ahead. But I’ll be right outside her door.”

“Okay. Fair enough.” They got up and headed for one of the curtained doorways down a short hallway. Ellis pushed the curtain aside just enough to see Lilia lying on her side in her bed, facing the other way. He took a deep breath. “Lilia?” he said softly. “It’s me, Ellis. Can I come in?”

Lilia’s head rose slightly, and she looked over her shoulder toward him. She made a faint, inarticulate sound that seemed to be an affirmative answer. Ellis glanced back at Reuben, who just nodded, with an expression that seemed to indicate he still didn’t fully believe in Ellis’s sincerity. Still undaunted, Ellis entered the room quietly. Again Lilia glanced back at him, giving no apparent sign that she wanted him to leave. Maybe that’s a hopeful sign, thought Ellis as he sat in a chair beside the bed, noticing the mostly-untouched plate of food on the nearby nightstand. “Lilia? Can we talk?” he said quietly.

Again there was a backward glance, but it was a bit longer this time. Still she said nothing.

“Lilia…you must believe me when I say I want to help you. And not just me. Reuben, Boris, Seelah, Cynthia, her parents, my parents…almost anyone else here. We all care for you, and worry about you. You know that, don’t you?”

Again she replied only with silence, but Ellis wasn’t about to give up.

“At least tell me one thing. This morning, when you ran from me…was it because of something I did or said? Because if it was, you’ve got to believe me…I never meant to. I couldn’t think of hurting you. Remember that first day, when you and Reuben arrived? Something…seemed to draw us together, like there was a strong connection between us. I can’t say for sure what kind, but…I do know that…I feel I need to help you, and know what’s wrong, and why you feel so bad now.” Ellis half-expected to still get no response, and was prepared to get up and leave if so; then, Lilia turned around, half-sitting up, facing him.

“N-no, Ellis,” she murmured. “It’s…not you, it’s not your fault. It’s me.”

Ellis felt some small relief to hear this, but also confusion. “What makes you say that?”

“I…I don’t know. I can’t explain it. I…” She looked away, eyes closed, seeming to struggle with her next words. “I…feel like I’m…two different people lately. And…and I don’t understand why…” She began to weep softly, and Ellis offered his hand in comfort. She unexpectedly drew her arms around him and leaned her head against his chest. Though he comforted her gladly and willingly, he was as confused as ever; and he wasn’t alone. Reuben was now just inside the doorway wearing a stunned expression. Ellis looked at him and could only shrug helplessly.

After a minute, he told her that he needed to speak with Reuben for a minute. She protested, and he had a bit of difficulty extricating himself from her, but he assured her that they’d both be nearby. She seemed reassured, and so the two returned to the front room.

Reuben wheeled to face Ellis. “What did you do? What sort of power do you have over her?”

Ellis stared in disbelief. “Power? What do you mean, power? You saw and heard everything. All I did was talk to her.”

“But she hasn’t said a word to me all day! And now you come along, and look what happens!”

“All right. What did happen?”

“I’m asking you!”

“And I’m telling you, Reuben, I honestly don’t know.”

Reuben folded his arms and turned to one side, scowling.

“Look, let’s try to keep it down. I don’t think Lilia needs to hear us arguing about her. Now…we do agree on a couple of things. She does need help, but neither of us knows what to do for her. I think both of us need to find someone who does. What do you think?”

Reuben threw up his hands and began pacing the floor. “We should never have come here, to this colony. To this world. Look at what’s happened since. Maybe we should just return to where we came from.”

“You don’t honestly believe that…something in this world changed Lilia?”

“Do you have a better explanation?”

“No, but that’s why we should talk to someone who might, like I said. Besides, I don’t think you’d really want to go back to the life you had before, and I’d bet anything Lilia wouldn’t, either. Come on; what do you say? Are you with me?”

Reuben stopped pacing, and looked directly at Ellis. He looked away and said, “All right. I’ll try.”

Ellis placed a hand on his shoulder. “We do need to work together on this. Can we agree on that much?” Reuben nodded. “Okay. I think we should start right away, then.”

“Right now?”

“Well, sure. The sooner the better, don’t you think?”

“I guess, but…someone should be here, to watch her.”

“Don’t worry, I’ve got someone in mind, and I know they’ll be happy to lend a hand.”

Ellis returned to Lilia’s room, where she sat upright on her bed, idly grooming her tail. She looked actually pleased to see Ellis again, though she smiled only faintly. Ellis quickly explained that he and Reuben were going away for a short while, and that Boris and Seelah would look after her until they returned. She was reluctant, but she did trust Boris and Seelah, and so she agreed, actually managing a small smile. Ellis then left to fetch his friends, a couple of doors down, privately congratulating himself for having the foresight to enlist their help.

Two minutes later, as Ellis and Reuben were leaving, they paused by the front door. “Come on, Reuben, let’s go. Believe me, she’s in good hands.”

Reuben was finding it difficult to tear himself away. “I know, but…it’s just so hard…”

“Just remember, we’re doing this for her.”

The two started off, through the winding corridors of the mouse colony, which still consisted mostly of living quarters, some built to accommodate larger families, others as small as Lilia and Reuben’s apartment. They passed Teresa and Sarah’s place, with its interior courtyard modeled after the home she briefly shared with Sarah’s brother Eric in Thorn Valley; the one shared by Zenia and Amelia, two of Vincent’s temporary mates, the five children he’d sired between them, and their older half-siblings Torrance and Hazel; the one Ellis himself shared with Bertie and Lucy, their parents and Lula; next door, Martin and Karen’s, one of the first to be created, one level up from Louann and Teelo’s; the home of Johnathan and Madeline Brisby, around which the rest were built, shared with all their children but the two oldest (at least for the time being); several more modest units, housing Patricia and Kimball’s other children and their growing families; and a few vacant units, which could be easily and quickly adapted for living and other uses.

Finally, they reached their destination, or at least first stop: the home of Mr. Ages and his family. He wasn’t home, though, and his wife Alma told them he was still at the medical ward. Alma was surprised but pleased to see Reuben, and after visiting briefly with her and her children, he and Ellis moved on, leaving the Mouse community through its south entrance, bound for the Rat community.

Along the way, Reuben said, “This is the first time since we arrived that I’ve seen some of the other homes here.”

“Really? You need to get out more, pal.”

Reuben sighed. “Yes. So I’ve heard.” After a pause, he added, “Ellis, I…probably should apologize.”

“For what?” They both stopped.

“For some things I’ve done and said, to you and almost everyone else I’ve met here. Everyone’s done kind things for us, and…we’ve just taken it all for granted. And to you, especially, for thinking that you were responsible for…for Lilia’s problem.” He glanced over his shoulder, as if he could see his sister from there. “I was…out of line to accuse you of…having some kind of power over her. And you called me ‘pal’… After all this, you would…consider me a friend?”

“Well, there’s no reason for us to be enemies.” Ellis patted Reuben on the back, actually raising a small smile from him. “But that’s okay, Reuben, you were just concerned for her.” He made to start off again. “Ah…you’re still coming with me, aren’t you?”

“Yes…yes, I still am.” They continued on. “It’s just so hard. I feel I have to stay with her, especially now.”

“You can do it. I’m a bit reluctant myself, but she’s not all alone back there.” Ellis couldn’t help thinking how remarkable it was that he and Reuben could find themselves in this position—here and now, together. “And as for why she opened up to me like that, I still can’t say. But as I said to her, there’s been some kind of connection all along. Johnathan was telling Lucy and me about when he and Madeline first met, and it was like it just clicked instantly for them. Almost right off, they felt that they were the right mate for each other.”

Reuben stared. “Is that…how you think of Lilia?” he asked incredulously.

“I honestly can’t say yet. It’s just possible that’s how she sees me, though. But would it be so unbelievable? We’re all growing older, Reuben. We’re not kids anymore.”

“I know what you’re saying. I just find it hard to think of Lilia that way. Even…even after seeing you and her last night.”

“We all need to feel close to someone, to want a mate. If I don’t now, I will before too long; and I’m sure Lilia does too. Like I said, I’m not sure if it’s that way with her and me, but…what about you, Reuben?”

Reuben sighed. “I don’t know. I’d rather not talk about that, if you don’t mind.”

“Sure, no problem. Say, there’s the main entrance just ahead.”

Chapter 10 - Vincent’s “new” abilities

For several weeks now, one of the anterooms off the main library had been converted to a center for researching and organizing the copious writings, these stacks and stacks of paper left behind by the ever-mysterious Vincent. This was Vincent Central, home to a project which had been spearheaded by Tallus, beginning the day after the arrival of all this material after Johnathan Brisby and the Stone brought it from Vincent’s secret hideaway in the selfsame NIMH facility that had essentially been the birthplace for this very civilization. Since then, the project had proceeded at an irregular pace; with the move of this entire colony late of Thorn Valley to Lahaikshe, with all its resulting complications, progress had to be slowed for days and even weeks at a stretch. Even now, much of this material hadn’t been read or even glanced at yet, and so much of the work involved simply reading it before classifying and cataloging it. Now, though, it was proceeding apace, with many taking turns with the still-considerable task. A team of four Rats that included Tallus’s daughter Alcina were currently putting in three to four hours a day on it, but Johnathan, Madeline, Kimball and Ages were devoting some of their time as well.

Tonight, Johnathan and Ages were so engaged, helping out Alcina’s team. The all-but-official diagnosing of Vincent as agoraphobic was the last discovery made that clarified some of the mysteries still surrounding him, and it was hoped that other such discoveries were forthcoming.

Johnathan glanced up from the mouse-sized table, brought from Vincent’s lair along with his writings. He nodded as Tallus approached. “Well, this seems to be all of the August 12th entries,” he said as he placed several pages, face down, on top of one stack.

“Excellent, Johnathan. You know, you look ready for a break, I’d say.”

“I suppose, Tallus. But if I look tired, I guess it’s mainly from poring over all these pages that probably only made sense to Vincent.” He sighed as he regarded the stacks still left to cover. He said this knowing how likely it was that those unread stacks might yield writings that could clarify the meaning of some already-read ones. So far, establishing a linear narrative for all these writings had been a daunting if not impossible task, in spite of the fact that most of the pages were dated.

“Something will come up, my friend, I’m sure of it. But you really ought to slow down. Barring accidents, none of this material is going anywhere.”

“I know, I know. It’s just…I can’t forget what the Stone showed me, the last thing he ever did. There’s just got to be something here, maybe something we’ve overlooked; maybe if we do some more reading between the lines…”

“Johnathan, I know you’re hoping for some sign that his actions weren’t as they appeared to be; but that note he left for Patricia…”

“…doesn’t prove a thing. I know it seems pretty conclusive, but I just can’t accept that he sought his own death. I don’t believe for a minute that that was a suicide note.”

Of late, Johnathan had given much thought to those earliest discoveries made about Vincent, which even now stood as perhaps the most disturbing ones to date: a certain journal entry that had, remarkably, been specifically addressed to Patricia, as if he’d expected her to discover both it and his hideaway; and that haunting scene revealed by the amulet, the one that had disclosed Vincent’s final fate: his death at the paws of a stray cat. Combined, the two seemed to reveal that he knew of his fate and offered no resistance to meeting it; or even that he could have been rushing toward it willingly.

“Of course, I’d rather not believe it either, but…just what do you have in mind, Johnathan?”

“Well, maybe he… Say, look who’s here.”

Tallus looked up, genuinely delighted at the sight of the pair entering Vincent Central. “Why, Ellis! And Reuben! How are you lads this evening?”

“Okay, Tallus,” answered Ellis. “Hi, Johnathan. We were told Mr. Ages is here. We need to see him.”

“He’s over here, and about ready to call it a night,” came a voice that didn’t sound especially receptive to company, from behind a stack of papers on the opposite side of the table. Nevertheless, Ages came out to meet the two mice.

“There you are! We looked for you in the ward, but Bernie told us you’d be here.”

“Well, you’ve found me. So what can I do for you?”

“Can we…go someplace more private and discuss this?” said Reuben.

“Actually, Reuben,” said Ellis, “it occurred to me on the way over that Mr. Ages isn’t the only one who might know something. Tallus or Johnathan might be able to help us too, as long as they’re here. It’s up to you, of course.”

Reuben stared off to one side as Ages said, “Whatever it is, I don’t see why it should be for my ears only.”

“He’s right, Reuben. What do you say?”

“Oh, all right. I suppose everyone will know about it eventually.”

Shortly, a small conference was called in an adjoining room, one regularly used for meetings and conferences. Ellis began by describing the previous two nights’ incidents with Lilia—with some reluctance over going into great detail about the previous night’s—and how he decided to visit her today against Reuben’s wishes. Reuben described how withdrawn she’d been this morning, and both described what she’d told Ellis. Lilia’s own contention that she felt like two people lately, in particular, caused some eyebrows to be raised.

Afterwards, Tallus spoke first. “It sounds rather like a case of multiple personality disorder. There have been many such cases among humans.”

Johnathan paused in fiddling with his whiskers. “And some of us have had first-hand experience with it.”

“Our old ‘mysterious stranger,’ Ghormfisk, of course,” said Tallus.

“The very one. But he was from an entirely different world and race. With us, who knows?”

Ages grumbled. “Well, considering how little we know of Vincent, there could be a precedent there.”

Johnathan turned to Reuben and Ellis. “I hope you don’t mind this kind of talk, Reuben. Vincent was your father, after all.”

Reuben shrugged. “I never knew him, Johnathan. But do you think this…multiple whatever is what’s wrong with Lilia?”

“There’s only one thing to do if we’re to make any kind of determination,” said Ages.

“I think I understand,” said Reuben.

Johnathan nodded. “Let’s get back there, then.”

Without further ado, the five rose from the table; and after Tallus told Alcina’s team they were leaving for a short while, they began making their way out and over to the Mouse community, just as night was beginning to fall.

“You see, Reuben?” Ellis said along the way. “Didn’t I tell you that we weren’t the only ones who wanted to help her?”

“Yes,” replied Reuben, managing a smile. “Yes, you did.”

As discussed, Reuben and Ellis entered the apartment first, as the others waited out in the corridor. They all agreed it was best that Lilia be told gently that there were others here to help her, rather than having everyone barge in all at once. The others thought they’d soon be told, “Yes, she’s ready to talk to you” or possibly “She doesn’t wish to see anyone else now” or that she’d only want to see one of them; but they were in no way prepared for the announcement that did come.

Ellis poked his head out the door. “She’s not here,” he reported.

“What?” said Johnathan.

“How can that be?” said Ages as they all entered the apartment, where Boris and Seelah just stood by the doorway of Lilia’s room, looking mystified. “Didn’t you two watch her at all?”

“Of course we did,” said Boris. “Not every second, but we looked in on her when we first got here, and there’s no other way out of her room.”

“We thought she was still there,” said Seelah. “We had no reason to think otherwise. She asked us to leave her alone, to think. We didn’t know she was gone until just now.”

“All right, we’re not accusing you of being careless,” said Johnathan. “But she had to get out somehow.”

“And where is she now?” asked Reuben, face etched with worry.

“Perhaps we should alert the Guard, put them on the lookout for her,” suggested Tallus.

“Maybe that won’t be necessary,” said Ellis. “She pulled a similar disappearing act this morning, and I’ve got a hunch about where she is now.”

They all headed back outside, taking the trail leading to the south meadow. On the way to check out Ellis’s hunch, it was conjectured that, with the seemingly precarious mental state Lilia was in, there was no telling what she might do. Ellis sounded so confident, though, that they’d agreed to hold off on calling for an all-out search until his hunch was confirmed or disproved.

They approached the blackberry thicket, rounded it, and began scanning the meadow. No one could see any sign of anyone moving about, and Tallus was about to leave to alert the Guard when Ellis, appropriately, called the others’ attentions to something. It didn’t take long for everyone to recognize the dancing figure, which everyone could swear wasn’t there a moment before; and Ellis, for all he’d expected and hoped to see her here, nonetheless couldn’t help feeling some surprise. She’d been so troubled, even traumatized before, apparently by her own earlier behavior; and now, here she was again, just as she was last night, as if the past day’s troubles had been experienced by…a different person entirely.

The Rat and six Mice approached her slowly; and Ellis, if he hadn’t trusted his own senses so thoroughly, could swear that this was an entirely different entity before them now, once again dancing up a storm by the light of the mostly-full moon. Not even the presence of this many disbelieving onlookers seemed to cause her any great concern; but as she took notice of them, one did cause her to react with more than indifference.

“Ellis! You’re here again!” Lilia rushed forward delightedly to embrace him.

Ellis could only stammer, “Uhbm…uh, yeah, Li-Lilia. I’m here…”

“Oh, wasn’t last night just wonderful? Mmmm…” She sighed deeply, contentedly, maintaining her hold on him.

Ellis’s confusion was by no means abated. How could she possibly… Did the past day’s events, from this morning on, not happen to her at all?

Before he could voice any of the innumerable questions on his mind, though, Ages stepped in. “Now, Lilia, if you don’t mind, I’d like to ask you a few questions.”

“Mr. Ages! Have you come to celebrate the night with me too?” She noticed the others, waving to them delightedly.

“Lilia, please. I need to know how it is that you can be like this now and over the past two nights, and during the day you’re so…withdrawn and shy.”

Lilia laughed with the same tone Ellis was now familiar with, the bluntness of the question not bothering her a whit. “Oh, that poor timid creature. It’s a shame she can’t enjoy her life like I can.”

Johnathan spoke up next. “Who…do you mean, Lilia?”

“Oh, that’s not important. Does anybody else want to join me?” Without waiting for an answer, Lilia dashed away, did a perfect cartwheel, and resumed her usual dance.

Everyone else looked between her and each other, at a loss for what to say or even think. “That…that’s not her,” muttered Reuben. “It can’t be her.”

“Easy, Reuben,” said Johnathan. “Well, what do you think, Tallus?”

“I…” Tallus shook his head. “Perhaps a few more questions are in order.” He stepped forward, right to where Lilia was in the midst of a pirouette. “Lilia, I’d really like to…” Finding her spinning distracting, he reached down and swept her right up off her feet.

“Oh, hello, Tallus!” she said, undaunted. “Would you like to toss me? I’ll land light as a feather, just watch!”

“Er, no, thank you, Lilia. But I would like to ask you: just how did you leave your room, when Boris and Seelah were there the whole time, and would have had to see you leave?”

Lilia looked at him as if he’d asked the silliest possible question. “I wanted to come here, so I came. What else could I do?” She reached up, giving one of Tallus’s whiskers a playful tug. With her impish grin, she now seemed more like a cheerfully mischievous child, especially cradled in his arms as she now was.

“I see,” he said as he set her down. No, I don’t, he thought as Lilia bounded away, gazing upward and spinning herself around again. Tallus turned to the others. “I think we’ll gain little by questioning her further, especially now.”

“But what can we do?” asked Ellis.

“Yes, we can’t just leave her here…can we?”

“Actually, Boris,” said Johnathan, “she’s not doing herself or anyone else harm; and we’ve definitely got more to discuss now, but not here.”

“Someone should probably keep an eye on her,” suggested Seelah.

“How about you two, then? You can stay here, while the rest of us try to figure out what’s what and who’s who here.”

“Well, that’s only fair,” said Boris, “since that’s what we set out to do tonight.”

“I should be the one to stay here,” said Reuben.

“We all will,” said Boris. “All three of us.”

Reuben agreed, so while he, Boris and Seelah sat on the ground, Tallus, Johnathan, Ages and Ellis made to return to the library. As they started off, though, Lilia paused in her cavorting to call out to Ellis, expressing mild disappointment that he couldn’t stay. Certainly he wanted to, not only because he wanted to keep an eye on her as well, but there were also the still-fresh memories of last night, the moments of heartfelt tenderness which he knew he’d always cherish, no matter what happened afterwards or what may yet happen. In the end, though, he thought it best to stay away for now.

Back at Vincent Central, Alcina’s team was still plugging away. Tallus told them that, if anything especially noteworthy turned up, they should feel free to interrupt their own discussion in the next room anytime.

“First of all,” began Tallus, “does anyone still believe that Lilia’s problem is purely a case of mental illness?”

“Well, I still think it’s possible,” said Ages. “Sure, there’s no precedent, as we said; but we, as a race and culture, are still in our infancy, and there’s plenty of room for all possibilities.”

“But what can we do for her right now?” asked Ellis, worry etched upon his face and present in his voice.

“We know how much you want to help Lilia, Ellis,” said Johnathan. “But we have to determine exactly what’s wrong, so we can all help.”

“I know. I just…feel like we’d be doing more if we stayed out there with her, instead of sitting here and talking about her. She needs us, and she seems so helpless, like she’s being pushed and shoved around by forces that she can’t do a thing about.”

“Oh, I agree. And that reminds me of one idea I’ve had. Could there be something mystical in what’s happened to her? We’ve known for a long time that there are magical ‘hot spots’ on Lahaikshe, where odd manifestations crop up, like the place where my family and I stayed overnight a year or so ago and where Martin and Karen spent their wedding night.”

“How exactly do you think this relates to Lilia, Johnathan?”

“I’m not sure, Cyril. But these ‘hot spots’ can sometime have…unexpected effects, Gwinthrayle once told me. Not the ones in this area, though; those are supposed to be pretty benign. But others, in other parts of the world, are something else again.”

“But, Johnathan,” said Tallus, “didn’t Gwinthrayle also say that this, right here where we set down Freethorn, is not one of those spots?”

“Yes, he did.”

“Then how are you supporting this theory?”

“How would you explain Lilia being able to come and go the way she has? Ellis, this morning, when you last saw her, you could have sworn that she got away from your sight more easily than she should have, right?”

Ellis nodded. “Yeah…after we both went around the blackberry thicket, it’s like she vanished into thin air.”

“And what about tonight? She left her apartment right out from under Boris and Seelah’s noses. I’ve been around this sort of thing too much to dismiss this…ability of hers as just trickery or stealth.”

“Are you saying it may be…magic, sorcery? How would she have come across anything like that, Johnathan? She and Reuben pretty much lived like ordinary mice before we found them.”

“It’s only a theory, Ellis. But if it is a magical ability, she almost certainly came by it after coming here, in some way.”

“I don’t know about all that,” said Ages, “but as far as this new personality is concerned…well, in humans, when one develops this kind of condition, it can be the result of an especially intense emotional or psychological trauma.”

“Not unlike what happened to Ghormfisk,” pointed out Johnathan. “The way Lilia was talking about her more reserved personality out there sounds just like Ghormfisk, when his Uhrstegg personality was in charge—as if the other one were a whole different person.”

“True,” added Ages, “but it can also be the result of a trauma that’s sustained over a longer period.”

“Yes,” said Tallus, “when one has endured one or more forms of abuse over a long period of time—emotional, physical or sexual, or a combination thereof—it’s the only way the mind can cope with it.”

Ellis looked thunderstruck, shaking his head. “Oh, no…no way. You’re not suggesting… You don’t think Reuben could possibly… I mean, he’s so protective of her, he wants to keep her from any harm. I can’t believe he’d be capable of anything like that.”

“None of us want to believe that, Ellis,” said Johnathan. “But we’ve got to look at all possibilities. That’s why we’re here right now.”

“Well…what about the Stone, Johnathan? Could it prove any of this, somehow?”

“As a matter of fact, it could. I can use it to view Reuben and Lilia’s past, and see if there’s anything there that may have led to what we’re seeing now. I’ll get right on that as soon as I get home tonight. On one hand I hope it’ll give us something useful, but if anything like what we’ve just discussed comes up…I’m not looking forward to it.”

“Be that as it may,” said Tallus, “it should still provide a good start. In the meantime, I’ve wondered…Lilia is Vincent’s progeny, and there’s so much we still don’t know about him, for all the writings he’s left us. There might very well be a hereditary factor in all this.”

“My folks said something like that this morning, when I told them about Lilia,” said Ellis. “You think there’s really something to it, Tallus?”

“Well, as Johnathan said, we should examine all pos—”

“Father! Everyone! Come and see this! I think we’ve got something big here!”

The four looked at each other in surprise, and then they all got to their feet. In Vincent Central, the four Rats were talking excitedly among themselves as they clustered around Alcina at the main table. She looked up, smiling as she saw her father approaching.

“Well, you told us to interrupt if anything important turned up. We think this fits the bill nicely.” The others drew aside to allow Tallus to see the page that drew their attention. “This one was almost on the very bottom of a stack,” Alcina continued. “I was expecting another page full of abstractions or some kind of his usual ramblings, but…well, read it for yourself.”

Tallus did, out loud for everyone to hear. The date on the entry, from over two years before, was enough of a surprise, since it had been assumed that all writings from that long ago had been catalogued already. But the contents were a major eye-opener. Vincent described, with detailed clarity, how he’d just had a close call with one of the NIMH personnel and wished there was a way he could evade them more easily. Shortly after, he lay down to rest and think more about what could be done. Suddenly, he found himself in a space beneath the floor under the bed! Though it startled him, he immediately concentrated hard in an effort to return to where he was before, as if knowing that was all he had to do. It worked! He was back in his bed. He immediately tried to repeat the effect on purpose, and found that he could literally pass through walls and floors by becoming seemingly immaterial. He wondered, of course, how these abilities came upon him, but didn’t question the fact that they were now his, and immediately began to see their potential. As he put them further into practice over the next several hours, that potential was realized; and surpassed when he discovered he could will himself to become invisible as well, confirmed as he passed by a shiny aluminum surface and saw no reflection.

Tallus lowered the page slowly as he finished reciting, meeting the thoughtful expressions of the three mice.

“What did she tell you, Tallus?” said Colin, one of the other team members, excitedly. “This explains so much of what we’ve read already, like where he’d describe going out for food or furnishings for his den, without any kind of mention of having to look out for danger or evade any kind of obstacle.”

“And there were older writings that were full of that sort of thing,” added Alcina. “In the later ones, he’d say things like ‘I passed between this room and that,’ but we never knew what he really meant until now.”

“And there were all those meetings with Kimball,” added Johnathan, “like that first one with him and Patricia, where Vincent seemed to come and go like a spirit, like when he’d just pop up out of nowhere at their meeting place in the woods.”

“Indeed.” Tallus nodded thoughtfully. “Alcina, Colin, Ophelia, Clayton…let’s let this new discovery be the capper to a fine day’s work.” Some were reluctant to leave at this point, but all were convinced easily that everything would still be here tomorrow. All were ready for a good night’s sleep, some already yawning.

When Tallus and the three mice were alone in the chamber, he said, “Well, was I right when I sensed that all four of us hit upon the same realization, about what this discovery may also mean?”

“About how it may relate to Lilia, you mean?” Johnathan looked at Ages and Ellis, who nodded. “I believe you’re right.”

“The way she gave me the slip this morning, and then escaped from Boris and Seelah…it’s got to have something to do with those abilities of Vincent’s!” Ellis’s voice rose in excitement. “No, make that everything to do with it.”

“It is too much to be a mere coincidence,” agreed Ages. “And yet, she and Vincent never met, as far as we know. How could any of this have come to pass in the first place?”

“And those abilities…” mused Johnathan. “It looks like they just manifested themselves all of a sudden in him, because they took him totally by surprise.” He shook his head incredulously. “We’ve got a whopper of a mystery on our hands, folks. But whatever started all this, I’d go so far as to say that we’ve solved the first clue.”

“I agree,” said Tallus. “Perhaps we should call it a day as well. I believe our next step should be to question Lilia further in the morning. Perhaps she can tell us about these abilities of hers, when she first noticed them…”

“If she feels up to it,” said Ellis. “If it’s like this morning, then she may not be able to tell us anything.”

“Ah, yes…if she follows the same pattern, and she returns to what we could consider her ‘daytime’ persona. But whatever happens then, Ellis, we should pass on this discovery to Reuben and Boris and Seelah.”

“Yeah, I’ll get right on that; and I’ll tell my folks, too. Dad, especially, will want to hear this.”

“And I’ll look for possible evidence with the amulet, as we discussed earlier,” said Johnathan. “It always seems like spying, but if it’ll help her…” Abruptly, he began rubbing his whiskers. “That reminds me. We’ve used it for Vincent before, to view scenes of his life. I wonder why we never saw him doing any of those things, passing through walls and such. I guess…maybe because we ‘ordered’ it to show more-or-less random scenes, and they just happened to not include any of those scenes.”

“Or it may be one more part of the puzzle,” said Tallus. “At any rate, we’ve got our work cut out for us.”

With that, the small group said their goodnights and broke up for the day. Ellis headed straight for the meadow, but before he got there, one of the Guard rats, Jerome, approached him, relaying a message Boris passed on to him: to tell Ellis that they’d already gone home after Lilia tired herself out. So he returned to Reuben and Lilia’s quarters, where Reuben, Boris and Seelah were taking turns keeping an eye on Lilia, who was already asleep. They told him that she had continued dancing and cavorting for another hour after the others had left, and when she stopped after saying she needed to rest, they’d convinced her to come home with them. She’d seemed agreeable, and had gone to bed shortly afterward, but now they were watching her “just in case.” Ellis told them about the new theory about Lilia’s abilities and the new discoveries about Vincent. Afterwards, he went home to tell his parents the same. On one hand they weren’t entirely happy that he’d gone back on his word to wait till tomorrow to try to see Lilia, but were fascinated by the discoveries and theories, and looking forward to what would come next.

In the Brisby residence, Johnathan and Madeline, after putting in some playtime with the younger children and sending them to bed, settled into bed themselves with the Stone. Johnathan willed it to show any event in Lilia’s life that would have led to her present condition. It showed nothing especially startling, least of all any kind of abuse by Reuben. There were two instances where Reuben was seen scolding or lecturing her, apparently about venturing from their den alone; but nothing, thankfully, to indicate that Reuben was anything but concerned for her well-being, albeit to the point of being overprotective. Oddly, though, the amulet showed several scenes of Lilia dancing and tumbling acrobatically about the den when she was alone; and, presumably later, doing the same in Reuben’s presence. Obviously, she’d been fond of this kind of activity for a long time, but how could that have led to her present condition?

It reached a point where they decided they’d seen enough; and so, shrugging, Johnathan put the amulet away. He and Madeline stayed awake a short while, discussing what they’d seen before going to sleep; little knowing that if they’d pursued the matter further, they would likely have been shown much more, scenes that may have resulted in a sleepless night for them and others.

Chapter 11 - Lilia opens up

“Lilia?” came the voice, barely above a whisper, from the doorway. “May I come in?”

Lilia turned her head, glancing toward the door. “Cynthia?” she murmured.

“Yes, it’s me. Is it okay?”

“Mmmm…all right.”

Cynthia Brisby ventured through the curtains and approached the bed, where Lilia was much as she was the previous day, lying on her side, facing the opposite way. Cynthia pulled up a chair and sat, smiling, stroking Lilia’s shoulder. “How’re you doing today?” In spite of how disheartened she’d felt upon hearing about Lilia’s troubles, and seeing her this way now, she, as always, strove to maintain an upbeat attitude.

“I…I’m not sure.” Lilia shifted herself around to face her, still lying on her side.

“Do you want to talk about it?”

Lilia sighed. “I’m so…mixed up, I…don’t know if I can.”

Cynthia took her hand, clasping it gently. “Remember when I first came to you and Reuben? You were really curious about me, and where I’d come from; you felt like we had a real connection, and that you could trust me. You still believe that, don’t you?”

“Yes…I do, Cynthia.”

“Great. Now…you’re probably aware that there’s, well, rather a lot of us now that know what’s been happening with you.”

Lilia looked away for a moment. “I…guess so.”

“Well, you can trust me when I say that all of us want to help. Ellis told you that, too, and you trust him, don’t you?”

“I…yes, I do.”

Cynthia explained carefully about what they needed to learn from her so that they could begin to help her; and though Lilia still outwardly appeared reluctant, she agreed. She was coaxed into eating a bit of food; like yesterday morning, she hadn’t felt up to going to breakfast. Soon they were joined by Madeline and Patricia, who had been waiting in the front room. It was Patricia who had suggested, at this morning’s meeting of those who were working on Lilia’s “case”, that Lilia might be more receptive to female company in disclosing details of her past. So it was now that the three of them—with Cynthia sitting up in bed beside Lilia, Patricia in the chair, Madeline sitting at the foot of the bed—gently and patiently encouraged Lilia to confide all she could recollect.

“Well…” she began in a voice barely above a whisper, “when we were really small, after Mama died, Reuben started to take care of us…but I guess you know that already. It…was sometime after that, a few months later, when I…I really noticed a change.” Though she was clearly ill at ease at talking about herself, she also appeared determined to get her story told. “Before, I was always so…so scared of just about everything and everyone. I barely even…stepped outside of our den. But after that…” She sighed, shaking her head. “Oh, this is so embarrassing…”

“It’s all right, dear, no one’s going to ridicule you,” assured Patricia.

“She’s right, Lilia.” Cynthia placed an arm around her shoulders. “You can say anything to us.”

Lilia looked among them, managing a smile. She swallowed and continued: “This change, I don’t know where it came from, or why; but one night, when Reuben was out gathering food, I felt strange, dizzy. I sat down, and after a few minutes, I wanted to…to jump for joy, I just felt so good. I didn’t feel I had to hide or be fearful anymore. I stayed right there, because I still felt I had to obey Reuben, and I didn’t want him to worry if I was gone when he returned. I felt like going out, but instead I danced around the den, and sang to myself; I had to express how I felt some way. I settled down after Reuben returned, but I still felt…joyful inside, and very calm, and not so fearful of almost everything, like before.”

“Do you remember when this happened?” asked Madeline.

“It was…oh, it had to be…around three years ago, I guess.”

“And it’s been like that ever since for you?” asked Patricia.

“Well, yes. At first, I tried to keep it from Reuben; I wouldn’t do any of my dancing around while he was in, but later I did.”

“And what was his reaction?”

“He was surprised at first, but he seemed to accept it. As long as I kept it inside and quiet, he didn’t mind.”

“And how did you feel about this…change in you?” asked Patricia.

“I was a bit confused at first, just because it came all at once like that; but I felt so good, so confident and content, that I really didn’t think much about how I was before. It didn’t seem to matter.”

“Lilia,” began Cynthia thoughtfully, “you said that Reuben wouldn’t let you behave like that outside. You must have been a little displeased with that.”

Lilia sighed; she was clearly uncomfortable with all these inquiries into how she felt. “I guess I was, some. I mean, it’s hard to describe. I was still wary of strangers, though not really afraid of them. And I understood why Reuben wanted to keep me concealed. He knew my white coat would put me in greater danger from predators, and that my eyes and skin were sensitive to daylight. He…he wanted to protect me, we were all we had.”

“But you did feel that he was…well, overdoing it a bit?”

“Why are you attacking him, Patricia?” Lilia’s voice trembled, and she looked close to tears. “He was just looking out for me! He loves me. A-and I love him.” She buried her face in her hands.

“Lilia, I’m so sorry. I didn’t mean to upset you. We’re just trying to understand both you and Reuben a little better.”

Lilia looked up, wiping away a tear. “I know. I just…I just don’t know what’s happening to me. I don’t understand at all.”

“That’s why you need to tell us all you can,” said Madeline, “so that maybe we all can understand.”

“Can you tell us,” said Patricia, “about how long Reuben has been this protective of you?”

Lilia looked a bit surprised. “I told you that he started taking care of me after Mama died. It’s been that way since. Well…not exactly the same way…”

“How do you mean?”

“Well, I said before that I was afraid to even step outside; he really didn’t have to do or say much to keep me from harm. But later…he’d tell me, almost every day, how important it was to keep from possible harm, and cautioning me not to go outside unless I absolutely had to; and when we’d have to move, he’d constantly look all around while we were about, trying his best to get me from one area to another where I’d be out of sight. Even though I’d tell him I could look out for myself, he’d insist he would do the ‘looking out’ for both of us. And I pretty much accepted it all.” Lilia sighed. “Maybe…a little too easily. But all along, I still felt…happy and content most of the time.”

Patricia looked away thoughtfully for a moment, then said, “Lilia…you said there was a definite change in Reuben. Would you say it happened all at once, like that change in you?”

“Why, I…hadn’t really thought about it, but…yes, I suppose it did.”

“And how close did it happen to the one in you?” ventured Cynthia.

Lilia looked off to one side. “It was almost…the same time. I think I even noticed it then, but…I hardly thought about it since.”

The other women looked at each other, all realizing the same thing. “Lilia,” said Patricia, “we may have a clue here as to what’s happening with you?”

“Do you…really think so?”

“It could be. Unless it’s just a coincidence. But somehow I don’t think so, if there really was a change in your…way of thinking, I guess you’d say.”

For a moment they hesitated, unsure of where to take their line of questioning next. They’d agreed beforehand not to directly ask about her apparent change in personality, at least not right away. Then Madeline spoke. “Lilia…you were able to slip away from Boris and Seelah last night, without their seeing you. Both Reuben and Ellis said that you did the same with them. Can you tell us how you were able to do this? If you don’t mind…”

Lilia shrugged. “I really don’t know. I just thought it, and…I did it.”

“What…exactly happens when you do it?” asked Cynthia.

“Well, I…just thought about where I wanted to go and what I wanted to do, and…I disappeared, and I…walked through the wall, and no one saw me.”

None could conceal their surprise at this. “You mean,” continued Cynthia, “you turned invisible? And you could slip right away, just like that?”

“I…yes.”

“And then you’d go out to the meadow?”

Lilia hesitated, looking uncertain and again close to tears. “Yes…I mean…oh, I don’t know. I wish…all this would…just stop…” She hid her face again.

“Oh, Lilia, I know it’s hard for you,” said Patricia, stroking her arm and shoulder. “But we need you to tell us all you can.”

She lowered her hands slowly. “Do you really know, Patricia? Do you know what it’s like to feel like…like there’s someone else inside of you, making you do things that…that don’t even feel like you?” She shook her head.

“Lilia,” Patricia said carefully, “we didn’t want to bring this up, this…different behavior of yours, because we thought it might upset you. But I guess there’s no way of avoiding it, if we want to get to the bottom of things.”

“I know, Patricia. What…else did you want to know?”

“Well…when did you first notice these…new abilities of yours?”

“Only since we came here, and then it wasn’t right away, but a few days after. It startled me at first, but I wasn’t frightened or anything. But it was only about a week ago that…that other thing started happening.”

“Was there…any peculiar feeling that came to you, like that other time?”

Lilia thought for a moment, then her eyes grew wide. “Why, yes, there was. It was about three or four months ago. A feeling just like that. But nothing seemed to happen. Although there were…those dreams…”

“Dreams? Can you tell us about them?” asked Madeline.

Lilia nodded. “They weren’t all the same, exactly. There were a few of them, over several days, and…they all seemed to take place in the same…place, a building. A human building. And it’s…funny, but I knew that’s what it was supposed to be, even though I’d never been in one before. While I was in there, I would see…humans moving about, but they wouldn’t see me. And…I would drift through walls and floors, just…just like I really could later.”

“Can you remember any details about this building?” asked Patricia.

“No, not much, except that…there were many rooms, some large, some small…long hallways. There was…in one of them, one of these dreams, a very small one, that seemed to be made just for me, like it was my home. It even felt like it belonged to me, just like…like in all of these dreams, it all felt very familiar, like I’d actually been there a long time. Even after I’d wake up each time, it would still feel that way…at least for a while. I knew I couldn’t really be familiar with that place, because I’d never been there in my life. It was all very strange, but…after these dreams stopped, I didn’t think much about them until now. Do you think…they might mean something?”

Patricia stood, smiling. “I certainly do, Lilia.”

“So do I,” said Madeline. “In fact…they might just be the key to all of this.”

“Well, that makes two of us,” said a bemused Cynthia.

The three of them excused themselves and adjourned to the front room. Patricia and Madeline had managed to keep their reactions low-key, but now they briefed Cynthia on the discoveries that had been made last night among Vincent’s notes, and the striking similarities they bore to what Lilia had just related to them. Next door at Boris and Seelah’s, others waited to hear the report the women would give about this meeting, and they now agreed that they’d go there immediately. Cynthia returned to Lilia to tell her what was going on and that she’d stick around a while longer to provide further company.

Next door, Madeline and Patricia gave their report to Johnathan, Reuben, Ellis, Boris and Seelah, going over the basics of what Lilia had told them. All were thunderstruck over Lilia’s contention that she’d “disappeared and walked through the wall.” Johnathan immediately declared that this was information too vital to delay passing on to the Vincent Central crew.

They all immediately prepared to go to the library, but as they were leaving, Lilia and Cynthia met them in the corridor, Lilia appearing to have something urgent to share.

“Please,” Lilia said shakily but with conviction, “let me come with you. If you think that…this is that important to…to me, and why all this has been happening…I should be there too.”

There were some concerns, especially from Reuben, but she assured them she felt up to it. No good reason why not, all agreed; and Lilia was visibly delighted at being allowed to attend this meeting. Why not, indeed? It did concern her greatly, and this was the first time she’d been this forthcoming about something she truly wanted—at least in what was still considered her “normal” persona. It was clearly a sign that she was feeling less distressed about her other one, and that talking out the matter had done her a world of good.

On the way, Lilia stuck close by Reuben, but continually cast admiring glances at Ellis, who was relieved to see that she still regarded him highly. He’d been reluctant to sit out the questioning in favor of the women, knowing how much she trusted him yesterday evening and had been reluctant to have him leave then. But the main thing, he knew, was that she was feeling better; and this meeting should help all the more, if it proved to yield the results that Johnathan thought it might.

Chapter 12 - The connection

At Vincent Central, research had continued apace since breakfast; for not only those writings yet unseen, but into those already catalogued, for any possible clues that may have been overlooked. The same team of Rats led by Alcina was on the job again, minus Ages, who had medical duties, but now joined by Kimball, who was especially enthusiastic in light of last night’s discoveries.

Tallus approached him now, pausing momentarily to take in the sight of him sitting on the floor, nearly surrounded by papers spread in a semicircle, intently studying the one directly in front of him. “Sorry to interrupt, Kimball,” he said, “but I believe I have the last of the ones you want.”

Kimball didn’t seem to hear at first, but then he looked up, appearing mildly startled. “Oh, sorry, Tallus. Did you say something? Oh, are those the rest of them?”

“Yes, they are.” Tallus handed them to him. “You’re going at this with quite a vengeance.”

“Yes, I guess I am.” Kimball only briefly glanced up as he leafed through them, already poring over them intently. “Can you blame me, though? I was the only friend Vincent had in the world, but there was so much he could not or would not tell me. And now we have this discovery from last night. There must be more we can find out, Tallus. We now know how he was able to get around inside and outside NIMH so easily. There’s got to be more we can find out right here. I’m certain that all it would take is a bit more careful reading.”

“Yes, Johnathan believes so too. But there are still many pages yet unseen, that haven’t had so much as a perfunctory glance. Among those, and these in front of you…but I’m preaching to the converted, aren’t I?”

“That’s all right, because it’s the absolute truth.”

“Have you found anything yet which might be significant?”

“Well, there’s this one…” Kimball returned his attention to the notes spread before him—pages that were accounts of dreams or seemed to be, or were undated, or otherwise deemed unclassifiable, mostly due to content that seemed indefinite or even unintelligible—and took one from the top of one stack.

“This is one of the undated ones. Listen to this.” He cleared his throat. “‘It all rings so hollow for me now. How much longer will I continue to make excuses? I am as a carrion bird, picking and scraping away at a skeleton that has lain bleaching in the sun for months. There is no more for me here, save all that I now survey. Is it still enough? Not long ago, I would have had no doubts. Now, recent events have placed me at a crossroads. Day by day it feels more and more as if this desk, this bed, chairs, carpet, all these damnable journals, are all that keep me here. This world, which is my singlehanded creation, my child, has become my burden. The desire to leave is in constant conflict with the desire to carry on as I always have. But will I be able to, if I do stay? When I weigh all of this against what I know would welcome me out there, the former desire grows ever stronger. They are out there, those who would take me to their bosom and welcome me as one of their own. But the times I have tried, to make a life outside of this monolithic human-made monstrosity, to go to them and stay with them, only to return time and time again, drawn by that weakness in me that keeps me here…it all serves to increase my determination to overcome it. Yet, it also causes my shame to likewise grow, especially since I’ve realized that I very likely have offspring of my own waiting for me out there. One day, I will overcome this fear once and for all, and—oh, damn it all. Damn it all.’”

Kimball paused, lost in thought; though he was one of the first to read this entry when it was uncovered a few days ago, and all of them were familiar with it by now, it still haunted him. Before this one had been uncovered, there had been few entries in which he’d honestly described his feelings in any substantial fashion, and that in itself made this one nearly unique; but more, it had all but clinched the diagnosis of Vincent’s agoraphobia, and illustrated—probably more than any other—the frustration he felt at not being able to rein it in, coupled with the realization of the ways he’d touched the lives of those he’d met on the outside, including Kimball’s own family. But was there more to this entry?

“I can’t help but wonder,” he said presently to Tallus, “if there’s some special importance to when this was written. I mean…what if he wrote this shortly before…he met his end? It could prove that he wasn’t rushing to meet it, and that he was going to try to leave again, possibly for good.”

“You and Johnathan are of one mind on this, aren’t you?”

“Of course. Neither of us wants to believe that—”

“Hello? Are my ears burning? Is someone paging me?”

They both looked toward the door. “Over here, Johnathan,” said Tallus. “You’ll want to hear this. Rather a larger crowd than I’d expected.” He welcomed the nine mice in, reserving a special though not exorbitant greeting for Lilia, wanting her to feel at home but not uncomfortable; there was no big scene made about how unexpected her presence was. For her part, she was fascinated by these new surroundings; Cynthia was reminded of her family’s first look at the Rats’ library two years before.

“So what’s the latest poop?” asked Johnathan, with most of the other mice gathering around. Kimball described his theories about the by-now familiar undated entry he’d just recited aloud, after which he asked Johnathan what he thought.

Johnathan paused in his whisker-fiddling. “Well, maybe this’ll come in handy after all.” He reached in his shoulder-bag and pulled out a familiar red amulet. “We’ve used it before to view scenes from Vincent’s life, but there were no great revelations,” he explained, mostly for the benefit of Reuben and Lilia, who had never before sat in on any of those sessions. “But now…”

“We can use it to find out when he made this entry, can’t we?” suggested Madeline.

“Exactly.” Without further ado, Johnathan began concentrating. All present gathered around for a good view. The amulet began glowing, and an image soon followed: Vincent, sitting at his desk writing. Upon closer view, the page he was working on could be clearly seen to be the one in question. It was mostly completed, four lines short of the end, when he was seen to pause and gaze upward, expression grim and intense. Ellis glanced toward Reuben, reminded of similar expressions he’d seen on his face recently.

“Johnathan,” asked Kimball quietly, “how exactly will we learn when he was writing it, just from observing him this way?”

“I’m not sure yet. We’ll see how it goes from here, at least up till he finishes the page.”

“That’s…that’s really him, Johnathan? Our father?”

“Yes, it is, Lilia.” She and Reuben showed an especially keen fascination, since this was the first they’d seen the amulet used in this fashion, let alone used to view their father. This was also the first they’d seen him as he actually was, outside of drawings by himself and Patricia.

Vincent was seen to resume writing, going as far as the next-to-last line, then stopping again. Then he shook his head and finished the page, expression reflecting the frustration expressed in that disturbing last line. He got up from the desk, picked up the page he’d just finished, and held it in front of him as if he would crumple or tear it up; but instead, he brought it over to a stack of papers and placed it close to the bottom of the stack. Then, he walked to the center of the room and said something out loud, then headed for the doorway. Out of his hideaway he went, determination in every step as he made his way up the stairs to the hidden entrance in the utility closet. With hardly a pause, he made his way out to the hallway.

It was at around this point that three of those observing the scene began to feel strangely uneasy. Kimball was the first to say out loud that there was a disturbing familiarity about this scene; and soon neither he nor Johnathan nor Patricia doubted why. “Johnathan…that hunch of mine, about when he made that entry…I had no idea it was that soon before…” He looked at Patricia, who was holding her hand over her heart over what she knew would follow.

Johnathan quickly explained for everyone else’s benefit what the amulet was likely to show next, cautioning them that it was a pretty horrible sight.

“Johnathan, are you sure that this is that occasion? The exact same one?”

“Maddie, I couldn’t forget that scene if I tried.” While everyone else elected to look away, Johnathan kept watching to confirm absolutely that they weren’t wrong, for all he wished otherwise. He continued viewing after Vincent had reached the outside, up to where he approached the dumpster; then, when the cat came into view, Johnathan closed his eyes, covered the Stone and silently “ordered” it to cease. He looked up, nodding sadly to everyone.

Everyone was silent for another moment. Then Patricia said sadly, “I guess this…this proves that Vincent was choosing to meet his end, after all…”

“No, Patricia,” said Kimball, unexpectedly sharply. “This still doesn’t prove that.”

“But the other note, that he addressed to me, definitely said that he knew the end was near…”

“An end, Patricia. That didn’t necessarily mean his own death.” He paused, sighing. “I’m sorry, love, I didn’t mean to raise my voice, but…I knew him better than anyone else here, and I can’t believe that he was suicidal.”

“Neither can I.” Johnathan looked down at the Stone, fingering it in his hand. “There’s only so much this can show. We can observe his actions, but without knowing what was in his head or heart, we can’t draw any definite conclusions.”

“Instead, we’re left with more questions.” Kimball looked down at the papers he’d been going over on the floor, and went back over to them. “We still believe that there are more answers to be found, don’t we? I say we shouldn’t let this be a setback.”

“He’s right,” said Johnathan. “Let’s remember what we came here to do.” With that, all of the mice and Tallus filed into the adjacent conference room. Johnathan had to coax Kimball away from his renewed studying, assuring him that he’d want to hear this too.

“It does explain one thing,” said Patricia as they filed in. “Why we didn’t see that page when we found his hideaway; though not why he concealed it like that.”

“Yes,” added Kimball, “and I can understand why he was tempted to destroy it, but…I guess it’s a good thing he had a change of heart.”

After all were seated around the table in the conference room, Madeline and Patricia began describing what Lilia had told them about when she’d first noticed the changes in her and Reuben, and the dreams she’d had preceding her most recent changes. Johnathan and Tallus took an especially keen interest in the latter.

“Dreams…” Tallus mused aloud afterward. “Passing through walls and floors, in a human building…”

“…which Vincent was doing for real,” finished Johnathan.

“When she told us this,” added Madeline, “we knew you’d have to hear it immediately.”

“What does it mean, though?” asked Ellis. “What sort of connection?”

“One definitely more than that of blood,” said Tallus. He explained to Lilia and Reuben what had been discovered about their father last night, after which he asked, “Lilia…do you remember when you first started having those dreams?”

“Well…it was in late summer, or early fall. I couldn’t say the exact day. I’d never learned months or days until after we came here. But I guess it would have been sometime in September.”

“Yes…” Tallus stroked his chin. “Yes, thank you, Lilia. Now…” He got up and began circling the table. “When did we estimate Vincent met his end?”

“Around September the 20th,” replied Johnathan instantly.

“Are you suggesting that…when Vincent died, he…passed those abilities on to Lilia?” asked Cynthia.

“It is looking that way, is it not? I wonder…” Tallus paused in his floor-pacing. “Johnathan, the amulet could prove whether the two events were linked, could it not?”

“I guess so, but…it still wouldn’t tell us how or why.”

Reuben raised a hand. “If this is true, why did it happen to Lilia and not me?”

“Or me, or any of Vincent’s other children?” wondered Boris.

“However it happened, or why, there are forces at work here that we must understand fully before we can solve the mystery. Let’s see…Lilia dreamed of being inside a building that could very well have been the NIMH lab. Reuben…do you recall having dreams that seemed…well, as if you were someone else entirely, experiencing something completely outside your own personal experience?”

“I don’t remember most of mine,” said Reuben. “Although…there was one I had a couple of years ago that really stayed with me, I don’t know why. I was leading…a group of rats somewhere, to a place of safety, I guess.”

Nearly everyone showed surprise at this. “Rats? Really?” said Johnathan.

“Yes, and that’s the strangest part. At that time I didn’t really know any rats, nor had much contact with any. That’s probably why I remember that one so well.”

“That would stand out in my memory, all right. Any other details you remember?”

“Not many. We were all in this place I can’t really describe. Sometimes it seemed more like a human-made place, sometimes not.”

“But you were leading these rats,” said Tallus, resuming his pacing. “Fascinating. Ah, Boris, how about you? You sometimes have these visions that—”

He interrupted himself as all suddenly noticed that Boris was sitting stock still, gazing straight ahead but with eyes half-closed. “I think he’s having one now,” Cynthia whispered to Lilia.

Seelah silently motioned for everyone to stay quiet until it was over. Everyone was fascinated by the sight, which most hadn’t seen before, anticipating what would come of it.

After almost a minute, Boris’s eyes flew open. He shook his head rapidly and rubbed at his brow as Seelah placed an arm around his shoulders. Soon he noticed everyone was sitting silently, with attentions focused on him. He quickly collected himself, clearing his throat. “I just saw…someone, two figures, sitting and talking. It was hard to make out any features, because there was so much fog, so much mist. It was all very gloomy, but, they were…well, one was larger than the other. It almost seemed like the smaller one was a mouse, but it was hard to tell.”

“Can you recall any of their conversation?” asked Tallus.

“I…can’t really remember specific words, but…no, there was something about…being hopeful that things would be different soon. I guess their conversation was less gloomy than the landscape.” Boris looked around at everyone. “I’ve had so many like that, which didn’t mean all that much to me personally, but…could this be another piece of the puzzle?”

“We can’t afford to discount any possible clues,” said Tallus. “I wonder…could some of Vincent’s, er, ‘dream reports’ provide any further ones?”

“I can’t help but wonder,” said Johnathan, rubbing his whiskers, “if hearing Reuben describe his dream, or any of this discussion in general, was what triggered Boris’s trance now.”

Before anyone could say more, an outside voice chimed in. “Uhm…is it all right to come in now?” It was Colin, one of the research crew, standing at the door.

“Of course, Colin,” said Tallus. “What do you have for us?”

“I wanted to make sure I wasn’t interrupting. As for this…” Colin held up the page in his hand. “This is one of the last pages we hadn’t gone over at all. I thought it should go in the ‘dream stack’, but I had…a hunch, I’d have to call it, and I figured you’d want to see it first.” He handed it to Tallus.

“Thank you, Colin. Ah, for the life of me, I’ll never fathom the system Vincent used.” He chuckled. “Providing he had one, of course. Even with my memory, I doubt that I could…” Tallus’s voice left him as he began examining the page.

“What is it?” Johnathan came up behind Tallus’s chair after he sat down again. Soon everyone was either standing on either side or had clambered up onto the table, curious for a view of the page.

Here was what seemed to be a straightforward description of Vincent using building materials, of wood and stone, but not handling them directly; rather, he described using his own will to hold them while others used nails and other fasteners to secure them in place. Certainly it was an account which, to most, would seem dreamlike; but it was the description of those others that gave those reading it now pause, especially Tallus and Johnathan. They were rats, and upon reading this some looked at Reuben curiously. He could only shrug.

Tallus looked at Colin, still standing nearby. “You were right to bring this to my attention, my friend.”

“It sounds just like your descriptions of…Nicodemus, how he’d use his powers of…telekinesis to help build your old colony,” observed Madeline.

“Tallus and I were both there to see that happen,” concurred Johnathan. “But Vincent wasn’t. As far as we know, the only contact he had with any rats was at NIMH. Either way, he didn’t openly refer to this as an account of a dream, but what else could it be?”

“But the way he describes it,” said Kimball, "it’s as if he’s…standing in for Nicodemus, as if those are his own powers.”

“I’ve been around this sort of thing enough to not just chalk it up to coincidence,” said Johnathan sagely. “But what else could it be? Vincent was living there at NIMH all the time we were building the old colony.”

“And yet,” Tallus pointed out, “Lilia here dreamed of experiences that seemed to be those of another; of Vincent, no less. And Reuben did too, though his seemed to be those of…someone else entirely.”

“And that someone, at first blush, would appear to be Nicodemus,” Johnathan observed. “But what could he possibly have had to do with Vincent? How could he?”

“You’ve always told me,” Madeline reminded him, “that he still seemed to keep mysteries to himself, things that he didn’t even tell those closest to him, like you and Justin.”

“That’s true. Too true,” agreed Johnathan, sighing. “We’d suspected that he had other abilities besides the ones he’d openly display to us. Maybe it’s only because he insisted on solitude so much, especially in his later years, but…there had to be something there. It seems so incredible to suggest…a real connection between the two.”

“I wouldn’t even try to propose exactly what kind of connection, Johnathan,” said Kimball. “But didn’t you say that that green fellow, Uhrstegg—or Ghormfisk, correct?—had tampered with his mind?”

“He did,” Johnathan said, a bit wearily, obviously preferring to not discuss the matter but knowing it couldn’t be avoided. “He told us himself that the spell he put on Nicodemus made him forget certain things, mainly details about the Stone, by exploiting the fact that he was aging faster than the rest of us. He was becoming more subject to lapses in memory, and the spell exacerbated them, made him forget specific things. I don’t think even Ghormfisk knew the full extent, though, of what the spell did to Nicodemus, especially the last few months of his life, when Ghormfisk and I were out of the picture for a while.”

“It’s all so complex,” said Patricia. “Can we possibly solve this here, now, with what we have?”

“I couldn’t say at this point, but…I do believe a council meeting is in order.”

“We’ll hold it right here, where all of Vincent’s notes are,” said Tallus. “Let’s put the word out immediately.”

“And that’s what we’ve found, and theorized thus far. Everything seems to point to a connection among him, and Vincent, and at least some of his offspring.”

“Tallus,” said Velma, “in case you’d forgotten, Nicodemus is dead. We were all there when it happened.”

“None of us possibly could forget, Velma, but…so is Vincent, and he is undoubtedly part of the equation.”

“At one time, Velma,” said Arthur, “I’d have been every bit as skeptical. But I’ve seen and experienced too much, especially lately, to dismiss any theory out of hand, no matter how unlikely it sounds.”

“Let’s not forget,” added Angeline, “that a few months ago we and this entire patch of land were in another world, and that none of us believed that it could all be moved intact.”

“All right, you’ve made your point,” said Velma. “But what does it all mean? What sort of connection are we looking at?”

“Obviously one of a mystical nature,” said Tallus. “But its origins are still a mystery.”

“My guess is that it originated with Nicodemus,” theorized Justin. “Something he set in motion before his death, maybe.”

“But with Ghormfisk’s tampering,” said Tallus, “how could he have done something that elaborate? Unless he did it before then.”

“He had to have known about Vincent and his children, at any rate,” said Kimball. “And if so, it’s possible he knew of Patricia and me and our family as well.”

“Yes. But if he did know, he had his memory wiped clean of that knowledge, just like Ghormfisk’s spell forced him to forget so much else.”

“Isn’t it strange,” said Justin, “that so vital a piece of the puzzle, that one page, lay unseen until now.” He gave a small laugh. “Almost as if Vincent were playing with us somehow, making us scratch our heads and puzzle over all this before springing it on us.”

“But it’s not the final piece,” reminded Ages. “I’ve got a hunch…” He got up and headed for the door. “Let’s hold that thought. I’ll be right back.”

Many small conversations cropped up. Justin looked all around the room at the mix of rats and mice, taking special notice of Reuben and Lilia, sitting with Boris and Seelah in a corner, looking rather small and bewildered but also fascinated by the proceedings. He walked over to them.

“Reuben…Lilia. It’s good to see both of you here. I know this must seem strange, maybe even overwhelming to you.”

“It is strange, Justin,” said Reuben, “but it involves us, so we need to be here.”

“I never thought,” began Lilia almost inaudibly, “I’d be part of something so important. I feel like this is something that…will affect everyone here.”

“Well it might,” said Justin. “Who knows, it might even—”

“I don’t believe this!” came a shouted voice from the next room. “Were you all asleep? How could you not notice such a thing?”

Justin started toward the door, but Ages came storming through first, waving another of Vincent’s notes in his hand. “Preposterous, is what it is! To think that such a vital detail would fly right over everyone’s head!”

“Ages, what are you ranting about?” demanded Tallus. “And I’ll thank you not to abuse and demean my crew. They’ve all been working hard on this project.”

“Apologies can wait, Tallus. Look at this!” Ages set the page on the table, where Tallus immediately recognized it as the one discovered only last night, wherein Vincent described the onset of his new “phasing” abilities.

Tallus told everyone this was that page, then asked Ages, “We know all about this already. So what have you found?”

“First…what day was it that Madeline Brisby came to you for help, Nicodemus died, and you had to vacate the Rosebush colony?”

“We all know that,” said Justin, who had returned to his seat. “It was March 12, 1983.”

“Tallus…if you would, please read to everyone the date at the end of this entry.”

Tallus turned it over, and his eyes grew wide. “March…thirteen, nineteen eighty-three.”

This met with renewed discussion throughout the chamber, until Justin called everyone to order. “I believe this should prove, beyond a doubt, that Nicodemus had a connection with Vincent and his children.”

“You know, Justin,” said Johnathan, “maybe there’s something to that ‘playing with us’ theory.”

“I’ll agree that the coincidence of dates is remarkable,” said Velma, “but couldn’t it still be just coincidence?”

“Of course,” agreed Justin. “But we can’t write it off, not with everything else we’ve uncovered.”

“I don’t recall,” said Colbert, “Nicodemus ever displaying powers such as those Vincent described. I mean, passing through walls and floors like a phantom? Turning invisible?”

“Nor did I,” said Simone. “But he kept many secrets from us, even before Ghormfisk got to him; and after, he couldn’t reveal what he couldn’t remember.”

“Not the least of which was the extent of his involvement with magic and sorcery,” said Justin. “He may have forgotten those particular abilities.”

“But Vincent still seemed to have ‘inherited’ them,” said Johnathan, “just as Lilia in turn seemed to get them from him.”

“And there’s Reuben’s ‘leading rats’ dream. I wonder: did this connection stop with them, or could it have extended further?” He looked straight at Boris.

“Could it be… Is this where my visions come from? And what about Doris, or our younger brothers or sisters?”

“Or…” said Johnathan, rubbing his whiskers, “one other that we’ve almost forgotten…”

“Who’s that, Johnathan? Ah…wait, you mean our other brother, who’s still on Earth, don’t you?”

“‘No-Name,’ yes. And if I’m not mistaken, we may be a little overdue to pay him a visit again.”

“We were just talking about him the other day,” said Cynthia. “Michael wasn’t sure if it had been a month yet.”

“But if all this had any effect on him,” wondered Ages, “I wonder if his condition is a factor. Provided, of course, that this isn’t all just coincidence.”

“Either way,” said Johnathan, “we’ve no excuse now to put off visiting him any longer.”

“Michael was his sponsor; I wonder if he’d be able to tell us anything more about him?” wondered Tallus. “Something that might provide any other clues?”

“It’s possible. Cynthia, could you—”

“I’m out of here, Daddy.” Cynthia had already left her seat. “I know just where’s he’s working today. Be right back!”

After Cynthia had raced from the room, Tallus said, “Well, while we’re waiting, I believe someone mentioned ‘apologies’…” He looked directly at Ages.

It took another moment for Ages to completely pick up on Tallus’s meaning; then he stood, grumbling to himself as he returned to Vincent Central.

“…and after we told him we’d be back in a month or so, we said goodbye and left. I wouldn’t know what else to tell that you haven’t heard already, except…well, a couple of things that may be just hunches, but anyway… Some of you have heard this already. As we were leaving, I glanced back at No-Name, and he was just sitting there, like he did so much of the time, except that it seemed like his expression was sad, like he had more he needed to say, but couldn’t. When he said ‘no,’ I said to Johnathan that he might not have meant that as the answer to our offer. The more I’ve thought about it, the more I believe it’s true.”

“But when you do see him again,” brought up Ages, “what will you do if he says ‘no’ again?”

“Well, maybe I’m alone in this, but…I’d be willing to spend as much time with him as it would take to really get through to him, get to know him, till I’d know for sure what he really wants.”

“That’s very commendable, Michael,” said Tallus. “But something like that might be better conducted here, for reasons of safety, and that he’d have all the resources of Freethorn to help him.”

“I know how much you respect his wishes, and don’t want to force him to come here,” said Johnathan. “But we should consider what’s best for him.”

“I am, Johnathan, and I understand your point. It just bothers me that we could be bringing him here against his will.”

“And if he’s the same as when we last saw him, we won’t know what his will is. But maybe we’re getting ahead of ourselves here. Michael…we’ve already told you about our newest discoveries about his father, and this strange link that seems to exist among him and some of his other children, and the Rats’ late leader. We believe that our friend there might provide a further clue as to why this link exists. We’re not sure how, but it’s possible his condition has something to do with it.”

“But…when we used the Stone to look into his past, he seemed to be that way his whole life.”

“This is true,” said Tallus. “And granted, we did learn some vital details about his life. We know that his mother couldn’t handle him and left him to fend for himself, and that he had a brother who cared for him for a while before he was killed by a cat; but no clues as to the origin of his condition, outside of its occurring naturally.”

“But that’s enough reason right there to bring him to us,” said Boris. “He had someone to look after him before, his brother, but now he’s alone. But he needn’t be any longer.”

“Well, Michael, said Johnathan, “as his original sponsor, we’re leaving it up to you. What do you say?”

Michael mulled the point for a moment, then said, “All right. Let’s do it. I guess it would be best for him, and who knows? You’ve sure got me curious with this mystery, and he just might provide a clue after all. He could even provide the key to it all.”

“I wouldn’t go that far,” said Tallus, “but now that it’s decided, we need to determine when and with whom we carry this out.”

It didn’t take much further deliberation to decide that it should be done as soon as possible, and that Johnathan and Michael be the ones to go again, this time joined by Justin. All that was left was to put out the word that Freethorn would probably soon gain another resident.

“And let’s not forget,” said Justin before the meeting adjourned, “what was discussed at the last general meeting. If there’s anyone who objects to his presence here, for whatever reason, encourage him or her to bring it out into the open; but blind, unreasoning prejudice will not be tolerated, either for the fact of his being a mouse or possibly for his condition. As Johnathan said, I may be getting ahead of myself here; but we must prepare for any possibility. Now…Johnathan, Michael…what do you say we get started?”

Chapter 13 - Scratching to salvation

“Soon, Rollo, very soon.”

“Really? You know it’s true, absolutely? No, don’t answer. I know, you wouldn’t say it if you didn’t think so.”

“I cannot precisely describe how I know; but somehow I felt that, a short while ago, we were being observed.”

Rollo sat silently for a moment. “Yes…I felt something too, now that you mention it. Does it really mean we’ll be free, though?”

“I cannot honestly say, but…any change should be one for the better, wouldn’t you say?”

“You’re the one who can really say, Teacher.”

“Of course, Rollo. I’m sorry. Even in my present state, I’m still capable of forgetting things. Now though, perhaps you should prepare yourself again, maybe even for another practice run; or, dare I say, the real thing.”

Rollo nodded. As weary of these sometimes-pointless-seeming exercises as he was, Teacher had convinced him of their importance. After all, he’d worked his way up to five figures; perhaps that would be enough, but certainly the more he could scratch, the better he’d get their message across.

“Well, here we are again.” Michael shook his head rapidly, to help acclimate himself to the suddenness of their new surroundings and to shake off the slight disorientation caused by this most unusual mode of transportation. “I’ll never get over this way of traveling, Johnathan.”

“Truth to tell, Michael, me neither. Well…you go first.”

In front of them lay the cement foundation of an abandoned farm outbuilding. This was the more out-of-the-way side, where surrounding vegetation was thicker. It was late morning back in Freethorn, but here the sun hadn’t yet risen; not that it probably would be seen anyway, owing to the current weather conditions. Around them a light snow was falling, adding to the thin blanket that had already formed. The two mice and one rat shivered against the sudden cold, a helpful reminder that they wished to accomplish this quickly. As Michael headed for the secluded entrance to their destination, Justin looked all around, feeling almost nostalgic in spite of the gloom and inclement weather. This was only the second time he’d been back to Earth since the Migration, having briefly visited Thorn Valley with Johnathan last week; and, for all that everyone enjoyed their new home on Lahaikshe, there was a degree of homesickness in everyone, and Justin was no exception. Johnathan felt it too, but they both knew they couldn’t let it distract them.

They followed close behind Michael as he searched for the entrance hole. He soon found it and disappeared inside. Seconds later, his head popped out, and he beckoned for Johnathan to follow. Justin waited outside, since the hole was too small for him, and they didn’t feel right about widening it. It was expected that this wouldn’t take long enough to bother with the effort anyway. So Justin leaned against the foundation with arms folded, keeping a lookout, especially mindful of the farmyard cat that had menaced Michael and No-Name last time, the same one that had killed No-Name’s brother around two years before.

Inside, Michael and Johnathan took a minute to allow their eyes to adjust to the dimness; then they approached their charge, greeting him with quiet hellos. They’d wondered if they weren’t calling on him too early, but No-Name looked as if he’d been up for some time. He crouched at the opposite side of the den with back turned, eating a berry. He turned partially, with one eye facing them, but not interrupting his repast. Upon finishing, he carefully cleaned and groomed his hands and face, then faced his visitors directly. They waited for him to make the next move. Though it was hard to tell, they couldn’t really discern any change in expression that might show recognition. As noted before, he seemed unable to express emotion, at least in a normal way. Still, there was nothing for it but to reintroduce themselves, and hope for better results.

Michael approached him first. “Do you remember me? Michael? If you do, I guess you know Johnathan too. We visited you some time ago.”

No-Name only gave each of them a prolonged stare; then he walked past them, toward the entrance. His visitors were prepared to follow him outside, but instead he paused to lean against the wall.

“He recognized us, Johnathan. I’m sure of it,” Michael said quietly.

Johnathan nodded. “Well, I guess we’d better try to sell ourselves and Freethorn again.” Johnathan cleared his throat as they both approached No-Name. “Well, if you remember us, then you probably know why we’re here. We really believe you’d like it where we come from, much more than here. The weather’s mild year-round, and the food’s a whole lot better; and you’d be among friends…and family. Did you know you have brothers and sisters? Well, we know you had one you were close to, and we know what happened to him. We’re really sorry about that, but…there are no cats where we’re from, or anything else that would attack or hurt you. You’d like that, wouldn’t you?”

No-Name continued looking away from them for a few more seconds; then, he looked at Johnathan with the same impassive expression, then at Michael. Obviously he acknowledged their presence, but how much of what they told him was getting through?

“I wish you could tell us,” said Michael, touching No-Name’s arm, “just how you feel and what’s on your mind. We want to help you in any way we can, but we can’t tell if you really do want to come with us, or if you’re—”

Suddenly No-Name reached up to place his hand on Michael’s; softly at first, then with an unexpectedly strong grip. He began moving toward the entrance, and Michael could do naught but shrug at Johnathan and follow along.

Outside, Justin was a bit surprised to see them emerge this soon, especially with No-Name leading. “Well, hello. I’m Justin, in case you hadn’t been told about me already.”

He crouched down in front of No-Name, who, with Michael still firmly in tow, stopped, seeming to respond almost instantly to Justin’s voice. He gave Justin that same prolonged stare, and then he resumed his purposeful path. Michael could only give the same shrug.

Justin scratched the back of his head as he and Johnathan followed. “Johnathan, what’s going on?”

“Near as I can tell, he wants to show us something.”

They walked out only a short ways to where the snow was thicker. Then, No-Name released his grip on Michael and looked around. He picked up a twig, then stood staring off into space, as if unsure of what to do with it; then, he crouched down, extended the hand with the stick, and began scratching at the thin layer of snow. His three guests approached more closely, observing intently.

“I could almost swear,” Justin whispered, “that he recognized me back there. I know it’s more likely that he just hasn’t seen many rats before, but…”

“Wait a minute…” Johnathan leaned in more closely. “If I didn’t know better, I’d think he’s making…letters.”

So far, the figures he traced with the stick gave every indication of being such. There, before them in the snow, was a very legible N, followed by an I. The next one looked as if it would become a circle, but stopped halfway around; a C? Then, another that curved; another C? No, this one was a circle; an O, beyond a doubt.

“Where would he have learned to spell?” mused Justin. “He never learned to read or write, did he?”

“Maybe his brother taught him a little,” suggested Michael. “But if he didn’t learn either…”

“Never mind that,” said Johnathan. “Is he spelling out what I think he is?”

He and Justin were especially spellbound by what they were witnessing. No-Name seemed to waver with the next figure; partway through it, he seemed unsure of which way to continue; then, there emerged what his guests knew to be the outcome, though they had no idea how. They recited the string of letters to themselves, unable to comprehend how such a thing could be.

With the next figure, though, they had no doubt as to what No-Name was telling them, though they were no less mystified. Three short parallel lines, another connecting them; then No-Name simply stopped, the stick hanging limply in his hand, then dropping to the snow.

Justin shook his head in awe and disbelief, spelling out the message aloud. “N…I…C…O…D…E…”

“The key to the whole mystery,” said Michael distantly. “I wasn’t really serious, but now…”

Now, No-Name abruptly stood, turned and looked at his guests with the same empty stare; then, he crouched again before them with head down, reaching up to take Justin’s and Johnathan’s hands in his.

The three looked at each other, with no further comprehension of why this was happening; but one thing was understood perfectly. Their course of action had become plain as day; it didn’t matter that they didn’t understand the whys and wherefores. This was the clincher; they knew what they had to do.

Justin crouched down, placing an arm around No-Name’s shoulders. “My friend…we will all leave now. All four of us.”

None said another word. Johnathan nodded, they all joined hands; Johnathan concentrated on the amulet, and with a flash, all were gone.

Chapter 14 - Reintegration

The word had been put out: not only that there was a very good chance of the arrival of the last child of Vincent to come to Freethorn, but of the discussions about the connection Vincent and some of his offspring seemed to have with their late, revered leader. In Oak Park, a good portion of Freethorn’s populace had assembled: Rats, Mice, and Rusay guests alike, most standing or sitting in small groups, talking quietly but excitedly, some with picnic lunches spread before them. It seemed that everyone had some theory or conjecture about the nature of this connection. Some were even placing bets on it. Some shared Michael’s theory that “No-Name” held the key to solving it, with varying degrees of seriousness. One thing had been agreed upon by everyone: that when or if No-Name arrived, he probably wouldn’t expect such a large turnout to see him and might be nervous or frightened with everyone crowding around him, perhaps more than other recent arrivals. Therefore, only his half-siblings and some of the other mice would greet him first, and even they would do so with caution, until everyone had a better idea of how he would react to his new environment. Ages and Cynthia were waiting with another batch of the Dip, prepared to be gentle with him and hoping he wouldn’t find the procedure—necessary for controlling external parasites—too unsettling. Captain Brutus and other members of the Guard were in charge of crowd control, already ensuring a wide enough perimeter would be maintained upon the group’s return, hopefully with No-Name in tow.

Though he looked forward to this meeting, Boris’s mind was very much on this morning’s discussion about the “V-Nic Connection,” as some had already dubbed it; especially the vision he’d had right in the midst of it. He discussed this aloud with Seelah and their friends, speculating that perhaps the reason it nagged at his mind so much now was because he, and possibly everyone else, might understand it after No-Name’s arrival.

Overall, the atmosphere was festive, with much anticipation; though much of the discussion centered around what might be done for him, what with his not-entirely-understood condition and the difficulties it might produce, both for himself and others.

Much sooner than expected, the moment arrived. There was the familiar bright flash, and when everyone looked toward its point of origin, there stood several figures—Justin, Johnathan, Michael…and yes, definitely one other, a third mouse, who blinked and gazed at his surroundings, wide-eyed but with a seemingly impassive expression.

“Well, we’re here. This is it,” said Michael to the newcomer. “Nice and warm, isn’t it?” He and Johnathan kept their arms linked with No-Name’s, though not too tightly. Ages and Cynthia came forward, speaking quiet greetings as Johnathan and Michael steered their charge toward the tub of Dip, explaining what it was for and assuring him it wouldn’t hurt a bit. No-Name showed no adverse reaction to the smell of the stuff and took to the treatment docilely, even when being scrubbed, albeit gently, around his face. He even closed his eyes without being asked.

Among the crowd, still waiting patiently at a distance, some were starting to wonder if this newcomer was worth all the anticipation. It wasn’t that they weren’t interested in helping him; all knew of his condition and many actually looked forward to doing what they could for his special needs. But would this alleged connection with his father and, more incredibly, Nicodemus, actually pan out? If this was the way he is all the time, how would such a connection be revealed?

As all manner of speculation was being brought out, Justin had already gone over to where some of the councilmembers waited, where he gave all the details about what had happened on Earth. None could completely contain his or her surprise at the final detail.

Tallus slapped his forehead. “He tried to spell out…that?”

“Where would he have learned of Nicodemus?” said Anna. “If you or the others never told him…”

“And even if you did, what would the name mean to him?” said Colbert. “But at least it seems to confirm there is a connection.”

“No argument there, however we’ll uncover it,” said Justin. “But for now, let’s concentrate on the welcome wagon.”

All the while, even as Ages and Cynthia began the “rinse cycle,” No-Name’s would-be benefactors continued speaking to him, quietly explaining more details about his new home, though how much was getting through to him they couldn’t know. They could swear, though, that he was smiling slightly, as if enjoying the attention. It continued as Johnathan helped towel him dry.

Presently Johnathan indicated to the Guard Rats that they were ready to allow “visitors.” “See those mice over there?” he said, directing No-Name’s gaze to the group closest to them, who were already on their feet and talking excitedly among themselves. “They’re the ones we told you about. They’re your family.” No-Name just continued to stare impassively.

His half-siblings showed far more interest. “That’s really our brother, Boris?” said Ronjack, one of the younger ones.

“Yes, that’s him. I guess it’s okay to meet him now.” They all moved forward slowly and cautiously. Shortly, Boris stopped in his tracks and took Seelah’s arm. “That’s him, I know it is!” he whispered urgently.

“That’s who?”

“The one in my vision! The small one, anyway. I…don’t know how exactly, I couldn’t see his face at all, but I just know it’s him! But I guess I should keep that between us for now.”

Some of the other Mice joined No-Name’s half-siblings in quietly introducing themselves and even touching him. Some had to be reminded to refrain from making sudden moves or loud sounds, especially the younger children; perhaps an overly-cautious reminder, but necessary. So far he seemed untroubled by all the attention.

“We’ve all been looking forward to your arrival,” Boris was now saying to him as he clasped his half-brother’s hand. “Anything we can do to…to…” He fell strangely silent, with an expression almost as blank as No-Name’s.

“Boris, what’s wrong?” But Seelah received no answer, only the push of his hand away from him; not forceful, but enough to leave her in a state of great confusion.

Reuben and Lilia came forward, walking past her with the same expression, as if responding to a silent call. Most of those present were already aware that something most unusual was happening. Boris had already joined hands with No-Name, and Lilia and Reuben were now following suit.

Johnathan exchanged a bemused glance with Michael, then asked, “Hey, uh…guys, what’s going on here?”

Barely had the words left him when all four mice seemed simultaneously gripped by some invisible force. They all tensed as if enduring great pain, though none uttered a sound. No-Name seemed to be bearing the worst of it; his whole body shook, and he looked to be on the verge of convulsing, but he didn’t loosen his grip on Boris or Lilia.

Then, abruptly, it was over. All of them collapsed to the ground, finally losing their grip on each other as they all fell unconscious.

None knew how to react for a few seconds; then Seelah rushed forward. “Boris? Boris, speak to me!” She cradled his head in her lap. “Oh, what’s happened to you? Lilia, Reuben…are you all right? Somebody, help!”

Johnathan and Michael quickly joined her, and many others, Rats and Mice alike, were on their way. Johnathan examined Boris, and quickly assured Seelah that he was all right; his pulse and respiration were normal, though perhaps a bit slow. The same was true for Reuben and Lilia; but No-Name was a different matter.

Michael was the first at his side, followed closely by Ages. “I can still detect a pulse,” he quickly reported, “and he’s still breathing. But they’re both much slower than normal.” He looked up at Johnathan and Madeline, his bafflement plain to see. “I’ve never seen anything like it. It’s as if he’s entered into a hibernation-like state.”

The Brisbys looked at each other, the description instantly striking a familiar chord. “That sounds just like what the Stone endowed upon us,” Johnathan reported. “We saw it happen two years ago, when Maddie’s life was in danger, and that’s what saved her.”

As she approached, Teresa was reminded of more recent circumstances: “Could it be…similar to what happened to Eric?” None knew how to answer.

Michael was close to tears as he held up No-Name’s head. “He’s…he’s dying, I know it. We never should have brought him here.”

“Calm yourself, Michael,” said Ages. “We still don’t fully understand the situation here.”

“But what if this is like…what Teresa said? Eric couldn’t stand it, he thought that if he stayed, he’d—”

“Michael, please,” said Johnathan patiently. “We’re not jumping to any conclusions here. They’ll be all right. They are still alive.” As reassuring as he tried to sound, he couldn’t completely repress the memory of Madeline lying so close to death in Ghormfisk’s prison, after he’d been forced away from her for so long. He closed his eyes, trying to banish the image from his mind. Cynthia joined Michael at No-Name’s side, continuing to reassure him.

“And even if that were the case,” added Ages, “it wouldn’t explain why the others behaved as they did, and then all passed out like that.” He moved over to examine Reuben. “No change here. Perhaps…all we can do is wait for them to come around.”

“But there must be something we can do right now,” said Seelah, voice still full of worry, looking down at Boris.

“Well, we could try bringing them around, I suppose…”

“I’ll go look for some water,” said Johnathan, jumping to his feet, knowing that someone must have brought some with their lunch.

As he left, Seelah continued to stick close by Boris, as did Ellis with Lilia. The two exchanged glances, at once concerned and reassuring; and Ellis was reminded once more of how much Lilia was beginning to mean to him. He looked down at her still form as he cradled her head and held her hand. Though he believed Ages’s and Johnathan’s assurances, he still had no intention of leaving Lilia’s side, any more than Seelah did Boris. He looked over to Reuben, feeling almost as much concern; the two of them had found much common ground since yesterday, enough for Reuben to be considered a friend. Ellis looked over to where No-Name lay, tended to by Michael and Cynthia. He found he shared their concern, though he’d never seen No-Name before today. “How’s it going with him?” he asked. “Is he any better?”

Michael shook his head. “Not really. But he’s got to get better. I feel responsible for him.”

“We’re all doing what we can, Michael,” said Ages. “All we can do is wait.” He looked up to see two rats approaching with a litter. “It’s all right, Merrill, Andrew…I don’t think we’ll need it, at least not yet. There’s a chance they might—”

A sudden groan interrupted him. “It’s Reuben!” reported Ellis. “He’s coming to!” He laid Lilia’s head down gently and turned toward her brother.

Reuben’s eyelids fluttered, then opened wide. “Uhh…Ellis? Where am I? What happened?”

“We were hoping you could tell us,” said Ages, “but we can discuss that later. How do you feel, Reuben?”

Reuben sat up with another groan. “A bit light-headed, a little tired…but I guess I’m all right. So what…” He noticed Lilia, still unconscious. “Lilia!” he cried out, almost pushing Ellis over to get to her side. “Lilia…what’s wrong with her?”

“Reuben, calm down,” said Ages. “It was the same thing that happened to you and Boris, so they should come around too.”

Reuben noticed Boris in the same condition; but before he could voice any further questions, Boris began to stir. Shortly, Lilia regained consciousness as well. They both reported feeling the same as Reuben: basically fine, but very confused. All were told of how they had all collapsed after joining hands with No-Name. They all directed their attention toward him now. Though there appeared to be no change, Ages quickly found his pulse and respiration to be improved.

“He’s going to pull out of it,” said Cynthia, squeezing Michael’s hand and giving him a loving, reassuring look.

By now, many others had gathered around and listened as the three recovered mice were asked what they remembered. At the same time, Johnathan returned with a pitcher of water, and was brought up to date. The three mice shared a drink from the pitcher, feeling much improved; and recalled how they all came forward to meet their brother, but suddenly each of them felt the exact same sensation of their free will leaving them, with their only thought being to join hands in a circle; and then, absolutely nothing until just the last few minutes. Now, though they all felt fine, there was a strange, undefinable feeling as well. Lilia described it as feeling similar to something having left her, and the others said that was close to how they felt as well.

“So,” mused Tallus, standing over Johnathan and No-Name, “when he wakes up, I wonder what he’ll be able to tell us.”

“What makes you think he’ll say anything?” asked Johnathan as he sprinkled droplets of water over the unconscious mouse’s face, to no noticeable effect thus far.

“Or that he’ll be able to?” added Michael.

“Well, nothing except the fact that so much has already happened that’s unexplainable.”

Everyone waited, mostly silently; then, only a minute or so later, a low, rasping moan issued from No-Name’s throat. Michael gently patted the side of his face. It seemed to speed things along; No-Name’s eyes came open all at once, then screwed tightly closed, then reopened. He continued to moan inarticulately; then, with a suddenness that surprised everyone, he sat up, completely on his own. The effort seemed to cost him; he held his head with both hands, rubbing at his temples.

“Easy, friend, easy,” said Ages. “Don’t try to do too much at once.” Johnathan offered a drink, which No-Name very readily accepted; taking a small sip, then taking large gulps, slurping it down greedily. Then, after catching his breath, he looked up, gazing at his surroundings, expression no longer vacant but full of inquisitiveness.

“How do you feel?” asked Johnathan, though he wasn’t expecting much of an answer. No-Name seemed to notice him for the first time, studying his face intently; then he abruptly turned away, looking confused, and put his hands up to his head again as if in pain. More sounds issued from him, at first the same moans and grunts, but soon giving way to ones that riveted the attentions of everyone within earshot.

“Ohhh…I…I’m not just looking outside this time. It’s really happened.”

Johnathan gaped for a moment, as did everyone else who heard; then, finding his voice, he said, “You…you spoke. You hardly said a word before.”

No-Name again turned toward Johnathan. “It is you,” he said, barely above a whisper. “Johnathan… Johnathan Brisby. Oh, my dear friend…it really is you.” He reached out, touching the side of Johnathan’s face, as if to confirm the reality of what was before him; then, he embraced Johnathan as he would a long-lost friend.

“Uh, yes, it’s me,” replied Johnathan, almost stammering. “But…what’s your name?” Though the voice he heard was clearly that of a nearly-fully-mature mouse, there was something in it that was strangely familiar; something in the delivery, the cadence…

The younger mouse broke free of the embrace and sat down again. “My name…” He rubbed at his forehead. “Oh, so much…so much to assimilate…my thoughts, my memories, and others…the others I resided within… Yes…yes, that was what happened. But…” He brought his hand down, and looked all around, noticing most of the others present for the first time. “But…that’s all past now. Oh…oh, yes it is.” One Rat in the crowd suddenly commanded his attention. “Justin! It is you, isn’t it? And the one next to you… Could she be Isabella? Ah…I remember her mother saying how taken she was with you.”

Justin and Isabella looked at each other, slackjawed. How could he have possibly known something like…

Before they could question him, he said, “Oh, so much, all at once! Tallus! And Arthur, and Norriss, Charlotte, Angeline…Anna. I know you all! Or most of you.” He turned to Michael. “Ah, Michael, my friend…though I don’t know you nearly as well, it’s you I have to thank, perhaps more than anyone except Johnathan.”

He turned toward the Rats again, and acknowledged the confused stares, head-shaking, and dozens of small discussions his cryptic words had initiated. “Well…now that the reality of my situation has become clearer to me, I should make it clearer to all of you as well. I know I’ve caused great confusion, and I apologize.”

Justin stepped forward and crouched before this puzzling stranger, the one Michael once called “a four-legged riddle,” who seemed so much more so now. “I think apologies can wait. Who are you?”

“I should have made that clear right away, I know. But even that would be difficult, I fear…”

“Please…try.”

“Of course. The mouse you see before you is named Rollo…but he has a second name, one that you know very well.”

And Johnathan found himself saying: “Nicodemus?”

“Yes, my dear friends. Nicodemus.”

Chapter 15 - The return

A collective gasp rose from the crowd. How could such a thing be? Many of those present were there when the cinderblock that was the Brisby winter home on the Fitzgibbons farm was being moved, and the operation was sabotaged by Jenner, causing the equipment to collapse, and strike and kill their former leader. Afterwards, his body was borne with almost everything else in the Rosebush colony to the Rats’ new home in Thorn Valley, where it was interred in their memorial garden along with those of Jenner and Sullivan.

And now, here was this young mouse who, up until the past 15 minutes, had seemed to be burdened with an apparently lifelong condition that kept him from communicating his thoughts and feelings to others, claiming to actually be no less than their former leader.

“Well, Tallus,” said Norriss, “now that you’ve found out what he had to say, what do you think?”

Tallus could only stare speechless; but once everyone’s initial shock and surprise wore off, some reacted with less restraint than others. Brutus stepped forward, looking close to anger. “This…is some kind of trick! It must be! How…how can this one be Nicodemus? Nicodemus is dead!”

“Ah, Brutus, my son, I know this is difficult for anyone to understand…”

“Don’t call me ‘son’!” Brutus almost shouted as he loomed above the one who made this preposterous-sounding claim. “The only ones who can call me that are my mother…and Nicodemus. And he’s dead. I saw him die!” The differences in size between the two—a rat, larger than any other in Freethorn, and this mouse, normal-sized though thinner and leaner than most—made the claim seem all the more unlikely.

Justin stood up, placing a hand on Brutus’s shoulder. “Brutus, take it easy. I don’t know what’s going on yet, none of us do. But so far, it’s just words. We shouldn’t let ourselves get so aggravated.”

“I’m sorry, Justin, I’ve no wish to cause him any harm, but…how can we let him make a claim like that?”

The young mouse got to his feet. As Johnathan did the same, he said, “Well, I’m sure he has plenty of words to back it up. Don’t you?”

“Indeed I do.” He seemed untroubled by Brutus’s boisterous challenge, as though he fully expected it.

Another rat stepped forward. “Wait…I think there may be an easier way to find out.”

Brutus scratched his head. “Mother? Don’t tell me you believe this wild story of his?”

“No. Not yet. But I think we can settle it very easily.”

“What do you have in mind, Anna?” asked Justin.

Anna crouched in front of the one who held claim to two names and said, “If you are Nicodemus, then you should remember something…very special between us, some very special words we once exchanged.” She leaned in to whisper in the young mouse’s ear, and then she turned her head and leaned in closer to allow him to whisper in hers. He did so, her eyes grew wide, and she whispered something back. More words were exchanged thusly over the next minute or so; and then, Anna clasped the mouse’s shoulders and said, “You are him. You really are Nicodemus.” She stood up and announced to everyone, “I don’t know how or why, but…he is who he claims to be. We just exchanged words that only he and I would know. He is Nicodemus.”

As nearly everyone present began talking quietly among themselves, Johnathan had one other very important question for the newcomer: “If you are Nicodemus, how is it that you don’t seem surprised to see me here?”

“Ah, of course.” He clasped Johnathan’s shoulders. “While it was true I’d believed you dead as the rest of us did, I eventually learned that you were merely…relocated. To a world called Lahaikshe, I believe, where you were the guest of one named Gwinthrayle?”

“Yes…that’s right.” Johnathan could only stare silently for a moment. “All right,” he said decisively, “I’ll reserve further judgment until we’ve all heard your story.”

“Thank you, my friend.” The young mouse cast his eyes about the crowd, more of which were venturing closer. His eyes met those of Brutus, but the large Rat quickly turned away, looking almost apologetic. Looking around to the others closest to him, it quickly became obvious that many were not nearly as ready as Anna to accept him in this form; nor, perhaps, to take Anna at her word. He approached her again, concerned that her credibility might be called into question. But the look she gave him was enough to tell him that she was unconcerned with such details.

“Tell your story,” was all she said, smiling confidently. Those closest to them voiced their agreement. His own confidence buoyed, he thanked them; and as the word spread that he was readying to speak, the crowd quieted down.

“I know you’re all wondering,” he announced, “just how it is that I could be interred in your own memorial garden, after that terrible event where I was struck down by our own equipment; and yet, here I stand before you in this body, speaking to you now. Oh, it’s a long and involved tale, my friends…my children. I know it seems absurd, too, that a mouse not quite fully mature would be addressing you as ‘my children.’ But I’ve already voiced my claim, and Anna has verified it; and now you’re all wondering why and how. I do believe it is time. So you may want to call for anyone else who would want to hear the tale.”

Several did leave to spread the word, including Johnathan and Brutus; and in the meantime, some acquaintances were renewed. “Mrs. Brisby…Madeline. It’s wonderful to see you again.” He embraced her. “For all the time that you were part of Johnathan’s life, and indirectly part of ours, it’s a shame that we only really knew each other for so brief a time.”

“Yes. But I guess that…we can make it up now, can’t we?”

“By all means. Oh, you’re still confused, child, I know.” He gave a small laugh. “Ah, there’s that irony again. You could be mother to this one,” —he indicated himself, or more accurately, the body he inhabited— “and here am I, addressing you as ‘child.’”

“It’s all right…Nicodemus. I mean, I guess I can accept you like this, but it’s still so strange.”

“All will be revealed in time. Now…this lovely creature must be Teresa. And these little ones are yours?”

In short order, he met the rest of the Brisby family, pleased to see how they’d all grown. He was pleased to meet Sarah, and he offered condolences for her and Teresa’s recent loss, and congratulated Martin and Karen on their happy marriage and impending new arrival. “The continuance of new life, and the furtherance of my dream,” he called the upcoming event.

“I always wished I could have met you,” Martin said with a touch of awe, “but I never thought that it would happen, let alone like this.” Teresa, Cynthia and Timothy could only nod their agreement, their brother having spoken for all of them. The question of his apparent lack of surprise at seeing their father alive went unspoken for now, though it was surely on all their minds.

He was pleased to meet the four youngest Brisbys, though they were less impressed and a little confused. “I thought you were…an old rat,” said Lyndon with all sincerity, to his mother’s and older sibs’ dismay, but the mouse merely laughed gently, stroking the boy’s head.

“I was an old rat once, my little friend, and there’s much more to tell…for all of us to tell.” One important detail strangely seemed to evince little surprise in him: that, even as he recognized their surroundings as a portion of Thorn Valley, he knew that it and they were now in this world located in a completely different dimension, which he already knew to be Lahaikshe. Perhaps a bigger surprise for the others came when he was introduced to Kimball and Patricia and more of their extended family, and he claimed to actually recognize them, again reminding everyone that there was much more to tell, on that subject and many others.

“I am well aware,” he told his old friends and colleagues, “that a spell that tampered with my memories, selectively eliminating some and subtly altering others, had been placed upon me. May I assume it was the ever-elusive ‘mystery creature’ whose presence Johnathan had detected the day he found the Stone?”

Melvin, who happened to be within earshot, perked up. “It was,” he said, “and some of us actually met him face to face, and learned just how much his…activities affected all of us.”

“Not the least of which was what he’d done to your father, Melvin, leading to his own demise. Yes…perhaps worse than what he’d done with me. But the effects of his spell are long gone now, and I’m able to recall everything I’d previously forgotten.”

This mouse, whose claim to such an unlikely-seeming identity was looking more and more likely, continued reacquanting himself with familiar faces: Arthur, who had spearheaded the advance party to Thorn Valley and so wasn’t present at the time of Nicodemus’s death; Tallus, who was still at an uncharacteristic loss for words, for all his long-standing meticulous chronicling of their people’s history; Matilda, who had found out so much that was troubling about why her once-happy marriage to Jenner had failed.

As he watched this mouse with the outrageous-sounding claim meeting friends old and new, Justin was mostly silent. Isabella understood well the implications and asked her husband to share his thoughts, though the gist wasn’t hard to guess.

“I’m all right, Izzy,” he said reassuringly. “I think…for now, we should just concentrate on gathering everyone to hear his story.” There was so much more he wanted to say right then, and he was far from the only one; anyone in Freethorn who had looked up to, even idolized their former leader had thoughts he or she was impatient to share with their family and friends, and with him. But for many, including Justin, there would not be full acceptance that this was really Nicodemus, apparently having taken full control of this mouse’s body and mind, until after his story could be told and properly evaluated, its truth or falsehood decided.

Those who had left to spread the word were returning with many others, and they all reported to Justin that they had covered every part of Freethorn’s interior and that everyone who could make it here had been informed and should be now assembled. For the first time since Anna’s consultation with the mouse, Justin spoke directly to him—though saying nothing of any real consequence—as he led him to a large rock that he would speak from so that all could see and hear him better. The steady buzz of conversation lowered as the mouse climbed upon the rock. There was more nearly everyone wanted to ask, but Justin assured them many of their questions would be answered in the forthcoming story, and that there’d be plenty of time for any that may not. Whether his claim was thoroughly believed or disbelieved, all agreed to at least hear him out. And so, once he had everyone’s undivided attention, with virtually all of Freethorn’s citizenry arranged around the rock, sitting or standing, the story began.

“I guess it all really began with a conversation you and I had, Johnathan. It was close to three years after we’d moved into the Rosebush colony, in the spring of that year. It was a few weeks, six to eight, perhaps, after the arrival of your newest children, Cynthia and Timothy. This was also around the time when we’d just begun discussing the possibility of self-sufficiency and not living as unknowing dependents of Farmer Fitzgibbons, paving the way for the Thorn Valley Plan. The purpose of your visit was ostensibly to share your family’s latest good news, but of course we had much more to discuss, and not just the formative stages of the Plan. In our private conversation, you mentioned, for the first time in quite a while, how you wished the other mice from NIMH—the Lost Nine, we’d taken to calling them—could be there to share this life with us. Do you remember, my friend?”

“Yes…yeah, I do remember.”

“Well, after you left, it prompted me to think further on the matter. It had been the first time almost since the Escape that I had given it so much thought, and the possibility of at least some of the Lost Nine escaping after us intrigued me more and more. This sudden fascination of mine would prove crucial some time later.

“But now…I feel the need to digress, and I apologize for interrupting at this point; but I believe I owe all of you an explanation regarding many details of my own life. I had, undoubtedly, raised many doubts as to whether I’d been fully truthful with you: about my powers and abilities, and whether or not they were truly mystical, supernatural in their origins. During the winter we, the Original 22, had spent at the Boniface estate, I made no secret of my interests in such subjects—magic and mysticism, psychic phenomena—interests which were shared by others of you, but perhaps none more than yourself, Johnathan. Oh, there were skeptics among you; your argument was that human science couldn’t definitively prove such things existed. But I’m sure you all recall the case we made for this particular field of study: that humans would not have written so extensively on these subjects, over many decades and centuries, if they were purely the stuff of fantasy and imagination; plus their science couldn’t definitively disprove their existence.

“Now, as I know all of you who were a part of our intrepid band remember well, my own abilities first manifested some weeks after we’d departed the estate, when Johnathan’s and my lives were threatened by a falling limb during a strong wind. Even now, I can still only describe it as a premonition of imminent danger that prompted me to act to save us both: my pushing—actually almost throwing—Johnathan out of harm’s way and redirecting the limb away from us both by sheer force of will.

“The incident was not directly witnessed by any of you; and, partly because of that and also because the onset of these abilities was so sudden and unexpected and frankly bizarre, I felt inclined to keep them a secret, at least for the time being. While I was not fearful of them, I confided to Johnathan how they inspired a certain degree of uneasiness in me, and that I would prefer to keep them secret until I could be sure that openness about them would not adversely affect my leadership status. It was some weeks before I felt more comfortable with these abilities and more willing to accept them as a genuine part of me; and before much longer I’d disclosed them to the rest of you, even ‘showing off’ my telekinetic abilities in open demonstrations. Over the subsequent weeks and months, I tested their limits; and by and large, they proved to be no obstacle to my continued leadership.

“All along, now as well as then, I could only attribute their manifesting as an extra benefit of our treatments at NIMH, just as most of you have developed a special talent or inclination above and beyond boosted intelligence. Because mine were so unique and radically different from any of yours, I’ve speculated that they may be attributable to something that came along later, something completely unrelated to the treatments; even now I cannot definitively explain them any other way. I’d even speculated that my earlier fascination for those subjects could have been a factor—a fanciful notion, perhaps. And you, Johnathan, suggested, albeit facetiously, that it may have been something I ate or drank.”

Johnathan just looked at Madeline, and they both smiled and nodded, recalling the memorable conversation he’d had with Nicodemus years before and recounted for her later, regarding his apparent influence over his new mate, and speculating over whether it extended beyond just a broadening of her emotional range—and later finding out that it did, in the most wondrous way, so that she would be as intelligent and as long-lived as he. Nicodemus hadn’t brought it up yet; and Johnathan considered doing so now but decided to hold off. He already seems to know so much about what went on after he left us, like Ghormfisk, my survival, Jenner’s death; and he wasn’t surprised at seeing Madeline still young and healthy. So what else does he know? He looked forward all the more to hearing his story.

Nicodemus continued: “By the time we’d established the Rosebush Colony, I’d continued testing my abilities, even using them in building operations, as I’m sure Arthur well remembers. And yet, as comfortable as I’d felt with these abilities, they were proving to have their darker side.

“At the time of our capture by NIMH, I was in my prime, as fit and healthy as any of you. The treatments had essentially ‘frozen’ each of us at our individual level of maturity at the time. Yet, well after the Escape and within a few months after we’d established our colony, I was undergoing changes which appeared to be unique to me, as much as my abilities: I was tiring a bit faster, experiencing more aches and pains and lapses in short-term memory, the occasional grey hair. I’d sought to conceal this condition as long as possible, at first only confiding with Johnathan and Justin. I had come to believe that my special abilities were very likely wearing me down physically, which was why I’d come to age more quickly than the rest of you. I will admit to feeling some distress over the matter, and worrying over the future of our people; but eventually I’d come to resign myself to the possibility that I’d grow old and pass on before the rest of you, and that I would need to groom a successor—which ultimately proved to be Justin. And…all that I see now is ample proof that my choice was the right one.”

He paused to look upon his successor, smiling with pride. Justin, clearly more ready to accept this mouse as his beloved mentor and surrogate father, just smiled back and nodded politely as Isabella stroked his arm and leaned against his shoulder.

“Some of you had wondered why I chose Justin over Jenner. As you’re probably all aware by now, I often experienced premonitions, which generally pointed toward specific events that would come to pass in the near future. But eventually there was a shift in this ability, marked by feelings of impending disaster, of something that could cause everything to crash down upon us. It was very imprecise and undefined…at least at first.

“One night I awoke from a sound sleep…and I knew. It still wasn’t a premonition as I’d known them from the outset, but now the feelings of impending doom and disaster centered around one specific individual: Jenner. I had already chosen Justin over him as my successor, purely on the basis of Justin’s superior qualifications, as I’d seen fit. But now I had to wonder: if this intuition was entirely correct, if Jenner was to someday bring us all to doom, would it stem from simple jealousy on his part? It would be a while before further insights would present themselves.

“Meanwhile, there was the matter of my accelerated aging. This of course was the impetus behind my agreement with Anna, the result of which was another whose accomplishments are an enormous source of pride for me.” He paused to look with fondness upon Anna, seated near their son Brutus. She placed her hand on his arm, and Nicodemus believed Brutus looked more ready himself to accept the truth of his father’s return. Brutus’s wife and children looked up beaming to him.

“So,” he continued, “as you know, some two and a half years after we’d begun the Rosebush colony and within a several-week period, there was a confluence of events that would come to affect all of us, in ways we’d never have been able to predict—not even I, who had continued experiencing hunches, premonitions, though still not really visions of events to come. To that last point, however, the feeling I’d had concerning Jenner would coalesce further.

“The first of these events was the Stone falling into Johnathan’s hands after appearing as if out of nowhere, and his entrusting it to my custody the majority of the time, having believed I was better suited to uncover its secrets. It was only the next day that the feeling concerning Jenner also encompassed the Stone. Though I’d been able to determine next to nothing about it, I realized that Jenner could very well have designs upon it, prompting me to keep its exact location secret from him.

“Secondly, we began openly discussing this feeling that had been growing steadily, regarding how we—or at least some of us—had come to feel troubled by our way of life, living off the farmer’s resources and becoming his unknowing dependents. As you all know, this conviction would quickly give rise to the Thorn Valley Plan, of which Jenner would eventually become quite vocal in his opposition, further reinforcing my sense of caution concerning him. It was also during this period that Johnathan and I had the aforementioned conversation in which the Nine Lost Mice came up. But more important was the third event, which followed that conversation and would prove to influence further events so drastically.”

Briefly, he made a sweeping view of the crowd, settling briefly on Kimball and Patricia, acknowledging their impatience for him to return to the subject he’d interrupted.

“As I said, after Johnathan left I further pondered the matter of the Lost Nine, and considered, for the first time in far too long, the possibility if any of them had indeed survived. I was on the verge of calling a council meeting on the matter, for all I knew it would meet with skepticism, since it was little more than a whim on my part. As I said, this fascination would prove crucial, but…not this day.”

“I had not seen any need to protect myself against any sort of attack mystical in nature, since I hadn’t any enemies of that nature—or so I believed. I’m sure many of you know of the one against whom I would have needed to protect myself: our aforementioned ‘mystery creature.’”

There were several nodding heads in the crowd. “Ghormfisk…alias Uhrstegg,” Justin was the first to respond out loud.

“We heard the whole story,” said Johnathan, “from his own lips to our ears.”

“Ah, yes, I’d suspected you might; and I know you’re wondering about the extent of my knowledge of all that had transpired with you during my absence. Suffice it to say for now that at that time I had virtually no idea anything untoward was happening, but later I’d become very much aware of nearly all the details.

“So…I was preparing to leave my office and call the meeting…when Uhrstegg, our mystery creature, made his move. His spell…” He paused and sighed. “…made me forget so much, most notably many details which related specifically to the Stone. Due to the nature of this spell I was unaware—one might say blissfully so—that anything had changed, and would not be aware that my memories had been tampered with until sometime later; nor was I aware that he had tampered with Jenner’s mind as well, fueling his opposition to the Thorn Valley Plan. I would also, for the time being, continue to consider the Lost Nine to be permanently lost. Thankfully, the spell did not have a great effect on present concerns. I know you’ve said that Uhrstegg took actions which he admitted were seemingly arbitrary, their object only to disrupt and make mischief; but also, that when his meeker and more fearful persona took over, he would hide himself away, rarely venturing forth. One can only speculate what might have happened had we discovered his existence during those periods.”

“So…over the following year, our energies were devoted heavily to the Thorn Valley Plan, to which an increasing number of us had become dedicated…with one notable exception, of course. I had participated in some of our exploratory hikes into the surrounding countryside, which were becoming increasingly taxing, physically; but it was the last of these that proved the most fruitful. Of course, it was the one in which we gained an important ally in the Great Owl, who led us to Thorn Valley, which we quickly determined to be the most ideal location for an eventual new colony, for which we would soon send Arthur and his crew to begin construction and otherwise pave the way for the rest of us.

“It was in late summer of that year—after Arthur, Bryant and their crew began their work in Thorn Valley—when Johnathan paid a visit, a most memorable one, as it was in the wake of a potentially serious family health crisis: recently, his younger son Timothy had been bitten by a spider and brought to Mr. Ages in time for him to successfully treat the boy, an incident that still had him shaken. Our conversation turned, for the first time in over a year, to the Lost Nine mice and what it might be like for them if they were with us.

“After Johnathan left I continued sitting in my study, still contemplating the matter…when all at once, I felt something that might be best described as akin to an ‘attack’ that wasn’t physically painful, but feeling as if my mind were being assailed from within. It wasn’t enough to render me unconscious, and the best I can describe it now would be of…restoration, a sense of things that were unclear or confusing before being made clear…though what those things were, precisely, I wouldn’t have been able to say, then or now. Mixed with it was a feeling like déjà vu. It all left my senses reeling, but after only a minute, when the initial ‘burst’ was over…that latter feeling remained. It seemed to center upon the conversation I’d just had with Johnathan about the Lost Nine. I meditated for a time…and that seemed to be all it took to remind me of our earlier conversation over a year past. This was accompanied by a feeling of increased power within me, the nature of which I have never been able to precisely define, but…I felt a strange compulsion to construct…something.”

His eyes sought out one face in the crowd; he was already nodding, recalling that day well.

“Vernon, as most of you know, was the head engineer at the Rosebush in Arthur’s absence; and so I told him I needed his help in constructing a device for me—for which, at the time, I wouldn’t have been able to describe its ultimate purpose. All I could tell him was that it was an experiment of sorts, whose result, I was sure, would be of great benefit. He was understandably baffled, but willing to indulge my latest eccentricity. And so we put together this strange device out of scrap metal, one which I always kept in my office and which only a handful of you have had the privilege of seeing in operation.”

Johnathan and Madeline looked at each other, knowing already of the device of which he spoke, and that they were two of the “handful.”

“Once it was complete, I thanked Vernon for his assistance; and once alone, I put it to the test; and again, I cannot explain precisely how I knew what to do or why I required solitude for my test, but…I placed my hands upon it, concentrated…and there came a near-blinding display of light which I knew originated from within me, as little as I understood it. What I did understand was that this feeling of power within me was manifesting now and that my device was a receptacle and a conduit for a portion of that power. As best as I understood it, then and now, is that this power may be attributed to an inclination or aptitude enabling me to tap into forces imperceptible to most, perhaps the ambient energies of the Earth itself. Additionally, I understood the purpose for my device: to enable me to view events of the present and past that involved me and others I know. I recalled my past and recent curiosity about the Lost Nine, and I seized the opportunity; what better way to put it to the test, I realized, than to use it to investigate whether they had indeed perished? So I concentrated, the device began to spin; and, seemingly in midair, the images appeared.

“I willed it to trace events that followed that terrible moment when those nine mice tumbled backward through the airshafts to an unknown and presumably final fate. What I discovered was astounding. Six of them had indeed perished, sadly; but I witnessed you, Kimball and Patricia, saving yourselves and finding each other, and smuggling yourselves out of NIMH.” He paused, smiling upon the pair.

“So that’s how you knew about us,” said Kimball. “I suggested to Johnathan once that with your abilities, you might have been able to find us.”

“But something happened, didn’t it?” said Patricia. “And you couldn’t contact us.”

“And Vincent?”

“I was just coming to him, and the reasons for my lack of contact.” Nicodemus cleared his throat. “I was filled with joy at the discovery; and so, encouraged by this, I searched for any others who had survived, and I observed Vincent also escaping the airshafts. Strangely, though, he apparently chose to remain inside NIMH and make his home there. I investigated further the directions your lives and his had taken since then. I was pleased to see the happiness that Kimball and Patricia had found together, but I was perplexed at Vincent’s continued way of life. As a result, I devoted the bulk of my attention toward him. I observed his comings and goings in and around the building to obtain what he needed; his cleverly-concealed hideaway, which reminded me of our Rosebush colony in the way it was hidden; and this ‘mission’ of his, characterized by his listening in on conversations and after-hours examination of NIMH personnel’s notebooks and documents, and his own writings based on these findings. But I suppose you’re all aware of those details already.

“At any rate, I got to wondering: Kimball and Patricia were very well along in raising their family, but Vincent had none—at least none that lived with him. I could see that he was leading a solitary life, but in spite of this, I had to wonder if he had sired any children. It was too vital a matter to overlook, so I delved further into his past. My suspicions were confirmed when I found that he had indeed ventured from NIMH long enough to mate with at least four different females, three of which bore his children. At the time, I didn’t understand why he seemed to choose this way of life—regarding the NIMH laboratory as his home, leaving only long enough to mate but not actually taking a wife—but mainly I was concerned with finding and eventually, I hoped, contacting our lost mouse brethren.

“So, I continued my investigation with seeing how Vincent’s children presently fared. There were six of them, the youngest only a little over a year old; three sets of twins, one for each of the mothers. One was an albino”—he nodded and smiled toward Lilia and Reuben— “a fact unique and surprising enough, but there was another I took an even keener interest in.

“This child—Rollo—appeared to be afflicted by an unusual condition, marked by being able to respond to only basic needs—to eat or sleep—and was largely unresponsive, at least outwardly, to most anything his mother or brother said or did. It was truly a sad situation: his mother, Maisie, seemed unable or unwilling to give him the special care he needed, almost to the point of neglect, from what I observed in that short space of time. He didn’t seem to be starving, though he appeared thin and undernourished. His brother Ardo, at least, seemed to be more attentive to his needs. Ardo was more normal—that is, more like the rest of us—but Rollo was unresponsive to most outside stimuli. In tracing their early days I found that this difference had been there since they were infants. Maisie seemed to be doing everything she could for him, but was baffled at this marked difference between her children, and at some point appeared to all but give up on him. I was taken with the boy’s plight immediately; I suspected there was more to his condition than what met the eye, and therefore I endeavored to help him in any way I could.

“Of course I continued to devote my attentions to their kin, the other children Vincent had sired. I discovered how Reuben and Lilia, who were the oldest pair, were currently living on their own, their mother Nina having died quite recently. Boris and Doris, the youngest pair, seemed to be living a more comfortable existence with their mother Daria.”

He looked toward those he’d just mentioned, and all three present were wide-eyed with surprise. Anticipating their question, he added, “And yes, I probably should have made it clear by now that I was able to learn your names. How, I will relate later.

“I’d become so absorbed in all of these discoveries that—and this is the most regrettable aspect of this whole matter, one that I have no one but myself to blame for—by the time I was certain I’d seen enough, it was only then that I decided to call a council meeting to share my discoveries. Already I’d begun to formulate plans for my next investigation: tracing the Stone’s origins. But that would wait. The viewer responded immediately, shutting itself down; and I was preparing to leave my office when…I felt a sudden, overwhelming need to lie down and rest. I assumed, reasonably so, that these recent efforts were responsible for my sudden tiredness; as it was, I was well aware of how the accelerated aging I’d been experiencing was having detrimental effects on me; physically, certainly, but also marked by increased forgetfulness and the occasional error in judgment. I’ve since realized that I should have shared these latest discoveries with the council right away, and most certainly with Johnathan and Ages, before going so far into my investigation. Had I done so, subsequent events surely would have played out much differently.”

“My ‘rest’ became an actual nap, something that was a rarity for me at the time; and I was awakened, less than an hour later, when Tallus tapped on the door, reminding me of some matters regarding the Thorn Valley Plan I’d needed to attend to. I told him I’d be along in a minute; and after he left, I took stock of my situation. Somehow, I was aware of everything concerning the viewing device: its operation, the fact that it was a conduit for my own powers; but of the discoveries I’d just made I had no clue. I wasn’t even aware that I’d just used the viewer, let alone what and whom I’d discovered. All I’d learned about Vincent, about Rollo, about Kimball and Patricia, or any of our lost brethren, had fallen away, ensuring that they would continue to be unknown to us for some time more. I’d fallen into ignorance, though arguably not blissful, of all that I had learned of our old friends, and any plan to bring them into the fold had died before it could be enacted.” He paused to look apologetically upon Kimball and Patricia.

“To this day it’s a mystery as to what precisely happened to me that day. Did Uhrstegg’s spell wear off temporarily, enabling me to regain memories previously lost? Did it fall away completely, and then did he renew it, causing me to lose those memories again? Did Uhrstegg have anything at all to do with it? To that last question, I’ve since come to believe that if he had made a move against me then, I’d be aware of it now. Whatever caused the effects of Uhrstegg’s original spell to be lifted, it’s clear to me now that it was temporary, because they were back in full force.

“But of course, at the time all I knew was that I was tired and needed to rest; although I had surmised—correctly, I’ve since realized—that use of the viewer was hastening, ever so slightly, my accelerated aging, and so I vowed to be sparing in its further use, calling upon it only when I deemed it most necessary.”

Nicodemus paused, swallowing and clearing his throat. “I’ve talked rather long, haven’t I? Certainly more than this body is accustomed to. Could I trouble someone for some…” But one rat was already on her way to him with a pitcher of water and a cup.

“Thank you, Jenni-Lynn,” he said after he’d drunk his fill. “That was most refreshing.”

“You’re welcome, Nicodemus,” Jenni-Lynn replied, delighted that he’d remembered her name; clearly she’d become another ‘convert’ to the reality of the mouse’s identity, if she hadn’t already. She left the pitcher and cup with him and returned to her seat beside her husband Eamonn and their children.

As Nicodemus readied to resume his story, Johnathan spoke up. “So if it weren’t for this relapse or whatever it was, you certainly would have made plans to contact our old comrades then. But after what we saw today, it’s obvious you had to have made some kind of contact with them later on.”

“But how, with your memories of us gone?” asked Kimball.

Nicodemus smiled. “I understand well your impatience. But all your questions will be answered soon, I assure you. Now…for some time afterward, the possibility of any of the Lost Mice still living did not even occur to me again, despite the fact that I still possessed the means to investigate the possibility as I did before, and that I still thought about them from time to time. Given the circumstances, there may have been nothing I could have done to alter what had happened; but there’s no disputing that if I’d shared my first experience with the viewer with even one of you, events surely would have played out differently.”

As he paused again, Patricia felt the need to say, “It’s all right, Nicodemus. We’re not judging you.”

“At least not until we’ve heard the rest of your story,” added Kimball. “Though in the end I’m sure there’ll be nothing for you to apologize for.”

“And,” added Johnathan, “it occurs to me that if Uhrstegg had learned about our missing friends, he may have tried to manipulate them in some way, as he did you and Jenner.” Clearly, Johnathan realized, he was by now much more willing to accept that this really was their beloved ex-leader before them now.

“Excellent point, Johnathan. Thank you, my friends.” Nicodemus paused, for a moment feeling a need to say more on the subject; but instead he continued with: “So…by this time, work on the Thorn Valley Plan was continuing apace, with construction and planting already underway, in spite of opposition from a small minority led by Jenner. I have since become aware of how Uhrstegg had targeted Jenner as well as myself for his manipulations; and I was still aware of Jenner’s potential for treachery, and I retained the strong sense of caution that the Stone needed to be kept hidden from him without knowing the precise reasons why. Most certainly I was unaware that Uhrstegg had passed on to him the knowledge of how to take command of the Stone. That spell he’d placed upon me, as you know, had fragmented my memory so that some recollections would be lost completely and others would be altered without my being aware; and apparently subsequent conversations I had with anyone about matters I’d deem confidential, usually Johnathan or Justin, did not give any indication that there were any gaps in my knowledge or memories, at least none of any great consequence.”

As he paused, Johnathan raised his hand and asked, “Something we’ve been curious about a long time is…just how much did you learn about the Stone? There was nothing in your own journals that indicated that you knew…well, anything at all.”

“Yes,” added Justin, “and whenever either of us asked you directly, you’d either say that you hadn’t been able to make any new discoveries, or that other things were calling for your attention. I don’t mean to sound disrespectful, but it sounded…almost as if you were making excuses.” Justin was very much aware of his own hesitancy; just like Johnathan, he was himself increasingly ready to accept that this really was Nicodemus.

“More excellent points, my friends. To your first question, I was able to discern, largely through use of my viewing device, that it was otherworldly in origin. But such was the nature of Uhrstegg’s spell, that I was able to use the device to explore the past—though, as I said, I continued to use it sparingly—but the results of my investigations were often foiled, especially those concerning the Stone and my then-unknown enemy. But I am aware of them now, though there was still precious little I found out, since my observations were limited to Earth only. This was enough for me to determine that the Stone’s origins were unearthly, but anything more of its capabilities, let alone its origins, were beyond me. And yes, at least one of those observations actually revealed our enemy, though his origins were closed to me as well; plus I was unaware that he was an enemy. And in any case, my memories of these discoveries did not last long.”

Justin raised his hand. “So, Uhrstegg, or Ghormfisk, was able to keep moving against you with impunity, always keeping out of our sight. We heard all about it from him directly, and even after Gwinthrayle was able to cure him and bring back his original personality…it still rankles, even to this day, to think of how much he was able to manipulate you…and all of us, really.” Many others voiced their agreement.

“And it hardly stopped there, of course,” added Johnathan, speaking as one who knew what would follow.

“Yes,” Nicodemus said regretfully. “That most fateful night, when he acted against me in the most direct fashion to date. Having no reason to suspect such an attack, I was in no way prepared for the sleep-spell he placed upon me while cloaked in invisibility, in order to extract information from my mind. Nor would I learn, again until much later, that he had impersonated me when Johnathan visited me for briefing on his assignment that night; and that this was his chance to retake the Stone when Johnathan held it, a decision he made when I told him of my premonition of possible danger that night, for which the Stone might protect him.

“And…of course…this was the night when Johnathan disappeared, and all of us—his beloved wife and children, his friends, and I—believed him dead. The blood evidence left behind in the Fitzgibbons broom closet, by all appearances, supported this conclusion. And yet, one may reasonably ask, could I not have made use of my viewing device to confirm it?

“The truth, I would imagine, would come as little surprise to most of you by now. I was able to confirm, via the viewer, that Johnathan had not perished, but rather disappeared, and that the blood was shed by the cat that had supposedly killed him. But this all-too-vital piece of information barely had time to present itself to me before it slipped away like sand through my fingers. And it would have been so easily prevented, had I a witness to my use of the viewer; but, as before with my discovery of the lost mice, the spell affected my judgment of such matters, and so this was one more piece of vital information that was lost to us.”

As he paused again, Johnathan spoke. “It would have made little difference, since nobody there would have been able to trace where I’d gone to.”

“And no one, including me, knew that I could command the Stone too,” added Madeline. “I would have had even less of a clue.” After a pause she added, “I’m sorry, I know that’s not much consolation.”

“Thank you, my friends, but…what’s past is past. Now…I, and consequently everyone, was not only in the dark about Uhrstegg’s existence, but also that he had left the scene along with Johnathan. So, though this unknown bane to our existence was no longer around to bedevil us, his ‘legacy,’ unfortunately, lived on.”

“It didn’t go away with him,” said Justin. “His spells over you and Jenner were still very much in effect.”

“Indeed,” added Brutus. “Ach! What I wouldn’t have given to have a crack at him myself, after all he’d done…even if it wasn’t his fault, ultimately.”

“Even after we all learned what had driven him to all that,” added Justin, “some of us still harbored lingering frustration, because he’d kept himself secret from us so well and there was nothing we could do to change what he’d done.” There were more sounds of agreement, the loudest from Melvin.

“Very understandable,” said Nicodemus heavily, “and his final gambit was yet to come, some six months later, when Madeline Brisby and her family were in a dire predicament, which I know many of you recall very well.” Nicodemus turned toward her. “I knew of your needs early on, my dear, but instead of having one of us contact you so that we could have helped you that much sooner, I allowed you and your crow friend Jeremy to visit the Great Owl and seek his counsel. In retrospect, this could be seen as an error in judgment on my part, another result of Uhrstegg’s tampering; but at the time, I believed it profitable for you and possibly even for us. I knew that upon learning your identity, he would direct you to us, and that knowing him could benefit you and your family directly. At the time, I hadn’t considered the risk of your being killed by the Owl before he could learn who you are, even if you saw him before dark.”

“It’s all right,” said Madeline. “Everything did work out as you’d hoped.”

“And it did benefit us, eventually,” added Timothy.

“Ah, of course. A few months later, when the Owl saved the lives of all five of you.”

Madeline gasped. “You—you know about that too? But,” she added, laughing nervously, “I guess that’s not too surprising by now.”

“All will be revealed, I promise you. Now…perhaps more serious a lapse took place after your arrival, when you came to me to learn of Johnathan’s connection with us, and I presented the amulet to you. It seems likely now that in the course of my studies of it, I had discerned that it specifically targeted Johnathan due to his special qualities of character—his ‘courage of the heart.’ The fact that it contained great power was obvious; I saw that for myself, when Johnathan would ‘practice’ with it in my presence. I told you that Johnathan had meant for you to have it, believing its power would protect you, though I was consciously unaware that it would ‘choose’ you as it did Johnathan; it’s possible that I did know, deep down, that it would eventually.

“But…that lapse I spoke of occurred when I disregarded the necessity of keeping it concealed from Jenner, and my failure to caution you on such a vital point when I gave it to you. I still believed strongly that he had designs on it, but the true nature of them was still unclear; likewise, I was oblivious to the possibility of his making an attempt on my life—or possibly on yours as well, in his attempt to take the Stone.”

“We’d suspected that it was Uhrstegg’s spell behind that,” said Madeline. “It was one of the first things I thought of when we learned about it.”

“Very astute, my good lady. Well…” Nicodemus paused, sighing. “…both possibilities became reality, as you all know. The best I can recollect now is that I had a direct premonition of Jenner using our moving the Brisby cinderblock home to cause an ‘accident’, but I had forgotten it so quickly that it was as if I had never had it at all…all due to Uhrstegg’s influence. Whatever the case, you know what happened next. One brief moment as I saw the equipment collapsing and striking me down…and then blackness.”

Chapter 16 - Into the mist

The young mouse paused, closing eyes tightly, inhaling deeply. The crowd was mostly silent as well; many remembered that awful night as if it were yesterday. He’d already related so many details that spoke so closely and accurately to those he’d declared were his old friends and followers, so could there be any left who doubted his claim to be their former leader, in spite of the fact that he was, in essence, relating the final moments of his life…or previous life?

“Then…I cannot say how much later, but awareness, of myself and my surroundings, returned. I was in a strange, mist-shrouded place that felt at once spacious and confining. All around was grey nothingness, with no discernible features save for the ‘floor,’ a mossy, slightly yielding surface, and the constantly drifting, swirling fog with no discernible sky. Where could I possibly be? I wondered. Gathering my thoughts, I found myself remembering everything that had befallen me, including those events I had forgotten in recent months, and that the reason was not simple age-related forgetfulness. I recalled how I had actually discovered that three of the Lost Mice had survived, and had uncovered the existence of Johnathan’s mystery creature and that he was the likely culprit; though from where he’d come I had no clue, at least not yet.

“But it didn’t explain how I’d come to be in this place, whatever and wherever it was. Well, there was nothing for it but to explore the place further. I felt I would gain no answers just standing there, so I started walking. As I did, the full realization that I was now a disembodied spirit fell upon me, and simultaneously, I began to suspect that this landscape was not what it literally appeared to be. I also wondered if I was alone here, and shortly I began to feel very strongly that I wasn’t.

“Barely had I realized this when I saw him: a small figure, sitting with head down, as if resting. I drew closer, and almost called out loud to him, but instead I approached silently, and gently touched his shoulder.

“He instantly sprang to life, turning his head quickly to face me. For a moment I wondered: was this someone I knew? Suddenly, dumbfounded, I realized I recognized this child, this mouse child who, I also realized instantly, was the only other inhabitant of this place. He was the one, or at least a part of the one, an aspect of the one whose plight had so moved me when I’d discovered him and all those other lost mice the previous summer; the one with the unusual, unresponsive condition.

“He was frightened and shrank from me at first, mainly because my presence was so completely unexpected to him. He quickly warmed to me, though, after I explained to him that I was essentially a lost traveler and I asked him what he could tell me of this place. He seemed grateful just to have the company, but all he could tell me was that he’d been there as long as he could recall, trying to find his way out; and that he knew of a world ‘outside’ which, if he thought hard enough, he could see or hear or touch, or even taste or smell; but he believed that…he should be able to live it more, as he put it.

“As he described this existence of his, I understood at least part of the truth. This child, who was aware of the name his mother had given him—Rollo—was actually that part of his psyche that possessed a sense of self, and realized the differences between himself and other beings that interact more fully with their fellow beings and the world outside; the part that longed to be a part of that world. This world—this mist-shrouded nothingness was essentially an allegorical representation, without an actual, tangible existence, and was in reality entirely within Rollo’s mind.”

“Most extraordinary,” observed Tallus. “As incredible as it sounds, it’s no more so than your being before us now, speaking in the voice of one so familiar to us.”

“But,” ventured Johnathan, “it still didn’t explain…how you’d come to be there, or why…”

“…I wasn’t dead,” finished Nicodemus. “Or at least not in any way I would have expected. So…my next step was to find precisely what I could do in these new environs, and perhaps gain clues as to how and why I had come to be there. I considered that if I truly was, in essence, a part of Rollo, would I be able to influence him in any way physically? Even then I was certain I would have the chance to put the idea to the test. There had to be a reason I was co-inhabiting his body; he gladly welcomed my presence there—‘within’—but there had to be more to all this.

“I reasoned that if he could ‘see’ outside with the right concentration, perhaps I could as well. I was pleased, and more, to find that I could not only view Rollo’s immediate surroundings, as he could, but a much wider area as well—much, much wider.

“So now I had a connection to the material world, even if I could not interact with it; and I immediately set about finding out how far I could cast my gaze. I could not tell how much time had passed since I was struck down; but the matter of Rollo’s and my physical location was quickly established: we were several miles away from the Fitzgibbons farm, and I found myself not only seeing, but also hearing what was taking place there. It was only minutes later, and the drama continued to unfold in a small corner of it. There was Jenner, discovering that Madeline possessed the Stone. I felt heartsick, watching helplessly as he threatened her, knowing if I’d cautioned her, so much of what followed might have been avoided. Of course, at the time I had no idea who was ultimately to blame; I could only watch helplessly as events unfolded which I could only attribute to Jenner’s lust for power. He continued to act violently against Justin as he did me, forcing them to do battle, ultimately resulting in his and Sullivan’s deaths. I wanted to help but could only observe, despite my best efforts. At least these tragedies were balanced by the pleasant surprise of Madeline being ‘chosen’ by the amulet, enabling her to save her children, and by seeing everyone work to vacate the colony in time.

“But…now what was I to do? Obviously there was much about my situation—that is to say, everything—that was a complete mystery. Why was I now, in essence, a part of this young mouse? It couldn’t have been coincidence that Rollo, who had suddenly commanded so much attention from me after being completely unknown to me, was the one I was co-inhabiting, however this outlandish situation came about.

“Still, this was my current situation; and I realized that until further reasons became clear to me, I needed to explain myself more fully to Rollo. I had—quite unintentionally—all but ignored him since shortly after my appearance, having been so busy observing those I had left behind, and of course he was intensely curious. I told him as much as I thought he could understand about me, and where I came from, and what we held in common—outside of our new shared existence, of course. I found that, strangely, I felt the need for rest, in spite of my spiritual, or perhaps more accurately spiritlike, existence. So I told him that after we’d both felt more rested, I would tell him more, and would continue trying to investigate the reasons for our being this way.

“I made good on that promise, telling Rollo more about my life, mainly our adventures after the Escape and the founding of the Rosebush Colony; and he continued to prove what I had suspected: that he was as intelligent as any of us, but there was another reason for his seeming inability to relate to others. But Rollo—or this internal aspect of him—was more than satisfied just to have my companionship. In the outside world, as we both regarded it, he couldn’t relate to others as you or I could; but ‘inside’, he now had me, and knew for the first time what it was like just to have someone to talk to and relate to on his level. Of course I was happy to oblige him, but I certainly did not wish this to be a permanent situation. I was honest with him about this, saying that I needed to look outside again, to look for further clues about how the situation might be changed—hopefully for the better.

“So I began by examining more closely the matter closest to home: Rollo’s own ‘outside’ situation—both by asking him and by looking outside. Though he was still a child, he was living alone now. Apparently his mother had essentially disowned him, kicked him out, leaving him to fend for himself. It wasn’t the most surprising development, from my past observation, but it was still dismaying. He still wasn’t starving, but it was clear he was not getting enough to eat. He had some food stores; it seemed that someone was providing for him. Rollo believed it may have been his brother, whom he knew dropped by occasionally. But in spite of this, he seemed to have some difficulty in keeping himself fed. This, of course, was probably the most important thing I could try to do for Rollo: to help him care for himself better. I considered that if he were to fall ill and die of malnutrition, then what might become of me? Even now, I cannot say precisely how I would have been affected, but of course that’s irrelevant now.

“In the course of investigation of my, or rather our situation, I discovered that, since Rollo and I were, in effect, sharing a brain, I could, with the right concentration, explore and analyze its makeup. And I concluded that—as I’d suspected—there was a congenital defect there; the physical and chemical makeup of his brain was not ‘ordered’ as it should have been. Whether or not this had anything to do with the reason for my being there as I was, I hadn’t a clue. But I continued exploring every aspect of this strange shared existence of ours, hoping to determine or at least gain some clue to its nature or cause.

“In the days and weeks that followed, I looked ‘outside’ often, casting my gaze over a wider and wider area. In the process I was able to find those others to whom I’d given special attention months before: Vincent, his temporary mates, and his other children. I began with Rollo’s mother and brother, and found them living a short distance away. I quickly noticed how the relationship between Ardo and his mother was…well, less than harmonious, even at this early age. He would ask her questions about his father, and she would respond as if he were crazy or had no business asking such questions. That was only a part of it. He would ask about Rollo as well, and showed visible resentment when she told him not to talk about Rollo, and warned him he’d be punished if he tried to pay Rollo a visit.”

Many expressed surprise at this. “Why, that’s terrible,” said Patricia. “How could she be so cruel? What harm could it have done?”

At her side, Lula frowned thoughtfully. “She sounds like my mother,” she said quietly, sullenly.

“Near as I can tell,” continued Nicodemus, “it was hard for her to deal with youngsters that were so unlike ordinary ones, and she harbored resentment toward Vincent for the situation. But as you might already know, Ardo reacted to his mother’s edict with a degree of rebelliousness.”

“Meaning he did manage to sneak away a few times and gather some food to bring to Rollo,” added Johnathan. “We saw that through the amulet.”

“Yes. And I’m sure you’re aware of later developments as well. But I’ll return to them later.

“During this same period, I continued to monitor those I had left behind, and was proud at how smoothly the trek to Thorn Valley had gone, and your establishing the new colony. I kept track of Kimball and Patricia, and their children, and the occasionally tumultuous times they experienced. But more than this—at least during this period—I felt compelled to turn my attention, again and again, to Vincent and his children. As I observed them, certain details gradually became clearer to me. Now, I hadn’t the chance to observe them very long before the…‘accident’; but even so, there were certain things I was seeing that seemed to show a connection other than familial.

“There was Reuben and Lilia, for instance. The degree of protectiveness he projected toward her seemed to be, as I’m sure it was to you, rather a lot for one individual. The secretiveness with which they went about their lives was at a higher degree as well. There was precocity there, too; though both were still children, Reuben handled the situation in a very efficient and very mature manner, as if instantly ready to take charge of their lives.

“I know you’re aware of the changes in Lilia as well: her newfound enjoyment of life, dancing and singing to herself when left alone. Early on, I realized there was a conflict here, though the two had an outwardly amicable relationship. I would learn later exactly what was involved here, and what it would result in, though precisely why I still wouldn’t be able to say.”

Nicodemus began to talk about Boris and Doris, but was interrupted by Reuben, who asked in a near-demanding tone what he meant by “conflict.” Others were curious too, but he assured them that other details needed to be told first. He did apologize, though, for piquing their interest unnecessarily.

“Now…Boris and Doris were of considerable interest to me as well, for the abilities that seemed to come naturally to them: Boris’s visions of places far away and unfamiliar, Doris’s seemingly boundless imagination. But there was more: other, subtle ways they behaved that suggested there was…more there, something that implied an outside influence, as with Reuben, Lilia and Ardo. There was a great, near-insatiable thirst for knowledge in them, about the world outside their immediate surroundings. This could have been solely attributable to their higher intellectual capacity, but I sensed more. Plus, in some of the visions and stories they described, there were elements quite familiar to me, even very close to my own experiences, as I’m sure you’ve already noted.

“I could not help but sense very strongly that there was a connection among them, something they all held in common other than being family. But it wasn’t long before I concluded—correctly—that there was a very good reason for my own inclination to give the bulk of my attention to these mice, greater than that I gave to the Davis family.

“During this period I also uncovered the existence of two more offspring of Vincent’s, not too surprisingly, not yet a year old and still with their mother.” He looked for Torrance and Hazel in the crowd, smiling as he spotted them. They nudged each other, delighted as they realized he referred to them. “And though they, like the others, were very much as we are, I could not sense anything…well, ‘extra’ about them, not as I did with their older siblings…or their father. Oh, yes, Vincent was a different matter, as I’m sure you may already attest.”

Tallus spoke up. “The day after you…you left us, Vincent gained some new abilities.”

“Yes, I observed them too: his ‘phasing’ through solid objects, and becoming invisible at will. He used them quite readily, as if he were born to them; and on first observation I was stunned, unable to fathom their origins. But after repeated observation I could sense…something akin to familiarity. I did not have abilities like this, and yet I could not help feeling a connection—to them and to Vincent—as strong as the ones I was feeling for his six oldest children.

“All this observation led me to a conclusion that fell upon me all at once: an epiphany, a moment when everything ‘clicked.’ What I’d realized was that my spirit, the essence of my being, had become fragmented, with aspects of my personality, talents and abilities spread among Vincent and his six eldest children. Reuben’s natural tendency to be protective of Lilia became augmented by my own similar tendencies. Just as I was protective toward my loved ones—the entire colony—Reuben now projected a higher degree of protectiveness upon Lilia, perhaps too much for one individual, as I said before. Likewise the higher degree of secrecy; this stemmed from our own, in the way we conducted our lives after the Escape from NIMH and in the old colony, and from my own secretiveness about myself, to everyone else.

“The part of myself within Lilia was harder to define at first; but I’ve since realized that it was my own lust for life, my enjoyment of life’s sensual pleasures. But just as it was stifled in me by the accelerated aging, so it was held in restraint in Lilia by her natural-born shyness; though not entirely, as evidenced by her less-inhibited behavior when alone, and later in Reuben’s presence.

“Here is where the conflict I spoke of comes in. It was almost as if two aspects of my persona were at odds with each other. Lilia wanted to be out and about more, to explore her world more thoroughly, but Reuben…well, he allowed her virtually no freedom of movement outside of their home.” Nicodemus turned to the siblings. “If I am making the two of you feel at all embarrassed and uncomfortable by bringing this up, I apologize most deeply. But this is an important part of the story, and a key element to understanding what came later.”

“It’s all right…I guess,” said Reuben. “If it’s true, that I acted as I did because a part of your mind was a part of my mind.”

“Yes, Reuben, and for that too I feel I should apologize.”

“With all due respect, Nicodemus,” said Justin. “I see no reason for you to have to apologize for anything.”

“I agree,” said Johnathan. “Whoever’s fault this is ultimately, it can’t be yours. Maybe Ghormfisk’s spell had something to do with it. After he’d been restored to normal by Gwinthrayle, he never told us anything like that; though we’ve already discussed the possibility that even he didn’t know its full effects.”

“Perhaps not, my friends. And perhaps in time the full reasons will be revealed. But, though any apologies at this point are probably unnecessary, I still feel compelled to, since, at present, I am the only one present who can, until one more suitable presents himself…or herself.

“Now, to continue: I said that I sensed more in Boris and Doris’s thirst for knowledge than something that came completely naturally. This, I concluded, was also from me. Do you recall, Boris, how one day you and Doris suddenly knew of human books and libraries, despite not living near any human dwellings, and having little prior knowledge of them?”

“Yes, I do. But I thought that was just another of my visions.”

“Ah, but this one you felt inclined to act upon. Both of you wanted very strongly to seek out things like this, and partake of the knowledge they had to offer.”

“You’re right, we did. But we couldn’t really act upon it, because our mother wouldn’t let us. She thought it so much nonsense, our claim of wanting to see such a place, and we were still pretty young.”

“But the situation did change later, of course.”

“Yes, after our mother died, we made our way to the library in Sampson, and spent quite some time almost living there; and coming close to meeting members of Kimball and Patricia’s family, according to Johnathan and the Stone.”

“Those were my observations as well. And there were also some of the visions that came to you, Boris, and some of the stories that came to Doris, that reflected my influence.”

“Like…the big white building? Johnathan thought that could’ve been the NIMH lab. Was that from you, too?”

“Yes. Make no mistake, Boris, that was, from the beginning, a natural-born ability of yours to see these visions, as was Doris’s predilection for highly imaginative storytelling. But at this time, my own memories began influencing them, sometimes in more subtle ways, sometimes more overtly.

“I probably have not made it clear as yet, but I know now, beyond any doubt, precisely how I had influenced each of you, just from having been within each of you. I’ve even retained certain memories of yours, and of Vincent; I believe I made reference to this just after I ‘awakened.’”

“Didn’t you say,” brought up Johnathan, “something about…something to assimilate, and…memories of others you resided within?”

“Exactly, Johnathan. It seems, though, that just since my awakening, that those memories are beginning to fade. But, as I said, just the fact that I felt so drawn to observe Vincent and his children, more even than my old friends and comrades or the Davis family, convinced me that there had to be a connection among us.

“I’ll return to that connection momentarily; but first, there was also Ardo. My influence over him manifested mainly in his rebelliousness against his mother, and his compassion for his brother. This was derived mainly from my own desire for all of us to be free from oppression and a stifling and confining environment, and that we should all care for and provide for one another. Again, it was a case where these qualities were present already, but augmented by my own. Without them, later circumstances may possibly have been quite the same; but at any rate, it led eventually to Ardo’s breaking away and staying with Rollo, as you know.

“There is more to that story as well, but now we must come back to Rollo. The part of myself that resided within him was in some ways the one that had the most influence upon its host, and in some ways the least—at least at first. It was the core of my spirit, my soul-self, if you will; the part that possessed self-awareness. But, as I said, I could do virtually nothing to affect what Rollo did ‘outside’, although I still had the ability to cast my gaze outside.

“This was hardly the way I spent all or even most of my time, though. I continued teaching Rollo all about other rats and mice like us, and of the world in general; and even, eventually, all about myself and my abilities before, and what little I could tell him of how I’d come to be there with him. He was an eager and attentive pupil, and a very close and loving relationship developed between us. I continued to make it clear, though, that I would do everything in my power to help him out of his present situation, even if there was nothing I could do at that point except see outside and keep Rollo company.”

Chapter 17 - Toward reintegration

Nicodemus paused to pour himself another drink of water. After he’d drunk his fill, he continued: “So…it wasn’t long after I’d had that aforementioned epiphany that I reached another conclusion that would prove to be a turning point, and ultimately the correct one. All that was required was to bring everyone together in one place, to meet one another—Rollo, Ardo, Reuben, Lilia, Boris, Doris, and Vincent—and then all these parts of myself that resided within each of them could be all pulled together and unite as one. The precise results I couldn’t yet discern, though I suspected they would turn out much as you are seeing now.”

“Just as we all witnessed them a little over an hour ago,” said Tallus. “Though some of the principals couldn’t be here, unfortunately.”

“Yes. So now all of you know how I came to be speaking before you now.”

“But there is more to the story, isn’t there?”

“Oh, yes, Johnathan. Upon reaching this conclusion, the obvious next step presented itself. But how to bring everyone together, when most weren’t aware of the others’ existence, and in some cases lived quite some distance apart and weren’t inclined to travel very far? The connection linking myself to all of them, I concluded, was what had induced me to observe Vincent and his children so readily, and had helped me deduce that a part of me was within each of them—something that, in everyone but Vincent, would have been too subtle to notice from simple observation. With the connection this strong, I reasoned, would it not be possible to apply the right concentration to induce them all to come together, to have them all converge there at Rollo’s den?

“Over the next few weeks, I repeatedly put the idea to the test, to no discernible effect. Then one day I managed to apply just the right type and degree of concentration; and casting my gaze outside, I observed the results. Vincent left his hideaway, once again temporarily overcoming his great reluctance to leave home. At first I thought he could be leaving to seek another temporary mate, but when I noticed similar activity among his children, I realized that all of them had to be responding to my ‘call.’ But it was difficult; I quickly found that I could not maintain the proper concentration and continue such close outside observation simultaneously. Even without the observation, it was extremely hard, and I could not maintain the summons. I realized later that this was largely due to the fact that I had to, in part, make use of Rollo’s brain in this exercise, and because of its imperfections, it was not up to the task; plus, I knew that there was a possibility of causing injury to him by pushing things too far. At this time, though, all I could do was look outside again, to see how breaking the summons had affected everyone. I felt that, since I had managed to elicit a response from all of the principals, perhaps some of them would feel inclined toward continuing to seek out and even find Rollo. Reuben, Lilia, Boris…perhaps you remember that day, and what happened afterwards.”

Reuben and Lilia gave each other a knowing nod. “We do,” he answered. “We wandered away from our den for a short time, even though it was broad daylight and we didn’t really know where we were going, or why. After a while we stopped, and asked each other what was going on. Neither of us could say why we were acting like this. We did both feel like someone was calling us, but it was fading out. We didn’t understand it, but we couldn’t see any other reason to be out there, so we returned home.”

Nicodemus meant to say more, but Lilia raised her hand. “I…I wanted to keep going. I felt that…I knew just where to go, but…Reuben, well, thought we should return. I guess I…really didn’t say much, though. Probably would have lost my way, anyway.” She gave a small laugh, looking a bit embarrassed. Reuben didn’t add anything, but did appear troubled by his sister’s confession.

Boris spoke next. “I remember it, too. Doris and I were still with our mother, and we started off without telling her, but she caught up with us after a couple of minutes, and said, ‘You’re going off to this library place, aren’t you?’ We said no, that’s not it, it’s something completely different. We didn’t know exactly what, but we felt we had to go. Well, that went over as well as the library thing.” He laughed. “We pleaded with her, even telling her that it felt like someone was calling us. That really did it. She dismissed it as just our imaginations running wild, and forbade us to leave the house for the rest of the day, even after the feeling faded away.” He sighed. “I’ll always miss her, but I just wish she’d tried to understand us better. At least now I understand why she didn’t.”

“Yes, yes…” Nicodemus nodded, pleased to hear these confirmations. “Well,” he continued, “I was dismayed at first at not being able to maintain the summons and that the three…rather, four of you couldn’t go any further on your own. Vincent, though, continued on after the summons faded, apparently deciding to turn this into an excursion to seek another mate, after all—again, a temporary one, and an encounter that ultimately ended in tragedy.”

“Oh, yes,” said Johnathan. “She would be the one who was killed by a predator just a few weeks later.” He looked regretful over bringing it up.

“Sad but true. But it was balanced somewhat by what happened next with Ardo. Like Boris and Doris, he stole away without his mother knowing, but was much more successful. Since he already lived close by, and had been wanting to help Rollo anyway, the fading of the summons had little effect. He was most of the way there anyway, and so decided to turn this into another unauthorized visit to his brother, which turned out to be for more than just to gather food for him. Ardo still felt as if he’d been summoned there, and tried harder to communicate with Rollo, with all the patience he had exercised with him since they were yearlings. He seemed to come to a definite decision; and so, he told Rollo that he had to go home but would return soon for another visit.

“Of course, their mother Maisie was furious with Ardo for sneaking off, but Ardo made no secret of where he’d been, and voiced his intention to keep on visiting his brother. She told him he was grounded, and at first he appeared to agree to it, but then he went to his room and began packing his things. He started off, without trying to sneak out, and when she physically tried to stop him from leaving, he pushed her away, saying that he had a responsibility to his brother and she could not prevent him from carrying it out. He then left, and it was the last they saw of each other. It was a shame they couldn’t have settled their differences; she died of natural causes about three months later. Yet, in her final days, it seemed to matter little to her; she simply resumed her life, but now without children.

“But it was a far different story for Ardo, who was happier than at any point in his young life in his new role as caregiver and companion to his brother. Like Reuben, he took on this role with a maturity that belied his tender years. I was pleased as well, of course, because it meant less of a burden on me, and it gave Rollo someone to care for him on the physical plane as well as ‘within.’ Since Ardo knew Rollo better than anyone, he knew best how to communicate with him, and probably could best teach him how to care for himself better. This was borne out over the following weeks, as Rollo learned to gather food for himself, to feed himself, and even be able to look out for and run from predators. During this period, I continued to try exerting more control over Rollo’s body, hoping to get him to indicate in some way to Ardo that I was within Rollo and needed to have their father and half-siblings brought there so I could become whole again; a daunting task, to be sure, for even if I could have had Rollo convey something so complex, would Ardo have been able to do anything about it?

“Tragically, none would ever know, because Ardo’s time was short as well. Only four months after he’d moved in, he was attacked and killed by that farmyard cat, a tragedy not directly witnessed by Rollo, who had heeded Ardo’s warning and reached safety in time, but which I had seen on just a routine outside observation.

“Outwardly, he didn’t seem greatly affected; but inside, within the mist-shrouded plain, the part of Rollo that I knew best was near-inconsolable after I told him what had happened. He had learned so much from Ardo, and was sure that, in time, he could have learned and been able to do much more. He was grateful to him, more than he could ever express to me, and had been frustrated at not being able to tell him how grateful he was and how he loved him; and now he never would. He seemed at one point ready to give up, but I convinced him that that would only sully Ardo’s memory. He needed to utilize the survival skills he’d learned, combined with the knowledge I’d imparted to him, so that he could continue to better himself. He soon agreed that this was what Ardo would have wanted. Though I never admitted it to Rollo, I was a bit nervous about Ardo’s departure, even as I was confident that Rollo could take care of himself better now. But I genuinely shared his sorrow; Ardo was one of us, and he died before he could learn of his heritage and that there were others who would welcome him into their fold.

“Well…with the added benefit of Rollo’s newfound skills, things went very much the same for the two of us. I was no more successful in leading Rollo out of the mist, or improving my own lot; but it was tempered by the companionship we continued to provide for each other. There were other changes in Rollo, though. There were days when he would be restless and moody, largely due to his not being completely over his brother’s death. But also, I realized that all I was teaching him was making him long for the outside world, and be able to enjoy all it had to offer. I had promised him at the start that I would do all I could to help him in any way I could, but after all these months, I was no closer to a resolution to our situation. Several times I attempted to correct the condition in Rollo’s brain, each time without success. Though this seemed to confirm my earlier theory—that if my spirit-self were whole and not spread among all these others, I would be able to correct it—it was no less disappointing each time. Well I could understand Rollo’s restlessness; but events were around the corner that could very well turn the tide.

“In further outside observation of those I’d left behind, I witnessed Madeline Brisby’s journey to Thorn Valley with her children, some four months after my current situation had begun. I saw their close call with a weasel, and the Great Owl saving their lives; and their ride the rest of the way in via their crow friends. I followed them closely, out of curiosity as much as concern; I suspected there was more to their visit than simply a social call. This was confirmed when Madeline told Justin of her strange experiences, leading to her reacquaintance with the amulet’s power. You all know what happened next; and I was overjoyed to see Johnathan’s return days later, not only for his being home and safe with those he loved; but now that both he and Madeline were much more aware of the amulet’s capabilities, it was much more possible for them to use it to seek out their lost mouse brethren, which could possibly lead to Rollo being discovered and brought to meet the rest of his family. Alas, it seemed that Johnathan, like everyone else, still firmly believed them dead, and that the chance of such an investigation was slim.

“But a slim chance was a chance, after all; and, as before, I leveled with Rollo on this matter. There was always the chance that Johnathan could make such a discovery by accident, if for instance he had the amulet with him while reminiscing about his old friends. For the time being, though, I contented myself with Johnathan’s reunion with his children, and the story he and those who sought him told of how he was found on Lahaikshe. I don’t believe I made it clear, but these observations of mine were limited to this world only—or rather, Earth only; I’d almost forgotten we’re on Lahaikshe now. So I could not observe firsthand what had happened.

“I was, however, able to listen in on your accounts of your adventures there: your run-in with the ‘mystery creature,’ Ghormfisk, alias Uhrstegg, and his entrapment of you after taking control of the amulet; how Johnathan had lived with his benefactor, the sorcerer Gwinthrayle, and how he and his associate Birantha told you of the amulet’s origins; how you were able to retake it and learn of Ghormfisk’s origins and the reasons for his actions. It was remarkable enough, learning so much about the Stone after my own lack of success in that area; but it was astounding to learn that the soul-self of its creator, Pharsal, had been within the amulet all that time—not unlike my own situation, I realized. I’d even heard how he had, essentially, impersonated my image in the Stone in order to encourage Madeline. It was remarkable to hear; so much that was unclear and mysterious revealed and resolved, after all that time. I wish I could have been there to see it all firsthand.

“Of course, I was able to see Johnathan moving his family to Thorn Valley, and other happy events in the lives of all of you. I continued being a teacher and companion to Rollo, and making my observations, which by now were almost equally made among the colony, the Davis family, and Vincent and his children. I witnessed events happy and sad: more children for Johnathan and Madeline, your wedding ceremonies, Justin and Isabella’s marriage, making yourselves more and more at home in Thorn Valley. Mr. Ages finding a mate; Louann’s near-fatal accident that led to her new life; Marie’s journey across half the world to her new life; Vincent fathering triplets with Zenia; Boris and Doris settling near the town library, and her sad fate a few months afterward; the trouble Kimball and his family had with that band of hostile rats; Vincent’s next—and last—major excursion outside NIMH, where he met she who would be the mother of his last two children.”

Nicodemus’s eyes sought and found Amelia, who sat with her young sons Thomas and Grey. She seemed unable to meet his eyes, and looked downcast, as if he’d brought up a tender subject. “Amelia, my dear…I am aware of the time Vincent spent with you, and of your feelings for him. I was not my wish to cause pain by discussing this matter, but it does play an important part in later events.”

Amelia looked up at him, suddenly curious, as were many others. “It does? How?”

“You will know very soon. Now…during this time I had continued to teach Rollo about the outside, and tell him of all that I was seeing, and impress upon him that there would always be a chance of our being discovered; and just a few months later, events began to unfold which brought us one step closer.

“I know you’re all well aware of the events that precipitated your relocation of the colony to this world, beginning with Vincent’s discovery of possible human intrusion. I witnessed Vincent’s overhearing of the NIMH personnel’s conversations, and his transcriptions of same; and I must confess, it had me worried, for unless Vincent himself tried to reach you, how would you be warned in time? And even if he could bring himself to leave, would he be able to reach you at all? I didn’t tell Rollo of this at first, just in case of further developments; and in a few days, one arrived. That one was Kimball, as you know, who quickly left on his mission. I was relieved that someone was setting out to warn you, but I feared for his safety, knowing the odds were so overwhelmingly against him. Again there was some relief, as Kimball boarded a vehicle that brought him very close, and more as I saw him disembark safely. But there was still a lengthy journey on foot, and all manner of hidden dangers awaited.

“I endeavored to reach out to him mentally, to guide him if nothing else, the same as I did with Vincent and his children. It seemed to have no effect, probably because there wasn’t the connection I had with them; but I was impressed at how he was able to keep going, in the right direction, despite repeated close calls. I continued to try reaching out to him, though, as well as to someone in the colony, but this proved just as fruitless. I was not about to give up, though; as Kimball’s physical condition grew worse, and I grew more worried about his being able to reach Thorn Valley at all, I knew I hadn’t the right to give up.

“In searching for an alternative plan, I reasoned that perhaps I would be more easily able to influence an animal of normal intelligence into helping in some way. I had also theorized that, with the rapport we had shared for so long, Rollo might actually be able to help me in such an operation if he joined his will with mine with the right concentration, though I hadn’t put the theory to the test as yet.

“As I saw Kimball’s encounter with a group of rabbits, I thought this would likely be my best and perhaps only chance to test both theories. These rabbits were curious about the quite horrendous condition Kimball was in, and why he was so driven to reach this Thorn Valley he spoke of. When I heard one rabbit, an elder of the group, say that he knew of the place, I knew beyond a doubt that I—or rather we—needed to act now, and quickly. I urged Rollo to concentrate with me, and once certain that our minds were in the proper state of synergy, I reached out, centering my concentration on the elder rabbit. It worked! He told his fellows that he would take this strange mouse the rest of the way to Thorn Valley, though he could not explain precisely why to them. He urged Kimball to climb onto his broad back and hang on tightly; then he sped off, running over hill and dale, hardly stopping though often slowing to an amble, taking as direct a route as possible. At one point Kimball did lose his grip and fall off, but the rabbit stopped immediately and nosed him back on. Eventually I could feel our concentration slipping; I prayed that we could maintain it long enough for the rabbit to make it all the way down the other side.

“Alas, it was well before they reached that point that we found we couldn’t maintain our concentration any longer. The rabbit stopped, suddenly confused over why he had gone to so much trouble for one mouse; but fortunately, he decided to keep going a bit further, probably because he figured he’d come this far and may as well take Kimball the rest of the way. When he reached the upward slope, though, he stopped, dropping Kimball off and telling him he was on his own now and his destination was just over the slope. I guess since he’d come this far and was obviously quite tired, he didn’t have the energy to make it all the way up. After the rabbit left, Kimball, only half-conscious but still determined, began making his way up the slope. He reached the top, of course, and had only begun the journey down when his senses left him altogether. He tumbled down to where your sentry Kevin found him, and again I feared for him; were all our combined efforts in vain? Fortunately, he was still alive, and you were able to treat his injuries in time for him to make a full recovery.”

Nicodemus paused to allow everyone time to fully take in this new information. Kimball and Patricia and their children all looked at each other, speechless. Then Justin spoke. “Well…Nicodemus, it seems that we now have you to thank for all our lives; or at least, those of us living in the colony at the time.”

Many voiced agreement to this view; then Nicodemus replied, “I appreciate your kind words, everyone; but you know I cannot take full credit. Vincent had gleaned the information originally; Kimball relayed it to you; the elder rabbit brought him to you; Kevin found him on the slope and alerted your medical staff, who nursed him back to health. Plus, it was Rollo’s will combined with mine that kept the effect going as long as it did. So it was very much a team effort.”

Justin made to reply, but Kimball spoke up first. “Be that as it may, Nicodemus, that rabbit would probably never have taken me the rest of the way on his own; and if he hadn’t at all, I surely would have died on the way. You can be as modest as you want, sir; but the facts are plain as day, that I wouldn’t have made it if not for you…and Rollo, of course. And if I hadn’t made it, there’s no telling what the humans would have done.”

“So,” said Tallus, “though we had no idea of your continued existence, you were still guiding us.”

“I guess you could say that, Tallus; and I do appreciate your kind words, Kimball. Well…” Nicodemus again addressed his entire audience. “Once I knew Kimball was going to be all right, I felt relieved; but it wouldn’t be total until all of you were out of danger. I continued to monitor the situation there, and also began keeping a closer watch on Martin and Lambert, once I realized how much hinged upon their return, and the fact that Martin held the amulet. I also kept Rollo up to date on what was happening ‘out there.’ He had been touched greatly at being able to help me in getting Kimball to Thorn Valley, and wanted to know every detail of my observations. You’re all aware of what I observed, so I need not go into great detail there.”

Martin Brisby raised a hand. “Nicodemus, I got to wondering…when Lambert and I found the alley where we got separated, and I met Karen and Patricia, did you have a hand in that?”

“I cannot take credit for that, Martin. Your tracking abilities are exemplary, and served you well on your journey, so it’s possible they were at work in leading you to other mice like yourself, without your knowing consciously. Kimball has theorized that it was a similar talent that enabled him to find his brethren in Thorn Valley; so might you be similarly gifted. Or it might have been coincidence; that is for you to decide.

“I did observe your separation from Lambert, though, following your run-in with the hostile rats, and your meeting with the ladies, and much of subsequent events. After you made your discovery at NIMH, I considered trying to lend aid in a similar fashion as we did with Kimball; but when I saw how you felt guided by the amulet, it seemed less necessary. Throughout this, I realized that when the amulet was back in Johnathan and Madeline’s hands, it would mean not only salvation for all, because it would surely be used to track down all the other mice, including Rollo. I didn’t tell him directly that we were this much closer to being emancipated, but…” He laughed. “Bless his soul, the boy figured it out on his own. By that time, there was little, if anything, that I could hide from him. He was very excited, of course, and looked forward to the day all the more.

“I continued my monitoring, and was again anxious as I saw the helicopters arrive; but proud as I saw the efficiency with which you carried out your Hiding Plan. Martin, Karen and Patricia arrived presently with the amulet, and you discussed using it to move the entire colony. In spite of this, I couldn’t help feeling somewhat shocked at the extent with which you carried it out. For a short time, I wondered if you had made it safely to Lahaikshe, since I couldn’t see it; though I realized that such a feat might mean a longer period of ‘recharging’ for the amulet, and consequently a more lengthy wait before you’d be able to tie up any other loose ends on Earth. Thankfully, it was only a matter of hours before I saw the return of that human you’d inadvertently brought along, and your retrieval of Lambert. Rollo had been concerned at one point that if all of you were no longer on Earth, it could mean they wouldn’t look for any more of their brethren still on Earth. We were both very relieved to find out he was wrong.

“Our relief was short-lived, though, as we learned of Vincent’s death. I had not witnessed this directly, mainly because I was so engrossed in following Kimball, and then everything else. It was distressing to both of us, especially Rollo, who had been looking forward to meeting his father at last. I continued to encourage him, saying that he still had much to look forward to, especially in light of the fact that there would be extensive research into Vincent’s writings, meaning that discovery should be even more imminent, and likely.

“I wondered, though: what had become of the mystical abilities Vincent had ‘inherited?’ If they had indeed been passed on from me to him, then did they die with him, or could they have been passed on to another? It would be some time before I would know the truth.

“Next came the tracking down of the remainder of Kimball and Patricia’s children, yet another cause to be hopeful, in light of how willing and eager they were to join the colony—which, of course, they did in short order, with the tragic exception of Desmond. So could Vincent’s children do any less?

“So now I was entirely limited in my observations to Vincent’s children, because there was no one else of us left on Earth! It was only a matter of weeks, or possibly days, I told Rollo; and when I observed Reuben and Lilia being found by Cynthia and Johnathan, I knew our time was at hand. We were both joyous over knowing we’d likely be next, but there was still work to do. I’d long figured that Rollo would have to be able to convey to his guests some indication that he’d want to go with them; and yet, for as long as we’d been together, Rollo still had great difficulty in articulation. I’d tried, back when Ardo was with him, to get him to speak aloud, and he couldn’t manage anything intelligible. Still, there had been slight improvement, and I thought it could be enough; but he would need to practice saying my name. Rollo went to it with great determination, knowing how it could pay off.

“A few days later, Michael arrived. This was it, we knew; but Rollo was extremely nervous, afraid he might botch the job, and spent almost an hour trying to form the word.” Again Nicodemus singled out one in the crowd. “Michael…I know how well you remember this part.”

“Yes…you, I mean he, just sat there looking as if he were concentrating very intently. A few times there’d be a very quiet, low sound from his throat, but nothing close to any word. And when he got up and went outside, he was just…taking a break?”

“Exactly. He felt he needed to refresh himself, and then maybe he’d be better able to speak. But again he couldn’t bring it out. He took another break, and Michael followed, only to find himself under attack by the farmyard cat. Rollo was able to run away in time, since Ardo had done well in teaching him self-preservation. Michael, you remember what happened next, don’t you?”

“Yes, I was still pretty shaken up, even though I knew Johnathan took care of the cat, and I grabbed Rollo, shook him, shouted at him… It just seemed unbelievable that he could not even acknowledge my presence, and yet run from danger.”

“Well, though he didn’t appear shaken from the encounter to you or Johnathan, he definitely was. Inside, he vowed to redouble his efforts, and Johnathan’s appearance strengthened his resolve. He again sat down and tried to speak my name, and finally a distinct sound issued forth; but it came out sounding very much like ‘no’…”

Before Nicodemus could say more, Michael jumped to his feet. “I knew it! I knew he didn’t really mean ‘no!’ He was trying to say your name, not that he didn’t want to come with us!”

“Precisely, Michael. Unfortunately, neither of you had any way of knowing this. I knew that you’d not wish to force Rollo to come, and so you’d be waiting for some kind of definite reply from him. I realized, after this, that something as complex as my name would be too much for him, all at once, and that it would have been better if I had taught him to say ‘yes’ or even to simply nod his head.”

“Well, you’re here now, Nicodemus,” said Johnathan, “you and Rollo both, and that’s what counts.”

“Thank you, Johnathan. Well…of course, Rollo was crushed at the time. To have worked so hard and come so close, only to have the attempt fail so utterly, and all because of poor articulation, was such a bitter blow. For the better part of a day, he wouldn’t speak to me at all; and when he did, he said, ‘I can’t make my body say anything right, so why should I say anything here?’ It was understandable, but I would not allow him to give up at this point, not when he’d come this far.

“When this mood passed, I encouraged him to continue his verbal skills. Shortly after, though, I realized that the more effective approach might be for him to form letters in the dirt or snow. So, over the next few weeks, this was what we concentrated on. Again I had him work on my name, certain that he’d have an easier time spelling it than saying it. Oh, there were still times when he felt ready to give up, despite my frequent reminders that Michael and Johnathan had promised to return. But we continued working hard at it; and, as they witnessed, he was able to spell enough letters to ensure success.

“But of course there was one final, critical step to be taken: having Vincent’s remaining children bring together all of my individual aspects. There had been times when I doubted the plan would work: Had I miscalculated? Was I relying on idle assumption? Likewise, I had no way of knowing whether it might do some harm to its participants, if it did work.

“And yet…work it did, all according to plan; and the results were witnessed just a few hours ago, by these two and Justin.”

Chapter 18 - Furtherance of the dream

Nicodemus paused, growing visibly more emotional, and he sipped some more water. He looked across the assemblage and said, “So…now you all know how I came to be here. And now that I am…I wish I could properly convey how I…how it feels to be among you all again.” His voice became heavy, eyes glistening with tears. “Not only those I’d left behind, and their children yet unborn, but all of us…all our lost brothers and sisters, now where they belong…where we all belong.”

There was another minute of mostly-silent reflection in the crowd; and some, like Velma, couldn’t help recalling their reactions toward Bertram and Tara becoming more than friends. It all seemed so petty and trivial now, after hearing about how much Nicodemus had sacrificed, and the enormous effort he put in, just to help this one mouse. He’d been through so much just to be speaking before them now. Many even felt ashamed, resolving on the spot to apologize to the two seemingly-mismatched lovers, and even to Nicodemus, knowing how ashamed he’d be of them for thinking in such a way.

Still, though this story had reached an end, some matters were yet to be resolved. “What about Lilia?” asked Ellis. “We already figured that Vincent passed those powers on to her, but it doesn’t explain everything.”

“Ah, of course.” Nicodemus stepped down from the rock and over to where Lilia sat with Ellis and Reuben. He took her hand. “Lilia, my dear, I am aware of the problems this situation has caused you. I know how, in recent days, you have felt as if you were two different people. How do you feel now?”

“Mm…well, a bit confused, but somehow I feel like…like I’m over all that now. Am I?”

“Quite possibly, my lady. If you’re still not certain, I guess you would know by tonight…”

“Wait…how would you know about any of that?” asked Reuben. “None of that stuff happened to her until we came here, and you said you couldn’t see into this world.”

“You’re exactly right, Reuben. But I also said that having been essentially a part of each of you, I know of the effect these different aspects had upon you, and I still retain certain specific memories of your own feeling and experiences. In your case, Lilia, there were other elements that combined with those…tendencies I passed on to you, that resulted in your condition. Even I cannot say precisely why it happened; but as near as I can tell, that part of myself, my enjoyment of life’s pleasures that couldn’t find full expression finally manifested itself in an entire second persona that allowed you to—”

“It was me, wasn’t it?” interrupted Reuben. “I caused that to happen to her, by keeping her from…from doing what she wanted.”

“Reuben, Reuben…as I’ve told you, you were affected by me as well; and if the blame lies with anyone, it is Uhrstegg. And he, or rather that aspect of him, is no more.”

Reuben shook his head, looking downcast. “I want to believe you. But…if you had never been…inside me, or her, it wouldn’t have been much different. I’ve always…wanted to…protect her, keep her safe.”

“It’s true that I cannot say how your lives would have turned out otherwise. But it does no good to lay blame upon oneself. I had said that I cannot say precisely why this free-spirited second personality of Lilia’s developed, but from the memories I still retain from her, I believe it’s highly possible that there are certain mystical energies present in this world that played a large part. I’ve found that I have a sensitivity to such energies, here as on Earth. At present I would need to study the matter further, but it’s possible that such a situation may have developed without my influence.”

“Maybe that’s true, but I still must have had some part in it, didn’t I?”

“Please, Reuben, you must believe that you were only innocent victims of circumstance: you, Lilia and Boris. If you feel the need to blame anyone, let it be me. I spoke earlier of conflict between you two, how Lilia outwardly was entirely cooperative with Reuben’s edict to stay at home and allow him to handle all outside chores. Deep inside, though, she longed for more freedom. There is much I cannot give definite answers to, but so much happens that is dependent on the capriciousness of fate, and there are infinite possibilities in how circumstances may have differed. But one thing is certain: all three of you are completely free of my influence now, free to go on with your own lives, to start afresh. You must not allow the mistakes of the past to taint your futures, especially when those mistakes were not your own.”

“He’s right, Reuben,” said Lilia. “None of it could be helped. I think…just from hearing this talk of his, that things will be all right for us now.”

“Yeah, maybe.” Reuben sighed, got to his feet, and began filing through the crowd.

“Where are you going?” asked Johnathan.

“Just…” Reuben sighed again, looking impatient. “I don’t know, I…just need to…think about this alone.”

“Then take all the time you need, my friend,” said Nicodemus, “and know that when you return, we are all with you.”

Reuben just nodded and continued on.

“He’ll be all right, won’t he?” Ellis asked Lilia.

“I think so. If he says he needs to think, that’s what he’ll do.”

“Good. Well…” Nicodemus returned to the rock and regarded the crowd, some of whom were engaged in discussions of their own. After some of the others helped in calling for everyone’s attention, he said, “Now that I am here, I suppose there is one more matter to be settled right away, namely…what will you do with me?” He gave a small laugh, but the question met mostly with quizzical head-shaking.

Then Justin said, “You mean…regarding leadership of the colony?”

“Oh, don’t worry, Justin. I have no intention of usurping your authority, or anyone’s. No, my only desire is to share in the company of friends and family again. More immediately, though, I would like to see more of your accomplishments here.”

A small group quickly formed to take Nicodemus on a tour of Freethorn, but just as they were about to begin, a small commotion arose, beginning with a gasp and sounds almost of distress from Karen.

“Karen, are you all right?” asked Martin, though he already suspected what was about to transpire.

“I think…somebody wants out.” She was out of breath, but sounded happy about this new development.

Instantly Martin and several others were galvanized into action. Ages instructed Merrill and Andrew to go and prepare the birthing chamber in the Mouse colony. As they sped off, Lambert volunteered to carry her over there. Nicodemus told her and Ages he’d like to be in attendance as she gave birth. None could see why not, and Karen told him in between gasps that she would be honored. Martin surely felt the same, but he was too busy fretting about how Lambert was carrying Karen and generally being nervous to express approval. He was partially pacified when his parents reminded him how, just before he and Teresa were born, Johnathan had become even more unglued.

The birthing chamber was a miniature version of a similar room in the Rat colony, equipped with a low table, clean towels, running water and subdued lighting. Karen was set down on the table, and all around her, the chamber quickly became a bustle of activity as a rather large group prepared for the blessed event, either to assist in the birth, to stand by with towels and water, or to encourage her or just hold the expectant mother’s hand. Unlike most human births, these creatures don’t especially mind having spectators at a blessed event, and so didn’t discourage having around anyone who wanted to be witnesses.

In general, births were easier for second- and third-generation Rats and Mice in this community than for the first-generationers—those that began their lives as naturals, before the NIMH treatments. Karen was being reminded of this now by her mother Patricia and big sister Jessica as she paced her breathing, nervous but simultaneously giddy with anticipation, ready to begin pushing at the right moment. Martin, always close by, went over with her the names they had decided upon as he held her hand. Cyril Ages, firmly in charge of seeing to the babies’ safe arrival, anticipated the moment as if they were his own, something he’d gladly experienced for himself twice with his wife Alma.

Soon, the moment came; and Martin and Karen became the proud parents of the two newest residents of Freethorn. “It’s a girl…and a girl,” announced Ages. “Congratulations, you two.” The tiny, whimpering newborns were instantly handed over to Jessica and Bernadette, who ensured that their airways were clear. After being gently toweled dry, they were handed over to the new parents. Karen could only cry softly with joy and relief, and Martin was also tearing up, speechless as they held their naked, fragile offspring.

“Wow, you’re a daddy, Martin,” said Teresa. “How’s it feel?”

“Great, Sis. Strange, but great.” He paused to wipe away a tear. “I guess I…wasn’t expecting them to…both be girls.”

“We wanted at least one boy,” said Karen, sounding tired but contented. “I would have named him Desmond. But these two little girls will do just fine.” She lifted up the one she held to kiss her lightly.

“So what are you naming them?” asked Jessica.

“Oh, yes. Victoria…” Karen indicated the one she held.

“And Elizabeth,” finished Martin. “Welcome to the world, you two. Well…this world, anyway.” He shook his head in disbelief, holding his daughter close to his breast for a moment before transferring her to her mother’s arms, knowing that she and Victoria needed their first feeding.

As they suckled, Nicodemus, who had stayed mostly out of the way, stepped forward. “Ah, Martin…Karen. My heartiest congratulations, my friends, and the best of luck in this new phase in your life.” After they thanked him, he laid hands on the two newborns. “Elizabeth, Victoria…no matter what trials you may face in life, may you always know love.” He looked up, smiling at the new parents. “Well…if you will all excuse me, there is still much catching up for me to do.” He bowed and exited the chamber as Teresa began introducing her sons to their new cousins. She was followed closely by both sets of grandparents.

Once all the way outside the mouse colony, Nicodemus paused to take in his surroundings. As he directed his gaze from the cliff-face rising behind him, to the surrounding trees, shrubbery and rocks, to the white cumuli drifting above and past the sun, he was filled with an enormous feeling of elation that he found himself unable to contain. He rushed forward into the nearby clearing, arms spread as if to embrace the whole world. The joy of being alive and among friends and family again, of seeing the success of his hopes and dreams, culminating in what he had just witnessed…it had become too much for him, as he expressed this joy in dancing and spinning about, shouting inarticulately and roaring with laughter. Naturally, this invoked some curious stares from passersby. Some scratched their heads in bemusement, though most easily understood this display of emotion, in spite of its being uncharacteristic of Nicodemus. The lust for life he’d spoken of, which until a few hours before had been within Lilia, was now finding much fuller expression within him than it had since the time just after the Escape.

Soon he became aware of the small crowd that was gathering at the edge of the clearing. Most weren’t sure of what else to do or say, not wanting to spoil the moment for him. Now, though, as he noticed their attention, some of them began moving away, smiling and nodding with a few looking slightly embarrassed. He paused in his cavorting as sudden realization swept over him. He turned away and began staring off into space. Those who observed this wondered if he weren’t just being self-conscious, but a few realized there had to be more to this abrupt change in mood. One of them stepped forward now.

“Well, Nicodemus, this has really been a red-letter day for us all, hasn’t it?”

“Yes…it certainly has, Justin.” In spite of these words, Nicodemus could only manage a faint smile.

“Is…anything wrong? We couldn’t help noticing how happy you were a minute ago.”

“Yes, it’s…difficult to explain, Justin. I…I’d never considered that it would ever come to this…”

“Say, what’s all the hubbub out here?” came a new voice behind them.

“Johnathan…would you and Justin come walk with me for a while?”

They did so, Nicodemus explaining as best he could his abrupt turnaround in mood. After they made their way to a secluded spot just off Lovers Lane, they all sat down, and Nicodemus began concentrating intently, until he seemed oblivious to his companions and all else.

It was with an unlikely mixture of reluctance and satisfaction that he again found himself on the mist-shrouded plain. With the reintegration successful, he wasn’t even sure that it was possible, considering that it was only a part of his soul-self that was contained within Rollo’s consciousness before, and now he was in full control of Rollo’s body. But that fact served all the more to remind him of why he was here, and so he put to the task at hand knowing the conversation to come was necessary. The main topic was one he’d already shared with everyone in his story; but he’d touched upon it so briefly that it had little or no impact, nor did he state out loud its full implications or its aftermath.

He looked down at his body—or more accurately, his perception of it—and found himself feeling a bit surprised at seeing his old aged rat’s body, again reminding him of his purpose here. And then, there he was: the one with whom he’d have this so-important conversation, sitting in much the same manner as when they first met. The young mouse quickly perked up, jumping to his feet and smiling broadly as the aged rat approached.

“Teacher! You’re back! Did it all go well? Did you go all the way out?” He dashed forward delightedly.

“Oh, yes, Rollo.” The two embraced and sat down. “All I had suspected turned out to be true.” He explained how the colony had been moved, and how his estimation on how their past situation might change had been fulfilled.

“Now, though,” he went on, “I am finding it not as simple a situation as I thought.”

“What do you mean?”

“Now that I have tasted life again…now that I am reunited with those I’d left behind and beginning to experience life’s pleasures again, after all these years…I am finding myself facing a dilemma that I thought would be, at worst, a minor problem. Now, you know what my original intent was, Rollo: that, once I was fully reintegrated within you, I would be able to heal your brain, restore it to where you could function and interact normally with others; meaning, of course, that you would be fully in charge of your mind and body…as I am presently. But there is that stipulation of which I told you. Do you remember it?”

“Yes, that when you had begun to heal my brain, you would have to keep at it until it’s done, and then you’d…you’d have to leave for good.”

“Yes. And I have not yet begun the process. You see, I knew that once I was…‘together’ again, and among those I loved, I would want to stay with them for a while; and that when the time came to begin the process to relinquish control to you, I would be able to do so easily.

“But now… Oh, Rollo, I’m finding it so hard to bear, the thought of leaving so soon after returning to life again. There’s still so much I want to see and do, and it’s become the greatest dilemma of my life, knowing how I’d promised you, for all our time together, that I would turn control over to you as soon as I could. I know it sounds selfish of me, but…I cannot help it. I never thought it would be such a problem. However it is solved, I felt the need to be completely honest with you about it.”

Rollo didn’t appear at all dismayed by the news, but only nodded thoughtfully. “Well…actually, Teacher, I don’t mind. In fact, I sort of expected it.”

“You did?”

“Yes. I knew that you’d been…‘out there’ before, living more normally, and that you missed your friends a lot; so I figured you’d want to spend quite a bit of time with them again once you were able to. I have never lived that way, as fully as you have. You’ve told me so much about what it’s like, and I want it very much for myself. But I’m used to living this way; all my life I’ve been this way. And if your staying in charge of my body a while longer is the only way you can be with your loved ones again, then…I guess it won’t hurt me to stay this way a while longer.”

Nicodemus was incredulous for a moment. “Rollo, I cannot ask you to do this for me. This is your body, not mine; your desires must take precedence.”

“But you didn’t ask me. I’m telling you, Teacher, this is what I want. For you. You taught me to think of others, to consider what they want as well as what I want. So this is what I want: for you to spend some time with your loved ones.”

“You’re very sure of this, Rollo?”

“Yes. I want this for you.”

“Rollo, I don’t know what to say. I wasn’t expecting this, knowing how much you wanted to be free. And yet…you were expecting this of me.”

“You often said how much you wanted to see everyone you knew again.”

Nicodemus couldn’t help laughing. “I’m truly beginning to wonder which of us knows the other better. Rollo, I cannot thank you enough. You won’t regret this decision, I promise you. I will stay in charge no longer than the period we agree upon. Now, as for how long that will be…”

“Well, you understand the passage of time better than I do…”

After some brief negotiation, a period of two weeks—fourteen Lahaikshean days—was agreed upon. Nicodemus also assured Rollo that he would let everyone know of this agreement, so that there would be ample time for everyone to prepare for his departure. Of course, there would be those who would want him to stay past the two weeks, and even to stay with them and never leave; but there would surely be others who would want him to fulfill his promise of his original intent to help Rollo, even if it meant his leaving forever. No matter what was to come, he now promised Rollo, nothing would bar him from fulfulling that promise when the agreed-upon period was over.

“Then…I guess we’ll see each other again in two weeks?”

“Unless there is some unforeseen development, then yes, Rollo, two weeks. Once again, thank you, from the bottom of my heart.” They stood and embraced, and Nicodemus walked away, turning and waving once more before walking into the mist and out of Rollo’s sight completely.

Finally, the young mouse’s eyes came open; and for a moment, his friends wondered whose words would issue from him.

“Justin…Johnathan. I…have just been within, and I talked things over with Rollo.” Nicodemus described their discussion, after which the three got to their feet and started off back to the colonies.

“So…two more weeks,” said Johnathan. “I guess that gives us plenty of time to get used to the idea. But still, even though we all heard your story, and know why you’re in Rollo’s body…it’s too bad both of you can’t stay with us.”

“Well, that would surely be my wish, were it possible. But now…this is a matter that must be shared with everyone.”

“Yes, and since most of us heard your story and know how you’d intended to help Rollo, it should soften the blow.”

“Yes.” Nicodemus turned to Justin. “I suppose we should put the word out as soon as possible; wouldn’t you say, Justin?”

“Yes, I…suppose so.” Justin sighed. “It’s just…well…essentially, what we’ll be telling everyone is that, in two weeks, you’re going to die…again. And so soon after you’d returned to us.”

“It will be hard for many, Justin, but this will not be the same. I died once; this time, I will be merely turning over this body to its rightful owner, and in the process, enable him to truly live for the first time in his life.”

“I understand that, Nicodemus, intellectually. I really do. But not everyone will.”

“Let’s give credit where it’s due, Justin,” said Johnathan. “I think once we explain it carefully to everyone, they’ll accept it pretty well. And the sooner we do, the better.”

Neither could dispute the last point, and so Justin said he’d call another general meeting for later in the afternoon. Nicodemus reminded them that the emphasis should not be placed on his leaving in two weeks, but on his being here among them for two weeks. As they continued on, he looked up and saw two mhys’haspas, which he gazed upon with open-mouthed amazement as they wheeled overhead. As Justin and Johnathan told him more about them, Nicodemus was again reminded of all he wanted to see and do before his time was up, and this certainly included seeing more of this world that was now home to those he’d considered his followers at one time, but now were akin to an extended family.

He thought of Anna, and their long-ago mutual decision to start a family, but not necessarily raise their child together. There was much about this matter that he never discussed with her, mostly because he felt he couldn’t; but while his soul-self was trapped within Rollo, he’d thought much of how different their relationship might have been. Now, he resolved to meet with her and hopefully resolve the matter for both of them. He thought of the private moment they’d briefly shared after his arrival, when they’d recalled the words they’d exchanged the night he’d approached Anna with the offer that the two of them have children together, even knowing that they might not become permanent mates. Yes, he had many more words he needed to say to her now and hoped to devote a generous amount of time to them.

As the trio continued along the trail, two figures, a Rat and a Rusay, approached. The Rusay, not one from the visiting families but hardly a stranger, stepped forward, dressed in his familiar outfit of multicolored tunic with oversized sleeves and tan trousers. He was visibly more aged than the visitors but there was still much youthful vigor in his step. His expression brightened upon seeing Justin and Johnathan.

“There you all are,” said Bryant. “I guess Nicodemus hasn’t met our guest yet…”

“Thanks, Bryant,” said Justin. “We’ll take introductions from here. Nicodemus…this is the one we’ve told you about, who’s done more for us than anyone else outside the colony. This is Gwinthrayle. Gwinthrayle…this is Nicodemus.”

Gwinthrayle crouched, smiling upon the young mouse. “Nicodemus…I’m honored to meet you, young sir. May I assume you were named for the late leader of your group?”

“Well, not quite, my friend. You see…I am their former leader, and I am only in charge of this body temporarily.”

“Indeed?” Gwinthrayle straightened and looked at Justin and Johnathan with eyebrows arched, then back at Nicodemus. “So you are truly… Well, I’ll be looking forward to hearing your full story.”

“I guess we should apologize for the near-deceit there,” said Justin. “But yes, this is our former leader, returned to us in a form which is every bit as unexpected to us.”

“I see. I’d known the details of how your…previous existence had ended, and so I never would have believed that the mystically-imbued presence I’d sensed here would turn out to be yourself. Now, this new existence of yours is not unheard of, at least among us Rusay…”

“Oh?” Nicodemus cocked an ear, looking very interested.

Johnathan explained to him how many Rusay have a very strong belief in reincarnation, with many well-documented cases in which individuals would claim to remember, often in vivid detail, the lives of others who had lived and died in earlier times, as if they were those others reborn. In almost every case, investigation would bear these claims out.

“This is most fascinating, but it wasn’t quite a case of reincarnation with me, Gwinthrayle.” Nicodemus gave him the condensed version of how he’d come to be in this young mouse’s body, emphasizing that it was conditional upon his ability to heal Rollo’s brain two weeks hence, after which he’d have to vacate for good.

“We have yet to share his decision with everyone,” said Justin, “so we’re having a general meeting on the subject later on, and you’re invited to sit in on it if you like.”

After Gwinthrayle accepted the invitation, Johnathan decided that he needed to return to his new grandchildren and the new parents for a while, leaving Justin to take Nicodemus on that promised tour of Freethorn, accompanied by Gwinthrayle.

Chapter 19 - Catching up and sorting out

Nicodemus was highly impressed, and even brought to tears several times over—something he seemed prone to much more readily in this body—upon seeing how the colony had thrived in his absence. He’d been to Thorn Valley only once, on the first expedition in which the Great Owl had led them there, before he’d become unable to travel far from home; and so, though the actual work on the new colony had begun months before the move there, this was his first look at all the new facilities, many of which were improvements upon their original counterparts. And it hardly ended with the physical aspects; Nicodemus had noticed from the beginning how much less cautious everyone seemed, and more carefree. He correctly surmised that this was due to no longer having to conduct all activity secretly and out of sight of humans. Justin confirmed this, adding that the old ratlike instincts of staying hidden had become increasingly irrelevant, and had become virtually nonexistent since the move to Lahaikshe.

Along the way they filled him in on more of the details of how their conflict with Ghormfisk/Uhrstegg was resolved, and he expressed regret that he hadn’t been there. They also told him some more about Lahaikshe, and the adjustments made following the move, especially Project Replenish, which maintained the supply of fresh water to the community and Lake Nicodemus, and the creation of the New Wall. He was pleased to hear how he’d been so honored: “A magnificent body of water, worthy of my name,” he remarked with good humor, but also genuine admiration, as they paused along the lakeshore.

Gwinthrayle was unaware that Sithpha and his family were among the current exchange party; and they were likewise surprised and pleased to see him when they caught up with each other. Dinilom, always grateful to Gwinthrayle for saving her husband’s life, gave him a long hug and a kiss on the cheek, after which she introduced him to his near-namesake, their youngest daughter Gwinthri. Morobphra, Miatati and their children were also happy to meet him, having heard so much about him already.

Since lunch was being served—though preparation for it had been understandably delayed—Sithpha and family accompanied the trio to the dining hall, where Nicodemus was treated to his first meal here: the most delectable variety of “Freethorn Gumbo” Matilda and her talented kitchen staff had concocted over the past two-plus years of tinkering and experimenting, along with freshly-baked cornbread and a variety of fresh fruit, including some specially-imported native varieties. It was the finest, most sumptuous meal he’d eaten in seeming ages, he later remarked, and certainly the finest this body had ever ingested in his short life while Rollo controlled it. The sheer, sensuous pleasure of eating an especially excellent meal tempted him to overdo, and made him reluctant to leave, something he admitted with some embarrassment. This was also his first experience with everyday Rusay, and so he was very interested to hear all about even the more mundane and routine details of the Sithpha family’s lives. Gwinthrayle was genuinely interested in catching up with them since their last meeting over two years past, but Nicodemus was eager to see the rest of Freethorn, and so they resumed the grand tour after about an hour in the dining hall.

One facility that Nicodemus took an especially keen interest in was the school. Though Thorn Valley School still operated inside the Rat colony, many classes were held outside these days, weather permitting. Virtually all had been suspended today after Nicodemus returned, so now some were being conducted a bit later than usual. In each class he observed, he would tell the teacher and students to carry on as if he, Justin and Gwinthrayle weren’t there. He was impressed with how professional all the instructors were, and how well they engaged their students, taking particular notice of the younger ones who’d begun teaching since the move to Thorn Valley.

Some of the students held a special interest for Nicodemus as well. Beforehand, Justin had told him how well the natural mice in Freethorn had done in their studies, every bit as well as anyone else. School principal Simone verified this and described to him how some, admittedly, were slow starters; and some, like Teelo and Brummie, were reluctant to enroll at all at the beginning, uncertain they’d be able to keep pace with the “advanced” rats and mice, including their own children. But now Nicodemus was seeing for himself how their insecurities were unfounded. In a reading and spelling class, three of these mice—Teelo, Zenia, and Brummie—were alongside their children and were clearly not falling behind but enjoying the experience, displaying as much eagerness and enthusiasm as any of the youngsters. At the end of the class the teacher, Phyllis, posted the results of the test her students had just taken, and Brummie was one of those who had achieved a perfect score, something he was very proud—as well as loud—about.

After class was dismissed, Nicodemus and Justin chatted with Phyllis, Simone and Isabella (who had been Simone’s assistant since shortly after the Migration) about school matters in general, but discussion soon gave way to speculation over what the academic achievements of Brummie and his ilk could imply. By comparison, Madeline Brisby had done every bit as well academically, unsurprising since she’d been found to be as “advanced” as her husband, solely by virtue of her being his mate. More surprising had been how well Alma Ages had done; so it had been speculated that these mice’s associations with their mates had the same effect. Or was it just from being in the company of all these advanced rats and mice? Or could just living here on Lahaikshe have something to do with it? Phyllis admitted that she wasn’t nearly as concerned over the whys and wherefores as much as seeing all her students do well, a point Simone and all staff teachers agreed with.

One of those students—one of the newcomers—was now engaged in a search for another who had slipped away earlier. Peering through a mostly-uncleared gap between two boulders alongside the New Wall, he thought he glimpsed something pale and out of place within. He crept in for a closer look; then, certain of what—or rather who—was within, he ventured in further.

“Lilia? Do you mind if I come in? I really need to talk to you.”

As Ellis came right up to where she sat on a flat stone, she looked up, smiling silently; obviously he wasn’t intruding, and she actually seemed glad to see him. But before he could say another word, she suddenly got to her feet and almost leaped at him, throwing arms around him in a warm embrace. Ellis couldn’t think of a word to say at first; then he simply went with the moment, both of them sighing contentedly.

After about half a minute, he found words. “Well…Lilia, I was about to ask how you were feeling, but…I guess you’ve answered it for me.”

She drew back to face him. “Oh, Ellis, I…don’t know how to describe it. I feel so…so free now, like I’m a whole person now. There was…so much of Nicodemus’s story that I didn’t really understand, but…I really feel like that part of him that was inside of me has left…left something. Something good.”

“That’s great, Lilia, I’m happy for you.” They both sat down. “I was a bit worried, the way you took off so suddenly after they took Karen to the birthing room.”

“I guess I just needed time to be alone, to think, like Reuben. I thought about how it seemed that all those strange things that happened to me are all…behind me, as I said to Nicodemus. Even he wasn’t sure why it happened, why I was like two different people, but I know…I just know that tonight, it won’t be like before. I won’t suddenly become…someone else. I’ll be just as I am now.”

“You do seem…different than before, but in good ways. When you said that Nicodemus left something inside you, I guess…well, it looks to me like…you’re more confident now, and less reluctant to enjoy yourself, enjoy life.”

“Yes…I guess I am. I still feel the same in some ways, though.”

“And…what about, er…how you feel about me, and…what happened between us the other night?”

“Well, I…” She looked away, seeming unsure of what to say for a moment. “That…was one of the things I needed to think about. I can’t be sure, because I’ve never…felt this way about anyone before, but I may be…ah…in love with you.”

Ellis was unprepared for such forthrightness from her. “Lilia, I…don’t know what to say.”

“You…don’t mind, do you?”

“No, I’m flattered, really. And I do care for you very much. It’s just that…well, I can’t honestly say yet if I feel the same. I guess…I’m still bothered by…I know it’s silly, but…I still feel almost like I took advantage of you that night.”

Lilia looked startled. “Why? How?”

“I mean, I saw you lying there, so inviting, and…I couldn’t help myself. I just…I wanted you so much at that moment, that I had to…to be with you. And finding out later about Nicodemus’s influence, it seemed even more like that. I mean, I know he said it was a combination of factors that made you act as if you were two different people, but…I still can’t help feeling that I took advantage of you at a time when you couldn’t help yourself, when you had no control over your own actions.”

“But that was me, Ellis. That…‘other self’ was a part of me that had been inside a long time, waiting to come out. I’m still not sure why it came out the way it did, but it was a part of me. And it…she’s still here.” She laid both hands on her chest. “Maybe I’ll never be exactly that way again, but…well, I probably could have controlled myself better too. But it did happen, and we were both doing what we wanted.”

“I know, Lilia, no one forced us. Still…” Ellis shook his head, laughing. “Oh, I don’t know, this whole thing, this whole situation has been so crazy. I never would have believed I’d ever have to deal with anything like it. I guess…it’s useless to go on about what’s done, and…well, I do want to be with you, and get to know you better, so…what do you say we just start anew, and take things one day at a time?”

“I’d like that, Ellis. I want to know you better, too.” They embraced, holding each other silently for another minute.

“So,” said Ellis as they got to their feet, “they’re still serving lunch, so how about you and I go together? You must be pretty hungry.”

“Oh, yes. I only had a little breakfast.”

“Let’s go, then. Say, you haven’t seen Karen’s babies yet, have you?”

“No, I haven’t.”

“You really should see them, it’s incredible. They’re so tiny, with no fur at all; it’s hard to believe they’ll grow up to look like us. We can go there after lunch.”

“I’d like that,” said Lilia as they made their way outside. “I missed seeing Michelle’s and Myrna’s babies when they were just born, so…aah…” She shielded her eyes from the sunlight. “I guess…some things will be the same.” They both laughed as they walked off arm in arm.

High on the south side of the Rooftop, another mouse lay on his back, gazing up at the late afternoon sky and wondering if he would ever be able to completely make sense of the day’s events. They all thought they’d simply be gaining a brother, and maybe another clue as to why so much of this strangeness had been happening. That was what they got, all right, but there was so much more, and not all of it welcome. Perhaps Nicodemus was right in saying that they were all innocent victims of circumstance; and yet, he couldn’t escape the notion that he could have been partly to blame for Lilia’s developing that strange “other” personality. Yes, a part of Nicodemus had been inside him as well as her, and supposedly it had the adverse effect of making him more protective of her than he would have been otherwise. Nothing could change the past, of course, but…the thought that his wanting to keep her safe from harm, whether “augmented” by Nicodemus or not, could have actually caused her harm…he wondered if he could ever free himself from it, whether it would haunt him the rest of his days.

“Reuben? Uh, I’d…like to have a word with you, if you don’t mind.”

Startled, Reuben sat up quickly to face the source of the new voice. “Oh…Martin. What do you want?”

“Well, I was just in the area, and I saw you sitting here, and…” Martin paused as he noticed Reuben’s look of disbelief mixed with impatience. “Okay, just kidding. Actually, I came up here because I thought you and I might have something to talk about. You know, similar experiences.”

“Oh?” Though Reuben’s expression changed little, he was obviously interested.

“Yeah. You see…” Martin sat down beside him. “Before you and all the other mice joined us, my buddy Lambert and I went out to…but I guess you know most of that story already. The main thing is that when it was over, and we’d all moved here to Lahaikshe, I felt I needed to get away for a while, just like you did now, and do some soul-searching, think about things that had happened to me, to all of us, things I’d done and said.”

“Like what?”

“Well…there was so much that we went through, Patricia and Karen and I, and I put the blame on myself for a lot of the stuff that went on back home while we’d been out, mostly because I took the amulet with me, at a time when they really could have used it. And then…after we’d all moved here, I was even blaming myself for our having to do that.”

“Why are you telling me all this?”

“Because…” Martin breathed in deep. “Well, this is where those ‘similar experiences’ come in. Something happened while we were returning to Thorn Valley, where I…I panicked, I lost it completely, and almost abandoned Karen and Patricia in the process. After they brought me back down to earth, I couldn’t believe what I’d done, I…couldn’t believe it was me that acted that way, that…that hurt them that much.”

“They did say that it was…pretty rough on you.” Reuben spoke in his usual near-monotone, but was obviously interested in hearing more.

“It was. But that wasn’t the worst of it. After we came here, and we found that human that got brought along with us, and I…attacked him; I’d never been that…that violent with anyone. But even that…wasn’t the worst. I took off in a huff after that, Karen came to me to…help me, and…” He paused, taking a deep breath and looking down for a moment. “Reuben, I’m going to tell you something, and I want you to promise not to tell anyone else. Can you do that?”

“All right, I guess…”

“I want you to promise me. When I tell you, you’ll understand why.”

Reuben nodded. “I promise.”

“Okay. The only other ones that know this are my folks and Karen’s. After Karen came to me that day, she tried to get across that I couldn’t go it alone, that I needed to talk to somebody, but I wouldn’t listen; and when she kept after me, I…struck out at her, I…pushed her away, and she fell down against a tree root, and…” He sighed, still pained by the memory. “It just knocked the wind out of her, but…for a few seconds I could only think the worst.

“Well…that really brought me back to my senses. I had to think long and hard on…well, everything, really, my whole life. I realized just what she meant to me, just how important everyone here is to me, my family, my friends. If there’s one thing that came through to me the loudest and clearest, it’s that I can’t go it alone, and that there are a whole lot of people who are ready and willing to help me.

“Do you see my point, Reuben? You’re beating yourself up because of something bad that happened to Lilia that you think you may have been responsible for, and…there’s no doubt, no getting around the fact that I definitely was responsible for something bad that happened to Karen. And I have to live with that for the rest of my life. I swore to her that if anything like that happened again, I’d go away forever, exile myself, because I couldn’t bear the thought of hurting her, or anyone else I love, like that again. I wouldn’t trust myself. The more time I’ve spent with Karen, though, the less it seems it’ll ever come to that. But that vow I made still stands; because that was me, and no one else but, that did those things. There was no…fragment of someone else’s persona in here. No one else can shoulder the responsibility.”

Reuben stared off to one side, expression growing noticeably more thoughtful.

“Well, I guess I’ll stop bending your ear now. I hope I’ve given you something to think about.”

“Maybe you have, Martin. Maybe you have.”

“Good. Say, speaking of responsibilities, I definitely got some new ones waiting for me. I guess you didn’t hear that I just became a…a father.”

Reuben finally looked straight at Martin. “Really? Karen…had her babies?”

“And mine.” Martin shook his head, sighing. “I think it still has yet to fully sink in, but I just know I’m gonna enjoy the experience.” He patted Reuben’s shoulder and got to his feet. “Well…I’ll see you later. Come see us soon, okay? Before they get too much older?”

Reuben gave a small smile. “I’ll try…Martin. In fact, I think I really will.”

“Okay. ’Bye now.”

For several more minutes, the words continued to resonate within him. Surely, with all Martin had gone through, and being so willing and eager to go on with his life, what was his own situation in comparison? Perhaps it was time for him to start anew. If Lilia is all right now, and happy, maybe that’s all that matters. He looked out over the surrounding red plain, to the low hills to the west, to the forest to the east. Suddenly, he was filled with a resolve that he wouldn’t be able to articulate precisely, but was nonetheless very strong. He got to his feet, more certain than ever that changes in his life were necessary, and that he was quite capable of making them.

After Justin took the tour back outside, the trio soon made their way back to Lake Nicodemus. At the swimming cove, swim class had resumed; and Nicodemus looked forward to going for a refreshing swim himself later, after lunch had settled in his system a bit more. As they watched the instructors teaching their young charges, Nicodemus said, “You know, Justin, the more of this community I see, the more I realize what a wise choice I’d made in selecting you as my successor.”

“Thanks, Nicodemus, but I couldn’t possibly take all the credit. It was very much a team effort, with everyone doing his or her part to make this colony what it is today. And there have been mistakes, like not doing more to prepare for possible human discovery. Everyone must share responsibility for those, as well; though sometimes I do feel as if there’s more I could have done. I guess…it all goes back to…that day, when we lost you. I guess you probably know, from your observations, that I blamed myself for that for a while afterwards.”

Justin, Nicodemus and Gwinthrayle paused and sat on a bench alongside the bank. “Then,” Justin continued, “we learned so much about what was behind it all. But even after that, I’d still think about it now and then, and still question whether I could have done more…even knowing that you and Jenner had both been used. I suppose the fact that you’re here now renders a lot of that moot, and one can’t spend his life regretting his mistakes, but still…you spoke earlier of ‘infinite possibilities,’ and I guess everyone ponders them from time to time.”

“And don’t think I haven’t done so myself, my friend,” replied Nicodemus with a laugh. “I daresay I’ve had plenty of time, not only to consider what might have been, but my own mistakes, going all the way back to NIMH, where we hadn’t made the proper preparations for the mice to escape with us. Oh yes, I knew quite early on that a successor to my leadership was in order. And you, Justin, were the one possessing the qualities I believed qualified you to best guide us into the future. I honestly and thoroughly believe that what I am seeing here and now is a direct reflection on that leadership. I witnessed how you spearheaded the move to Thorn Valley, utilizing different routes for separate groups in case there were humans on your trail, to throw them off and better ensure that at least some would make it. I saw how, after the groups were traveling together again, everyone rallied around you, accepted your leadership without question, and how it had continued upon your arrival in Thorn Valley. And all this at a time when you had to deal with my demise, and the blame you unnecessarily placed upon yourself. The fact that you were able to put that behind you long enough to lead everyone to safety speaks volumes of that leadership.”

“Well, thank you, Nicodemus.” Justin paused, putting his hand to his forehead. “Oh…it’s just so strange, bizarre even, hearing you refer to your…‘demise’ almost casually.”

“I’m sorry if I upset you, my friend.” Nicodemus laid his hand on Justin’s arm. “But ‘bizarre’ is most certainly the correct word, especially considering that I am still in the dark about how my situation came about. But that was also my reality, the only one I knew for the better part of three years.”

“I know. It’s still going to take some getting used to, and by the time I do…” He paused, sighing. “Well, in any case, you’re here now, back where you belong, with us.” Without another word Justin embraced the young mouse. Nicodemus was a mite surprised at the spontaneous show of affection, though he knew it was very much typical of him. But he went with the moment, his feelings very much matching Justin’s.

Gwinthrayle, who had been content to mostly observe and take in all that he saw and heard, looked on, seeing for himself what he’d known for some time, that Justin—and Johnathan and many others—had always regarded Nicodemus as a surrogate father as well as mentor. Obviously Justin was well past any of his earlier skepticism.

“However it happened,” Justin finally said, “and for the time you’re with us, it’s so good to have you back, Nicodemus. So many of us…loved you and missed you so bad.”

“Thank you, Justin.” They came out of the embrace, tears visible in both their eyes. “Well, as I was saying,” Nicodemus said with a laugh, “there should be no question of the quality of your leadership. All that I’ve seen here speaks volumes.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus, but certainly, any major decisions were put to the Council, even more so than in the old colony.”

“Oh, I’ve no doubt about that. And I’ve no wish to diminish the importance of everyone’s contributions. Oh, there was some small skepticism about your being my heir apparent before that day when everything changed for us, but how irrelevant that’s proven to be.”

“It’s strange, but…it didn’t occur to me until now, but…we’ve often speculated and even debated whether or not you’d have approved of our making this latest move. You’d always anticipated the day when humans and we would meet again, and whether we’d be able to coexist. And now…we not only fled from their attentions, but to a place where they’d never find us.”

“Yes. But you’d led this community, Justin, since my departure, and given the pressure you were under, your options were few, and arguably not the best possible ones. But you and Johnathan acted as was deemed best under the circumstances, and I see little if anything now to indicate that it was wrong. I cannot make that judgment, especially now. Had I still been your leader, I cannot say whether my decision would have been any different. And had it been someone else other than you or I, it may still have been the same. Or…perhaps not.”

Justin immediately picked up on his meaning. “Oh…Jenner, of course. If there was only one who considered himself more qualified, it was him. A lot of us were expecting you to name him to succeed you, including me. I guess it was mostly because you and he were old friends, from before NIMH.”

“This is true. But some time even before the early stages of the Plan, even before Uhrstegg put his spell upon him, I’d realized that he wasn’t the best choice. There were signs, even then, especially in his difficulty in handling disappointment when unable to have his way. When we first discussed moving to Thorn Valley, and I couldn’t convince him that it was in our best interests to do so, I was more certain than ever that I chose a’right.”

“Hmm. That explains a lot of why he came to resent both of us so much, though not so openly until just before you…you left us. I know Uhrstegg had fanned those feelings, but…”

“But they were there to begin with. Were it not for Uhrstegg, Jenner probably would have simply left the colony to make his own way in the world.”

Justin nodded. “A lot of us have figured the same. I’ve also thought that his resentment of me may have stemmed in part from that incident when we still lived at the Boniface estate, when, well…I stumbled across him and Matilda…”

“Oh, yes…” Nicodemus paused to chuckle. “…at a moment when they would have preferred privacy.”

“Yes. Well, all water under the bridge, eh? It’s strange; at one time I’d have resented any discussion of Jenner, and even have cursed mention of his name. But since I’d learned why he acted as he did, I can actually feel sorrow for him. Sometimes I actually miss him. It’s just too bad he couldn’t have been aware that he was being controlled and manipulated, and tried to fight it. Sullivan, too; we know now that he’d just allowed himself to get in too deep, that he was just as surprised and shocked that Jenner would resort to murder. If not, he’d still be with us too.”

“Yes. I too miss them. Uhrstegg’s machinations cost us dearly, though he couldn’t know the ultimate results.”

“Which would surely have been the deaths of all or most of us, were it not for Madeline Brisby’s warning.”

“Quite.” Nicodemus turned to Gwinthrayle. “It seems we’ve all but forgotten you, my friend.”

“No offense taken, Nicodemus. I know you’ve all much catching up to do.”

“True, and not just with everyone here. In fact, when you’re ready, Gwinthrayle, I’d like very much to see your home, and more of Lahaikshe.”

“I would be honored if you would be my guest,” Gwinthrayle agreed, and so they arranged for Nicodemus to pay a visit three days hence. Before the three resumed the tour, though, Gwinthrayle brought up a matter that, it turned out, had been in the backs of all their minds.

“I’ve been so intent upon seeing everyone again, and conveying as best I could the circumstances of my return, that I hadn’t the chance to put that to the test. Well, then…” Nicodemus looked around them and, spotting a nearby rock twice his size, he extended his arm, staring at it intently. Before his companions’ astonished eyes, the rock lifted from the ground as if by invisible hands for a few seconds before being lowered just as gently. Nicodemus looked up at Justin and Gwinthrayle, his own face conveying a degree of astonishment.

“Well, that settles that,” said Justin, nodding.

“Indeed,” added Gwinthrayle. “Apparently this ability was so much a part of you that you retain it even in this form.”

Nicodemus looked back at the rock. “And it feels every bit as natural, with little effort on my part, as it did before. And it serves to reinforce what I’d come to believe in my old life: that this ability has its origins from a source different from the NIMH treatments. And in fact…” He spoke almost as one on the verge of a major discovery. He closed his eyes, suddenly in the midst of intense concentration. Justin almost asked what the matter was, but kept silent.

The young mouse’s eyes snapped open, he drew in breath sharply and looked as if that major discovery had been made. “My friends…I believe we may say…‘abilities’…plural.” He again closed his eyes, and before four astonished eyes, appeared to vanish into thin air!

“Nicodemus!” Justin immediately called out. “Are you…still here?” He looked back and forth rapidly.

A familiar but seemingly disembodied voice sounded. “Yes, I am, Justin. You cannot see me, then?”

“I can hear and smell you, but…you turned invisible, then? Just like Vincent?”

“So it seems.” He reappeared in the same spot, looking down at his arms and torso. “Extraordinary. You could not see me, and yet I could still see…this body.”

“So,” ventured Gwinthrayle, “do you believe…that this ability is completely new to you at this place and time, or…”

“I cannot say precisely how or why,” Nicodemus said in careful, measured tones, “but I believe that this was an ability that…lay dormant within me, in…my old body, my old existence; and that here, now, for whatever reason, it is now available for me to use freely.”

“So,” Justin said equally carefully, trying to follow Nicodemus’s logic, “they were passed on to Vincent, and then, apparently, to Lilia, after Vincent died. But I wonder why you couldn’t use it in your old life? You could use your telekinesis, but not…” He and Nicodemus looked upon each other, wide-eyed.

“I believe…I can anticipate your next question, my friend.” Nicodemus concentrated again, and startled his companions once again by again slipping from their sight. This time, though, it was by, to their eyes, sinking down into the ground below their feet, but leaving it undisturbed.

Justin gaped. Intellectually, he knew this was possible, following Lilia’s use of a similar—or exactly the same?—ability to slip from the sight of others, along with that of invisibility. But the sight was still one he’d never forget, if he lived to be a thousand. “Johnathan should see this,” he could only say.

A moment later the young mouse popped right up a few inches away from where he’d sunk into the ground, his fur as clean as before, as if he hadn’t been completely enclosed by soil and rock. He spread his arms, smiling, even laughing, looking more as one who was truly born to this form, a brash youngster showing off before friends and family. Both Justin and Gwinthrayle found his laughter infectious, and—as before, when he had his great moment of joie de vivre following the birth of Martin and Karen’s children—Nicodemus suddenly felt inclined to rein in his feelings a bit.

“Well, now I’m sure we’re all wondering: what else?” Barely had he said this when an answer—not necessarily the final one—came to him. Holding his palms parallel to the ground, he floated straight up until he was two feet above their heads. “Of course…simple levitation, for myself as well as other objects…or people.” With his expression again playful, his companions found themselves levitating to Nicodemus’s level. Gwinthrayle couldn’t resist a chuckle as Justin grabbed for his arm; the Rusay sorcerer routinely employed the same ability to cover greater distances, and though Justin had experienced the sensation before in Gwinthrayle’s company, he wasn’t expecting it now. Looking around, all three could see they were attracting a bit of attention: cries of “Hey, look!” were coming from the swimming cove.

“Perhaps further such activities should be kept more private, for the time being,” Nicodemus said more seriously, willing them to return to earth. “At least, until I’ve determined what other abilities may yet lay dormant.”

“A wise choice,” agreed Gwinthrayle. “And I will most certainly be looking forward to your visit to hear your report.”

“We should have plenty more to discuss by then, to be sure. Right now, Justin, I think we can resume the grand tour. I would especially be curious to see your memorial garden. I know there are many there I’d like to pay honors to.”

“Of course,” said Justin. “But I’m sure you realize that…well…”

“That my own grave is there. My headstone, and…my own body interred below it. Yes, my friend, I am quite aware. And I assure you: it will not disturb me to see it. But I believe that general meeting is in order first?”

“You’re right. I’ll start getting the word spread. Many won’t be expecting another one so soon after the last, but…this shouldn’t be delayed much longer.”

In short order, nearly the entire populace of Freethorn was again gathered in the main assembly hall, and Nicodemus got right to the point, feeling the need to get the matter over with. As expected, there were many who were dismayed by the news; but there were also many who remembered Nicodemus’s mention of his intention to help Rollo. Overall, reaction to the news was not without sadness, but was still more favorable and accepting than Johnathan and Justin had expected. After taking further questions, Nicodemus reiterated how, if it were within his power, he and Rollo would both remain here. But he’d made that promise long ago, and as long as he co-inhabited his body, he was beholden to it.

The meeting was over in half an hour, and though many had returned to their normal daily tasks, no one’s thoughts were far from the events of this most memorable and special day. For all that it was special, though, it was tempered by the knowledge that Nicodemus would only remain with them a short time. Otherwise, the overall mood in Freethorn would surely be more celebratory. As it was, there was widespread acceptance of his agreement with Rollo, especially among the younger ones and those who hadn’t known him previously.

Chapter 20 - Monuments

“Justin? Are you all right?”

“Yes…yes, I’m all right, Nicodemus. It’s just that standing here, in front of this one, with you standing next to me…I can’t help it, it’s a little unnerving. But I’ve got to get used to your leaving again as much as anyone else, maybe more.” He looked upon the headstone in front of them, still finding it hard to grasp how this monument to their fallen leader could be here at the same time and place as the one whose name it bore, even though his form was much different.

“And you were concerned with how I would handle it,” said Nicodemus with a smile. “Not to be flippant, of course, but…well, perhaps we should move along.”

Isabella, who had joined them after the meeting, took Justin’s hand and smiled reassuringly. Gwinthrayle had gone to visit the Brisby family and tell them of Nicodemus’s newly-discovered abilities and meet the two newest grandchildren, so now these three moved on to some recent additions to the memorial garden: headstones honoring Eric, Teresa’s mate; Doris, Boris’s sister; Harley, Jessica’s mate; Vera, Norman’s mate; and, most recently, one which as yet bore no name, but was placed here when it was learned that Rollo had a brother who had perished.

“We didn’t know his name was Ardo until we heard your story,” Justin explained, “and of course we didn’t know Rollo’s either. But we had this prepared, because we figured we’d learn it eventually. Now it’s just a matter of putting it on here, along with an appropriate epitaph. We knew he deserved a really special one, for all the good he did Rollo. And now that you’re here, Nicodemus…”

“I’ll be happy to compose it, my friends. And in fact…” As before at the lakeside, he abruptly fell into deep concentration. Isabella looked at Justin inquiringly.

“Wait for it,” he replied quietly.

True to Justin’s suspicion, Nicodemus looked up, turned to Justin and Isabella with a knowing expression, and pointed a finger at Ardo’s marker. “You may want to shield your eyes,” he told the pair. “It may be brighter than I expect.” Again he concentrated; and Justin and Isabella gasped and shaded their eyes as brightly-hued fingers of flame danced across the granite slab’s face. It was quickly apparent that letters were being burned into the stone, but strangely, without a great amount of heat, and only with the brightness of burning embers.

In a minute and a half, it was finished. Nicodemus looked up to the Rat couple, who were almost gaping. “Well, that’s one more thing I never knew you could do,” understated Justin.

“And it may not be the last,” agreed Nicodemus. He stepped aside to allow the pair to see the inscription the stone now bore.

Isabella read it aloud: “‘Ardo, who gave of himself freely and generously, beloved brother to Rollo.’” She looked at Justin and Nicodemus, smiling.

“I like it,” said Justin. “I think that…Rollo will too.”

“Thank you, Justin. It was with him in mind that I wrote it.”

The three moved on to another headstone, one of four which marked a place of actual interment. Nicodemus laid a hand on the carved letters forming the name. “Ah, Jenner. Would that I had been able to take action before Uhrstegg made his move…on both you and me.” He sighed and sat down. “Even if I couldn’t stop you from disagreeing with the Plan, or leaving the colony altogether, as you almost surely would have otherwise.”

He looked up at the surrounding bushes. “So long ago, before the Capture, he and I would go out on food-gathering trips together, sometimes not so much out of necessity as for the sheer adventure, just to see how much we could get away with. On one occasion, we were conducting a raid on someone’s vegetable garden when the owner’s dog began barking at us from inside the house. In an instant, the owner was after us with a flashlight, yelling and waving a stick. We escaped, ducking into some bushes and then through the chain-link fence into the neighboring yard. After the man had gone back inside, we talked excitedly about our escapade as we feasted on our ill-gotten gains. Jenner remarked on how easy it had been to carry out, and that nothing they could do would ever keep us from doing what we wanted. ‘Let them set their old traps,’ he said, ‘and chase us, and send their dogs after us. Just let them try to get rid of us. They may get some of us, but not all, and definitely not you and me.’ Though my attitude toward humans was more cautious and respectful, I couldn’t help admiring Jenner for being as he was. It’s ironic that this quality I admired, this defiance of forces more powerful than we, was what ultimately led to his downfall; beginning with his disagreement with the Plan, and ending with both our deaths. In some ways, the treatments at NIMH didn’t change us at all; though in his case, I truly wish they had.”

“I know, I do too,” said Justin. “He could be really practical-minded at times, with very sensible ideas for what would be the right thing for us to do, and where we should go. But when it came to humans…that was his major blind spot. You know, I didn’t realize he was that way that long ago until you just now mentioned it. We’ve all discussed so little about those days before the Capture that I hadn’t really thought about what life was like for the two of you, though we all knew you’d been friends and were captured together.”

“Those days meant little to us after our ‘rebirth,’ Justin. With whole new worlds for us to discover, of what use to us was reminiscing about days when our whole world consisted of raiding gardens and garbage cans, and living in filthy crevices and holes in walls? And yet…that was our world, for all we tried to deny it. We were the same beings as before, however much we’d changed.” Nicodemus got to his feet. “Of course, none could have predicted a change of this magnitude, eh?” He laughed as he indicated his body. “Well, I suppose that should be enough of this for now.” He turned, laying a hand on the headstone. “Rest in peace, Jenner. I guess it could be said that you’ve earned it. It’s possible that a part of you, deep down, was aware of what Uhrstegg had done to you, and was even deeply defiant of it. You may even have believed—perhaps wrongfully—that death was the only release.” Nicodemus sighed. “Goodbye, old friend.”

The three moved on to the next headstone, the one marking Sullivan’s grave. They discussed how he’d been taken in by Jenner’s plan to move against Nicodemus and thus was indirectly affected by Uhrstegg’s spell. Justin told Nicodemus how, in discussion over the years, they’d realized how fortunate it was that he had been the only one and that he had proven to be a most reluctant partner-in-crime. Isabella recalled how she and her family had discussed a troubling possibility after learning of Uhrstegg’s machinations: that just as Sullivan had been less than enthusiastic about the Thorn Valley Plan and so had been unwittingly roped in, so might had been her mother Velma as well. She’d gone along with the Plan but wasn’t shy about voicing her displeasure over all the work necessary to prepare for it.

“It’s hard to imagine Mother going along with something so…so vile, so awful. She never completely agreed with Jenner, but still… Brrr! I still shudder to think of the possibility.”

“We can thank whatever fates had intervened that it didn’t come to pass,” said Nicodemus. They all said more words about how valuable an ally and friend Sullivan had been, concluding with a similarly-respectful farewell from Nicodemus. As they moved on, though, they became aware that they weren’t alone in the garden.

“Amelia!” called out Isabella welcomingly. “Hello. You can join us if you like.”

The mouse came forward a bit shyly, but looking like one who had urgent business. “Hello, Isabella…Justin. Ah, Nicodemus, I wondered if you could tell me more about…well, what you said earlier, during your story…”

Nicodemus put a hand to his forehead. “Of course, Amelia…about Vincent. Please forgive me. I guess, even in my present state, I’m still not immune to forgetfulness.”

“About Vincent, eh? Is it something the rest of us should hear?”

“In truth, Justin, it is. But for now, I believe Amelia should be the first to hear it, in private. Trust me, everyone will know soon. In fact, since you’ve shown me all around the colony already, I would ask that I be left to myself for the nonce, as there are many others I wish to meet with on a more personal basis.”

“Whatever you say, Nicodemus,” said Justin as he and Isabella made to leave. Though both were curious as to the nature of what further information he had on Vincent, they recognized his need to be on his own.

When he and Amelia were alone, Nicodemus offered his arm, and the two walked slowly together through the garden. “You did say, didn’t you,” began Amelia, “that you knew what Vincent thought and felt?”

“Yes, my dear, and I still retain many of his memories, and this is why I chose to meet with you in private. I know that he spent more time with you than any of the other ladies who bore his children, and that his feelings for you were stronger; very likely because of the fact that he was able to spend more time with you. Now…you are aware of why he could not stay with you, or the other ladies?”

“Yes, he couldn’t stand to be away from his home, in that NIMH building, for very long.”

“Yes. Do you remember, Amelia, how I said that Vincent’s time with you played an important part in what came later?”

“Of course. That’s why I came to you now.”

“Well…what I have to say now may upset you, so please prepare yourself. Are you also aware of the last piece of writing he made, in which he described how much he wanted to leave, and be with friends and family, but felt trapped by his irrational fears?”

“Yes. They told me about that. But there was also that one, where he…said he knew he was going to die.”

“Ah, but there is more to both of those entries than what meets the eye.” They paused in front of Vincent’s monument, where they sat down on a nearby bench. “In that earlier entry, he described how he knew he’d be meeting a dire fate before long. But he knew not what it would precisely be, nor that it was necessarily his death; only a nameless, formless dread of something he was sure would befall him if he remained there.

“Shortly thereafter, though, he reasoned: only if he remained there. If he were to leave, could he not escape this fate? The idea appealed to him greatly; but almost immediately came that dilemma that tore at him, tormented him. He thought about you, of the time you and he had spent together, of how happy it had made both of you, however brief it was; and found himself wishing, even longing, to return to you and build a life with you and the children he’d sired. But, he thought, what if he did make it back to you, only to leave you again? He could hardly bear the thought, because he knew, from so many times in the past, the likelihood of his returning to the home he’d made in NIMH, of giving in to that compulsion in him, which he saw as a weakness. His thoughts were so filled with the matter that he hardly slept those last few days.

“He described this dilemma in his last writing, as you know; he thought writing about it would help him deal with it better. Well, it could be said that it did, but not in the way he planned. He was suddenly so overcome, unable to bear the torment any longer, shouting out his frustration and almost tearing the page to shreds. He managed to resist, though, remembering that he still believed in that other premonition he’d experienced: that Patricia would come there seeking Kimball, and he felt he owed it to her and her family to preserve all his writings. He didn’t want it to be the first one she would see, however, and so he concealed it in another stack. Then, filled with a resolve to equal Kimball’s when he left for Thorn Valley days earlier, Vincent left his hideaway without looking back. He made his way out of the building almost recklessly, thoughts on only one thing—right up to that moment, that terrible moment when his doom-filled premonition came true. That one thing, my dear…was you.”

Amelia looked away, open-mouthed, looking ready to break down. “Then he…was leaving NIMH to see me, to…to return to me; not to meet his death.”

“Yes, my dear, and he might yet have escaped it; but with the state his mind was in, compounded by the insufficient sleep he’d had, his reaction when confronted by that cat was much slower, and was more one of defiance than fear. He wanted nothing to stand in his way of this new life he wanted for himself, and so he forgot just how much danger he was truly in. Even those powers he’d ‘inherited’ from me could not save him. His…very last thought was…how much he truly loved you.”

Amelia could contain her feelings no longer, burying her face in her hands, crying quietly but intensely, hardly seeming to notice as Nicodemus took her in his arms to comfort her.

“I’m so sorry, Amelia. I wish there had been some way to soften it, to break it to you more gently; but I knew how much you wanted to know all about Vincent, and that you wouldn’t want me to spare any details.”

Amelia managed to look up to him, eyes still brimming with tears but with gratitude showing through. “I…I did want to know, Nicodemus. I…thank you.” She buried her face in his chest as he stroked the back of her head.

After another minute or so, he helped her to her feet. “Come, let me see you home.”

“No…wait.” Amelia came up to Vincent’s monument, laying her hands on it with head down. She stayed thus silently for a minute before looking up, touching her lips to the stone, and saying a quiet goodbye. She told Nicodemus she was ready, and they left the garden together, Amelia vowing to spend the rest of the day holding her sons close to her and never letting them go.

As one pondered a love that might have been, two others were continuing to explore their own in full.

Cynthia sighed languidly as Michael stroked and smoothed the fur on the back of her head. “That feels good,” she murmured.

Michael just made a grunting sound, followed by a small laugh.

“That was articulate.” Cynthia began to laugh herself.

Both of them sighed and shifted position on Michael’s bed so they could gaze into each other’s smiling faces. They kissed gently. “Oh, Cynthia…what’s happening to us?”

“Why would you ask that? Unless there’s a problem with our always wanting to be together, and being unable to keep our hands off each other…”

“Among other things. I think we might have set a new record in the last few days.” Michael laughed again as he stroked Cynthia’s face. “No, it’s not a problem at all. I guess what I meant was that…the way this feeling has just…taken us over like it has. There’s this feeling I get…I don’t quite how to put it. I guess…it’s like what you said about wanting to meet me just from hearing my dad talking about me. As if we were destined to meet. It sounds clichéd, I know, but…I do know we belong together. It’s not just that we’re this much in love, but…oh, it’s just beyond words.”

“I know just what you mean.” They kissed again for almost a minute.

“Cynthia…I was wondering, sweetheart…you’ve been living with these people longer than me. Is it this way with all of them?”

“You mean…how they fall in love?”

Michael nodded.

“Well, it’s not the same with everyone. With Justin and Isabella, for instance, their feelings for each other developed more slowly.” She laughed and sighed with the memory. “Teresa and I were so tickled pink to watch it grow and develop, it was just the sweetest thing. But for others…it can hit them more quickly. I’ve seen it happen myself.”

“Like, for instance…?”

“Well…there was the day Daddy returned to Earth from Lahaikshe, after he’d been stuck here for ten months, and the Rats threw a big celebration to honor his return.”

“Like the one they had after we all came here to Lahaikshe.”

“That’s right. Anyway, we were all in the dining hall, we had music and dancing going full-steam; it was so much fun. Things began to slow down after dark, and Willis and Sabrina were dancing close and slow. They went on like that for the longest time, it was so cute. I think I was the only one actually watching them so closely; it’s a little embarrassing to admit now.

“So…after a while they stopped dancing, and for a good minute they just stood there gazing at each other. Some of the other rats were starting to take notice, but they didn’t say much; it was like they knew what to expect. From what I learned later, they definitely did.”

“So…what did they do?”

“When they were through staring at each other, they took each other’s hand, gave us a quick goodbye, and raced out of there just like that. By now, all of us kids had seen them ‘acting funny’ and leaving suddenly, but we didn’t know what to make of it. ‘Where’d they have to go in such a hurry?’ Martin asked. Daddy said he’d explain later, after the festivities died down.”

“And…did he?”

“Yes, he did. It was probably a bit more than we needed to know right then, but he did say it was something like what happened with him and Mom when they first met, though not quite so quickly and urgently.”

“Wow.” Michael lay back, gazing at the ceiling of his bedroom. “So that was the first they were, you know…?”

“Yes, even though they’d known each other since they were babies, and were always friendly with each other, they weren’t really interested in each other as mates. But after that, they were almost inseparable.”

“And that’s how it is with us now?”

“Oh, I do hope so.” Cynthia leaned over close, stroking Michael’s abdomen and resting her head on his chest. He drew his arms around her. “Oh, Michael, let’s make it official, let everyone know how much we want to be together, stay together, have a family together.”

“Oh, Cynthia…you’re right, there’s no reason to delay it any longer. Except, well…all of us should be here…”

“Oh, that’s right. Norman and his kids are out there, and Jordan and Portia and their kids too.”

“Yeah. Especially Norm. In fact, they don’t know about Nicodemus, either, come to think of it.”

“You’re right. Say, how ’bout we talk to Daddy about going out there with the Stone and bringing them back early, before Nicodemus has to…to leave us?”

“That’s a great idea. Otherwise, when they come back, they might miss him. And they really should know that he’s here.”

“Yeah. Let’s go suggest it right now.” Renewed energy infused the room as they both got up off the bed. As Michael handed Cynthia her robe, she added, “Actually, he or Mom could do it; either way, the council would probably want to know about it.”

“I guess so,” said Michael as he buttoned his tunic. “But we won’t actually announce…us yet. Agreed?”

“Okay. We’ll just tell them that everyone should know about Nicodemus, and meet him before he goes.” She sighed. “That still bothers me…you know, that he has to leave us. But if it’ll help Rollo, then it’s only fair, I guess.”

As they left Michael’s “bachelor pad”—which they both knew would soon be losing that designation—Cynthia suddenly stopped cold, drawing in breath and covering her mouth as if to stifle a scream.

“Cynthia…sweetie, what is it?”

She looked back and forth; and, once certain no one else was listening, she replied breathlessly, “I just realized…that with Nicodemus here…he could be the one to…to marry us, to officiate at our wedding!”

Michael clasped her shoulders. “Cynthia, that’s a great idea! I bet he’d be only too happy to perform it. When should we ask him?”

She thought for a moment, and then said, “I think…it would be best to wait until after the exchangees return, both for asking Nicodemus and for making our official announcement.”

“Yeah, that makes sense. But you know, sweetie, I feel so much like announcing it to the whole world that it’s not going to be easy, keeping it under wraps for that long.” He took her in his arms and kissed her tenderly before they moved on down the corridor, heading off to look for Johnathan and pass along their suggestion.

They greeted a few other Mice and Rats along the way, unconcerned over whether anyone saw them leaving Michael’s place together. Such was the nature of these people that open knowledge of this pair’s intimacy, unlike human society in general, was treated as little more than just the way of things, with virtually no guilt or stigma attached. For these two, such moments were—perhaps—more frequent than others of their ilk, but none judged them as anything other than two people deeply in love.

“And that, my friends, is why and how Vincent met his end as he did. And again, my apologies for not informing you all sooner.”

“None necessary, Nicodemus,” said Johnathan, looking around the chamber. Everyone in the hastily-convened council seemed to agree.

“Yes,” added Justin. “That was very thoughtful and considerate of you to break it to Amelia first.”

“Nicodemus, I…I’m not sure what to say, how to feel,” said Kimball. “I’m happy to learn, finally, that Vincent didn’t seek his own death, and that it was, in fact, just the opposite—he sought to begin a new life for himself. And that’s what makes it so sad, too.”

“He should be here now,” said Patricia, wiping away a tear. “After all he—he’d been through, he deserves to be happy.”

“A sad case, truly,” said Gwinthrayle, who’d been allowed to sit in again. “But most fascinating. I’ll need to return home presently, but I will look forward to hearing more about it, Nicodemus, during your visit.”

“As will I to tell it, my friend.”

“At least,” said Tallus soberly, “this makes more of his writings clearer, especially that last entry. He said he longed to join those who would welcome him, and now it seems he referred to Amelia and her children. No offense, Kimball, Patricia; I know you wanted him to come and live with you.”

“That’s all right, Tallus,” said Kimball. “Either way, he’d probably be alive now.” He sighed. “If not for that damnable cat! But that’s losing perspective, I suppose, considering that others of us have…met a similar fate.” He recalled his own close calls during his journey to Thorn Valley, how Louann had been injured making a similar escape, the numerous close calls he and his family had with Boonger’s rat-gang and with other predators after leaving home; and those who hadn’t been as lucky: Desmond, Ardo, Doris.

“And that’s probably the most important reason we have for staying here on Lahaikshe,” said Justin. “Without that kind of threat hanging over us, we can concentrate more fully on matters of how our society should develop, where we should go from here.”

“And on just simply breathing easier, no doubt,” said Nicodemus. “My friends…I would like to propose that we honor Vincent and our other fallen comrades further, beyond the monuments in your memorial garden. Perhaps this day could be set aside each year, in remembrance of their sacrifices.”

Ensuing discussion was highly in favor of the proposal; some had been thinking along similar lines already. Although there had been no holidays so designated before—and some were reluctant to embrace the idea just because of that—the council put it to a vote, and ultimately, everyone was unanimously in favor. Along the way, it was explained for Nicodemus’s benefit the Lahaikshean system of months and days, and how the cycles of the moon marked an approximate unit of time, as on Earth. This day—the 21st day of the month of Visthrip—would hereafter be set aside not only as a day of remembrance for deceased brothers and sisters, but to commemorate Nicodemus’s return as well.

Before adjourning, Johnathan brought up a matter suggested to him by Cynthia and Michael, who had approached him shortly before the meeting: that the exchange party be recalled early, so they could meet Nicodemus and be apprised of his situation before the two weeks were up. Again, the proposal was approved unanimously, and a date set—three days before Nicodemus’s departure—for the recall.

Gwinthrayle bid everyone farewell for now, and the meeting was adjourned. As everyone filed out of the chamber, Nicodemus approached Anna and told her he needed to discuss some things with her alone. Gwinthrayle accompanied them part of the way, chatting with them until they were all the way outside. He bid them farewell, and they watched as he levitated over the east side of the Rooftop and out of sight.

Anna decided that would be an ideal spot for their discussion, since Nicodemus hadn’t been to the Rooftop yet, and so they made their way up to where it curved around what had come to be known informally as the Peak, the larger and taller section of the original Thorn Valley wall that had been brought here with the colony. The two paused where they could see the western sky, where it wasn’t blocked by the Peak. It was about an hour and a half before sunset, and the sun was currently obscured by a cloudbank, from behind which the sun rays radiated in a strikingly beautiful fashion.

Shortly, though, Nicodemus made it clear that he wished to discuss more than sunsets. “Anna, my dear,” he began as they sat down on a bench, “when I was within Rollo’s mind, I had much time to reflect on my life; and some of it, perhaps too much, was spent mulling over past mistakes, regrets. One that I returned to again and again was…you and I, and the life we could have built together. As you know, we never formed the emotional bond that the others did, not even after we’d consummated our agreement. But what you may not know was that part of that was a conscious decision on my part. I wanted to spare you, you see, the pain of the loss you surely would have received, much earlier than what would have rightfully been.”

“Because of your faster aging, you mean, don’t you? I didn’t know, Nicodemus; not at first. But I had a lot of time to think about it too, and I realized just how much of what didn’t make sense about our relationship now did. Before that time, we all knew that was happening and realized some of the truth; but you still don’t know why it happened, exactly, do you?”

“No, it’s still a mystery to me. Even during my stay within Rollo, I still believe it likely that it was my special abilities that were the cause. And their origins still aren’t entirely clear, whether they’d resulted from the NIMH treatments, or something else; or why I was the only one thus affected. But I’m also aware that I was something of a mystery to everyone, Anna; and, yes, I’m also aware of how closely this parallels Johnathan’s reluctance to be completely honest to Madeline about their perceived aging difference. Their situation was resolved in possibly the best way imaginable, by never having existed to begin with; but in the case of you and me, I feel inclined to apologize for my own lack of honesty.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus, but I do understand, really. After all, I never formed an emotional bond with you either. That almost…sounds heartless now, just a bit…”

“And yet it was the case with us both. Oh, make no mistake, Anna, there was love for you here.” Nicodemus placed a hand on his chest. “But I must confess, it was of the kind which I felt for everyone in the colony, though not precisely the same. You always held a special place in my heart, Anna, as the mother of our son. You raised Brutus well; though, of course, you had no shortage of help in raising him, especially from George, son of my oldest friend. I’m very happy to see that you and he are still happy together.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus. I am proud of Brutus, how he’s grown, what he’s become. Still, there have been many times, over the years, when I wished that you and I could have been…a real family. I was sure, for a while, that we could have made it work. Even after we all knew you were aging more quickly, I still believed it. The one time I actually brought up the subject of marriage with you, you declined because you thought you couldn’t be a proper husband and father to us.”

“Yes, I remember it well. Brutus was about a year old then, and though everyone knew he was my child, I could never form a parental bond with him like the rest of us.” He sighed. “I’ve wondered if…whatever it was that triggered the accelerated aging was also responsible for my being unable to develop true familial bonds; and then too, Uhrstegg’s tampering may have also played a part later on. There was a time when I’d truly wished to have been able to, Anna; though, of course, I’d seen how happy you and George were together. I’d truly believed that being colony leader would preclude my having a true family life.” He paused, looking wistful. “I’d spoken earlier of ‘infinite possibilities;’ and in any number of them you and I may have had a true family together. But I know that the present, right here and now, is all that can be changed—not the past, not the future, but only the present. Oh, there will always be regrets, a wish for a life that could have been, but can never be. Know this, though, Anna: though I may not have been able to express it properly, I have always loved you, and I always will—for however much time each of us has left, and beyond.”

“Oh, Nicodemus…” Anna embraced him, kissing his forehead. They spent a long moment thusly, both filled with thoughts they could not express aloud.

Afterwards, they gazed at each other smiling; it was a bittersweet moment for them both. Then Nicodemus said, “I suppose I should go now; I don’t have any real commitments, but I’m sure you do…”

“No, please stay. There’s a lot that you haven’t been told about…our lives, our experiences during the Move, after we’d settled in Thorn Valley. I know you witnessed some of it when you…‘looked outside’, but…”

“But I couldn’t look everywhere, of course. Anna, I’d be delighted to indulge you.”

Anna began by relating aspects of the Move, with many anecdotes and other observations. She described vividly the mad rush to tear down and deconstruct everything in the Rosebush colony even while they had to deal with the deaths of three of their number, and how they quickly realized that mourning would have to come later, after they were well away from the Fitzgibbons farm. She described one especially chaotic scene, while the whole operation was still being organized, marked by adults milling about almost blindly; children, many scared and bewildered, some crying, as their parents tried to explain why they all had to leave the only home they’d ever known; and all while one chamber was rather noisily being torn down, with much dust. She contrasted this with a later scene where she and the rest of a hastily-appointed committee were in charge of deciding what materials would be brought along and what would be broken down further and buried far away, well into the forest. By this time the colony was running like a well-oiled machine, with everyone giving his or her all to see that the colony was vacated by morning. She described how they all had to fight fatigue as they hauled the materials to be buried, over several trips, out to the woods; and even more so as they made the final rounding-up of what was to be brought along to Thorn Valley.

Nicodemus listened enthralled by Anna’s descriptions of the procession through the woods; which, after crossing the creek, separated into several groups, as he’d already observed. She told of the almost nonstop traveling the first day; and of the relief everyone felt when all the groups had reunited, not only from seeing everyone safe, but also from the fact that none had reported seeing or noticing any evidence of pursuit by their would-be captors. She told of passing through the Great Owl’s woods—an intimidating experience for some, both before and after the Owl himself began keeping watch over the procession, until everyone had been reassured that he truly meant to ensure their safe passage through the woods. She described how she and Jolene, Sullivan’s widow, and their children comforted one another over their losses.

All this and more Nicodemus listened to with the attentiveness of an eager pupil. As the story drew to a close, both finally noticed it was well after sunset, and the moon had already risen above the opposite horizon. As the two made their way back downstairs, Nicodemus knew there were many stories to be told, and that he was looking forward to meeting with everyone personally and hearing as many of those stories as possible.

Chapter 21 - The first day winds down

On ground level the moon soon became visible above the east rim of Freethorn; and as this day drew to a close, this day that had brought so much change to so many, two that had been especially affected by it were taking a stroll in the south meadow. They quickly took notice as the moonlight spilled across the sward, turning to look upon its source, as if in anticipation.

“So, Lilia…do you really think it’s the moon that made the difference?”

“It…did feel like it, almost. It seems a little silly now, but…” She paused as she seemed to give it her undivided attention.

“So…do you feel any different now?” asked Ellis after about a minute.

“No…just…just the same as…before.” She looked at him, suddenly looking delighted. “It’s really true, Ellis. I’m not becoming someone else now. It’s…just me now. I’m me!” She sounded near-ecstatic as she rushed to hug him.

“That’s great, Lilia, it really is.” They’d wondered if the change in personality had possibly been triggered by the presence of the full or nearly-full moon, rather than the onset of night. But either way, the point seemed to be academic now, even as Lilia broke away and spun herself around, laughing.

“Oh, Ellis, now I really feel free, like there’s nothing I can’t do.” She made to say more, but suddenly noticed two other mice approaching. She instantly rushed toward them. “Reuben!” she shouted, rushing into her brother’s arms.

Both Reuben and Boris looked at Ellis, bemused, slightly confused; but as Reuben noticed that Lilia seemed to being crying softly on his shoulder, the old familiar look returned to his features: stony, almost accusatory.

Ellis was about to say to him that he hadn’t done anything to make her feel bad; but before he could, Lilia looked up to her brother and said, “Oh, Reuben, I…don’t know whether to laugh or cry. I’ve never been so happy.” She sighed.

It seemed to reassure Reuben, and she and Ellis explained to him and Boris about how her earlier estimation seemed borne out by the onset of night. The four of them sat down, and the three children of Vincent began comparing notes on how this day’s events had affected them.

Reuben reiterated what he’d been discussing with Boris, that he felt less inclined to be protective of Lilia, and more able to let her go her own way and do what she wanted. He would always want her kept safe from harm, of course, but he was sure he’d hereafter be able to keep from overdoing it, and to be aware when he was overdoing it. He was also sure he’d be able to more easily let go of his own reserve, and make friends more easily. Just since he’d been visited by Martin, come down from the Rooftop, and been visiting with Boris and others, he’d proven how possible it was. Seeing Lilia now, with her own renewed, more cheerful and confident outlook, he was all the more certain, since it seemed to confirm his earlier conjecture, that if Lilia were happy and content with her lot in life, he could more easily make changes to his own.

Boris, for his part, felt little changed by the departure of the part of Nicodemus within him. Of course, any visions he would yet have wouldn’t be influenced by Nicodemus’s memories; but he was certain there would always be a great thirst for knowledge within him, as strong as before.

The four of them were soon joined by Seelah, and later several other Rats and Mice; even for a short time by Nicodemus, who was pleased at Reuben and Lilia’s renewed outlook. As the gathering grew, both were surprised at how comfortable and at ease they both felt at being among their fellows—talking, playing games, even laughing and joking.

After some of the others left, Ellis and Lilia told the others they wanted to be alone for a while— “just to talk,” Ellis told Reuben, who gave his approval though cautioning both to be careful. Their moonlight stroll took them around the eastern perimeter and into one of the ground-level observation posts on the east side. They spoke little at first but mainly just enjoyed each other’s company, admiring the starry sky and gazing across the flat plain, which appeared to glow slightly in the moonlight. Lilia again mentioned how much she wanted to see for herself what was “out there,” sounding more hopeful than a few days ago about the eventuality of such a journey. Ellis promised that when the time came, he would definitely accompany her. He described some of what he’d been told of Lahaikshe, and she said how much she looked forward to resume attending classes tomorrow—something both she and Reuben had neglected in the past two days—and was sure he’d be just as willing to join her.

Before long they decided to call it a night. On the way back to the Mouse community, they came to another mutual agreement on a subject Ellis was a bit hesitant to bring up, but one that Lilia was, surprisingly, willing to discuss in detail, regarding their moonlight encounter two nights ago. Though both agreed it had been enjoyable and was not something they regretted, they now made a vow of abstinence until they were more certain of their feelings for each other. They knew well the possibility of her being pregnant now from that encounter; and though neither felt quite ready to be parents yet, Ellis promised her he would stand by her all the way if she were, and of course they would receive plenty of guidance in helping them adjust to their new situation.

Back at the colony, they said their goodbyes for the night; and though they both took their vow seriously, it was difficult to part, after all that had been said and done. Neither voiced their reluctance aloud, though; and after parting, both felt some satisfaction at being able to keep it to themselves.

“Words just can’t describe how incredible this day has been, the events we’ve all witnessed. It reminds me of a case I once read about that happened in Jinjidya. It was supposed to be the best-documented case of reincarnation ever. A boy named Shanithphatsura began describing, almost as soon as he could talk, places and things that would seem to be the product of a vivid imagination. But when he claimed to actually know these places, his parents got to wondering; and it was eventually discovered that he was describing real places. When he was brought to them, he went even further, describing people and events also found to be real, and even remembered a name he said he used to answer to. Finally, he met those he claimed were his children and grandchildren in his former life. It created quite a stir, and thought to be a hoax by some; but eventually, after no connection could be found between the boy’s family and his ‘old’ family and town, it was concluded that Shanithphatsura was telling the truth.

“A few years ago I’d never have believed such a tale. But in a way, that experience with Ghormfisk was the best thing that could have happened to me. With everything it led to, it opened my eyes to so much, so many possibilities. Some of us had, over the years, made contact with other beings that are much different than Rusay in appearance, but we’d generally assumed they were simply from uncharted lands. But different worlds? After my experiences with Gwinthrayle and Johnathan, I know beyond any doubt that it’s true.

“And now this—the Rats’ former leader, Nicodemus, returned to them in a completely different body. Though this gives him much in common with Shanithphatsura and those other celebrated cases of reincarnation, so much is different. He planned this, though it didn’t quite turn out as he wanted. Who can imagine what it was like to have had an existence like he had up till today? And now alive again, in this new body. He says he will give it up to its rightful owner after two weeks, but I can’t help but wonder if he’ll be that sure when the time comes. I guess it’s not my place to speculate, though; his old friends know him better, and it’ll be his decision. Some do want him to stay, and others want him to be able to help Rollo without his leaving. Maybe he will find a way; a lot can happen in two weeks.”

Since his return, he’d been on the go almost nonstop, hardly pausing for so much as a minute’s rest. But though he certainly felt the need for sleep now, and was even looking forward to it, he found himself lingering in front of the full-length mirror in the quarters provided for him. It was the first real chance he’d had to examine this body closely, and in spite of himself, he couldn’t curb the fascination his current physical state held for him. He turned from side to side, examining as much of himself as he could. Though this body was thinner and leaner than that of most mice—a situation which would no doubt be alleviated soon, what with the abundance and variety of foodstuffs he was being treated to here—it was otherwise the picture of health, young and in its prime. Such a contrast with the old one: not only a different species entirely, but frail and lame, barely able to walk without the aid of his staff, his mind subject to frequent lapses in judgment and memory, made worse by Uhrstegg’s tampering. But now, though this present situation was what he’d hoped for once he’d determined how to change his previous one, he still couldn’t get over this fascination of the fact that he was now in charge of this body. As he ran hands over it, it seemed as if anything were possible, that there was nothing he could not do now. Thoughts and desires he’d not had in seeming ages were coming to the fore, and he was filled with a resolve that he would fulfill and satisfy all of them in the two weeks that—

Suddenly he clenched his eyes shut, and his hands ceased their wandering. He opened his eyes and shook his head rapidly. He sighed and walked over to the bed, settling into it after turning off the lamp. He stared upward into the dark, wondering how he could have let himself forget so easily. You’re only a tenant in this body, Nicodemus, he told himself. You shouldn’t allow yourself to think this way. Then again, he countered, perhaps I’m being too hard on myself. He laughed softly; after all, he’d certainly expected there to be moments like this.

Perhaps it would be best to concentrate on his plans for tomorrow, he thought. He expected to pay more lengthy visits to the various workshops in the colony, and in particular spend some time with Ages and his staff. He’d only had a cursory introduction to the medical department, and was interested in seeing how it was organized and run, since it had been built from the ground up after the Move; in addition to fulfilling his promise that he’d submit to a full physical exam. There’d been further changes since Jessica added her own experience and knowledge, especially in the area of organically-extracted potions and solutions, some of which overlapped in areas already explored by Ages, and some which were new discoveries. There were many more stories to be told, of course, and he was looking forward to hearing all of them; it should be quite a full day.

With that thought, Nicodemus turned on his side and prepared to slip away into slumber, a delicious sensation he looked forward to experiencing after so long. And yet, there were still thoughts that impeded the progress of sleep—and foremost among them were those centering upon one person. He remembered how, during the telling of his own story, his eyes continually met Jessica’s; and then later, during the last, brief council meeting, there was that same repeated eye contact. Was it his imagination, or was there something there, some silent message between them? Certainly she’d been no less attentive, and interested in hearing his story as anyone there; but he just couldn’t shake the feeling that they’d made some kind of connection. In the brief time that they’d spoken to each other, she seemed to look forward to seeing him again; but was it any more or less than what everyone else expressed to him? He’d been roundly welcomed by everyone here; anyone who’d spoken to him had said how good it was to have him among them again, both those who’d known him from his old life, and the children and new residents meeting him for the first time.

Maybe it was his imagination; yes, it could very easily be. He breathed in deep; Let’s just sleep on it, he decided. Yet, even as he felt his consciousness slip away, an image came to him: a picture of grace, beauty and intelligence personified. Yes, he very much looked forward to seeing her tomorrow. The realization jolted him wide awake; and before eventually drifting off completely, his thoughts returned again and again to her…

All across Freethorn, nearly everyone paused to take stock of the events of this day. For some, especially those who had known him before, it was for the extraordinary fact of Nicodemus’s resurrection; to others, it was the all-too-brief span of time he would spend among them; to still others, it was the confusing but fascinating nature of his return; to one small group, it was knowing that when it was over, they would be gaining a brother. All these groups, though, were aware that for many others the same event would signal the loss—again—of a beloved ex-leader and friend.

Some in that group were presently in the midst of their almost-nightly socializing. Melvin and Judith and their children were with Arthur and Melinda and their children in the latter family’s quarters, with Melvin engaged in a game of “hide and spook”—hide-and-seek played in pitch darkness—with the older children. Melvin was currently “it” and now feeling his way around gingerly, groping about almost blindly but not too abruptly so as to not knock anything over. At one point he heard a giggle directly in front of him, followed by small footsteps dashing away, out of his reach. “I’ll get you, Lysette!” he growled; then he fell totally silent, tiptoeing to one end of the room, alert to the faintest sound.

Then, abruptly, another small figure crept out, directly in front of Melvin, brushing up against his leg. There was a yelp of surprise, and in a flash, he’d grabbed the interloper by the arm. “Gotcha, Kyle!” he proclaimed triumphantly as he wrestled his son to the floor, both of them laughing. “So, I wonder who’s it now?” he asked rhetorically.

“You still are!” another young voice shouted, and the other children charged forward from their hiding places, shouting as they joined in the fray, leaping as one onto Melvin. The game often ended this way, with everyone joining in a noisy free-for-all.

Melinda turned on the lights so that everyone could view the mayhem. Soon everyone was laughing and applauding at the sight of this disciplined Guard rat, one of the first so designated back at the Rosebush, being brought low by seven giggling and shrieking youngsters who obscured him almost completely from sight with their bodies as they clung to him.

Of the other three adults, Arthur was laughing the loudest. Melinda and Judith looked at each other and smiled before Judith left for the other room to pour some tea for everyone. Melinda hugged and kissed Arthur, as always gratified to see how easily her husband could allow himself to relax and unwind these days. He was still every bit Freethorn’s highly dedicated chief engineer, committed to maintaining the colony’s infrastructure; but since his marriage to Melinda, there were far fewer remarks about work being his hobby.

Shortly after Melvin finished peeling the last child from his person, it was apparent that the night’s festivities were just about over, at least for the children, most of whom were already yawning. Except for Melvin and Judith’s youngest two, Ford and Hollis, they were all soon prepared for bed right there in Arthur and Melinda’s quarters; sleepovers were very common with these children. Afterwards, the adults settled down to discuss the events of this day.

“With only two weeks left, he’ll be awfully busy,” said Arthur. “Places to see, things to do…If I knew I had only so much time left, I don’t know if I could even think about anything but.”

“It is what he wanted,” added Melvin. “He knew what he was getting himself into.”

“Yes, he did…” said Melinda, sounding disconcerted. She looked over to her nephews Ford and Hollis curled up asleep on the couch between her and Melvin.

“Anything wrong, Min?” asked Arthur. But Melvin already had a good idea about what was bothering his sister.

“Oh, no, no,” she said quickly. “It’s just…can we talk about something else?”

Judith returned bearing a tray of teacups. “I thought you were happy to have Nicodemus back with us, Melinda,” she said as she set the tray down.

“I am, but…” She sighed. “Can we please talk about something else?”

Melvin almost suggested that he and Judith should probably be leaving soon, but instead he carefully switched places with Ford and Hollis without waking them so he could sit beside Melinda. He placed his arm around her shoulders. “Come on, Sis, you can’t fool me. What’s up?”

Melinda sighed again, smiling and shaking her head. She and her brothers Melvin and George had always confided in each other from an early age, especially after they’d been estranged from their father. Deciding that there was no cause for this matter to be an exception, she answered, “I’m sorry, I don’t want to bring this whole evening down. But there’s just something about his being here that bothers me. Well, actually, it’s not so much Nicodemus, it’s…I guess, just that he’s here, and someone else…isn’t.” She took a sip of tea.

Melvin and Arthur looked at each other, nodding. “Your father,” Arthur said quietly.

“They both died that day, and…I know it’s irrational, but…it just seems unfair, that Nicodemus can be here and Jenner can’t. Especially since he’d probably be free of Uhrstegg’s influence now. There’ve been so many times I’d wished he were here to see all we’ve done, and how successful the Thorn Valley Plan was.”

“I know, Min,” said Melvin, stroking her shoulder. “I believe that, and I know Mom and George do, too.” Judith gave her agreement as well.

“And let’s not count out this old Rat, either,” said Arthur with a laugh. “It may have been Jenner’s opposition to the Plan that led to Uhrstegg getting his hooks in him; but I knew him from the beginning, so I have no doubt either.” He kissed Melinda on the cheek.

“I just know that he’d be happy here, especially now,” maintained Melinda. “He never would have wanted to do something so crazy as to attack humans, not without Uhrstegg’s influence. I just know that he would want us to live as we do now, without any trouble from them, or the possibility of it.”

“Maybe all of you could get together tomorrow, and talk it over,” suggested Judith.

“I guess so. Mother especially would understand.”

“Sounds like a plan,” said Arthur. “In fact, you could even talk it over with Nicodemus as well.” Noting Melinda’s surprised expression, he added, “Believe me, he’d understand. Don’t forget that he and Jenner go back further than anyone else here. Justin told me that he’d spoken at some length earlier today about how much he missed your father. So it’s a loss both of you definitely share.”

Melinda said she’d sleep on it, and the conversation then turned to lighter fare. Before too much longer all were ready to call it a night. After looking in on Spencer, Mia, Cecilia and Kyle one more time, Melvin and Judith bid their hosts good night, taking Ford and Hollis with them.

Chapter 22 - Propositions and plans

Though he’d been shown the medical department yesterday, it was really only a cursory look. He’d wanted to see as much as he could the first day, but he knew there’d be enough time to see certain parts of Freethorn—and beyond—more in depth. Now, as promised, Ages, Bernadette, Jessica and the rest of the medical staff were showing Nicodemus the facilities in much greater depth.

First, as he'd promised, he submitted to the physical exam, conducted by Ages and Bernadette. For the most part, they were all business, asking him plenty of questions about how well he and Rollo had taken care of this body; and when they’d finished, they were quite impressed, pronouncing him the picture of good health, though, as noted, slightly underfed.

With the exam complete, Nicodemus complimented his hosts on how well-organized the department was on first blush; and as the full tour got underway, he was fascinated by the accounts of each new advancement. There were many anecdotes of how certain powders, potions, salves, and other methods of treatment were discovered and applied. Ages grew visibly excited as he described how they’d only scratched the surface of what was yet to be discovered—in many ways other than medically—here on Lahaikshe, and how many experiments had been already conducted utilizing native plants. He described in detail how Kimball had been treated after he’d stumbled half-dead into Thorn Valley, as well as how others were treated for more routine ailments and minor injuries. Overall, they explained, none of their number had ever been laid up with any really serious illness, either on Earth or Lahaikshe. This was attributed mainly to the overall robust health the original Rats and Mice had enjoyed while captives at NIMH, and which had been maintained since through the increased knowledge of those practices and habits that are conducive to good health and those that are not. A certain amount of good luck was a factor, too, of course; but since moving to Lahaikshe, there was an overall feeling, almost to an individual, that everyone would enjoy excellent health for the rest of his or her days. It was generally agreed that this feeling derived from the increased senses of freedom and not having to hide that prevailed these days.

But there was more to it, some felt. Jessica described how she and some others had experienced dreams which were all hard to describe as far as visual details go, but which all had one thing in common: “It was like an overriding, all-embracing feeling of security, that someone was watching over us and taking care of us, and always would be.”

The conversation continued with conjecture of how significant, if at all, this was to them; but to Nicodemus, her words struck a responsive chord within him, something he himself couldn’t put into words, but which endeared her to him greatly. It reinforced the idea that there was some connection there, and he resolved silently to discuss it with her in private later on. For now, he brushed the matter aside.

The discussion soon turned to another important matter, that of aging. Though it was still far too early to tell, it seemed likely that everyone here could look forward to a life as long as that of humans, or close, or even possibly longer; with the exception of most of the natural rats and mice among them, all of whom were very aware of the situation and had seemed to accept it pretty well. It had been observed as far back as the Rosebush colony that some of the children grew and matured at different rates than others, some more quickly than what was by now considered the norm, and others more slowly. It was actually fairly common for some children to reach sexual and emotional maturity ahead of their peers. For growth in physical stature, the most remarkable case was Brutus. Nicodemus recalled how most of that growth was from a spurt that began shortly after Johnathan left them; over the next six months, he was nearly half-again his previous weight. Ages remarked on how Johnathan, upon returning from his ten-month absence, did an open-mouthed double-take upon seeing Brutus, disbelieving that he’d grown so huge.

As the discussion continued, it soon became far less “talking shop” and more a simple get-together of friends and acquaintances. Though Nicodemus genuinely enjoyed passing the time this way, other matters were still very much on his mind; and when the others needed to go on to other duties, he lost no time. He asked Jessica if she would come with him to some place they could talk privately. She agreed, saying that what she was about to do could easily wait, and inwardly curious about his purpose. On their way out, they paused to chat briefly with Cynthia, who was busy with some mixing and blending, taking time to compliment her on what a fine and talented young lady she’d become, before heading out into the corridor.

In their wake, Cynthia couldn’t help thinking back to his arrival, only a day ago, in which she’d helped with his dip treatment, and how it contrasted with how he was now: the same mouse, but also so much more. She found herself wondering what he and Jessica could possibly need to talk privately about. She quickly dismissed it as the workings of her imagination, fueled, no doubt, by recent developments in her own love life. She briefly paused in her work, sighing as she thought of getting together with Michael after work.

The two walked the Rat community’s corridors, comparing notes on their first impressions of the place, until they reached an out-of-the-way corridor that still didn’t see much traffic. After they sat down on a bench, though, there was a moment of awkward silence. “Well,” began Nicodemus, “so here we are.”

“Yes, so we are.” Jessica gave a small laugh.

Nicodemus appeared ready to say more, then looked away. He laughed, shaking his head. “Jessica, my dear, I had every confidence that I’d be able to…directly address the matter I’d wished to discuss, but…”

“It’s all right, Nicodemus. You can say anything to me.” She placed her hand on his. “It’s not something too painful or embarrassing, is it?”

“No, I suppose not. If I could sum it up …” He sighed. “Oh, I should just come right out with it. I’ve piqued your curiosity enough. Well…as you know, in my…previous life, I had grown more aged, more lame, nearly infirm, due to factors that I have never precisely pinpointed. Another facet to this condition was that I had all but lost any…mating urges, any desire to have a lifemate, or scarcely any need or desire for closeness or intimacy with another. For the last…three years or so, it was hardly an issue with me at all. Otherwise, I certainly would have made a domestic life with Anna and Brutus, as I was telling her last evening.

“But now…here, in this new body, I find myself feeling things, seeing things as never before. Thoughts, desires I was sure I’d not know again are very much on my mind, very strong. I have resolved that, in the little time I have left, I would satisfy them.”

Jessica nodded thoughtfully. “And…this is where I come in?”

Nicodemus again turned away, almost hiding his face in his hands before again facing her directly. “Oh, I know this is horribly presumptuous of me. It’s just that…when I saw you yesterday, all the while I was telling my story, I thought…there was something there between you and me. And among the Mice, you are one of the few females who isn’t…currently mated to another. I know it hasn’t been that long since your—Harley, that was your man’s name, wasn’t it?—since he died. As I said, horribly presumptuous; I wouldn’t blame you if you—”

Jessica quietly interrupted him by holding up her hand. “It’s all right, Nicodemus, I told you you can tell me anything. And I’m not offended. In fact, I’m flattered that you think of me that way. And I can understand how…there really wasn’t any other way to bring this up other than just…coming right out with it.”

“Jessica, I’m so glad you understand. I guess, then, you know what my next question would be.”

“Well…” She breathed in deep. “As I said, I’m flattered, and…since Harley died, I’ve never really been…intimate with anyone. Still…”

“I’ve no wish to put undue pressure on you, Jessica. I knew this was a matter you would need to give more thought to—though I will understand if you say no.”

“Well, I haven’t said no…yet. But I know you’ll need a definite answer before too long.”

“Yes, quite. Well…I’ll leave you now to think it over.” Nicodemus gave Jessica a quick hug and bid her farewell; and, feeling the need to be outside, he headed for the main entrance. Just outside, he paused to gaze upward at the partly-cloudy sky, thinking back to last night and the awareness of his current physicality that had come upon him so quickly. He hoped fervently that he hadn’t erred in making this offer to Jessica; he knew very well what her agreeing to it could lead to. But no, he decided, he’d come this far. It had been so long—too long—since he’d had a young, healthy body, he only had 13 days; and, when all’s said and done, he’d earned this, after all he’d been through. He was well aware of the risks, that he could be getting himself into something that might make him reconsider his pledge to Rollo and make him more reluctant to leave this new life. But it was, at best, a borrowed life, after all. He’d have to keep on reminding himself that he was only a tenant in this body. He resolved to put the matter aside until Jessica gave her answer, since he had quite a full schedule today, including a meeting with Matilda, Melinda, George and Melvin this evening. Perhaps I’ll have to start keeping an appointment book, he thought to himself as he headed back to the Mouse community.

On the way, he heard himself being paged. He turned to see a rat and mouse approach. He had to search his memory for a moment; there were still so many reacquaintances to be made, and though he could remember everyone’s name and face in his old life, many who were children were adults now.

“Ah, Tara! Daughter of Derek and Claire! And you must be…Bertram Davis, of course. A pleasure to meet you at last.” He shook hands with both.

“Thanks, Nicodemus. And call me Bertie, everybody does…’cept my folks.”

“Of course, Bertie. And Tara…ah, what a spirited and willful child you were. I always knew you’d grow to become a rat of unique and special talents. I’ve heard much of your prowess as a swimmer and how at home you are in the water.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus. I guess you’ve heard…other unique things about me…and Bertie.”

“Oh, yes: your relationship with each other. I needn’t ask, then, what you need to discuss…” The three sat down on a nearby flat rock in the shade as Nicodemus told them how he’d been told the basics of how apparent controversy over the affair of these seemingly-mismatched lovers had led to a general meeting to determine whether there was a genuine problem. Bertie and Tara described for him now in greater detail those events.

“And now…” said Tara after they’d finished, “there’s still some things we’re not sure about.”

“We thought we’d worked everything out between us pretty thoroughly,” added Bertie, “but in the past few days, there’s just…I don’t know, I guess things aren’t as clear as we thought.”

“We hoped that…well, you’d have some kind of…insight, I guess,” said Tara a bit tentatively.

“I’ll endeavor to do my best, my friends,” Nicodemus said cheerily.

“I guess it’s mainly that…well, we do love each other as much as any other couple,” Tara continued. “Our feelings are real, of that we have no doubt. But it feels…well, biological as well. It’s as much a physical attraction as with anyone else. So why would it come upon us? A rat and a mouse?”

“It definitely feels like a biological urge, let me tell you,” said Bertie with a sly wink.

“Don’t get him started,” said Tara with a laugh. “I practically have to fight the little maniac off sometimes.” They nudged and pushed each other playfully.

After allowing himself a chuckle, Nicodemus said, “It does sound as if we may have another mystery on our hands. It’s possible that it’s a natural result of the fact that our species are equals in emotion and intelligence: an emotional bond becoming a physical one.”

“But if it’s like a mating urge, for propagating the species, then why us?” said Tara. “We can’t have kids together, so why’d we get…pulled together like this?”

“Sure, it feels real and good and natural for both of us,” added Bertie, “but…yeah, like she said. Why us?”

“Well, as I said, it may be another mystery to be solved; but just since my return, I’ve already heard of many, many discoveries that have made about us in my absence, to add to those made during my previous lifetime. Different talents, abilities…it seems that where we’re concerned, the possibilities are practically endless.”

“I’ve been learning that,” said Bertie. “Me and all my sibs, since we got here. But where do we fit in?”

“I know you approached me hoping for definite answers, but all I can tell you is…to follow your hearts, and perhaps you’ll find the answers you seek in time. And I can tell you’ve also been wondering…what I think about your being together. I will admit it’s unusual, but there are endless possibilities, and it’s the height of absurdity to think of such a development as…not normal. What is normal or abnormal where we’re concerned, after all?” Nicodemus chuckled. “As I said, follow your hearts. If your feelings are genuine, you won’t be steered wrong.”

Tara and Bertie looked at each other, smiling and nodding.

“I must also commend you on the courage and determination you’ve shown in the face of opposition.”

“Thanks, Nicodemus,” said Tara. “But we don’t really think courage came into it at all. We were just trying to make things work between us, just like anyone else.”

Nicodemus smiled. “As you wish. Well…I hope I’ve been of help to you. I have other commitments now, but I’m sure we will talk again.”

“I hope so,” said Tara as she and Bertie got to their feet. “I’ve got a swim class to get to now, but we’re looking forward to talking again.”

“Yeah,” agreed Bertie. “By the way, I heard you’ll be going over to…whatshisname, Gwinthrayle’s place for a visit.”

“Why, yes, two days hence. I know there are many here who haven’t seen it yet. Are you interested in coming along?”

“I was thinking about it, and I know some others who’d be interested too, if it’s okay.”

“Well, I hadn’t thought much about having an entourage on my visit, but now…yes, it’s a splendid idea. And I’ve been told that Gwinthrayle isn’t averse to hosting several individuals at a time. He’ll have to be notified in advance, of course, but I’m sure he’ll be agreeable.”

“Yeah, I hope so. What d’you think, Tara?”

“That might be fun. I’m sure I can get Lothar or Jarman to cover for me for a couple of days. I really have to get going now, but I’ll give it some thought.”

“Cool. And I’ll get the word spread.”

Nicodemus bid the young lovers adieu and left to meet his next scheduled appointment.

Alma Ages sat at the cove’s edge, with toes dipped in the water, along with several others who watched today’s swim class come to a close. Some of the instructors were staying there to watch over those students who wished to stay after class to play and frolic. Alma’s two oldest children, Regina and Turlough, were among them, and were most eager to demonstrate for their mother what they’d learned this week. Alma wasn’t always able to meet them as they finished class for the day, so now she watched with delight as they swam, dove, floated on their backs or just splashed the afternoon away. She noted the diversity of the group, especially how greatly the Rusay children, with their smooth, bare, pale blue skins, contrasted in appearance with the mouse and rat children. She thought back to the general meeting two days ago, and couldn’t understand how anyone could harbor any kind of resentment toward those not of “their own kind,” especially when they all had so much in common. Certainly the scene before her now proved that beyond a doubt; just look at the good times these children can all have together. And it certainly made things more interesting than if there were all rats or all mice here.

She continued watching the aquatic games, laughing and applauding as one of the Rusay adults, Morobphra, acted as a living diving board for Turlough and Regina, holding them up in his outstretched arms and giving each a little flip; though Jarman cautioned against their showing off too much.

Presently Tara came by, and the two chatted for a bit; then Tara said that while she usually would stick around a while longer after class, she was feeling a bit out of sorts and wanted to go home and rest. She excused herself and left.

After about fifteen more minutes, Alma called for her children to come on out, as it was close to dinnertime. As she helped them dry off, they talked excitedly about their day. Turlough expressed a bit of jealousy at Regina’s greater progress in their lessons; but Alma, not wishing to show favoritism, assured her eldest son that before he knew it, he’d be as far along as his twin sister.

After chatting with Morobphra and Miatati for a few minutes, the children got dressed and they and Alma adjourned to the dining hall. Ages met them on the way in the corridor.

“Daddy! You should have seen me today!” said Regina breathlessly as she and Turlough ran up to greet their father. “I swam all the way out to the diving dock and back, an’ held my breath underwater for almost two minutes, and—”

“—and I dived all the way to the bottom,” cut in Turlough, “and pulled up some weeds to show everyone I did it!”

Ages laughed, hugging his two eldest offspring. “All right, I know you both did splendidly.” He reminded them that they were to meet their younger siblings at the dining hall, after Madeline Brisby had been looking after them for the last two hours. Regina and Turlough dashed ahead of them.

As their parents watched them race off, Alma said, “Oh, Cyril, I’m so proud of how they’ve turned out; how all our children have turned out.”

“So am I. But I don’t know why Regina needs to be so…self-centered and wanting all the attention, in spite of our not playing favorites with any of them.”

“It’s probably just a phase. Madeline tells me Martin was rather like that, and he grew out of it.”

“Well, we can always hope,” Cyril said lightly. He paused to kiss Alma; and as they proceeded down the hall, he added, “You know, dear…Nicodemus was saying to me this morning about how much…I had changed since he’d last seen me, and it started me thinking about…well, a lot of things…”

“I have too, since he came. In fact…” Alma paused as they entered the dining hall, where they immediately saw Celia, Paul and Milo waving exuberantly from the table reserved for them and the Brisby family, some of whom were already there.

As they waved back, Cyril said to Alma quietly, “I think this is a discussion we can save for later.” Alma agreed, and they proceeded to the end of the line.

Once they’d reached their table, they were pleased to see that Nicodemus was joining them. Subsequent conversation was kept light, mostly concerning plans for the next few days; and in particular his upcoming visit to Gwinthrayle’s home. The younger children were especially interested in hearing about his invitation to have more than just Nicodemus as a guest, and it didn’t take long before some of them, especially Lyndon and Shawna, were all but begging their parents to be included. They just told them, for now, that they’d think it over.

After dinner and some more socializing, Cyril and Alma finally had a moment alone after the children had gone elsewhere to play. For his part, he couldn’t help feeling somewhat relieved. It wasn’t because of the absence of his children; everyone knew how devoted he was to them. But for all that his life had changed these past two years, he still preferred the company of a few over many. So now, he and his wife sat together on their living room sofa, each curious to hear what the other had to say before their earlier conversation was interrupted before it had truly begun.

Ages went first. “Well…Alma, Nicodemus just basically said…what you’d probably expect, that he’d never expected me to become this…settled into this new life; domesticated was the word he used, rather ironic choice when you think about it. Anyway, I realized it had been a while since I’d given the matter much thought. I’ve pretty much taken each day as it came, and hadn’t really done much comparing. But now…when I think about how different my life was then, I…wonder how I could have been satisfied. It’s so much better, a…fuller life I have now, and it’s you I have to thank for it. And the children…why, the very thought of my being a father would have been absurd. I said words to that effect to Johnathan on more than one occasion, but now it seems like the most…right and natural thing to be. Alma, I do love you; I know I don’t say it often enough, but…you do know that, don’t you?”

Alma laughed gently. “Of course, Cyril, and you don’t have to say it at all. You do so much else that tells me that, and more.” In spite of that, she knew it wasn’t always this easy for him to be this forthcoming, even with her, and would treasure the moment. She kissed him, and they embraced and sat quietly for a moment; but when she pulled back to face him again, her smile had faded a bit.

Ages adjusted his spectacles, frowning. “Alma? Is something wrong?”

“Oh, Cyril, after all you’ve said, I hate to make you feel bad, but…”

“But what?”

She sighed. “It’s just that…hearing how Nicodemus has to leave us so soon, it reminded me that my time left will probably be shorter than yours, and…” She sighed again.

“Oh, Alma, I didn’t realize…I thought both of us had accepted it pretty well all along. I didn’t know it was causing you so much worry.”

“Well, actually, it’s not that so much that I’ve been thinking of. When I do go, I want you to…find someone else, and settle down with her. I want you to be happy, Cyril, and go on with your life.”

Ages was speechless for a moment. “Well, I…uhrr…I don’t know what to say…”

“Jessica, maybe. She and you get along pretty well, you work together…”

“Whoa, girl, we’re getting too far ahead of ourselves here. We do work well together, and I do like her, but…let’s take this a bit more slowly, shall we? Don’t get me wrong, I know you have my best interests in mind.”

“I do, but…I guess I shouldn’t have put so much on you so soon. But you will think about it, won’t you?”

“Yes, yes, of course. Remember that we have to consider what she wants as well.”

“I know. I was just using Jessica as an example.”

Ages knew this, but he was nonetheless reminded of how, during Nicodemus’s visit to medical, it almost seemed as if… No, it must be his imagination. Jessica was no more or less friendly or forthcoming to Nicodemus than anyone else. And surely, with his time so short, as everyone was well aware… No, the very notion is absurd. And yet, because his time is so short, there are many things he’d want to do and accomplish…

“What are you thinking now, Cyril?”

“Er, nothing, dear. Nothing at all.” He kissed her lightly, and Alma knew he would say no more on the subject, though he clearly had something on his mind. She knew well his dislike for discussing matters that had no solid basis in fact, and that was very likely the case here.

“Please, Mom, pleeeeze? I promise I’ll be good, I’ll do what the grownups tell me, I’ll be real quiet, I—I won’t say anything, I’ll be…uh…tactful! Yeah, that’s it, I’ll be real tactful! I won’t make fun o’ Tim ’n’ Lucy anymore! C’mon, Mom, please? Say yes?”

Madeline Brisby looked down at her next-to-youngest son on the floor, almost prostrate and clinging to her ankles; nearby, Johnathan could barely conceal his amusement at the spectacle. She couldn’t help feeling the same, but she was also touched by Lyndon’s eagerness to please and how excited he was at the prospect of going on this trip. She reached down to help him up. “Oh, Lyndon, you don’t have to beg like this. But we do have to know a few things first. Timothy, who else is going besides Nicodemus and you and Lucy?”

“Well, let’s see…so far, Bertie and Tara are definite; Tara’s niece and nephew, Susanna and Marcus; Ellis, most likely, and he’s going to ask Lilia and probably Reuben, too; even Kimball’s considering it, ’cause he hasn’t really been out of Freethorn at all.”

Johnathan nodded. “Well, Gwinthrayle was very receptive to the idea, but would prefer the number not go over 25.” Earlier in the day, shortly after Johnathan got wind of the idea of Nicodemus having others accompany him on his visit, he used the Stone to take him to the sorcerer’s abode to get his approval.

“Well, they’re passing the word that it shouldn’t be too high a number,” said Timothy, “and that it’ll be first-come, first-serve. Somebody’s bound to get turned away.”

“But not me, right? Right?” Lyndon looked back and forth between his parents anxiously.

“Welll…there’ll certainly be plenty of adult supervision…”

“Sure, anything, Dad. Just lemme go, please?”

“What do you think, Maddie? He is asking us really nicely…”

“Well…if you promise to behave, Lyndon...brush your teeth, get to bed on time, do what the grownups tell you…”

“I promise, Mom, I promise!” He danced about like he needed to relieve himself.

His parents looked at each other, smiling. They didn’t want to appear to give in too easily, but now both knew it was time to let Lyndon off the hook. “Well…all right,” said Johnathan. Madeline accompanied with an approving nod.

Lyndon jumped and shouted with glee, thanking his parents profusely and giving each a big hug. They reminded him that the trip wouldn’t be until the day after tomorrow, so he shouldn’t get too excited about it now, though they could hardly blame him. They knew he’d been anticipating any trip away from usual surroundings, ever since they were still in Thorn Valley; and that he’d been a little peeved when Martin couldn’t fulfill the promise he’d made, just before Lambert’s and his sojourn outside the valley, that he’d take Lyndon along on a future trip out. He didn’t resent Martin for that, but everyone still hoped this trip would make up for it.

Elsewhere, there were varying degrees of excitement over the impending trip; and nearby was one at least as strong as in the Brisby home, as Ellis brought the matter to Lilia and Reuben’s attention. Predictably, Lilia was beside herself, giving Ellis several hugs in between leaping and dancing about. Reuben’s reaction was more restrained, but he was very interested in coming along, too; and not just to play chaperone, Ellis guessed.

Nicodemus yawned as he removed his clothing and stretched out on the bed, thoughts filled with the day’s events. And what a full day this had been, starting with the medical tour, but marked largely by the stories—a seemingly unending succession of them. He especially found engaging the tales related by the newest Mouse residents. Though he’d had glimpses of their lives over the years while “looking out”, he was pleased to hear more about them from the sources. And they were far from over; he looked forward to hearing more about Marie’s globe-trotting adventures, and more about Johnathan’s “exile” on Lahaikshe. The Rats too, of course; though their experiences were for the most part shared, there were many individual slants on many stories.

There were more sumptuous meals eaten at the dining hall, including a few delicacies native to this world; time spent with the community’s children, giving them “living history” lessons at Thorn Valley School; and even a visit to the clothiers, where he came away with a few more outfits in addition to the one he’d been given yesterday. While they were crisp and new, they weren’t as fancy as what some might expect him to choose, though one of them was a robe styled much like his old one, which he’d worn most of the day.

Most fresh in his mind was the meeting with Matilda, Melinda, George and Melvin, family of his oldest friend, Jenner, and their spouses. He told many anecdotes, some of which even Matilda hadn’t heard before, of their early days together; and Melinda told him how it was her idea for them all to meet like this, an idea prompted by the feeling, which she admitted was irrational, that it was unfair that Nicodemus could have returned to life and not Jenner. Her mother and brothers admitted to feeling the same way, to a small degree. Nicodemus assured them it was perfectly understandable; and that he wished as much, if not more, that Jenner could still be with them. Matilda also brought up how discussion at the general meeting two days ago had led her to wonder, all over again, what Jenner would have done without Uhrstegg’s influence. Nicodemus told her he was certain that Jenner, at worst, would have left the colony, or might even have agreed grudgingly to the Plan and be pleased at the colony’s subsequent progress. All in all, it was quite a satisfying discussion.

As his thoughts returned to present concerns, he briefly remembered that there were only so many days left to him; then he again reminded himself of his vow to concentrate on each day’s activities, take them one at a time. He had every intention of enjoying his remaining time as much as possible, and there was no room to dwell on how short it was. He yawned again and drew a single blanket over himself, looking forward to the sensation of falling asleep again.

Ultimately, just before nodding off, his thoughts returned, as they had repeatedly this day, to Jessica and what they’d discussed. He hoped she wouldn’t be long in giving a definite answer. He still couldn’t completely shake the idea that his proposal was too presumptuous or even wrong, but again he decided he wouldn’t dwell on the matter. The deed had been done, and all he could do was to wait for results.

An hour or so after sleep overtook him, the dreams began again. He was leading the Rats away from possible human discovery, in a setting that was at once earthly, with very normal-appearing buildings, and unearthly, with bizarrely-shaped formations that seemed neither of stone nor plant. Abruptly, he was in his old Rosebush office again, where he walked over to his viewing device. Only mist could be seen within it at first, then his own reflection as he was in the final days of his previous life. This shifted into an image of Rollo, at first looking to one side, then turning to face him and smiling broadly—almost, it seemed, to himself as much as to his one-time teacher.

Abruptly, he awoke, immediately sensing the presence of another in the room. He started to call out “Who’s there?” but then gave a start as he saw her, sitting in the chair at the side of the bed, smiling down upon him. “Jessica? What are you—” He interrupted his question as he realized that there could only be one reason for her presence here and now.

“I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to wake you. It’s just…well, I gave it a lot of thought, what we discussed, and I thought I should tell you right away. I know you were concerned about…well, being presumptuous and all, and…I understand your feelings, but…I also understand your needs.”

“Well, I…do appreciate your telling me, Jessica,” said Nicodemus as he reached out to touch her hand. “So…what have you…er, decided…” He found himself speechless as Jessica removed her robe and draped it over the chair; then she pulled back the cover, climbing into bed beside him. “I…guess I have your answer, then.”

“I guess we…both have needs, don’t we?” Jessica said, smiling warmly. “I am doing this out of kindness, but…well, do you remember what I told you that since Harley died, I…” This time Jessica fell silent, except for a sigh, as Nicodemus stroked the side of her face. She took his hand and kissed his palm.

“I guess, then, that we’re both a bit selfish, no?” he said as they moved still closer to each other. “Humans often write of selfishness as a negative trait, and yet…”

“Aren’t we all, in one degree or another? But when we want something…or someone, and there’s nothing or no one to stand in our way…”

“Why not, indeed.” Nicodemus drew up to her, pressing her close and nuzzling her ear. “Oh, Jessica,” he said breathlessly. “I can’t thank you enough. I just wish…”

She placed a hand over his mouth. He understood perfectly; the time for words had indeed past, to make way for communication of a less verbose variety.

Elsewhere in Freethorn, others were also receiving unexpected visits.

“Thurman?” asked a bleary-eyed Tara after opening her apartment door. “Wha…what’re you doing here? Do you know what time it is?”

“Look, I know it’s late, but this just couldn’t wait. I had to get this off my chest now.”

Tara yawned and sighed. “Oh, all right, come on in.”

After they sat down on her sofa, Thurman said, “I’ll try to make this quick. I’ve been doing a lot of thinking about…you know, the meeting two days ago, and all that led up to it. And, yeah, about the things I said.”

“I already accepted your apology.”

“I know, but…there was more to it, things I didn’t want to say in front of everyone.”

“Like what?”

Thurman breathed in deeply. “Well, like why…I said what I did. I just…I know, everyone said it was just a thoughtless remark, but…I did have something…some reason, and…”

“Thurman, just relax. What are you trying to tell me?”

He sighed again. “I guess…I was jealous. I saw how cozy you ’n’ Bertie were getting, and I’d…well, I guess I thought because you and I had grown up together, and we’d always been pals, that I’d been expecting us to…eventually be more’n that.”

Tara looked away for a moment, unsure of how to reply. “Thurman, I had no idea. You never even hinted that you felt that way about me.”

“I didn’t think I had to...say much of anything. Shows how bright I am, I guess. I mean, we always had some good times together, I guess I thought that you and I…we’d get together, like it’d be the natural next step for us. But then Bertie came along, and…like everyone else, I didn’t think it was serious between you two. But then you guys started telling everyone you are, and…it started to look more and more like I’d…never have a chance with you. I tried to put the whole thing out of my mind, but…I just couldn’t, I got so frustrated, and…well, you heard the results.”

Tara again looked away, expression a mixture of sympathy and confusion. “Thurman, I…I don’t know what to say.”

“Well, then…I guess I’ve said all I need to.” He stood up. “I’ll let you get to sleep now. G’night.” He headed for the door.

When he was halfway through, Tara said, “Thurman, wait. Let’s…there is more I want to say.”

Thurman turned, closing the door, finding it hard to conceal his delight that she had called him back.

Chapter 23 - The third day

Nicodemus awoke first. He stretched limbs and yawned, again relishing these physical sensations that he’d been so long denied. He immediately recalled the previous night, and turned to look upon Jessica, curled up and slumbering beside him, looking positively angelic. For a few minutes, he simply gazed upon her admiringly as he remembered the passion they’d shared; then he began wondering how he could properly thank her for her kindness and generosity. She didn’t have to do this, after all, and she knew there was some risk involved—a risk he shared in full, but of which both were very much aware beforehand. With the time he had left in this body, it certainly wouldn’t do to develop a deeper emotional attachment. He sighed. Perhaps that was all the more reason not to give too much thought to remuneration. Perhaps it would be enough for both of them that she’d agreed to spend a night of physical love with him, and that would be the end of it.

Presently Jessica awoke and exchanged good-mornings with Nicodemus. For a brief moment he thought he detected a glimmer of something like regret; then the moment passed, and they conversed quietly for a few minutes, mostly small talk, not directly addressing last night or what it meant to them. Then, as she rose from the bed, she said, “Well...I promised Marie and Newell I’d meet them for breakfast, so…”

“Oh, yes…and your children? Oh, that’s right, they slept over with friends.”

“And they’ll be there, too. So…I guess I’ll be getting ready to go now…”

“Of course. May I join you?”

Jessica was mildly surprised. “I…guess it would be all right.”

“I sense misgivings. If you think, for whatever reason, that we not arrive together…”

“Oh, it’s not that. Well…not much. I mean, I don’t feel that last night was wrong at all. But…I guess I didn’t think too thoroughly of how everyone else would react to…you and me.”

“I understand. And if you prefer it be kept between us, then no one else need know.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus. I’m glad you understand. Well…shall we go?”

“Of course, my dear.” They dressed silently; and as they made to leave, Nicodemus turned to Jessica. “I just wanted to say once more…thank you so much for last night.” He embraced her.

“I was happy to do this for you. It was an honor. But…only this one time, as we agreed.”

“Yes…yes, of course. Well, after you, my dear.”

Jessica emerged into the corridor first; and, seeing no one else about, Nicodemus followed. As they moved on, they continued to converse on matters unrelated to last night; yet, though neither admitted it out loud, both wondered, deep down, whether this really was the end of the matter.

“Deena, I am not avoiding him!”

“Then why haven’t you talked to him yet?”

“There are…there have been other things to occupy his time, other people he’s wanted to see, and that’s been left entirely up to him. And I’ve been busy too.” Brutus paused to make sure the collar of his uniform was straight as he and Deena prepared to go to breakfast.

“But he’ll stop and talk with anyone who approaches him. I’ve seen it myself.”

“Maybe, but…there’s plenty of time, almost two weeks.”

“True…but you are his son.”

“I…I know that.” For a moment, Brutus looked ready to protest his wife’s statement; then, their children Darrin, Lillian and Augustus approached, ready and a little impatient. The family left their quarters and proceeded to the dining hall.

As the children dashed down the ramp ahead of their parents, Deena resumed their conversation. “I think you should try to see him right away. Certainly if anybody should take priority, it should be Nicodemus’s own son. And you’ve said so yourself: the Guard haven’t had much to do lately. How busy can you be?”

Brutus sighed, not wanting to admit outright that Deena had, in her quiet fashion, once again wormed the truth out of him. “Well…maybe I could try to catch him this afternoon some time.”

Deena looked pleased, pulling herself closer to him and leaning her head on his arm. “That’s the spirit, big guy. I know he really wants to see you.”

“You…you’ve already talked to him?”

“Mm-hm. The kids too. He was really pleased to meet his grandchildren. He says we’ve raised them well.” Noticing Brutus’s thoughtful expression, she added, “Don’t worry, I didn’t tell him you were avoiding him, or anything like that.”

“But I haven’t—” Brutus gave a low grumble. “All right, I won’t start that again. But I promise I will try to see him.”

“Great. I know it’s strange, getting used to seeing him like this.”

“I suppose that’s…part of it.” As they continued on to the dining hall, Brutus continued detailing his misgivings to her.

Though it was only early afternoon, it had already proven to be quite a full day once again. After breakfasting with Jessica, her children, their friends Torrance and Hazel, and Marie and Newell and their sons Tony and Kim, Nicodemus spent more time acquainting and familiarizing himself with the Rat colony’s interior. All the time during and after the meal, he and Jessica had, as agreed, made no reference to their being together the previous night and would continue to do so, until such time that they mutually agreed it was necessary, if ever. Even when parting afterwards, they only gave each other a brief hug. Afterwards, he was shown the exterior of Freethorn so he could see up close how the “native” stone had been shaped by the amulet’s power up and around this patch of land, to shore up the raw edges and prevent erosion. He was highly impressed at the extent to which the amulet’s stone-shaping capabilities were used, even as he was well aware of its far greater task of moving this entire piece of land across the dimensions. He was also told in greater detail how Johnathan had used it to plunge himself into the earth and rock below Freethorn to locate the aquifer detected by Gwinthrayle, and to create a channel from it to keep Lake Nicodemus replenished and their supply of water steady.

Later, Nicodemus had lunch with Bryant and Matilda; and afterwards, it occurred to him how thus far today, he’d felt less a sense of urgency than he had the day before, and more a sense that he had plenty of time left to do everything he wanted and relax and take his time. Certainly he was inspired by the example of many of those around him, who had adopted a more relaxed attitude since the days of the Rosebush colony, and so much more so nowadays, now that human discovery was no longer an issue. But there was also the glow of last night; he felt renewed, he realized, even more than when he’d first reintegrated in Rollo’s body. Dear Jessica, he now thought; for the time I have left, I’ll always cherish her kindness. Again he wished he could do more to repay her, and again he told himself he probably had already. She’d told him, after all, that she’d done this for herself as much as for him.

After lunch, he’d requested a little “alone time”; and now, he was just approaching the edge of Oak Park, looking up in admiration at the big burr oak when the sound of laughter interrupted his reverie. A group of children—Rat, Mouse, and Rusay—were playing a very free-wheeling combination of tag, hide-and-seek, and elements of whatever other game seemed appropriate at the time, while two adult Rats watched over them. He immediately felt inclined to observe, so he sat down, leaning against a sapling, and watched the melee. He immediately got into the spirit and soon was laughing as the game progressed (or regressed) into a series of ambushes-from-bushes followed by play-wrestling matches, all accompanied by giggles and shrieks. Carefree as the scene was, Nicodemus noted how careful the Rat and Rusay children were to not play too roughly with their smaller Mouse playmates.

It wasn’t long before they took notice of his presence, and some came over to chat with him. Soon Sandra, one of the Rat youngsters, asked him to join them; and after a moment’s deliberation, he cheerfully accepted. This came as a surprise to the adults, knowing who Nicodemus was and what he represented to their parents, since they were children back at the Rosebush; but Nicodemus assured them that that was long ago, and right now all he wanted was to join in their games if they’d have him. They accepted.

Over the next half-hour or so, he thoroughly immersed himself in being a child again. He ambushed, was ambushed, pursued, was pursued, raced in circles, climbed, jumped, was leaped upon, and generally expended more energy than he had in ages…and he loved every minute of it. Would that his real childhood—or Rollo’s, for that matter—had been like this, he realized. The adults quickly joined in themselves; and soon, some other adults came by, ostensibly to watch and help supervise, but all joined in before long. No doubt, thought Nicodemus, everyone, or nearly everyone, is discovering his or her second childhood here.

Afterwards, when he and his playmates had sufficiently tired themselves out, most of them left with the adults, some to nap, some to quieter activities; and Nicodemus also felt inclined toward an early-afternoon snooze, partially due to the interdimensional time difference and the jet-lag style adjustment. He quickly decided upon a suitable spot, and so began climbing a tree trunk. Sure enough, there it was, as he’d discerned from below: a small hollow at the base of the lowest limb. He quickly settled into it, lying flat on his back, without a shred of dignity and not caring a whit. As he luxuriated in the feel of the sun on his belly, he thought to himself, no doubt, this is definitely one thing he needed to allow time for: just simply doing nothing. He sighed deeply, thinking again of how he would take a slower pace and avoid trying to cram too much into each day.

Inevitably, though, his thoughts turned toward those other things he still had planned in days to come. Of course, he greatly anticipated the trip to Gwinthrayle’s tomorrow, as did the group that would accompany him, whose company he would welcome greatly. A trip to Earth to visit old haunts was definitely in order as well. Johnathan had already agreed to accompany him, though a specific day for it hadn’t been picked yet.

As he grew drowsier, he again thought of Jessica, sighing as he again recalled their shared passion. He was suddenly more fully awake as he realized just how much he’d thought of her since they parted company after breakfast. Should he be thinking of her this much, he asked himself; and then he dismissed the thought. After a night like that, how could he not think of her with fondness? No, it’s no more than thought, he told himself; then, believing the matter resolved, he was better able to doze off.

After about an hour he awakened, yawned, flexed muscles, and spent a few more minutes staring up at the branches swaying in the warm breeze. Despite a conscious effort to keep from thinking about anything, though, his thoughts returned, perhaps inevitably, to her again. He sat up, shaking his head and laughing quietly to himself. Ah, Jessica, what are you doing to me, he thought, only half-seriously.

Then he became aware of some movement on the ground below. He peered over the side to see a larger-than-average rat walking around in circles slowly. “Hello!” Nicodemus called out. “Are you waiting to see me?”

The rat looked up. “Nicodemus. I’d heard you’d come this way.”

“Well, Brutus! I’ve been looking forward to this.” He began descending the trunk. “Have you been waiting long?”

“Only a few minutes.” Actually, it had been more than a few—more like a half-hour—but it was not the sort of thing Brutus would readily admit to.

“Good. Well…where should we begin?”

“Well…” The two sat down. “I suppose I…should apologize for the way I talked to you when…you came back and told us who you were.”

“No apology necessary, Brutus. How else could you or anyone be expected to react, when faced with such an unbelievable claim?”

“Hmmf. No other way, I suppose. It…is good to have you here with us again.”

“Thank you, Brutus, but…I sense a degree of uncertainty.”

Brutus sighed. He had rehearsed some of what he’d wanted to say, but still found expressing his feelings openly difficult. “Back when you…when we lost you, I was…as shocked as anyone, but...no more, I guess, than anyone. We all had to concentrate so much on everything else. But later, after we were on the way to Thorn Valley, I got to thinking how…unfair it was. I don’t just mean what happened to you.” He paused, looking unsure of how to continue, then went on: “I guess you know that…though I knew you were my biological father since I was old enough to understand, I had regarded George as my father since Mother married him. But…it’s hard to put into words. I guess…I’d always wished you could have been…more of an actual father to me. I mean, you were our leader, and you’ve said yourself how you regarded yourself as father to all of us. But…oh, I know it sounds ridiculous…”

“Not at all, Brutus. In fact, as I was just telling your mother two nights ago, I’ve wished that circumstances could have been different regarding my relationship with her and you.”

“Really?”

“Yes. Oh, there were the…physical changes to me in addition to my duties as leader of all of you, and I’m certain that otherwise, I’d have made a domestic life with your mother and you. Although, as I’m sure you recall, I always tried to spend personal time with everyone, including the both of you.”

Brutus nodded. “That you did. It’s not as if you were never around, after all. And you led us well.”

“Thank you, Brutus, but in retrospect, I’d have to say a lot of that was blind luck on my part, what with the increasingly muddled state my mind was in, especially those last two years. And of course, no major decision escaped the scrutiny of the Council.”

“Of course. But that Uhrstegg, or Ghormfisk…he’s responsible for so much ill that’s befallen us. I know he ultimately wasn’t responsible, but still…”

“I do share your frustration, son, indubitably. I recall your saying you wish you’d had a crack at him. But it’s all water under the bridge, of course.”

“Yes. And now you’re back among us…in this new body.”

“And…that is where some of your uncertainty comes in, correct?”

“I suppose. But I guess it’s no more so than anyone else. And I know you’re still getting used to it yourself.”

“Indeed.” Nicodemus looked to one side, and then changed the subject quickly, complimenting Brutus on how well he’d raised his children. The two continued to chat over the next half hour, quickly feeling more relaxed, even laughing and joking with each other.

“Lilia? Are you ready?”

“Just…just a minute, Ellis.” Shortly she emerged from her room, smiling radiantly. She seemed to Ellis, at that moment, as one who eagerly anticipated the rest of her life. They exchanged hellos and embraced.

“You look great,” said Ellis.

“Do you like it?” Lilia spun herself around. “Francine, one of the Rats, she made it for me. She and your mom gave it to me this morning, as a surprise.”

“Uh-huh. She told me. It looks great on you.”

It was a hooded cloak Lilia wore, colored wine-red, that stopped just short of touching the floor. “Thank you. I can spend more time out in the daylight now with this. The hood protects my ears; I think they…got a little sunburned the other day, while we were listening to Nicodemus.” She gave a small laugh as they left the apartment for the corridor, arm in arm.

“That’s good. I mean, not that you got sunburned, but that you like the cloak, and that you’re happy.”

“I am happy, Ellis. I feel like…I don’t know, it’s hard to say exactly what. I guess…like I can do anything now, like anything’s possible now.”

“That’s great, I’m glad you feel that way. You know, Lilia, that’s what a lot of us have been saying about being here. It seems like every day something new comes up, and the more we explore it outside of Freethorn, the more we’ll discover.”

“I guess so. Oh, Ellis, I’m so excited about the trip tomorrow. I can hardly wait.” They chatted a bit more about who else was coming and what they might expect; and almost before they knew it, they reached their destination, just a few doors down and one level up. Ellis knocked before he and Lilia let themselves in, having been expected.

As they crossed the spacious front room of Martin and Karen’s quarters, two rats came out to greet them. “There you are! Glad you two could make it. Right this way.” Lambert and Bertha led them to an adjoining room.

Karen met them at the door, greeted them and led them to where Elizabeth and Victoria were sound asleep in their cradle. Lilia had seen them briefly yesterday, but it was still an enthralling sight, this being the first she’d seen mouse babies this young up close. She was cautious, tiptoeing quietly; but Karen assured her that she wouldn’t disturb their slumber: “They sleep like rocks, at least until they’re hungry.” To prove it, she picked up Elizabeth and carefully handed her to Ellis. She barely stirred as he cradled her. Karen offered Victoria to Lilia, but she was reluctant, afraid she wouldn’t hold her properly or even drop her. Ellis reassured her, showing her how easy it was, and shortly, he’d coaxed her into it.

They all sat down and chatted quietly—about the trip to Gwinthrayle’s, to which Lambert and Bertha were already signed up; how Martin was presently out helping to restore the fields, accompanied by Reuben, who was quickly becoming fast friends with Martin and Karen; about the twins and how they were developing, especially the little ways they seemed different from each other already.

As if aware of the shift in conversation, Victoria began to stir and was soon loudly whimpering. Lilia was concerned that she’d done something wrong, but Karen assured her it only signaled feeding time. She removed her top and sat on the sofa. Lilia handed the mouseling to her mother; and hardly had Victoria begun suckling when Elizabeth began making a similar fuss.

“They must be sharing a brain, all right,” said Ellis, chuckling as he handed his two-day-old niece to Karen.

The conversation continued as Karen positioned Elizabeth to suckle alongside her twin. She hummed and cooed to them as she stroked and caressed them. Lilia quickly became distracted from the ongoing conversation and approached Karen a bit tentatively. Karen could see how fascinated she still was and invited her to come closer. Lilia sat on the floor in front of Karen.

“That is so sweet,” Lilia said with a sigh. “What…does it feel like?”

“Well…it’s just such a warm feeling all over. Not just physically, but…knowing that they’re totally dependent on me, and that I’m the only one who can nurture them like this.” She paused, sighing. “I think Marty gets a bit jealous, almost. But don’t tell him I said that, okay?”

“I won’t,” said Lilia with a laugh. She continued to watch, enthralled by the sight.

“If I didn’t know better,” said Lambert quietly to Ellis, nudging him, “I’d think Lilia was getting ideas there.” Ellis just cleared his throat and got up to sit on the floor alongside Lilia.

After another minute of near-silence in the room, Karen said, “You know…there’s another feeling or impression or whatever you’d call it, that I get. It’s sort of like…I’m not just feeding or nurturing them, but almost like…they and I are…tied more to this world, connected to its essence in some strange way. It’s hard to really put into words.” She paused, gently cleaning Elizabeth’s ear with her tongue.

“That sounds an awful lot like what I’ve heard from others,” said Bertha. “Two of us rats who’ve had babies since coming to Lahaikshe have reported much the same thing.”

“Michelle and Myrna too,” said Ellis.

“And some of us have had those dreams which gave that same kind of impression,” added Lambert. “Something’s definitely happening here, and I’d bet anything it won’t stop with this stuff.” Lilia suddenly looked away from Karen and straight at Lambert, as if his words had struck a chord.

“Uh…is something wrong, Lilia?” he asked.

“Ah…no, nothing’s wrong. It’s just…oh, I don’t know, it’s probably nothing.” She returned her attention to Karen and her brood.

For a moment, Ellis meant to press her further on the matter, but kept silent. He wondered: did it have to do with what she’d gone through in recent days? Nicodemus had said that something in the essence of this world may have been a contributing factor in it. Well, whatever it is, he decided, maybe she’ll confide in him about it later. Right now, it seemed little more than a momentary distraction to her, as she returned her full attention to Karen and the twins.

They continued discussing the point Lambert had steered them toward, and what it might mean for everyone here. Presently the twins finished nursing and their mother paused to burp them before getting up to place them back in their cradle.

As she did, Martin arrived with Reuben. “Hi, gorgeous,” said Martin, coming up behind Karen and pressing up close, nuzzling and caressing her.

She turned to embrace her husband. “Well, you smell earthy,” she said, kissing him. They both laughed.

“I guess you two would rather be alone right now,” offered Lambert, though he knew they always greeted each other like this, and weren’t in the least self-conscious about showing affection.

“No, no,” replied Martin as he and Karen came out of their embrace and looked down into the cradle. “You guys stay as long as you like.” They both continued to tend to their tiny brood, cooing and fussing over them.

Lambert smiled at Bertha, shaking his head, still finding it hard to imagine how different so many things were now; and people too, of course, especially Martin. Not even six months ago would he have imagined seeing Martin so thoroughly domesticated, constantly doting on his mate and children, seemingly living only for them. Speak for yourself, he thought. Aren’t you and Bertha at least as serious, or getting close? There is that about love, it was well known. Look at Mr. Ages, someone none had believed would lead anything but a solitary, celibate life until his and Alma’s surprise announcement two years ago. It comes to everyone, it changes him or her forever. Then too, an experience such as the one he and Martin had—leaving home to seek out the place where their parents originated, and meeting with experiences they never could have foreseen, all leading up to the mass exodus to Lahaikshe—would definitely lead to a change in attitude, a shifting of priorities. Both of them were more giving of themselves, less self-oriented; nothing was more important now than their families, their friends, and how everyone needed and depended on the other. The change was especially noticeable in Martin, who had been rebellious and moody before the fateful trip.

Lambert smiled again as he recalled that first night after his return, when he’d left the small celebration his family had thrown in honor of his safe return, and returned to his and Tremaine’s quarters to find Bertha waiting for him—ready to give him “a private welcome.” He’d been interested in her but was undecided between her and Karina, until that night. She’d thought about him almost nonstop while he’d been gone, she’d told him, and had worried at least as much as his family. She’d come to that all-important decision just before the alarm had been sounded for everyone to gather in the assembly hall and the humans had arrived in Thorn Valley; and after his return, she had resisted taking part in the celebration, instead taking Tremaine aside and cajoling him into letting her wait for Lambert in their quarters and into his spending the next several hours elsewhere. As for Lambert, he’d been puzzled by her absence from the party and by a couple of cryptic remarks Tremaine had made there. He’d found out that Karina had chosen another, and so had meant to look for Bertha after stopping briefly at his quarters. Of course, he hadn’t expected to find her there, but he was hardly disappointed; and so they spent the next few hours becoming better acquainted with each other than they ever had. At one point, when she mentioned that he seemed to be holding back, he confessed that he didn’t feel quite worthy of her because of the way he and Martin had essentially lied about their trip, and how they should have been here with everyone when the threat of invasion reared its head. He knew it was irrational, knowing that none could have predicted what would happen, and that his father had told him when they were reunited that whole matter was past history and should be considered laid to rest; but still he couldn’t quite shake his uncertainty. Bertha was quick to assure him that none of that mattered now, and that she was proud of the way he handled his predicament with Boonger’s gang. She let him know, in no uncertain terms, how much he was worthy of her and how much she wanted to be with him. She managed to convince him pretty easily.

He sighed with fondness of the memories of that night, and placed an arm around Bertha’s waist, leaning over to kiss her. Martin was now describing how work on restoration was progressing, and how Reuben had taken part in weeding and cultivating. “It was dirty work,” Reuben admitted, and though he said little more about it, he seemed proud to be able to do his part.

The conversation continued for some forty more minutes, during which Lilia seemed restless, continuously moving about the room and lingering by the twins’ cradle for several minutes at a time, talking quietly to them and touching them, smiling and laughing as they responded with contended sounds to her attentions. Eventually she told Ellis privately that she wanted to talk with him alone, and so they made ready to leave. Reuben came close to jumping up to leave with them, but he caught himself, instead asking if they were going for a walk. Lilia replied yes, and away they went. Reuben excused himself momentarily, saying there were others he needed to meet and thanking Martin and Karen for their hospitality. On his way out, he also took time to look in on Elizabeth and Victoria, seeming almost as enchanted by them as his sister. Lambert and Bertha soon followed, saying they also had much to say and do.

“Did you see Lilia back there?” said Bertha after they were back outside. “She just could not take her eyes off them. I don’t want to sound like a gossip, but I can guess what she wants to discuss with Ellis.”

“Yeah. I can’t say I envy him right now, but…they may have already discussed it, to some point. Whatever they decide, I hope they’re both ready.”

“Mm-hm. Just as we are?”

Lambert just nodded, smiling as he and his betrothed left for a more secluded area to discuss the matter further.

Not far away, Ellis and Lilia walked along, not saying much as yet, now and again chatting with passersby who expressed admiration for Lilia’s new cloak. Soon they worked their way over to a trail leading to the Rooftop, the one near Freethorn’s north entrance. Both recalled the events of five days ago, when they’d seen off the latest exchange party, including Ellis’s eldest brother Norman. Then, they’d watched through a ground-level observation post, saying nary a word to each other; and yet, they both knew now, it was a meeting of great future importance.

They were mostly silent until they reached the top, where they found a steady but not overwhelming breeze was blowing. In spite of this, Lilia couldn’t restrain her delight and awe at the view from up there, looking across the plain to the forest about two-thirds of a mile distant. They sat down, huddling close together and wrapping her cloak around them both against the breeze, which was blowing cooler than usual. Neither could resist chortling with childlike glee.

Soon, though, they knew the time for more serious discussion was upon them. Ellis was about to break the silence, but surprisingly Lilia spoke first. “Oh, Ellis, I…just can’t get over Karen and her babies. Look how helpless they are, and dependent on her in every way.”

“Yeah, it’s pretty awesome, all right…”

“And just think, in a short while they’ll be walking and talking like the rest of us.” She sighed. “And look how happy Karen is. And Martin, too, but Karen especially, I think. It’s all so…so…”

Ellis knew exactly where she was going with the subject, and had been expecting it since they’d left Martin and Karen’s.

“Oh, Ellis, I…I feel kind of silly for saying this, but…I want that for me. I want to have babies so much it hurts. I want to hold and feed them, and love them just like that, and watch them grow.” She looked him straight in the eye. “Isn’t that what you want, Ellis? Doesn’t everyone want that?”

Ellis couldn’t help feeling slightly taken aback, not expecting Lilia to broach the subject in such rapid-fire fashion. “Well, uh…I suppose so, but are you sure that’s what you want? Right now, I mean? I’m not sure…either of us is ready right now.”

Lilia made to answer, and then hesitated. “Oh, Ellis, I’m sorry, I…shouldn’t have said that. I’m…putting too much pressure on you.”

“That’s all right, you needn’t be sorry. In fact, I’m glad that you’re making decisions about your future, all on your own. It’s a nice change for you. But this…becoming parents is such a big step, such a big responsibility.”

“I know, but we’d have help, wouldn’t we? No one raises children all by themselves here.”

“Yes, that’s true, but…I just think we should wait a while longer. I do want a future with you, Lilia. I love you. But I just think…you’re overreacting to what you saw back there. I mean, I know this is what you really want, and believe me, I do too. I’ve wanted children of my own for quite some time, and I want to have them with you. I just think we should give it a little more time, until we’re absolutely sure, beyond a doubt, that we’re both ready. So…what do you think?”

Lilia was looking thoughtfully across the plain. “I guess…you’re right, Ellis. I suppose I…wasn’t using my head too well.”

“We all think with different parts of the body sometime. Believe me, I know.” They both laughed. “They all say that we’re more rational beings than ordinary rats and mice, but even we sometimes are ruled by old instincts, old urges…” Ellis paused, looking into Lilia’s eyes, and suddenly felt a change of subject was in order. They resumed discussing tomorrow’s trip.

“…And when he turned around, and his gaze traveled all the way up, I thought he’d fall over backwards.” Brutus chuckled at the memory. “It took a few more seconds before he realized it was me. He couldn’t get over how much I’d grown since he’d seen me last.”

“Mm—yes. I daresay that was the least of the surprises awaiting Johnathan upon his return.”

“Oh, yes, very true.” The two paused as they approached the north end of the lake. “But they all pale compared to the one we all got two days ago.” They both laughed, then Brutus added, “You know…Father, if I didn’t know better, I’d think you took a certain amount of delight at the reactions you raised in us all.”

“Why, Brutus, you wound me,” Nicodemus replied, though he obviously wasn’t really offended. “If anything, I took interest in seeing how everyone’s reactions matched those that I’d expected to see. Then again…I suppose I couldn’t help feeling some amusement…”

“Wait,” interrupted Brutus quietly. “I think we have company.” He stopped and crouched. “I see you in there, come on out,” he said jovially. A young mouse ventured out from behind a bush, glancing between the two a bit nervously.

“Well, Lula,” said Nicodemus. “Lovely to see you, my dear. Please don’t feel reluctant to approach either of us directly if you want.”

“Ah…no, I’m not. I was…just in the area, and saw you pass by…”

“For a good two minutes, no less,” said Brutus, “since you started trailing us.” Nicodemus nodded, knowing as well of her continued presence.

Lula looked thunderstruck. “You knew I was…” She turned, hiding her eyes. “Oh, this is so embarrassing…I can’t do anything right.”

Nicodemus silently motioned to Brutus that he’d handle this, and approached her. “Lula, it’s all right. You’ve done nothing wrong. But you should never be reluctant to approach either of us, or anyone here.” He gently placed his hands on her shoulders.

She looked up at him. “I…I know, I guess I…just didn’t think that…I mean, you’re so important, you were the Rats’ leader, and…”

Nicodemus laughed gently. “Lula, Lula…that doesn’t matter, believe me. You’ll find me eminently approachable. Even when I was leader, I would talk with anyone about anything, and no subject was too trivial.” He embraced her. “Be at ease, child, no one’s going to laugh or scoff at you.”

After a bit she pulled away, managing a smile. “I know. Mother Pat tells me that, but it’s still hard…to get used to having so many care for me. I do…tend to go on, and make too big a deal out of things. Lucy says I…cry over spilled milk too much.”

“None of us are without our shortcomings, my dear. So…what did you need to talk about?”

“Well…it’s about…ah…” Lula was looking at Brutus uneasily.

“You’d rather be alone, I can tell,” said Brutus, straightening. “I’ll see you later…Father…Lula.”

“You may count on that, Brutus.”

After Brutus left, Lula said, “I…probably shouldn’t have made him leave. Now he probably thinks I…” She paused, sighing. “There I go again.”

“It’s all right, he understands that you wanted to speak to me alone. He knows it’s not personal.”

Lula gave a slight smile. “If you say so. You probably wonder…why I’m so weird like this.”

“Patricia has told me about the life you had before. I understand perfectly.”

“Actually, that’s…kind of why I wanted to talk to you.” They both sat down on a bench. “I’ve been thinking…off and on, the past couple of days, since we all heard your story, about where you described Rollo’s brother…ah…Ardo, that’s it, and how he and his mother…how they didn’t get along well, and she died without him even knowing about it. And then he died, too, and…it was all just so sad…” She couldn’t keep tears from her eyes, and Nicodemus offered his shoulder in comfort.

After a short while, he said, “And you were reminded of you and your own mother.”

She looked up. “Yeah, that’s right. How’d you…oh, I guess it wasn’t hard to guess, huh? Yeah, I…just don’t want her to…to die without knowing how I feel.”

“And how do you feel about her?”

“I’m not sure. I don’t think I really hate her anymore. Maybe I never really did. I mean, she used to be so nice, she took good care of my brothers and me. We always…felt loved. That’s why I just couldn’t understand why she would…do like she did, throw me out just because I…missed Desmond. And I know she missed him, too; all of us did. That’s why I can’t understand it. I just missed him more, I couldn’t get over…losing him like they did. Why was that so bad?” She found it hard to continue, and Nicodemus comforted her again, stroking her head.

“I wish I could give you a definite answer, my dear. Obviously, Desmond touched something deep within you that he hadn’t with your mother, and it was just beyond her understanding. It was much the same with others of us who had become emotionally close to…what we’ve been calling natural mice and rats such as yourself, though I’ve seen for myself how irrelevant that term has become. Each of those individuals had become influenced by his or her mate, so that they experienced a wider variety of emotions, and even comprehended some things better, more complex things and concepts; or at least that’s the accepted theory.”

Lula’s expression brightened. “Madeline told me it was like that with her, when she and Johnathan met. Do you really think…that’s how it was with me and Desmond?”

“Well, they were able to determine beyond a doubt that Johnathan had influenced Madeline to the point of making her one of us in every way. In the case of others, such as our Mr. and Mrs. Ages, the jury’s still out, as they say. In your case, my dear, it may prove to be true, to some degree. I believe it may have baffled your mother, even frightened her, just because it was so unfamiliar and unexpected.”

Lula thought silently for a moment. “Desmond stayed with us for that whole day…with all of us…but I was the one who…felt this way for him? Why not my mother? Maybe…maybe it means that we…he and I really were meant to be together, mates for life. And I…he…” Tears welled up again, and she leaned against him, weeping quietly.

As he comforted her, Nicodemus felt a pang of guilt for going so far into the subject, but then he reminded himself this was what she wanted to discuss. Still, he hoped this wouldn’t set her back; Patricia had told him she seemed to be largely over her grief—which, of course, she and the rest of her family shared.

An idea came to him. “Lula…would you like to see your mother again?”

She pulled away, expression brightening. “Could it be done? Oh…I guess it could. Johnathan and that stone of his, he could take us there, just like he brought me here, and you too.”

“Yes, my dear. Any time you feel ready, just ask him. I know he’ll be happy to oblige. If you want me to ask for you, I can—”

“No, that’s okay, I can do it. Wow…I never thought I’d want to see her again, but I do. Thank you, Nicodemus!” She gave him a quick hug. “I’ll go find him right now!”

As she started off, Nicodemus said quickly, “Wait. Before you rush off, I wanted to ask you: would you like to have dinner with Brutus and his family and me tonight?”

“Oh…well, I guess I could. Sure. Ah…he probably didn’t tell you, but…when I first got here, he scared the dickens out of me. He was so huge, I’d never seen a rat like him before. I actually tried to hide behind Mother Pat—that’s what I call Patricia—but she told me how nice he was. I think he still gives me the willies, just a bit. I know it’s silly. ’Cause I’ve seen him with his kids, he seems really good with them.”

“Well, that’s all the more reason you should come dine and visit with us, so you may know him better.”

“I know. Well…thanks again, Nicodemus, sir. I’ll be there tonight.”

“Good. I’m looking forward to it.”

“Me too. Okay, I’ll go tell Mother Pat, and then talk to Johnathan.”

As she was leaving, Nicodemus smiled to himself as he waved goodbye. Though she was still troubled by her recent past, it was obvious how much she was enjoying her new life, making new friends and becoming a true part of the community. He thought about what he’d been told about her family, and hoped they could reconcile their differences easily. Perhaps inevitably, though, his thoughts fell to the domestic life he and Anna might have had. It was a situation he’d given much thought to while trapped within Rollo, the life he’d imagined seeming so real at times it was as if it had actually happened, as if he’d opened a window onto another lifetime, another reality…one of the ‘infinite possibilities’ he’d referred to. Now he tried to shrug it off; after all, the time he had left here and now was what really mattered, and those he would spend it with.

And, even more inevitably, thoughts of Jessica came to him. He hadn’t seen her at all since breakfast, but thought that perhaps it would be best to have as little contact with her as possible. Not that he’d try to deliberately avoid her or turn the other way if their paths crossed; but he knew well, as did she, what could happen. True, she’d spent the night with him as a favor, but as favors go, this was something with potentially more serious repercussions than lending someone a tool or scratching someone’s back. But they were well aware of them and had discussed them, and they both knew that the less they saw of each other, the less risk there’d be of them coming to pass. No, he thought as he got to his feet, he’d always be grateful to her, but that was as far as it would go. And now, it was time to meet a few more friends, old and new, as he’d promised, before dinner with Brutus and Deena.

“She really said that?” Jessica laughed, shaking her head.

“Yes, she did,” replied Ages. “She had it all figured out. Of course, I told her that I couldn’t make any definite plans like that right now.”

“That’s really sweet of her, though. Sad, too, but…it’s good that she’s looking ahead like that.”

“We’ve all done that, but it seems she’s given more thought to the matter than I have, and she seems a lot more accepting of it too.” Ages sighed, seeming reluctant to say more; then he added, “She’s been…so good for me, Jessie, I don’t know how… But then, I suppose that’s not much compared to Nicodemus and his situation.”

“Oh, yes,” agreed Jessica; and she looked ready to add more, but refrained. This hesitation didn’t go unnoticed; but Ages, being a great respecter of privacy—his own and others’—didn’t question her about it, though he still recalled the sparks that seemed to fly between Jessica and Nicodemus yesterday. Almost at once, both seemed eager to change the subject, and so began discussing recent findings in their plant research.

Presently, Tara dropped by, complaining of a slight queasy feeling—not really nauseous, but enough to be distracting and give her concern that something wasn’t quite right. As Ages led her into the examining room, Jessica thought fleetingly: Could what was ailing her have something to do with—then she caught herself. Why, the idea was absurd. How would her love affair with Bertie have anything to do with how she was feeling now, as if he were somehow the cause? Come on, this is your baby brother you’re talking about, she told herself. Sure, none of us ever thought he’d be involved in anything like this, with someone like Tara. But why would such a thought cross her mind? After all, Tara’s wasn’t the first such complaint; others had experienced similar symptoms since moving to Lahaikshe, and they all seemed attributable to adjustment to a new environment. They also were distributed almost proportionately among the new arrivals and veteran Freethorn residents.

But then, there was also Eric. She’d met him briefly, when he and Teresa made their first return from Earth to test how he’d cope here; but sadly, it was as before, if not worse. Ages had examined him, but again there had been no apparent physical symptoms; he was seemingly in the grip of some unknown, nameless dread that he claimed came from just being here on this world, all the while insisting that he’d die if he remained. It troubled Jessica whenever she thought of it, especially considering his eventual fate. But she also wondered: that was only his contention that he would die if he stayed here. Was he just exaggerating his discomfort, genuine as it was? If he’d been forced to stay, would he have overcome it, after all? None would know now, of course. It was so sad for Teresa and her sons, who would never know their father, and for Eric’s sister Sarah as well. Both of them had had enormous support from everyone since their return, and Teresa at least seemed to be finding love again as well.

Jessica thought about the pang of jealousy she’d felt the other day while thinking about how close her twin brother Norman had been lately to Teresa, and suddenly felt an urge to apologize to both of them for it. It was so silly; this was something everyone needs, after all, and just because nothing was currently happening in her love life doesn’t mean that they shouldn’t…

She caught herself as she realized that her thoughts had come full circle, right back to Nicodemus. She laughed quietly to herself, and went up to the examining room door, telling Ages that she was leaving now, as she was about to do anyway. No doubt, she thought as she made her way to the outside, this was a matter that definitely needed resolving, and a walk around Freethorn just might help. She and Nicodemus had mutually agreed to see each other as little as possible without deliberately avoiding each other, but the way her thoughts kept returning to him, unbidden, almost to the point of distraction from daily activities…somehow, someway, this needed to be worked out.

She’d only gone a short ways outside the service entrance when she heard a cry of distress from a grove of oak saplings. She immediately rushed to investigate, and found one of the Rusay children, Tisphi, sitting on the ground, howling in pain and favoring her left foot. Jessica crouched before her, assuring her she’d be all right. As she examined the little girl’s foot, she thought fleetingly that she could use a distraction from thinking about Nicodemus, at least for now; maybe several distractions in a row. She quickly determined that Tisphi had a sprained toe, and fashioned a makeshift splint for it. As Tisphi calmed down, she explained how she was trying to climb one of the saplings when she slipped and fell to the ground. Jessica told her these Earth trees can be tricky to negotiate if one isn’t used to them. Presently her father Morobphra arrived, and Jessica quickly assured him it wasn’t serious. He picked her up, cradling her as Jessica led them back to Medical.

Before the expansion of the Mouse colony, the Brisbys favored a natural rock ledge above the entrance of their home as a spot to sit and talk and observe goings-on below, especially at the end of the day. Since the expansion, it had undergone some changes. It hadn’t become necessary to do away with it, though; on the contrary, it had been expanded to accommodate more than two mice, courtesy of Johnathan and the amulet. So it was now that Johnathan and Madeline were now joined by Kimball and Patricia, engaged in a mostly light-hearted discussion of recent events. The subject of Lula soon came up—how nice it was of Brutus and Deena to invite her and Nicodemus to share their dinnertime with her and then let her stay and socialize with them afterward; and the trip to Earth tomorrow to take her to see her family again, the idea of which they had all agreed to, in spite of the uncertainty of its outcome, given how acrimonious Lula had been toward her mother before, despite her outward enthusiasm now. It had been agreed who would accompany her: Patricia was a natural choice, and Madeline would use the amulet alone to take them there. This was her suggestion; she hadn’t made a solo “dimension-hop” with the amulet since that first trip to Lahaikshe to seek out Johnathan, usually choosing to leave that task to him. She and Patricia had discussed the possibility of Lula’s mother being more comfortable with Lula being in the company of only females for this visit; and Johnathan agreed to it, though he couldn’t resist pretending to be offended about it in a teasing manner. In spite of how long it had been, Madeline was confident she could handle guiding the amulet for an interdimensional trip solo, being as familiar with its capabilities as Johnathan.

Presently Lula came by accompanied by Nicodemus, who quickly excused himself, citing previous engagements. Lula joined the other mice on the ledge, speaking animatedly of her visit, how nice Brutus and Deena were to her and the fun she had playing with their children. Soon the subject of both trips tomorrow came up; Lula admitted being torn between joining Nicodemus on the visit to Gwinthrayle’s and visiting her mother, but knew the latter was probably more important right now as a matter to be resolved, and that there would be plenty of other chances to visit Gwinthrayle’s and other places outside Freethorn.

The subject of Nicodemus came up, as it did so often these days. It started as usual—”It’s a shame he has to leave so soon,” “I hope he has the chance to all he wants to do”—but then Kimball brought up a matter which, everyone was surprised to find, had hardly been considered: “After Nicodemus vacates Rollo’s body, how will Rollo adjust to living here?”

Everyone looked at each other, each realizing the same thing. “We’ve all been…thinking about Nicodemus so much, concentrating on him only…that we’ve forgotten that Rollo…that all this will be so new to him,” said Madeline.

“Yes, everything about our life here, even the normal, everyday interactions that we take for granted, he’ll be an absolute babe-in-the-woods about,” added Johnathan.

“It’ll take a lot of patience and understanding from all of us, for sure,” said Patricia.

“Of course,” said Kimball. “But let’s not forget that Nicodemus gave the lad plenty of coaching when they were…how should I put it…mind-mates?”

Everyone laughed; then Lula said, “I still don’t understand all of that, but…Nicodemus said, didn’t he, that he taught Rollo a lot about his life, and the world and everything?”

“That he did, Lula,” said Kimball. “But it’s like learning something in a classroom, and then going out ‘in the field’ and finding it’s not what you expected.”

“Yes, so we can only imagine how difficult a time Rollo may have,” said Johnathan. “Though I suppose we’re starting to sound a bit pessimistic; after all, Rollo may adjust as well as Lula here, or any of our other new arrivals who didn’t even know of us before. Rollo will at least have that advantage.”

“Quite true, Johnathan,” added Kimball. “But I’ve also wondered…will Nicodemus really be able to heal Rollo’s brain as he said? I mean, not to dismiss his abilities out of hand, but…well, there’s so much that Patricia and I never thought possible before coming here, so I guess it’s not much of a stretch, but still…”

“I know what you’re trying to say, Kimball. Knowing what we know of such brain defects in humans, it does seem like a longshot. But let’s not forget that Nicodemus was inside that brain for the better part of three years. He had plenty of time to determine what could or couldn’t be done.”

“Well, you know him better than the rest of us, Johnathan. All the same, I think we should prepare to deal with Rollo as he was before, just in case.”

“I agree,” said Patricia. “I hope this talk doesn’t bother you, Johnathan. I know how close you and Nicodemus were in the old days, and I know you really believe in him.”

“That’s all right,” said Johnathan. “We’ve learned the hard way recently how important it is to prepare for contingencies.”

“Like not doing enough to prepare for NIMH’s possibly finding us in Thorn Valley,” offered Madeline.

“Exactly. I really do feel strongly, though, that Nicodemus can help Rollo in the way he said. And when he’s done his part, it’ll be up to the rest of us. Personally, I can’t wait. I’m not looking forward to Nicodemus leaving us, but I would like very much to meet the ‘real’ Rollo, and do what I can to help him fit in, and understanding things.”

“As do we all,” agreed Kimball, “but we may need to curb our enthusiasm. The lad’s likely to be bewildered by so much attention, maybe even overwhelmed.”

Johnathan nodded. “I still think he may surprise us, though. I know Nicodemus has prepared him well.”

“He’ll still experience so much that’ll be totally new to him,” said Madeline. “Just speaking with others, being with all these strangers in a strange place, and feelings he’s never been able to express before…it’s almost like it was with me when I first met Johnathan, and then met the Rats.” She and Johnathan smiled and kissed lightly.

“And when love comes his way,” offered Patricia, “whoever it may be, think of what a totally new experience it’ll be. But then, how is that different from anyone?”

The two couples began exchanging more detailed accounts of the dawning of their mutual feelings and their respective courtships. Lula, meanwhile, sat quietly, listening with rapt attention to these exchanges, seemingly untroubled by them. Patricia was concerned that these stories might be upsetting for her, given her past feelings for Desmond; but Lula, without saying a word, let her foster mother know that they didn’t, seeming happy just to take it all in. Patricia was pleased that she seemed to be putting that aspect of her past behind her, and wondered to herself if someone else were starting to take that special place in Lula’s heart.

The evening wore on; and as it fell into night, many in Freethorn remained outside to enjoy it, at least until a rather thick bank of fog began to roll in, sending many inside. Though some of them grumbled about the damper being put on a perfectly nice night—no pun intended—others weren’t bothered at all, even preferring the cool dampness. Among them was Nicodemus, who was only too happy to be experiencing all manner of weather conditions, and was certainly used to being where he was surrounded by mist and fog, or at least the appearance thereof. He even told Tallus and Angeline, with whom he was socializing at the time, that he wouldn’t mind if it were pouring rain right now. Both Tallus and Angeline had visited Gwinthrayle before, and were now describing their visit to Nicodemus, who reminded Tallus not to go into too exacting detail, as was his wont; otherwise, he said with good humor, there would be little point in going himself.

Though obvious only to himself, Nicodemus was making a very pointed effort to keep from thinking about Jessica; and elsewhere, she did likewise about him, as she helped her younger siblings and others who were visiting Gwinthrayle with packing and other details, though she wasn’t going herself. It was only a favor, and just for one night, each told himself or herself when thoughts of the other did come up. And come up they did, time and again…

Eventually most Freethorners had retired for the night. Outside, the fogbank continued to enshroud the transplanted colony and surrounding plains. Were one to observe the scene from above, it would seem as if it had deliberately and specifically sought this location, like a meeting of two lovers, or—perhaps more accurately—a mother finding and embracing her child.

Those yet remaining outside would tell their families and friends the following day of the unique and strange quality of this night. Not all descriptions would be identical, of course; but everyone, to an individual, would tell of a sense of the fogbank bringing with it more than condensed water vapor. There was a quality hard to describe in it, and it would add to the growing list of experiences reported by Freethorners since the colony’s arrival on Lahaikshe, usually taking the form of dreams, that was increasingly giving the impression of their being welcomed as a part of this world, not only by its native population but by the world itself.

Chapter 24 - On to Gwinthrayle’s

“…and as we walked around, watching the mist roll in and swirl around us, one pair of rats, Vernon and Theodocia, asked us, purely out of curiosity, why we seemed to enjoy this kind of weather so much. None of us could give any really specific reason; we just always enjoyed walking around in the fog. Morobphra, especially, was surprised they even asked. I explained that many Rusay enjoy it, and it was a part of our culture that goes back centuries, and that no one’s sure how it began. As for what it signifies, I said most just find it an enjoyable thing to do, but some put a more special meaning to it that even they find hard to really pin down.

“We moved on, and the kids had fun with it; they were almost playing hide-and-seek in it, it was so thick. We met several others who didn’t care for it and sought shelter, but there were some who enjoyed it much the same as we did. But almost every one of these rats and mice said the same thing, that it made them feel more like they belonged here, or that it was a harbinger of good things to come. And all of them said that that still couldn’t adequately describe the feeling. We weren’t surprised to see Nicodemus still out there, and he said much the same. I remarked to him that it was almost mystical, the way everyone described this night. He said he couldn’t pinpoint the reason why, that it would take further study; but for now, he was content to enjoy it as the others did.

“The kids soon tired themselves out, so we returned to the guest house, almost losing our way once. Gwinthri slept on my shoulder all the way. We went to bed, and that’s pretty much how our sixth day went.”

Sithpha laid down his pen and looked over this latest entry. Though it was really no more than just his usual observations, he wondered if he hadn’t hit upon something that no one else in Freethorn had yet. Everyone who had been out there last night had reported receiving the same impressions. It had to mean something, like the way some Rusay impart a “special” meaning to foggy weather. It obviously strikes the same chord with them, and there’s definitely something supernatural about it. Nicodemus said as much himself.

Sithpha got up and looked out the window. The upper level provided an excellent view of the south meadow, where they’d frolicked in the fog last night. There was no trace of it now, but wondered if it would return, and get the same reaction next time it comes, and probably among more of them?

“Coming to breakfast?” came a voice behind him, making him jump slightly. “The kids are getting a little impatient…”

“Oh, uh…sure, babe, I’ll be right there.” Dinilom couldn’t suppress a giggle. “What? What’s so funny?”

“Oh, it’s just you…you with your head in the clouds again.” She pressed up close behind him and massaged his shoulders.

“Yeah, that’d be the right word for it, all right.”

“I’m positive I’ve never seen you think so much before we came here. But with all we’ve seen and heard…I guess I should speak for myself.”

“This place does bring it out, all right. It’s funny…we came here to learn about these people, and we’re getting so much more in the bargain; maybe even more about…about us, and how everyone fits in the world.” He sighed, looking out the window again.

After a pause, Dinilom asked, “So…I heard they’re serving kiatheios and skuvurnee muffins this morning. Does that sound all right?”

Sithpha laughed out loud as he turned around, embracing her. “I’m even forgetting my stomach these days. Thanks for reminding me, babe.” They walked arm-in-arm toward the stairs.

“…and Veronica, Susanna and Marcus make 23. So we must be missing…” Johnathan looked down at the roster.

Then Marcus spoke up. “My aunt Tara.”

“And Bertie too,” said Lucy. “Pretty odd, considering they’re the ones who had this idea in the first place.”

“How long do you think we should give them, Dad?” asked Timothy.

“Well, they knew when to show up, just like the rest of us. Maybe something came up.”

“Can’t we just go without ’em, Dad?” said Lyndon, his impatience showing in his dancing about as well as his tone.

“Now, Lyndon, we know how much you’ve been looking forward to this, but we don’t know what’s going on with Bertie and Tara yet. We’ll give them another five minutes, and then someone can go and look for them. We don’t want to leave anyone behind if we can help it.” Johnathan looked out through the trees from the spot where this party had gathered, at the base of the ramp leading to Freethorn’s north entrance. Everyone else continued to stand or sit—both those who had signed on for the trip to Gwinthrayle’s and those who were there to see them off—chatting about the trip to come and continually looking out for the missing members of the party.

After five minutes, Ellis and Kevin had volunteered to look for them and were just setting out when Bertie could be seen approaching. “We thought you got lost or something,” said Ellis. “So where’s Tara?”

“She…can’t make it, she said she wasn’t feeling well.”

“Wow, that’s too bad,” said Johnathan. “Uhm, don’t take this the wrong way, but if you’d rather stay here, you know, to look after her…”

“I offered to. But she said to go on ahead and enjoy myself, and that she’d be fine. I didn’t want to at first, but she convinced me, I guess, so…well, I guess we can get started.”

“Mm…well, if you’re sure. Okay, then. Nicodemus?”

Nicodemus stepped forward. Though he was very much at the center of this expedition, Johnathan had insisted upon carrying out the lion’s share of the organizational details, and so Nicodemus had been content to let himself be just another one of the Freethorners visiting Gwinthrayle. Now, though, he brought to Johnathan’s a detail he may have overlooked: that with Tara dropping out, consideration should be given to the next one on the list, who happened to be Barbara Anne, who was already there to see off her best friend Veronica and was now delighted at being able to go with her instead. She’d even had a small bag packed already just in case, knowing she was next on the list and hoping quietly that someone would drop out.

With this settled, Nicodemus again explained briefly how he would use the seemingly-mystical ability within himself to transport them en masse to Gwinthrayle’s; and, once sure he was ready to begin, he gave everyone time for last goodbyes before beginning. He asked for quiet, though not total silence, and everyone sat down; and after only a few seconds, a collective gasp issued from the group. Everyone was rising slowly from the ground, and, almost to an individual were grabbing for the one next to her or him. Opening his eyes, Nicodemus allowed himself a smile and told everyone they could converse freely now. As the group rose further, there was more laughter—some of it nervous—than conversation, amid more goodbyes between them and those on the ground. Few among them had experienced a sensation like this before, and everyone looked about him or her continuously, unable to take in enough of the sight of the trees and the Wall seemingly growing shorter, along with the peculiar sensation of moving through the air in this fashion. Soon, they were even with the highest treetops, including the big burr oak, then the Rooftop, and still they rose higher. Now it was quite a panorama spread before everyone on all sides: all of Freethorn, the red plain, the low hills to the north and forest to the east.

Soon they stopped ascending and began moving forward, across the plain toward the forest. Everyone shielded eyes from the sun, still quite low in the sky, and continued conversing excitedly about this experience. Nicodemus looked around at the assemblage, divided almost evenly between Rats and Mice, pleased that he’d been able to convince Johnathan that it would be worthwhile to make the trip to Gwinthrayle’s in this fashion, rather than having Johnathan use the Stone to do the job instantaneously, and thus make the trip all the more memorable. There was that human expression, after all: Getting there should be half the fun.

Everyone was acclimating to this form of travel quickly, noting that it seemed to be a cushiony but firm surface underneath them, though one they couldn’t see. Nicodemus assured everyone that while the spell was in effect, anyone could stand and move about freely as he or she so desired, though everyone seemed content to stay clustered in little groups, watching the plain roll by beneath them or looking ahead to the advancing forest. Though most in the party had been outside Freethorn, none had ventured further than the immediate forest or plain, so all were enjoying the view enormously. Lilia kept a tight grip on Ellis, taking a little longer to acclimate to this form of travel, though her fascination was as great as anyone’s. Reuben was proving adequately that he was growing less protective of his sister, looking relaxed and smiling as he viewed their surroundings all around, far more than he was viewing Lilia with Ellis. Likewise, Lyndon and his twin Shawna’s heads constantly turned back and forth, shouting and pointing at nearly everything they saw. Kimball was far more subdued but clearly as deeply affected, looking close to weeping and thinking of Patricia, wishing she could be here to share this with him, though he knew her trip to Earth to reunite Lula with her family was probably more important. Lambert and Bertha had initially wanted to come along only if Martin and Karen could accompany them, but when the Mouse couple had bowed out to continue caring for their newborns, they insisted Lambert and Bertha go on ahead and enjoy themselves for all four of them. This seemed to be the case already, as they listened to Timothy, who was the most familiar with this world in general and this area in particular, as he eagerly took on the role of tour guide, describing what passed beneath them and what lay ahead.

By now they were over the forest, and Timothy soon pointed out one especially noteworthy landmark: a rock formation that jutted above treetop level, with a cave entrance close to its summit and a trail down its side, connecting it to ground level. That entrance, Timothy explained, led to the Cavern of Change, the place where his father had found himself when he first entered this world unwillingly via the amulet, as well as his mother, Justin, Melvin and Willis after they traced him here.

Here and there the forest was broken by other unusual rock formations, and further away to the south, a small lake could be seen—Lake Vin’hag, Timothy called it. At his request, Nicodemus steered them toward it. Timothy explained how his family had visited this lake on an earlier visit to Lahaikshe, and how he wanted to at least see it again, as it had been nearly a year. On closer approach, they could see the distinctive trees that grew in abundance along the shoreline, dominated by one species, the fildig, that grew especially high, with a palm-like trunk and a crest that made it look like an oversized cattail. A few small houses, some with boats tied up to nearby docks, dotted the shoreline. The opposite side of the lake, where the river flowed into it, contrasted greatly in appearance, being dominated by marshland and even more exotic-appearing vegetation. Long-legged wading creatures, heron-like in shape but flightless and more reptilian than avian in appearance, could be seen browsing in the shallows: ta’nakrivs, Timothy called them. Some looked up as the group passed overhead, heads bobbing back and forth quizzically on long necks.

They continued moving northeast, Timothy steering Nicodemus in the right direction. It was mostly more dense forest they passed over now, and soon they picked up some traveling companions: a pair of mhys’haspas, flying alongside for several minutes, turning heads toward them as questioningly as the ta’nakrivs but seeming, with their fixed dolphin-like smiles, to approve of these newcomers with their odd mode of travel. The two youngest rat children in the group, Glenda and Nadine, were at once wary and fascinated, staring almost unblinking at the mhys’haspas while sticking close to their parents Kevin and Alcina.

Nicodemus was highly impressed: “Such magnificent, handsome creatures,” he said out loud, remembering how seeing one flying overhead the day of his arrival had whetted his appetite for seeing more of them and the world they now all shared.

After a few minutes the mhys’haspas veered off in another direction; and soon the group was flying over a wide forest trail which led off in a northeast direction, with haisk’ve-drawn carriages and smaller wheeled conveyances, like bicycles and tricycles, upon it. If they followed this road, Timothy mentioned, it would lead directly to Timphon, the hometown of the Rusay visitors and where Freethorn’s exchange party was now staying. Lucy half-seriously suggested they take a swing down that way to say hello, but agreed that it was probably best not to interrupt their exchange visit at this point. Again their passage drew attention; many travelers looked up, shading eyes, even waving at these passing strangers, seeming quite casual in spite of the method of these strangers’ passing. Nicodemus was a bit surprised, but then remembered being told how it was part of the Rusay nature to be accepting and trusting of others unlike them; plus, sorcerers like Gwinthrayle were very readily accepted as well.

They soon found the foot trail again, the one leading from the Cavern of Change entrance. Timothy said they were now retracing the path his mother, Justin, Melvin and Willis trod when they used the amulet to seek out Johnathan. The path presently split in two: “The one on the left eventually leads to Gwinthrayle’s, but there’s something else along the way I wanted everyone to see.”

As Nicodemus directed the group above the path, Timothy told him privately, “You know, Nicodemus, it still feels kind of odd; not our mode of travel—well, actually, that does feel odd, but what I really meant was my directing you like this, considering what and who you are, and used to be, and what you mean to everyone.”

Nicodemus smiled and placed an arm around Timothy’s shoulders. “Perfectly understandable, my boy, but as I’ve said, the mantle of leadership had passed from me; but you, Timothy, and perhaps everyone else, at one time or another will be in the position to lead. The mantle is upon you now, because of your familiarity with this area. So you need not feel misgivings, even if I’m to be the one you’re leading.”

“I guess I knew that. I suppose I needed to hear it from you personally.” Timothy smiled and sat down next to Lucy, who was curious to know what he’d told Nicodemus. They talked quietly, laughing and hugging as they did. From behind, Lyndon tried to listen in till his “uncle” Kimball called him to his side, reminding him what he’d promised his parents. Lyndon sulked for a moment, reminding Timothy of Martin in his younger days, until Shawna helped to return his attention to their surroundings.

Timothy directed Nicodemus down another path that branched from the main one, leading to an abandoned stone house with a long, cylindrical pipelike structure lying in its front yard. “It was six, seven months after my dad returned from here,” Timothy explained, “when he brought all of us here, to see this place for ourselves. He thought it was important, he and Mom both, so that we’d better understand the sacrifices they made—Mom, Justin, Melvin and Willis—so that Dad could return to us.” They descended almost to ground level so that they could see the cylinder’s hollow interior, both ends completely open.

“It looks so…innocuous, so harmless,” said Kimball, “like something for children to play upon. And yet…”

“It came so close to…becoming a death trap,” finished Timothy. Well everyone knew the story, of how an interdimensional traveler, the same one that had so bedeviled Johnathan, Nicodemus and Jenner, had taken control of the amulet and used it to imprison the four and Sithpha. The heat and near-lack of food or water would surely have killed them were it not for Gwinthrayle and Johnathan’s timely intervention.

Everyone gave a moment of silent contemplation; then Lyndon said quietly to Timothy, “That’s it, isn’t it, Tim? If Mom hadn’t gotten out of there…”

“We…wouldn’t be here, would we?” finished Shawna. Timothy just nodded and clasped them both to him. They were already well aware of just how personally this story affected them.

Soon it was time to move on, and as they ascended once more, Nicodemus found he had gained greater insight into how much Gwinthrayle meant to virtually everyone in Freethorn, not just the Brisby family. What a considerable moral blow it would have been, had all three of the rats who’d accompanied Madeline died as well as she. He recalled his meeting Gwinthrayle the day of his arrival and looked forward to their second meeting all the more.

The terrain below was growing increasingly hilly, a sign that their destination was near. Timothy told how his family and friends had spent much time on past visits exploring not only the extensive gardens of Gwinthrayle’s compound, but some of the surrounding countryside as well. Soon more familiar landmarks came into view: the creek that flowed through the compound and the adjacent meadow, always a great recreational spot, and some of the specially-cultivated garden areas. Nicodemus brought them down lower so everyone could see some of the native plant life more closely. The strangeness in appearance of many of them was raising more oohs and aahs; Timothy explained how some were quite rare, gathered from other parts of the world. A small group of tysthals, animals about the size of rabbits but putting everyone in the mind of deer upon seeing them, looked up as the visitors passed over.

Soon their destination was in sight: in a small clearing, but with some vegetation growing up close, was a tan-and-silver colored building, roofed with several domes, shape dominated overall by flowing curves with few sharp angles. The house sat atop one low hill, with several terraces surrounding it.

“I was expecting something more like the human dwellings I’ve seen,” said Claire. “This is much nicer.”

“Indeed,” agreed her husband Derek. “If I were to live in a surface dwelling, I’d want it to look much like this.”

Nicodemus brought them lower still, so that they were circling the house slowly. Soon, as expected, a familiar figure waved to them from one of the terraced areas. Nicodemus waved in return and brought them all down to solid ground again.

“Well, it looks as though you all had an enjoyable trip,” said Gwinthrayle as he stepped forward, arms spread in greeting.

“That we most definitely did, my friend,” said Nicodemus. Behind him, everyone was re-orienting themselves to moving about on solid ground again, many laughing as they realized how accustomed they’d become in such a short span of time to floating on air, to the point where returning to the more familiar mode of locomotion was feeling strange.

After everyone gathered under the pavilion outside the side entrance of Gwinthrayle’s abode, Timothy took charge of introducing those who hadn’t met Gwinthrayle before or had only seen him briefly three days ago. Lyndon and Shawna had met him before but were still very much in awe of him, knowing what he meant to their very existence. Gwinthrayle was aware of this and told them that they needn’t regard him that way, and that they should think of him as they would a kindly old grandfather. Derek and Claire were the only two of the elder Rats who hadn’t yet visited Gwinthrayle’s home and so were as enthusiastic and curious as the youngsters.

Gwinthrayle went around to meet and chat with all his guests, many of whom excitedly related details of their airborne journey. Afterwards, he invited everyone inside to show where they would sleep, and to show them the interior overall. When Timothy pointed out the room Johnathan stayed in during his first extended visit (and again on subsequent visits), some of the younger ones wanted to hear more about those times, to which Gwinthrayle gladly obliged them. He led them to the dining room, where foodstuffs were already laid out—all from native plants, some of which some of the Freethorners hadn’t tried yet. Gwinthrayle invited his guests to eat their fill as he told them of how he’d taken in Johnathan and sought the means to send him home. He described how he tried different spells over those several months to send Johnathan home, at one point attempting a spell that would make contact with Nicodemus back on Earth, but it proved fruitless.

“I know how familiar you all must be with the rest of this story,” said Gwinthrayle at this point, “and how much many of you wanted to see the rest of the grounds. So…” Leading his guests back outside, he steered them toward the nearby trail leading down the gently-sloping hill into his gardens.

“Wow! What’s this one, Gwinthrayle?”

“That, Lucy, is a bavagdee tree, a variety which bears a fruit with a most delectable, delicately-flavored center—the ‘heart’—well worth the trouble one would take to reach it.” Even as Gwinthrayle explained further, Lucy was already halfway up its trunk, ascending via the tubercle-like growths that adorned it in spiral-staircase fashion. Other of the youngsters followed her lead. Nearby, Timothy described for others in the group some of the other plants in the garden. Adults and children alike were awestruck at the variety and strangeness in appearance of some of them.

As he and Claire admired the hivari bushes, Derek said, “All the while we’d been awaiting Justin and the others’ return from who-knows-where, they were seeing all this. Small wonder old Johnathan was a bit reluctant to leave.”

Everyone was finding more and more to endear them to the place. Kimball remarked on the sense of well-being and how easy it was to feel relaxed and at ease here, in spite of the differences with Earth and the land they knew. Indeed, the fact that all life here was scaled down in size was something many of them still had difficulty adjusting to, though there was no reluctance or apprehension in anyone. Even Reuben and Lilia—more so than some of the others, in fact—were intensely curious, exploring practically every square inch of their surroundings.

In an area with a wide patch of short-cropped minphiss—the equivalent of earthly grass—Lilia was almost enraptured by it, walking around in circles, spinning and laughing, seemingly unable to get enough of its feel under her feet. She turned cartwheels, flopped down and rolled around upon it; and Ellis, who soon joined her, was reminded of their moonlit nights on the south meadow. She appeared as carefree now as she was then, but it was so much different now.

“If we were human-sized,” explained Timothy, “This is what walking on grass would be like.” Soon almost everyone in the group was walking in a circular procession on this small patch of ground, like human children on a freshly-cut lawn.

Soon, the party continued moving on leisurely, with plenty more up-close examinations of the local flora, as well as its animal life. Several species of wilfajads, the generic word for a class of creatures analogous to birds, could be seen flying about; and other than them or the tysthals they’d seen coming in, other animal life was represented by small crawling and flying insects; and as with the plants, smaller than those they were more familiar with.

At one point Lucy and Bertie were crouched at the edge of the trail, examining a hard-shelled beetle-like insect. “Almost like a stag beetle,” said Lucy, “except it’s got eight legs.”

“All the insects here do,” said Timothy from over their shoulders. “I don’t remember the exact name for this one, but—”

Without warning, Lucy gave a sudden yelp and jumped back, almost knocking Timothy off his feet, looking startled but not fearful.

“What is it, Lucy?” Timothy and Bertie asked almost at once.

“Something in there, in the grass, minphiss, whatever. It looked at me!”

Before anyone could get a closer look, something emerged from a taller stand of vegetation. At first glance, it could be taken for a tiny flightless bird, its overall shape being birdlike though it had arms instead of wings, seemingly a tiny cousin to the ta’nakriv. It had neither feathers nor fur, but gold skin so shiny and polished in appearance that one could swear it was cast from a living precious metal. It looked at Lucy quizzically, cocking its head to and fro.

“Ooh! Tim, what is it? What is it?” Lucy crouched low in front of the creature, going head-to-head with it, instantly charmed.

“A waktini. They’re quite common around here. They’re wilfajads, too, one of the flightless species like the ta’nakriv.” As Timothy said this, more of them emerged, until there were five of them regarding this larger group, in both size and number, with unmistakable curiosity, which was definitely mutual. It didn’t take long for everyone to gather around, many shaking their heads in disbelief that these could be living, breathing beings as they were.

“Oh, they’re so precious,” said Susanna. “It’s too bad we can’t take one or two back with us.” Her brother Marcus tried to coax one of them closer to him. Claire smiled and nodded, pleased at how all the Freethorn children had learned the foremost rule regarding the native fauna: simply put, leave them be, in their natural habitat.

“I’m sure they’re very happy and content where they are now,” said Nicodemus, “although humans keep other animals as pets. I wonder…”

“Including rats and mice, lest we forget,” added Derek. “Perhaps not as bad a fate as being experimental subjects, but it’s still a form of captivity.”

“Hey, look at this one,” interjected Lucy. She had held her hand down in front of the “lead” waktini, which then walked onto it and climbed up her arm to her shoulder, where it was now smelling and gently nudging her ear, raising a giggle. “He’s tickling me.”

“It looks like you’ve made quite a friend, dear,” said Kimball.

“A friend as opposed to a pet,” added Nicodemus. “I do greatly prefer that idea.” He invited a waktini to climb onto him, which it obliged just as with Lucy.

Though everyone was feeling more and more relaxed the more time they spent here, and though Gwinthrayle never stated explicitly that everyone should stick together, none of his guests felt inclined to stray from the group, since no one wanted to become lost or miss any vital details Gwinthrayle might give about their surroundings, as everyone was most eager to learn.

There was a brief moment of anxiety when Shawna was startled by, of all things, a tree, though hardly an ordinary one. The umatay, Gwinthrayle explained, has a trunk that swells and contracts continuously, giving the appearance of breathing, as its way of transporting nutrients from the soil to its upper branches. He reassured Shawna that many Rusay are also startled upon seeing an umatay for the first time.

The party continued this leisurely tour of the grounds, gaining more familiarity with the plant and (occasionally) animal life. Soon they came to the wide meadow alongside the creek, a spot that had been a favorite of Timothy and his sibs since his first visit here, as it had been for their parents. Gwinthrayle told everyone they could stay here to relax as long as they wished. Even the ones who had been less inclined to take a leisurely pace at the beginning were perfectly sanguine at removing their clothing, laying back on the soft minphiss and basking in the sunshine, listening to Timothy discuss more of his family’s previous visits here; or taking a dip in the creek, as adolescent sweethearts Ephraim and Ophelia were the first to do, running hand in hand over the bank, making a resounding splash and howling with laughter.

Almost at the same time, two tysthals, probably from among the herd they’d seen on the way in, emerged into the clearing, staring quizzically at the two young Rats splashing about in the brook as if they’d come out for the express purpose of observing this rather odd behavior up close. Afterwards, they began nonchalantly grazing, even allowing some of the visitors to approach and touch them. As some of the others joined Ephraim and Ophelia in the brook, Tremaine, Lambert’s younger brother, engaged his sibling in an impromptu wrestling match on the lawn as Bertha watched, laughing heartily.

Presently, Ellis joined Bertie at the water’s edge. “Well, what do you think so far?” he asked as he sat beside his brother.

“It’s great,” Bertie replied simply.

“It sure whets my appetite for more, I can tell you,” said Ellis, undaunted by Bertie’s lukewarm response. “Just think of it, a whole world where it’s like we’re not so small anymore, not at the mercy of so many other creatures, though it’s pretty different in other parts of the world, Johnathan says. Boy, Tara is sure missing a lot.”

“Yeah, I guess so.” Bertie sighed, sounding almost annoyed.

Misreading his brother’s tone, Ellis said, “Hey, c’mon, Bert, it wasn’t her fault she didn’t feel well. Everybody gets a little—”

“That’s not what I meant. Look, let’s just drop it, okay?”

Ellis was only slightly taken aback. “C’mon, this is your brother talking to you here, your litter-mate. There’s no reason not to share whatever’s eating you, and if you want it kept secret, you got it.”

Bertie looked away with a sigh. “Look, I’m sorry I yelled. It’s probably nothing, anyway.”

“Maybe. But it could be something really important, too, if you feel that strongly about it.”

Bertie again looked away, silent; then he said, “She said she wasn’t feeling well, but…I just get the sense that…she stayed home for some other reason.”

“You mean Tara? Like what kind of reason?”

“You’ll think it’s silly.”

“I’ll decide that.”

“C’mon, Ellis, look at us. Her and me. How could I think…how could either of us think it could go on?”

“I don’t quite follow you…wait, you mean you think she’s seeing someone else?”

“I don’t know. But she said she wanted to spend some time alone yesterday. I mean, it’s not like I was spying on her or anything, but…”

“But what? That’s a worst-case scenario for sure. She has other friends, some of whom are male rats.”

“I know, I know. I suppose…I should just come out and ask her tomorrow when we get back.”

“That’s the spirit.” Ellis patted his brother’s back. He looked over to Lilia and Reuben, sitting a little further down the bank, talking quietly before both of them stood, preparing to go for a dip in a shallow area. Lilia locked eyes with him, smiling and waving. Ellis smiled back, suddenly feeling inspired. “Hey, remember what she told you?” he asked Bertie. “To have a…”

“To have a good time for both of us, I know.”

“Aaand…what’s something she does for enjoyment?” Ellis began moving his arm behind Bertie, who was squatting rather precariously.

But Bertie was prepared, recalling the day he and Tara had met. “Something like…this, maybe?” Just as Ellis gave Bertie a push forward, Bertie grabbed him, sending both of them pitching forward, though Ellis didn’t really resist being dragged into the creek.

Chapter 25 - Turlokeen’s story

After about a half hour, everyone was ready to move on. Even those among them who had still been reticent and reserved before let their enthusiasm show after the interlude by the creek; perhaps none more so than Bertie, whose water-soaked horseplay with Ellis—and others who were only too happy to join in the fray—had lifted his spirits considerably.

Their resumed tour through the gardens soon brought them to an area dominated by a row of plants, brilliant red and orange in color which gave the impression of jets of flame—“Hence the name flaming akphrav’chis,” Gwinthrayle told them. They were impressive enough, many of the visitors touching the plants carefully as if to confirm they were real; but the anomaly in their midst was beginning to generate its share of curiosity.

“And what have we here?” said Derek.

“It’s like something out of our memorial garden, isn’t it?” observed Lambert, running fingers over the ornately-carved obelisk, as tall as they, with what seemed to be writing in an unfamiliar alphabet carved into its face. He turned to Gwinthrayle. “I think I know what this is. I remember Martin telling me there was someone buried here.”

“Indeed, Lambert. Johnathan Brisby was not the first interdimensional visitor to this world, or to my home. But this poor fellow was the only one that met his end here, to the best of my knowledge; and so it was here that I felt he should be properly honored and laid to rest.”

“I know the story, but not everyone here does,” said Timothy.

“Ah…I would be only too happy to relate it to all of you now,” said Gwinthrayle. “But I must warn you, it is rather a tragic tale, one which the younger ones among you may find upsetting, although it could be said that it ends on a hopeful note.” The younger children were all asked if they wished to be taken elsewhere, but all agreed to stay, feeling that they were adequately prepared.

“Some eighteen years ago,” Gwinthrayle began, “there arrived on Lahaikshe, via the Cavern of Change, a fellow named Turlokeen, one whose physical appearance, I’m told, is very much that of creatures on your world that are enemies of your kind. Some of those Timothy and his family had since met not long ago; I’m sure they’ve told at least some of you about those meetings.” Many in the crowd indicated they had.

“Turlokeen was from an extradimensional world known as Tikinda, home to two civilized cultures whose existence was unknown to one another, save for a small circle of individuals in the smaller race, the Kantiri. A sorcerer named Gondlonico, his apprentice Tugrelho, Turlokeen’s sister Kalfomenda (who was Tugrelho’s lover and later lifemate), and another named Dirndrayo were the main players in this drama, the details of which I gleaned later from some of the principals.

“Tikinda’s larger race, the Ginsteem, occupied the outer coastal areas of the continent the two races unknowingly shared, and they regarded the interior with superstition and so did not venture or settle very far inland, keeping the Kantiri’s territory inviolate from invasion. There were workers of sorcery among the Kantiri that had discovered that they were not the only civilized race in the world, and in time an inner circle of some twenty individuals were the only ones who knew of the Ginsteem’s existence, including those I’ve already named. But some in the inner circle believed the status quo could not last: that eventually the Ginsteem would seek to expand their territory, make inroads to the interior and that they likely wouldn’t be willing to coexist peacefully with their smaller neighbors. Eventually a vote was taken, and some in this group went on scouting missions to seek evidence that the Ginsteem might be on their way.

“On one such mission were Turlokeen and Dirndrayo, the latter of whom was a sorcerer, though of less experience than Gondlonico. They made the journey partially on foot and via Dirndrayo’s abilities, which included command of other creatures for short periods, including one particularly fierce one known as the flintarak. I believe Timothy knows something of them, perhaps firsthand.” Gwinthrayle paused and gave Timothy a knowing look.

“Their assignment was to take them close to the nearest Ginsteem community, a tiny outpost that was as far inland as they normally settled. However, on the way, the pair, who were only acquaintances, had, after some discussion about the mission, found themselves disagreeing over the matter of approaching any of the Ginsteem directly. They’d been specifically instructed not to engage or to approach at all, but Dirndrayo believed it could be of some benefit to them, in spite of all the discussions and observations from afar which resulted in the inner circle’s conclusion that the Ginsteem would react to them with superstition and fear. The argument became so heated that Dirndrayo made use of a spell intended to send Turlokeen away a short distance.

“But…let’s say, perhaps a bit charitably, that Dirndrayo was not the most competent worker of magicks. His spell succeeded not only in sending Turlokeen away, but away from Tikinda entirely! He found himself, as you may well guess, in this very world, in the Cavern of Change that welcomed Johnathan Brisby and others to this world; and like Johnathan, Turlokeen arrived utterly bewildered by what had befallen him, but soon left the cavern area, reasoning that someone with sorcerous powers might help him. Much as Johnathan would do later, he wandered more or less aimlessly, exploring this world he’d unexpectedly found himself a part of. And, as with Johnathan, I soon became aware of his presence here, keeping track of his activities from a distance, though not constantly; there were other matters that had me distracted a good portion of the time. But I was certain he was in no danger, at least not from any Rusay.”

Gwinthrayle paused, looking lost in thought for a moment, and then he went on: “So…I observed Turlokeen venturing forth, seeming determined to make the best of his new situation. He quickly found the main road that comes closest to the cavern area—the one you saw on the way here—and almost immediately came upon a scene that spurred him to action: a haisk’ve running at a seemingly headlong pace toward a small Rusay child. In an instant, without considering how startling his appearance might be, Turlokeen rushed forward and snatched the boy up and out of harm’s way—or what he’d thought to be so. The boy gave a startled cry even as Turlokeen set him down, and then he raced toward his parents, who were nearby. They weren’t fearful at this stranger’s appearance, but wondered what he thought he was doing, after the child described what he’d done.

“Of course, there was that language barrier, but Turlokeen quickly understood the situation better as he saw the boy approach the haisk’ve, and stroke and pet it. He had mistaken the beast’s approach as one dangerous to the child, who was in no danger; it would have slowed down very quickly before it would trample him. Of course, the Rusay couple could not convey all of this information to Turlokeen, but it was obvious to them that he was a stranger to this land and knew not how to get home. They offered to let him accompany them for a while, and over the course of that day, he learned some of our language, enough for them to convey to him that there was someone, one they didn’t know personally but knew of as one who might possibly help him to get home.” Gwinthrayle smiled, acknowledging the realization in much of his audience.

“Yourself, I presume.”

“Exactly, Kimball. My reputation at that time was a bit different than it is now. I ventured outside my home and met and visited with the people much more often, and so I was more widely known as one who knew of many things most are not privy to. This Rusay couple knew not of my home’s precise location—then, just as now, I prefer to maintain a certain degree of privacy—but they knew where it was generally.

“Just after sunset, Turlokeen’s hosts, whose names were Sorisphila, the father, his wife Jaymli, and son Vorntha, arrived at their home, where Turlokeen met others of this extended family, who invited him to stay on as long as he wished. He was grateful for their hospitality, and fascinated by his hosts’ utter lack of fear or reluctance of one so different in appearance, but he made it clear that he wished to move on soon, to find this one who could help him.

“Though he genuinely wanted to stay longer, Turlokeen set out on his journey early the next morning, accompanied by Jaymli’s younger brother Toronpha, who had the greatest familiarity with the area. As some of you know, it is terrain that is quite hilly, often with jagged rock formations, in the area that our two young travelers crossed. As I said, there were other matters which called for my attention, which I believed were more important, and so I believed that there was little need to monitor their progress on more than an irregular basis, at best; and I was sure Toronpha was eminently capable of leading Turlokeen to me without incident. Unfortunately, there were incidents, the details of which I learned later via my viewscreen and from Toronpha himself.

“The two made their way at a fairly leisurely pace, down well-defined trails and the occasional shortcut, conversing much of the time and learning more about each other’s people and home; and Toronpha, while not an excessive braggart, exercised no small amount of youthful enthusiasm for his own tracking abilities and familiarity with the area. Alas, as is so often the case, his enthusiasm led to overconfidence…something he admitted to me himself.

“While passing through a particularly rocky area, Toronpha opted to lead Turlokeen through another shortcut which he insisted was safe enough for him to have successfully crossed before. He did emphasize that one needed to take every step carefully, and so they continued on. Turlokeen, as I’d heard later, was not unfamiliar with this kind of terrain, so he wasn’t especially reluctant; but it was Toronpha who took a misstep that sent him tumbling down a steep hillside. It wasn’t a sheer drop, but it was painful enough for him, and Turlokeen immediately made his way swiftly but carefully down the incline to lend aid. He knew enough of first aid to assess his new friend’s injuries, and found them serious enough that moving him could risk further injury. Toronpha was certain, though, that I could be of assistance, and was able to give Turlokeen further directions for the rest of the journey. So Turlokeen treated Toronpha’s injuries—mainly a badly sprained leg—as best he could, and then resumed the journey alone, vowing to return as soon as possible…accompanied by me.

“Well…he had gone only a short ways, some 20 minutes after leaving Toronpha, when he came to a narrow gap between two large boulders. Toronpha had warned about what lay on the other side, and so Turlokeen was prepared for the sheer drop—straight down, with a very narrow ledge to proceed upon. I think he must have paused to reflect on the situation for a moment—no doubt, on how he was suddenly thrust into seeking help for someone who was still an acquaintance, of a race whose existence he was unaware of two days before, in a world completely different from his own, and all at possible risk to his own health, and even considering how natural an impulse it was for him to help others. And yet, in observing him later, I’m positive that it was this brief instant of being lost in thought that led to what happened next.

“As he made his way along the ledge, he looked to one side to see a large, dark shape advancing upon him. He’d had seen mhys’haspas and had been told of them, that they were harmless to other animal life and were by nature curious; but this one’s sudden appearance was so startling, understandably so, that it was all it took to cause Turlokeen to lose his balance completely and topple over the edge.

“It had been only minutes before that I had made my most recent periodic check on the two travelers’ progress. I had observed Turlokeen now moving on alone, and Toronpha propped up against a tree with his leg in a splint, looking anxious but apparently not in great pain. I immediately left, borne by a spell of transportation that I hoped would speed me to their aid to avert any further trouble. I knew the area Turlokeen was passing through to be a potentially hazardous one, so I resolved to come to him first, since Toronpha seemed safe for the time being. But alas, my worst fears were confirmed when I arrived on the scene.”

Gwinthrayle paused, sighing. “On the ground below he lay, and I could tell that he had to be gone already, or close; he’d landed on some jagged rocks, and from such a great height that he had to have sustained massive internal injuries. As I examined him, he opened his eyes, and I’m sure he was aware of my presence and that I’d come to help. He started to say something I couldn’t make out…and then he was gone. I immediately initiated a spell to fan any spark of life that may remain, but it was too late. I lay Turlokeen’s head back, cursing myself for not having observed his progress more closely; I was so certain that he would have been led straight to me without mishap. It was then that I noticed the mhys’haspa crouched nearby, wings folded, expression almost sorrowful in spite of its fixed smile, apparently having stayed close by since Turlokeen’s fall, as if it felt responsible but knew not how to help him. I resolved to put behind me any sense of blame I had for myself, and so placed a protective shield around him, and left to find the other who required my assistance.

“In short order, I’d brought Toronpha and Turlokeen’s body to my home, where I helped speed the healing of Toronpha’s injured leg. He was devastated, naturally, about Turlokeen’s death, since he’d considered himself responsible for Turlokeen’s safety, being his guide, and also knowing that Turlokeen had left to get help for him; but, perhaps most importantly, because the two had taken quite a liking to each other in spite of their many differences. I leveled with Toronpha on the reasons for my not going out to meet them before their troubles began. He didn’t hold me to blame, though, and in fact we helped each other greatly in assuaging any guilt either of us may have felt. Then, too, there was a more practical consideration: what to do with Turlokeen’s body. We quickly decided upon burial in my own gardens, since it was virtually impossible for it to be sent to his home dimension.

“So…I brought Toronpha home, meeting with his family to explain what had befallen him and Turlokeen; but, some days later, I would have my second meeting with one of his race.

“But first…there is the matter of those he had left behind on Tikinda. Dirndrayo, unaware of his blunder that had banished Turlokeen from their world, made his way to the small Ginsteem community, a frontier settlement inhabited by fewer than a hundred. He still believed it was possible to approach them; but his first attempt almost cost him his life. A Ginsteem spotted him, little more than a glimpse through some thick foliage, but enough for this one to advance upon him quickly, brandishing a garden implement, probably believing Dirndrayo to be some common vermin. He was able to get to safety easily enough, but needless to say he had second thoughts on a direct approach.

“He carried out his assignment over the next two days, observing these people from a safe distance and assessing their possible intentions; and on his return trip, expected to meet up with Turlokeen, prepared to apologize for dismissing him as he did. But when he returned home to hear that Turlokeen was unaccounted for, a search using a device like my own Orb of Disclosure was conducted. But Turlokeen was nowhere to be found. It was determined that Dirndrayo had used the wrong spell to send him away, one that he’d only begun to master. As you can imagine, the others in the Circle were not happy with this turn of events, and Dirndrayo was barred from using sorcery indefinitely. Turlokeen’s sister Kalfomenda convinced Gondlonico to take her on as his new apprentice; and her lover, Tugrelho, was initially troubled by her new interests even as he was aware of how close Kalfomenda was to her brother and wanted to find him.

“Days later Gondlonico succeeded in recreating the spell that sent Turlokeen off to parts unknown, though he was unable to contact me directly. Kalfomenda convinced him to send her to Lahaikshe, determined to learn her brother’s fate. Tugrelho understandably objected, since she would be venturing into those same parts unknown, though he was assured that wherever Turlokeen went, it was a world hospitable to their kind, increasing the chances of his survival, so it would be safe enough for her as well. Tugrelho eventually agreed, though he was prepared to hold Gondlonico to blame personally if she were unable to return.

“Though Gondlonico could not communicate with me directly, we knew this was a spell to be worked in tandem that would send Kalfomenda to Lahaikshe, one which he would initiate. It succeeded, sending her to the Cavern as it did her brother. Unlike with Turlokeen, though, I immediately set out to meet her and bring her here upon her arrival. Of course I had no choice but to break the sad news to her, as I sought to explain as best I could about what had befallen her brother. I showed her where Turlokeen had been interred—this very spot—and allowed her all the time she needed to grieve before making any plans to send her home. In the meantime, I assured her, I would make her stay as enjoyable as possible.

“It was only later that day, though, that Kalfomenda approached me, almost begging me for further details about this world she’d found herself a part of. We compared notes on Turlokeen’s strange and unexpected transference, and we found much that was still mysterious. I told her of how interdimensional visitors were a fairly common occurrence here, specifically in this part of Lahaikshe, for reasons I’d never been fully able to fathom; and she told me how her mentor Gondlonico hadn’t fully gathered how Dirndrayo’s spell had gone so seriously awry. But for the time being, there was the immediate matter of the disposition of Turlokeen’s body. She wanted to bring it back with her to Tikinda, but I wasn’t certain it would be possible for both of them together, since this particular spell only worked with living subjects. Naturally she was dismayed, but she understood and thanked me for giving him proper honors. I offered to take her on a guided tour of the area; and she was remarkably keen on the idea, telling me that though she’d felt some anxiety over coming here at first, she was curious to see more, displaying a level of enthusiasm that frankly surprised me, given the circumstances.

“I must confess that Kalfomenda’s positive attitude and zest for life influenced me greatly, doing much to assuage my own feelings of having failed Turlokeen. She took very well to seeing more of her temporary home and meeting its people, every bit as much as would Johnathan when he would be my guest several years later, though it was for a far briefer time. By the time conditions were right to work the spell that would return her home, she had accepted that Turlokeen’s body would have to stay here, and so she directed me in carving the proper epitaph upon his marker, which you all see now.

“During our time together, she spoke at length of her world, especially how the Kantiri and the Ginsteem occupy different areas and are unknown to each other save for her inner circle. She told me of their concerns about the Ginsteem’s eventual expansion, and the last I’d been informed, it’s a matter that’s still known only to a select few and the source of some uneasiness among them.

“Kalfomenda spent a total of nine days as my guest, and when the time came to send her home, again working in tandem with Gondlonico, I must confess it was with some reluctance on both our parts. I would miss her, I knew, but she promised me that she would return for a visit if she could.

“And as some of you know firsthand, she made good on her promise. Some years later, after she’d become more practiced in the mystic arts, she again turned up on my doorstep, and not alone: she and Tugrelho had been married for some time and they arrived together; though without their children, unfortunately, since it was a spell that could only be worked under certain conditions and could only transport two. Their second visit, though, was perhaps of greater import. It was still the two of them, but by sheer chance, it coincided with another: the Brisby family, no less. And here was where the physical differences I’d alluded to earlier came into play: the first they laid eyes upon each other, it was not without initial trepidation in both parties; for the Kantiri bear a strong resemblance to canine species upon your Earth, such as foxes or coyotes, yet they are rat-sized. Conversely, your species, to the Kantiri, are essentially miniature versions of a creature I’d mentioned earlier, known as the flintarak, who are known to be dangerous to Kantiri. This initial anxiety wore off quickly, of course; and as Timothy has doubtless told many of you, they became good friends with his family and others among you as well. This led to other adventures when they used the Stone to visit the Kantiri couple on their world.

“So, while conditions with their people aren’t necessarily ideal on Tikinda, they still have good lives there. Time will tell, of course, if they can be maintained.”

Gwinthrayle paused, and most of his audience thought the story had ended; then Claire said, “Is this, then, the ‘hopeful note’ you spoke of at the beginning?”

“Partially, yes; but what I mainly referred to was an event that unfolded very quietly several years later, which only came to my attention by chance. You may find it astounding or difficult to believe, but I assure you it’s all true.

“It happened some years after Turlokeen had been laid to rest, around a year before Johnathan’s arrival. I was visiting one of the area villages, just taking in the sights, sounds and smells of the local marketplace. I was in the middle of buying a few supplies when I came across a young man of about 14 years telling a story to a group of children seated in a semicircle. Now this was hardly an uncommon sight, but I quickly felt compelled to listen in, and I was certainly rewarded for the effort. The boy told of a land beyond all lands known to the Rusay, with strange plants and animals; but when he described the people of this land, who held sway over it as the Rusay do here, I was frankly astonished.

“The description he gave was that of the Kantiri!” Gwinthrayle paused as audience members exchanged surprised expressions. “For a moment, I wondered if he had actually seen Kalfomenda or Turlokeen and had built this story around one of them. I quickly realized the impossibility of this, given the lad’s age; and as I realized the more likely possibility, I concentrated on listening further to his tale.

“Soon he was finished; and after his audience had left, I took him aside and complimented him on his storytelling prowess, and how he must have a vivid imagination to come up with such detailed and exotic imagery, as if he’d seen this place for himself.

“Maybe there was something in the way I spoke to him, but he instantly seemed compelled to tell me more about this talent of his. He confided that when he was around seven years old, he began…‘seeing’ things. Visions of other places, exotic locales would come to him unbidden, and he began to feel as if he’d been there himself, living a whole other life. Eventually the boy—whose name, by the way, was Neephra—could name people, places and things that existed in this land, including the name he thought he had in this other life.”

As Gwinthrayle paused, Kimball offered, “And that name…was Turlokeen, wasn’t it?”

“Indeed, Kimball.” There were more surprised expressions, with the exception of Timothy, who merely nodded with arms folded. “‘A strange name, I know,’ Neephra said to me, ‘but it’s the one that kept coming to me.’ He went on to give other names of people he seemed to have known among this strange race that appeared much like beasts that walked upright. It all felt so real to him, and when he first told his parents about it, they at first dismissed it as the product of an overactive imagination, but they did compliment him on his descriptive powers and did not discourage him. He hesitated to tell his peers about it, though, believing they would either react as his parents did at first, or make fun of him. He did, however, tell his closest friend Phornsa about what he’d ‘seen’ in this other existence, but without actually saying he believed he’d actually been there.

“Phornsa was captivated and wanted to hear more; and, as Neephra described it, something clicked in his mind. He decided right then and there that he wouldn’t try to convince others that he’d actually lived this other life, and instead just let everyone believe that he’d made it all up, completely out of his head. He’d already been told he had a genuine and engaging talent for storytelling; so, he reasoned, why not use that talent as an outlet for these visions of his? He admitted that, at first, it bothered him to pretend this other life didn’t actually happen, as real as it seemed to him. But it quickly didn’t matter; as he saw more and more the pleasure he was giving to others by telling these tales, he figured wisely, why ruin a good thing? And so he went on to gain quite a reputation far and wide as a master storyteller, even at his tender age. And never again did Neephra try to convince anyone, with the exceptions of his family and myself, that he’d actually led this previous life.

“He’s still very much plying his trade, by the way, and has become happily married with a child, his tales of faraway places as entertaining as ever.”

There was a mixture of reactions at the conclusion of this epilogue to Turlokeen’s story, ranging from amazement to mild skepticism. “Extraordinary,” said Derek, “to think that, not only was Turlokeen…reincarnated, reborn on this world not his own, but as a whole different being, a different species.”

“I guess it’s been said plenty,” added Kimball, “but Lahaikshe certainly has been full of surprises for newcomers like us, and there’s sure to be others in store.” Others expressed similar views but a couple still found the whole concept of a soul or spirit being reborn, let alone in a completely different species native to another dimension, hard to swallow.

“Ah, but what about our own Nicodemus?” Derek countered. “We’ve all seen for ourselves that it’s certainly possible for one to ‘come back,’ as it were, never mind the circumstances.”

“Didn’t you once say, Derek,” said Nicodemus, “that it’s always wise to maintain a healthy skepticism?”

“I barely know the meaning of the word anymore, old friend,” said Derek with a laugh, “and you’re only the latest example of why!”

“A fair assessment, indeed,” agreed Nicodemus. He gazed away, looking to some as if he had more to say on the subject.

Everyone agreed it was about time to return to the house for the midday meal, so the whole assemblage got to their feet to return to the main trail. On the way, few further words were spoken; everyone, even the younger children, had become reflective of the story of Turlokeen’s final fate. There was still more to see, though: other plants the visitors hadn’t seen before as well as animal life.

“Ooh, look, Lilia—two more mhys’haspas,” said Ellis, pointing above their heads at the two flying creatures wheeling through the air—not unlike vultures, as others native to Earth had already observed, though they were not known to be carrion eaters.

Lilia looked up, but didn’t seem especially interested, unusual for her.

“Are you all right?” Ellis asked. “It’s the story about Turlokeen, isn’t it?”

She smiled slightly, nodding. “I just…don’t know how to explain it. I don’t have the words.” She sighed. “It was so sad, but there was also something…about it that made me feel almost…hopeful, I guess, or safe…secure. That still isn’t quite it, but…” She sighed, disappointed over not being able to express herself better.

“I think I know what you mean. It’s pretty amazing. I mean…can you imagine actually feeling like you’ve lived a whole second life? That you were once a whole different…person…” Ellis’s voice trailed as he realized who he was talking to. “I guess…you would know, wouldn’t you? I’m sorry, Lilia, I wasn’t thinking.”

But Lilia actually seemed amused by the admission. “That’s all right, Ellis, I don’t mind. That was a part of me that’s still a part of me, and I accept it. It’s the part that…makes me want to be with you.” She took his hand, squeezing it.

“You know, what occurred to me,” cut in Bertie from behind them, “is that…when any of us die, and we’re here on Lahaikshe— if we’re here on Lahaikshe—could the same thing happen? Could any of us come back as Rusays?”

The three looked at each other. “Wow,” said Ellis. “I guess it’s possible, isn’t it?” They posed the question to Gwinthrayle.

“It most certainly could happen,” said Gwinthrayle, “though to the best of my knowledge, it’s only happened once. Of course…Turlokeen’s also the only non-native I know of who died here.”

“Hmm. That sounds like enough of a precedent to me.” Ellis turned toward Nicodemus, who walked alongside them and seemed, to Ellis, oddly silent; he figured this would be a subject to which Nicodemus would have plenty to add.

But Nicodemus had hardly been oblivious. “It is fascinating to ponder,” he said, “and if it can happen once…” He said no more, but in spite of this low-key manner, it seemed to Ellis that the subject meant more to him that just one of casual conversation. Indeed, in his case especially, how could it not?

“So, Ellis,” said Bertie, “Would you want to come back as a Rusay?”

“I don’t think I’d mind at all.”

“I don’t think I’d feel quite right without fur,” added Bertie. “Er, no offense, Gwinthrayle.”

Gwinthrayle chuckled. “None taken, lad. But I’m sure you’d find having a hairless hide would have its advantages also.” The mice laughed, not expecting Gwinthrayle to phrase it quite that way.

Chapter 26 - Lilia the explorer

The afternoon passed with more exploring of the grounds, more storytelling, more swimming in the brook and basking in the sun. At one point Nicodemus and Kimball began a lengthy discussion about Vincent, with Lilia and Reuben listening attentively, the siblings having become very interested in learning more about the father they never knew. Kimball initially admitted that, even though he knew Vincent better than anyone, Nicodemus probably could tell more about him since he possessed some of Vincent’s memories. This was borne out as the two detailed their differing perspectives, finding many particular events they both remembered in detail. Kimball described his and Patricia’s first meeting with Vincent, and the aura of mystery that surrounded his comings and goings in this and subsequent meetings—sudden, silent wraithlike appearances as if knowing where and when his guests would arrive, and evasiveness when asked how he managed this or the precise location of his home. This tendency toward secrecy, Nicodemus explained, was another way that portion of his persona influenced Vincent. Just as he was intent on keeping the Rats of NIMH’s existence and activities secret, so Vincent did the same about many aspects of his life. It was nothing he could have explained rationally; it just seemed to be of the utmost importance to him, and he wouldn’t even let those he considered his closest friends worm those secrets from him. It made clearer to Kimball many of the eccentricities in Vincent’s words and actions and how they seemed to border on madness, especially in regards to his self-appointed mission, to observe all that happened inside the NIMH lab. This, confirmed Nicodemus, was very much as it appeared to Kimball—“What some may call obsessive-compulsive behavior”—but also, as Kimball suspected, partially to cover for his agoraphobia and shame in admitting this perceived weakness to his friends.

Reuben brought up the question of whether that was Nicodemus’s influence at work when Vincent left the NIMH lab to meet his and Lilia’s mother and the other females he’d mated with. There was little if any influence from him, Nicodemus replied; that was very much Vincent’s own internal tug-of-war between his agoraphobia and the desire to find a mate and start a family. Why hadn’t he brought one of those females to NIMH to live with him there? Lilia wondered. This was partially due to the secrecy aspect, but also because—as Kimball and others had already surmised—Vincent feared for the safety of any mate or future offspring in living there, and felt they would deserve better than the life he had to offer. Nicodemus also reiterated how Vincent may very well have overcome his agoraphobia on that fateful day when he decided spontaneously to reunite with Amelia, the one out of all his temporary mates that he had genuinely loved. Tragically, the attempt to end his bachelorhood succeeded in ending his life altogether. As sad a tale as it was, all agreed, it was at least now understood much better.

These and more events in Vincent’s life were discussed, well past the time everyone gathered back at the house for the evening meal. There, Derek brought up a matter that many wondered about: “How is it for you, Nicodemus, having all those memories in you? Not just yours and Vincent’s, but some of Lilia’s and Reuben’s here, and other children of Vincent’s? Hasn’t it been confusing for you, keeping track of whose memories are whose?”

“Ah…I can see how such a situation would make for quite an identity crisis, as it were. But, no, it’s really not a problem. My own memories are quite easily separable from those others, for which I remember as if I were…well, I suppose the best analogy would be if I were standing close by Vincent or Boris or Ardo, experiencing what they did, but at the same time experiencing the same feelings and emotions as they. Somewhere between being an observer and a participant, I suppose.”

After the meal, sleeping arrangements were set up for everyone, with most of Gwinthrayle’s guests staying in the several rooms provided for them but with a few electing to try sleeping outside in the open (though Ellis or Lilia weren’t among them), something many of the visitors had become fond of doing in Freethorn. Then, while the others either further explored the house or spent more time outside in the receding daylight, Nicodemus asked Gwinthrayle if he could spend some time in his host’s private study, with its many rare and unique volumes of Lahaikshean history and arcane lore. Gwinthrayle generously obliged, allowing Nicodemus all the time he desired, but advising him to avoid trying out spells of his own, were he so inclined. Nicodemus gave his assurance that some solitary study was all he wanted.

One group of younger rats and mice decided, even as the daylight gave way to twilight, to get adventurous and explore some of the surrounding area that was off the beaten path. True to descriptions from Timothy and Gwinthrayle, the feeling of being completely safe from harm was very strong, in spite of the onset of night. Everyone was laughing, joking, teasing each other playfully as they climbed bavagdee trees, jumped up and down from rocks, and generally explored their way through their surroundings. No one wanted to get lost, though, so they took care to keep directions back to the house straight. Ophelia was an excellent tracker, as good as Martin Brisby, and was confident she could lead them back easily if they did lose their way. They also took care not to get too overconfident and not forge ahead blindly; accidents could still happen, after all, and Turlokeen’s experience had become regarded by everyone as a cautionary tale.

It became especially so as they abruptly came upon a very steep incline; not a sheer drop, though, and one they could certainly negotiate their way down carefully if they chose. All six of them looked over this new discovery as closely as they could in the dim light.

“Look at that one area,” observed Veronica. “I don’t think we’ve seen plants like those yet.” It looked like a mangrove thicket, with a tangled-appearing complex of roots on all sides, giving the impression of secrets concealed within.

“Looks strange, all right,” observed Barbara Anne. “Shall we?” she added with a grin.

“Sure, why not?” said Ephraim. “Looks like it would make a dandy hideaway.” He gave Ophelia a playful nudge.

“No way are we leaving you two alone,” said Veronica with a laugh.

“I don’t know,” said Ellis, “I wouldn’t want to make my way down a hill like this in the dark. Or up.”

“Yeah, maybe he’s right,” agreed Barbara Anne. “We can always come back tomorrow. We’ll have plenty of time.”

Throughout the discussion, Lilia continued gazing down at the thicket silently, imagination suddenly stirred, so intent that she didn’t even hear the others come to an agreement about returning to the house.

“Well, I suppose it’s unanimous, then,” said Ellis. “How about you, Lilia? Lilia?”

“Earth to Lilia; I mean, Lahaikshe to Lilia.” Barbara Anne chortled as Lilia looked up, a bit startled.

“C’mon, give her a break. The rest of us have decided to go back, Lilia. What do you think?”

“Oh, I guess so, Ellis. It is…getting late. We did almost…sneak away, didn’t we?”

“Yeah, and I’ll bet you anything someone’s got a search party together.”

“You mean Reuben, don’t you?” Lilia laughed. She took Ellis’s arm, continuing to discuss the point as Ophelia began leading them back to the house; and though Lilia didn’t seem overly distracted, Ellis did catch her glancing over her shoulder toward the ravine. He assured her they would come here again in daylight tomorrow, and she seemed completely agreeable to it.

Ellis took a moment to regard how much Lilia had changed for the better these past few days. Though her dismissal of Reuben being worried sounded like her temporary “nighttime” persona, he was sure it was different now. If all Nicodemus had told them was true, this was the “true” Lilia at his side now, one that was unfettered by old fears and restrictions, one that Ellis wanted to get to know all the more.

As the group approached the upper terrace, they saw a small group seemingly waiting for them. Sure enough, Reuben was among them, and they were preparing a search for the nocturnal adventure-seekers. Though he was outwardly calm, Ellis could tell he’d been more worried than he let on and so reassured him that his sister was in no kind of danger. Reuben admitted he was still having some difficulty in letting go of old habits.

After everyone was gathered inside (including Nicodemus, who had been in Gwinthrayle’s study for the past few hours and had to tear himself away), Gwinthrayle began a travelogue presentation of sorts utilizing his magic viewscreen—or Orb of Disclosure, as it was also known—taking his guests on a whirlwind tour of the entire planet, showing them landforms and climates as varied as those on Earth. When the screen showed one particular location, Gwinthrayle paused, appearing surprised to the others. They all looked more closely, but couldn’t see anything especially unusual—a dry, barren desert landscape, with barren rock, windblown sand and no vegetation in sight. Nicodemus asked if anything was wrong, and Gwinthrayle replied that he thought he was looking at one certain area, but must have been mistaken. The screen continued its “tour.”

After this, Lilia told Ellis and Reuben she was going outside for a while—just to think, she told them, and asked to be left alone for that time. They thought it a bit odd but agreed to it and would pass the word on to the others. She assured them she wouldn’t stray far.

Out on the terrace, Lilia lay on her back, gazing at the stars but with thoughts very much on other matters. She’d had so many strange and unusual thoughts and feelings these past few days, especially since coming here to Gwinthrayle’s. She’d discussed this with Ellis, but could only really scratch the surface; so much of what she was feeling was so indescribable. It wasn’t dread or uncertainty of the future; indeed, she felt hopeful, that there was much to look forward to. She thought back to her impulsive confession to Ellis about wanting children. She didn’t entirely regret it; she still felt that way. But certainly that was tied in with all these other strange feelings and impressions, which she couldn’t help thinking were themselves associated with…this very world, something in its very essence. She wasn’t the only one who’d been feeling this way; just yesterday, there was Karen and her description of feeling tied to this world while nursing her babies, and Lambert’s remark on the dreams some had had, which struck a chord with her, but not in a way she could express aloud. This was part of the reason she’d been so enthusiastic about this trip; she’d felt certain she’d get some answers away from Freethorn, and what better place than the home of one who must know many secrets and mysteries of this world? Yet, she’d been reluctant to talk to Gwinthrayle directly on these matters. She still felt shy about approaching relative strangers on such personal matters, though she knew it was silly, considering how kind and approachable Gwinthrayle was. More than that, though, she felt sure that answers were forthcoming and that they would come to her with no prompting from anyone, not even Gwinthrayle.

And now, there was this latest incident, seemingly triggered by seeing that strange, tangled thicket in the ravine. It had almost seemed to call to her; but why, with all the other strange and exotic plant life they’d all seen? What made that so special? Lilia closed her eyes, picturing it; and sighed as the feelings associated with that first sighting returned—a mixture of sadness, longing, a hint of déjà vu, but mostly a desire to return. She sat bolt upright, suddenly determined to satisfy this need; then she looked toward the house. Should she ask someone to come with her? No, not even Ellis or Reuben. Somehow—and again it was nothing she could explain—she knew this was something she needed to do on her own. But she did promise she wouldn’t go far; she didn’t want to worry anyone, but she knew where to go, and it wouldn’t take long to get there and back.

Her mind made up, she got up and looked around, recalling the way she and the others had taken before. She set out, unafraid and determined, feeling bolder, almost exhilarated, with every step. She looked up, smiling at the moon and stars which provided companionship aplenty. Even as she negotiated her way through this off-trail area, around rocks and shrubbery, through groves of tall, majestic vinthahak trees and tangled vines, she could still picture the ravine and wondered what answers, if any, she would find there. Even so, she took care not to lose her way.

Soon she was standing at the same spot as before. Though it was darker now, the thicket that held such fascination for her stood out just as prominently, owing as much to Lilia’s excellent night vision as to the greater amount of moonlight illuminating the scene. Again there was that odd mix of emotion, reinforcing her resolve; and so, taking a deep breath, she began making her way down the steep incline tail first, taking each step with care but still very mindful of her surroundings, which were slowly, subtly beginning to take on a new character. Strange sounds, odd lights floating about like fireflies but which didn’t seem to originate from any living creature, and still that mix of emotion drawing her nearer to her goal like a moth to flame. The unfamiliarity with the area and the overall strangeness of the situation bothered her not a whit, since she’d been comfortable with the night all her life, and especially in light of recent events, recalling fully her own feelings associated with them; though she was still uncertain, as was Nicodemus, of the precise cause of her previous apparent split personality.

Maybe the answer to that lies here, she mused; then, just as the thought crossed her mind, she abruptly found herself tumbling the rest of the way to the floor of the ravine. She managed to curl up in a ball and she soon came to a stop unhurt, after which she uncurled and sat up to get her bearings. She smiled and shook her head, even laughed as she wondered how she could have taken such a silly misstep. For a moment, she was reminded of Turlokeen’s story, and how his own misstep could certainly not be termed silly, and she realized she was lucky this was a place where one would have a much softer landing.

Oh well, it brought her to her goal that much faster, and so she got up and adjusted her cloak; she felt a bit dismayed that she might be getting it stained and unkempt so soon after it was given to her. But there was no thought of turning back yet; and so she turned to face her goal, regarding the grove’s tangled, arching roots and hoping they wouldn’t prove too much of an obstacle. In spite of this, there was still that “beckoning” quality to it, and she responded unhesitantly, the “firefly” lights and odd sounds, mostly like breathy whistles, continued as she began to negotiate her way through the tangle. At least they don’t have thorns, she thought as she pressed on, finding she was actually enjoying the challenge.

Soon she could clearly see more open space ahead, and all at once, her earlier suspicion was confirmed, that there was a clearing within, not especially large, but one that would make a dandy hideaway, as Ephraim suggested. But was there more? There had to be, otherwise why would she have felt so drawn to it? Some moonlight filtered through, but there was also another odd light manifestation—not the “fireflies,” but a blue-green glow that swirled about the clearing like a luminous cloud. Still she felt no apprehension, but the sense of wonder mixed with longing she’d felt before was becoming replaced with some confusion, and she began to wonder what drew her to this place so strongly, especially since there was nothing really unusual here that she could see outside of the strange glow, or no one. Oh well, she thought, might as well get comfortable; maybe things will become clearer soon. After sitting down, she thought: nothing that she could see. Maybe it won’t be like someone speaking to her, or giving her something, like a gift. But if not, what? Would she even know it when she received it, if it is something to be given to or bestowed upon her? Maybe if she just sat and waited, without thinking overmuch on what was going to happen…yes, that might be best.

The minutes ticked by, with nothing further happening, and no indication that anything was about to. Lilia sighed and thought of Ellis back at the house, and the others who might get worried and start looking for her if she didn’t return soon. Perhaps she should; after all, she’d wanted to satisfy her curiosity of the place, and now that that seemed to have been done, why stay any longer? There was no questioning her disappointment, of course; she’d expected, even hoped to find or see or experience something here that…

Then she heard it. A rustling of leaves, the distinctive sound of…something or someone brushing up against the vegetation. Lilia’s heart began racing. Was this it? Or was it…

“Ellis? Reuben? Is that…is that you?” No reply, but whoever or…whatever this was was definitely moving through the root-tangle as she did, and coming closer. “Who is it? Who’s there?” she called out quietly. Still her heart beat faster, but was it less from anticipation and more from…No, she told herself, there is nothing to fear, nothing that will you harm you here. It’s what everyone’s said since before you came to Lahaikshe. I’ll just wait here, and see whatever this is for myself.

Soon it came into view. She couldn’t make out a distinctive shape yet, but it was definitely larger than she. A tysthal? No, they’re not supposed to be active at night. In fact, if she didn’t know better, she could swear this creature’s body was shaped much differently, more elongated; and the way it moved along, so smoothly and sinuously, almost like…

Then its head came into view. Lilia gasped, unable to find her breath for a moment. It reminded her of nothing so much as that of a fox, almost canine in its shape. It moved into the clearing, only about a foot from where she sat; and as its body followed, she again found herself fighting down feelings of fear and panic. As she’d suspected, the creature’s body was almost exactly like that of a snake, and it was very much aware of her presence and moving straight toward her.

“It won’t hurt me, it won’t hurt me…” she said quietly to herself, trying hard to remember: did anyone tell her of a creature like this? If so, did she forget? Or wasn’t she paying attention? She tried to concentrate on searching her memories rather than on what it may or may not do. Still it drew nearer…and still she had to fight hard to suppress her fear. “Please…d-don’t hurt me…please…” It was so close now, only about two inches away, and still it drew nearer…

On one of the terraces, Bertie looked down from the night sky to see Lucy approach.

“You, too?”

“Yeah, Luce. Did Ellis say anything to you about what’s going on?”

“Nope. He just said he was gonna get Tim, then we’d be ready; for what, I don’t know.”

“I was just thinking…I haven’t seen Lilia around. This has got to have something to do with her.”

“Like she got lost? That makes sense. But why just us?”

“Let’s ask him ourselves,” said Bertie, pointing. Lucy turned to see Ellis and Timothy approach.

Before anyone could ask, Ellis said, “Well, this should do it. Let’s go,” without pausing in his pace.

“So,” said Bertie, as he and Lucy and Timothy followed, “do you think you could find it within you to tell us just what the heck is going on here?”

“I didn’t want to make a scene back there,” said Ellis as they started down the nearby trail into the woods, “but Lilia came out here well over an hour ago—just to be alone, she said—and there’s no sign of her now, even though she said she’d stick close by.”

“So you didn’t want Reuben to get in a big lather, right?”

“That’s part of it, Luce. I’ve got a pretty good idea of where she went, and I thought just a few of us could do the job.”

“Gwinthrayle could have located her just like that, I’ll bet,” pointed out Bertie.

“I know, but I didn’t see any need to involve him, not when there’s a good chance she’s where I think she is.”

“Makes sense to me,” said Lucy. “So…what do you think, O Wise One? Will we find her?” She gave Timothy a nudge, grinning.

But Timothy, rather than responding in kind to Lucy’s playfulness, had a faraway expression which, to Ellis, was not unlike that which he’d seen on Lilia earlier. “Yes, we will, and…much more, but…not now.”

“Well, that clears things up,” Bertie said wryly. “So where do you think she went?”

Ellis described the ravine they’d seen earlier, with the mangrove-like thicket at its center, and the effect seeing it seemed to have upon her, adding that, if she weren’t there, then they would tell Gwinthrayle.

Soon they were at its edge, looking down upon the grove. “Tsadavhis,” said Timothy. “Gwinthrayle transplanted them there long ago. Cynthia and I explored down there on our first visit here, though Mom wasn’t too happy about our doing it on our own. There’s an open area at its center.”

“Still, there’s nothing really special about them, is there?” asked Lucy.

“There didn’t seem to be then, but Gwinthrayle has said that…odd and unusual manifestations crop up in this area from time to time, sometimes concentrated in very small areas, which can have strange, unforeseen effects on one’s emotions, but not on everyone.”

“With all that’s happened with Lilia lately, I’ll buy that,” agreed Ellis. “So…are you all with me?”

The four began negotiating their way down carefully, noticing as they did the firefly-like lights and odd whistling sounds that seemed to greet them. Timothy assured them this wasn’t unusual, that it was very much part of the character of this area after dark.

Once at the bottom, Bertie said, “Well, if it is ‘hollow’ at the center, Lilia could be in there.”

“That’d be my guess,” said Ellis. The four began circling the grove’s perimeter, calling out Lilia’s name quietly, listening carefully for any response. After making a complete circuit with no immediate sign that Lilia was about, Ellis said, “Well, I guess at least one of us should take the plunge.”

“It’s tricky getting through the roots, but not too hard,” said Timothy.

“So what’re we waiting for?” said Bertie, venturing into the grove.

“I guess we don’t all need to go in at once,” said Timothy. “Holler if you see anything, Bertie, while we search the rest of the area.”

Ellis and Lucy agreed to the plan, though Ellis felt he should be the one to search first. Lucy and Timothy headed to the opposite end of the ravine to search through the thick vegetation there, both wondering if she were really here, considering she hadn’t answered their calls, though Timothy was still sure she was in no danger and would be found soon.

Ellis stayed closer to the grove, calling for her; and soon, someone—though not Lilia—called back.

“Hey, Ellis, I think I see her! Get the others!” Bertie called out emphatically, though he was clearly trying to keep his voice low. Ellis immediately called Lucy and Timothy over. Just as they arrived outside the area Bertie called from, he spoke again. “Yeah, it’s definitely her. She looks like she’s asleep. Wait a sec…there’s…something, I dunno what, with her, almost like it’s surrounding her.” At this, the others began making their own way through the root-tangle, curious and mystified.

“What is it, Bertie? What’s it look like?” called Ellis.

“It’s like…oh, boy…it’s definitely something alive.” There was a tone almost of dread in his voice, spurring the three mice on further. “Guys…I dunno if it’s good or bad, what I’m seeing…but you’d better see for yourselves.”

Soon all four were all the way into the clearing. A hint of a blue-green glow seemed to float in the air, and through it, at the clearing’s opposite end, was Lilia, her snow-white fur contrasting greatly with the creature that was in her company, its serpentlike body coiled around her, its canine-featured head resting against that of Lilia, who indeed seemed to be just dozing; but was this creature a newfound friend, or her captor?

Timothy quickly put any such fears to rest. “Aaah…a min’hathio. Haven’t seen one of them in a long time.”

“A what?” asked Ellis.

“A min’hathio. Don’t worry, Lilia’s in no danger.”

They all approached slowly, Lucy and Ellis still a bit apprehensive of the creature’s physical appearance. “It looks like…it just came here to keep her company,” observed Lucy.

“That’s probably true,” said Timothy. “They’ve been known to do that with lost travelers. The Rusay have a lot of lore about them.”

By now their presence was known to the mismatched pair. The min’hathio raised its head and looked at the newcomers with expressive, soulful eyes. The movement roused Lilia, who straightened, blinked and yawned as her new friend began to move away, seeming to give her “rescuers” a knowing nod.

“Oh…hey, don’t go,” she said groggily as it slithered away through the tsadavhi roots.

“I think he just needs to move on,” observed Timothy, “like his work here is done.”

Lilia looked up, startled, noticing the others for the first time. “Oh! Timothy…Ellis!” She got up to embrace Ellis as the others watched the min’hathio’s tail disappear from view through the roots.

“Are you all right?” asked Ellis.

“Of course, Ellis.” Lilia stroked his cheek. “Oh, what a gentle and charming creature!”

“Mmm…thanks, I try my best…”

Lilia looked confused for a moment, then laughed. “I mean him! The creature who was with me, he kept me company. I wish he’d stay longer…”

“Were you scared at all?” asked Lucy.

“I was at first. He came in, I saw what he looked like, and…I tried to tell myself that he wouldn’t hurt me, but I couldn’t help it. He came right up to me, and he just looked at me. I calmed down, and he came a little closer and just sort of nudged me with his nose, and gave me a little lick. I…guess I knew right there that he meant no harm. He…just curled up around me, but not tightly, and…well, it just all seemed so peaceful, I guess I dozed off. I know it sounds strange…”

“Well, a little,” said Ellis, “but…why’d you come here in the first place?”

“I don’t really know, I…just felt I should, like…someone or something drew me here, but…” Lilia paused with a faraway expression. “…but then he arrived, and…well, there’s really not much more to tell. I wish I could, but…”

Ellis looked around and said, “Well…I guess we might as well get back to the house. I’ll bet someone’s looking for us already.” As the five mice made their way back out, Timothy told the others more of what he knew about min’hathios. On the way back to the house, they discussed the animal life they’d encountered on Lahaikshe thus far, and marveled at its diversity.

As they approached the house, there was indeed a small welcoming party—including Gwinthrayle, who told them that he was very much aware that Lilia had gone off by herself and the others had left to search for her. “There is little, if anything, that happens here of which I’m not aware,” he told them.

Two hours later, most of Gwinthrayle’s guests, having already been given their room assignments, had bedded down for the night; and Ellis was about to do likewise when Lilia approached him and told him she wanted to speak to him alone outside on the terrace, assuring him she didn’t want to run off anywhere. Many of the guest rooms had long French windows that opened directly outside, and so they went just outside the room where they and many of the other mice were bunking together.

They sat down close together on the ground, admiring the moonlight illuminating the surrounding compound. “So…what’s this about, Lilia?”

“Well…it’s…I guess you could say I lied back there.”

“About what?”

“Well…not really a lie, but…not the whole truth, either.” She described, as best she could, the strange mix of feelings that came over her upon first seeing the tsadhavi grove, and how she felt compelled to return and wait there for something or someone. “When the…min’hathio, is it…when it came to me, and I was still afraid of it, I heard…someone talking to me, and it wasn’t the min’hathio. And it seemed almost like it was…inside my head, but at the same time coming from…the very air around me.”

“Really? What did it say?”

“Well, it told me I had nothing to fear, and it was so…so reassuring, I felt so much calm. And then she said…”

“Er…‘she’?”

“Yes, it seemed like a female voice. She told me…that she was sorry for any pain she may have caused me.”

Ellis shook his head in bewilderment. “And that’s it? No clue about who she was or what that was all about?”

“No. But it reminded me of…that conversation at Martin and Karen’s yesterday. And things others have said…about this world watching over us…it reminded me of that too.”

“Wow…well, I guess what Lambert said is true, that something strange is definitely happening here, and it looks like more of it’s being revealed bit by bit. I just wonder if… Say, we really ought to tell Gwinthrayle about this.”

“I guess so. It just seemed…well, sort of private; but I wanted to tell someone, and I knew it would have to be you.” She smiled, placing her hand on his.

“I appreciate that, but if anybody’s equipped to understand this sort of thing, it’s Gwinthrayle.”

“I know. But…can it wait till morning? I’d like it…to stay between us a little longer. It just…feels right, somehow.”

“Sure, Lilia. I’d be glad to.” Ellis yawned. “I know I’m ready to call it a night.” He looked at her smiling face illuminated by the moon, and for a moment he was reminded of that fateful night; then they stood and walked arm-in-arm back inside.

On an adjoining terrace, Nicodemus once more made to call after them just before they went inside, and again he stopped. The event Lilia described definitely struck a chord with him, and he wanted to let them know he’d overheard their entire conversation. Midway through, though, he’d hesitated, and again when Lilia said that it seemed like a private message. He didn’t feel too good about the fact that he’d ended up eavesdropping on their entire exchange, but he rationalized it was best to respect their wish to keep it between them for now. Could it have been a supernatural presence that Lilia had encountered? Her description of what it conveyed to her and how it made her feel was definitely in keeping with what he’d heard from others, and with some of the history and lore he’d read of in Gwinthrayle’s library. What did it all mean? It was almost as if there was some being, imperceptible by the common senses, that was watching over the residents of this world; and certain spots, such as the tsadhavi grove, were more receptive to direct communication with it. Or should that be her, as Lilia described? Nicodemus thought about what he’d read of earthly legends of similar beings, and was certain something like that could be at work here. The fact that this presence seemed to make itself known to a greater degree to the residents of Lahaikshe than any similar being on Earth did to Earthlings seemed to indicate that it couldn’t be exactly the same. And those Earth legends were just that, weren’t they?

Just thinking about seemed to remind him of how, during the “viewscreen tour,” Gwinthrayle seemed surprised at seeing that desert area, though he’d said it was essentially a case of mistaken identity. Perhaps he’d bring it up to him tomorrow in private. Nicodemus looked up to the moon, so much like the one orbiting the Earth, and could easily imagine origins and characteristics of the two to be identical. The two planets they orbited were so teeming with life and yet so different. The thought reminded him of another matter he’d wished to tend to before his time was up: a return trip to Earth to revisit old haunts, and perhaps more, since there were places that he’d always wanted to see for himself. It would mean imposing on Johnathan and the amulet, of course; or Madeline, if she chose to, but he was sure they wouldn’t mind. Oh, there was so much more to do and see, and though he certainly wouldn’t mind spending more time here, he looked forward to returning to Freethorn tomorrow, to see more of old friends and comrades, exchange more stories, spend some more time with…

Nicodemus looked up again and sighed. Admit it, he thought; with Jessica. Despite their agreement that they’d only be intimate that one time, thoughts of her would not relent, continually intruding upon other matters that occupied him. Was he falling in love with her? It was the first he’d put the question to himself so directly, and once more he admonished himself: You’re only a tenant in this body, and you cannot afford to have a relationship with anyone going any deeper than friendship. And yet…it didn’t really answer the question, did it? He yawned. Once more, sleeping on it would probably be best. It’s been a full day, and things will have to be clearer in the morning. He turned to enter his room.

Chapter 27 - Return and remorse

The next day carried on in much the same fashion: more storytelling and more extensive exploration of the surrounding grounds. There was a tense moment in midafternoon when Lyndon and Shawna came up missing, but they were quickly found splashing away happily in a shallow bayou not far from the creekside meadow. They were brought back and cautioned not to wander too far again.

Gwinthrayle entertained his guests with more tales drawn from his own experiences, including some about other interdimensional visitors he’d hosted; and his guests, in turn, regaled their host with stories of their own, which he found equally engaging.

There were, of course, stories closer to home that also needed telling. As they’d planned, Lilia and Ellis approached Gwinthrayle to tell about her experience in the tsadavhi grove. They were a bit disappointed, though, to hear that he couldn’t shed any more light on the nature of this supposed entity that seemed to communicate with Lilia. He did say that it was indeed very much in keeping with legends and lore already well established, but nothing whose existence he could confirm. This piqued their curiosity further, of course, and Gwinthrayle was only too happy to indulge them, regaling them with stories in which Rusay had unusual encounters similar to Lilia’s.

In turn, Nicodemus approached Ellis and Lilia, confessing that he’d overheard last night’s exchange. They took no offense, and thanked him for his discretion at allowing them privacy. He took great interest in Lilia’s experience, and left them with the impression that he’d gained some particular insight in having learned of it.

It was late afternoon when everyone was gathered under the pavilion to return to Freethorn. Most were reluctant to leave so early, especially the youngsters, but it had been decided early on that to stay much longer would be abusing their host’s hospitality. For his part, Gwinthrayle didn’t argue the point, though he did make it clear that future visits would be just as welcome, though not longer than two days.

Most were animatedly discussing what they’d experienced, though some were spending the time in quiet reflection. Lilia certainly had much to reflect upon, and Ellis respected this, the two of them spending their final moments here just sitting together quietly. Bertie’s mind was certainly on what, and more importantly who, awaited him back in Freethorn; though he did allow a bit of conversation with Veronica, who felt an obligation to make it clearer to him that she had nothing against his and Tara’s love affair.

Nicodemus and Gwinthrayle had spent nearly three hours together this day, among other things discussing what Nicodemus had read and learned in his host’s library, and Nicodemus’s plans over his remaining days. He now believed that he had a better understanding of his abilities and their nature, if not their precise origins. When he’d told Gwinthrayle about the viewing device he’d used back at the Rosebush colony and how it had served as a conduit for his powers, his host presented him with a portable version of his own Orb of Disclosure, one of two that he owned, that would serve the same purpose. Nicodemus accepted the gift, both of them understanding that it would only be for his aforementioned remaining days.

Nicodemus assured Gwinthrayle that this wasn’t a touchy subject and that he’d accepted his lot, and even looked forward to giving Rollo a chance at a more normal life. There was no masking the tinge of regret in his voice, though, but Gwinthrayle thought it best to respect his privacy in the matter and never broached the subject directly. He did tell Nicodemus, though, that he should feel free to discuss anything at all that was on his mind.

“There is one subject that troubles me, and unless I’m mistaken, it’s been troubling you as well.” They stepped away from the crowd a short ways down the nearby trail that led down to the creekside; and after making sure they had privacy, Nicodemus described how Gwinthrayle had seemed surprised by something he’d seen in his viewscreen yesterday.

“You were not wrong, my friend. There was an anomaly there—a serious one—in that part of the world; and, for the time being, I would ask you to keep the matter between us, at least until after I’ve investigated the matter personally.”

“Oh? Not even tell Justin or Johnathan?”

“I’ve considered the matter deeply since last night, and concluded that if this is a matter that will not affect this part of the world adversely, then no one else need know as yet. I will probably inform my colleague Birantha, though; he’s due for another consultation with me in a few days.”

“I trust your judgment, but…what is it you believe happened in that desert area?”

“Quite simply…that desert area lies in an area that shouldn’t be desert. It lies within a continent of the southern hemisphere, called Asarals, and in an area that’s covered by lush forestland, as much as this part of this continent, Vitrono. Something, some unknown force, has apparently laid waste to a swath of land there, reducing all the plant life to lifeless ash, and probably animal life as well.”

Nicodemus shook his head. “And it appears to have been from an unnatural cause, and not from, say, a fire resulting from a lightning strike or an out-of-control campfire?”

“It is most unnatural indeed. There were probably few, if any, Rusay lives lost, since it is a sparsely populated area; though it must have created quite a stir among the locals, however few.”

“And you believe that the same kind of disaster could happen elsewhere, in a more heavily populated area?”

“Precisely, and next time untold lives could be displaced or lost. So until I can determine its cause, even if I must travel to Asarals to do it, I must again ask you to keep this a secret for now. And, please, do not allow yourself to give in to worry. I assure you, the situation is in good hands.”

“We will speak no more of it today, then; except to say that I hope your investigation bears fruit.” So saying, they returned to the others to help them make final preparations for the journey home, which were little more than final, individualized goodbyes from their host.

When this was complete, Nicodemus approached Gwinthrayle one last time. “Well, Gwinthrayle, I hope we will see each other again before…my time is done.”

“You are most welcome here, my friend. And I certainly plan on being in Freethorn on that day.”

“I’ll be looking forward to it. I know that may sound strange, considering what will happen, but I’ve really no choice but look forward. And knowing what it’ll mean to Rollo, a new chance at life, is enough compensation.”

Nearby, a plaintive young voice was heard: “I thought we were gonna get going now.”

“Why, Lyndon,” said Kimball, “you’re the last one I’d expect to complain about staying here a bit longer.”

“Yeah, but we’re all ready to go, and we’re just sitting here.”

“Patience, my young friend,” said Nicodemus, “though point taken. Truth to tell, I’m not really one for long goodbyes myself.”

And so, in short order, final farewells were made and everyone was again gathered in a circle. Nicodemus began concentrating and spoke a few words, and again everyone was treated to the sensation of slowly rising with no visible means of support; disorienting at first, as before, but with everyone becoming quickly acclimated. Final waves and calls goodbye were exchanged as the assemblage cleared the treetops and began moving away from the compound. Their host watched their departure until they’d disappeared from view; then he returned inside, knowing his work was cut out for him as he headed for his study.

Timothy again guided Nicodemus on their route, this time taking everyone on a different course. Some suggested they fly through the area described in Turlokeen’s story; since Timothy knew the way he directed them that way first. It was still very sparsely populated, with only an occasional house dotting the landscape, each with its own garden; though most of the land was arable, it would give way here and there to rocky areas like the one Turlokeen and Toronpha crossed.

Soon they were over that area, and paused at the very spot where Turlokeen lost his life, with the narrow ledge plainly visible. Even most of the youngsters knew this had to be the spot, and everyone spent a moment in silence before moving on.

The return route took them over the occasional small village, whose inhabitants gazed up with wonder and waved as they passed. Eventually, they swung over to Lake Vin’hag again to have another look at the ta’nakrivs, and a closer look at the adjacent wetlands area, where even more exotic-looking vegetation met their eyes. Along the way, curious mhys’haspas again came by to escort them, two of them staying with the group almost up to Freethorn’s door.

All the while Timothy guided the route, he noticed Nicodemus seemed preoccupied. He almost asked him what was on his mind, but decided that wouldn’t be appropriate. It could be something intensely private, and if anyone deserved to have his thoughts kept private, it was Nicodemus. Even considering what Nicodemus had told him about treating him as an equal, he still couldn’t bring himself to be that familiar. Still…if he were going through a crisis of sorts, perhaps unrelated to his leaving Rollo’s body, then…

No sooner had the thought crossed his mind than the feeling came over him, similar to that he’d experienced a few days ago after Lucy asked him what Ellis may have been going through—that the outcome would be positive, but not for everyone involved. Timothy wondered if this were specifically tied in with his leaving a few days hence, or with some other situation he might be in. Either way, maybe it was just as well this intuition of his weren’t more specific in cases like this, as opposed to times where there is an obvious threat or the appearance of one. If it were, wouldn’t that be an intrusion on his privacy? Oh, perhaps I’m thinking too hard on this, Timothy thought. It would probably be best to wait a few days before saying anything to anybody, he decided.

Soon they were again closing in on Freethorn, clearing the Wall and descending to ground level in the very spot they’d departed from, in front of the north entrance. A sizable welcoming party was already waving and calling to them.

After touching down, the air was soon abuzz with much animated and excited discussion; phrases like “You just won’t believe…” and “It’s nothing like I expected” abounded. Yet, for all the excitement surrounding the party’s return, there were unmistakable signs that not all was well among some in the welcoming party.

“…and that one tree, that Jessica told us she’d seen before, the one that looks like it’s breathing…yeah, we saw that one, too,” enthused Lucy to her mother.

“Yeah, it’s awesome. You gotta see it for yourself,” concurred Bertie.

“That’s very nice, dear,” said Patricia in a more subdued manner than expected. “I’m sure I’ll look forward to it.”

“Is anything wrong, love?” asked Kimball. “Did…something happen while we were away?”

“Did somebody…uh…” began Bertie before thinking better of voicing the next word, “die.”

“It’s about Lula, isn’t it? Is she all right?”

Patricia sighed. “Well, she is, Lucy, at least physically, but…” She led the group toward a nearby spot where it was more comfortable to sit—her husband and children, Timothy and his parents and siblings and some of the Rats who were curious to hear how Lula’s reunion with her family had gone.

“Well, first of all,” began Madeline, “we didn’t use the Stone to check on Lula’s family beforehand, mainly because that’s what Lula wished. But I did will it to take us close to their den’s location, and she led Patricia and me to it from there.”

“But when we got there,” added Patricia, “we found two mice that Lula didn’t know living there. They said they didn’t know who lived there before they moved in, about two weeks earlier.”

“So I used the Stone to find her family, and…it couldn’t locate them.” Madeline sighed. “Patricia and I both knew what that implied. I knew I had to find out what happened.” Johnathan offered his shoulder for comfort.

“We found that…Lula’s mother and brothers were attacked by a weasel, just outside the den. It got all three of them. One of her brothers almost got away, but…he didn’t get far.” Patricia wiped away a tear as Kimball embraced her.

“Oh, man, that poor kid,” said Bertie.

Lucy sighed. “Poor all of them.”

“How’s she taking it?” said Ellis. “I guess that’s a pretty dumb question, isn’t it.”

“It’s all right, Ellis,” said Patricia. “She…well, as you’d expect, she didn’t want to believe it, and wanted to go off and look for them. It took several more minutes before we could convince her that it had really happened, that the Stone doesn’t lie.”

“We returned home,” added Madeline, “and just kept talking to her, telling her how much we love her and that she’d always have our support.”

“I’m sure she still knows that,” added Kimball. “Look at how quick she was to embrace total strangers as family at the beginning.”

“Where is she now?” asked Timothy.

“She went off to be alone for a while,” said Patricia, “to work things out, I guess. I wasn’t sure it was a good idea to leave her alone at first, but we couldn’t see her doing anything drastic.”

“The whole time,” said Madeline, “she didn’t even cry. That’s why we couldn’t help being a bit worried, because she’s usually so emotional.”

“She’s won a place in all our hearts, all right,” agreed Johnathan, stroking his wife’s shoulder. “But as much as we all want to help her, we can’t force her to talk to us.”

“It’s got to be tearing her up inside,” said Patricia. “But right now, there’s not a lot we can do. She knows she can tell us anything, cry on our shoulders, pour her heart out all she wants, and that’s what we’re counting on when she’s ready.” She sighed. “She wanted so much to make things right with her mother, and in one moment, it just all came crashing down on her. But…since there isn’t much we can do right now, I guess we shouldn’t let it dampen your enthusiasm for your own trip too much. Please, tell us more about it.”

Everyone who had been on the trip was doing so, most of them gathered in Oak Park; and even as the sun was setting the area near the big burr oak was a cacophony of simultaneous conversations. Nicodemus was in the thick of it all, relating his perspectives on the trip with almost as much enthusiasm as the children. Having learned of yesterday’s tragic discovery, he knew he’d have to talk to Lula soon, since they’d already formed a special bond and he wanted to help her through this as best he could.

As Nicodemus described the sights, sounds and smells he and the others had experienced over the last two days, one set of eyes, approaching the periphery of the crowd, met his. Though neither’s expression betrayed any special attention to the other, both Nicodemus and Jessica knew they’d have to meet privately later. For now, she was content to listen with the others, as genuinely interested as the others in the finer details of the trip.

Where she lived on Earth, surrounded by forest, Lula had rarely seen sunsets in all their splendor. These days, every chance she had, she’d station herself at a west-facing observation post or—as she had today—climb to the Rooftop to revel in this almost-daily spectacle.

Until today. Though the varying hues of crimson and magenta highlighting the cirrus clouds spread across the western sky were an especially stirring sight for others today, Lula could only sit and stare blankly, as if blind, thoughts consumed by the terrible truth that had been uncovered today. She’d come up here at this time specifically because she thought it would help her to make sense of it all and sort things out, but she felt as confused and unable to focus her thoughts as ever. She sat curled up tightly against the breeze, her cloak wrapped around her, and put her head down, resting her eyes, hoping that would make it easier.

Her thoughts raced back to happier times, playing with her brothers Curry and Bron and knowing she was loved and cared for. Inevitably, she thought of Desmond, and the strange and wonderous feelings she’d experienced from just being around him; but almost immediately she pictured him on his deathbed, holding his hand as she shared his final moments.

Her eyes flew open. “No!” she shouted repeatedly, shaking her head and holding her sides. She got to her feet and looked back and forth, then walked to the guardrail, formed and shaped out of the same rock she walked upon, and for the first time acknowledged the sunset, noting how beautiful it was. Yet it brought no joy. It just didn’t seem right, because how could there be such beauty when there’s so much ugliness and tragedy? A thought crossed her mind, unbidden: she never even knew her mother’s actual name. She was always just “Mother” to her.

She directed her gaze from the horizon to the rust-colored plain far below. Suddenly she found herself wondering how it would feel, or if she would feel anything, were she to fall from here to there.

She backed away, shaking her head in disbelief, giving way to horror. How could she be thinking such a thing? Mother Pat, Kimball, all those others who have told her how much they love her and enjoy having her here: what would they think? And how would they react if she actually went ahead and did it? They’d be hurt, heartbroken for sure. She knew that, and yet there was that brief moment when she actually…

She looked up to the sunset again, and couldn’t contain herself any longer, sinking to the floor, weeping, sobs wracking her small frame, her mind a tangle of conflicting emotions. Why? Why did this have to hurt so much? She thought about how, without hesitation, she’d embraced Patricia and her family as her own. So why did this affect her so much, losing her original family? Why them and not her? Should she have stayed with them? But if she had, wouldn’t she have died too? Was she meant to die with them, or was she spared for a reason? How could this be the reason, to suffer like this?

Abruptly she jumped to her feet, wiping tears from her face. She went to the guardrail, again looking down over the edge, thoughts once again on what it would be like, how it would feel. And then…

The small group of mice and rats, some sitting, others standing or pacing back and forth but talking very little, continued their vigil. They’d gathered here some 30 minutes ago, at the bottom of one of the trails leading to the Rooftop, and some were becoming visibly impatient.

“Orland, please sit down. She may be coming back down any minute.”

“I can’t help it, Lana. I feel responsible for her.”

“He’s got a right to,” added Michael. “It was his idea to bring her here in the first place.”

“I know,” said Lana. “I just don’t see what the big worry is.”

“You don’t really think she’d do anything drastic, do you, Orland?” asked Cynthia.

“Oh, probably not,” said Orland, sitting down next to Lana. “But look at the spot where she chose to be alone. It’s a long first step from ’way up there.”

The others looked at each other. “What are you saying?” asked Cynthia.

“Say, there’s Philip,” said Mary Louise, one of Cynthia’s closest rat friends, looking toward the Guard rat approaching from up the trail.

“Well, this looks like a meeting of concerned citizens,” said Philip with a small chuckle.

“You could say that,” said Orland. “Have you seen Lula up there?”

“Yes, I have. That poor kid. I met her on the way up, and just told her to be careful up there. She just nodded and went on ahead. I looked in on her again, just a couple minutes ago, and she was crying her eyes out.”

Orland gave a sigh of dismay. “Oh, that tears it, I’m going up there.” He jumped to his feet and dashed up the trail without waiting to hear if anyone would object, though no one did.

“I was about to say,” said Lana, “that a good cry may be what she really needs. She was holding it back for so long.”

“That’s true,” agreed Cynthia, “but…there’s that other thing Orland said…”

“You mean, about it being a long first step…” said Michael.

“Did he mean…do you think it’s possible that she may want to jump?” pondered Mary Louise. Everyone looked at each other with varying degrees of alarm.

“Oh, I can’t believe that,” said Cynthia. “There’s so many of us that care for her, and she knows it.”

“Nevertheless,” added Philip, “There are many cases among humans where one would kill himself even when there were others that cared for him.”

“Maybe we should all go up there,” suggested Lana.

“I don’t think a crowd is what she needs to deal with right now,” said Michael. “Let’s just wait for Orland to return.”

“Yeah, I guess,” said Cynthia. “I wish Tim were here right now. Maybe he’d have a hunch about this.”

“Or Boris,” suggested Mary Louise, “with those visions he sometimes has.”

“It’d probably take too long to find them,” said Michael. “And by that time, Orland would have something to tell us.”

“So we just sit,” said Lana, sighing. “I know it makes sense, but I still don’t like it.”

So they continued to wait, mostly in silence. After about ten minutes, Cynthia said, “Boy, if I knew it’d take this long, I’d have gone to look for Tim or Boris. I just may do it yet.”

“It can’t be too much longer,” said Lana. “I think I’ll go see what’s keeping him.”

“Don’t bother,” said Mary Louise. “Here he comes now, and he’s not alone.”

Sure enough, there was Orland, with Lula holding his arm, looking for all the world like they were simply taking an evening stroll as they made their way down the trail. As they drew closer, Lula noticed the group ahead of them, and looked over to Orland smiling, appearing pleased to see everyone.

“Well, now we know what didn’t happen,” said Cynthia. It was certainly a relief, but why would she seem so cheerful now?

“Hi, everybody,” Lula said in her familiar lilting tone.

“It’s great to see you, Lula,” said Cynthia. “How are you feeling?”

“Pretty good. I’m still a little bit sad, but…I’ll be all right. I really will.”

“That’s wonderful,” said Michael. “Some of us were concerned for you, and that’s why we’re all here now.”

“That’s nice, Michael. I really appreciate that. Well…I guess I’ll go home now.”

“I can take you,” offered Philip. “I’m off duty now, so I could give you a lift if you like.” Lula eagerly accepted, squealing with delight as Philip hoisted her onto his shoulders. She waved goodbye as they moved off toward the colonies.

“Well, I guess we got all worked up for nothing,” said Lana with a laugh.

“It wasn’t what I expected, that’s for sure,” said Orland, “especially considering Philip saying he saw her crying her eyes out.”

“How did she seem when you first saw her?” asked Michael.

“At first, she just sat there with her eyes closed, and looking...well, really contented. I didn’t want to startle her, so I called her name real quiet, but she didn’t seem to hear, as if she were distracted. I came up a little closer, and she just opened her eyes, and looked at me and smiled, like she was expecting me. She said my name, and got up and gave me a big hug, and asked me if I was going to take her back down now. Well, there was only one thing I could say, so…there you have it.”

“It’s as if she worked everything out all by herself,” said Cynthia. “Good for her, of course, but it still seems a little strange.”

“Maybe somebody else did meet her up there and talk to her,” suggested Mary Louise.

“Could be,” said Michael, “but let’s give her a little credit. Whether it was someone else’s counsel or if it came entirely from within, look at the results.”

“I guess we don’t need all the analysis,” agreed Orland. “If she wants to talk about it with someone, then I guess she will.” With this much agreed upon, the “group of concerned citizens” adjourned for the night.

Nicodemus sighed as he settled into bed, more than ready for a good night’s sleep after such a full day as this. At least physically he was ready, but his mind wasn’t ready to shut down completely. All that he’d seen at Gwinthrayle’s, both in his gardens and in his library…he’d only begun to plumb the wealth of lore it contained. He could easily have spent, and still could spend, many more hours there, but of course there were only so many more before…

No, he told himself, shaking his head. He must concentrate on making the most of his time left instead of counting it down continually. There was certainly much more to consider right now. He thought of Lula, and how warmly she’d greeted him after Philip had brought her home, and how curious she was to hear about the trip to Gwinthrayle’s, with little mention of her family’s fate except to say that she felt better able to deal with it now. He was happy and relieved to see her in such good spirits, but it was as perplexing to him as to the ones who’d waited for her. Thinking about it now, he wondered: could she have had an experience similar to Lilia’s? Could Lula have also made contact with the same apparently supernatural presence? He would try to ask her tomorrow, hoping she’d confide in him as before. Perhaps he could even get the two of them together, if they hadn’t met already on their own; they’d certainly have plenty to talk about. Then there was Patricia, for whom he’d agreed to pose for a portrait. She’d begun experimenting with dyes and pigments native to Lahaikshe, and since she’d been very pleased with the results she’d gotten thus far, she thought he’d be the perfect subject for a more elaborate project utilizing them. He was flattered and only too happy to oblige, though he questioned whether this portrait would really be of himself or of Rollo. She’d replied cryptically that this would only be part of the project, and that she’d explain further tomorrow.

It promised to be another memorable day, all right, but there was that other matter that was never too far from his thoughts. That anticipated meeting with Jessica had never materialized tonight, making one tomorrow all the more likely. Certainly there was a lot to distract him, and she had her regular duties, but could she also be deliberately avoiding him? Whatever else happens tomorrow, he decided, he must see her and try to clear the air. It was too vital, not one that he could pretend will go away on its own. With that much decided upon, Nicodemus tried to relax and empty his mind of thought to hasten sleep. Yet again there was that intrusion, repeatedly foiling every attempt, as if an enemy, like Uhrstegg, was trying to wear him down, erode his defenses. But, of course, an enemy this most definitely was not. He sat up in bed and made to get to his feet; then he fell back again, fighting the impulse to go to her. No, now was not the time. He rubbed at his forehead and sighed. Could falling in love—if this were the case with him now—possibly be this way for everyone, filled with such uncertainty and self-doubt? No, of course not, for there were so many unique elements in this case. He couldn’t help wondering if she might come to him as she’d done three nights ago. On one hand he relished the thought, but on the other the notion filled him with dread…

As usual, many in Freethorn were up and about after dark, in most cases by choice. A few, though, like Nicodemus, simply had too much on their minds to sleep, and another of them now ventured outside the Mouse community. It was the first time she’d done this alone, and though she knew there was nothing to fear, she couldn’t help feeling a slight thrill, as if she were venturing out into the Great Unknown. She took the path leading toward the south meadow, taking a moment to admire the beauty of the moon- and starlight reflected on the surface of Lake Nicodemus, and could hear the laughter of two Rats along the shoreline enjoying a moonlight swim. She moved on, without any real goal in mind but still feeling compelled to do so, as if there were someone she was going to meet. Along the way, she met some others who were up and about, mostly Guard rats, all greeting her politely by name, some offering condolences. She simply told anyone who asked that she just felt like taking a nocturnal stroll.

Soon she approached the row of blackberry bushes and rounded the one at the far end. She looked out over the meadow and began to stroll across, looking up at the starry sky as she did. The streak of a meteor caught her eye, making her sigh with wonder. Hoping to catch sight of another or something equally moving to see, she moved on in this fashion, trying to take in as much of the celestial canopy as her eyes could handle, looking everywhere except at what lay in her immediate path.

Suddenly her left foot fell upon something that felt decidedly out of place. She heard a squeal of surprise, causing her to react in kind and lose her balance and tumble to the ground.

She looked up instantly. “Oh, I’m so sorry. I should’ve watched where I was going.”

“Oh, that’s all right. You’re Lula, aren’t you? I wasn’t even aware you were there until the last second.” The other mouse sat up, the moonlight shrouding her pelt in an almost luminescent glow.

“Lilia…it’s you. They told me you like to come out here at night sometimes.”

“Yes, it’s so lovely, with the moon and stars and everything.”

The two chatted about the shooting star Lula had seen and how often they appeared in the Lahaikshean sky. Lilia tentatively brought up the subject of Lula’s recent troubles; but Lula, as with everyone she’d talked to this evening, seemed almost eager to let Lilia know that she was past the worst of it. They chatted about the things they had in common, from the similarity in name to both losing parents at a tender age, to their both ending up living here. Lilia brought up how fond she’d lately become of Ellis, and Lula talked of her feelings for Desmond, something else she found surprisingly untroubling to discuss. She also talked of how the Davis brothers’ nephew Stewart was becoming such a close and dear friend to her.

When the subject fell to the trip to Gwinthrayle’s, Lilia at first described the incident in the tsadhavi grove in a more cursory fashion; but then, all at once, she felt inspired to confide in Lula the more personal details, as she’d done with Ellis and Nicodemus.

Lula looked thunderstruck. “Why, that’s so much like…like…” She wordlessly embraced Lilia, at once breathless, almost unable to speak clearly. When she felt more composed, she said, “That’s…that’s almost like what happened to me tonight! There was…like a voice inside my head, like my mother’s, or Mother Pat’s, but…so much more like that. I wish I could explain it better, but…”

“No, that’s all right. That’s like how I thought of it. What did she say to you?”

“Well, it was a lot like with you. She said, or…it was more like I felt…that everything would be fine and work out for me, and that I was important and loved. It was so strange…it was like something I felt, and at the same time, like someone talking to me.”

“Oh, I know. Oh, Lula, I’m so happy we found each other like this!” They embraced again. “We never talked much before, but we have so much in common now, more than before.”

“I know. But…there’s something else I didn’t tell you, something that I feel I should do now.”

Lilia looked wide-eyed at her. “It…she actually wanted you to do something? What?”

“Well…now I feel that…that I should leave here, return to Earth.”

Lilia’s jaw dropped. “Go back? Why?”

“I don’t know. I just feel I should.”

“I guess I understand, but…there’s so many here who’d want you to stay. I want you to. And it’s so much safer here, too.”

“Oh, I know, but…I’m sure I’ll be safe there too.”

Lilia thought for a moment. Certainly, from her own contact with this…being, presence, whatever one would call it, she could understand how any message it conveyed would be felt to be the absolute truth, that there’d be no doubting its veracity. “I guess…if you really feel you should, then you should go.” She embraced Lula. “I feel like I’m losing my best friend, even though we haven’t talked much before now.” Both admitted to some sadness, though there was no doubt this was the right thing for Lula to do.

They continued talking about many things—the possible reason for the “presence” wanting Lula to go on this mission, if it could be called such; other details of the visit to Gwinthrayle’s, experiences from past years, favorite things—anything the two new friends could think of, until they both grew sleepy and decided to camp out right there in the meadow. Soon they were both curled up side by side, fast asleep.

The next morning, Lilia and Lula arose and made their way leisurely back to the colony, picking up their conversation from last night, allowing themselves to get silly and nonsensical but never far from the question of whether Lula was serious last night. She confirmed that, yes, she was still planning on returning to Earth, and would talk to Johnathan about it after breakfast. She did, however, allow for the possibility, even inevitability, of her eventual return, since there was certainly plenty to draw her back here. Whatever was to happen, Lilia vowed she would not let her new friend’s departure cast a pall over this day. Lula, after all, saw this as very much a new beginning, looking forward not only to her new situation but to telling Lilia and everyone else about her experiences upon her return.

Chapter 28 - Sketches and confessions

“Well, I’m as ready as I’ll ever be,” said Nicodemus, shifting slightly in his chair.

“Then hold still!” said Patricia with mock sternness and a smile. She picked up a charcoal pencil and began sketching on the easel in front of her, the natural daylight spilling upon it through the window of her specially-designed studio.

Nicodemus breathed in deep and settled in, reflecting on this project he was now participating in. After seeing the preliminary sketches Patricia had already made, he tried to visualize the completed project. It would be in the form of a triptych—a three-paneled painting—depicting Nicodemus at three stages of his life—or rather, lives. The first would be of him in the early days after the Escape, the second as he was before his previous life ended, and the third as he is now, in Rollo’s body. She’d made sure she had his blessing before going any further on this project—which she’d gotten the idea for not long after his return—in case he may not wish to have such images preserved, for whatever reason. Rather, he was honored, and he was delighted at the results so far, to which some of the Rats had given considerable input in getting the likenesses just right. Patricia had shown him some of her recent works in which she utilized some of the native pigments she’d intended to use on this new work, and the results were stunning. He had little difficulty now in visualizing the finished project.

Inevitably, he had to wonder whether or not it would be completed before he had to depart. He didn’t want her to feel pressured, but naturally he hoped it would be at least mostly done by then. He again tried to drive away thoughts of his leaving over a week hence, and so asked Patricia facetiously if he’d be allowed to speak during this session, if not move. Of course, she replied with amusement, and they chatted as she sketched, mostly about her family’s experiences.

Soon, Patricia tentatively brought up his leaving, acknowledging that she wasn’t sure how to broach the subject or even if she had the right to, given the fact of who he was and that she didn’t know him as well as Johnathan or Ages or most of the Rats.

“Oh, you needn’t hesitate, Patricia, though I do understand. If ever there were a delicate subject, this would be it. And I do consider you and everyone else here to be dear friends…and equals.”

“Thank you, Nicodemus. I do hope that you can…do and see as much as you want to before you leave.”

“As do I. Johnathan, Justin and I have worked out a schedule of sorts, in fact. Nothing etched in stone, of course, there’s plenty of room for spontaneity. Yes…there’s certain to be plenty of things unforeseen…and unplanned.” He looked to one side, as if suddenly preoccupied; then abruptly looked at Patricia as if ready to make the most important confession of his life. “Oh, Patricia, I…I have to tell someone, I cannot contain this all to myself.”

He got up and sat beside Patricia, who had already stopped sketching, and told her of his initial offer to her eldest daughter Jessica, and how she’d spent that night with him. “Since then,” he continued, “though we both vowed it would be just that one night, I’ve found myself thinking about her continuously, though there’s been so much to occupy me. I think it’s possible that…I’ve fallen in love with her.”

Patricia made to reply but was utterly at a loss for several seconds. “I…I don’t know what to say. Under any other circumstances, I’d be happy for you, but…oh…”

“You see my dilemma, of course. And whenever I’ve seen her since then, I can’t help believing that she’s facing the same dilemma.” Nicodemus managed a small laugh. “Though perhaps I’m flattering myself. Oh, Patricia, I want so much to know for sure, but…if it’s true, it can only end in heartbreak for both of us, especially her.”

“Well, outside of your staying in Rollo’s body, I guess…there’s no other way you can stay with us, and you and she could be together.”

“None that I know of. I know I should just simply go and talk to her. After all, in a sense it would be a relief if she doesn’t have feelings for me. Then, at least one of us would be spared any pain.”

Patricia thought for a moment. “I guess I can’t really know firsthand how hard this is for you, but…if I were in your position, I wouldn’t want to spend my remaining time worrying about how things might have been, especially when there’s so much else I’d want to do.”

Nicodemus smiled and nodded knowingly. “I suppose I just needed to hear that…from a friend. Thank you, Patricia. I promise you I’ll see her later today.”

“That’s wonderful. Well, now that it’s settled…”

“We should resume your work, eh?” Nicodemus returned to the other chair, posing as before. “Oh, and I’m sure it’s not necessary, Patricia, but…” He made a “quiet” gesture with hand over mouth.

“Oh, of course. No one else will know about any of this unless you decide.” Patricia resumed sketching.

After some minutes, Nicodemus noticed Patricia still seemed ill at ease about something; and so she told him of Lula’s surprise announcement at breakfast of her decision to return to Earth, giving little reason except that she felt she had to, at least for a while, as if some kind of mission awaited her. “She didn’t specifically put it that way, but that was the impression we got.”

“Fascinating.” Nicodemus stroked his chin and nodded.

“I just can’t comprehend it, it just doesn’t follow, after all else she’s been through. We’re all she has now, so why would she want to go where she’d be completely alone?”

Nicodemus made to answer, then hesitated, wondering how much to tell Patricia about his suspicions that Lula may have had an experience leading her to this decision that was similar to what Lilia experienced out at Gwinthrayle’s, since he’d promised Lilia and Ellis he’d keep the “message” she seemed to receive confidential. They’d already told Patricia and others of all but that one detail, and it had created quite a stir; many were incredulous that Lilia could so easily make friends with such a creature as a min’hathio. But she wasn’t bothered by all the attention, instead answering everyone’s questions patiently. Nicodemus decided against telling Patricia about it now, but he made a mental note to talk to Lilia later about possibly sharing it with others, and impress upon her that this could be something the council and others in Freethorn might want to know about. He’d considered asking Lula about her own experience directly, but had since changed his mind, deciding it would be better if she volunteered the information to him if she chose.

“I won’t keep Lula from going, if that’s what she really wants,” Patricia went on. "But how can I keep from worrying? She seems so helpless, and she doesn’t really know anyone else.”

“Hmmm…or does she? Let’s give her more credit, Patricia. She was able to fend for herself before you took her in, and maybe there is someone else she intends to meet. If nothing else, I’d be inclined to let her go just to satisfy my own curiosity about this ‘mission’.”

“Well, I’ll admit I’m curious, but it’s just so strange that she’d be so determined about something so…indefinite, when weighed against all she has here. Look at all the friends she’s made, and keeps on making. She and Lilia...why, the two of them were like old girlfriends this morning. And Stuart…he’s been fond of her from the beginning, so I know he’ll be crushed.”

“I’ll admit to being taken with her myself, and yet…it is her decision. As I recall, the way you and Johnathan told it, it was more her decision to have you become her new ‘mother’.”

“Yes.” Patricia smiled. “She adopted us more than we did her.”

Nicodemus made to say more when a voice came from the doorway. “May I come in? If I’m interrupting too badly…”

“Come on in, Johnathan,” they both replied. They chatted as Johnathan admired Patricia’s work-in-progress. Then he told them, “I just got done talking with Lula, and she wants to leave in midafternoon.”

Patricia sighed. “I hoped it wouldn’t be quite so soon, but I suppose it was inevitable.” She and Nicodemus shared much of what they’d discussed about Lula; and Nicodemus considered telling Johnathan of his dilemma concerning Jessica, then deciding there was no need to involve him at this point. Perhaps after his meeting with her later; by then there ought to be some kind of resolution.

Johnathan soon left them, and Patricia put greater concentration into her sketching, saying little to Nicodemus, who was as content to avoid much conversation for the time being. After only a few more minutes, Patricia announced she was finished with the preliminary sketches and almost immediately began visualizing how the finished product would look, describing animatedly to Nicodemus which hues she’d try to use, where shadowing would go; and ideas she’d had for background details, to which Nicodemus now gave further suggestions.

Seeing her renewed enthusiasm lifted Nicodemus’s spirits as well. “Well, I can see you’re impatient to begin on the next step, so unless you have further need of me, I’ll be going now.”

“Yes, I think I can take it solo from here. Thank you so much, Nicodemus.”

They embraced. “The pleasure was all mine, my dear. And I know it will be magnificent in the end.” He started to leave, then paused. “Oh, and I’m sure Lula will do just fine on her own again.”

“I know she will. She may be a little flighty, but she has good survival skills. Oh, and good luck, Nicodemus, with…with Jessica.”

Nicodemus nodded. “I will see her at the earliest opportunity.” He exited, and Patricia paused a moment before going to her paint pots and choosing which pigments and hues she’d need to begin the next stage of the project.

“Okay, Regina. Just a little further, sweetie.” Tara continued coaxing the girl-mouse toward her as she stood in the shallows of the cove.

Regina Ages dog-paddled toward Tara until she was about two feet away; then, unexpectedly, she slipped under the surface and out of her swim instructor’s sight. Tara wasn’t afraid for her, knowing how capable and at home Regina was in the water. Still, she couldn’t help feeling a bit annoyed at the girl’s straying from the lesson.

Suddenly she felt the water swirl beneath the surface, followed by a tug at her tail, and she realized what had happened. Regina had swum between her legs and was now anchored to her tail. She turned in time to see a small mouse head bob above the surface. “Gotcha, Tara!” Regina said with a giggle.

Tara shook her head and laughed as she lifted Regina out of the water, finding she didn’t have the heart to lecture her. “You’re going to drive me crazy.” She cradled the girl against her chest.

“I’m almost ready to gradjiate, aren’t I? Why, I’ll bet I could swim to the other side of the lake from here!”

“Maybe you could, but not without a buddy, okay? But you’re right, you are almost ready. By next week, you could probably teach me a thing or two in the water.”

“Yay!” Regina snuggled closer to Tara. As she cradled her young charge, Tara glanced briefly at some Rat and Rusay children playing on the beach before an approaching figure caught her eye, someone who waved and smiled at her.

“Okay, I guess that’s enough for today.” She gave Regina a little toss onto the bank and then climbed out herself, reaching for a towel on a nearby bench to absorb the excess water from their fur. Tara finished drying Regina and herself until they were no longer dripping wet; and after sending the girl off to play with the other children, she went to receive her visitor, sitting on the ground nearby.

“Hey, Tara.”

“Bertie! How was the trip?” She crouched down so they could embrace.

“Oh, it was terrific. Wish you could’ve made it.” They sat down together on the bench. “I’d have come sooner, but we had a big family gathering last night, with all my sibs, and nieces and nephews, and they all wanted to know all about our adventures…”

“That’s okay, Bertie. I learned about it from Susanna and Marcus, and Kevin and Alcina and some of the others.” They spent the next few minutes discussing the trip, agreeing how strange and mysterious Lilia’s experience with the min’hathio was, and hoping both could go out there next time. It soon became clear to them, though, that both had other matters on their minds.

“Tara, I…” began Bertie hesitantly, “there is something else, and it’s something I’ve thought about since the trip.” He sighed. “I was thinking…that maybe if we spent some…some time apart, that we’d have a better idea, eventually, about…whether or not it’s really the best thing for each of us, our being together.” He looked into Tara’s eyes, only to find, to his surprise, that there wasn’t a great amount of surprise in them.

“Actually, Bertie…I’ve been thinking much the same thing, since even before then; I guess, even since the big general meeting.”

“Really? Wow, that’s…that’s good, I guess, in a way, I mean, that we can both agree on it. After all, let’s face it, there’d still be ways that our relationship could never be like everyone else’s.”

Tara nodded. “Children, especially. Oh, Bertie, I do love you, and I do want to spend time with you, but…maybe we do need time to sort some things out.”

“Yeah. So…I guess we won’t be able to completely avoid each other, but…if we see each other, we’ll just, like, say ‘hi’ and move on?”

“I think we can manage that. So…I guess this is goodbye for now.”

“Yeah. I’ll…see you around, okay?” The two embraced, and with little hesitation, Bertie got to his feet and walked away. He moved about five feet away, then hesitated; then he continued on, fighting back the impulse to rush back to her and say he didn’t mean a word. No, let her decide. He’d been told how she’d been seen with Thurman during his time away, and she does have other male friends, and she’s certainly wanted to have her own kids; all of which would seem to point toward her realizing that their relationship was at a dead end and they should both move on. And did he believe that himself, that an end was inevitable? No, he meant it when he said they needed more time to think things over. And yet, it would have to be her decision more than his, wouldn’t it? As far as a new love affair was concerned, she had far more options than he did. There were, after all, far more eligible male rats than female mice in Freethorn. Now, if more “ordinary” mice could be persuaded to join them from Earth… Then again, there has been talk of the gene pool being diluted too much, though others have doubted if that’s even a concern. Well, at any rate, he thought, if I’m going to bring up the subject at all, may as well wait until after she and I have reached a resolution. It was a good thing they had going here, and he wasn’t about to give it up too easily.

Tara, meanwhile, watched Bertie walk away with much the same mix of reluctance and determination. She had the same impulse as he, to call him back and tell him she had second thoughts. And yet, she had doubts, undeniably: not about their feelings for each other, but whether their physical attraction was…right? No, she told herself again, it’s there, it’s genuine. But how to explain how they’d been brought together, both experiencing the feeling that they were right for each other, in spite of their not being able to procreate? Could it be some kind of mistake, a biological misfire, as Tallus might put it? Was it possible that one of them was just in the wrong body? The idea was, in purely logical terms, absurd; yet, how else to explain their mutual attraction? Let’s let this be a test, then, she decided. There was still the matter of Thurman; he’d been carrying the torch for her for a long time, and after the time they’d spent together recently, perhaps she needed some time to decide whether she felt as strongly for him. Perhaps…was it possible that Bertie would be amenable to an arrangement where they continued as a pair, but allowing one of the rats to father her children? Would he even be open to the possibility of a three-way living arrangement? There were a few such threesomes in Freethorn, as accepted as any other relationship; there were no rules against bigamy. And yet, she wasn’t sure if the idea was right for her. The matter had been much on her mind since that night with Thurman, and it had greatly influenced her decision to bow out of the trip to Gwinthrayle’s. Yes, she’d told Bertie and others that she hadn’t been feeling well, but it had only been some queasiness, nothing really serious. She couldn’t bring herself to admit to him at that point that she had these doubts and that spending some time apart might help her deal with them. But now that they’d reached a mutual agreement on that, maybe a resolution to the situation wouldn’t be far off. She looked up to the children playing games in the water and on the shore, envious that they didn’t have to deal with such complex issues. Maybe it’s best not to think too hard about it now, she decided, and got to her feet to join the children in play.

Nicodemus returned to his quarters, ready for a brief rest, and lay on the bed. He reflected on the last few hours since he’d left Patricia to her work. He’d immediately gone to the medical department and discreetly left word that he wished to meet with Jessica privately, without actually seeing her right then, after she was finished there for the day. He’d had lunch with Zora and Darwin and their children, including Veronica, who’d spoken up so readily at the recent general meeting and had come on the trip to Gwinthrayle’s. He’d chatted with anyone he’d meet who wanted a word with him, so routine by now but hardly unwelcome. It had all kept his mind occupied, but now he had that inevitable meeting to prepare for, the one which neither could put off any longer. Of course, there really wasn’t much he could do to prepare except simply be here. He closed his eyes, trying not to anticipate anything and resolving to just take it as it comes after Jessica arrived.

After only about five minutes, though, he got to his feet and began pacing the floor impatiently. Shouldn’t she be here by now? He went to the door and opened it, expecting to venture out a short ways and meet her coming in, but instead was greeted by a gasp of surprise, which he immediately matched.

“Well! You must have heard me coming,” said Jessica with a slightly nervous laugh.

“Call it a hunch, I suppose,” said Nicodemus, stepping aside to let her inside. “Or a version of my old premonitions.” They sat down on the divan, and just smiled at each other at first, neither knowing where or how to start.

“I guess…I should begin, since it was I who arranged this meeting.” Nicodemus breathed in deep. “Jessica, I’ve had much to keep me occupied since my return, and it’s been the greatest joy to be in the company of old and dear friends again, after being trapped in that bizarre, fragmented state for so long. And not just old friends, but the many new ones I’ve made since…including you. That night we spent together was…just the most generous, unselfish thing anyone has done for me since my return. I knew, and I know you also realized that it was not to be taken lightly; it was a tremendous risk we were taking, it could exact quite the emotional toll upon us. And since then…” Nicodemus inhaled deeply again, closing his eyes. “Jessica, even with all I’ve had to occupy me, I’ve found my thoughts have continually returned to you. I’ve never, even in my previous existence, felt so strongly about, or so drawn to any one person…until now. Jessica…I think I’ve fallen in love with you.”

Jessica stared open-mouthed for a moment before turning away, looking up at the ceiling.

“You don’t need to reply right away. I realize you have much to think about, considering all this entails, the implications…”

“No!” she replied abruptly, looking back upon him. “No, I need to say something now. It’s been much the same with me since that night. I’ve tried to bury myself in my work, even volunteer for some of the duties Ages and Cynthia and some of the others normally perform, but I’ve thought about you, too; a lot, in fact, and…” She sighed, looking close to tears. “Now I have no idea what we should do.” She got up and began walking in circles. “Under normal circumstances, I’d throw myself in your arms and we could just wrap ourselves in each other, let ourselves be happy with each other.”

“But these are hardly normal circumstances, are they? Jessica, can you answer me truthfully and honestly…did we make a mistake? Were we a mistake?”

She closed her eyes, arms folded. “On one hand, I want to say yes, of course. How could I have been so foolish to become so intimately involved with one who…has so little time left, and who isn’t even…in his right body? I’m sorry, that wasn’t how I wanted that to come out.”

“No, that’s all right, Jessica. I am only a tenant in this body, something I’ve told myself many times. And perhaps it could be said that neither of us are in our right minds either. Isn’t that how it seems for many who are in love for the first time, or even the second or third?”

Jessica could only nod, and give a small laugh. “I’ll buy that. Maybe it was a mistake, but it was both ours to make.”

“But I was the one who…”

“Who approached me, I know. But I’ve had plenty of time to think about it. We’re both rational, thinking adults, and we both knew what it might lead to, and I still accepted your offer, and now…we’re both paying the price.”

“And yet…what might that ultimately be? Considering that after I’m gone, this body will again belong to Rollo, and will be staying here.”

“I…can’t believe I almost forgot that. Good lord, is it you I have these feelings for, or Rollo?”

“That is a very good question. After all, it was the physical needs and desires of this body that inspired me to make the offer to you.”

“And I responded by diving in head first. Oh, this is just so crazy. Maybe…for the rest of your time here, we should avoid each other.”

“Could we? I want to say yes, of course, it’s the only real and logical solution. But is logic enough to make it successful?”

“Maybe not, but all we can do is try. I’m willing if you are.”

“So am I, Jessica.” He walked her to the door, then stopped, touching her arm. She looked at him, their eyes locking, neither willing to part at this point, or willing to admit this was what they really wanted, in spite of their verbal agreement. Somehow, though, each found just that much more will, just enough to let themselves part with just a nod and a smile.

Nicodemus leaned against the closed door, fighting back the tears. Yes, intellectually, he knew that both were equally to blame for getting in so deep, but would he ever totally convince himself that he wasn’t solely to blame? He looked at his reflection, then whirled and picked up a cup and raised it. At the last moment he restrained himself, setting the cup back down and taking a deep breath. No, shattering the mirror would only be like punishing yourself, and there’s really nothing to punish yourself over. He thought back to when he first made the offer to Jessica, recalling how he’d believed he’d earned a night of physical love, after all he’d been through to be in a physical body again. He still believed that, and didn’t regret it. Now he’d have to bear the consequences that he’d always known were possible. He looked at his reflection again and thought about how strange it was that suddenly his own needs and desires were taking so much precedence, whereas in his old life the needs of the colony came before his own. Or was it so strange? It had to be a direct consequence of his being alive again in this younger, stronger body, combined with his no longer being leader and having so little time left. Yes…so little, and still so much to do and see. Perhaps that would be the best way to deal with the matter.

Chapter 29 - Old haunts, old enemies, new sights

“Are you sure that’s all you need, dear?”

“Sure, Mother Pat, I’ll be okay.”

It was the type of response Patricia had become accustomed to hearing lately. She watched as Lula picked up the small bundle—extra clothing and bedding, personal items like a hairbrush and a small mirror, and a small amount of food, mostly dried fruit and other treats—and hefted it over her shoulder. Outwardly, it certainly looked as if she’d prepared for a lengthy trip away from home, but her attitude was almost casual, as if she were simply leaving on an overnight sleepover. She took a deep breath and announced, “I’m ready.”

The two walked together silently out of their quarters into the midafternoon sun. Outside, they were joined by Kimball, Johnathan and Madeline. As they moved toward the trail leading to Oak Park, there was still not much conversation. None yet knew quite what to make of this conviction of Lula’s, this self-described sense of having a mission, but all were willing to respect it.

Soon after starting off on the trail, Nicodemus joined them. After greetings, he took Johnathan aside. The others paused, curious as they watched the two talking in private; then, after only about a minute, Johnathan announced, “Folks, we may have a slight change in plans.”

For over a year before Freethorn had been relocated to this world, Oak Park, especially the area beneath the big burr oak, had become a traditional spot for gatherings to welcome someone new to the colony or see someone off, or many other celebratory events such as weddings. In the three Earth-months since then, it had become even more so. Today, around thirty Rats and Mice had gathered on Lula’s behalf. About a half hour ago, Madeline had told them there would be a small delay, and though no one was really impatient, there was much speculation on what led to this change of plans. Now, as a small group of Mice approached, some gave voice to their curiosity, especially in response to the fact that two of them, besides Lula, were carrying small bags and were dressed as if they, too, expected to spend more time in the winter weather back on Earth than it would take to get Lula settled.

Nicodemus signaled he was readying to speak, and all became silent. “My friends…I know you’re all here to bid bon voyage to our young friend Lula. She has decided to return to Earth, at least temporarily, and I know you’ll want to wish her a safe and happy stay. As for the delay…I have decided to accompany Johnathan and Lula to Earth, and once we’ve seen her off safely, Johnathan and I will go on what you may call a grand tour. He’s agreed to use the amulet to allow us to visit many places on Earth that I have always wanted to visit or revisit. We expect the trip to take at least two days, and of course we’ll relate our experiences to all of you upon our return. For now, we want to keep our departure low-key, and for the emphasis to continue to be on the departure of our young friend.”

Nicodemus smiled at Lula, and she began making her goodbyes. There was still much curiosity over the purpose for her returning to Earth, and so she had to endure the inevitable questions. Those who had heard the word “mission” used were especially curious; after all, how could she consider it a mission when she really had no idea what it was about? She could only reply as before, that she felt it was what she had to do. She bid farewell to her friends and those of her adoptive family who were present, but surprisingly, reserved the biggest one for her new friend Lilia, giving her a long embrace and promising again to tell all upon her return.

In a few more minutes, all were ready. Madeline made a final word of caution to Johnathan, knowing of his past propensity for taking risks. Outwardly she was joking, but inwardly was sincere in her hope that this would be a safe trip for all of them. The fact that he was making this trip at such late notice, leaving his family and home, bothered her a little at first; but she’d given in in deference to Nicodemus, who’d been planning this trip for days with the agreement that Johnathan and the amulet would make the trip possible. The younger children were disappointed at being left out, but were looking forward to hearing about the details later.

As Nicodemus received well-wishings from the crowd, he saw her, standing apart from the others, as he did yesterday after returning from Gwinthrayle’s. This time, though, Jessica moved away quickly, as if deciding it was useless for her to spend another second there. Nicodemus thought briefly about the reasons for this sudden change of plans, deciding to accompany Lula to Earth now; then he pushed further thoughts aside as he continued making his own goodbyes.

“Well, we’re ready when you are,” said Johnathan as he and Lula joined him.

“Very well,” Nicodemus said simply. The three joined hands. Johnathan concentrated on the amulet, and with a familiar flash, all were gone.

“So this is Thorn Valley, Johnathan?” said Lula after the three travelers had the chance to regain their bearings and view their surroundings. She shuddered with a “Brrr!” and laughed at her own reaction.

“Sure is, Lula. But it’s definitely not the one we knew.”

Johnathan led his companions from the spot the amulet had delivered them to something that had immediately grabbed their attention, where the ground could be seen to drop off abruptly. Bringing themselves near the edge, they could view the scene all around—an awe-inspiring one, not just for the sight in and of itself but also for the knowledge of what brought it about.

“Extraordinary,” said Nicodemus, shading eyes as he gazed back and forth along this decidedly unnatural-looking gorge, that looked for all the world as if an enormous scoop had dug out this chunk of land and adjacent mountainside, slicing through soil and rock with equal ease. On the opposite side, a handful of men and women could be seen moving about an encampment.

“They’ve been running tests for months now,” explained Johnathan, “and near as we can tell, they’re no closer to finding out what happened to that chunk of land as when they started.” He brought his hands up to either side of his mouth. “And you never will! Hahahahaha!” he shouted, making Lula jump backward. “Sorry, Lula. I didn’t mean to startle you.” He knew the humans couldn’t possibly hear the voice of one little mouse across the approximately one-quarter-mile diameter chasm, but he couldn’t resist.

Johnathan explained further how a large portion of the national forest, including Thorn Valley, had been declared off-limits to the general public, the official reason being given as its being part of a special research project which, in order for its success, meant that no human traffic would be allowed.

“Just imagine if word got out about this,” said Nicodemus. “There would be all manner of wild theories as to how such a thing could come about.”

“I’ll say,” added Johnathan. “I can just see the headlines in their less-reputable newspapers: ‘Quarter-mile-wide piece of land missing! Are aliens to blame?’”

Nicodemus laughed. “And let’s not forget a government cover-up! Which is true, to some degree.” He looked at Lula, who just continued gazing across the chasm. “I know this talk means little to you, Lula, and I’m sorry if it seems we’re forgetting the main reason we’re here.” Lula just shrugged, smiling.

Johnathan agreed it was time to move on, so the trio moved away from the edge toward another specific destination. “Since there are still humans here, Lula,” Johnathan asked along the way, “are you sure this is where you want to settle, rather than the area you lived in before?”

“Well, you did say that they would pose little danger to me, and it does feel right, somehow.” Lula again gave a smile and a shrug.

Soon they came to the spot Johnathan had in mind: a tangle of briars in front of three large boulders, underneath which lay a hidden pathway. They made their way through it to a natural grotto within the boulders.

“Wow,” said Lula, looking all around the space. “You were right, Johnathan, it does look just like Teresa’s home, or I guess it’s the other way around. And this is where she lived before, isn’t it?”

“That’s right, Lula, and now it’s yours for as long as you like.” He showed her the actual living area through another opening. Before the trip, Johnathan had checked, via the amulet, to confirm the den was unoccupied and Lula was free to move in. Since Johnathan and Nicodemus could see she was ready to become settled, they began their goodbyes. It was bittersweet for Nicodemus, knowing that, depending on how long her stay here proved to be, he might be gone by the time she returned to Freethorn. The two embraced wordlessly for over a minute as Johnathan waited just outside the entrance. Nicodemus wished her good luck and expressed hope that she would find what she’d come for, then he joined Johnathan outside.

Neither could help expressing some uneasiness over leaving her all alone like this, or feeling that she’d convinced herself to take a course of action that might yield little or no results or even expose her to danger. Yet, what could anyone do? It was her choice, after all, even if there was so much about it that seemed odd, even mysterious.

Nicodemus decided to confide in Johnathan about his theory that it was an actual entity that had contacted Lula, and the possible similarity to Lilia’s experience with the min’hathio.

“Like a spirit of some kind, that resides within the planet itself,” mused Johnathan. “There have been legends about that sort of thing, that we read in those books back at the estate. You know, I’ve gotten the impression of something almost like that ever since my first time there. I’ve never really been able to describe it before, but that really comes close.”

Nicodemus nodded. “I thought you might have, since you’d spent so much time on Lahaikshe before the rest of us.”

Johnathan rubbed his whiskers. “Yes, and then there’s Gwinthrayle’s home, and the feeling of calm and tranquility that everyone experiences there; and other spots, like the conical valley we visited, where Martin and Karen made their ‘honeymoon’ retreat, where there’s such beautiful light phenomena…it all seems to point to something greater than natural phenomena, at least as we’d known it on Earth, as if there is some intelligence behind it. And then there’s that whole mystery of why the Stone sent me and Uhrstegg to Lahaikshe in the first place. And Pharsal—the Rusay that created the Stone—was inside it, his soul-self was; and he claimed it was a mystery to him too. I still wonder if he knew something he wasn’t telling. From time to time, I’ve even wondered if Gwinthrayle wasn’t holding something back. Or Birantha; he’d learned more about the Stone than either of us. I’ve never had any reason, anything concrete, to believe that, and yet…it couldn’t have been all coincidence or blind chance. And both of them have agreed with me on that all along.”

“This new world of ours does have its secrets, all right…as much as some of us have been known to have.” Nicodemus seemed lost in thought for a moment, gazing across their surroundings from the rock on which they stood, ending with one more look at the adjoining boulders where Lula made her new home. He sighed. “Well…I think it’s time we moved on, my friend.”

Johnathan took Nicodemus’s hand and concentrated on the amulet.

Their next stop was the remains of an ancient, sprawling oak in the woods south of Thorn Valley—the former home of their old and now supposedly deceased ally the Great Owl. Johnathan described how he’d come here about two months after he returned from his “exile,” just to pay a visit, and found the upper portion of the tree toppled over and the Owl nowhere to be found. He’d used the amulet to check his current whereabouts, but it was fruitless; and though he could’ve seen how the Owl had met his end, he chose not to. When he broke the news to his family, Madeline recalled how the Owl had predicted an end for himself that apparently had come true: that when the portion of the tree containing his home finally collapsed, he would go with it, as if he and the tree were one.

His two old comrades regarded the spot silently, paying their respects; then, they moved on to their next stop. The Brisbys’ old creekside home, which Nicodemus had never seen before, had been a big part of Johnathan’s life, and was continuing to be so for others: Orland and Lana, shortly before they came to live in Freethorn, and the home’s present occupants, another mouse family. They didn’t stay long, not wanting to impose, mostly long enough for them to wish the family good fortune.

Next they moved on to a place of which both shared strong memories: the Fitzgibbons farm. They first visited the abandoned threshing machine, beneath which Mr. Ages had his home and laboratory, shared by Johnathan before he married Madeline. It wasn’t much to look at now, parts of it having collapsed and caved in since being abandoned altogether. The tunnel leading from the lab to the Rats’ former Rosebush colony had been intentionally filled in the night of the Grand Evacuation, just as most of the colony itself had been, with all the elaborate facilities broken down and hauled out, with what remained reduced to the appearance of an ordinary animal burrow. The rosebush, of course, was also long gone, now replaced by a pair of lilac bushes.

Now they stood at the crest of the jutting rock in the garden—the wave stone—which, earlier that same fateful night, had been the site of so much activity—ordered and precise at first, but soon descending into chaos and even brutality. Though Johnathan had been absent, he knew the details of that night well enough as if he’d actually been there, and could see that being here again was having a definite effect upon Nicodemus, who was silent but shuddered, eyes closed.

“Are you all right?” Johnathan rubbed his friend’s shoulder. “If it’s too much, we can…”

“No…no, I’m fine, Johnathan, really. It’s just...I felt compelled to come here again, even though I knew I’d be facing some unpleasant memories.”

“I guess we all have those. Both of us faced what we thought to be our final ends, our swan songs, while living here.”

“All the Rats could have perished that night, Johnathan, lest we forget. And your own family as well.”

“Of course. But fate had other plans in store for us, didn’t it?” Johnathan laughed ironically. “Boy, has it ever. I’ve thought so much about that, especially since I’d returned from my ‘exile’ on Lahaikshe. Has there really been some unseen hand guiding us all these years? Was it just an accidental blend of chemical compounds that made us what we are? Was it blind chance that led us to establish our colony here? And Madeline…” Johnathan sighed fondly. “If all of the other mice had escaped NIMH alive, I certainly would have married one of them. Merisa, maybe; I did have kind of a crush on her, and I know she was fond of me, even though we were kept in separate cages and I couldn’t even touch her until the night of our freedom. At the same time…I can’t imagine not having Madeline for a wife. We’ve just been so perfect for each other. And talk about fate! If she hadn’t been in the right place at the right time to overhear the farmer’s telephone conversation…I just shudder to think about it.”

“Of course. But lest we forget, it was Billy Fitzgibbons that was responsible for her being there. Certainly we have him to thank for our continued survival as much as Madeline.”

“Oh, yes. Fate…blind chance…what it all really comes down to is making choices, taking one path instead of another. If we’d literally taken a different route after leaving NIMH, how different might our lives have been? And what I said earlier, about the amulet’s sending me to Lahaikshe…that may have been something I had no control over, but so much else… It’s all about making choices, and without always knowing if it’s the right one.”

Nicodemus looked ready to add something, but kept silent, unnoticed by Johnathan, who looked over the side of the stone to the ground. “And then this…” He indicated a cement block, a corner of which just barely showed above the surface of the weed-clogged patch of earth below the stone’s “lee” side. “I was the one who found this block, and used the Stone to fashion it into a home. If I hadn’t been sent to Lahaikshe that same night, I’d have presented it to Maddie and the kids the next day. But they found it entirely on their own. And then it turned out to be right in the path of the tractor. If I hadn’t had other matters to occupy me, I might have realized that and moved it right then. Yet, if I had done that, so much would have been different. Maddie wouldn’t have had to come to you for help, she wouldn’t have been captured…”

“…And wouldn’t have warned us of NIMH’s arrival. And Jenner may not have acted against me that night, though he certainly would have in time, had we survived. Such an intricate web…one event, one choice, can influence or create so many others. And sometimes even after the choice has been made, one cannot always decide if it’s the correct one.” Nicodemus sighed, gazing heavenward.

Johnathan placed a hand on his shoulder. “If there’s something you need off your chest, you know you can tell me anything.”

Nicodemus looked at him with a small smile. “Perceptive as always, my friend. Yes, there is something, which I’ve tried to bury, but with all this talk of fate and choices…” They both sat down. After a moment’s hesitation, he said, “I believe that I have truly…fallen in love for the first time.” He told the whole story, from his initial offer to Jessica up to their last meeting just hours ago.

“So that’s why you wanted to leave on this trip early.”

“Yes. To be that close, but knowing we could never truly be together…” Nicodemus sighed. “It may seem like simple avoidance, I know; surely I can’t stay away from Freethorn for the rest of my time here, and I don’t wish to avoid the company of everyone there on account of one. I just felt the need to go as far away from her as possible, as soon as possible, for all that I wanted to hold her close and…” He looked close to tears.

Johnathan placed his arm around his friend’s shoulders. “Jessica’s a great lady, very talented and beautiful. Under different circumstances, I’d be congratulating you both, but…”

“Patricia said much the same. And I know you understand my dilemma as well as she. And now that I know for certain that Jessica feels as strongly for me, it’s made it so much worse, just knowing what she’s going through.” Nicodemus stood and stretched. “Continuing to avoid each other can be the only possible way for me, but could I really enjoy my remaining time without thinking about her? I’d be distracted, for certain, not very good company.”

“Well, you didn’t ask for advice, so I won’t give any. But if there was a way to remain with us and fulfill your promise to Rollo at the same time, would you take it?”

“Oh, without hesitation. But the only way I know of would be a compromise, both of us sharing this body and taking turns being in control.”

“I didn’t think that was possible. Didn’t you say that once you’d healed Rollo’s brain, you wouldn’t be able to stay?”

“That has been my estimation. A compromise might be possible, but I believe it more likely that with his brain in a more normal state, he’d find the presence of another mind, another persona, to be near-intolerable.”

“Hmmm…so it’s the state Rollo’s brain is in now that’s enabling you and him to share it so easily?”

“Precisely. Yet, even if we were able to share this body fully, even if Rollo were entirely agreeable to it, such a compromise would be patently unfair to him, after the life he’s had thus far. He deserves to live the rest of it to its fullest, and I intend to give it to him. Now certainly if another way were to present itself over the next week…” He managed a small laugh. “But perhaps I shouldn’t be burdening you with this, Johnathan. After all, you wanted to make this trip as much as I, and it’s my choice and mine alone in regards to Jessica, just as it was our mutual choice at the beginning. So…shall we explore more of the farm, or move on?”

“I’d like to stick around a bit longer, if it’s all right with you.” Inwardly, Johnathan wanted to say that he believed Nicodemus should spend as much time as possible with Jessica, recalling the pain of his own separation from Madeline three years ago. If, after all, their love was true, they should enjoy what time they have, even knowing how brief it must be. But would that be the wisest choice? Certainly, either way Nicodemus chose, someone would inevitably be hurt.

They took one more look around before descending to the ground, their feet crunching into the thin layer of half-melted snow. Johnathan described in greater detail the differences in climate between Earth and Lahaikshe; and how Vitrono, their new “home” continent, had generally pleasant temperatures year-round, though sometimes hotter than average. It was like this over a majority of the planet, without the extreme seasonal changes prevalent in Earth’s temperate zones (though this area where they used to make their home has relatively mild winters). Johnathan confessed that he missed them on Lahaikshe, and actually felt comfortable in winter temperatures as long as they weren’t too far below freezing, something Nicodemus remembered well from the old days.

They continued their walking tour of the farm compound, reminiscing over experiences from the old days as they went. It was early afternoon, and because of the time of year there wasn’t much human activity on the farm, but both knew well they needed to be on the lookout for Dragon. Neither was worried, of course, knowing they’d be well protected against any attack. Johnathan explained how, though he and his family hadn’t made any real visits to the farm after moving to Thorn Valley, he had used the amulet to look in occasionally, and so was aware that Dragon was still very much alive and active these days.

They had just left the barn and were heading toward the house when they saw him, making both mice instinctively duck for cover. Dragon was sitting just off the porch preening his two-tone grey fur, looking decidedly non-ferocious.

Johnathan chuckled to himself. “You know, suddenly I’m so in the mood for starting something with him.”

“Just like that time when you got a real ‘rise’ out of him, eh?” Nicodemus had already heard that story from Martin, dating from just before the family’s move to Thorn Valley, when Johnathan decided to get in a parting shot at Dragon, using the Stone to raise him several feet in the air and then drop him.

“Well, maybe not quite like that. Now, if he were to start an altercation; say, if we were just taking a stroll across the lawn, minding our own business, not bothering him a whit; why, then we’d have to do something to protect ourselves, wouldn’t we?” Without waiting for a reply from Nicodemus, Johnathan began such a stroll, whistling “Strolling Through the Park” to himself.

“Oh, Johnathan…” Nicodemus shook his head in mock annoyance. Impulsive as ever, he thought as he joined his friend. They walked side by side toward Dragon, at the same time mindful of anyone who might be watching from the house.

“Hey, Fatface!” Johnathan shouted. Dragon turned at the sound, immediately fixing them with a piercing stare. “Oh, I’m sorry, did I say Fatface? I meant to say…Fatface!”

Dragon crouched and hissed. Johnathan concentrated. Dragon charged straight toward them, and as his intended victims expected, was stymied by an invisible barrier some six inches from them. Dragon hissed and growled at this interruption.

“Yeah, you remember me, don’t you? You thought you had an easy snack when you cornered me in the closet, eh? And that time in the garden, when you went for a ride straight up?”

Dragon only gave a low moan in reply, moving back and forth and swiping at the barrier.

“Oh, I know you understand me, but you’re trying to pretend you don’t. You carnivores are all alike! It’s always ‘Oh, you are so far beneath us because we are the all-powerful predators and you are just the puny lit-tull prey.’ Well, we’re more than just hors d’oeuvres with legs, pal. We have hopes and dreams, families, loved ones. And that’s more than you cats can say, isn’t it? Oh, sure! You’re real faithful to your mates and children, aren’t you?”

Dragon still said nothing, but both mice could tell he was reacting to Johnathan’s words, growling louder and making more forceful swipes with his forepaws.

“Come on, say something, already! You’re getting every word I’m saying, I can tell…”

“Johnathan…exactly what do you want to hear from him? Or expect to?”

Johnathan caught himself, realizing how quickly his manner had become so serious. “Not much, I suppose. I know I’m just beating a dead horse. Some things’ll never change, or some creatures.” He began to concentrate on the amulet again, but then a new sound issued from Dragon’s throat.

“I…will get you…and kill you…”

“Well, Johnathan, there’s your answer.”

“Yeah, even if we’d tried to reason with him, or even sweet-talk him, the results would’ve been just the same.” Johnathan concentrated again, but not only to leave. Unable to resist another parting shot, he made the Stone scoop up a nearby heap of plowed-up snow and drop it right on Dragon. Neither could resist laughing at the sight of Dragon quickly fighting his way out of the sudden avalanche, looking back and forth, and taking off for the house.

Johnathan then brought both of them to the rooftop, where they could see all around the farm and to the surrounding forest. “I don’t know,” said Johnathan. “I guess what I was really angry about down there was…being reminded of Vincent, and the cat that killed him…and the one that killed Ardo, and cats and predators in general. If there’s one thing above all others that makes me glad we moved to Lahaikshe, it’s that. And yet, we came back here to take in some of the good things in this world.”

“Lest we forget,” said Nicodemus with a grin. “But I’ve heard talk since I’ve returned of a certain amount of regret in a few of us for being forced to move to Lahaikshe.”

“‘Forced’ is definitely the right word. But, yes, we all regret it one way or another. How could we not? This is the world that gave us life. Ideally, we should have just as much a right as humankind to make our own way in it. But would they ever see it that way? Because of the circumstances of our creation, they’ll never just simply accept us as we are, because we were an accident to them, something they didn’t intend—an unknown factor.”

“And it’s an all-too-human quality to fear the unknown or what they don’t understand. Ah, yes…you and I had many a spirited discussion on the subject leading up to the Thorn Valley Plan.”

“Oh, yes. And the actions I’ve…we’ve taken recently have added a whole new wrinkle to the matter. They’ve seen the results for themselves, and though they’ll likely never find out what really happened, certainly we couldn’t return to Thorn Valley even if we wanted to.”

“Of course. And many of those old discussions of ours concerned whether there are some humans who might accept us or even befriend us. What do you believe now?”

“I still believe that. But could we be absolutely sure none of them might not one day turn on us? The human propensity for betrayal is just too great. For every Howard Travis, there are any number who’d sell you up the river. Okay, maybe that’s laying it on a little thick. But as much as I’d like to believe that they’d let us live in peace, we just can’t take that risk, now that the secret’s out about where we were. Everyone on the council agrees, though Tallus has had the idea that with the right leverage, just the right bargaining chip, we could coexist on Earth. But with everything going so well on Lahaikshe, it’s nearly unanimous that we should only return if we absolutely have to.”

Nicodemus nodded thoughtfully. “And with no predators on Lahaikshe, and the general acceptance of our people there, you’ll be able to advance as a culture more readily, and find opportunities for cultural directions which, otherwise, you’d never have found or perhaps even thought of.”

“We’ve discussed that, too. But so far, we’ve been pretty much taking things one day at a time.” Johnathan chuckled to himself. “You know, since the Migration, we’d wondered if this was something you’d have approved of. And now that we have you again, and you’ve given it your seal of approval, it seems almost…well, unexpected.”

Nicodemus chuckled. “I’m not surprised. But though I cannot say how events would have played out had I been with you all along, your present success speaks for itself. You had acted as you deemed wisest, given the high-pressure situation you’d been forced into. I’d already discussed the matter with Justin, and he confessed that he’d barely thought of it, even after I’d been among you for several hours that first day.”

“Thanks, old friend.” Johnathan embraced him. “We may not know precisely what awaits us on Lahaikshe, but it’ll be exciting to watch it all unfold.”

A thought occurred to Nicodemus, one he had nearly forgotten: should he bring up that matter Gwinthrayle had advised him not to yet, about the dramatic change in that small area on the opposite side of Lahaikshe, something which could very well affect decisions about staying on that world? No, he’d promised Gwinthrayle, and felt he could trust him to choose for himself the right time to share the information. “So, Johnathan…about this ‘bargaining chip’ you spoke of: Did Tallus have something specific in mind?”

“Something we’d each thought of on our own: this little beauty right here.” Johnathan held up the Stone. “I’ve had plenty of time to consider its potential, and Maddie and I both feel we’ve only scratched the surface. For instance, with its capability to show images taking place in the present and the past, why…think of the boon it would be to the humans.”

Nicodemus raised eyebrows. “Unsolved crimes…like high-profile murders, missing-person cases…many other things that have long been mysteries to them, wouldn’t remain such for long. To say nothing of what a help it would be in saving lives, in rescue operations and the like.”

“Exactly. I’ve even pictured myself offering services to them—‘Johnathan Brisby: Amulet-Bearer for Hire.’” Johnathan laughed at the absurdity of it, but both knew such a situation was entirely within the realm of possibility.

“Yes, and in return for your services, our people remain free and inviolate, with a guarantee of being left alone with no human intrusion.”

“Exactly again. Yet, would even that be enough? I guess, though, that if we are to stay on Lahaikshe indefinitely—probably permanently—that we can shelve that whole discussion.”

“Yes. Now, as to that potential, I know you’ve considered as much as I how far you could take it, how much you could do.”

Johnathan nodded. “Until a few months ago, I’d never have believed it could move a quarter-mile wide piece of land, and everything and everyone on it, to a whole other dimension. Now…I’m almost afraid to speculate. How large an area of land or object could it move like that? At least, with its ‘fail-safe’ we can be assured no one would be hurt or killed…but to think that it could do so much, and all by the will of just one or two little mice…it’s such an awesome responsibility.”

“One which neither of you had asked for, obviously, but which you must shoulder nevertheless.”

“And I guess that would take us back to the question of fate. The Stone made its way into our hands, courtesy of Ghormfisk, and neither of us yet know why. Pharsal meant it to be commanded by persons of a certain character, and while we qualified, it doesn’t seem random. Was its ultimate purpose to be in our hands, so we could, perhaps, lead our people to a new world and a new destiny? Think of it, Nicodemus. On Earth, we had to keep our existence secret, or risk certain capture or death, in addition to having natural enemies, which we were still as vulnerable to as natural rats and mice. And now look at us on Lahaikshe: no enemies, acceptance by the Rusay and its other inhabitants, literally a whole world of possibilities, with the sky the only limit.”

“Excellent point, Johnathan. Perhaps this is another one that’s useless to speculate on, and may become clearer in time.”

Johnathan sighed. “I guess so.” He gazed to the north, toward Thorn Valley. “It’s strange, but when you said that, right away I thought of Lula. I suppose it’s because our leaving her is still fresh in my memory, but…somehow, I’m not as worried for her safety as I was.”

“Time will certainly tell with her, my friend. Now…shall we move on?”

Johnathan was equally ready, and after a brief overview of their plans and one last look around the Fitzgibbons farm—perhaps for the very last time for Johnathan as well as Nicodemus—they were away with a flash.

“Well, what do you think, Nicodemus?”

Nicodemus breathed in deep before answering. “The pictures we’ve seen…simply don’t do it justice, Johnathan.”

The two mice were drifting over the Grand Canyon, its granite walls burning so intensely red in the late-afternoon sun that it almost hurt their eyes. They could see whitewater rafters on the river below, and more people at a tourist station at canyon’s edge. They wondered if any of them had binoculars trained on these two out-of-place aerial travelers.

For several minutes, neither spoke a word. Then Johnathan said, “You know, I’ve taken Maddie and the kids to some different locations on Earth before, though we never came here…and certainly not to the extent that we’re about to do.”

“Perhaps that’s a situation you could change in the future, for whoever is interested.”

“That’s true. There hasn’t been that great a demand from the Rats for that sort of thing. I guess it’s because they don’t want to impose on Maddie or me, though most of them seem content to stay put and not do too much traveling. Still...moving off Earth doesn’t have to mean staying away completely, does it?”

They agreed that this was another matter that could wait until this trip was over. For now, they only wanted to continue drinking in the sight of this splendorous work of nature.

When both agreed it was time to move on, Nicodemus again had a specific destination in mind. Early on, it was decided he would choose each spot, though some Johnathan voiced some reluctance for, especially some large human cities. Nicodemus convinced him, though, that these were just as legitimate sights to take in: “For better or worse,” he had said, “there are many worthwhile monuments to human achievement, and they should not be excluded because of a reluctance to get too close to the ones that made them.” So Johnathan agreed, though he’d said Nicodemus needn’t have had to convince him, because he’d go along with any choice of destination he’d make.

Their next destination was a beach along the Gulf of Mexico, along Mexico’s east coast. Neither had seen a body of water this large before, at least on Earth, and they were as impressed with the sight as with the Canyon. They spent some time on the beach, swimming in the shallow tidal pools and encountering crabs and shellfish.

It was a spot both were reluctant to leave too soon, but Nicodemus was determined to take in as many spots as possible in the time they’d set aside, with the emphasis on variety and contrast. So for their next destination, they visited Antarctica, marveling at its harsh and stark beauty, its glaciers and hardy wildlife. Here, as in several other places they’d visit, the amulet was employed to shield them from climatic extremes.

It was quite the whirlwind tour they’d embarked upon. Over the next day and a half, they visited active volcanos in Italy and Hawaii (the former, Mount Etna, was oozing lava at the time); a Congolese rain forest glade inhabited by mountain gorillas; mountain tops in the Andes and the Himalayas; remote, unspoiled tropical islands in every ocean. They floated over the North Sea during a storm that whipped the water into a frenzy. They stood upon high dunes in the Sahara, with the surrounding landscape an endless sea of desert sand in every direction. They rode on the back of an elephant, who barely took notice of them, on the Serengeti Plain.

They plunged into the remotest sections of the Amazon rain forest, viewing up close its diverse and sometimes dangerous wildlife, at one point being charged by an ocelot from which they were able to protect themselves in time. Other encounters of note included meeting a larger “cousin”: a capybara, just coming ashore after a swim and rather indifferent to their presence.

It was, overall, as varied an experience as Nicodemus had wished for, as they visited Arctic tundra, Australian outback, snow-covered mountain terrain in the Swiss Alps that was more vertical than horizontal; stretches of golden beach in California, the Bahamas, Namibia, Brazil.

One type of environment they returned to the most was dense forestland, especially tropical and subtropical, in not only South America and Africa but also Mexico, Central America, Florida, eastern Australia, along the American and Canadian Pacific coast. But one that proved particularly alluring started when Johnathan suggested they not only view bodies of water from above, but from the inside as well, with the amulet keeping them dry and comfortable inside a bubble of air. They ventured among coral reefs off Australia, in the Caribbean, and the Indian Ocean, “swam” with dolphins and numerous schools of fish, plumbed the murkiest depths with the amulet’s force-shield able to withstand the most crushing pressures and provide illumination so they could view the often bizarre-looking lifeforms that dwelt there.

Perhaps the most memorable experience of the entire trip came when they located a pod of whales, and simply traveled with them for almost an hour, hearing their mournful song, awestruck by their graceful underwater ballet. “Humans are so confident in their belief in their own inherent superiority,” remarked Johnathan at one point. “But if more of them could spend time as we have among these magnificent creatures…how could they not think differently afterwards?”

Nicodemus could only nod silently at first, unable to contain his emotions. “It’s almost as if…they speak with the voice of the planet itself.” The remark reminded both of them of their discussion of the supposed entity that may have contacted both Lilia and Lula, though neither would have been able to articulate why, precisely.

As planned, they also visited human cities and towns, taking time to view the activities of some of their inhabitants up close as well as feats of architecture and engineering, both modern and vintage. They viewed the Pyramids of Egypt, Stonehenge, centuries-old European castles and cathedrals, China’s Great Wall, the Tiahuanaco ruins of Bolivia. They soared over huge cities like New York, London, Beijing, Rio de Janeiro, Tokyo; marveling at the massive amount of work and toil to make them what they are today and simultaneously wondering how their inhabitants can live like this, seemingly far removed from the natural world; though they did note how some areas, like New York’s Central Park, were left “green.”

They visited rural areas and marveled at the contrast to the big cities, with their inhabitants’ slower-paced way of life. They visited farms that operated on a much larger scale than the Fitzgibbons farm, admiring the amount of work it took to grow so much food, but expressing far less admiration over those farms in which animals like hogs or chickens were raised under conditions in which they rarely if ever saw the light of day. Johnathan mused over how many animals in these fields that covered so many acres might have a “moving day” much like his family and others used to have.

Throughout this entire tour, the pair made frequent stops to eat and catch some sleep. On one such break, taken at the base of a tree near a beach on Florida’s Gulf coast, they mutually decided to end their tour and return home after they’d rested once more. Both were a bit tired and admitted they probably should have allowed more time for sleep, but once they’d begun it was an effort to keep from moving forward and taking in as much as they could in the time they’d allotted. Both were still excited over all they’d seen and experienced, but for Nicodemus there was some sadness too; for the reasons Johnathan suspected, but there was more to it.

“For all that we’ve seen that’s beautiful, even majestic, it seems as if humankind, by and large, can’t seem to truly appreciate what they have here. They have the means at hand—the technology, the intelligence—to make their world truly a paradise, eliminate all hunger and poverty.”

“First they’ll have to eliminate greed and willful ignorance,” added Johnathan, “and their xenophobic tendencies. It’s what’s kept them from advancing socially as a race, and consequently solving their most crushing problems.”

“Yes, and we certainly can’t solve them for them. Perhaps it’s just as well you’ve made Lahaikshe your home now.”

They agreed to shelve further discussion of the matter, not wanting to rehash old news, especially since both wanted to rest up before proceeding with the last leg of their trip. They found a cozy spot inside a storage shed in back of a seafood restaurant.

Once they’d been well rested, one last flash of light signaled the conclusion of this elaborate, wide-ranging “vacation” for the two mouse travelers.

Chapter 30 - New mysteries back home

They returned in Oak Park, though their arrival garnered virtually no notice; not that they expected much of one, since there was no set timetable for their trip. Johnathan looked all around to get his bearings before they moved away from the big burr oak toward the colonies. They could already tell it was midafternoon, close to two days—around 56 hours—since they’d departed.

“Wow, that was one amazing ride,” said Johnathan, patting Nicodemus’s shoulder. “But boy, there’s nothing like coming back home again. I wonder where everybody is? Usually somebody’s here in the park, at least to…”

He paused as he noticed that Nicodemus appeared ill at ease; but before he could ask, Nicodemus said, “There’s something…odd in the air, Johnathan. Something’s been happening while we were gone.”

“Like what?”

“Nothing ominous, I’m sure; we need not fear the worst.” No, he was sure it was nothing like any sudden, disastrous climatic change, as Gwinthrayle had warned him could possibly happen elsewhere on Lahaikshe. But this had to be something out of the ordinary.

“All the same, we haven’t seen hide or hair of anyone yet.” Barely had Johnathan said this when two rats approached: the Guard rat Melvin and his wife Judith. Upon seeing the two mice, they looked almost relieved and eager to share some vital information.

After greetings, Melvin told them, “We’re glad to have you back, Nicodemus. Maybe you can get to the bottom of what’s been going on around here. Oh, and you too, Johnathan, with the Stone. Didn’t mean to slight you.”

“That’s okay, Mel. Just start from the beginning.”

“Well, I guess it started two days ago, just after you left.” The four continued on along the trail. “Just after sunset, we started getting reports of all manner of strange sounds, things that shouldn’t have been where they were. Some of us were reminded of that weird fog that rolled in a few days ago, but these… Well, Philip was the first to report something. While he was on patrol, he heard a strange, tremulous wailing sound on the southwest ridge. But when he approached the area it came from, he couldn’t see or hear anything.”

“He didn’t report anything else strange,” added Judith, “but then others started reporting seeing things as well as hearing sounds that were out of place.”

“And each seemed to be more bizarre than the last. We had two separate reports of stone pillars with strange markings suddenly appearing, and then disappearing when they glanced away for a second.”

“My niece Sasha and her friend Jenine saw a strange, shimmering, glowing thing just floating in the air near the lake. They weren’t really scared at first until it started changing shape, and a face appeared on it: ugly, vicious-looking, with long sharp teeth. It looked right at them, opened its mouth and started moving toward them really fast. They took off running for home, but the first time they looked around it was nowhere in sight. They reported it to the first guard they saw, and they checked that area but saw nothing out of the ordinary.” Judith shuddered and gave a small laugh. “I’m not sure I’d have been as calm as the girls were.”

“They were all like that at first,” Melvin went on. “Someone would report something odd, we’d check out their claim, and find nothing. But by now we’re sure no one’s trying to pull our legs, because others of us in the Guard have seen things; and heard and even smelled, too.”

They described more such anomalies: a structure resembling a miniature human house that swayed, groaned, parts of its structure peeling away as if alive and wriggling like tentacles; an ordinary-looking treestump that, when approached, split in half, revealing a raw, red, throatlike passage that appeared to glow from within, with the most vile, rotten, noisome stench emanating from it, seemingly ready to swallow anyone who chanced upon it.

Perhaps the most terrifying was reported by a group of Rat, Mouse and Rusay children the previous night, just after sunset. They were on this very path between the park and the Mouse colony when something blocked their way: a grotesque creature lying on its back across the trail. It was roughly humanoid in overall proportions but with craggy, exaggerated features in both face and body, its skin a sickly yellow. It opened its mouth (“There seems to be a definite theme here,” remarked Johnathan at this point) and its features changed shape gradually, becoming even more disproportionate. Its mouth became a gaping aperture and though its teeth weren’t sharp, it was still terrifying for the youngsters who tried in vain to go around the creature. Seemingly every step they took threatened to take them right into its maw and down its gullet, as if it were everywhere at once. Only after they’d all huddled together and began shouting for help did the thing vanish without a trace, leaving the youngsters free to run for home.

A council meeting had convened only an hour before to discuss the apparent problem, but predictably no consensus was reached on how to deal with it. How could they deal with something that, thus far, appeared only to be a string of intangible illusions? They’d known about areas on Lahaikshe where strange, illusory events are routine, such as the conical valley. But none were this terrifying in appearance. Gwinthrayle had said there were several such “hot spots” on Lahaikshe, his own home located on one, but he’d been positive that Freethorn didn’t stand atop one of them. Obviously they were dealing with forces, perhaps entirely natural, which were beyond their understanding, and it had been suggested that Johnathan or Nicodemus contact Gwinthrayle after they returned. Tallus had put forth that whatever force was responsible (or whoever, if it could be termed as such) might possibly be trying deliberately to do no more than frighten them. They agreed that if it ever seemed that a genuine danger were present, some action, perhaps evacuation, would be called for; but if it continued as it had been, then it shouldn’t be a major concern.

Johnathan agreed to try using the amulet to possibly uncover clues to the nature of these anomalies. He was hesitant about involving Gwinthrayle at this point, though, and Nicodemus conceded, since Johnathan had known him longer.

Upon reaching the Mouse colony, they found that most of its residents (and the Rats as well, reported Melvin) were staying closer to home as much as possible, so it was quite a large crowd there to greet them. Nicodemus did the bulk of the description of his and Johnathan’s trip, while Johnathan—after greeting his wife and children—became occupied with trying to solve the “anomaly mystery” with the amulet. Though Nicodemus enjoyed relating all they’d seen and heard, he knew reminders of other matters weren’t far away. The first one was some of the mouse children in the group before him—Stuart, Shirley, Clifford, Diane—and the next one, their mother, arrived presently, Stuart whispering excitedly to her as she joined them. Jessica’s eyes met Nicodemus’s, and the unmistakable look in them—the same look he’d seen when last they’d parted—was enough to make him momentarily “lose his place” in his narration. He managed to sound unflustered as he resumed, but now he found himself more in a hurry to finish. Another council meeting, to let each other know where they stood, would be necessary, though he couldn’t be sure right then what he’d say. He soldiered on, pushing the matter back as best he could until he finished his story.

After he did, Johnathan announced that he’d done all he could with the Stone, mainly using its past-imaging capability to see those incidents for himself, but he could discern no source for them. They discussed the possibility of Nicodemus paying another visit to Gwinthrayle to get his input, agreeing to run it past the council first. Some of Nicodemus’s audience wasn’t ready to let him go yet, begging for more details on the trip, especially the encounters with whales and gorillas. Nicodemus and Johnathan promised to be more thorough later, though one among his audience sought some personal attention now.

“Diane! What may I do for you, child?” As he asked, Nicodemus scanned the area for her mother, but she had moved on along with most of the crowd. Diane motioned for him to let her whisper in his ear. After doing so, she dashed away, giving a slight giggle.

“Well,” said Johnathan, “if there’s someplace else you need to be right now…”

“Not immediately. There’s some business we should both attend to first.”

“Right.” As they headed off toward the Rat colony, Johnathan said privately, “If it’s about Jessica—Diane’s message, I mean—then I’m behind you all the way, whatever you decide.”

Nicodemus thanked him and they moved on.

Some three hours later, Nicodemus paced in his quarters. He paused to look in the mirror, taking a deep breath. Well, just like two nights ago, he thought, once again both anticipating and dreading the meeting to come. He tried to avoid any expectations, telling himself to take things as they come. He concentrated on the trip to Earth and the numerous wonders he and Johnathan had seen, to the point where he felt almost annoyed at the interruption when the knock on the door sounded.

Still, he unhesitantly asked who it was, and then he invited Jessica inside. There was no hesitation in her either as she entered. They said their hellos, and for a while only discussed recent events, mainly his and Johnathan’s trip and her and others’ reactions to the bizarre illusions.

“We can only hope they don’t go beyond illusion,” Nicodemus said. “If they continue, I’d like to see one of them for myself. Then, perhaps I’d be better able to trace its source, if my own abilities would allow it.”

“Yes. I’m sure you could.” By now the two were seated close together, and Nicodemus finally was able to look Jessica squarely in the eye to find once more that look: one of longing, of desire, one that fairly shouted out loud for him to take her in his arms, and stay and spend every remaining moment he had, waking or unwaking, with her.

“Your daughter, Diane,” he said at length. “What a sweet child. When she gave her message, how could she know what a serious matter this was, that would bring us together now.”

“I know. I just couldn’t approach you right then myself, but now...oh, Nicodemus, I’ve…tried to convince myself that we should keep trying to avoid each other, but it’s just no good. I think, if you’re willing, that we should spend as much time with each other as possible until you’re gone, even if it’s only for a few days. I know it’s crazy, but…I’ve never felt this way for anyone since Harley. I can’t deny it, I…I love you, Nicodemus. I want to make you happy, even if we have so little time. Please…say yes.” She clasped his hand.

Nicodemus sighed. “As I love you, Jessica.” He stood. “And that is precisely why we cannot be together, even for this short time. It would just be so unfair to you.”

“Unfair?” Jessica stood and took his arm. “Nicodemus, what’s unfair is that you only have a few days left before you have to leave us forever. But you’ve been telling me that you accept that, because you made a promise to Rollo and you want to keep it. And I’ve accepted that, too, I really have. I want to see you succeed in helping Rollo the way you want, so that he can live a more normal life. I don’t like the fact that you have to leave so soon, and I know you don’t either. But…” She faced him squarely, eyes imploring. “Why can’t we just try to make each other happy, to take comfort in each other’s company? Just a little happiness, that’s all. We deserve it.” She lowered her head on his shoulder.

He stroked the back of her head. “Oh, Jessica. You deserve so much more than a little happiness. You deserve a lifetime’s worth.”

“But—”

“Please, let me finish. I’ve seen and heard so much lately to convince me that a love affair that two can commit to for life, or at least for the foreseeable future, is how it should be, is real love. But my foreseeable future can be counted in days. This is why it wouldn’t be fair to you. Perhaps because this is the first I’ve truly been in love, this is why I feel this way. I don’t know. All I know is that I love you too much to have to have it end so soon.”

Jessica turned away for a moment, and then faced him, eyes glistening with tears. “I think I understand. You’ve always placed the needs of others before yourself. It’s just who you are, to be noble and unselfish. But just once, couldn’t you dispense with nobility? What’s wrong with being a little selfish, to want a little happiness—that’s right, a little happiness—for yourself? Especially—especially when you have so little time left?” She paused, then went on: “If you won’t even give it a try—give you and me a try—how will you know how bad it’ll be for me when you have to leave? And besides…a part of you will still be here. The body you’re in now. Rollo will be here for years to come, and every time I look at him I’ll be reminded of you. Don’t you think I’ve considered that? I’d be able to handle it, I know it.”

“I…don’t doubt that you would, Jessica. Yet, there is another matter we touched upon last time, that I’m sure you remember.”

“Whether it’s really you I’m in love with, or Rollo. I still can’t say. Maybe…after you are gone, I’ll know. But if we spend more time together now, that could be just as helpful.”

“Possibly. But as you know, the only way we could remain together would be if I stayed in Rollo’s body indefinitely. I will, by no means, consider reneging on my word on him.”

“But if there were a way that both of you could remain here with us…”

“I would take it, of course. I will admit to a certain amount of selfishness, just as I did that first night. And, too, perhaps…oh, I can scarcely believe I’m admitting to this…a touch of jealousy as well.”

Jessica’s eyes grew wide. “Jealousy? Who would you…”

“Who else? The thought that you may love Rollo, when I know that I—” Nicodemus managed a small laugh. “Absurd, so absurd. To think I could be capable of being jealous of the one whose body I inhabit, who has every right to live a normal life within it…” He shook his head.

“There are many things in this world, many mysteries, that have unfolded since we’ve come here. Maybe there’s something, some way, that you could find with your powers, that could help both of you. Most everyone here would want both of you to stay.”

“Thank you, Jessica, and…perhaps there may yet be something here that will advance such a development.” He went to the door and opened it. “If you would please leave me, I have much to think and meditate on.”

“You’re not backing down, are you?” Jessica asked at the door.

Nicodemus stroked her shoulder. “Rest assured, my dear, that if I reach any other decision, you’ll be the first to know.” He embraced her, not tightly though he certainly wanted to offer more than reassurance.

“I hope it won’t be too long.” Jessica turned and moved quickly down the corridor without looking back.

“As do I, my…my dear,” Nicodemus said quietly to himself as he closed the door. “As do I.” He took a deep breath, resolving to concentrate on greater and more immediate matters, the one that could affect everyone in Freethorn…everyone he loved, not just one.

So…where to now, he thought. Could there possibly be something here, on Lahaikshe, perhaps the intelligence that Lilia had contact with, that might provide a solution? And what was the likelihood of such a solution presenting itself in the next few days? Should that be his primary focus, to seek such a solution? Perhaps not, he decided, because even though he’s no longer the Freethorners’ leader, his first duty should be to them. And there are no less than two matters, both generated by unknown forces present on this world, that could be potential threats, to not only his former subjects but all life on this world. Whatever the cause of that sudden climatic change in that remote corner of Lahaikshe, that especially couldn’t be taken lightly. Unless Gwinthrayle was mistaken about that location, they both saw the results, as did the others watching his “travelogue”: no plant or animal life left, at least none immediately visible. He wanted to tell the council about this right away, though he trusted Gwinthrayle’s advice to wait until he’d had the chance to look into the matter himself.

Of more direct and immediate concern, of course, were the bizarre illusions many had witnessed and even been frightened out of their wits by, including children. No doubt, someone or something was deliberately causing this. He’d already inquired about it with the Rusay visitors, but the only thing they could compare it to from their own experience were those similar to what the Brisbys and some of the other Freethorners had seen in mystical hot spots like the conical valley, though not to that degree. Nicodemus had considered briefly the possibility of some kind of technology unique to this world, something the Freethorners hadn’t encountered yet…or even something from yet another dimensional plane.

Well, he concluded, whatever the source of the anomalies, they should be his top priority. And who knows what he’ll encounter in the course of any investigation? A solution to some other problem could crop up. If, as he’d already estimated, the nature of his own abilities were much as those of Gwinthrayle, it meant they drew upon the ambient energies present on Lahaikshe; and if these anomalies had an origin that was present in the very makeup of this world, then he may well be able to discern their purpose. All this was, of course, uncharted territory for him, with no clear procedure open to him; so for now, a period of meditation was in order. He sat in the middle of the floor and tried emptying his mind of all thought, expecting or anticipating nothing, to allow new ideas or perspectives to present themselves as they will.

Just outside one of the Mouse colony’s outer entrances, Jessica met Johnathan. She told him she’d just talked with Nicodemus, going into no further detail, and that he wished to be undisturbed for the time being. Johnathan said he’d help spread the word, though it was already generally accepted that when Nicodemus is in his own quarters, no one should visit him without an appointment.

“He does deserve that much respect,” remarked Jessica. “And so much more.”

Johnathan nodded. “If only there were some other way he could stay with us…but he’s determined to keep his promise.”

“And you’ve known him much longer,” said Jessica, voice quavering slightly. “So I guess when he makes a decision, he won’t…back down. That’s such a good quality, you have to admire that. Yep…steadfast, unwavering, never…change your mind…” She turned away, façade crumbling.

Johnathan could feel her tremble as he placed a hand on her shoulder. She wiped away a tear as he led her to a nearby rock. After they sat, he said, “I know it’s hard. I don’t want him to leave us either, but it’s his decision…and we all have to respect that.”

Jessica sniffled and finally said, “He…he told you, didn’t he? While he and you were away…”

Johnathan nodded. “I can guess what he just got done telling you.”

Jessica was able to describe the gist of their conversation, emphasizing his contention that it wouldn’t be a genuine love affair if it couldn’t be long-term. “I have to wonder if he really believes that, or is he…does he think he’s just sparing me pain? It just seems like he’s creating pain for both of us.”

Johnathan silently consoled her for a minute, then said, “The lives we lead now…longer, with deeper emotion…it’s changed our whole idea of love, hasn’t it? It has to be long-term, since we live so much longer now, courtesy of NIMH. How could they have known what their treatments would ultimately do to us, make us so much like them? And it seems like a blessing, truly a gift, most of the time. But in times when we’re separate, where one has to go away…or one is torn away unwillingly…it can almost be a curse.”

“Oh, yes. What happened to you, when you were sent away, and you couldn’t return home. I guess…that makes my situation look…I mean, our situation…” Jessica shook her head. “Neither of us wanted this to happen. I thought I was just being kind, doing him a favor. And we knew it could happen! Both of us did.” She sighed. “And I thought that if it did, that…that I’d be strong, that I could deal with it better than this.” She choked back a sob as Johnathan placed an arm around her shoulders.

As he comforted her, Madeline dropped by; and, owing as much to her emotional rapport with her husband as to observing him lending comfort to a friend, she simply asked what was wrong. After moving to a more out-of-the-way location, they asked for her confidentiality on the matter, and then they detailed Jessica’s problem to her. Her reaction matched that of Johnathan and Patricia, and she was at as much of a loss for how to console her.

“I guess…I’ll just have to see this through the best I can, for the sake of my family, my friends. I’ll just keep telling myself that this is a love that…that just can’t be, doomed from the start.”

“Oh, Jessica, you shouldn’t think like that,” said Madeline consolingly, squeezing her hand. “You will find love again.”

“Oh, I suppose so. Nicodemus did say that he’d try to find a way he and Rollo could stay. And if not, well, who knows? Maybe it is Rollo I’m actually I’m in love with. Oh, it’s all so crazy…”

They discussed the point further, and it led to their recounting a recent discussion in the council about how long the Mouse colony would be able to go on in its present state, with its relatively limited gene pool. Other mice could be brought in from Earth, but with no more mice in existence that have the advanced genes those that came from NIMH and their children share, how long would those mice’s advanced characteristics be passed on in full to their descendants? As with that earlier discussion, Johnathan concluded an unforeseen solution may be yet forthcoming—not unlike Nicodemus’s situation. It was an idea he felt strongly about, perhaps owing to this world’s influence, as it seemed to be influencing others in subtle ways since they’d settled here.

“I wish that if this world were really trying to pass on some kind of information to us, it would just make it more obvious instead of beating around the bush.” Jessica laughed at the absurdity of her own statement. “It’s silly, isn’t it? Talking about this world as if it were a living, breathing entity like us.”

“Not silly to me,” said Johnathan. “I’ve witnessed too much and spent too much time here to dismiss anything. And with these bizarre illusions we’ve been having here, that just reinforces the idea.”

“Do you really believe that it’s something in this world’s makeup, and not some individual, that’s responsible?” asked Madeline.

“Nicodemus seems to think so, and I’d have to agree. He’s going to try investigating them tonight, when they’ll likely appear again.”

“I hope he can come up with something,” said Jessica. “Anything.”

The conversation turned toward other subjects, till the Brisbys had to leave. Madeline offered Jessica further words of encouragement; then, after they’d gone and Jessica prepared to move on herself, she thought of their discussion of the mice’s limited gene pool; and how Madeline had essentially become one of them, solely by virtue of being mated to Johnathan. She’d spent enough time with her to see and hear for herself how indistinguishable she was, in her intellectual capacity and overall manner, from Johnathan or Jessica’s own parents. Was this something unique to Johnathan, or did all of the Mice and Rats from NIMH have this capability? Even years later, none could say for sure, especially since the Rats had always tended to be an insular and closed society, only allowing a handful of natural rats into the fold. As for the Mice, it was apparent that such a capability wasn’t inherited; even if Kimball and Patricia had it, Norman and Jessica certainly didn’t, since their mates Vera and Harley aged normally. The jury was still out on their other siblings’ mates: Brummie, Stollie, Newell, Teelo, Lana, as well as Ages’ wife Alma; yet, it seemed that since their arrival on Lahaikshe, some of them had undergone changes that seemed to point to similar development. Just two days ago, Jessica had lunch with Brummie and Michelle, and he couldn’t stop talking about his most recent test scores at the school. Brummie had gone from being reluctant to even enroll in the beginning, only doing so after considerable prodding from Michelle, to being at the top of his class, to the point where Michelle had to keep reminding him of what bad form it is to brag about oneself so continuously. He’d always say that he wasn’t trying to be a jerk, only that he couldn’t get over what he saw as a newfound gift, to be able to learn so much. So was there something to this theory about this planet itself having an influence on its inhabitants? Brummie regarding his new reasoning and learning capacity as a gift could be one more indication of such. But if it’s true, what about these recent illusions? Is “it” trying to tell them something with them? Do the two have anything at all to do with each other? Could Nicodemus figure them out, and possibly other things like…

Jessica shook her head and headed for the colony’s medical unit, suddenly feeling the need to bury herself in her work again.

Nicodemus paused for a moment outside the Rat community’s main entrance after having had dinner with Orson and Lucretia and some of their children and grandchildren. It had been one of the more delicious and sumptuous meals he’d been treated to thus far, filled with much laughter and good cheer as well as good food and drink. He breathed in the early-evening air and regarded the coming sunset, anticipating his expected tasks…and was unable to suppress a belch. He laughed to himself. He hoped, half-jokingly, that a full belly wouldn’t slow him down. He walked along the trail to the Mouse colony, greeting many along the way, stopping to chat now and again.

Presently he saw Stuart, Jessica’s eldest son, waving to flag him down. After initial greetings, he approached without hesitation; by and large, most of the new Mouse residents, while not impolite toward him, were more casual, having no prior experience with him in his old life. As they chatted, Nicodemus briefly wondered if his mother had sent him, as earlier with Diane. But it was quickly apparent that he had other matters on his mind.

After a bit of hemming and hawing, Stuart said, “I was wondering about…well, about Lula, and how she’s doing.”

They sat on the nearest bench. “Well, she seemed in very high spirits when Johnathan and I left her. She was very confident about this, well, ‘mission’ of hers.”

“Uh-huh. Did she say anything more about that?”

“I’m afraid not. It’s just as much a mystery to us as you…and apparently to her as well.”

“Oh.” Stuart looked downcast, sighing.

“I guess we’re all a bit worried about her, because of that mystery and especially because she’s all by herself.”

“I’m not worried about her, not…not much.” After a pause he added, “She sure acted like…like she wasn’t gonna miss me much.”

“Oh? Why, I saw her give you a very nice goodbye hug.”

Stuart turned away, looking embarrassed. “Yeah, but…I’ve been…we’ve been friends since she got here, and…”

“And you were expecting…a little more, perhaps, a greater goodbye than what she gave you?”

Stuart looked exasperated, then apologetic, genuinely not wanting to show disrespect. “I guess, but…it looked like she gave a bigger goodbye to Lilia, and they hardly talked at all before.”

“Ah…the green-eyed monster rears its ugly head.”

“Huh? Where?” Stuart looked all around them.

Nicodemus chuckled. “It’s only a euphemism for jealousy, my boy. And believe me, I know all about it myself.” Inwardly he added: And if I told you how, you’d never believe me.

“I’m not jealous, not…not really. Why should I be? I mean…” Stuart sighed. “Oh, I don’t know…I guess I am worried about her, just a little. I know she was able to take care of herself before, but…she’s out there all alone, where nobody knows her. What’s gonna happen to her? And the way she talked, she doesn’t even know why she’s there. Even she doesn’t know what’s gonna happen.”

Nicodemus placed a comforting arm around Stuart’s shoulders. “Even I cannot say what the outcome of Lula’s ‘mission’ will be. But I have every confidence that she will emerge from it safely, and return to us alive and well. And…if she could see you right now, and see how concerned you are about her, she’d be touched greatly.”

Stuart’s expression brightened. “You really think so?”

“She knows how much you care for her. Just a few days ago, when we had dinner together with Brutus and his family, she spoke of how helpful you’d been to her and what a great friend you’d been.”

“Wow…that’s great, but…it just looks like…Lilia’s her best friend now.”

“Lula’s made many friends here. I’m quite fond of her myself. Lilia’s just the latest one.”

“Okay…if you say so.” Apparently satisfied, Stuart changed the subject completely, asking Nicodemus what he thought about the recent illusions and what they may be all about.

Chapter 31 - Lula has a visitor

The weather had just changed earlier that day, and now the skies over Thorn Valley were mostly overcast, with conditions warmer and blustery, with occasional rain. From atop one of the boulders that topped her temporary home, Lula viewed her surroundings; then, with a sigh, began making her way back down to the den entrance. At least the weather is a bit warmer, she told herself. Mother Pat had always encouraged her to put a positive spin on any situation, and though this one wasn’t an especially bad one, there wasn’t much about it that was good, either.

The young mouse sighed as she made her way through the brush-covered entrance to the cozy interior. She lay back on the bed, musing briefly on the den’s previous occupants and how happy they were for that brief time they lived here. Her thoughts returned to her own situation, and she again wondered: What was she doing here? It hadn’t really been an issue until she woke up this morning. Yesterday, she was still committed to believing in this mission, even looking forward to fulfilling it. The fact that she had no idea of its specific nature or purpose wasn’t even relevant, and she didn’t mind waiting for some further sign or indication of it.

Today, though, there was a growing restlessness within her. Surely, she’d had no problems in gathering food, this den was safe and inviolate from predators, and she’d met other mice who’d been friendly with her. But there should be more, there had to be. She thought back to Lilia’s account of her strange experience with the min’hathio, especially how she’d felt compelled to visit the tsadhavi grove, just as Lula felt compelled to come here; and afterwards questioning why she’d gone there to begin with, again just as Lula was doing now. Was there another purpose to that incident, beyond this…entity, whatever it is, giving words of reassurance? Nothing seemed to present itself to Lilia yet (though, of course, it had been two days since they’d last seen each other). Maybe it’s too soon, for either of them. Her own contact with this presence, so similar to Lilia’s, had to mean something. There was a very good chance that, if not for it, she’d not be alive now. She’d been so consumed with despair over losing her family she’d actually considered pitching herself over the rock wall to certain death. The second time she’d looked over the edge, the “presence” had talked her down, calming and reassuring her until Orland came to get her. If it (she?) had done this much for her, then she owed this much to it, to continue to wait until her “mission” was made clearer to her.

Having reached this conclusion, she sat up in bed and said out loud, “All right, I’ll stay put. But I don’t have to pretend I like it.” She suddenly felt ashamed at her own display of petulance. But what could she do? Let’s face it, it’s boring and lonely here. She missed her adoptive family and friends, the games and storytelling, attending classes, even helping with the crops. She’d been feeling more and more at home in Freethorn, and now…

A thought occurred to her, one that made her heart leap: what if they forgot about her, left her here? No, she admonished herself, that’s silly. You’re letting your imagination run away with you. Johnathan can still use the Stone to check on you anytime, and you’ll be able to take care of yourself till then. They won’t forget you; how could they? Silly and irrational, that’s what Mother Pat would say.

She reached into her small store of dried berries, and picked one. As she chewed it, she decided that more time spent exploring the surrounding area would do her good. She picked up her mirror and brought it out to the courtyard with her, where the light was better. She looked at herself, smoothing the fur on the sides of her face. She smiled to herself, knowing it wasn’t really necessary here, but Patricia and others had impressed upon her the importance of personal appearance and good grooming. She set down the mirror and picked up her food-gathering bag.

As she headed for the door, she froze instinctively. She was about to receive a visitor, another mouse from the sound of it. Once certain of it, she called out: “Hello! Who’s there?”

In reply, a voice said, more to itself, “So somebody is here,” sounding more pleased than surprised. He emerged into the courtyard.

Lula approached him. “Hello. Have we met?”

“No, we haven’t. But I’m pleased to meet you all the same. My name is Eric.”

“I’m Lula. I’m pleased to meet you too.” Momentarily, she thought: Where have I heard the name before? Someone back in Freethorn? Yes, someone there knows an Eric. The thought fell by the wayside as he stepped directly into the shaft of daylight in the middle of the courtyard. She felt oddly drawn to him, and instantly at ease, in a way she couldn’t articulate, apparently just from his genial and disarming manner. “So…are you…uhm…d-do you…live here? I mean, in the area?”

“I used to. Right here, in fact.” He gazed all around the chamber, smiling, looking nostalgic.

“You actually lived right here?”

“Uh-huh. My mate and I. I sure do look forward to seeing her again. She’d have had her babies by now. Sure can’t wait to meet them.”

Instantly something clicked in Lula’s mind. “Wait a minute! Eric! I knew I’d heard the name! Your—your mate’s Teresa, isn’t she?”

Eric’s surprise equaled hers. “You know Teresa?” He clasped her shoulders, rattling off the names of Teresa’s siblings and parents, and some of the Rats’ names as well. Lula confirmed that she knew all of them. Eric was curious about why he didn’t remember her, and Lula answered that she, and many other mice, arrived after his time there.

“Yes, we’re all in this whole other world now. No matter how many times they explain it to me, I don’t think I’ll ever understand it totally. But it’s so great there, the weather and everything, and no predators—” She stopped abruptly. “But wait—I thought—oh, I can’t believe I forgot. They all said you were…well, dead.” But then again, she realized, they said the same about Nicodemus.

Eric just nodded, expression unchanging. “I’m not surprised. But every day I thank whatever it was that intervened that I am still alive. Now…there are some others I want you to meet, others like you. Will you come with me?”

Others like her? Whatever did that mean? But instead of asking it out loud, she answered, “All right. But I have to pack a few things first.” She picked up her mirror and carry-bag and went into the den, Eric following behind. “Oh, I have so many questions I feel like I’ll burst!” she said as she packed. “When I had Johnathan bring me here, I had no idea why, not really. But I’ll just bet that this here, wherever you’re taking me…this is where I’ll find out, I-I’ll know what this—this ‘mission’ is! It’s been kind of boring here, but, oh, I’m so excited now, I can’t wait!”

She came across one item and looked at it for a moment. It was a square of white cardboard with “I’M READY” written on it. “This was for Johnathan to see, when he checks on me with that red magic stone of his. When I’d be ready to return, I’d set it out, he’d see it and then come to get me.”

“Sounds like a good idea. But somehow, I don’t think you’ll need it where we’re going. I’ll be able to explain it better when we get there.”

As Lula finished packing, she wondered why she was so willing to place her complete trust in this one who was, after all, a complete stranger. Yet, he must be who he says he is; how could he not? Just looking at his face seemed to be enough to convince her that she could trust him. And that odd feeling she got when he first made his entrance: she still couldn’t describe it exactly, but at this moment she was willing to follow him anywhere. Even given all that, should she be on her guard? As the two made their way outside, Lula decided that as right as all this felt to her, she would be careful, and run away if something didn’t seem right, a situation she hoped wouldn’t materialize.

“So…where are these ‘others’?” she asked after they’d ventured all the way outside.

“Just take my hand, and I’ll show you.” Again there was that tone of absolute sincerity, with a friendly smile and twinkle in his eye to match.

Lula’s heart leaped as she took his hand. No wonder Teresa was so attracted to him! It was like a dream just being with him, almost like…like with Desmond? Was this love she was feeling? No, it couldn’t be. He’s Teresa’s mate, they have two children, and the way he talked, he had every intention of returning to her. But there was some kind of attraction. What was it that made her so willing to follow him?

Before she could muse further, she was aware of a peculiar, though not unpleasant sensation—a curious easing of pressure beneath the soles of her feet. She looked down and gave a yelp of surprise. Of all the situations she’d expected to encounter while at Eric’s side, this was the last one: her feet, and Eric’s, were no longer touching the ground, but already an inch above it and rising! She threw her arms around his waist, holding on for dear life. “Wh-wh-what’s going on? Why are we floating?”

“It’s all right,” said Eric, his demeanor as calm as ever. “Just keep holding my hand, and we’ll both be fine.”

Lula loosened her death-grip and took Eric’s hand again. “You—you’re doing this. You’re making us float. How could…how did you…”

“Oh, it’s just a little something I picked up.” He chuckled. “Guess that was kind of a pun.” They were rising faster and faster, soon clearing the treetops. Lula looked around at the cliffs surrounding the valley, the forest starting to resemble a bed of moss, the enormous pit where Freethorn used to be with humans moving in and around it like ants. By the time they’d reached an altitude higher than the cliff tops, they began moving in a northerly direction, directly over the pit and further on, soon passing out of Thorn Valley completely. Lula’s initial shock and disbelief were quickly being replaced by wonder and exhilaration, her head turning constantly, unable to take in enough of the sight of the world passing beneath them as the wind coursed through their fur and flattened their ears back. It was still cold enough, but she barely noticed it now.

“So this…so this is what it’s like…to fly…”

“When I first found out I could do this,” said Eric, “I finally knew what Teresa was so thrilled about, when she flew with those crows.”

Lula fought to catch her breath. “She—she told me about that. It sounded so thrilling, but I bet it was nothing like this.”

“That was my impression.”

She continued surveying their surroundings, below and above, marveling at how much bigger the sky seemed from up here, even more than from Freethorn’s Rooftop. They passed a group of blackbirds, and Lula thought she saw some of them do an open-beaked double-take upon seeing these two flying mice. Below, she spied a natural rocky pit, and was reminded of the place where Louann and Teelo were said to have made their home. I’ll bet that’s it right there, she thought, remembering it was supposed to be north of Thorn Valley.

They traveled some five miles out of Thorn Valley before Lula asked how much further they had to go. “Not that I want this to end anytime soon,” she added.

“Not far. We’ll be there in a minute or two.”

“I wish you could tell me what this is all about; these other mice you speak of, how you’re still alive, and this…this flying, my goodness!” She sighed. “Oh, I’m sorry, I shouldn’t be bugging you so much.”

“Don’t worry about it. But it will become clearer once we get to the Safe House.”

Safe House, eh? thought Lula. I guess that’s a good thing to call it. Suddenly she recalled her earlier sense of caution. Could Eric be bringing her to some kind of trap? No, that’s silly. Why would he purposely seek her out, and bring her miles away just to do her harm? Why go to such trouble for one mouse? And yet, he did seek her out and speak as if there were something special about her, so he was going to a lot of trouble for her. She closed her eyes and concentrated hard. This had to be a part of her mission, it just had to be. Just thinking about it now brought her reassurance.

So caught up in these thoughts was she that she barely noticed when they started slowing down and losing altitude. “There it is, straight ahead,” Eric announced. Lula opened her eyes to see them coming upon a high bank overlooking a wide creek. When they’d descended to some 15 feet above the water, she could see the entrance to a small cave at the same level along the bank.

“Is that it? The Safe House?”

“That’s it. Everyone’s dying to meet you, and I think you’ll like meeting them too.”

“Yeah, I…sure hope so.” They came to rest on the lip of the cave, their remarkable trip ending as it began, as soft as a feather. Lula sighed, still excited and energized, but now a bit apprehensive as she remembered her earlier sense of caution, noting how there was no place for her to run if she needed to.

“Here we are.” Eric waved a hand toward the entrance. Recognizing Lula’s reluctance, he said, “I’ll go in first, and bring some of them out to you.” He disappeared inside, and quickly reemerged with two other mice. “They knew we were just about to arrive,” Eric announced.

One of the strangers, a female, greeted Lula effusively. “Welcome to the Safe House! My name is Sibelle, and this is my brother Dupree.”

“They’re sort of our official greeters,” explained Eric. “They’ll show you around and get you oriented.”

All four went inside, any apprehension Lula felt melting away after such a friendly greeting. They went a short ways through the narrow tunnel before it opened out into a much higher and broader cavern space. In the dim light Lula could tell that they stood on a ledge from which she could make out a scene which, to human eyes, would look much like a refugee camp. There were many other mice here, some resting on makeshift beds, others conversing or eating or supervising children. Some already noticed the new arrival and were calling out greetings. Eric indicated he was ready to speak. Everyone quieted.

“Friends…we have a new arrival. Her name is Lula, and she’s the one we’ve all been waiting for. Her arrival and her help mean our final destination is close at hand.”

Lula looked toward him, wide-eyed. My help? What could he mean? Why am I so important? But before she could give voice to her curiosity, Sibelle and Dupree began steering her down into the welcoming throng.

Chapter 32 - An anomaly challenged

“…And when I spoke to her, she looked up at me, said ‘Hello’ and then turned tail and ran. I thought she was snubbing me, but then I found out she was just going to get the others, and that she was my aunt Lucy. I thought she was just a cute girl. Well, she still is, but, you know.”

“She’d be flattered, Stuart,” said Nicodemus with a laugh. “So then Johnathan and the others made the offer to all of you?”

“Yup, and long story short, boom, we’re all here.” They both looked ahead to the trail they walked upon, and discussed further the early days of Stuart’s family’s time here. The sun had just set, and as the two wandered further toward the less-developed areas north of Oak Park, Stuart observed how preoccupied Nicodemus seemed, and ventured that he was thinking about the strange illusions. Nicodemus confirmed it, and described how he hoped to encounter one of them tonight and determine their true nature. He saw no need, however, to disclose that there was another matter on his mind, one that he’d largely managed to push aside, but that concerned one who was close to both of them, though Stuart was—presumably—unaware of this fact.

“I hope so, too,” said Stuart. “And I hope it’s a really scary one. Maybe even a real green-eyed monster.”

“Really? They’ve been so frightening to others. You wish to be frightened?”

“Well, yeah, kind’a. I mean…they’re supposed to be just illusions, not real, right? So they can’t hurt you, right? So it should be scary in a good way, like riding on a rollercoaster or something.”

“So it may be. But they’ve been getting more elaborate since they began, and progressively more frightening…to those who don’t wish to be frightened. Until we know for certain their true nature, we have no way of knowing whether or not they may become more than illusions.”

“Wow…yeah, I guess that could happen. You know, my cousins Tony and Kimmy were with the group that saw the one with the huge mouth, that—”

Nicodemus urged Stuart to silence as they heard a commotion up ahead. Someone was rushing toward them—two Guard rats, Devon and Alicia—and further on, strange sounds could be heard. Stuart would describe them later as a combination of a low-pitched howl and someone being sick to his stomach.

The pair paused in their flight. “Nicodemus, thank goodness!” said Devon breathlessly. “It’s right up that way. We didn’t like being driven away, but that thing was putting out actual heat!”

“We didn’t want to take chances,” added Alicia, “so we’ll spread the word for everyone to get below.”

“You’ve done well, my friends,” said Nicodemus quickly. “Stuart, you’d best go along with them while I investigate.”

“You’re taking that thing on yourself? Nicodemus—”

“I’ll be all right, Devon. Right now, time is of the essence for both yourselves and me. Please, go now. You have your duty.”

They dashed off in opposite directions. Nicodemus plunged forward toward the unearthly din. Was such a sound ever heard on Earth or Lahaikshe? he wondered. Soon he could see something moving about through the tall grass, silhouetted against the twilight but with a glowing pattern visible as well. He felt no apprehension, only a stronger resolve to solve this ongoing mystery.

Soon he stood before it, only two feet away. It appeared to be of the earth itself, a creature of mud and gravel, with patches of greenery on its upper parts, but with a reticulated pattern across its body, glowing deep red as if molten iron flowed through its veins—that is, Nicodemus noted, if it had veins, or a real, tangible existence, something he now hoped to disprove. So far it appeared not to notice him.

“Creature! Turn and face me!” Nicodemus shouted. It responded instantly—unsurprising to him, though he was still certain the thing was an elaborate illusion—showing a face much like a demon of some mythic underworld: eyes that glowed as red as its “veins,” horns and facial spikes that looked like blackened, rotted wood; and a mouth that opened to reveal no teeth or tongue, only more of the red glow which then turned paler, almost white. Already Nicodemus could feel the emanated heat Devon spoke of, and knew that, real or simulated, there’d be more where that came from. The creature’s body appeared to tense, and then it opened its maw wide and unleashed a shaft of what seemed not so much fire, but more like pure heat that could have come from the core of the planet itself.

But Nicodemus had been prepared to take action, and so he’d willed his body to phase into the ground below. In this state, sensations of heat or cold were all but negated, but he was close enough to the surface that he could see a red glow pass above him. This ability was still new to him, but he felt this to be an adequate test of it, emboldening him enough to bring himself back to the surface. The creature had turned to one side, seemingly unaware of him, and Nicodemus momentarily willed his body back to normal, instantly feeling the lingering sensation of heat. In spite of this, he was still unconvinced of the creature’s reality. From the descriptions of others of its ilk, he suspected even such tactile sensations to be as illusory as what had been seen, heard and smelled of those others. He noted the blackened and scorched state of the vegetation between him and it, and vowed not to let it faze him.

He strode confidently toward the creature, and it turned towards him. It shook its head and seemed to back off slightly, as if genuinely cautious or wary. “Now, my handsome friend, may the truth or falsehood of your existence be now laid bare.” So saying, Nicodemus fixed the creature with a determined stare, and more. It seemed to react to the challenge, again releasing a blinding shaft of light straight toward its tiny, frail-seeming opponent.

But Nicodemus was neither blinded nor consumed by any great heat; and in a matter of seconds the creature lowered its head as if conceding defeat, its image twisting and shimmering before revealing once and for all that it was indeed only an image, becoming a blur of light and shadow before vanishing completely.

As confident as he was of this very outcome, Nicodemus nevertheless breathed a sigh of relief as he viewed the area all around, nodding in satisfaction. The vegetation was perfectly normal—unburned, unscorched, showing no signs of being exposed to any great heat, or any at all except the normal heat of the day. “All part of the illusion,” he said aloud. He turned, ready to return to the colonies and give his report, looking forward to it but wishing it could be more informative.

“Wow! That was awesome!”

Nicodemus turned toward the youthful voice, not especially surprised at its owner’s presence. “Stuart…I distinctly told you to get to safety.”

A young mouse head emerged from the tall grass. “Well…yeah, but…I figured…y’know, since it was supposed t’be an illusion an’ all…” Stuart stood upright. “And you got rid of it, like it was never there! That was just amazing!”

“Thank you, Stuart, but there was still a danger to you and anyone else nearby. I was able to summon the will to resist believing the creature was real, but…you were able to feel some of the heat coming from it, weren’t you?”

“Well, yeah, but…”

“Anyone else present who did not wholly believe that the creature was unreal, despite how real it may have appeared, could have been seriously injured by it.”

“Wha…really?”

“This is my estimation. Before, these illusions were being seen, heard and smelled; but now, we have tactile sensations to consider as well.”

“But…they still aren’t really real, are they?”

“They have no real existence as we know it, but they are becoming more and more elaborate, more real-seeming; and if someone thinks it’s real, it could do real harm.”

“You mean…even though it’s not real, it could still hurt you…if you think it’s real?”

“Exactly. I still cannot discern their source, who or what is responsible for them. But for now, I must tell the elders, have them spread the word on how we should deal with the problem. And you are definitely coming with me.”

“Okay.” Stuart made no protest as they started off up the trail. “You won’t tell my mom, will you?”

Nicodemus pondered the question for a moment. “I see no reason to, as long as you heed the advice I’ve given you…and which I must now pass on to everyone.”

“You bet. Sounds like they’re getting too scary for me.” After a pause, he added, “You…like my mom, don’t you, Nicodemus?”

Nicodemus tried hard not to show surprise. “I…am quite fond of her, Stuart, as I am of you, and everyone here, as I was of everyone in my old life in the old colony.” The answer seemed to satisfy Stuart, but Nicodemus couldn’t help wondering how much he suspected. He’d certainly proven himself an observant lad, but Nicodemus hoped he hadn’t come too close to the truth. All the same, he found himself feeling a kinship with the boy, since both were experiencing the pangs of first love. But whereas Stuart would surely be reunited with Lula before long, how would he explore any future possibilities with…

“Nicodemus! Here he is, Devon, and Stuart’s with him.”

Nicodemus actually felt grateful for the interruption as he watched another Guard rat, Walter, approach, with Devon quickly catching up. As all four headed for home, Nicodemus apprised the group on the basics of what he’d encountered and what he believed needed to be done to deal with the problem, and assured them that he and Stuart were perfectly fine. After Devon mentioned that Jessica had been worried about Stuart’s whereabouts, Nicodemus said that he’d square things with them personally. He then turned to a worried-looking Stuart and gave him a reassuring wink. Walter told him that the council was already assembling to hear his report.

Before going on to the meeting, Nicodemus met Patricia and discreetly asked her to take Stuart to his mother, telling her that he’d been helping in making sure some of the other children got home safely, describing him as being brave and helpful. It was enough for Stuart to want to protest out loud, not sure that he was worthy of such praise. He genuinely hoped that he would be in the future, and felt grateful and slightly confused that Nicodemus regarded him so highly as to cover for him like this.

“…and so, my friends, to sum up: while these anomalies are illusions, they could still do harm to those who believe they can; I cannot as yet give a definitive yes or no until their true nature can be determined.”

Nicodemus paused to look around at the small assemblage of Rats and Mice, seated around the lower rows of the meeting hall, many reacting quietly over the report.

“But you do believe,” offered Tallus, “that it is something in Lahaikshe’s nature—or perhaps ‘super nature’ would be more accurate—that is responsible?”

“Of that I am positive. From some readings I’d done in Gwinthrayle’s library, combined with your own recent reports of the creature’s predecessors, I’d concluded that there was no intelligence or sentience of any kind there; at least, not in the creature itself, but there is definitely a sentience behind them all. I hadn’t read of any direct reference to such a creature, but of course I had only scratched the surface in the time I’d had.

“Now…from the past experience of some of you on this world, I believe there are locations where I may be better able to apply my abilities to determine the source. Therefore, I must leave you for a time; I cannot say how long I will be gone, but I hope it will be for no more than a day, two at the most.”

“So,” brought up Velma, “what are we to do until you return? Hide below after sunset, with no one showing faces aboveground until morning?”

“Depending on when I return and what information I have, such a drastic step may not be necessary. But just in case, perhaps some kind of curfew may be in order.” After further discussion, it was decided that effective immediately, all children would be kept inside after sunset, and all adults would avoid any unnecessary aboveground activity. Those on guard duty were already being instructed on what to do if they encountered one of the anomalies: summon up every iota of will power to resist believing the things are real, and calmly leave the area. Some questioned whether such a strict curfew would be necessary; but Nicodemus reminded them that it would only be in effect for as long as the anomalies still occurred, and he fully expected to be able to track down their origins, hopefully toward eliminating them.

Other matters were discussed before adjourning: the ongoing progress in cataloguing Vincent’s writings, which had continued apace since Nicodemus’s arrival, and which was nearing completion; and a reminder that their exchange party would be recalled to Freethorn in four days so they can meet Nicodemus before his departure.

As evening gave way to night, life in Freethorn wound down much as it usually did, with friends and families gathering to talk, play games, tell stories; but there was an undercurrent of uneasiness and uncertainty. Though none were trying outright to avoid discussing the bizarre illusions, none could deny feeling some anxiety over their continued presence. Where the subject was being discussed openly, questions were raised: What if Nicodemus couldn’t find their source? Or even Gwinthrayle, if he’s brought in on this? Would they continue to grow more elaborate, until even all the mental discipline in the world wouldn’t be enough to will them away? What if these things actually succeeded in driving them away from Freethorn? Worse yet, what if they followed them indoors, and began menacing them inside the colonies? Where would they go? Elsewhere on Lahaikshe, or even back to Earth? And, too, there were the calls for calm, and for avoiding worst-case scenarios. Most were confident that Nicodemus would be able to find answers.

There were many, too, who were rankled at being cooped up and not being allowed to confront any further anomalies head-on. In Brutus’s household, he and Deena discussed the matter at length after putting the children to bed. He admitted feeling that way himself but was satisfied that some of the Guard were on regular patrol and was confident that they were well prepared to deal with whatever they’d encounter.

As planned, Nicodemus left quietly with only a small party to see him off at the Rooftop, and a brief reiteration of what he hoped to accomplish. He regretted leaving Freethorn again—for the third time in five days—and spending so much more time away from those he loved. He told them this, but all knew this was for the good of the colony and understood the sacrifice he was making.

Again declaring that he hoped to return in no more than two days’ time, Nicodemus willed himself to float upward and away. Waving goodbye, he sailed off over the surrounding plain, immediately surrounded by inky blackness. Though the only sources of light were the moon and stars above, his sense of direction was unimpaired by the near-lack of visual cues. He was confident he could home in on the mystical “hot spots” Johnathan and Gwinthrayle told him of and hoped that through meditation, he’d meet with greater success in finding answers there than he had thus far. Since his arrival on Lahaikshe and subsequent discoveries of the powers and abilities that had apparently lain dormant within him for years and had “followed” him to this new body, he’d had several meditative sessions; and each time he felt as if he were just a bit closer to uncovering…something that, as Johnathan might put it, would really blow the lid off things, make everything that had been so mysterious less so, the least of which would be the whys and wherefores of his very own new lease on life. Yet, each time there was the sense that his efforts were meeting with what could be termed roadblocks, as if there was something or someone actively keeping him from something. It was nothing he could yet prove, and largely because of this he hadn’t discussed the matter at all with anyone, including his closest friends, because he felt the need to be able to report something more concrete, not the abstract impressions these sessions of meditation were leaving him with.

Now, with this new “anomaly crisis,” he felt an even greater need to make that his primary focus. Accordingly, he’d probably drop in on Gwinthrayle again. As noted, he hadn’t come across any direct reference to any such anomalies manifesting anywhere, but of course he hadn’t expected such a subject to come up. If Gwinthrayle had encountered such anomalies himself or could at least provide some insight, it would make a return visit worthwhile. An entirely different kind of anomaly, though, also called for his attention: another he’d need to consult upon with Gwinthrayle, one with more serious implications. He’d hardly thought about the matter in the eight hours since he and Johnathan returned, but if more of those sudden climatic changes occur, especially closer to home…

He paused in his flight, settling down upon the rust-colored plain, suddenly needing to feel solid ground beneath his feet again. Here was a possible new dilemma, one which could prevent him from keeping his promise to Rollo, or at least alter it drastically. He immediately sat down, deciding it best to not delay this meeting any longer.

He concentrated on drawing his consciousness within Rollo’s brain, further and further until he reached the grey, mist-shrouded plain that was Rollo’s subconscious; or more accurately, how it was seen by Rollo’s own consciousness, which regarded it more as home than the real, material world “outside.”

In short order, he and Rollo found each other. “Teacher! I knew you had to be here, I could feel you ‘coming in,’ like last time.”

As the two embraced, Nicodemus realized Rollo again saw him in the form of his old rat body. “Really? Obviously a change brought on by my being in charge of your body.”

“Has it been two weeks yet?” The two sat side by side.

“No, not yet. Only about half the time has passed so far.”

“It’s not…something bad, is it? Something that could keep you from…”

“No, no, my friend. The reason I’m here has more to do with the ones I’ve rejoined, and their new home.” He explained without going into more than necessary detail how Freethorn’s residents were in potentially serious trouble from two different fronts, one of which only he was presently aware of. “At present I cannot tell precisely how to deal with these matters, and so I cannot say how long it will take to resolve them.”

“So…it could be longer than another week before you can heal my brain?”

“And put you in charge of your own body, as should rightfully be done. I will do everything in my power to meet our original deadline; but if not, it will be because—and only because—I’ll still be fighting for my loved ones and their home. You do understand, don’t you, Rollo?”

Rollo looked disappointed, but also thoughtful. “Yes. It makes sense that you’d need to stay longer if you really had to. This place, their home…it’ll be my home too, won’t it? So, yes, do what you need to, Teacher, and take as long as you have to.”

“Rollo, I’m so proud of how patient you’ve learned to be. I felt it best to level with you immediately about this, and I’m very happy you understand.” Nicodemus reminded him that any delay was conditional only if recent crises weren’t resolved by the coming week’s end.

He took a few more minutes to tell Rollo some more of what he’d done and seen; then he got to his feet and said, “Well, much as I’d like to tell more, I really must return ‘outside.’ I want to leave you some surprises, after all.”

He made to say goodbye, then stopped. Should that be a matter to level with him about now? In another second, he’d made his decision. “Rollo…there is…someone who I’ve…someone who’d become more than a friend to me. Her name is Jessica, and…we’ve come to mean a lot to each other. When I leave, and you take over this body, she may be quite sad about my departure. But you will remain, and when she sees you, she’ll almost certainly be reminded of me. I guess…I’m telling you this now in the hope that you’ll be understanding and gentle with her. Although I suppose this is unnecessary…I’m sure you would be anyway.” At this moment, Nicodemus decided that any thoughts of jealousy regarding Jessica’s possibly being in love with Rollo were petty and irrelevant, and he vowed to not consider them again.

Rollo again looked thoughtful. “Jessica…I remember your telling me of the kind of feelings where you want to…just be with someone all the time, and think about her when you’re not. And…you said you’d never really had those feelings. Is this how it is with you and her?”

Nicodemus was momentarily taken aback by Rollo’s directness. “I fear, Rollo, that you have much to learn about tactfulness. Sometimes it’s best not to speak precisely what’s on your mind.”

“Oh. I’m sorry, Teacher. I’ll try to remember that.”

“I know you will. However…since I brought up the subject to begin with…” Nicodemus sighed. “That is very much the way I feel about Jessica. But those other matters I spoke of are the ones which could…delay our agreement; the only ones.” He embraced Rollo. “Now…I want to say again how much I appreciate your understanding and patience. We will see each other again soon, I promise.”

“And…that will be the last time...won’t it?”

“Yes. It should be. Oh, I know it’s hardly an ideal solution, but it’s all we have, I’m afraid.” They both stood, said their goodbyes, and Nicodemus turned and strode off through the mist.

The small figure, seated in near-total darkness in the middle of this wide, flat emptiness, stirred and opened his eyes. He stood, regarding silently the forest’s edge still nearly a half-mile away. He took a moment to ponder the task ahead, again certain that, for all he was still unaware of the precise nature of his own powers or their source, this sabbatical may well provide answers to those very questions as well. He thought of Jessica, and how he was, in effect, avoiding dealing with her directly, for no less than the third time since they’d begun to realize their mutual feelings…and for all that she knew, as did everyone else, that this was for the good of all.

“Yes, Rollo,” he proclaimed out loud. “All we have.” Nicodemus concentrated, floated upward, and resumed his mission.

Chapter 33 - Timothy’s flintarak adventure

As with most everyone in Freethorn this night, there was an even greater sense of “strength in numbers” than usual; and in the Rusay guest quarters, the atmosphere was actually somewhat relaxed, even festive. For some, though, there was a certain amount of unease just below the surface, and perhaps none more so than the one who stood at the second-floor window, face pressed against the glass with eyes shaded against the interior reflection.

“See anything, Johnathan?”

He gave a small start, backing from the window. “No. Not really, Sithpha. I guess I wasn’t really expecting to see much from here.”

“That’s my Johnathan, the original worrywart,” said Madeline with a chuckle, coming up to him from behind, arms encircling his abdomen. “It’s really sweet, but unnecessary much of the time.” Quickly she added, “But, of course there’s good reason now.”

“Amen.” Johnathan took his wife’s arm as they turned away from the window. As he cast his gaze from one side of the room to the other, seeing the other mice and rats who were the Rusay visitors’ guests, he added, “I’ll try not to be too preoccupied with this illusion business, but…I can’t not think about it, not completely.” He looked down at the amulet against his chest, fingering it and turning it from side to side. “Just by virtue of my being able to command this, I feel I should be able to do something about it. It was my…our command of it that brought all of us, and this land, here, and shaped the very rock around it. And yet…I feel almost helpless.”

“Nicodemus will find out something, Johnathan,” said Madeline consolingly. “I know he will.”

“I’m sure he will, too. It’s just that, in an odd way, I feel responsible for this land and everyone in it, just because of my command of the Stone…almost like a champion or protector. It’s not a role I’d have chosen for myself, but it’s been thrust upon me; and I can’t help but feel that I should be doing more.” He breathed in deep. “But…” He smiled upon Madeline. “…I did promise not to think about it so much.”

“You’ll always be my champion and protector,” said Madeline, leaning over to kiss him.

“And you’re mine,” added Johnathan, rubbing noses with her.

Though hesitant to interrupt their spontaneous display of affection, Sithpha said, “You make it sound like you’re the only one who can command the Stone, Johnathan. I thought both of you could.”

“We can,” said Madeline. “But since we were reunited, I’ve…well, it’s nothing we made any formal agreement upon, but I’ve actually preferred to let Johnathan command it when it’s needed. I guess…using it hasn’t always felt quite right to me, somehow.”

Sithpha looked thoughtful. “Oh, yeah. I can definitely understand.”

“Even knowing that what Ghormfisk did was something he couldn’t help, I still…feel uneasy about using the Stone, even knowing all the good that it’s done us, and that when I do use it I’m protected from almost any kind of harm.”

“It’s been a long time now, but we were all traumatized, to one degree or another by what happened that day,” said Johnathan. “But these days it’s not so bad for her, like just the other day, when she went back to Earth with Lula and Patricia.”

“It was my idea,” said Madeline. “I wanted to use it by myself to prove that I still could, I guess. It was so sad to find out about Lula’s family, but I’m still glad I did it. It felt good to be able to help her like that, in spite of the results.”

The discussion continued quietly, mainly about Lula’s unexpected recovery from her own traumatic discovery and her “mission,” and how she might be faring in Thorn Valley now. They moved about the room as they did, over to where Sithpha’s two oldest children, Eephray and Tuintwom, were instructing some Mouse and Rat children on how to play gluph-ri-gluph, a board game popular throughout much of Lahaikshe; and whose loose translation, “ring-within-ring,” makes it sound simpler than it is.

Downstairs, where Morobphra and his family were staying, other discussions ensued in the spacious living area. The atmosphere was perhaps even more relaxed than upstairs, with everyone sitting around the table or on sofas or the floor, all enjoying good drink and conversation. As with the Freethorners, alcoholic beverages, while not outright frowned upon, were not greatly popular among the Rusay; and so, it was mainly non-alcoholic ones of Rusay origin that were being served tonight. The most popular were rivwil, a brewed tealike drink; girin, a blend of vegetable juices; and smilath, with a rich spiced-vanilla-like flavor, extracted from a bean like coffee or cocoa.

“So,” said Lucy after a sip of smilath, “most Rusay live around 55 to 60 years?”

“That’s right,” said Morobphra. “Though the oldest one I’ve ever heard about lived to be 84. That’s pretty rare, though. I had a grandfather who lived to be 68, though.” He finished off his rivwil-cup.

“And my father’s parents lived to be 70 and 72,” added his wife Miatati. “I guess that bodes well for both of us, and our kids too.” They smiled and squeezed each other’s hand.

“That’s not quite as long as humans back on Earth, though,” said Bertie.

“But remember, Bertie,” said Boris, “Lahaikshe years are longer than Earth years. So it probably works out about the same for both.”

“But you’re still not sure how long your people will live?” asked Morobphra.

“Well, some of the elders believe we’ll live as long as humans,” said Boris, “and the Rusay, for that matter. But it’s still pretty much an open question.” He took a swig of girin, swirling it around before swallowing it.

“At least it’ll be a longer lifespan than ordinary rats and mice,” said Barbara Anne. “They live so briefly, only about two to four years.”

“It still seems hard to believe,” said Miatati, “that all of you can actually be considered…new people, an entirely new race of people.”

“New and improved, that’s us,” said Lucy with a laugh.

“Seriously, though,” said Timothy, “we’ve all got a big future ahead of us here on Lahaikshe, and it’s going to be a great one, too, I think.” Timothy had already made it clear to most that he felt no real sense of menace in connection with the recent illusions, and so he was confident that they would not signal an end to their new life here and that they would not be driven away, either to a new location on Lahaikshe or back to Earth. His confidence had already proven to be infectious, and was continuing to be, though the overall sense of unease and caution wouldn’t be completely banished.

Another young rat, Garrick, agreed. “There was a group of us, before we moved here, who’d been talking about leaving the colony in Thorn Valley and starting a new one elsewhere. Now none of us are talking that way, at least not as loudly as we used to. But some of us are homesick for Earth to be sure, to one degree or another.”

They discussed further how they believed they could develop as a culture in years to come. Whenever the subject had been discussed already, it had generally been agreed that there would be no set plan; rather, they would simply continue much as they had already, with the old “free choice” rule continuing to be their foremost edict. While everyone did his or her part in helping to keep the colony going, some were developing a near-hedonistic attitude, living mainly for experiencing life’s pleasures to the fullest—not unlike Lilia’s recent “other” personality, though none mentioned it out loud now.

The conversation moved toward native creatures, including ones that Bertie, Lucy and Timothy had encountered on the trip to Gwinthrayle’s.

“Say, that reminds me,” said Bertie at one point. “Remember when Gwinthrayle was telling us the story of Turlokeen, and in the beginning he said something about dangerous creatures that are supposed to look like us, like big rodents?”

“Oh, yeah,” said Lucy, snapping her fingers. “What were they called…flackyturds? Flittyturks?”

“Flintaraks, Lucy,” corrected Timothy, grinning.

“Yeah, that’s it. And didn’t Gwinthrayle say something about your knowing about them personally, like you’ve had run-ins with them before?”

“He did, Bertie; and I have, and so have my parents.”

“We haven’t heard that story yet, have we?” Bertie asked rhetorically.

“Oh, c’mon, Tim, tell it!” enthused Lucy, grabbing his arm with both hands.

“Some of us have heard this already,” said Hannah, another rat friend, “but it’s worth hearing again.”

“Ellis should be here, though,” said Lucy.

“Seelah and Lilia, too,” said Boris. “I know they haven’t heard it either.”

Lucy, knowing just where to find them, immediately volunteered to go fetch them, and Garrick and Hannah were ready to accompany her—“go nowhere alone” being one of the foremost rules of the current curfew—when Ellis just walked in the front door, accompanied by Reuben and, more surprisingly, Martin and Karen and their new babies. After greetings, Lucy asked Ellis about those others they’d been expecting.

“Lilia wasn’t feeling well, or at least…said she wasn’t. Seelah’s still looking after her.” Ellis couldn’t quite conceal the mild confusion, perhaps with some small skepticism, as he and the others all joined the circle of those on the floor.

As Miatati went to the kitchenette to pour drinks for the new arrivals, Lucy said to Ellis, “So you think Lilia might have been…making some kind of excuse?”

“Oh, I don’t know. But she’s been, well…I guess I still can’t really say yet what’s unusual for her, but…” In spite of the fact that Reuben had wholly accepted him as a friend and the object of Lilia’s affection, Ellis was still a bit cautious about speaking out of turn about her.

“It’s all right, Ellis,” said Reuben. “I agree that she’s been acting oddly the last two days.”

“There’ll be times when we’d be talking, and she’ll suddenly seem distracted,” said Ellis.

“She’s seemed really preoccupied every time I’ve talked to her,” agreed Lucy.

“She’s usually so much…in the here and now,” added Reuben, “always paying attention to what’s going on around her. I’ve never known her to be like…her head’s in the clouds.”

Lucy nodded. “Yeah, when Tim’s like that, we know it’s not an act. We expect him to have a lot on his mind.”

“Hey, don’t be talking about my brother that way,” said Martin in mock annoyance as he and Karen each sat with a sleeping infant on their laps. “Even if it is true.”

But Timothy just smiled and nodded, showing no inclination to disagree. “I don’t think we need to worry about Lilia. Considering all she’s been through lately, she’s entitled to a little soul-searching and reflection.”

“It kind of began when we were at Gwinthrayle’s, though, didn’t it?” offered Barbara Anne. “When she was real interested in that grove down in the gulley, and later went off by herself to see it…”

“And then the min’hathio came to her,” added Bertie, “and we still don’t quite know what that was all abo—”

“Hey, c’mon,” interrupted Ellis. “We shouldn’t be talking about her like that.”

“Whoa, take it easy,” said Bertie, taken aback. “No one’s trying to imply anything.”

“He’s right, Ellis,” added Karen as Elizabeth dozed on her lap. “We’re all just concerned for her.”

“That’s right,” added Boris, “and I think Tim’s right about her just needing time to herself, to reflect.”

Ellis sighed. “You’re probably right. It just doesn’t feel right, talking about her like this when she’s not around.”

“Then let’s talk about something else,” chimed in Bertie. “Tim, I think you’ve got the floor.”

Timothy explained how he was gearing up to tell a story, and Lucy was about to fetch some more audience members when they arrived on their own from upstairs, having gotten the word already. Among them were not only his parents, but the rest of his siblings as well. Martin and Karen invited Teresa, her sons, and Sarah to sit with them.

“So,” he began, “it started the first winter after our family had joined the Rats in Thorn Valley. It had been about five months since Dad returned, and we’d all been curious, just chomping at the bit to see Lahaikshe for ourselves. Part of the reason we hadn’t come earlier was because Mom was having babies again, and she and Dad agreed to put off any trips away from home until after they were weaned. So it was in the following January that, after leaving Lyndon and Shawna with a babysitter—something they were less than thrilled with—we finally made that long-promised holiday to Gwinthrayle’s home.

“When we got there, and we kids got to meet him for the first time, it was quite an experience, meeting someone who looked so humanlike but was our size. But we got an even bigger jolt, all of us, when we met his other guests, who, we were told, had arrived just before us and were also visiting from another dimension. Gwinthrayle introduced us to them: a married pair named Tugrelho and Kalfomenda. When we first laid eyes on them, we all jumped back a bit; none of us could completely avoid reacting on sheer instinct, because, as most of you already know, their people, the Kantiri, look just like foxes or coyotes that walk upright, but are only the size of rats. It took a while before we realized that the surprise was mutual! When we had time to get better acquainted, we told them the reasons for our initial apprehension, and they told us how there are larger creatures on their world, Tikinda, that look much like rats or mice, called flintaraks. A full-grown adult, they told us, was around forty to fifty times the size and weight of a Kantiri. With us, imagine a good-sized dog, and you’d have a good idea of the size comparison. The Kantiri’s relationship with them, basically, is to avoid their territory as much as possible: leave them alone, and they’ll leave you alone. But there’d been many documented attacks, in most cases when someone unwittingly wandered too close to one of their dens, and some of them did result in death.

“This was only their second visit to Lahaikshe as a couple, since they were married shortly after Kalfomenda’s first visit to find her brother. It wasn’t long before we all became the best of friends, telling each other stories of our families, our peoples and worlds. Now, many of us, including those of us who just visited Gwinthrayle, have heard the story of Kalfomenda’s brother Turlokeen, who had met an accidental death on Lahaikshe years earlier. They showed us his gravesite and related to us his story. It was sad to hear, of course, but all their stories had really fired our imaginations. We wanted to see their world for ourselves, of course; and with the Stone in our hands, it would be an easy matter to do so. Dad had considered the possibility of using it to visit other worlds besides Lahaikshe, but he’d been reluctant to make any really solid plans to do so, mainly because he’d been away from us for so long. But Kalfomenda and Tugrelho loved the idea and gave us a standing invitation to use the amulet to come to their home on Tikinda anytime, and of course we accepted.

“It would be a few more months before we had the chance to take them up on the offer, and when we did we brought Lyndon and Shawna with us.” Timothy paused to look at his next-to-youngest siblings, who gave a triumphant arm-raising in response. “One thing I noticed was how quick we had become acclimated to the idea of using the amulet in that way. It was pretty amazing, like we were just popping in to see friends a couple of doors down, when actually we’re entering an entirely different world that occupies the same space as ours but in an entirely different universe; at least that’s how Gwinthrayle, among others, puts it.

“So, when we arrived on Tikinda, the first thing we noticed was the similarity with Earth, in the vegetation and landforms overall. After our hosts received us, they told us how most Kantiri lived in small, close-knit communities like their own, Lofinak; and in spite of their not being a very technical or industrialized society, like that of humans, they’re reasonably technologically advanced, and live very much in harmony with their environment as well, much as the Rusay do here. Unfortunately, we couldn’t see very much of this for ourselves; they thought it wasn’t a good idea for us to show ourselves in public. The other townspeople, while not overly suspicious or given to panic or hysteria, might not take well to creatures that look like flintaraks.”

“Speaking of which…” said Bertie impatiently.

“He’ll get to them,” said Lucy. “Keep your pants on.”

Timothy just nodded and continued, undaunted. “They also told us that Lofinak isn’t far from a good-sized concentration of flintaraks. Their territory lay just beyond a low ridge on the outskirts of town, which they rarely crossed. In the past several decades, there had been no actual attacks by this local population; everyone in Lofinak knew where not to go, and the flintaraks actually seemed willing to stay where they belonged. This state of coexistence was actually, in part, the doing of Tugrelho’s mentor Gondlonico: he’d once worked with a local herbalist to develop a natural repellent to keep the flintaraks at bay. More recently, though, it hasn’t been necessary, because they seem more inclined to stay put and mind their own business. They are quite intelligent creatures, and it’s generally believed that they don’t want trouble with the Kantiri any more than vice versa.”

As Timothy paused for a drink, Martin said privately to Karen, “I guess he’s going to tell…well, that story…”

“I guess so. Why not?”

“Well, it’s just… Oh, never mind. Let’s listen.” He sighed, looking down to Victoria on his lap.

“Marty, there’s nothing in that story you’re embarrassed about, is there?” inquired Karen. “I didn’t think so when you told it to me.”

“Don’t be silly, Karen, of course not,” he said more lightly.

Nearby, Teresa noticed their exchange and, though she wasn’t eavesdropping, was well aware of what would follow and could sympathize with any reluctance her brother may have to hearing the story retold.

Timothy had also noticed this as he cleared his throat, readying to resume his account. “Anyhow...we also met some of their children on this visit. The oldest two were living on their own by then, but their two youngest, Abiril and Lemanda, a boy and girl respectively, were still at home. They were thrilled to finally meet us, after having been left behind on their parents’ trips to Lahaikshe and hearing all their stories about us. And they weren’t at all apprehensive about seeing us for the first time; their parents had prepared them well on our physical differences. Before long, we were all having fun and playing games together, though we were largely confined to the inside of their home, at least at first.

“Before long they showed us around outside, but we had to be discreet and try to avoid being seen. At one point, we had to duck down low behind some bushes when someone passed by. They even took us out to where we could see the ridge beyond which the flintaraks lived, and it definitely piqued our curiosity, just knowing that this was where we could see those big creatures that looked like us. Not that we’d be allowed to, of course. But, in spite of the restrictions on where we could go and what we could do, we certainly had a great time there. Our hosts, especially Kalfomenda, doted on us and treated us like their own children, giving us little treats, spoiling us like there was no tomorrow. But even with all that, we still needed our sleep eventually.

“We were put up in the spare bedrooms: Mom, Dad, Lyndon and Shawna in one and the rest of us in the other. Martin and I were in one bed and the girls in the other, but we didn’t all get to sleep right away. I was just nodding off when I could feel Martin slipping out of bed, trying hard not to jog my side. I almost said something but I didn’t want to disturb the girls, and I was curious to see what he was up to. So I watched him tiptoeing for the door and leaving just as quietly. It was too much for me, so I got up and followed. I was just in time to see him slip out the back door into the night. I was torn for a while there between following him and getting Mom and Dad. I decided to follow, because I had an idea about what he was up to and I thought I might be able to talk him out of it.”

By now, many who listened were glancing over to Martin, who was starting to fidget, clearly not too comfortable with where the story was headed.

“I almost lost him after I was out the door, but then I caught sight of him heading for the trail just outside the back yard. I followed him as quietly as I could a while longer, until I had a better idea of where he was heading; it didn’t take a genius to figure it out. So after I caught up with him, I told him I knew and tried to get him to return. He admitted that he was headed for the ridge at the border of flintarak territory, but said he just wanted to see beyond it, possibly just see one from a distance, and then head straight back. I argued that even that might be too dangerous, but as usual there was no dissuading him. Again I had to decide between staying with him and returning and telling on him. But he could be really persuasive, and so he made me promise not to tell, but he gave me the choice of coming along if I wanted. ‘Besides,’ he argued, ‘you’d know if we were in any real danger.’ I couldn’t deny it, and I was at least as curious to see a flintarak for myself, so off we went together.

“The trail was full of twists and turns, with other branches coming off here and there; but Martin was always a much better tracker than I was, and he insisted he remembered the way. Tikinda has a moon much like Earth and Lahaikshe have; but even though it wasn’t in the sky, Martin was still confident he could lead us to the ridge and back. When we were younger, he’d brag about things like finding his way somewhere without a map, and it didn’t take long for us to realize that it wasn’t empty boasting.”

Karen smiled and leaned her head on Martin’s shoulder. Well she knew of this talent of his, from the time just after they’d met, when he’d led her and Patricia across miles of wild and unfamiliar territory to Thorn Valley. Though he’d been partially guided by the red amulet’s power, she had no doubt that he’d have been able to accomplish the task without it, if not as quickly.

Timothy continued: “So now we made our way along, in near-total darkness, across this unfamiliar landscape, to see if we could catch a glimpse of some creatures which may very well do us harm if we did meet. We sure knew how to spend a holiday away from home! But, as I’m sure you’ve all realized by now, it wasn’t going to be as simple as we’d thought.

“We got to a point where we passed through some thicker grasses and weeds, which made it more difficult to follow the trail. We saw a really remarkable display by a group of insects that glowed like fireflies, but differently. These don’t blink on and off, instead their bodies have a soft, silvery glow that fades in and out. It was a really beautiful aerial dance they performed, and I wanted to stay a bit longer, but Martin was impatient to get going and didn’t think we should get separated. I knew he was right, but I was confident that I could catch up with him. I could be just as persuasive as Martin sometimes, and this was one of those times. So he moved on, and I stayed watching the glowing bugs—which looked like dragonflies, but with thicker bodies; the way they glowed, you could see them clearly in the dark.

“I stuck around probably about three minutes more before I moved on. I called out Martin’s name, and I got a reply, so I kept going. But soon I took what I figured to be a wrong turn, so I doubled back and thought I was back on the original trail, but I soon realized that it not only wasn’t, but I’d lost all sense of direction as well. Martin and I continued to call to each other, but now it seemed like the more we tried to connect, the further away we got from each other. I was more frustrated than scared, because I’d been so confident, and look where it got me. But I had to do something to try to get my bearings, so I found a hanging vine and climbed it. I figured I could possibly see the glowing insects from up there, and use them to find my way back to the trail; but either I was too far away from them, or they’d moved on, or both. I called for Martin again, but I couldn’t hear any reply this time. I thought hard, trying to retrace my steps mentally, then physically. Throughout all this, I still wasn’t frightened, because our hosts had assured us that there were no other animals in this area that attack Kantiri—or presumably mice as well—and I’d convinced myself that the reason I got no reply from Martin was that he’d started heading back, and I knew he’d have no problem with that; and, once he’d told Mom and Dad, they could use the Stone to locate me. When I realized this, I considered staying put; but, honestly, I wanted to explore a bit more.

“So I continued trying to locate the trail, and soon, I found a trail. I figured it had to be the right one, so I picked a direction and moved on. Eventually, it sort of petered out, but it led me into a more open area. Again, I found a higher vantage point, and when I’d climbed high enough, I thought I could make out a ridge of land not far away. Was it that one, and had I already wandered into flintarak territory? Now I was starting to feel a little scared, having been told how they can be unpredictable when outsiders are on their turf. I climbed down from the leaning tree trunk I was on and resolved to find my way back to the trail I was just on. But, wouldn’t you know it, that wasn’t as easy as I thought either. Once again, I was having trouble not only in retracing my steps, but in maintaining my cool as well. I kept telling myself that Martin would find his way back and alert Mom and Dad, and that I was in no danger from any creatures except flintaraks, and that I might not even be in their territory. But just knowing that I was in completely alien territory, on a completely alien world yet, without knowing what-all was out there, was enough to put some amount of fear-of-the-unknown into me. But it wasn’t enough to make me freeze up completely.

“I was still determined to get back to that trail that brought me here, and soon I encountered a fallen log that I was sure I’d crossed before. I leaped over it…and not two feet away, there it was. There was just enough starlight to make it out—big, hulking, round-eared, broad-shouldered—and heading straight toward the log and me. I knew right then, as I felt my heart and most of my insides leap into my throat, that this had to be a flintarak, and I scrambled back down the opposite side of the log, praying that it hadn’t seen me. But in the next few seconds, I could hear it sniffing and pawing around the opposite side; and suddenly the only thing I could think of was how Dad had come so close to getting caught by Dragon—not once, but twice. Would I be able to escape as he had? The first time was mostly by luck, the second by some unexpected help from the Stone; but right then I was sure I wouldn’t have a similar outlet. In a couple more seconds, it had come around to my side, and I was sure this was it. We were face-to-face now, close enough for me to see its oversized incisors, whiskers and snout that were very much like those of mice and rats. As I felt its warm exhaled breath on me, I just lost it completely. ‘Mom! Dad! Martin! Somebody, help!’ I shouted.”

By now, everybody in the guest house, including Timothy’s parents, had gathered to hear the tale. Those hearing it for the first time were especially enthralled, and even those familiar with it gave it their full attention. Lucy, at his side, held his arm ever tighter as the story progressed.

“I closed my eyes, expecting to be crushed in its jaws any second, hoping it wouldn’t take too long. But instead…it just kept smelling me all over. I still felt weak, limbs like jelly, heart beating faster than I could ever remember…but I started to realize, if it meant any harm to me, wouldn’t it have done so by now? So far, at least, it seemed only curious; but would it just leave me alone after it lost interest in me? Either way, my fear began to subside. I again began reminding myself that someone would have to be on his way to help any time now.

“The flintarak backed away a bit, and I thought this was it; whatever action it would take, this was the pivotal moment. Of course I hoped it would leave, but without warning it reached out a paw—a lot like that of a dog or cat, but with longer toes, or I suppose you could call them fingers—and just scooped me up in it, not too tightly, but enough so that I couldn’t break free. It kept that paw, with me, against its chest and began moving off. Well, now what? I thought; and again, I felt strongly that I’d be all right. Wherever it was taking me, I was sure it meant me no harm.

“It carried me like this for about five, six minutes, I guess; and during the time I noticed how much its scent resembled ours, but with more presence, for want of a better term. It occurred to me that it may have taken me for one of its own kind; certainly it had to be taking me to its own home. Sure enough, it brought me to a large burrow, like that of a wolf or bear, where there were more of them just inside. It gave a low whistling sound, and they came out—one more adult, and two cubs. I still felt assured they didn’t intend me to be an appetizer, even as the first one, which I now knew to be the male, set me down. The female gave me the same once-over, sniffing me all over and occasionally giving me a lick, pausing a couple of times to look me over, making grunting sounds all the while. ‘Big Mama’ let the cubs take a turn, and they gave their inspection as well. She made sure they didn’t get too rough, though she gave one of them a little cuff when it pushed and prodded me a little too hard.

“I guess I must have looked hungry to her—which I was, a little—because she went inside and came back with a paw full of berry-like fruits, each as big as my head. I was sure they were ones our hosts had served and so weren’t poisonous, and I was right. As I ate my fill, I got a real sense of just how intelligent these creatures were. The adults seemed to have a rudimentary language, with a wide variety of vocalizations. They seemed to carry on a conversation for a while, after which the male left again, probably on a food-gathering trip. The female then tended to the youngsters, cradling and grooming one while nursing the other.

“I started thinking they’d have let me leave any time I wanted; but honestly, I was so fascinated that I actually wanted to stay, at least a bit longer. It was such a peaceful scene that I was almost disappointed when it was interrupted by the ones I was hoping would interrupt it. Mom and Dad had appeared nearby, via the Stone, and now approached cautiously. Of course I was happy to see them, but I wondered if my new friends would try to prevent their taking me away. I cautioned them on this, but they told me they’d already been observing the scene. Big Mama and her kids soon took notice of the new visitors and began examining them as they did me. I could tell Dad was ready to use the amulet to protect us, but it wasn’t necessary. They seemed to sense that I was theirs, and even when Big Daddy returned shortly, he seemed to size up the situation right away too. As for Mom and Dad, they were outwardly calm through all this, but I could tell they’d both been worried sick. Dad tried to convey as best he could to the flintaraks that we had to leave, and then the three of us simply walked away slowly. Would they follow us? One of the cubs started to, but Big Mama called to it and it hung back, as did the others. We waited until we were out of their sight completely before Dad used the amulet to take us back to our hosts’ home.

“Once there, we found everyone, including Tugrelho and Kalfomenda and their kids, waiting up for us. Cynthia almost attacked me, she was so worried: crying her eyes out, holding me in a death-grip. Teresa was more restrained, but she’d been concerned for my safety, too. Lyndon and Shawna had only just gotten up, having slept through most of the ‘crisis,’ and wondered what all the fuss was about. And Martin…well, he tended to be not very demonstrative about these kinds of matters back then, but I could tell he’d been worried, and pretty contrite.

“Mom and Dad then explained how Martin had awakened them, telling them that I was lost ‘out there’ and that it was ‘kind of’ his fault. Teresa and Cynthia were up by that time, and were made aware of the situation. Mom and Dad didn’t want to wake our hosts at first, but decided that the girls would need moral support while they were out looking for me. It wasn’t necessary, though, because they’d heard the commotion too. Dad quickly explained the situation to them before he and Mom used the Stone to find my location. And the first thing they saw on its face—boy, it got them in an instant lather, the worst situation they imagined I could be in right then. There I was, being carried by the male flintarak to who-knows-what kind of fate. Even then, Tugrelho believed I may be in little or no danger, but Mom and Dad insisted on rescuing me as soon as possible and so willed the Stone to take them close to where I was. Once there, they decided it would be best to take Tugrelho’s advice and wait and see what the flintarak would do before they intervened. They watched it all from a safe distance, and noticed how I’d seemed calm and unworried about my own safety, and were confident that my intuition was at work. They gave us a few more minutes together before presenting themselves.

“So now, here we were back ‘home,’ and since Mom and Dad hadn’t gotten Martin’s full story yet, all eyes now looked to him, the poor guy.”

By now, Martin looked not nearly as uncomfortable as before, to the surprise of many, but only sat quietly and as attentively as the others, as his baby daughter slept silently on his lap.

“So now Martin had to tell everyone how he’d gotten the idea to sneak out and see a flintarak for himself, and I’d tried to convince him not to until he persuaded me to come along. He just looked so pathetic and small that I felt I had to deflect some of the blame from him. So I spoke up, saying that the responsibility was his and mine, that we’d conspired together to make this little journey, and sneaked out together. Martin was able to hide his surprise, and we both described finding the glowing insects, and then getting separated. I did my best to make Martin look less bad in that part of the story, too. But we both knew how it looked: him leaving me alone and assuming I’d be able to catch up. I just told the truth, that it was my idea and that I was confident I could find him easily enough. When we couldn’t find each other, I said I’d hoped Martin would make his way back and tell them, and that’s exactly what he did. Martin said he’d realized that was the best thing to do at the time, though he knew the kind of hot water he’d likely be in.

“I went on to describe my encounter with the flintarak, how I’d been scared witless at first but soon realized I had nothing to fear. Tugrelho and Kalfomenda were just as fascinated at how gently I was treated by my new friends. It was generally known how kind and even altruistic flintaraks could be to their own kind, with documented cases of orphaned cubs being taken in by adults, sick or injured flintaraks being cared for by others. Apparently their acceptance of us, in contrast to their treatment of Kantiri, was due entirely to our similarity in appearance and scent, with no apparent regard to the great difference in size.

“We stayed on for most of the next day—without any further ‘incidents’—and then left for home late in the day, with the standing invitation still in effect. We’ve visited them twice since then, bringing other guests with us.

“After our return home this first time, we told the Rats about this escapade, and it provoked some speculation on how life had evolved on Tikinda as compared to Earth. Tallus suggested that this sounded like a case of parallel evolution, with variations in geography and climate giving rise to creatures in many ways similar to those of Earth, but with great variations in size and appetite. Ones which would be predators and prey on Earth have their roles reversed on Tikinda, or at least greatly altered. It was just one of many, almost infinite examples of how varied life could be on all these different worlds.

“Oh, and by the way…yes, Martin and I were grounded for a good two weeks after we got home. I guess we both learned some good lessons, didn’t we, Martin?”

Martin looked a bit surprised, then nodded. “Yeah, I guess we did, Tim.” He quickly added, “Some better than others. I know what some of you are thinking: that my taking off with Lambert and the Stone and setting off for NIMH last fall wasn’t much different. Believe me, that’s never been lost on me, not for a second. And that’s all I want to say on the subject.” Nobody in the crowd, including his parents, disputed Martin’s wish.

“That was so amazing, Tim,” said Lucy, breaking the momentary silence. “To think what could have happened to you…brrr!” She held Timothy closer, kissing his cheek.

Lyndon and Shawna came over to them, he settling between Timothy and Lucy, she on her big brother’s lap. As he gave Shawna a squeeze, Timothy noted how Lyndon didn’t at all mind Lucy stroking his head affectionately. He’s developing a crush on her, all right.

As many of those present fell into post-story discussion, Karen said quietly to Martin, “So…that’s what you were uncomfortable with earlier, wasn’t it? The similarity of that story with what came later?”

Martin nodded. “It wasn’t easy admitting it when I first told it to you. I guess I wasn’t sure about having so many more know it, even though a lot of them already figured it out for themselves. It wasn’t as bad as I thought, hearing it now; and I wasn’t about to begrudge Tim the right to tell the story, but…I don’t think he ever really knew just how much…it hurt me, knowing I’d done such a dumb thing like leaving him alone out there. And then, last fall, having to leave Lambert without even trying to rescue him from Boonger’s gang… You can see now why I got so defensive about that when you…suggested I was deserting him. I know, you told me long ago you regretted saying that. But I know it was true, in spite of knowing that everyone back home may have been in greater danger. There have been times when I’ve questioned my worthiness to be anyone’s best friend or brother, knowing I could make decisions that could threaten their very lives.”

“Do you ever feel that way about…being someone’s mate, lover, husband?”

They gazed silently, smiling, into each other’s eyes, then kissed lightly. “No,” Martin finally replied. “Not anymore. Or being a worthy parent.” He carefully gathered Victoria in his arms, gently nuzzling her. There was more each wanted to say, but felt it better saved for later, in private.

Nearby, Teresa and Sarah, having heard some of their exchange, both reached over to touch his arm approvingly.

Some of the others picked up the thread of an earlier discussion: the possibility of expanding Freethorn beyond its present confines. With an ever-expanding population, it would be inevitable that either Freethorn would have to be physically increased in size in some way, or a second colony would have to be established elsewhere. When such a step would be necessary was an open question, dependent not only on the birthrate but on how long its citizens would live as well—obviously not a pleasant matter to discuss, but unavoidable and inevitable, since the treatments at NIMH couldn’t possibly have halted the aging process altogether. At one point in the discussion, someone brought up the matter of if they’d be able to stay on Lahaikshe if still-mysterious forces forced them to flee.

Timothy was the first to take issue with this. “Let’s have none of that kind of talk,” he said with all the authority he could muster, “at least not until we know more of what’s behind these illusions and why they’re happening. And if they are here to scare us or to try to drive us away, I say we shouldn’t even let that sway us from continuing to make our lives here.”

“All right, Tim! You tell ’em!” shouted Stuart from the back of the crowd, he and Jessica having arrived in the middle of the flintarak story. Several others added their voices in favor of taking a stand over giving in to fear.

Madeline looked at Johnathan, both of them beaming. “I am so proud of that boy,” she said with a sigh.

Her husband nodded. “What he said, I couldn’t have put better myself.” Neither doubted that Timothy would grow to be one of the solid pillars of the community, an inspiration to many others, if he hadn’t already.

It wasn’t long before the Rusay hosts made it clear that they wished to get started on a good night’s sleep and their guests, mostly wishing the same, adjourned to their own quarters. The mood had changed considerably overall since this group had gathered a few hours before, due in no small part to Timothy’s words of encouragement. In regard to the strange anomalies, there was less of a sense of apprehension and even, among some, more one of curiosity. What next? many wondered; what forms would they take to try to frighten them? Some even wanted to go out and see one for themselves, but were reminded the curfew was still in effect. All felt more secure in their own quarters, but in some there were still the disturbing possibilities raised, of the anomalies beginning to occur in the daytime; or even indoors, inside the colonies. It was generally agreed that wherever they popped up and whatever form they took, everyone would remember the advice already given, and was more confident than ever that he or she would avoid giving in to believing any anomaly encountered to be genuinely harmful.

The night wore on peacefully, with only a little anxiety or sleeplessness within the colonies. Elsewhere in Freethorn, only one anomalous incident was reported by the Guard, this one taking the form of a bizarre plant—at least at first—that appeared to sprout out of the ground right in front of the two Guard Rats who reported it, growing to around three feet in height; sprouting wriggling tendrils, each of which formed a “mouth” at its end that lunged and snapped and spewed unearthly sounds and foul odors. The Guards’ training had served them well, and though the thing had been dispatched by their efforts to disbelieve in it, it was admittedly difficult, taking at least as long as the one Nicodemus had encountered in the early evening. The Guard Rats, Darwin and Sandor, would give a full report to the council in the morning, describing how they tried leaving the area, but the thing persistently tried blocking their way with one of its tendrils. Sandor took to saying “You’re not real” out loud repeatedly until Darwin advised him that addressing the thing like that would actually be acknowledging that it has a tangible existence. A safer thing to do would be to say to oneself, “I’m going to leave now and there’s nothing to prevent me from doing so.” Both of them took this approach, but even so Darwin could feel a tendril, slimy and vile, sliding across his torso, blocking him physically. Sandor found it even harder to keep his resolve upon seeing this, but a determined Darwin kept repeating to himself that there was nothing here to stop him and urged Sandor to do the same. They moved forward, and two of the thing’s “mouths” menaced them as well. Still they both kept their wits about them, and, all at once, the thing seemed to give up, pulling its tendrils back and soon vanishing altogether.

After the two gave their report, the council weighed the new information, and it seemed to prove definitively that Nicodemus’s advice on how to deal with the anomalies was dead-on, and that it didn’t take someone with his abilities to defeat them. Also notable was the fact that there were only two such incidents reported this night, whereas on previous nights there were as many as six. Could this mean they were on the way out, that they’d become fewer in number each night until they’d occur no more? A few in the council admitted they’d be satisfied with that, but most agreed they’d want to know the cause and origin of the anomalies as well.

Throughout the ensuing day, the word was spread that the anomalies could be defeated through force of will. It definitely proved to be a morale booster, enabling everyone to go about the day’s activities with greater ease, with many expressing less apprehension for the night to come. Rats and Mice worked outside, attended classes, played games and swam in the lake as usual. Patricia threw herself into her work on Nicodemus’s portrait, and would consider this to be her most productive day yet. Tallus’s grandchildren Donald, Iris and Victor were as busy as ever on their treehouse. Plans continued apace for a projected long-term “goodwill” expedition to the areas west of the Great Red Plain, with which even Johnathan and his family were relatively unfamiliar. Head musicians Kevin and his best friend Lol worked hard on a new musical piece inspired by the trip to Gwinthrayle’s. All across Freethorn, there was a greater sense than in recent days that long-term plans of any kind should continue to be made as before, just as much as more immediate, day-to-day ones.

Conversation and discussion ran the gamut much as usual, though now spiced with renewed speculation on what else Lahaikshe held in store, and what Nicodemus would find on his latest excursion and how soon he’d be back. He was a subject on nearly everyone’s mind, in varying degrees and in different ways. Some were disappointed that he was once again spending so much time away, in spite of knowing that it was for everyone’s good; but all looked forward to hearing what he’d have to report upon his return

For one, Nicodemus’s absence had perhaps the greatest impact, though one wouldn’t suspect it from her actions. Jessica went about her daily tasks, both in her work in the medical ward and in looking after her own children and nieces and nephews, with a particular singlemindedness. Those few who were aware of what she truly must be going through respected her right to privacy; though at one point she confided to her mother that though she couldn’t deny her love for Nicodemus, perhaps his rejection of her further company was for the best; and one way or another, it would be resolved after he took his leave of them.

Chapter 34 - Interlude in Asarals

“…ajbatha sayl vintha bol nidrom.”

Thus ended the 136th and final stanza of “Thanaduim,” a favorite epic poem of Gwinthrayle’s, and one of several he’d recited to himself to help him pass the time in the 16 hours since he’d begun this trip. And what a trip it had been! It was the first one of such a great distance—halfway around the world—that he’d made in over three decades, and it was definitely starting to tell on him. It was a task more suitable for one much younger than he, though it was not really physically taxing. Still, it was a necessary one, if what he and Nicodemus had discussed days ago was capable of happening. He needed to view and examine the site of this phenomenon up close, for any clue, any scrap of evidence he could glean from the site that could help in determining if such a thing could happen again, and where.

As he watched the hilly, heavily forested landscape roll by beneath him, he felt relief that his journey was nearly at an end; though, of course, that would only be half of it. As much as he wished there was a faster mode of travel, there’d been plenty to see on this trip, and he’d enjoyed the variety of sights and landforms between his home and his destination. Were it not for the urgency of this mission, he’d have certainly made more than brief rest stops along the way. Even so, there were many sights that would stay with him for years: a wide river bisecting a lush tropical jungle, forming a spectacular waterfall which spilled into a vast, deep gorge; the group of children whom he’d entertained with stories during a stopover in a seaside town running down the beach, shouting their goodbyes as he sailed overhead; the pod of thosas, massive long-necked marine animals, feeding and frolicking in calm waters in the middle of the Yagarr Ocean; the golden-colored cliffs greeting him upon reaching the southern-hemisphere continent of Asarals, where, still many miles further on, his destination yet lay.

His powers, the product of many years of mental discipline to learn to manipulate the ambient energies of his world’s biosphere, had enabled him to sail as if on the wind these several thousand miles as well as protect him from the elements. Now, he forced further reminiscing to the wayside as he surveyed, on the horizon, what appeared to be an abrupt change in the landscape. He settled down on a high bluff, removed a clear, egg-shaped jewel from his satchel, and tossed it in the air in front of him. It grew to several times its original size and hung in the air, whereupon Gwinthrayle gestured and an image appeared on its face. He needed study it for only a few seconds before restoring this portable version of his orb of disclosure to its previous dimensions and resuming his flight.

In a matter of minutes, he’d again settled upon solid ground, this time on a low hill at the edge of an area of land which, he now knew beyond a doubt, was his destination. Just behind him, the forest ended abruptly; and beyond it there was nothing but dry, dusty soil and bare rock. It was not unlike the place where the Great Red Plain, which Freethorn lay upon, met forested land. But whereas that was long held to be a natural phenomenon—though the precise origins were lost to time—this was most decidedly unnatural. The trees and shrubbery at this forest’s edge had the appearance of plants that had grown surrounded by more of their own kind, and now appeared exposed and vulnerable.

Once more he took to the air, bringing himself higher and traveling in a circular route, from which he could see how far and wide this disaster ranged. It was a roughly circular area, about 22 klivaphs—a little over four and a half miles—in diameter, by Gwinthrayle’s estimate.

He brought himself back to the point where he’d originally touched down. He knelt and scooped up a handful of the dry dust and examined it closely. Much of it was plant material—bits of leaves, twigs and seed pods could be seen—but all of it as unliving as the rocks. He let it sift through his fingers as he straightened; and gazed, lost in thought, at the small cloud it created, then at the surrounding landscape. It was as if something had drawn out all life-force in the area; some force, whether supernatural or not of this world altogether, must surely be held responsible. Surely animal as well as plant life must have been snuffed out; though probably few if any Rusay, since he already knew this to be a thinly populated area.

At any rate, he had to get down to business. Spells would have to be worked which should provide information on what sort of agent caused this calamity, or at least point the way toward the truth. He concentrated and began gesturing with palms facing the ground as he began an incantation.

“I saw it, you know!”

Gwinthrayle grimaced at the break in concentration and turned. An elderly man approached, walking with the aid of a gnarled cane though still with much spring, gesturing and pointing with his other hand. He was typical of Rusay native to Asarals: skin a slightly darker and greyer shade of blue, facial features less angular and more round than those from Vitrono, Gwinthrayle’s home continent, and dressed in a knee-length robe.

“I did! A beautiful, clear day like this, it was. The air, the very air…it shook. It shivered, quaked, then…then it turned a reddish-brown, everything did! Just sickly, a terrible, sickly color, it was.” He shook his head. “You know something, don’t you?” He lifted his cane, pointing it at Gwinthrayle. “Old Mitss, you can’t fool him, he knows these things.”

Gwinthrayle stood and held both palms up. “Calm yourself, my friend. I am as much in the dark as you about what happened here. I am only here to seek answers, and perhaps you can help me.”

Mitss seemed instantly won over. “Well,” he said with a laugh, “answers I can give. Because I saw it, I did! Just a ways over yonder, just past those va’isyars there, that’s where I stood.” He pointed to one grove of trees that stood distinctly apart from the surrounding vegetation.

“Can you recall, Mitss, how long ago it happened?”

“Oh, yes, yes…it was…three? Yes, three turns of the moon since it happened.”

Gwinthrayle encouraged Mitss to try to remember as many other details as he could; then, he concentrated anew and began reworking the previous spell as Mitss looked on in silent fascination. After about four minutes, he took a deep breath and turned. “Well…I may not have found all the answers I was looking for, but it was worth the effort.”

Mitss nodded thoughtfully. “And our work has barely begun, has it not?”

“Indubitably,” answered Gwinthrayle, unruffled by the old man’s sudden change in demeanor. “And you, my friend, may as well cast off your disguise.”

Mitss gave a hearty guffaw and casually tossed aside his cane. He made a sweeping clockwise motion with his arm. There was a flash of multicolored light, and now another stood in his place: a Rusay still of native Asaralsian cast but closer to Gwinthrayle’s age, and one Gwinthrayle knew to be a fellow sorcerer, one who lived in another part of Asarals and obviously here for the same reasons. “You saw through it the whole time, did you not, Gwinthrayle?”

“From the moment I laid eyes on you, S’porssig.” The two clasped each other’s shoulders. “It has been far too many years, old friend.” They spent the next few minutes catching up on each other’s life, then Gwinthrayle asked, “Now…why the masquerade?”

“Mainly to see if you could reach the same conclusions I had, with no prompting from me. Silly and superfluous, I realize now. So what have you learned?”

“As near as I can tell…what caused this left residual traces of mystical energies that, paradoxically, seem both of Lahaikshe and its biosphere, and of elsewhere—a place that smells of endless conflict and destruction.”

S’porssig rubbed his chin. “Yes…a place that could be Lahaikshe’s polar opposite, but also as much a part of it as every mountain peak, every drop of water…and you and I. In the weeks since I’ve arrived here, I’ve gained no further ground in tracing those energies to their source. It’s almost as if some force is preventing me. But your years of expertise exceed mine, do they not? Perhaps your investigation will be more fruitful.”

“Or…perhaps our combined talents may succeed where, separately…”

“Say no more, Gwinthrayle. Shall we begin?”

The two sorcerers concentrated in tandem, working a spell not unlike that which Gwinthrayle had worked in past years in tandem with extradimensional sorcerers, like the one which enabled Kalfomenda to travel to and from Lahaikshe. This one, it was hoped, would succeed in determining not only the source of this destructive force, but where, if at all, it might strike again.

After some twenty minutes, though, they both emerged from their trancelike states and looked at each other wearily. “Something was definitely impeding our efforts, Gwinthrayle.”

“As if a barrier were placed in the very location where, just beyond, the answers we seek lay.”

“Is there some being, some entity, perhaps even some force of nature none of us have yet fathomed, which is responsible; for both this destructive force and our inability to carry our investigation any further?”

“It does appear that way, and yet…could the location of this event be a factor? Why this particular spot in Asarals? And the time…” Gwinthrayle suddenly seemed struck by a major revelation. “S’porssig…you are positive this occurred three months ago?”

“Absolutely. All that ‘Mitss’ told you is entirely true, except that I wasn’t here to see it happen, but I did use my orb of disclosure when I arrived a few days later.”

“And it wouldn’t deceive. Yes, three months…it may be just coincidence, but...” Gwinthrayle detailed his suspicions to S’porssig and then announced that he needed to return home as soon as possible.

“You should rest and refresh yourself first, for such a long journey. Come…the room I have taken in the nearest village is small, but sufficient for both of us.”

Gwinthrayle gratefully accepted S’porssig’s hospitality, though the stay would have to be brief, for the return trip now took on a greater sense of urgency. He hoped against hope that it was only a coincidence of dates, but it couldn’t be taken lightly. This terrible event that turned this once lush and bountiful tract of land into a desert occurred the very same day that Gwinthrayle made a much shorter journey to greet his new neighbors; the day of another major change in the physical makeup of his world.

It was the day of the arrival from Earth of Freethorn and its residents.

Chapter 35 - Breaking curfew

Throughout the day, Stuart had reflected on his experience the night before, witnessing Nicodemus’s defeat of the “earth creature.” This, combined with the confidences the two shared, had left an indelible impression on him; and listening to Timothy’s account of his flintarak adventure had compounded the feeling. It wasn’t one that he could put into words; the closest description was that he now felt compelled to prove something, something which would show everyone that he wasn’t a child anymore, and that he had…something, a special talent that would impress everyone. Certainly, his emerging feelings for Lula were influencing his thinking; this was something he hadn’t admitted aloud to anyone except two: Nicodemus, and his mother, with whom he’d always been able to confide his innermost feelings—a fact many, even his own siblings, would be surprised to learn. He was certain that, once Lula was back among them, he’d have at least as much to tell her as she would him.

It was in late afternoon when he came to a decision, and took action by discreetly enlisting others to the plan he was working up, others whom he was certain wouldn’t give him away. Even as he did, he realized how much his actions mirrored Martin’s months before, actions that precipitated the Great Move from Earth; and those from the adventure on Tikinda. Yes, what he was planning would be sneaking out and breaking the curfew. But this was different. Yes, of course it was, because they weren’t going far; they’d be staying entirely inside Freethorn, whereas Martin—first with Timothy, more recently with Lambert—went further from home, into territory they knew could be dangerous. No, this was the right thing to do. It had to be.

At dinner, his family noticed he seemed preoccupied, his mother and twin sister in particular. After leaving the dining hall, Jessica took Stuart aside and urged him to share what was on his mind. He told her he was mainly thinking about Lula—which his brother Clifford had guessed during dinner and teased him about—and Nicodemus, and what both of them were doing. It was all very true, but not the whole picture; and Stuart couldn’t help feeling bothered about this, though he knew he shouldn’t. After all, it wasn’t as if he were lying to her outright, just not sharing all that was on his mind. He resolved not to let this ruin his plans for this night.

So it was that a group of five children, three Mice and two Rats, made their way along in the escaping twilight, heads occasionally bobbing up in the tall grass, moving on a little further once certain that none of the Guard were nearby. All felt a sense of excitement at having been able to get this far apparently undetected, but there were some misgivings. The group came to a hollow log, one that Stuart already had in mind for a meeting place, and gathered inside.

“Okay, Stu, let’s go over this again. You think one of those…anomaly-things is going to show up, and that you can make it go away by yourself?”

“That’s it in a nutshell, Torrance. And you’ll all be here to see it for yourselves.”

“You sure sounded confident about that,” said Torrance’s sister Hazel. “How can you be so sure?”

“I told you before, it’s just a feeling, a…a conviction, that’s the word. I’ve had it since last night, after I watched Nicodemus take care of that one.”

“You really believe you can do it, don’t you?” asked Quentin, whose mother Bernadette was a medical colleague of Stuart’s mother.

“Don’t you?” retorted Stuart. “You wouldn’t have come along if you didn’t, right?”

“Take it easy, Stu, we’re all with you,” said Nora, whose father was Jemial, another colleague of Jessica’s. “What I’d like to know is, why here?”

“This area doesn’t get a whole lot of traffic,” Stuart explained. “It’s well off the trails, and the guards shouldn’t be coming this way. I figured that, since we’d be in for a bit of a wait for anything to happen, we should do it where we’re less apt to be discovered.”

“And what do you figure’s gonna happen?” asked Quentin. “One of those things is gonna come to us?”

“Right again.” Stuart folded his arms, looking as confident as ever as his companions’ jaws dropped.

“How do you figure that?” asked Torrance. “Those things have been popping up anywhere. No one knows where they’ll appear next.”

“Yeah, but you know what they’ve been saying, right? That these anomalies might only be here to try to scare us. So they need someone to scare, right?”

“And we’re it,” said Nora with some trepidation. “It does make sense, but…you really think they’re not dangerous?”

“Yeah, as long as we put our minds to it. After Nicodemus took care of that one, Darwin and Sandor faced down that other one, and they took care of it the same way. That proves it can be done.”

“But…we’re just kids,” said Hazel.

“Uh-huh. What’s your point? Look, we can do this, all of us. We’ll all just keep saying it’s not real, it’s not real, and poof, it’s gone.”

They continued discussing the matter, Stuart’s unwavering confidence soon buoying the others to the same level. They agreed it probably wouldn’t be necessary to stay where they were; when and if the thing “arrived,” it would certainly draw them out anyway. Even Stuart admitted that “if” was an appropriate word; there was no guarantee there would be an anomaly tonight, and the possibility had already been brought up that there wouldn’t be any more after last night, when only two appeared, at least in front of witnesses.

After sitting inside the log for about ten minutes—not very long, but youthful impatience made it seem longer—the latter possibility was appearing more and more real. They began discussing how much more time they should give it before turning back, even knowing they were likely to be in big trouble, since they were unlikely to be able to sneak in as easily as they sneaked out.

“So we’ll be punished,” said Stuart cavalierly. “What’s a few extra chores?”

“And being grounded for a week?” Quentin brought up.

“Or two, or three…” added Hazel.

Stuart wasn’t ready to admit that the possibility of no more anomalies was starting to erode his confidence. “Look, if one does show up, and we’re able to deal with it like I’m sure we can, they can’t punish us, right?”

“Maybe not,” said Torrance, “but we should still figure on—”

“Shh!” Everyone quieted and listened carefully in response to Stuart’s call to silence. He got up and peered outside. He could swear he’d heard something, like the faint snapping of a twig. He stepped out a short ways. There was no sign of anyone about, guards or otherwise. A thought occurred: that a Guard rat could catch their scents and smell them out. Probably shouldn’t worry about that till…

“Looks like we’re all in trouble now, huh, Stu?”

Stuart whirled in surprise, almost stumbling as he faced the source of the all-too-familiar voice, coming from the top of the very log in which he and his friends waited. “Shirl? Wha—what’re you—”

“Right now, I’m breaking curfew just like you guys.” Shirley slid off the log down to the hollow’s entry and let herself in, to the others’ surprise.

Stuart followed. “You didn’t tell any of the guards, didja?”

“You don’t see anyone else, do you?”

“So you sneaked out like we did?” said Torrance. “How come?”

“I guess…for the same reasons you did: to see if Stu can really face one of these things…or else keep him from getting into deeper trouble. Kind of like Teresa and Martin when they were kids.”

Stuart understood well the comparison, having been partially inspired to do this by the flintarak story, but he wasn’t ready to admit it out loud. “Okay, so I guess you know why I wanted to come out here. When did you first hear?”

“When you met Torrance and Hazel in the corridor. And I wasn’t following you deliberately. I just happened to hear you talking, just around that corner. You guys really ought to be more careful about where you hold your private conversations.” Shirley gave Torrance a knowing wink.

“You could have told on them right then,” said Nora. “Why didn’t you?”

“I figured Stu was up to something, the way he was so quiet all day. And then I overheard you saying you were all planning to sneak out after curfew. I know you, Stu, you wouldn’t try something like that unless you’re really, really serious about it.”

“She wanted to look out for your welfare, Stu,” said Torrance. “I think that’s great.”

“Yeah,” agreed Hazel, “you should have brought her in on it to begin with.”

Stuart had to admit—though, again, not out loud—that he’d long envied how much closer Torrance and Hazel were to each other than he was to Shirley. Still, he was sure she was completely sincere. “All right, so you’re here now,” he said. “You must have heard most of our conversation, so…how long do you think we should wait?”

“Oh, maybe another 20 minutes. I think you’re right about those things needing an audience; you know, someone to scare. In fact, when I heard you talking about how you thought you could just…will it away, something just…hit me. I don’t know, I can’t describe it, but…I think you’re right, it can be done.”

Stuart’s expression brightened. “You wanna be our lookout?”

“Sure. I’ve been doing it already, since just after you got here.”

After everyone agreed it would be best for them all to stay put instead of moving about, Shirley returned to her station atop the log. As the minutes wore on, though, there resumed the sense that nothing was going to happen, and even Stuart was all but ready to call it a night.

“I think it’s been twenty minutes, guys,” called down Shirley, looking in upside down through the entry. “Still nothing going on out here.” She’d reported only one pair of guards coming near but sticking to the nearest trail and not venturing into this undeveloped area.

Stuart came all the way outside and joined Shirley in looking up at the night sky. “Sure is a nice night, though,” she said. “The moon’s really pretty, isn’t it?”

“Yeah, it sure is.” He gave a “tsk,” shaking his head. “Guess we’d better enjoy it while we can, it’s probably the last chance we’ll get to see it for a while.”

“You’re not giving up, are you?” Shirley asked quietly.

“No! I mean—even if we don’t see anything, then…there’s still a chance.” He sighed. “Oh, I don’t know.”

“I know just what he means,” said Quentin, poking his head out. “We’ll get grounded for sure, just like I said, and no more starry skies to look at for a while.”

“I know that’s what he meant,” said Shirley. “But you still think there’s a chance, don’t you, Stu?”

“Yes,” said Stuart simply, with all the confidence he could muster.

“All on account of this ‘conviction’ of yours?” challenged Quentin. “A hunch, a feeling? We can’t see or hear or smell a hunch. And that’s all you had to go on.”

“Give him a break, Quent,” spoke up Nora. “You’ve never made mistakes in your life?”

Before Stuart could protest Nora’s choice of words, Shirley said, “If you want to leave, Quentin, don’t let us stop you.”

Quentin grunted and said, “We’re all in trouble anyway, so I might as well—”

“Hey! How’d you kids get all the way out here?”

The shouted question halted any further conversation, but only for a few seconds: “Oh, man, did you guys have to talk so loud?” “You were just as loud!” “Hey, they’d have found us out anyway, probably.” “I knew it, I just knew I should’a gone to bed early…”

The two Guard rats approached the log, quickly making their way through the tall grass, and the six curfew-breakers could see that the larger of the two was Brutus, the Captain of the Guard.

“Oh, man, we’re really in for it,” said Torrance as he and the others emerged from the log.

“Let me do the talking,” said Stuart as the two rats loomed over them.

“So,” Brutus’s voice boomed, “apparently we need to clarify the meaning of the word ‘curfew’ to some of our young ones.”

“Uh…Brutus, sir, it was all my idea, I…I talked them all into coming with me.”

“Well, Stuart, you can explain your reasons to your mother and anyone else you like. In the meantime, you’re all coming back with us.”

“But there’s a—”

“Now.”

“You heard him, kids,” added Philip. “Even if we have to carry you bodily.”

Everyone except Stuart and Shirley looked resigned to being dragged back to the colonies to face the music. Still, though they came forward with the others, Stuart wasn’t finished pleading his case. “There’s a reason I came out here, Brutus, a good reason!”

“The same with me,” added Shirley. “Please, just listen to us!”

“Say whatever you will,” said Brutus. “You’re still coming with us.”

Fair enough, thought Stuart as all six children offered no resistance to being led away. As they came upon the nearby trail, Stuart and Shirley tried to convey as best they could how they’d both felt motivated to deliberately seek out one of the anomalies to prove they could deal with them as good as any of the adults, if not better. Brutus and Philip were, predictably, very skeptical, expressing out loud how they could scarcely believe these children could outdo members of the Guard in this matter, with their years of physical and mental training and discipline in dealing with threats to the colony, whereas the mouse children were still relative newcomers to Freethorn.

As they moved along, Quentin said to a silently-fuming Stuart, “Hey, Stu, I’m sorry I said what I said back there.”

“That’s okay, forget it,” Stuart grumbled. “They wouldn’t even give us a chance! Why do they have to be so…so…”

“Patronizing?” offered Shirley.

“Yeah, that’s the word. Just because we’re kids.”

“It wasn’t our intent to be patronizing,” said Philip. “We only have your safety and well-being in mind.”

“Yeah, sure. If Nicodemus were here, he’d back me up.”

Both Guard Rats were aware of how Stuart had spent some time with Nicodemus last night and that the two had shared a special bond; though they were still unaware that he’d been there to see Nicodemus vanquish the first of last night’s anomalies, Nicodemus having made good on his promise to cover for him—though it was essentially a lie, which still bothered Stuart.

“Perhaps he would,” said Brutus in reply. “But for now—”

“I know, I know. We gotta be safe and sound.”

“Maybe it won’t be so bad, Stu,” said Shirley consolingly. “How they’ll punish us, I mean. We—”

“Shh!” Everyone froze at Brutus’s call to silence. He and Philip smelled the evening air. The children did likewise. All grimaced, looking at each other, some holding their noses. This was definitely something out of place, this odor close to that of decaying flesh. Quentin made a sound in his throat as if he were about to be sick.

“Let’s keep moving,” said Brutus. All realized what this assault on their olfactory senses had to mean. “Now, listen, all of you. We will concentrate on moving along the trail. We will move steadily, no one running. Even if we see, hear or smell anything unusual, we will keep moving. We will tell ourselves, there is nothing there. We are going home now. You have to repeat it over and over to yourselves, and make yourselves believe it.”

And then, as if on cue, it was right there in front of them, blocking their path, its sudden appearance causing everyone, including the guards, to jump back. Quentin fell right on his backside, staring with awe and disbelief.

This one took a more recognizable form than most of its predecessors, and one more fearsome: a huge serpent with scales of glowing red, its jaws parting to reveal fangs that seemed to drip molten lava, setting little fires as it contacted the ground, its voice a hissing wail, its breath the odor of putrefaction they’d already smelled.

“Tha-that’s not real?” Quentin stammered as he scrambled away backwards on all fours. “It’s got to be real, it’s—”

“Quiet!” Brutus commanded as he stood his ground. “Remember what I said, all of you, and follow my lead!” Even as he said this, the thing flung globs of its fiery venom straight toward the guards. One landed on Philip’s arm and the other made contact (or appeared to) with Brutus’s shoulder. Though both continued standing their ground and even continued moving forward, their young charges could see both of them flinch. Obviously, they all realized, willing the anomaly away would be difficult. Or was it even possible?

“There is nothing here! We are going home!” Brutus and Philip now said over and over in unison. They resumed moving forward slowly, and the thing actually seemed to respond, slithering backward at their approach.

“It’s working!” Stuart said to the other children. “Just like I told you! Come on, you guys, we can help them! Hey, Torrance, Hazel—tell us that story about your mom again, I don’t think Quentin and Nora have heard it.”

They looked at him with confusion for a moment, and then understood what he was trying to do: get their minds on something other than what was—or wasn’t—threatening them. “Uh, okay,” Torrance began. “Our mother, Embree, went out to get food one day on the farm where we lived…”

He and Hazel continued the story as all eight of them advanced along the trail. The glowing serpent continued backing off, their strategy appearing to be a success, though of course it wouldn’t be complete without the anomaly vanishing altogether. Stuart and Shirley looked at each other, smiling, both feeling a renewed sense that they’d done the right thing by coming out here.

Not all of them, however, shared their optimism. Quentin would later confess how he’d tried, really tried as hard as the others to believe that the thing wasn’t there. But now, as Hazel paused for a couple of seconds in her story, he said, “Wh-why is it still here? Why isn’t it working? Shouldn’t it be gone by now?”

The anomaly seemed to respond directly to Quentin’s display of fear and doubt and hurled a glob of the glowing liquid over the Guard Rats’ heads. They noticed this but couldn’t react in time to prevent what seemed to happen next. The fiery missile connected, or seemed to, with the one bringing up the rear: Quentin. It happened so fast that no one saw it strike; the next anyone knew, Quentin was on his back, writhing and kicking with hands covering his face.

“Aaaaahh! It hit me, it hit me, I’m blind!” Quentin shouted. The other children rushed to his side. Brutus and Philip hesitated for a moment; if they responded, would that just be encouraging the thing’s reality? They both banished the thought, joining the others in helping Quentin, who cried and whimpered piteously. “My eyes, my eyes…”

“Quentin, listen to me,” said Philip as he crouched alongside the young rat, “it’ll be all right. Bring your hands down so we can see what happened.”

But two among them didn’t wait around to see. Stuart and Shirley turned away and, arm-in-arm, advanced upon the glowing serpent, expressions filled with determination and even anger. “Get out of here!” Shirley bellowed.

“We don’t want you here! No one wants you here!” shouted Stuart.

The Guards turned, both perplexed and alarmed. “What the devil are they doing?” said Philip.

“Stuart! Shirley! Get away from it!” shouted Brutus.

But the two siblings continued, undaunted: “You’re not gonna hurt anyone here!” “Or scare anyone else!” “We know you’re not real!” “Beat it! Scram!”

The Guards rushed forward and snatched Stuart and Shirley off their feet; and, at almost the same instant, just as they started to back away, the glowing serpent wasn’t there anymore. For a moment, they all looked silently upon the spot where it was coiled.

“I think you can put us down now,” said Stuart in a surprisingly calm voice.

“It’s gone now,” said Brutus as he set Shirley down, “but it might be back. We’d better—”

“No,” said Shirley. “It won’t be.”

“We won’t be bothered by any of those things again,” agreed Stuart. “Not ever.”

Before the Guards could ask how they could be so certain of this, the siblings joined Nora at Quentin’s side. He was sitting upright now—and quite calm.

“Look, you guys, he’s okay,” announced Nora. “See? He’s not hurt at all.”

“I knew he would be,” said Stuart.

Indeed, Quentin seemed only confused. “I thought…that thing blinded me, but…when I took my hands down, and opened my eyes, I knew…I don’t know how, but I knew that I didn’t have to be afraid of anything.” He still felt a bit shaken as Philip helped him to his feet. “It’s really gone for good, isn’t it?”

“It sure is,” said Stuart as confidently as ever.

“Now wait a minute!” said Brutus. “You kids still haven’t told us how you did that!”

“Yes,” added Philip, “you just ordered it to go away, and it went away? After all we’d done to try and will it away?”

The two could only look up at them and shrug. “Yeah, that sounds about right,” said Shirley.

“We just knew what to do,” agreed Stuart. “We came up to Quentin, and Shirley took my arm, and that’s when it seemed to start.”

“Yeah! It was right then! It’s like something passed between us, and then we knew that Quentin wasn’t really hurt, and that we could make the snake go away like that!”

“You do believe us, don’t you, Brutus?”

Brutus and Philip looked all around, noting how none of the ground or vegetation in the area showed any signs of having been burned or even singed. “Yes, I do,” Brutus replied. “We can’t deny the evidence before us. Or maybe lack of evidence would be more like it. Come on, let’s get you all home.”

“So you two really believe,” said Philip as they started off, “that we’ve seen the last of those things?”

Stuart and Shirley both nodded confidently. “And smelled, too. Yuck!”

They all laughed, and then Torrance said, “I bet we’ll all still get grounded, though.”

“Well, we can’t say how much punishment you’ll get, if any,” said Brutus. “But after what’s happened here tonight, we’ll definitely put in a good word for all of you.”

“Wow, thanks, Brutus,” said Stuart. The others echoed the sentiment.

“I’m still wondering, though,” added Philip, “if any of us could have banished the thing the way you did, or…if there’s something special about you two, a special ability that comes out when you’re together. Or something like that.”

Stuart and Shirley smiled at each other. That it was, each thought silently. On the way, Torrance and Hazel continued the story begun earlier about their mother.

As predicted, their return to the colonies was met with a mix of reactions ranging from worried and relieved to irate and fuming. But Brutus and Philip kept their word, and after describing the entire account to the children’s parents and the colony elders—including Stuart and Shirley’s conviction that the anomalies were gone for good, which they continued to steadfastly maintain—not only were they not grounded or punished in any way, but some were even starting to call them heroes. With no suggestion from the Guards, Tallus and Johnathan postulated the theory Philip had suggested: that Stuart and Shirley had banished the anomaly through their own “sibling power,” something the two of them could generate together but not separately. Apparently it was the power to, put most simply, cut straight through to the truth and distinguish fact from fallacy and illusion. They wondered what other applications this ability could have; for instance, would they be able to tell if someone was lying or telling the truth just by listening? Other possibilities were floated; and though they admitted the possibility of the twins’ defeat of the “lava-snake” to be a fluke or a one-time event, it was concluded that this likely was indeed a naturally-occurring talent or ability they shared, similar to Timothy’s ability to accurately intuit a positive outcome in a time of crisis, or Boris’s visions—or perhaps even Nicodemus’s unique abilities.

The six curfew-breakers were allowed to bunk together for the night in the living room of Jessica’s quarters, though Quentin’s parents Colin and Bernadette were, of all the adults, the most hesitant to let their child out of their sight, despite Bernadette’s own examination which found him to be completely unharmed and healthy, and Quentin’s own insistence that he “never felt better.” In any case, none of the six got much sleep, since all were still quite excited over the evening’s events and would take a while to “wind down.”

Chapter 36 - A most unnatural storm

By morning, all of Freethorn was abuzz with the news. From the moment they set foot inside the Rat community on their way to breakfast, Stuart and Shirley found themselves as instant celebrities. It was almost a mob scene, with Rats and Mice eager to learn all the details of the twins’ adventure firsthand. They were bemused at first by all the attention, but they adjusted quickly; and after breakfast, with their mother’s help, a gathering place in front of the Mouse community had been designated where they could tell their story to a good-sized audience and take questions. Torrance, Hazel, Quentin and Nora were on hand to lend support and encouragement.

Jessica left the rest entirely up to them, standing aside and looking on with pride as they regaled adults and children alike with the tale. She looked up to the sky, a bit wistful as she thought about what Nicodemus may be doing right now. If for no other reason, he should at least be here to see this. She looked over to the west, noticing the cumulus clouds starting to become visible beyond Freethorn’s rim. She wondered if they were headed their way and how much rain they’d bring.

Presently she felt two arms encircle her waist, making her jump slightly. “Hey, big sis, what’s going on?” came the familiar voice behind her, followed by a giggle. At the same time, Timothy came up next to her, adding his own greeting.

“Oh, hi, Lucy…Tim.” Jessica paused to unlatch her little sister’s hands from her. “They’ve got quite an audience, haven’t they?”

Timothy shaded his eyes. “Ah…this would be about their little adventure last night, wouldn’t it?”

“Mm-hm. I just hope they don’t let all this fame go to their heads.”

“Do you really think this is a special talent of theirs, that got rid of the illusion last night?” asked Lucy.

“There’s no good reason why not. I guess time will tell just how much they can do with it.”

“Yeah…hmph.” Lucy folded her arms.

“What’s wrong, kiddo? You sound disappointed,” observed Jessica.

“Oh, it has nothing to do with them. It’s just…well, I know it sounds selfish, but I don’t seem to have any special talent.”

“Maybe yours will make itself known sometime, at just the right occasion,” Timothy suggested, “just as theirs did.”

“Yeah, I suppose.” Lucy scanned the crowd. “I don’t see Lilia here. Have you seen her, Jess?”

“No, I haven’t. Is she missing?”

“Well, so far, no one’s seen her since last night,” replied Timothy.

“It’s getting to be a habit with her,” said Lucy, “wandering off without telling anyone.”

“Not every time,” Timothy pointed out. “The night after we got back from Gwinthrayle’s, she let Ellis and Reuben know she was going out to the meadow, though she did tell them she wanted to go alone.”

“We were talking about her at the party at the guest house the other night,” added Lucy, “and we all pretty much agreed to respect her wanting to be by herself. But even Reuben thinks she’s been behaving oddly.”

“And he should know,” agreed Jessica. “I wonder if it has anything to do with that…‘other’ personality.”

“Nicodemus thinks that’s entirely integrated within her now,” said Timothy. “It’s just my own guess, but I think this is something else entirely…if it’s anything at all.”

“If it is,” added Lucy, “it probably did start with the min’hathio. The way she described it, it was like it deliberately sought her out. It’s not like she was a lost traveler, and it was keeping her company. She went there deliberately herself, though she couldn’t say why.”

“Or wasn’t able to,” added Timothy. “But it is as if the min’hathio knew she was there, and came to her as if…it needed to pass something on to her, like some kind of information.” Neither of them knew how close this was to Lilia’s full account of her encounter, which thus far she’d confided only to Ellis; and to Nicodemus, who’d since told Johnathan.

“I was just thinking the other day,” said Jessica, “about how it sometimes seems as if…something in this world’s essence seems to be trying to tell us something. Maybe Lilia’s experience is tied in with that.”

“I guess we’ve all been thinking that way lately,” agreed Timothy. “Especially with those anomalies, and everyone wondering what they’re all about.”

“Or if they’re really gone for good,” added Lucy. “You know what, Tim? I’ll bet if you’d seen one of them, you’d have been able to tell if—”

A sudden commotion in back of them interrupted her. All three responded instantly, turning to see, about three feet away, a small group of rats and mice gathering around another. They moved closer, some of Stuart and Shirley’s audience doing the same, and saw a worried-looking Seelah crouching in front of Boris, who was sitting on the ground, leaning upright against a rock. His eyes were partially open but he seemed unaware of anything but what his senses, and only his, were telling him.

“When did this start, Seelah?” asked Jessica, approaching quickly to examine him.

“Jus-just a minute ago. I thought it was going to be like one of his usual visions, but…oh, look at him! I just don’t know what to do.”

“Calm down, Seelah,” urged Timothy. “If there’s anything wrong with him, he’ll be in good hands.”

“Jess’ll know what to do,” added Lucy. “She always does.”

Would that were true, thought Jessica as she examined Boris. His heart rate was accelerated and breathing quick and shallow.

A few feet away, Stuart and Shirley noticed their audience was starting to dwindle. “What the heck are they doing over there?” Stuart shaded his eyes.

“I think someone’s sick or something,” guessed Shirley. “It sounds pretty serious.” The twins, along with the remainder of their audience, went to investigate.

For nearly a minute, Boris’s symptoms were unchanged; then, there was a sudden pause in his breathing, and his head slumped forward.

“Oh, no! He’s not—he can’t be—” Seelah was almost frantic, placing hands on Boris’s arm and chest, looking for signs of life that she feared were slipping away.

“There’s still a pulse,” reported Jessica, “and it feels almost normal. His breathing, too.”

“He’ll be fine,” encouraged Timothy, hand on Seelah’s shoulder. “I know he will.”

She, along with everyone else who heard Timothy’s words were instantly reassured. “But why isn’t he awake and talking? It’s never happened before, not like this.”

“We’ll just have to wait,” said Timothy. “If it is something he envisioned, then—”

A groan escaped from Boris’s throat and his eyes snapped wide open. He looked up, blinking and shaking his head.

“Boris! Oh, darling, I was so afraid for you!” Seelah embraced him.

“How do you feel, Boris?” asked Jessica.

Boris, his own arms around Seelah, looked up dazedly. “Uh…Jessica. Okay, I guess. How…how long was I out?”

“Almost two minutes. Did you feel faint, or about to pass out before?”

“Er…no, not really.” He stood, with Seelah and Jessica helping him up, and continued leaning against the rock to get his bearings. “It just seemed like one of my usual visions…at first.”

“That must have been some vision,” said Lucy. They all described his symptoms during the episode, and how it looked as if he were witnessing the most horrendous sight imaginable.

“I can’t really describe it like that. There’s nothing that I saw…that looked like anything recognizable. But there was this…overwhelming feeling of…everything around having the…very life drawn out of it, like everything was crumbling, turning to dust.” Just describing this much was enough to return a look of distress to him. As Seelah continued comforting him, his gaze traveled upward. “Looks like we got a storm heading our way.”

Everyone looked toward the west. “Will you look at that,” said Jessica. “A few minutes ago they looked like ordinary cumulus clouds.” As she spoke, the first rumble of thunder was heard from that selfsame cloud mass, now looking far less ordinary, with color a deep blue-gray—not uncommon for a thunderstorm on Earth, but for Lahaikshe, almost unheard of. Some were clambering up to ledges on the nearby wall for a higher vantage point. From there, others could already be seen heading in from the fields or the lake for shelter. Many around them were already talking of doing the same. Then the wind picked up speed, blowing in from the west, heralding the approaching storm.

“We’d better get going,” said Jessica. Everyone began moving toward the Rat colony, in accordance with the long-established emergency plan. Two Guard rats dashed by to get the word spread in the Mouse colony.

Throughout the steadily-moving crowd, there was quiet but uneasy conversation. “I thought we weren’t supposed to get weather like this here!” “It might not last long.” “Man, there goes our treehouse! Look how much the branches are swaying!” “What do you want? At least we’ll be safe!”

Along the way, more of the Guard and some of the elders were helping to direct traffic and keep everyone calm. As they approached the guest quarters, Jessica’s party could see that the Rusay visitors were being evacuated as well.

“Have you ever seen a storm like this here, Tim?” Stuart asked along the way.

“No, I haven’t. And Dad never mentioned anything like this, even with all the time he’d spent on Lahaikshe.”

“He was here for almost a year, wasn’t he?” brought up Shirley. “Before everyone else?”

“That’s right, Shirley, and most of it he spent as Gwinthrayle’s guest,” Timothy confirmed. “And Gwinthrayle never mentioned weather conditions like this. If this is as bad as it looks, that is.”

“So as far as Gwinthrayle knows, there are rarely, if ever, storms like this?” Jessica asked.

“Not in this part of the world, at any rate.”

“So you could call it ‘unnatural,’ couldn’t you?”

“You probably could, Stuart.”

Stuart and Shirley looked at each other, each sensing what the other might be thinking. Presently they saw Johnathan helping to direct traffic, and approached him. Jessica detailed their discussion to him, though she was aware that this was the subject foremost on everyone’s mind and he’d certainly been asked about it plenty already. Johnathan, however, very readily corroborated Timothy’s summary; especially how, when he’d once described to Gwinthrayle how rough Earth’s weather could be and pointedly asked if Lahaikshe’s was ever as bad, Gwinthrayle was mildly surprised, stating that in all his years, there’d never been storms as bad as this new one was seemingly shaping up to be, nothing rougher than a slow and steady rain shower, only occasionally with thunder and lightning, and rarely with winds strong enough to topple trees.

“Unnatural,” he now concluded, “would definitely be my word for it.”

As the group moved on with the rest of the crowd, Lucy asked Timothy, “So…is, er, ‘it’ telling you anything about this?”

“I don’t think so,” Timothy said carefully. “Maybe it’s too early. I—no, wait.” His expression registered pleasure, followed quickly by a look of worry or distress.

“Uh-oh,” said Lucy. “It’s like a good news/bad news thing, isn’t it?”

Timothy nodded. “It’ll turn out all right for most of us, but…for some, and maybe even one individual, it may not be.”

“All the more reason for all of us to get under cover as soon as possible,” said Jessica.

“I heard that,” said Lucy. Taking Boris’s arm, she said, “Do you think your vision has anything to do with this?”

His answer was far less ambiguous than Timothy’s: “No. Definitely not. This is something else entirely. That much I’m sure about.”

“Maybe it’s just as well we don’t know anything more specific,” mused Timothy. “We might be warned about something bad that’ll happen, and do everything we can to avoid it, only to find we can’t escape fate.” After a pause, he added: “I’m sorry, I know that’s pretty negative.”

“That’s just examining all possibilities, Tim,” said Boris. “Nothing wrong with that. I don’t want to sound pessimistic myself, but things have gone almost too well here. Not to say we’re due for a disaster, but…who knows what will happen?”

Stuart and Shirley, meanwhile, had been occupied with their own private discussion, and now, both urgently sought their mother’s attention.

“What is it, dears?” Jessica stopped and crouched, as did the other mice in the group, curious to hear more.

“We think we know what’s going on,” said Shirley.

“Yeah, with Johnathan saying how he’s never heard of storms like this around here, and Gwinthrayle too…”

“And he’s lived here all his life, an’ he’s a lot older than all of us! That proves it shouldn’t be here!”

“Why not?” asked Jessica.

“Don’t you see, Mom?” said Stuart. “It’s unnatural!”

“You mean—like the anomalies?”

“Yeah! It’s just something else sent to scare us!”

“But it’s just a storm, nothing unnatural about it.”

“It is around here!” Stuart looked up to see the Rusay families approaching. “Hey! They’d know too!” He dashed over to get their input. They reported that they, too, had never experienced or heard about such a storm.

“You hear that, Mom?” said Shirley. “We’ve got to try this!”

“You mean…you think you can make this storm go away, just by…ordering it?”

“Just like the anomaly last night,” said Timothy. “It does make sense.”

“Please, Mom, let us try!” pleaded Stuart.

Jessica looked up to the nearby treetops, their branches swaying in the wind which howled and whistled through them ever more loudly, to the point where the Freethorners had to almost shout to be heard above it. Now the first few drops of rain were felt. “All right. You two do what you have to.”

The twins smiled confidently at each other as they eagerly joined hands. They looked up as a flash of lightning greeted their eyes. Even as the thunder sounded, they proceeded undaunted. “You’re not real!” shouted Stuart.

“You’re not going to wreck our home! Get out of here!” added Shirley. Many paused in their journey to observe, fascinated and bemused by the children’s tirade, which to the uninitiated would make them look to be indulging in a pointless display of temper. But this was hoped to be far from pointless. Many recognized immediately what they were trying to do and encouraged them.

Their mother and several others had taken shelter underneath a nearby ledge. After the twins’ campaign had gone on for about a minute, Jessica thought for a moment how absurd this looked—two little mice trying to control Mother Nature herself—in spite of her own encouragement, and belief in what they’d accomplished last night. She resolved to not let her judgment be clouded by doubt, and glanced continually out at the open sky to see if they’d effected any change, as did the others who’d paused to watch the twins’ efforts, including two of the Guard.

While this went on, no one else spoke; then after another minute, Ellis, who’d since joined them, announced, “Hey, look at the clouds! They’re changing color!”

Everyone looked up. Sure enough, the dark, ominous hues which had been steadily dimming the daylight were almost completely gone. The wind and the rain seemed to be diminishing. None wanted to say outright that this meant Stuart and Shirley’s efforts were entirely responsible, but everyone felt renewed optimism that it could yet, and started to emerge from under the ledge.

“I don’t know about you guys,” said Ellis, “but I think we can chalk this up to ‘sibling power.’”

“Maybe,” said Timothy, “but it’s not letting up completely. Still, I guess we shouldn’t expect it to just—”

“Look out!” shouted Boris.

Because the wind was still making such a din in the treetops, no one heard the snap of the brittle oak limb, nor did anyone see it falling until it had traveled almost halfway to the earth below, over the area where the children stood. Stuart and Shirley couldn’t hear Boris’s shout over their own voices; and yet, both seemed to sense something was wrong and ceased their tirade and began to run toward the others. One of the Guard Rats, Devon, also ran toward them, aiming to snatch them up or push them out of harm’s way. In those brief seconds, though, none could judge the precise spot where the limb would connect with ground. Though Devon flopped down and slid on his stomach as if sliding onto home plate, placing his own safety in jeopardy to protect the youngsters, the effort was in vain.

Everyone heard the “thud” as the limb met the ground, and then all looked to the spot and found their worst fears confirmed. Shirley had scrambled out of harm’s way just in time, but her brother had unknowingly run to the very spot where the limb would hit.

There were screams and shouts of Stuart’s name as Devon scrambled to lift the three-inch-thick limb away. Alicia, the other Guard rat, rushed to help and in an instant they’d tossed it to one side. Jessica, fighting down panic, was at his side the next instant. “Stuart! Can you hear me?” She patted the side of his face gently as he lay on his stomach where he fell, and was relieved to find him breathing and groaning.

Shirley, close to tears, joined her. “Is he going to be all right, Mom?”

“He’s conscious, honey, but more than that I-I can’t tell yet.” She continued trying to be as detached and calm as possible, but it was difficult. If it were anyone but her own child… She banished the thought. “We’ve got to get him to Medical now,” she told the guards. Alicia left for Medical to inform them of Stuart’s imminent arrival.

“It landed right on his back,” Devon said. “I tried, but I couldn’t get to him in time. I-I didn’t know it would—”

“That doesn’t matter, Devon, we have to help him now.” Jessica looked around and spotted some nearby decorative lilies-of-the-valley, and, pointing to them, said, “I need one of those leaves.”

Devon dashed over and started breaking off one of the wide leaves, and Ellis raced over to help and soon had gnawed through the stem. Devon brought over the makeshift litter, and Jessica, Timothy and Lucy quickly but carefully moved Stuart onto it.

“Let me help carry him up,” came a voice over Jessica’s shoulder. She looked up. It was Morobphra, one of the Rusay guests. “You helped my child the other day, let me do this for yours.”

She thought of the incident, a whole week ago, when she’d tended to Tisphi’s sprained toe. Though Stuart’s injury looked to be far more serious, she still gratefully acknowledged Morobphra’s own gratitude.

In seconds, Devon and Morobphra had picked up the leaf on either side, taking care not to jog Stuart too much, and were heading straight for the medical unit’s outside accessway, with Jessica and Shirley following at their heels. Behind them, the others, still shaken, moved on to the Rat colony’s main entrance.

“I-I thought it was working,” said Lucy, wiping away a tear. “But the storm’s still here. Why didn’t it work?”

“I wish I knew,” said Ellis, on the verge of tears himself. “Who knows why any of this is happening?” The storm had abated only slightly, with stronger-than-usual winds still predominating, though the rain was still short of the expected downpour. Everyone agreed that conditions were still serious enough to warrant having everyone taking shelter.

“The exception…” Timothy said distantly. “Stuart was it. He must have been.”

“You mean,” ventured Boris, “to this situation turning out positive?”

Timothy nodded. “I don’t know what this’ll ultimately mean for him, but…”

“But we shouldn’t be thinking that way now,” finished Ellis. “We’ve got to keep telling ourselves Stu will be all right.”

“He’s right,” added Lucy. “We have to put all our love and support behind Stu, and Jessie, and all of them.”

“She’s right,” agreed Seelah. “They need all of us.”

Everyone was silent up to the main entrance; then Ellis said almost off-handedly, “I was just starting to look for Lilia when we all had to get moving. I hope she found her own way back from wherever she was.”

“I don’t think we need worry, Ellis,” assured Boris. “She can take care of herself.” They all filed inside.

Miles away, several nutmeats were laid out on a flat, slightly concave stone surface. The one seated before it concentrated, gestured, and the stone glowed red, seeming to generate its own heat. The nutmeats danced and jumped. After a minute or so, he gestured again and the rock cooled. He carefully picked up one of the freshly-roasted treats and placed it in his mouth, chewing it carefully, savoring the flavor. No doubt, Nicodemus thought, Gwinthrayle was right about the best way to serve sessvits: roasted straight, with no oil. He’d developed quite a fondness for them while a guest at the sorcerer’s abode, and wondered half-seriously if this fondness would be passed on to Rollo. Certainly, by that time, he would be a much better-fed mouse than he was at the beginning. Even just the two-week period will have made a noticeable difference.

As he finished his sessvits, he mused on how easily he could allow himself such thoughts lately. Certainly their meeting “within” two days ago had done much to influence the shift in his thinking. He got to his feet and looked around at the forest clearing he’d camped in since last night. It was a beautiful and tranquil setting in which to reflect and meditate; but now, he knew, the time had come. He longed to be in the company of his fellows again. Though he hadn’t accomplished quite all he’d hoped on this sabbatical, it was probably all he should have reasonably expected, at least with regard to his personal dilemma. As to those concerning what his friends were experiencing in Freethorn, it still seemed as if some force were blocking his attempts to probe deeper into this world’s very life-essence, certain as he was that that was where the truth lay. Even in those mystical “hot spots” that he’d investigated, it was no easier. He’d revisited Gwinthrayle’s home as well, but found him to not be at home. He’d found the note Gwinthrayle had left, addressed to his fellow sorcerer Birantha and to Nicodemus directly as well, as if he’d expected him to return soon. It stated that he was off on his own investigation into that site of such mysterious devastation halfway around the world.

His thoughts returned to those he’d left, one in particular; then, suddenly, he was struck by a peculiar sense of foreboding, intense enough to make him wince as if from a sudden headache. Something was definitely wrong, a disturbance of some kind not especially far away. Acting on a hunch, he reached into his satchel and produced an egg-shaped jewel—the portable version of the orb of disclosure Gwinthrayle had given to him—and tossed it in the air. It expanded and hung suspended in midair. Nicodemus gestured, and the images that appeared on the orb’s face were enough to confirm his suspicions. He returned the orb to its miniature form and prepared to leave. Another odd feeling came upon him, one of déjà vu, as if he’d experienced a similar turn of events very recently. Just since he’d left Freethorn? How could that be? He was well aware of how Uhrstegg and his tampering was responsible for his forgetting so many specific things, but that was in the old days, in his old body. No, this was nothing to be concerned with, not with more important matters calling for his attention.

He concentrated, floated upward, and began moving swiftly forward in a northwest direction. Toward Freethorn.

In the corridor outside the medical ward, the small group of mice and rats sat together, hardly speaking, expressions anxious, impatient. Some forced smiles, trying to show encouragement and consolation.

“I think,” ventured Kimball, “that perhaps we’ve taken for granted that nothing like this could happen here, that no matter how much a paradise this world seems, accidents can still happen.”

“I guess we should consider this a wake-up call,” said Marie.

“But it was just an accident, though, wasn’t it?” said Teelo. “Just like what happened to Lou over two years ago.”

“And I came out of that a little worse for wear, but in one piece,” agreed Louann. “Stuart can come out of this too.”

“You hear that, Shirley?” said Lucy. “We just have to think positive.”

“I know.” Shirley managed a smile, further buoyed by the presence of siblings and cousins and friends.

“Why’s it taking so long?” said Clifford plaintively.

“Mom knows what she’s doing, and the others, too,” answered Shirley. “We just have to be patient.”

Justin and Isabella entered the hall. “Hello, everyone,” greeted Justin. “I take it there’s been no word yet.”

“Not yet, Justin,” replied Kimball.

“We can’t stay too long,” said Isabella. “We need to get back to the meeting soon, but we wanted to let you know our best wishes and prayers are with you.”

“If there’s anything at all we can do for Stuart, just name it.”

Kimball and Patricia thanked them for their support. After chatting for two minutes, the two rats left, just as three more entered the hall. It was Devon, his wife Valeria, and a younger one who was their nephew—one whose presence here was a bit of a surprise for those mice who recognized him. Two of them, Cynthia and Bertie, exchanged knowing looks, each sensing the words on the tips of each other’s tongues: Why should he care? Is he here to gloat? But then they saw how Herbert appeared as genuinely concerned as his aunt and uncle. Since his father, Jemial, worked here and was tending to Stuart along with Jessica and Bernadette, he certainly had every right to be here. Given all that, all who were aware of his recent reputation decided to give him the benefit of the doubt.

Devon and Valeria gave their best wishes for Stuart’s recovery, then Devon added: “I wish I could have been…just a little faster out there, then none of this would have happened.”

Patricia approached him, taking his hand. “Devon, you were so brave out there, and you did your best. You placed yourself at risk of being hurt yourself, and I know Stuart’s aware of it.” Shirley, Clifford, and Diane had all come forward too to give Devon a group hug as he crouched, each thanking him for his efforts. Herbert, sitting with his little sister Nora, was silent but still appeared genuinely respectful.

The door to the ward opened, galvanizing everyone’s attention. Jessica and Bernadette stood there silently for a moment, and everyone knew the news wasn’t good. “We’ve…examined Stuart, run all the tests we could…” began Bernadette.

“Is Stu gonna be okay?” Clifford blurted. “Is he—”

“Shhh! Let her talk,” whispered Shirley.

“We found that, because the limb fell directly on Stuart’s back, that it did…much damage to his spine and spinal cord,” reported Bernadette.

“We’re not sure…if he’ll ever walk again.” Jessica’s calm façade was clearly starting to crumble.

All looked to each other silently, faces registering shock, frustration, sympathy. “Is he…in any pain?” ventured Patricia.

“He hasn’t complained too much,” said Bernadette, “but the plain, unvarnished truth is…we don’t know how bad it is.”

“To think of him…not being able to walk again,” mused Kimball. “I’ve not complained too much about my situation, but to not be able to walk at all…” He shook his head sadly.

Jessica sat between him and Patricia. “He was always so…hard to please,” she said, voice quavering. “Coming here was so good for him, meeting all his little cousins, making new friends…”

“He still has them, Jessie,” said Kimball. “I know it won’t be the same for all of us, but—

“Stop it!” shouted Shirley, already out of her seat, standing in front of her mother and grandparents, making them jump. “Stop talking about him like he’s…like he’s dead! He’s gonna get better, you’ll see! I’ll prove it! We…we’ll both prove it!”

“Shirley, sweetie, we didn’t mean—” But Shirley barely heard Jessica, having dashed through the open door of the ward before Bernadette could grab her. Clifford and Diane started to follow.

“Hold it, you two,” said Bernadette as she blocked their path.

“It’s all right, Bernie. I think we should all be with him now.” Jessica followed her two youngest into the room, leaving in her wake lingering shock over the force of Shirley’s anger, some pity; but also speculation. Did she sincerely believe in what she said? Did she know something about Stuart’s condition her mother and her colleagues didn’t?

Inside, those colleagues, having heard the commotion, were starting to ponder that very question after Jessica asked them to leave her family to themselves for a while. Shirley had gone straight to her twin’s bedside and was talking to him quietly while holding his hand, and now her mother and siblings joined her. Stuart lay with eyes open and was clearly awake but barely responded to Shirley’s words at first.

“Stu, I know you can hear me. If we really do have this ‘sibling power,’ then we can use it to make you better. I know we can! We just have to believe it’s true.”

Jessica hardly knew what to say. Of course she wanted fervently to believe the same, but how could it possibly work, since she and Ages and Bernadette had examined him carefully, and found his injuries to be very real and very serious?

“You’re going to get better, Stuart,” Shirley said, voice quavering but with conviction. She looked at Jessica. “Mom, I’m sorry I yelled at you and everyone out there. But I just…I just knew, I can’t explain it.” She returned attentions to Stuart, resuming her entreaties.

Stuart responded more noticeably, looking directly at her as if ready to believe as she did. “Yes,” he said weakly. “I—ow—will get better.” He was clearly in more pain than he’d been letting on.

Jessica bit her lip, fighting the urge to break down. “Yes, Stuart. You—you will get better.” She looked at Clifford and Diane, sitting on the bed beside Stuart, and silently urged them to say likewise. They did.

For another minute, they all tried their utmost to believe what they were saying, their words becoming almost a litany. Then Clifford stopped as if distracted.

“Cliffy? What is it?” Jessica said.

“Mom? You said that Stu’s spine got hurt so bad that he couldn’t walk, didn’t you?”

“Yes.”

“What about his tail? Can he move that?”

They all looked toward the lower part of Stuart’s body. As one, their eyes grew wide.

In the hall, conversation was subdued, with all present sensing that all they could really do was to wait.

“Mom? Do you think he’s gonna be okay?” asked Quentin.

“I wish I could say for sure, honey,” replied Bernadette.

“I didn’t think anything could hurt him, after what they did last night.”

“But you heard what Shirley said,” reminded Nora. “She sounded just like she and Stu did last night, like they knew just what they could do, and they did it. I think Stu will recover, just like you turned out not to have been blinded by the snake…which wasn’t a real snake.”

“I hope so,” said Herbert, finally breaking his silence. Without looking up, he added, “I know what you’re all thinking. Why should I care? Even though I already said I was sorry about those things I said, I still get…looks. Everybody still wants to believe what he wants about me.”

“Herb, come on,” said Jemial, sitting beside him. “Remember what I told you about giving the benefit of the doubt? Your mother and I believe you, and I’ll bet most everyone else does too. If there are still doubters, don’t worry about them. You just let your deeds speak for you.”

“I believe you, Herb,” said Nora, sitting closer to her big brother, leaning on his arm. Many of the others, rats and mice alike, pledged the same, and Herbert seemed encouraged.

As the others continued their vigil, Ages took Bernadette aside, near the door to the ward. “I didn’t want them to hear this, but I’m certain Stuart is more badly hurt than we’ve been telling them. He’s sure to have more internal injuries than what we can determine.”

“I know. It’s so frustrating that we can’t do more, but we just don’t have the facilities here. All we can do is just to make him as comfortable as possible.”

“It’s at times like these I wish we could make a deal with the humans. With their medical technology, we—”

A sudden uproar from the ward interrupted Ages. He and Bernadette exchanged uneasy looks. “Oh, lord, don’t tell me,” she said as the others fell silent, all hearing the cries of…despair? Joy? Having every reason to believe the worst, Bernadette and Ages urged everyone to stay calm while they investigated. They entered the ward…and instantly stopped cold at the sight before them.

Justin and Isabella entered the assembly hall, filled with the majority of Freethorn’s citizenry plus visitors. The steady hum of conversation quieted as they walked to the dais at the center of the room. They looked over to their children and Isabella’s parents seated nearby, and gave their update on Stuart’s condition, though there was little to report at present. They encouraged everyone to extend their best wishes to him and his family.

“This day,” Justin went on, “started out with a greater sense of optimism than we’d had since this crisis began. We’d all heard about Stuart and Shirley and what they’d done last night. It seemed to prove once and for all that those anomalies were just illusions. It was Tallus who first suggested that whatever their origin, their purpose was to scare us, since no one was really hurt by them. Our young friends, with their newfound ability, proved it definitively, even after it looked as if one of their friends was injured.

“And today, less than an hour ago, came this anomaly of a different kind, this storm which those most familiar with this world have termed ‘freak’ or ‘unnatural.’ An anomaly it may be, but one that’s turned out to be all too real. And now one of us is lying in a bed in the ward because of it. It’s been a difficult day, but it’s far from over. We’re continuing to monitor the situation outside to see what develops.”

“And then what, Justin?” It was Clayton, Isabella’s older brother, who now stood. “At the end of the day, what’ll we do if this ‘freak’ storm is still going on?”

“It is just a storm, Clayton,” said Willis. “Sure, it’s unusual for these parts, but this is something that’s recognizable and easier to understand, unlike those weird illusions.”

“And what about those?” asked Quincy, one of Jolene’s sons. “We still don’t know what those were about.”

“They were sent to scare us, like Tallus said,” reminded Melvin. “To test our resolve.”

“Well, no disrespect to Tallus or anyone else, but that’s just theory. It still doesn’t tell us who or what’s behind them.”

“Or behind the storm,” added Clayton. “Why did that come on the heels of those illusions? Is it just coincidence? I don’t think so.”

Many small discussions were touched off throughout the hall. After Justin and the other elders called for order, he said, “Now, it’s true we have nothing definite to go on yet. Nothing or no one has come forward and said, ‘I’m the cause, and I’m doing this because, et cetera.’ But many of us believe there are unseen forces in this world that are responsible for much of the strange phenomena that have been seen and heard.”

“And felt as well,” added Simone. “Those who have given birth since our arrival here have all reported a similar feeling while nursing: a sense of being connected more closely to this world. Many of us, myself included, have had dreams that gave us a similar sense of our being welcomed here.”

“That’s right,” added her oldest son Vernon. “And then there was that strange fog that rolled in last week. All of us who were out there got that same kind of impression, like it was a living thing greeting us and making us feel welcome. Back home, I was putting my daughter Sandra to bed and she said she felt like she was truly home, even though this was the only home she’d ever known. Her mother and I admitted to the same kind of feeling.”

“That’s all well and good,” said Clayton, “but if these ‘forces’ are responsible, why would they make us feel welcome one day and then make like they want to kick us out the next?”

More discussions arose, and then Tallus made ready to address the crowd. “I believe that if some intelligence is behind all this, and has a plan or agenda for us, then these two seemingly contradictory aspects may both be integral parts of that plan. It may sound preposterous, but think of it. This ‘presence,’ shall we say, welcomes us at first. But perhaps…it decides, for whatever reason, that we need to be tested. Seeing how willing we are to make our home here, it wants to see how willing we are to keep it. It sends us these very real-seeming monstrosities, seemingly lifted from our darkest nightmares, to see how we react. Will we regard them with fear or curiosity? Will we take them as a sign that we should leave, be driven off, even back to Earth? Or that they are nothing more than a scare tactic, something to test our resolve in continuing to make our home here?”

Again there were many small discussions, and those who’d been listening silently, such as Johnathan Brisby and his family, could sense a renewed sense of optimism throughout the hall. There were, however, still points to be argued.

Clayton stood again, and after the crowd quieted, he said: “All right, so maybe this entity, this unseen force, was testing us with those anomaly-creatures. But what about the storm? Is that just as unreal, something we can just will away too? After what happened to Stuart, how could it be? The poor kid got his back broken by a falling limb! Nothing unreal there that I can see.”

“And the latest word that I’ve received is that it’s still going on,” added Justin. “If we’re to come to any sort of conclusion about why it’s here—if it’s not a natural storm—then I think we should make it pretty soon.”

“Then let’s review what we’ve seen so far,” said Tallus. “This storm has had all the earmarks of a rain- and thunderstorm which, while unusually strong for this area, is essentially an ordinary one. That is, we don’t have green clouds that spew apples or fishes.” There was some laughter, then he went on: “Now, suppose that in spite of its mundane appearance, that this storm still may be here for a purpose.”

“You mean,” offered Simone, “that it could have been sent by this same ‘presence,’ but still be the real thing, and still be part of some test?”

“Precisely. It’s all conjecture, of course, but of one thing I am certain: as Clayton said, this storm’s sudden appearance cannot be coincidental.”

During Tallus’s statement, Johnathan turned to Timothy and said quietly, “I think that’s your cue.” Timothy nodded and stepped forward, a tad nervous but determined. He indicated to Tallus that he wished to speak next. The entire hall grew almost completely silent, testament to Timothy’s reputation and the high regard everyone held for his intuitive abilities. Many were anxious to hear his take on this latest crisis.

Clearing his throat, he began. “When the storm first hit, I felt that it wasn’t much of a crisis, that it wasn’t much to worry about, except…for one of us, though I couldn’t tell who it would be or the kind of trouble he’d be in. Unfortunately, my ability doesn’t work that precisely. Anyway…” He sighed. “It turned out to be Stuart, but…even given what happened to him, I’m certain there’s more to this than meets the eye. When he and Shirley first got the idea that they could deal with this storm, it was with as much conviction as it was last night, when they faced down that anomaly-creature. They believed with every fiber of their being that they could do it. And I believe they could have succeeded all the way, because their efforts did seem to have an effect. All of us there saw the clouds begin to change color, and the wind and rain start to diminish. This could have been just coincidence, but…suppose, just suppose that they were starting to make a dent. Suppose that even when the limb fell, that even that was something which…how do I put this…could have been willed away, made harmless, if…they believed it couldn’t hurt them?”

More discussion ensued, now tinged with much disbelief. Even his parents, with whom he hadn’t discussed his ideas in detail beforehand, were dumbfounded. But he stood firm, fully expecting this reaction and prepared to see his theory stand or fall.

“That’s a pretty wild theory, Tim,” said Justin, “But how do you suggest we put it to the test?”

Timothy seemed preoccupied for a moment, then answered, “I’m not sure, but…now I’m getting the feeling that…something, some new development is close at hand.”

“And…the outcome?” Justin ventured.

Before Timothy could reply, two mice burst into the hall, capturing everyone’s attention. Seeing Timothy, they made a beeline for him.

“Tim, Daddy, everyone,” began Cynthia, almost out of breath, “wait’ll you see, it’s…just fantastic!”

“They’ll be here in a second,” added Lucy. “You won’t believe it!”

Before anyone could ask who they referred to, in came Jessica, followed by a small group of mostly mice. She strode in boldly, confidently, not at all as a bearer of bad tidings. “Everyone,” she began, “I think I’ve just seen the closest thing to a miracle that—”

A younger mouse dashed past her, performed a cartwheel and a jumping handstand; then, once fully upright, raised his arms triumphantly before the crowd and shouted, “I’m baaaaaack!”

Some had already recognized him but now all gasped as one. It was Stuart. Gasps gave away to applause and cheers as he happily soaked them all in.

He always did love making a grand entrance, Jessica thought as she wiped away a tear.

Chapter 37 - Storms pass

Astounding, thought Nicodemus as his flight over the Great Red Plain brought Freethorn ever closer into view. The bank of storm clouds appeared to hang exclusively over the displaced patch of land, barely extending any further beyond its perimeter. Most unnatural, he concluded, certain that his friends had reached the same conclusion. But why is it there? He concentrated as he drew in closer, determined to trace the source of this new disturbance. Soon his flight brought him under the cloud cover as the interior of Freethorn came into view. The wind, stronger and gustier than what he’d encountered just outside the cloud cover, instantly buffeted him, breaking his concentration momentarily but lending greater credence to this being an unnatural condition.

“You have caused enough worry and fear,” he shouted. “Let the truth be revealed now! Show yourself!”

Instantly he felt drawn to an area on Freethorn’s southwest side; but as he made for it, he sensed that he wouldn’t find the actual source of the disturbance there. Were his efforts being blocked again? Yet there was something there, something which may prove to be at the center of the disturbance, if not its actual source. Like a moth to a flame, he felt drawn closer and closer to a very specific spot. He brought himself down all the way. Once on solid ground, he cautiously approached the spot on foot. It was a rocky outcropping just beyond one of the garden areas where tomatoes and celery were grown. He’d seen it already and was aware of its nooks and crannies and hidden tunnels, and began exploring them.

His search had barely begun when he saw her, huddled with knees drawn up, wrapped in a wine-red cloak, nestled under a ledge within the boulders, completely sheltered from the wind and rain, identity confirmed by the one foot that Nicodemus could see with its pure white fur. “Lilia?” There was no immediate response. Drawing up close, he could now see her eyes were closed, but she appeared more to be concentrating very intently rather than just resting. Crouching beside her, he spoke her name again and for a moment still got no response; then she gave a small start but didn’t open her eyes. Was that in reaction to his voice or to something else? Somehow, at that moment, the latter seemed more likely.

He gently touched her arm, covered by the cloak, and her eyes came open. “Nicodemus…hello,” she said, not at all startled by his appearance.

“Hello yourself, Lilia,” he said good-naturedly, concealing his own puzzlement. “What are you doing ’way out here?”

“It was…the nearest place I could find shelter when the weather starting getting bad. Did you just get back from your trip?”

“Yes, I did. And I’ll tell you and everyone else all about it…after we return home.” Momentarily, he wondered: how could she be involved with the storm’s appearance? Is she really at the center of the disturbance, as his own sensitivities led him to believe, or is it something else at this spot? Were his efforts being blocked, or perhaps some form of deception was at work? No, he was certain, there is definitely something else at work here, and Lilia was at its center. Perhaps, though, it would be best not to try probing further at this time. “Come, my dear, let me escort you back now.”

Lilia smiled and reached out to take his hand.

“…and then Clifford thought he saw his tail move. We all looked, and sure enough, it did. I told Stuart to wiggle his toes, and he could. Then he sat up, all at once. It surprised Clifford and Diane so much they practically fell off the bed. Then he jumped right out of bed, and we all just…shrieked, me the loudest.” Jessica felt herself blush at the admission. “We couldn’t believe what we were seeing. Shirley came over to him and didn’t say a word, just gave him a big hug.” She paused in addressing the assemblage. “Ages and Bernie came in to see what the fuss was about, and their eyes got so wide…” She couldn’t help laughing at the still-clear memory. “Everyone else came in from the hall, and we tried to explain as best we could, though there was really nothing to say. It was just like a miracle.”

Nearby, Stuart still stood before the crowd, arm-in-arm with Shirley, both of them silently basking in the moment, knowing that it was their own “sibling power” that was the true miracle, that this was what may have saved his life today.

“In all my years,” added Ages, “I never would have believed it. He showed all signs of having serious damage to his spine, certainly nothing he could walk away from, let alone leap out of bed. And yet, it was as if nothing had happened, as if he were never struck by that limb.”

“As if,” added Johnathan, “he and Shirley acknowledged that nothing had happened, no longer believed he’d been hurt.”

“And so…he wasn’t anymore.” Jessica shook her head. “And you say Timothy had some kind of theory about that?”

“Yes, and I think we’ve just had it validated.” Johnathan glanced at Timothy, who just nodded, arms folded.

“And we can check it out now, can’t we, Daddy?” asked Cynthia.

Before Johnathan could answer, Justin called for everyone’s attention again. “The latest word from outside,” he began, communicator still raised to his ear, “is that the storm is gone. Completely.”

A palpable wave of relief swept through the hall, and some started heading for the exits. “Wait, everyone,” called out Justin. “We don’t want to rush out blindly before we have a better idea of what’s going on.”

“But what else can we do, Justin?” said Tallus. “Continue to hide here? Considering all that’s happened, I don’t think we need further proof that the storm was as much a sham as the anomaly-creatures.”

“He’s right,” said Garrick, moving toward the center of the hall. “And I’ll bet Timothy is too. He knew all along that the anomalies posed no real danger. ‘We’ve all got a big future ahead of us here on Lahaikshe’—his exact words. A lot of you remember me as someone who talked of leaving the colony while we were on Earth. I was just saying to Tim the other night that some of us are homesick for Earth. But,” he continued with voice rising, “that doesn’t mean we’ll let ourselves be chased back! If any of us do want to return, it’ll be our decision, and no one else’s! Am I right?”

A collective roar of approval rose from the crowd. He continued: “We’ve been forced to uproot ourselves and run twice. Well, no more! We’ve proven we can take whatever this world can throw at us! To whatever or whomever is doing these things, I say: do your worst!”

This time the din was so loud that many were covering their ears, and most of them were shouting their agreement every bit as loudly. Garrick’s parents, Bryant and Matilda, looked on with pride and amazement. Tallus leaned over to them and said, “Who knew that grandson of mine could work a crowd like that?”

Someone else began chanting “Freethorn! Freethorn! Freethorn!” and in a matter of seconds everyone else had taken it up, again creating such a din that some half-believed the ceiling would collapse.

Presently Justin called for quiet again, then he said, “I think Garrick’s last statement sums up the prevailing attitude. I can only add to what he said by saying that hiding is just as much an option as running.”

“In other words, let’s get out of here!” someone shouted.

Everyone was in great high spirits now, though not without some bafflement, as Rats, Mice and Rusay began filing out of the chamber. Jessica made a suggestion to Johnathan, and a party was quickly organized to investigate one location in particular outside.

Once outside, everyone noticed immediately how the weather conditions had changed as drastically as reported, but there was more. It was as if they had received nothing more serious than a brief spring shower, only enough rain to moisten the rocks and leave the equivalent of morning dew on the vegetation. But that was the least of it, as one group was finding out.

“This is deeply weird,” commented Cynthia. “Not even any leaves or twigs lying around. Boy, Tim, when you’re right, you’re right.”

“Well, this time around, at least,” Timothy replied with his usual modesty.

“This should be it just ahead,” said Alicia.

“Couldn’t forget that spot if I tried,” agreed Devon.

The party of Rats, Mice and Rusay—most of whom had been here to witness the incident that had caused so much worry and anxiety, as well as the apparent victim of said incident—presently came to a stop. “This is definitely it,” said Jessica, “but where’s the limb?”

Most in the party searched the immediate area but it was nowhere in sight. The stump remaining where Ellis and Devon had removed the lily-of-the-valley leaf was there as expected, but the limb that had done such a grevious injury—or believed to have done it—was nowhere in the area, just as no other debris left in the storm’s wake could be seen anywhere.

Stuart and Shirley seemed content to just stand arm-in-arm, looking confident but not smug, watching the others scour the area.

“Could someone have taken it away somewhere?” suggested Morobphra.

“Maybe. But what would be the point?” Johnathan rubbed at his whiskers and looked up to the sky, now almost cloudless, and the nearest treetops. He shaded his eyes, studying one area in particular. “Devon, Alicia…this is the tree the limb fell from, isn’t it?”

“I believe so,” said Devon. “Because if it hit right here, it must have fallen almost straight down, since it was heavy enough.”

“Is that important?” asked Alicia.

“It is,” said Boris, “if it didn’t really fall.” He pointed to one short dead limb in particular. “I was standing right here, looking up just as it snapped in the wind. But now it’s up there, or rather, it never left.”

They all looked up to the limb. “Are you sure that’s the one?” asked Jessica.

“He’s right,” agreed Alicia. “Devon and I know these trees very well. I gave one last look up there before we left, and that limb was definitely missing before.”

Cynthia looked up and down between the limb and the ground. “Deeply weird.”

“So what really hurt Stuart?” asked Miatati.

“Nothing,” said Johnathan. “It was all the power of suggestion, just as Tim theorized. Those who saw the limb fall believed it was falling and could hurt someone on the ground. Stuart and Shirley ran from it because they believed it could hurt them.”

“And we believed Stuart was injured because we saw the limb come down on him,” added Boris.

“I don’t think we should be discussing this in such detail while Stuart’s here,” said a worried-looking Jessica to Johnathan and Boris.

“It’s okay, Mom,” said Stuart casually. “If it didn’t really happen, it didn’t happen.”

“I think he’ll be all right,” said Johnathan.

“We all will,” added Timothy. Lucy took his arm, beaming.

“So I guess what we can take from this,” concluded Johnathan, “is that all this was just a test of our resolve, to see if we could see past the illusion and not let it sway us from continuing to live here. And Stuart and Shirley…we’d been wondering what the extent of their newfound ability is, and I think we’ve just seen it.”

“You’re probably right, Johnathan,” said Jessica. “But why did…it, this ‘presence,’ have to go so far with its ‘test?’ My god, my son was lying in that bed thinking he’d been hurt so badly he’d never walk again! We all believed it ourselves. If Shirley hadn’t seen through it in time, then…who knows what…might have happened…” Jessica began choking on her words.

“Don’t cry, Mom,” said Shirley, taking her arm.

“Everything’s gonna be all right, just like Tim said,” added Stuart.

Jessica crouched, giving both a big hug. “Oh, I’m just so proud of you both,” she managed to say. “I love you so much…”

Johnathan silently suggested to the others that their work there was done, and so they left. “Well, we’d best get back to Justin and the council about this,” said Johnathan. “Though what they’ll say about this, about what we should do, I haven’t a clue.”

“Really,” said Cynthia. “Do we just go on like before, and hope nothing like this happens again?”

“What more can happen after this?” said Lucy.

“Well, maybe Nicodemus did find some answers out there,” said Johnathan. “Though I get the feeling he’d have found more right here.”

“I’d almost forgotten about him,” added Timothy, “and a couple other things as well.” Before he could elaborate, the group met up with Justin, Isabella, Ages, and Brutus, and detailed their findings.

“Amazing,” said Justin. “So all we got was a little drizzle, but we thought it was a more powerful storm just because we believed it was.”

“Because it looked like something we knew, that we could relate to, like Willis said,” added Isabella.

“And something that could cause injury,” said Ages. “But Stuart seems none the worse for his ordeal. Not only is he not injured, after four of us examined him and swore he most definitely was, but he doesn’t appear to suffer any psychological trauma either.”

“Shirley as well,” said Johnathan. “And Stuart remembers being injured, being in pain, unable to move. That’s what’s so extraordinary, that he could bounce back so thoroughly.”

“That’s definitely a powerful ability those two share,” said Brutus. “I saw it for myself last night.”

“And I’ve the feeling this isn’t the last time it’ll benefit them,” said Johnathan. “Or all of us.”

“And Tim here was right on the money,” said Justin. “I’m really starting to believe like Garrick, that whatever this world throws at us, we’ll have it figured out and beaten every time.”

“I guess so,” said Timothy. “But on a more mundane note, has anyone seen Lilia?”

“None of us have,” said Isabella, “but she’s sure to turn up soon, with everyone out and about now.”

“She wasn’t with us, up at medical,” said Lucy, “and she wasn’t at the meeting hall either, was she? I gotta say, I’m starting to worry a bit…even if our wise one here isn’t.”

Timothy nodded, then turned to Boris and said something privately. Boris then described the vision he’d had just before the “storm” hit and the strong effect it had upon him. “I wish it hadn’t been so vague,” said Boris afterward, “but it hit me so hard I was sure it had to mean something. I’m sorry I didn’t bring it up at the meeting, but between trying to work out what it all meant and worrying about Stuart, well…”

“That doesn’t matter now, Boris,” said Justin, “but you were right not to keep it to yourself, with all else that’s happened. We can’t just dismiss any kind of hunch or dream or premonition anyone has anymore.”

“I wonder if Nicodemus has learned anything that might give him a special insight into Boris’s vision.”

“Let’s ask him ourselves, Johnathan.”

Everyone turned to look where Brutus indicated. Coming up the trail leading from the west side was another small mixed group, and sure enough, Nicodemus was at the forefront. Among them, immediately noticeable, was Lilia, flanked by Reuben and Ellis, the three arm-in-arm. They were obviously relieved, but Lilia seemed almost nonchalant, so typical of her manner in recent days—obviously none the worse for being caught in the storm as she must have been.

“Well, everyone’s accounted for now!” said Justin, laughing, arms spread in greeting. “Welcome back, Nicodemus. And you, too, Lilia. We’re glad to see you’re all right.”

“I…I am all right, Justin. I think…all of us are now.” Justin was about to say more when she added, “And all of you…all of us…are worthy.”

All who heard this were silently bemused for a moment; then Johnathan asked good-naturedly, “Why, whatever do you mean, Lilia? Worthy of what?”

Lilia suddenly looked confused, with one hand to her face. “I don’t know, it…it just seemed like…like the thing to say. I don’t know why.”

“Whatever it means, I think you could use some rest, Lilia,” said Reuben. “After all this excitement…”

“At it again, huh, Reuben?” said Ellis, giving him a friendly nudge. “But I think you’re right, though. Come on, let’s take her home.”

After the trio left, Nicodemus resumed greetings; then he said, “Well, from what I’ve been told so far, it seems everyone here’s met with more excitement than I these past two days, with Lilia’s little adventure being the least of it.”

“We’ve got a lot to catch up on, all right,” said Justin.

“And some of it I think even you’ll find hard to swallow,” added Johnathan.

“We’ll see,” said Nicodemus as they left for the Rat community. Brutus began spreading the news of Nicodemus’s return and for the council to assemble as planned to hear his report.

Johnathan invited Timothy and Boris to the council meeting, certain that their own insights into the day’s events warranted their sitting in. On the way, both Johnathan and Timothy found themselves puzzling over Lilia’s cryptic statement, and her apparently genuine confusion over it. Later, at the meeting, father and son would find they’d asked themselves the same questions and had the same insight: under what circumstances is one found worthy or unworthy of something? When one is subject to being judged for one’s talents, for what one is capable of, when one might need to overcome all manner of obstacles or hardships to determine what one can endure.

To put it another way: a test of one’s resolve.

Jessica had taken the rest of the day off to spend with her children. Together they’d gone swimming in Lake Nicodemus, helped with some gardenwork, spent time lazily soaking up sunshine and just talking, sat and watched Patricia as she worked on her painting. She’d watched as they played games with other youngsters, occasionally allowing the luxury of joining in herself, something she resolved to do more often. Throughout it all, she couldn’t stop marveling at how utterly unaffected her two oldest seemed by all they’d been through such a short time ago. Even all this, though, couldn’t banish from her mind the other matter of great concern in recent days, especially after watching her mother work on her art, considering her painting’s subject. Certainly she was curious to learn what Nicodemus may have learned out there, but thought it best to allow him to approach her. When she’d heard he’d returned, she’d decided right then that the next move would be his. She was resigned to the very strong possibility that he hadn’t changed his mind; and yet, there was a chance… Whatever would happen, she wouldn’t go out of her way to avoid him, though she wouldn’t purposely seek him out, either.

That next move came in late afternoon. Jessica and family were just returning to the colonies when Nicodemus approached them. Stuart greeted him most enthusiastically, giving him a big hug and talking excitedly about their adventures while he was gone.

“Yes, yes, I’ve heard much about your escapades. I do regret that I wasn’t here to see you and Shirley truly come into your own as you have, even though getting there was quite a frightening experience for both of you and many others.”

“It was scary,” agreed Shirley. “But we’re okay now, so it doesn’t matter so much.”

“I think it may take your mother a while to agree completely, but that’s only because she loves you so very much.”

Jessica nodded her agreement. “Yes. Welcome back, Nicodemus.” As she took his hand and looked into his eyes, she wondered for a moment if there was a sign of something more, a subtext to his words. She laid aside the thought and said, “I heard that you couldn’t find out too much on your trip. That’s too bad.”

“Well, I did say I wished I’d been there for the children. But it wasn’t a wasted trip by any means. I had much time to ponder and consider the best use of my remaining time.”

Again Jessica wondered if she weren’t reading more into his words and expressions than was actually there. Impulsively, she said, “Children…I would like to spend some time with Nicodemus, just the two of us.”

Clifford and Diane expressed disappointment, but Shirley took their hands and said, “Come on, it’s just grown-up stuff. It’d be boring for us.”

“Let’s go back to the cove,” suggested Stuart. “I’ll bet Torrance and Hazel are still there.”

“Have fun,” said Jessica, waving goodbye. “I love you.”

The children started off, but as soon as Jessica turned away, Stuart gave Nicodemus a thumbs-up and a look of great enthusiasm. Nicodemus hid his surprise from Jessica as they walked off together toward the Mouse community.

“It seems so much more important now to say that every chance I get,” she said. “Especially to Stuart.”

“It’s hard even for me to believe, how just hours ago, he may have been at death’s door, but this ‘sibling power’ of theirs…just astounding, to think that it could foil this strange force that caused you all so much anxiety. And all apparently originating solely from them, an entirely natural ability…like your own talents.”

Again there was something in his words, his eyes… Jessica asked him if he’d mind going someplace more private, so they moved on to his own quarters.

“The last time I was here,” he began as they sat down together on her sofa, “our conversation was filled with so much regret and anguish; but, thankfully, no blame or recrimination. We both took responsibility.”

“And now? Do you still feel as before?”

Looking at her directly, Nicodemus said, “As I said, I had much time to consider how to spend my remaining time. And…” He breathed in deep. “Whatever else happens, I would like—if you would still have me—to spend as much of that time as possible with you.”

Barely had he gotten the words out before Jessica rushed to embrace him. “Oh, Nicodemus, of course I want to be with you!” She drew back and stroked his cheek and ear, then brought her lips to his, lightly at first, then with quickly increasing passion.

After almost a minute they broke it off and gazed upon each other for another moment, brief but magical for them both. “Ah…the kiss,” Nicodemus said. “Humans regard it very highly as a sign of affection, do they not?”

“We all learned it from watching humans where we grew up. We’ve always treated it as something never to be taken lightly, only done when there is…genuine love and affection.”

Nicodemus’s answer was to initiate it himself this time. They sighed contentedly as they kissed, holding each other silently afterward. After a minute he said, “Jessica, I’m so happy you’ve decided to accept me. I do love you, and though I know it will be all too brief…”

“I know it will, but...there’s no room for regret now. I do love you, Nicodemus. I don’t know if…what I feel will carry over to Rollo or not, but that’s for the future. Now…”

They embraced silently for another minute. “You know, Jessica, I think Stuart has suspected...us, you and me, for at least a couple of days now.”

“I’m not surprised. I’ve told him we’ve only become good friends, but…I’m sure, too, that he’s suspected. He does love sitting on secrets.”

“Indeed he does, especially considering last night. I take it he’s told you by now how he’d stayed behind the night before and witnessed my banishing one of the anomalies.”

“Yes, he did. But I think I can forgive both of you for that little white lie.”

“Thank you. Many of us, though, are still wondering, ‘What next?’ What more will this world throw at us?” They discussed the point, agreeing that the conclusion reached at the general meeting, and furthered at the recent council meeting, was the attitude everyone needed to adopt.

They spent nearly an hour talking freely about many subjects, especially each one’s past experiences. But finally, a matter of more personal importance needed to be addressed: how long would they keep their new relationship a secret, even with the limit of five days?

“How about just until tomorrow morning?” Jessica suggested. They agreed it would be patently unrealistic to keep it secret for very long, so they decided to carry on as if just good friends only for the rest of the day. Arrangements had already been made for her children and many others to gather at Martin and Karen’s tonight and for them to have a sleepover there. But afterwards, they agreed, the rest of the night they hoped would be theirs to share with each other and no one else.

At the latest council meeting, it had been agreed that the post-dusk curfew would continue this night, with the Guard making their regular patrols. Many chafed at this, believing it completely superfluous in light of events in the past 24 hours, but it was agreed that, should nothing unusual happen tonight, it would be lifted tomorrow. What about Stuart and Shirley? It was nearly-unanimously agreed that, should they request it—and pending their mother’s approval—they would be allowed to accompany at least two of the Guard on their patrol. No one doubted their shared ability, and some almost hoped some new anomaly would present itself to provide yet further proof of that ability. Others, though, cautioned that they should keep this way of thinking within reasonable limits, as it sounded as if they were regarding Stuart and Shirley as test subjects, as were the O.T.’s at the NIMH lab. Yet, it was questioned, weren’t all of them treated as much the same in recent days, by some unknown entity or element native to this world? Perhaps, but they agreed that, for that reason, they should avoid regarding individual citizens of Freethorn that way.

Another citizen, Lilia, was the subject of discussion over what she may possibly know of all the recent strangeness. Johnathan had felt obliged to bring up her cryptic “worthy” statement. Perhaps she had been simply tired or confused, as Reuben or Ellis suggested; her confusion over that statement seemed genuine to all who’d heard it. There was some pity expressed for her, that with all else she’d been through lately, now something or someone else may have a hold over her and prevent her from truly being herself. Nicodemus had acknowledged that he’d been partially and inadvertently responsible for her earlier problem, but was positive that there should be no lingering effects now. It was agreed that no one question her over the matter until more was known about what, if anything, was wrong with her.

The meeting yielded one development of a more concrete, immediate nature: it was proposed that Timothy Brisby be given a seat on the council, and it met with unanimous approval. The whole process was over in a minute; and though he very readily accepted, it was with his trademark modesty. Though it wasn’t Johnathan who had nominated him, he told them how it was Timothy who had come up with some of the suggestions that he’d brought to the council in the past, and so logically it was past time that his son took his rightful place upon it.

Into the ensuing evening, hopeful attitudes continued to prevail throughout Freethorn, with most agreeing to suspend further speculation on what would come next, and take things as they come. There was surprisingly little grumbling over the continued curfew, since many were sure it would be lifted by tomorrow night.

In the Martin and Karen Brisby residence, the already-scheduled party served also to celebrate Timothy’s new status; and along with it came the hope that tonight would be the last day the curfew would need to be in effect. Everyone was in high spirits, with many continuing to express aloud the attitudes of “Bring it on!” or “Do your worst!” Some were still guardedly optimistic, believing they wouldn’t be out of the woods until they knew what was behind all the recent troubles. With Nicodemus’s return, it was generally believed, answers wouldn’t be long in coming.

There was more storytelling and games, and Timothy even repeated the entire flintarak story for Nicodemus and others, including Jessica and Stuart, who had missed all or part of it two nights before. Nicodemus and Jessica acted as planned, making all their exchanges cordial and friendly, but no more than that. All the while, though, they continued to get the impression that Stuart, and possibly Shirley as well, suspected them. Each wondered silently if they should ask them directly what they did know, but decided against it.

It was clear, though, that there were other matters on the twins’ minds; and, shortly after dusk, they asked Jessica for permission to accompany two of the Guard on patrol (as some had predicted they’d do). She was understandably reluctant, but they promised they wouldn’t stray from the Guards’ charge even though both were certain they’d be safe by themselves. It took a few minutes’ worth of cajoling before she gave in, but she made them promise to stay out no more than an hour. Soon, arrangements had been made, and Stuart and Shirley met with two of the Guard outside the Mouse colony. Jessica was certain herself of their safety but, all the same, cautioned them to be careful before they headed out into the night.

This little event provoked more discussion. Did they really expect or even hope to encounter another anomaly-creature? Many believed that, after today’s faux storm, the worst of any unnatural disturbances were over. Discussion turned to less weighty subjects, though unsurprisingly Jessica was continually distracted, frequently looking out the window until her oldest children returned. She succeeded in not making a big scene about being worried, especially when they told her it was “kind of boring, but okay” out there.

Eventually Martin and Karen’s guests began to leave, especially those who needed to get up early in the morning. Jessica said goodnight to her children before she and Nicodemus left as well—though separately, a few minutes apart.

Shortly, Jessica quietly approached Nicodemus’s door. After furtively glancing down the hall in either direction, she ever-so-quietly gave five taps upon the door in a distinctive pattern. It opened just as quietly, and she slipped inside. No one said a word until the door closed. They met in a passionate but tender embrace, still silent for nearly a minute.

“Perhaps I should turn on at least one light,” Nicodemus said. After doing so, he kissed her and added, “I confess I would have preferred that we have a private dinner for two first.”

“We’ll still have the chance for that.”

“I know. So…did any of your children believe you were trying to get rid of them for the night?”

“I don’t think so, but…”

“But you believe Stuart and Shirley may suspect us?”

“Maybe, but…what I was really going to say was…I felt like I was deceiving them, even though they initiated the idea of sleeping elsewhere. Even given that, I have to admit…it’s a bit of a thrill, with all this sneaking around.” She couldn’t resist a conspiratorial laugh.

Nicodemus raised an eyebrow. “Ah, so now that the sneaking part is finished…is the thrill gone?”

Jessica laughed again and kissed him, longer than before. “Let’s find out.”

There was a knock at the door. They looked at each other, bemused and shaking heads at someone’s marvelously bad timing. Jessica moved in back of the door before Nicodemus opened it, his eyes widening in surprise. “Why, Stuart! And Shirley! Whatever brings you here at this hour?”

“Um, well,” began Stuart, “we wondered if you’d pass along a little message.”

“I suppose so. To whom?”

“We just wanted to tell our mom,” said Shirley quite casually, “that she has nothing to worry about with us.”

“Yeah, ’cause she looked kinda worried back there.”

“So could you tell her that…”

“…And that we love her, too,” added Stuart.

“Why, that’s very thoughtful and considerate of you both, but…I’m not certain why you would charge me with this task. Now, if your mother were actually here, then perhaps I—”

“Oh, never mind,” came another voice from inside. “They obviously knew all along.” Jessica stepped into view. “Come on in, both of you.”

Once inside, they were still very unsurprised and nonchalant at this confirmation of their mother’s presence. “Now,” she said, “how did you two ever… Oh, never mind about that. That was very thoughtful of you both to check in with me.” She kissed both on the forehead. “And I wasn’t worried…not too much.”

“So,” said Nicodemus, “it was uneventful out there tonight. I hope you weren’t too disappointed.”

“No, I guess not,” Stuart said. They both shrugged in a noncommittal fashion.

“Well, sometimes no results are the best kind.”

“No news is good news, right?” said Shirley.

“So they say.”

Jessica finally had to ask, “Aren’t either of you curious about my being here?”

Again their manner was very casual as Shirley said, “We’re just glad you’re happy, Mom.”

“And you, too, Nicodemus.” Stuart yawned.

Jessica embraced them, stroking their heads, at a total loss for words for a moment. “All right then…now, will you do both of us a little favor?”

“Oh, we won’t tell anyone, Mom,” Shirley said quickly.

“Yeah, you want this kept secret, you got it,” added Stuart. “And if anyone else asks where you are, we’ll just say you wanted a little time to yourself.”

Jessica and Nicodemus looked at each other, amazed. “Well, then, there’s one more thing we’ll ask of you,” said Nicodemus. “And that’s to leave the task of telling anyone else to your mother and me.” The twins readily agreed, and so after goodnights, they were sent on their way.

Jessica shook her head after they closed the door. “I think those two have grown and matured more in the last two days than in all their four and a half years.”

“Indeed. And I’ve known them for little longer than that. Certainly this newfound shared ability of theirs is largely responsible.”

“And look at how inseparable they are! They were never this close before, but now…I guess they want to take every opportunity to test their ‘sibling power’ together.”

Nicodemus led Jessica to his bed, where they sat down. “It’ll pass, I’m sure…especially after Lula returns. She and Stuart will want some time alone. He’s definitely feeling the pangs of first love…as am I, with you.”

They sank backward, kissing and caressing each other. Suddenly Jessica said, “Wait...that was it! Their power, that’s how they knew about us.” She laughed, adding, “I wonder if there’s anything anyone can hide from them.”

“We’ve only begun to see its full effects, I’m sure. In fact, I’ve a strong hunch that their ability will be a great benefit to us in days to come. I can’t say how exactly, it’s only a hunch. But…”

“But now…tonight is ours. For this one night, at least, let us be as selfish as…selfish can be.”

They kissed ever more passionately, pressing bodies closer, wanting nothing more than to be able to lose themselves in each other and forget that this may be the only night like this they would have.

Elsewhere in the Mouse colony, a smaller gathering was preparing its own goodnights. They had gathered mostly on Lilia’s behalf since she said she didn’t feel up to going to Martin and Karen’s tonight, and they thought she shouldn’t be alone. The whole time, none had directly addressed Lilia’s unusual behavior of late or her “worthy” declaration. Everyone agreed it would be best to just treat this as a casual gathering. Lilia, however, seemed quite normal all night; occasionally adding to the conversation, sticking close to Ellis, sometimes displaying affection toward him, giving every indication that she welcomed the company and genuinely wanted to be there. Eventually, she excused herself to go to bed before the others.

Presently Boris and Seelah prepared to follow her example, standing and stretching. As they excused themselves, Ellis couldn’t help thinking something had been bothering Boris all night. Obviously, this morning’s vision—if it could be called that—had affected his mood, though he made no mention of it directly all night, nor had anyone else. Apparently, he was still trying to make sense of it himself.

Bertie was quicker to voice his own observations. “I guess they were in a hurry to, you know, get back to it,” he said with a wink. “Though it almost looked like Boris wasn’t so enthusiastic.”

“Down, boy,” said Ellis with a grin. Both were aware of Boris and Seelah’s recent efforts to become pregnant. Presently, Reuben returned from the “big” party, and shortly after Bertie left as well. Discussion continued, quietly so as not to disturb Lilia.

She, however, had been lying awake for the past 20 minutes, her thoughts diffuse, fleeting, but with a sense that she was waiting for something. And suddenly, it came, causing her to sit bolt upright, gasping. It was very much like a moment of clarity, of sudden realization; and, more troubling, as if something or someone were allowing her a moment of freedom, but only a moment. She lay back down. Hearing the voices of her friends and loved ones in the next room, she wanted to call them in and tell them of this. But what would she say? How could she describe it to them? She thought back to just before “the moment,” when it seemed as if something else were guiding her thoughts, or lack of same. She thought further back to being out there in the front room, sitting next to Ellis, listening to discussion of the extraordinary events of this day, occasionally adding to it; and exchanging endearments with him, including that last one before she went to lie down. All of it, she felt now, was a sham, a lie, only going through the motions; in fact, much of what she’d done and said over the past few days she now felt was not entirely of her own volition. She hadn’t been oblivious to what they had been saying, that she’d seemed detached and preoccupied in her manner lately, ever since the trip to Gwinthrayle’s and…the encounter with the min’hathio. That…presence, whatever one would call it, that had reassured and comforted her…it must have stayed with her! It was in charge of her, guiding her actions now, like a puppet on strings! But it seemed to offer only kindness before, so it must mean well now, shouldn’t it? But this can’t be right, can it? It’s not letting her be her own person, with her own thoughts, her own feelings! It can’t be right, it just can’t!

“No!” she cried out loud, again sitting upright, then covering her mouth.

In the next room, conversation halted. Reuben and Ellis got to their feet and rushed to the doorway, but not all the way inside yet. “Lilia? Are you all right?” asked Ellis.

“We heard you cry out,” added Reuben. “Can we come in?”

“Uhm…that’s…yes, it’s all right, come in.”

Lilia’s brother and beau found her just lying on her side. “Was it a bad dream?” Ellis asked.

“Mm…I guess so, yes. I…barely remember it, like somebody chasing me or something silly like that.” She gave a small laugh and yawned.

After the three exchanged words of comfort and reassurance, she was again left alone and now felt genuinely sleepy. As she started to slip under, a fleeting thought came: that perhaps she shouldn’t have deceived them as she did. After all, there was no bad dream, only…something. What was it again? She yawned again. It couldn’t be anything too important, not more than her getting her sleep. No, nothing to be overly concerned with, not when there’s so much to prepare for in the days ahead. Five minutes later she was sound asleep.

Chapter 38 - A strange malady

Jessica awoke, sighing as she immediately recalled the night just past. The sigh became a yawn as she turned her head to look upon the one with whom she’d spent the night, sharing herself so completely, each one fulfilling the other’s needs and desires, more than either thought possible. But he wasn’t lying beside her. Instead, he was sitting at the edge of the bed, apparently lost in thought. Jessica reached out to clasp his hand.

He turned to her, smiling, and helped her upright. “Ah, Jessica, my lovely. I swear, you are love personified.”

They embraced silently for a minute. Then she said, “It’s probably a bit later than my usual time to rise, isn’t it?”

“Yes, I believe so.”

Jessica looked at him squarely. “There’s…nothing troubling you, is there?”

“About you and me…no. Last night was all I could have hoped for, and more. And all the strange events of yesterday, for which I arrived late…in spite of all that is yet unexplained, I feel no sense that they portend any further danger.”

“But…there is something, isn’t it? Is it Boris’s vision?”

“Yes, it seems so. Though he could not even describe it as a vision in the usual sense, the overwhelming sense of dread and impending destruction he described, combined with your own description of his outward reaction, have left a lingering sense of unease within me as well. Though it hasn’t been enough to distract me from pleasing you.” Nicodemus stroked Jessica’s face and kissed her.

Again they shared a silent embrace, and then Jessica said, “I hadn’t thought much about that—Boris’s vision—after everything else. But now I’m wondering: what does it mean? His visions always seemed to have a specific meaning in the past. That one he had just before you first arrived here accurately described Rollo and you, or that part of you, meeting inside Rollo’s mind.”

“I guess what troubles me about this new one is that…I can’t help feeling there’s an association with…a feeling I had shortly before I began my journey back here. I dismissed it at the time, but…I had a sense of déjà vu, of being reminded of an experience that I’d since forgotten, with brief flashes of it surfacing.”

“Maybe it is just déjà vu. We’ve all experienced it.”

“On one hand I hope it is. But on the other...could this entity, this ‘presence’ be tampering with my memory? I am positive that it has been blocking my efforts to investigate more deeply into recent mysteries. And if it could create such as those anomaly-creatures, or a storm that was real only for those who believed in it, then who can say what else it’s capable of? Yet, I can’t help but hope as many others do: that we were being tested, and now we’ve passed.”

“I believe that, too. But do you really think we might still be in some kind of danger?”

“Even now, thinking about Boris’s vision, with his talk of everything having its life drawn out and crumbling into dust, still resonates within me; as if I’d witnessed such a thing for myself. Perhaps it is only a trick of the subconscious, but…oh, I cannot state unequivocally that danger yet looms, and it troubles me that I can’t. I still feel responsible, Jessica; for everyone here. I am truly thankful that for one night, at least, we were able to forget our troubles, lose ourselves in joyous lovemaking. But now…”

“I understand. We all need to…do what we must. And right now, I think we need to get some breakfast, and then let everyone who wants to know, know that you and I…intend to keep very close company in the next few days.”

They stepped off the bed, stretched limbs, and embraced. As they dressed, they agreed they should leave together and not be concerned with who might see them, so they did so.

As planned, they rendezvoused with her children at their family quarters, where they received an unexpectedly congratulatory welcome. Nicodemus especially was surprised that the children would be so enthusiastic about their mother taking him as a temporary mate; although in an earlier conversation, she had told him that, though they still missed their father Harley very much, they were very receptive to the idea of their mother finding someone to take his place. Diane even asked him if he was like their “daddy” now. Nicodemus replied that he liked to consider himself as a father to everyone here, but that she and her siblings were welcome to think of him that way. They went to breakfast together.

Tallus descended the beech trunk via the spiral staircase. Back on ground level, he paused to again admire his grandchildren’s handiwork, as relieved as they that there had been no real damage incurred yesterday.

He looked back down to see Justin and his family approach. They chatted about the treehouse’s progress and other things, such as the lack of any more bizarre occurrences for almost an entire day, and how Nicodemus had said he’d try out different approaches in his investigation.

“No one I’ve spoken to has seen him yet this morning,” said Tallus. “Evidently he had a busy night.”

“Well, however he spent it, I’ll be looking forward to some definite answers,” said Justin. “Even if we don’t get any more sudden storms or flaming snakes.”

“You can ask him right now, Justin,” said Isabella, pointing. They all looked to see a small group of mice approach, already attracting curious looks from passersby.

“That’s Miss Jessie,” said Mina from her perch atop her father’s shoulders.

“Indeed,” said Tallus, shading his eyes.

Nicodemus strode toward them arm-in-arm with Jessica, with her children flanking them. The group looked for all the world like a real family, with the two adults looking at each other with obvious affection and the children all smiling and beaming with pride.

Justin greeted all six mice by name. “Now,” he added, “I can tell there’s something you’d all like to share.”

“Oh, yes,” said Nicodemus. “Jessica and I have…found ourselves to be very much in love, and have decided to keep close company until the time…of my departure.”

None knew quite what to say right away. Then Isabella said, “Well, our congratulations to you both. And we’re glad to see the children approve of it, too. It’s just too bad that…you don’t have more…I mean…” She looked embarrassed. “I’m sorry, that didn’t come out right.”

“Be at ease, my dear,” said Nicodemus consolingly. “We have already worked through the less pleasant aspects of this matter, and have decided that our feelings for each other can overcome them.”

“He’ll be our daddy for a little while,” said Clifford proudly.

Justin, Tallus and others who’d listened in offered their best wishes; and after Nicodemus reported having no further luck in solving recent mysteries, he and his adopted family moved on, obviously prepared to have the foregoing scene repeated. Justin and Isabella were loath to discuss more of the matter in their children’s presence, but each were aware of possible further ramifications, mainly concerning the fact that Rollo would still remain after Nicodemus’s departure, and how Jessica and the children would deal with that fact then.

Just outside one of the Mouse colony’s entrances, Boris sat atop a flat rock with eyes closed, enjoying as best he could the feel of the warm sunshine through his fur and wishing it brought greater comfort than it did. He breathed in deep, hoping it would help relieve the aching in his heart. If only he could make sense of that damned vision from yesterday! Even he wasn’t sure if it could be called that, but whatever it was, he knew he couldn’t dismiss it, not when it affected him so strongly. He tried, really tried not to let it bother him so much, but after last night… He tried to swallow the lump forming in his throat even as he felt his eyes moisten. No, he told himself, she can’t stay mad at me. This has to work out one way or…

“Boris? Are you all right?”

He opened his eyes and looked down, blinking. “Ellis…Lilia. I’m…” His next words caught in his throat. He sighed. “No. Not entirely.”

“Can we help?” asked Lilia.

He hesitated, and then invited them to sit beside him. After they climbed up and sat on either side of him, he began, “Well, after Seelah and I left you last night, we were getting ready for bed and…well, you know she and I had been trying to become pregnant lately, and I told her that…the vision I had yesterday had gotten me thinking that maybe…we shouldn’t be trying so hard, until I know for sure what it means. It seemed to spell…such doom, impending destruction; and, obviously, I hope that’s not what it means, but if it does…what would be the point of bringing new life into the world if it…doesn’t even get the chance to live?”

“And,” ventured Ellis, “she didn’t agree, I take it.”

“She said that…even though she’d always taken my visions seriously, she couldn’t believe that this one could possibly mean anything that serious. ‘We have such a good life here,’ she said, ‘and we can’t just stop living.’ I said no, of course we shouldn’t, but until we know for sure, we should stop trying to have children. ‘It’s like our love doesn’t mean anything,’ she said, and…”

Boris paused, pulling out a handkerchief, dabbing at the corners of his eyes. Ellis and Lilia both stroked his back and shoulders. He thanked them for their comfort and continued. “Well, we went back and forth like that for a few more minutes, till we agreed we both had a lot to think about and maybe we should sleep separately. At least we were able to agree on that much. But…” Again he couldn’t hold back the tears.

“It’ll be all right, Boris,” said Ellis as Lilia rubbed his back. “My folks went through a period like that, and they worked things out.”

“I know that story. They almost…stayed apart for good, didn’t they? And it was a totally different situation with them, they didn’t have total destruction over their heads.”

“Er, actually, Boris, we did. Our old home was destroyed, and we nearly went with it.”

Boris looked at Ellis squarely, then hid his face in his hands. “Ellis, I’m so sorry, that was ’way out of line. I can’t believe I forgot that.”

“It’s okay. You’re upset. But you and Seelah will work things out, you’ll see.”

“But what if something does happen? What good would it do?”

“We still don’t know if it means some great disaster, or even small one. But you know Seelah’s right, we can’t all stop living and just let things grind to a halt. Especially after yesterday. Everyone’s so optimistic now, that we won’t let anything chase us out.”

“And I’d only ruin that, wouldn’t I? It’s okay, Ellis, I know what you’re saying. And I do want to believe as you do. I promise I will try.”

“He’s right, Boris,” Lilia finally said. “There are still things that need to be done, but we will all be safe afterward.”

Boris frowned. “You sound really sure of yourself, Lilia, like you know what has to be done.”

“I…only meant that…Nicodemus, and Gwinthrayle, too…will figure things out. And, I guess, Johnathan with the Stone, too.”

“She’s right,” said Ellis. “Let’s not forget Stuart and Shirley, too. We’ve got plenty of talented people on our side.” Inwardly, he wondered if there weren’t more to Lilia’s statement than just her echoing his own words of encouragement, similar to yesterday’s “worthy” statement. He and Reuben had chalked that up to her being tired, and now he concluded this one to be similarly innocuous.

“I’m just afraid,” confessed Boris, “that I’ve lost Seelah forever. We-we’ve never had a fight like this before, and…” He paused as tears began welling up again. “She’s been…everything to me since we lost Doris. I just couldn’t bear it, I don’t know what I’d…”

“Come on, Boris, pull yourself together. Look, go talk to my mom ’n’ dad. They’ll tell you that couples have disagreements all the time, but they still love each other and they always make up. Or any of the elders here; they’ll tell you the same thing, I guarantee it.”

Boris managed a smile. “I’ll do that.”

“Great.” Ellis jumped down from the rock. As Lilia and Boris followed, he added, “Say, speaking of couples, did you see Nicodemus and Jessica? Do you believe it?”

“I did see them,” said Boris, “though I haven’t talked to them yet.”

“Boy, I hope they know what they’re doing, considering what he’s planning on doing with Rollo. And he’s said all along that’s not going to change. Well...c’mon, Boris, let’s go look in on my folks.”

Ellis’s concern was, of course, shared by many others; and questions about it, whether unvoiced or not, had been anticipated by the new couple, who made a point of telling everyone that they had worked through the complications that could arise from this relationship, and that Nicodemus still had every intention of sticking to his plans for Rollo four days hence. In the course of these meetings, they were reminded of another important detail: tomorrow was the day they’d scheduled to recall the exchange party from Timphon early, so that they could meet Nicodemus before his departure.

In late morning they met with Johnathan and Madeline in the courtyard in front of their home. Quickly, the conversation Jessica had with them three days before came up.

“I know I’d said you’d find love again, Jessica,” said Madeline, “but I guess I didn’t expect that you and Nicodemus would resolve things like this.”

“Neither did we,” said Jessica. “But we couldn’t deny our feelings for each other, and we decided to just take things a day at a time.”

“Even if those days are small in number.” Nicodemus reached up to stroke her cheek, pressing her face close to his.

Though others had considered the subject today, Johnathan was the first to bring up what Jessica might do when Rollo is “in charge.” She took no offense and said that, again, she would take things one day at a time; and if she did find herself in love with Rollo, she’d be careful of his feelings, knowing that he’d be naïve and inexperienced in interacting emotionally and socially with others. Nicodemus described how he’d gone “within” and talked with Rollo just after he’d gone on his recent sabbatical. He described their conversation, especially how he’d told him how he’d come to care for Jessica and to be kind to her after “turnover.” He left out any mention of his concern over the possibility of his being within Rollo’s body longer, or why. He still thought it best to wait for Gwinthrayle’s report before sharing that reason why with everyone else here. Also going unmentioned was his pang of jealousy.

The four of them soon moved on to visit Kimball and Patricia. The new couple had already informed them of their decision, and had been invited to spend as much time as they wished this day with the parents of the “bride.” Nicodemus hadn’t yet seen Patricia’s progress on her art project since his return and eagerly awaited the chance to witness it taking further shape, and to offer further suggestions. In short order, he was standing at her shoulder as she sat in front of her easel, sketching out one of them with enthusiasm: background details of his Rosebush colony office, mainly the desk, chairs and other furnishings, including his viewing device. As she worked, she brought up how they had never learned what had happened to it after they’d vacated the rosebush.

“It had been disassembled,” Johnathan told them now from the nearby divan where he and Madeline sat, “and it’s been in Justin’s office ever since, still in that state. He decided to leave it that way after moving here, and after I returned we discussed possibly reassembling it, but we agreed to leave it as is. We both know that it operated as a conduit for Nicodemus’s power, as little as we understood it, so we didn’t think it would work, stay completely inert without him.”

“Rather like Johnathan and me with the Stone,” remarked Madeline, “except that we didn’t know it would work only through him and me.” Johnathan nodded his agreement.

“Ah…so when our Nicodemus returned, the subject came up again, I take it?”

“Exactly, Kimball,” Nicodemus answered. “But I declined to reassemble the device myself, mainly because I didn’t see the necessity, and I was busy with so much else. And when I visited Gwinthrayle, he presented me with a version of his Orb of Disclosure, which serves the same function, and more efficiently, I’ve found. Though I admit I’d found little need for it until I left on my sabbatical.” Going unsaid for now was how he’d tried using it to uncover recent mysteries here in Freethorn and elsewhere, but finding little in the way of results. Along with these efforts came the sense that they were being deliberately blocked by some unseen intelligence, possibly the same entity that appeared to have been responsible for those mysteries and anomalies. Not the least among them was that sudden climatic change, for which he still fought the urge to disclose to his friends now instead of waiting for Gwinthrayle’s return and approval.

The conversation steered toward the travels the Brisbys, sometimes accompanied by others, had made to other dimensions via the Stone, in many of them finding beings like them in physical stature; some of them, like Tugrelho and Kalfomenda, becoming the best of friends with them.

“I’d surely like to meet some of these friends of yours,” Patricia said as she worked, with Nicodemus’s coaching, on sketching his old viewing device. “So diverse in appearance, and so different from us, but with so much in common with us as well.”

“One thing we’ve found,” said Madeline, “is that love is constant among all these different races. You have two sexes procreating new life, with devotion to family being the most important thing. It’s really comforting knowing that even in all these different worlds, different universes even, that such things are the same.” She and Johnathan squeezed hands and kissed lightly.

In a neighboring chair, Jessica nodded her agreement. Madeline’s remark reminded her of how, after the Brisbys had consoled her three days ago, she’d thought about her being virtually indistinguishable from the Mice from NIMH and their offspring in their intelligence and sophistication of thought. “Well, on that note,” she said, “I wonder when Michael and Cynthia are going to make things official…at the risk of sounding like you, Mom.”

Patricia laughed, looking up from her artwork. “They are keeping a low profile lately. I think you’re right about their waiting to make a big announcement.”

“Waiting for what, I wonder?” mused Kimball. “Perhaps…tomorrow, when Norman returns…” Everyone looked toward Kimball and each other, grinning.

“Why, that has to be the reason!” said Madeline. “It makes perfect sense.”

“I agree,” said Johnathan. “But whether that’s the case or not, maybe we should keep mum about our suspicions. Let them have their moment.”

“Keep mum about what?” came a voice from outside the studio door.

“Louann! Teelo! Bring everyone in,” greeted Patricia. The young family approached her as they greeted everyone. After giving Sharla and Tess a big hug, Patricia apprised them and their parents on the painting’s progress, being as descriptive as possible for Louann’s benefit. They were especially fascinated by her new sketches, and Nicodemus stepped in to explain them. The others then went over their previous discussion and theory about Michael and Cynthia. Louann was reminded of the discussion some of them had almost two weeks ago, the day of the mhys’haspa’s visit. They recalled how upset Bertie and Tara had been over some untoward remarks directed toward their relationship, and—as found at the next day’s general meeting—toward the Mice in Freethorn in general.

“I hope all that’s been laid to rest,” said Louann.

“I think so,” said Patricia as she kept one eye on Sharla and Tess to make sure they didn’t get into any wet paint, though they were already well aware not to. “Look at Herbert yesterday. I know he was genuinely concerned about Stuart, otherwise he wouldn’t have been there.”

“That’s still hard to believe,” said Teelo. “Stuart, I mean. Like he was never hurt at all. But I saw it just like the rest of you.”

They discussed more about Stuart and Shirley—who were presently attending classes—and their “sibling power,” and how much they’d have to tell the returning exchange party tomorrow, with meeting Nicodemus being only the beginning.

“When we brought up that conversation from a couple weeks ago,” said Jessica, “and now talking about Norm returning, it reminded me. It’s…kind of embarrassing, admitting it now…but I actually felt a bit jealous over him starting to get close to Teresa. We’d lost our mates almost at the same time, and now he seemed to be finding another, and I wasn’t. When I’d given it more thought, I couldn’t believe myself, especially considering how Teresa had lost Eric.” She closed her eyes, shaking her head. “It’s all irrelevant now, of course.” She took Nicodemus’s hand.

“Jealousy, thankfully, is another emotion that has yet to gain much of a foothold with us,” said Nicodemus. “Jenner notwithstanding.” His own recent bout with the emotion, or possibility of it, crossed his mind, but he was still determined to discount it.

“And hopefully it never will,” added Kimball. “Getting back to that old discussion…one thing I definitely meant to say was that all I went through to bring myself to Thorn Valley was worth it, with all that’s happened since. I can’t say I don’t miss my right leg. But on those days when I find myself complaining about it, I just have Patricia pose the question to me: ‘Was it worth it?’ And it always puts things back into perspective. In a word: yes.”

There was a moment of silence; then, out of the blue, a young voice piped up, “Mommy thinks she might be pregnant.”

Louann and Teelo gaped as the other adults stared in surprise at her. “Sharla! Sweetie, you weren’t supposed to…” Louann sighed. “Oh, never mind. We wanted to wait until we knew for sure, but…yes, it’s possible. But save your congratulations till then.”

“We’ll keep our fingers crossed, honey,” said Patricia, thrilled with the news but promising to restrain herself.

Nicodemus approached Kimball, seated near Patricia’s easels. “Well, now, how many grandchildren would this make for you?”

“Hmmm…well, if Lou has two, then…nineteen.”

“We’ve got a growing colony, all right,” said Johnathan. “And we’re due for a bit of reorganization soon. We can expect Cynthia to move in with Michael, and maybe Lilia with Ellis…”

“Yes,” said Patricia. “Funny you should mention Lilia and Ellis…they were just here an hour or so ago, with Boris. He and Seelah had a bit of a fight, though he wouldn’t give too many details. We told him we were sure they’d work it out. The poor dear was so scared that it meant the end for them, but I think we reassured him enough.”

Nicodemus nodded with approval. “The foundation of this colony must always lie in the love and support we have for one another. I feel that where we are now, both physically and in this society’s development, this is more important than ever.”

“And I have all the faith in the world that that will never change, my friend,” said Kimball, laying a hand on Nicodemus’s arm. “Even long after you’ve…you…oooh…” His head swayed on his shoulders, and he looked ready to slide out of his chair.

“Dad? What’s wrong?” Jessica rushed to his side to steady him, followed closely by Patricia.

“What’s wrong with him? What’s happening?” Louann, standing near Nicodemus, turned toward Kimball, taking Nicodemus’s arm to steady herself.

“I have no idea. Maybe it’s just a dizzy spell. I’m sure it doesn’t mean—” Nicodemus heard Louann groan and turned just in time to see her collapse to the floor. Her family was at her side in an instant, and suddenly the whole room was infused with anxiety and worry.

Kimball was carefully laid out on the floor, and he and Louann were both found to be still conscious and aware of their surroundings but complaining of the same symptoms: lightheadedness, overall muscle weakness and a peculiar tingling sensation all over. Madeline dashed out to get word passed to the medical department. The others did their best to keep the two bizarrely-stricken mice as comfortable as possible, but couldn’t keep worry from their voices as they speculated on what strange malady could have struck them down so suddenly and almost at the same time.

In going over the events leading up to the moment, one fact quickly came to light: that Nicodemus had touched both of them before they collapsed.

“Well, that must be coincidence,” said Johnathan. “Isn’t it?”

“It’s certainly nothing that I was aware of,” said Nicodemus. “That is, if I’m responsible in some way.”

“No, of course not,” said Jessica emphatically. “Look,” she said, taking his hand. “Nothing’s happening to me.”

Everyone hesitated to speak for several seconds, as if waiting for something to happen to Jessica; then Patricia said, “No, of course not.” She took Nicodemus’s other arm. “There’s no way you would’ve done anything to hurt them.”

“Not consciously, at least,” said Johnathan, rubbing his whiskers.

Patricia gaped in disbelief. “Johnathan! How can you say that? He’s your oldest friend!”

“No, I’m afraid he’s right, Patricia,” said Nicodemus. “It may have been coincidence, but under the circumstances, and especially in light of recent events, we cannot rule anything out.”

“But…how could you have done this unintentionally…and why?”

“Perhaps, Jessica, if there is this ‘presence’ we’ve theorized at work here, then it may have made use of me in some way.”

“That ‘presence!’” said Patricia indignantly. “I’m getting very tired of hearing about this thing, but not being able to see it or respond to it or do anything but scratch our heads and wonder about it!” She returned to Kimball’s side, holding his hand.

Louann’s husband and daughters had never left her side the whole time, and now Tess looked up and said, “Mommy and Grandpa are gonna be all right, Aunt Jess, aren’t they?”

Jessica crouched between her and Sharla. “Yes, they will.” She stroked her nieces’ heads. “Even if we don’t know what’s wrong with them yet.”

Shortly, Madeline returned, with Merrill and Andrew on her heels. They’d determined that their patients could be simply carried up to Medical, so each rat picked up each mouse with great care, with Teelo fussing, albeit quietly, over how Merrill was handling Louann. Each was secured in a sling-harness that held each securely against each rat’s torso, leaving the rats’ arms free. Merrill and Andrew then left swiftly with their charges, assuring all they’d receive the best of care. The remaining mice paused a moment to reassure each other further before following.

On the way, Teelo said privately to Johnathan, “This never would have happened if we’d stayed where we were.”

“On Earth, you mean? Come on, Teelo, you can’t seriously be thinking of going back to the old rockpit.”

“Don’t make fun of it, Johnathan, it’s where I grew up.”

“I don’t mean to be insulting, Teelo. But you’ve all enjoyed yourselves so much here.”

“I know, Johnathan, and I don’t want to sound ungrateful. I do love it here, and a lot of that’s because Lou and the girls love it so much. I know everyone’s saying we have to be optimistic. But what am I supposed to think about…something like this?”

“Believe me, I understand your frustration. It’s frustrating for all of us. But we will get some answers one way or another.”

“Yeah, I know, but…it’s just like yesterday. One of us gets sick or injured some weird way, and…” Teelo suddenly looked lost in thought.

“What is it?”

“I just had an idea. I’ll tell you when we get to Medical.”

It was a scene almost exactly matching that of yesterday’s, at almost the same time of day and with many of the same participants as well. In the corridor outside the medical ward, a group of mostly mice, including most of Kimball’s children, sat waiting anxiously for further word from behind the door. Most were silent, reflecting on the bizarre and sudden onset of this mysterious and unknown ailment, and what it could mean for their loved ones and everyone else.

“We were all asking yesterday, ‘What next?’ I know it was the natural thing to wonder, but…”

“But now it’s almost like we jinxed it, isn’t it, Dad?” said Teresa with a sigh. She looked down at Sharla on her lap, stroking her head.

“Come on, Sis, let’s not talk like it’s because of something we did,” said Martin. “I know you weren’t serious, but…if it is something in this world that’s causing it, then what have we done to provoke it?”

“Martin’s right,” said Cynthia. “It’s like, ‘excuse us for living.’ That’s all we’ve done, isn’t it? Just live here?” None could disagree. Cynthia sat closer to Michael, and all were silent until others arrived: Louann’s litter-mate Marie and her family, Stuart and Shirley, and Timothy. Everyone looked optimistic that answers would be had very soon. After the newcomers were brought up to date, Stuart and Shirley were ready to go in right then, but they were reminded that they needed to wait until the staff allowed them in. All agreed it was a good idea of Teelo’s to bring them in on this.

Inside, Teelo, along with Patricia and Nicodemus, had been allowed in while the new patients were examined and questioned further, and the answers to some of the questions were indeed troubling. Both Kimball and Louann reported that the strange tingling and enervating sensations had not only come upon them when in physical contact with Nicodemus, but seemed to originate from the point where each touched him, quickly spreading throughout his or her entire body.

There was silence in the room after Ages made this report. Patricia looked at Nicodemus. “Then…I guess you did cause this, somehow; or you were the instrument of it in some way.”

“I cannot deny that now, even though I myself felt no such sensation at the time. I suppose now there’s little left to do, except…”

“Bring Stuart and Shirley in here, right?” interjected Teelo. “They’ll get to the truth!”

With nothing to lose by trying, Ages agreed and started for the door, then stopped. “Whatever else we may find, I don’t want any word of what we just discussed to go beyond this room, or those who were there when it happened. We can’t have any wild rumors flying about this strange affliction ‘caused’ by Nicodemus. For the time being, until we learn what’s really happening here, no one mentions Nicodemus except that he was there at the time. Everyone understand?”

Everyone did, so Ages opened the door to the corridor, instantly facing an attentive and anxious audience. After telling them there’d been no change in their condition and so far no cause for it could be determined, he asked Stuart and Shirley to come in. They were already through the door before he’d finished asking, and were soon at their mother’s side between Kimball’s and Louann’s beds, eager at the prospect of solving this new mystery. They joined hands, and Shirley took Kimball’s hand and Stuart took Louann’s.

“There is nothing wrong with them,” began Stuart. “They’re not really sick,” said Shirley. “They should be up and walking around.” They continued in this fashion, pausing after about two minutes to see if there was any change. There was none, but they carried on undaunted for another few minutes. Still no discernible difference. They looked at each other.

“I hate to say it, Shirl,” ventured Stuart, “But I don’t think it's working.”

Shirley looked at Kimball sadly. “I’m sorry, Grandpa.”

“It’s all right, sweetie,” he said weakly. “You both did your best. We’ll still…get through this…one way or another.”

Out in the hall, Justin and Isabella had stopped by and joined the others in silently supporting the twins’ efforts. Amidst this, Timothy nudged Johnathan. “Dad, I just thought of something we may have overlooked.”

Just then, the door opened. Ages and Jessica reported regretfully on her children’s lack of success. They filed past their mother into the hall, shrugging sadly. Everyone felt bad at seeing them so dejected, after their infectious optimism since the resolution of yesterday’s crisis.

Timothy stood, indicating he had something to share. “I don’t know if anyone’s considered this yet, but…maybe we should figure this from a different angle, like…what is it that Kimball and Louann have in common?”

It didn’t take long for the answer to come over nearly everyone. “Both of them sustained serious injuries that crippled and almost killed them,” said Justin.

Everyone reacted as if knowing that a hurdle had been cleared. “That has got to be a major clue, Tim!” exclaimed Lucy. None doubted this, nor that it could be the basis for understanding the whole situation.

“Well,” said Ages, “whatever this means for them or all of us, there’s little reason for all of you to remain here. They seem to be in no danger at this time, and we’ll certainly keep everyone up to date on their conditions.”

“We’ll still allow visitors throughout the day, but no more than three at a time,” added Jessica. As most began to leave, Nicodemus began organizing a group consisting of everyone present during today’s strange event, as well as Justin, Isabella, Timothy, and the medical staff present.

Back inside the ward, he explained for the newcomers’ benefit how the patients’ sudden illness seemed to have brought on by contact with him. “So now,” he continued, “I guess I should revisit the question I put before you the day I arrived: what will you do with me? Until this new crisis is resolved, perhaps I should keep my own activities limited, and contact with others as well.”

“You mean keep yourself shut away, like you were under house arrest?”

“Call it what you will, Johnathan, but it is necessary.”

“But you haven’t done anything wrong, Nicodemus,” said Justin. “You deserve better than that.”

“Thank you, Justin, but it is my decision to make. And we cannot say how long it will take until we get answers to this matter, or until it’s otherwise resolved. It could be a matter of days, or tomorrow, or later today. I will certainly spend the time making my own attempts to get to the bottom of it.”

With this much settled, they ironed out further details. The rest of the council would be informed of the possibility of Nicodemus having unknowingly been responsible for Kimball and Louann’s condition, and the reason for his “house arrest,” for which he would be confined to his own quarters all or most of the time. Everyone else would be told that the two mice had come down with an as-yet undiagnosed ailment which didn’t appear contagious, but not that Nicodemus may have had something to do with it. As for why Nicodemus would be spending so much time confined to his own quarters, they would be told that he needed more time alone to investigate recent mysteries, including this new one, and it would require extended periods of solitude. Before most of the group left, there was one more reminder that any possibility of Nicodemus being responsible be not discussed with anyone outside of the present group or the council. Teelo asked that he and Sharla and Tess stay a while longer. Nicodemus took a moment to further assure them that he would do everything in his power to solve this mystery and see the patients cured.

Nicodemus left for his quarters, accompanied by Johnathan and Madeline. They spoke little on the way, waiting until they’d gotten there before saying anything about what had been just discussed.

“I feel so bad for you, Nicodemus,” said Madeline as they all sat down, she and Johnathan on either side. “This can’t be easy for you.”

“I cannot deny that it troubles me, Madeline,” said Nicodemus, “but thus far they seem to be in no danger, so I will concentrate my energies on finding the malady’s source…though I fear my efforts may continue to be thwarted.”

“You mean,” ventured Johnathan, “like during your sabbatical?”

“Correct, Johnathan. I’d spent many sessions deep in meditation, attempting to glean the nature of the anomalies via my own sensitivities to Lahaikshe’s ambient energies, which enable me to perform the feats you’ve seen, to a greater degree than on Earth. Strangely, an exception seems to be the precognitive ability; but the fact that these abilities have ‘followed’ me, as it were, to this body, and in greater variety, has even led me to speculate that they may not have originated as a result of the NIMH treatments, as we’d always assumed, but from some other source entirely.”

“Mm-hm.” Johnathan rubbed his whiskers. “And that goes back to that all-important conversation we had the day I came to the Rosebush to announce my marriage to this angel here.” He paused to rub Madeline’s shoulder. “You thought then that it could have been something that came later.”

“Something that I ate or drank, perhaps, you suggested,” Nicodemus said with a chuckle. “But…right now, however these abilities came about is secondary to solving this present mystery.”

“Indeed.” Johnathan’s own tone grew equally serious. “And I can’t help thinking that something or someone’s been using you, as if for an experiment of its own. When you consider that we have no idea why you’re even here, now, in this body; and now, you seem to have been the delivery system for whatever’s ailing Kimball and Louann. I’d be willing to declare unconditionally that the ‘presence’ we’ve speculated on is behind it all. And some of us, I have to say, are getting downright fed up about it.” He described Jessica’s indignance yesterday following Stuart’s apparently-miraculous recovery, matching Patricia’s an hour ago.

“Yes, she told me all about that,” Nicodemus confirmed. “And, as I alluded, my investigations have appeared to have all reached dead ends; or at least that’s my perception. But I’ll not let it dissuade me from continuing my efforts.”

Nicodemus’s demeanor softened noticeably when the conversation returned to Jessica. He spoke glowingly of her generosity and kindness, and in describing their relationship was surprisingly candid and unembarrassed about details some would consider personal. He also acknowledged the shortness of their time together, still showing little outward reluctance to discuss the subject.

At length he told them he was ready to resume his efforts, and his friends hoped for the best, though they still questioned the need for him to be confined like this. He assured them he didn’t intend to spend all of it alone, and it may not last long anyway. He thanked them for the encouragement of two of his dearest friends, who then left him alone.

Word spread quickly of the new patients. The rest of Kimball’s grandchildren were informed that he and Aunt Louann were ill and they could visit them in small groups. As they and others did, it definitely lifted the patients’ spirits, though there was no change in symptoms that anyone could feel or see. Most took a wait-and-see attitude in speculating what was wrong with them, but there was no avoiding some amount of worry. What next, indeed? What purpose was all this leading to, if there was one?

“So…don’t forget to return for your followup next week. And congratulations again.”

“Thank you, Bernie. I just hope that…oh, never mind.” Seelah and Bernadette walked from the examining room to the ward.

“Did I overhear…some good news?” asked Kimball weakly from his bed.

Seelah thought for a moment and decided it was all right, given the circumstances, to tell him and Louann first. After she shared the news, Louann was ready to share some “possible” good news of her own when they received another visitor, Boris. He and Seelah looked at each other for a moment, neither sure of what to say; then Seelah told Boris she’d wait for him outside.

A few minutes later, when Boris had finished his visit with Kimball and Louann, she suggested they take a walk. They stayed inside the Rat community, just strolling through its winding corridors. Boris said little about his visit but did indicate early that he wanted to discuss more in private.

After sitting on a bench in a nearly-hidden niche outside the library, both began talking almost at once, each finding the other wanted to apologize. They shared a laugh. “I really am sorry I said what I did last night,” said Boris, embracing Seelah. “I sounded like such a selfish jerk. But I really thought, at the time, that I had a good reason.”

“I’m sorry too, Boris. I overreacted so badly, when I should have been more understanding. I know how seriously you’ve always taken your visions. But…how do you feel now?”

Boris thought for a moment. “I’m no closer to understanding what that one yesterday meant. But after talking with Kimball and Patricia this morning, and visiting him and Louann now upstairs…I realized we both overreacted. Kimball knew all about my vision, and what I thought it meant; and yet, there he is, lying there in that hospital bed; and Louann too, both of them sick for who-knows-what reason, not knowing what’s going to happen to them; and he’s reassuring me, telling me that in spite of all this, they’re both certain they’re going to be all right. If they could be that optimistic, with what they’re going through, how could I be any less? So…if you want us to keep trying, Seelah, then by all means, let’s.”

“I don’t think…that’ll be necessary, Boris; at least not until we’re…ready to try again.” She smiled sweetly.

Boris’s eyes widened. “Wha…you mean that you…”

“I’d already been having regular checkups, remember? And this time…”

“You are?” Boris clasped her shoulders.

“Yes!”

They embraced, laughing. “Oh, sweetheart! We’ve done it! A baby! Or two, or three…” Boris embraced her again, eyes welling up. “Oh, Seelah…I promise I’ll always keep a good thought, never doubt our future here. And I’ll be as good a parent as I can.” He paused to kiss her. “Oh, I wish Doris were alive to see this. And Vincent, too, even though we never knew him.”

They excitedly discussed future plans before moving on. At length Seelah brought up something Louann had shared with her: her own possible pregnancy, and how her current condition could affect it. They agreed it could be a problem, but they’d stand by her and Teelo no matter what happened.

The air inside Nicodemus’s quarters was heavy with the scent of burning dried ajaniph leaves, which had been recommended by Gwinthrayle as being especially conducive to deep concentration during meditation. Nicodemus sat on the floor in the center of the room as Justin and Johnathan sat on the nearby divan, waiting patiently for results. Some twenty minutes after he’d started, Nicodemus emerged from his trance, flexed muscles and stood. From his expression, his friends could tell he hadn’t met with much success. Nicodemus confirmed this, then said, “Perhaps this is a case where only time will give us the answers we need.”

“Just the latest case in a series,” added Johnathan dryly, “to all of the many questions we have these days.”

Nicodemus nodded. “Though this latest effort proved fruitless, I shall not give in to frustration. There may yet be other avenues to explore to find the answers. Indeed, I may prove to not be the one most qualified to find them.”

“What about what happened this morning, though?” said Justin. “Was there, maybe, some residual sign that you may have passed something on to Kimball and Louann?”

“If there was something within me, some form of mystical energy, then it left no trace that I can discern.”

“So we have to wait and see. Again. It just doesn’t feel right. We should be able to take some kind of action.”

“I know, but…I’d been thinking, while we were waiting for results…” Johnathan began walking around the room. “Stuart and Shirley seemed to prove that their symptoms were genuine, not a matter of belief, like with Stuart’s own. Kimball and Louann, while they have no understanding of their condition, nevertheless feel that it’s not especially serious and that they’ll get better. I think that means more than simple optimism. What if that feeling is an integral part of their condition, something else that was passed along to them, from this ‘presence,’ through Nicodemus?”

All agreed that this could be another clue as to the nature of their condition. As they discussed Johnathan’s summary, there was a knock on the door. Nicodemus welcomed in his latest invited guests. “Stuart, Shirley…come in, my friends. How are you feeling these days?”

“Okay, I guess,” said Stuart. He and Shirley greeted Justin and Johnathan; then he added, “It was a little disappointing up in the ward, but I guess it’s kind of good that it wasn’t an illusion.”

“It does make it a little easier to deal with, even if we don’t understand it yet.” Justin then excused himself, citing previous engagements.

After he left, Shirley asked Johnathan if he needed to leave as well. Upon hearing “no,” she and Stuart looked at each other, nodding. “Uh, Johnathan, we were thinking…” began Stuart, “since you have the Stone, you could use it to check on Lula, see how she’s doing and stuff.”

“He reeeally likes her,” said Shirley, nudging her brother.

“Just like you like Torrance,” said Stuart confidently.

“Hey!”

“Well, I see no reason why not; that is, if you two are ready.” Johnathan removed the amulet from around his neck. They all sat on the divan, with Johnathan holding the Stone in front of him and the others arranged so they could all see its face. “The last I checked was just after Nicodemus and I returned from our trip, and she wasn’t doing much. Apparently she’d hardly strayed from where we’d left her. Anyway, it’s definitely high time to check on her again, so here goes.”

Johnathan concentrated, and soon an image was visible. The others leaned in close. Sure enough, there was Lula, just sitting and eating in a dimly-lit cave space. Johnathan had the amulet illuminate the scene better and “zoom out” a short ways. Now they could see that she wasn’t alone; three other mice were seated in a circle with her, all engaged in an animated discussion.

“It seems our Lula’s made some new friends,” remarked Nicodemus. “Is that still Teresa’s old home she’s in?”

“I thought so at first, but it’s definitely not. It’s not familiar, but even I don’t know every inch of Thorn Valley. At any rate, she is safe and seems to be happy.”

“Do you…think she’ll want to stay there, Johnathan?”

“I wouldn’t worry about that, Stuart. Although we did promise to leave it up to her on what she wanted to do. Let’s check and see if she left her sign out.” He concentrated again, and a new image appeared on the amulet’s face: the interior of Teresa and Eric’s old den where they’d left her. However, there was no “I’M READY” sign visible, and it was also apparent that she’d vacated the place altogether.

“Apparently she’s found a new temporary home with her new friends,” suggested Nicodemus.

“Can we look in on her again, Johnathan?” asked Stuart, a slight edge of anxiety to his question.

“I guess so, but not too long. I’d feel like we were spying on her otherwise.”

“Yeah, I guess you’re right. Never mind, then.”

“Are you sure? This was your idea.”

Both Stuart and Shirley agreed to end the “checkup” now, satisfied that Lula appeared to be in good hands. It was obvious, though, that Stuart wasn’t completely satisfied.

They chatted for a few minutes on other subjects: mainly Boris and Seelah’s good news, Timothy’s election to the council; but inevitably, the condition of the two mice with the symptoms that were baffling everyone came up—though the possible connection with Nicodemus wasn’t brought up in front of the youngsters. All admitted that the wait-and-see approach wasn’t sitting well with them but knew there was little else they could do.

After Johnathan left, Stuart confided to Nicodemus that he’d felt like asking Johnathan if they could go visit Lula in person as well as look in on her.

“Well, I’m sure he’d agree to have you accompany him when he does go to bring her back. I know I’m looking forward to hearing all about her adventures.”

“I’ll bet those new friends of hers have something to do with that ‘mission’ she was talking about,” suggested Shirley.

“I’d thought the same,” said Nicodemus. “And no matter what that truly is about, I agree with Johnathan that Lula will want to return, to those she’d embraced as family.”

“Yeah, I guess that makes sense.” Stuart sighed.

Nicodemus could tell Stuart wanted more definite and satisfying answers but decided not to press the matter, instead changing the subject to the twins’ friendship with Torrance and Hazel.

“…and best of all, no predators! It makes such a huge difference in how everyone lives, it’s like the difference between night and day! You’ll love it there, Marnie. It’ll be such a great place for you and Monte to raise your kids.”

“It sounds great, Lula,” said Monte, “but can everyone there do things like Eric can, with the way he brought us here?”

“Oh, no. But everyone’s very smart, much smarter than me, and can do so much, and come up with such great ideas…I can’t begin to describe it all here.”

“It sounds wonderful,” said Marnie, “but you sound as smart as anyone else here.”

“Oh. Well, thank you, Marnie. They do tell me, especially Mother Pat, that I put myself down too much.”

“Is there…anyone special waiting for you back there?”

“I’ve made a lot of friends, but…yes, I guess there is. I’ve thought about him lots of times since I’ve come here, and…I wish I’d given him more of a goodbye than I did. I’ve wondered if I might have hurt his feelings. Well, I guess I’ll—”

A sudden commotion interrupted the trio and quickly gained the attention of the entire chamber. They turned to see Eric at the cave entrance. He raised both arms and everyone quieted.

“Friends…we have another new addition to our group.” He paused and turned to welcome her in. “Don’t be afraid, we’re all friends here,” he was heard to say as his charge stepped forward a bit timidly. “Everyone…this is Wyn. She’s not used to such big crowds, so let’s all try to ease her into our group.”

Wyn returned everyone’s hellos with smiles and waves, already looking more at ease as Eric turned her over to Sibelle and Dupree.

As Eric moved into the crowd, two mice stepped up to him. “Is she the last one?”

“And if she is, that means we’ll be moving on, right?”

“I know you’re feeling cooped up, Kernin, and I can’t blame you. But honestly, I can’t say for sure. It does feel like I’m closer to gathering everyone, but I believe I’ll know for sure in a day or two.”

“Well, I hope so. I don’t mean to sound like a jerk, Eric, but…”

“He can’t help it,” said Adell, giving Kernin a playful nudge. “We just have to keep looking ahead, don’t we?”

“That we do,” agreed Eric. As he moved on to visit and chat with others in the chamber, a thought came, unbidden: Will I really know when the time is right? Will I even know what to do? Every mouse that he’d brought to the Safe House had been looking up to him and had trusted that he knew what to do and would lead them to this place of peace and safety that he’d spoken of. But could he really do it, and how?

Then he looked over to Lula, who waved enthusiastically to him from the back of the chamber. Surely, ever since her arrival, morale had improved greatly, with her stories and descriptions of her new adopted home; and, beyond a doubt, her presence had given his spirits a lift as well. With all he’d done so far, none of which he’d ever have believed he could do, he should—no, he will continue to know what to do, and when. All along, he’d felt guided, as if on a mission. Lula had felt the same way, though she couldn’t do all these strange and wondrous things that he could. If it was a mission, he knew it was one they both would see through to its conclusion. And the ones waiting for him, after that? Surely, though Teresa and everyone else there thought him dead, she would welcome him back with open arms, and her sons would accept him as well. Certainly, it would come as a shock to her, but…

A group of children paused in their game of tag and wended their way toward him, shouting his name. As he crouched and gave each a hug, he was again reminded that this was so much bigger than just him, that the future well-being of so many mice was riding on him, and that he could and would continue to meet the responsibility.

Chapter 39 - Rumors

“So, after Auntie Shrew left, we all went right to bed. Mom had been trying, as best she could, to hold herself together, but after we were in bed, we could all tell she was sobbing, just crying her eyes out. She tried to hide it at first, but it didn’t last long. We all wound up in her bed, holding on to each other as if for dear life. We were…all we had left, or so we thought. And I think we all cried ourselves to sleep that night, even Martin.”

Timothy paused, sighing, and Lucy took his arm and leaned on his shoulder. The emotional impact of that night still affected him, even after all these years, and came back strongly every time he recounted the story.

“Then...in the middle of the night, I woke up; and though I couldn’t remember what I was dreaming, or if I was, it was like…something was pulling me, compelling me awake. I raised up in bed, and everyone else was still sound asleep. I still felt compelled, almost, to do more; and so I got up without rousing anyone, and just started walking around the house. I still can’t describe my feelings at that point. I didn’t feel sad, or happy or hopeful…everything was just diffuse, I guess you’d say.

I went to the front door and looked out into the night. It was a beautiful, clear late-summer night, with the moon and stars shining through the treetops. I could hear the creek running nearby, and the chorus of crickets and katydids and frogs echoing all around. I thought about all we’d been through that evening, and how the news affected us; and suddenly, the strangest feeling came over me in a rush. It was as if…I suddenly knew everything, like an epiphany, a moment of clarity, that all we’d been through would be resolved in the best way.

I looked up at the sky again, and I said out loud to myself, though very quietly: ‘Daddy’s not gone. He’s out there somewhere. And someday…he’s going to come back to us.’

“I closed the door and, upon looking at everyone still sound asleep, I wondered if I should wake them up, or at least Mom. Then I thought about it. Even if I really believed it, how would I explain it to them? Would they believe it? I really wanted to share it with them, and make them believe it as I did. But how long would it be? I had no idea, as sincerely as I believed it myself. He could be back tomorrow, or next week, next month, next year. I decided to sleep on it, so I eased my way back into bed. In spite of my indecision, I felt really content and dropped off to sleep just like that.”

“But…you didn’t tell them the next day, did you?” asked Louann, for whose benefit Timothy was telling the story.

“Nope. I decided that they might get upset, especially Mom or Cynthia, if I told them Dad would come back, and then they’d be waiting for who knows how long for it to happen. I came close to telling Mom several times, over the next ten months, when she’d be worried about one of us or thinking about Dad. But I would always back off. It wasn’t until after Dad did return that it occurred to me how much this was like his putting off telling Mom about his connection to the Rats and the aging difference that he thought was there. When I mentioned this to him, he thought my reasons for procrastinating were better than his.”

“So how…did you finally tell them?” asked Louann.

“Well…it was such an emotional moment when he made his entrance, and all us kids saw him standing there; and I was the first one to rush forward to him, and I just said without thinking, ‘I knew you’d come back, Daddy. I always knew.’ I didn’t think about it at all, it just came out, and I was so happy—all of us were—that I didn’t care how it came out. Of course, they asked me later if I could explain that, so I just did it the best I could understand it at the time: that I’d had the feeling since the day he left us, that it wasn’t for good. They’d known for a long time about my ‘funny feelings,’ but it was a while before we could describe more precisely the nature of my ability: to sense a positive outcome in a time of crisis.”

“And…that was the first time you felt it, when you were still so little,” said Louann. “That’s beautiful.”

“That’s my Tim, the old wise man,” said Lucy, nuzzling his neck.

Kimball chuckled and said, “And what was really remarkable about that is…aah…”

Lucy leaped to his bedside. “Daddy, what’s wrong?”

“It’s…it was just a slight twinge, sweetie. I think it’s past now. Anyway, as I was saying…not only did Tim have this ability manifest at such an early age, but he had the maturity to realize what the effects would be, had he told his family what he believed to be true. My boy, your recent good fortune was certainly long in coming. I knew you had it in you since the time you kept me company during my relapse.”

Louann nodded her agreement, and Timothy thanked them. Kimball continued: “And now you’re in love with my baby girl. Any time you two are ready to make things more official, her mother and I will give our blessing.”

Lucy leaned forward to hug him. “Thank you, Daddy. But we’re not ready to get that serious yet.”

“Perhaps…after we get better. Who knows?”

Lucy and Timothy smiled at each other. “You really believe you will get better, don’t you?” asked Timothy.

“Absolutely,” confirmed Kimball. As Louann added her agreement, the door opened, and in walked Cynthia, taking a break from her own work, and Michael. They greeted Kimball and Louann; then Cynthia told Timothy, “I still can’t get over it. Elected to the council, I can’t believe it!” She embraced him.

“We were just saying it’s about time,” said Kimball. “He’s truly gifted, your brother.” He quickly added, “Not that you’re not, Cynthia.”

Cynthia took the remark in stride, and they all continued conversing; but after about a minute Louann complained of some discomfort, a small twinge behind her left eye. Michael was ready to get help, but Louann shrugged it off, saying she’d had similar symptoms ever since her fall, adding facetiously that it could even be a sign that things were returning to normal.

Presently Jemial entered, with son Herbert following. His two patients reported feeling much the same as they had at the beginning, barring recent “twinges.” Jemial reminded them to report as soon as possible any changes in their symptoms, wondering inwardly if these twinges, occurring only a minute or two apart, signaled such a change. Coincidence? He decided to reserve judgment.

“Now,” he added, “Herb here has some words to share.”

Herbert stepped forward, visibly nervous. “If…the rest of you don’t mind, I’d…like to speak to them alone,” he said, indicating Kimball and Louann.

Their visitors looked at each other, seeming readily agreeable to it. “We’ll be right outside,” said Michael. The four mice left the room, Cynthia giving one last glance over her shoulder before exiting.

“Well,” Herb began as he stood between the beds, “First I want to say that my dad didn’t put me up to this, or my mom, or anyone else. I wanted to do this.”

“All right,” said Kimball, sounding a bit tired. “So what’s on your mind, Herbert?”

“Well…” Herb shuffled his feet. “You know the general meeting we had a couple weeks ago, where…everyone talked about things that some of us had said—well, mostly me, I guess—you know, about you mice.” He looked down, unable to meet their eyes.

“Yes, of course we do,” said Kimball. “And you did admit your indiscretion in front of everyone, and you apologized as well.”

“That was very big of you,” added Louann. “It couldn’t have been easy for you.”

“Yeah, I guess not. Thanks. But…since then, I’ve been thinking a lot about what was said, especially when Colbert brought up how…” He turned to Kimball, breathing in deeply. “…how you probably saved us all by warning us NIMH was coming. And then that story about those human kids treating one of their own so badly…it just gave me a lot to think about. It’s hard to describe. I’ve just thought about…our lives here, what it all means, and what it should mean. And then, all this weird stuff started happening, and not even Justin or Johnathan, or anyone on the council knows why. Nicodemus, too.”

“And…do you feel now that we are threatened in some way?” asked Kimball.

“Maybe. All I really know for sure is that…I’m just so sorry for those…stupid things I said. I just…felt I needed to say it to you personally, because…damn it, they were right! Of course you saved us all! How could I have been so thoughtless? And now…now this, whatever it is that’s done this to you…” Herb’s voice quavered, eyes brimming with tears.

“Welcome to the club, my friend,” said Kimball, smiling. “We’ve all been there. We’ve all fallen victim to thoughtlessness, and sometimes the cost can be a little too high. But you’ll be all right, son, just from the fact that you’re aware of your mistakes.”

“Do you really think so? I’ve always said dumb things without thinking first. My uncle Willis says I shoot from the lip.”

Kimball chuckled. “Well, just do your best, son, and don’t worry.”

“If you really want to change, Herb,” added Louann, “then just focus on that, and you’ll do fine.”

“Yeah, I guess so.”

“We do forgive you for past indiscretions, Herb,” said Kimball, “and I’m certain that any more of us mice that you talk to will…tell you…oohh…” Kimball closed his eyes, obviously in some pain.

“Dad? What is it?” called Louann.

“I’ll get my dad,” said Herb, who dashed off to the next room. Seconds later, Jemial was at his patient’s side. Kimball described his symptoms as definitely having changed: the lightheadedness and strange tingling sensation had lessened, but now he complained of a steady, continuous dull ache in his right hip—right where his leg had been amputated.

When word got to the mice in the hall, they were allowed to come back in, just as Jemial sent Herb to contact Ages and Bernadette. On his way out the door, he and Cynthia again exchanged glances.

“I didn’t do anything to Kimball,” Herb said matter-of-factly to her. “Honest.”

Cynthia made to answer, but Herb was already out the door. “I didn’t think I…looked at him like I was accusing him. I didn’t mean…or did I?” She approached Kimball’s bed, ready to assist Jemial.

“I wouldn’t worry about it,” said Michael. “Still, maybe you and he need to talk. You did tell me that he apologized for insulting your family that one time, but it looks like you haven’t forgiven him completely.”

“He really did come here to make amends,” said Louann. “We both believed he was sincere.”

Cynthia thought for a moment, biting her lip. “I guess I should talk to him. He did seem pretty sincere yesterday.”

Jemial concurred. “His mother and I have talked to him about his past mistakes, but he came here today entirely on his own, just like yesterday.” He continued applying gentle pressure to Kimball’s hip.

“I remember what you said to him about giving the benefit of the doubt,” said Cynthia. “I guess both of us need to work on that.”

“I don’t…mean to sound peevish here, but…”

“We haven’t forgotten you, Dad,” said Michael as he and Lucy approached Kimball’s bed. “How bad is it?”

“It’s just…a regular, steady ache…persistent, nagging…”

“Oh, Daddy…” Lucy leaned her head on his shoulder. “I just wish we knew what’s wrong with you both.”

“I know, sweetie. But, as lousy as I feel…I don’t know how, but I still believe that I’ll…be around to see this resolve itself. All of us…will.”

Timothy whispered something in Cynthia’s ear. “Do you really think so?” she replied quietly. “It could be just coincidence, even though they are the only two that—”

Louann suddenly cried out in pain, putting both hands to her forehead. Jemial was at her side in an instant. “My head…oohh…”

“Can you tell me where it hurts, Louann?”

“It’s…ooohh…it’s just…all over…my entire head…” Tears welled as she moaned.

Lucy was close to tears herself. “Why is this happening? Why can’t anybody find out what’s causing this?”

Timothy took her in his arms. “They’re doing all they can, Lucy. None of us has ever seen any symptoms like this before.”

“I-I know. I didn’t mean it like that. But how can we just…just wait, just stand around like this, while they’re hurting so bad?” She immediately answered herself. “I know. We have no choice, right?”

“Well, I think what Tim brought up yesterday has to be the key,” said Cynthia. “Especially now.”

“You mean, what they have in common being why they’re the only ones affected like this?” asked Michael.

“I just said a minute ago it could still be coincidence, but now—”

Another sudden cry of pain, this time from Kimball, interrupted Cynthia. “It’s my ear, my…left ear, and…aaah! Oh, God, another one. My tail!”

“I’m going to get both of you something for the pain,” said Jemial, who was beginning to feel overwhelmed. He dashed off for the next room.

The others looked at each other with the same realization: it was definitely not a coincidence now, and the next few minutes proved even more telling. Just after Herb returned with Bernadette (with Ages and Jessica due to arrive soon after), Louann complained of a new pain in her right ear, the one that had been damaged in her fall…an injury sustained along with the ones which affected her balance and robbed her of most of her eyesight…just as her father had lost part of his tail and left ear, and suffered injuries to his right leg so grevious as to warrant its amputation.

“…And now, both seem to be suffering pain connected to those earlier injuries; but toward what kind of resolution, none of us have a clue.” Jessica paused, taking a sip of water. “All we’ve been able to do is continue making them as comfortable as possible.”

Justin looked around the chamber at this hastily-convened council meeting, the latest in a series. “Thank you, Jessica. So…ideas, anyone?”

At first there were only exchanged glances and shrugs. Then Velma spoke. “If there’s a solution, I fail to see how any of us can find it any better.”

The air of helpless resignation was very strong, but Justin’s call for ideas would not go unanswered. “Earlier today,” offered Tallus, “Timothy suggested that Kimball and Louann’s physical conditions may have played a part in why they were ‘selected,’ as it were. These new developments only reinforce the idea, beyond a doubt.”

“They are the only two among us who had sustained injuries like this, that left them less than whole; and now they’re the only two suffering like this,” said Simone. “Obviously it can’t be coincidence, but is there really no other action we can take besides the old wait-and-see?”

“Well, maybe not, and that’s not necessarily a bad thing,” said Timothy. “I think we’ve all been assuming that this illness of theirs is…well, one of us should say it…that it’s harmful to them, or that it might even kill them. But isn’t it possible that just the opposite could be true?”

It was a suggestion that took many by surprise, and it sparked many small discussions; others, like Tallus, nodded knowingly. “It most certainly is possible, my lad.” He began walking in circles. “Let us consider: Kimball and Louann’s symptoms are now localized in those parts of their bodies most directly affected by their misfortunes. They themselves have described a feeling of optimism in spite of any physical discomfort, one they cannot explain but believe in wholeheartedly. Justin…did you not say that any hunch or premonition or ‘funny feeling’ should not be dismissed out of hand?”

“I did. Well, then…it seems our best course for now would be to match their optimism with our own, and…continue to wait and see.”

“Now, hold on,” said Ages. “Timothy, you believe that our patients could be helped instead of hurt by this illness. In what way, precisely?”

“Well, given the way it’s changed for them, with their symptoms more localized…there is really only one way I can think of, and…it’s almost too fantastic to even consider seriously.”

Timothy described his theory, which met with the expected reaction. Then Tallus spoke up again. “A fascinating theory, Tim. But while we’re considering all possibilities, there are still many we haven’t yet. For instance…if I may play devil’s advocate, can we be sure that Nicodemus is completely unaware of what’s happening to our friends? He doesn’t deny that he’s responsible for passing something on to them, but is he truthful in saying that it’s something that originated in this world, using him as a go-between? Or is he entirely responsible for their condition?”

“In other words,” said Arthur, “does he have a hidden agenda with them, or perhaps with all of us?”

“What could that possibly be? Why would he do such a thing to any of us?”

“That I could not say, Derek. But is it also not possible that, whereas Nicodemus would not mean us any harm, someone else would? Let’s say, someone clever and devious enough, who knows that we would believe whatever he tells us if he provides a convincing enough story?”

There were many exchanged glances of surprise, and Timothy was amazed that such a theory would meet with such a low-key response…at least from most.

“I won’t listen to another second of this!” exclaimed Anna as she stood. “I won’t believe that that is anyone but Nicodemus in that mouse’s body, after the story he told us, and after what he told me personally.”

“Be calm, Anna,” said Jolene. “You know it’s only for the sake of argument.”

“I know, but…how could such a thing be true? What possible…plan could he have for us, if he weren’t Nicodemus? And who would he be? What kind of enemy could we have, that would do such a thing?”

“But then,” said Jolene, “you don’t really believe this is true, do you, Tallus?”

“Not for the smallest fraction of a second,” he replied without skipping a beat. “But someone else might. And that is why we cannot allow Nicodemus’s connection to our friends’ condition become public knowledge. And we must ensure that those of us who are aware are not swayed toward such a view.”

The proposal met with unanimous approval. Timothy leaned in close to Johnathan and said, “He does this at every meeting, doesn’t he?”

Johnathan nodded. “He keeps us on our toes, plus I think he just likes to rile us up.”

Timothy nodded knowingly; then, clearing his throat, he addressed the council. “I still feel that Kimball and Louann will come out of this all right, so any question of deception on Nicodemus’s part I feel should be considered moot.”

Another unanimous agreement followed; so Justin adjourned the meeting with a reminder that they continue thinking positively for Kimball and Louann, as much as Timothy was feeling himself.

Outside the chamber, Lucy met Timothy and Johnathan, updating them on how Patricia, Teelo, Sharla and Tess were in the ward now, where the patients had been given painkillers and were resting more easily, alert though a bit groggy. They had continued expressing confidence about their situation.

“Mom wanted to stay the rest of the day and all night with them, and so did Teelo and the girls,” said Lucy. “But I think they managed to convince them it wasn’t necessary. Mom even admitted she was torn between staying there and working on her painting some more, and felt a bit guilty about it. Dad and I both had to work on her, but I think she’s more confident now.”

“That’s good,” said Johnathan. “How’re Teelo and the girls taking it?”

“As well as you could expect, I guess. Sharla and Tess are more willing to believe they’ll recover, but you know how hard-headed their dad can be.”

They chatted a bit more before Johnathan “left the kids alone.” The young couple continued conversing as they walked the corridors arm-in-arm.

“A seat on the council!” exclaimed Lucy. “I still can’t get over it. How can you not be more excited about it? Even last night, at the party, you were so low-key about it.”

“Maybe I’m just too ‘wise’ to get excited.” He playfully nudged her. They shared a laugh and he added, “You should know by now that I’m just not easily shocked or surprised.”

“Oh, I know that. I’m just so happy for you.” She kissed his cheek. “I just wish that all this other stuff, especially with Dad and Lou, wasn’t going on. I feel a bit guilty, wanting to celebrate with you, even with both them and you saying they’ll be all right. I know that doesn’t sound too good, like I don’t have much faith…”

“Don’t worry about it, Lucy. I can’t tell you how or what to feel. I can only tell you what my instincts tell me, and right now they’re telling me that what’s been happening here isn’t going to affect any future plans…including yours and mine.”

The corridor they walked through led to a mezzanine overlooking the main entrance hall. They paused there, observing the bustle of mostly rats from the tunnel entrance through the hall to its adjoining ramps and stairways and corridors, with many pausing to converse along the way. Some called out greetings to the two mice, some with congratulations to Timothy on his appointment.

Presently Lucy said, “Tim, do you agree with what Daddy said earlier? You know, about you and me becoming more serious?”

“Sure I do. I love you, Lucy, but I don’t want to push you into anything before you’re ready, just as we’ve done all along. You still believe that, don’t you?”

“Of course. I do love you, Tim. But I know I’m in no hurry…unlike Michael and Cynthia. Boy, it sure hit them like a load of bricks.”

Timothy nodded. “They’ve spent almost every free moment together, even though they have yet to make a big announcement themselves.”

“You sound almost disappointed. It’s because…she’s starting to grow away from you a bit, isn’t she?”

“I can’t deny it. She and I have always been soulmates, ever since we could talk. We’ve always confided in each other. Except for my not telling her long ago about my feeling that Dad would return to us, we’ve always shared whatever was on our minds.” He paused, sighing. “But I guess it’s just a change we have to deal with.”

They continued watching the traffic below and around them. “Tim, have you ever wished that…there were more mice like us here? Don’t get me wrong, we’ve all made friends among the rats, but…well, you know how it is.”

“I think we’ve all wished that. But we all know that’s not going to happen anytime soon.” After a pause he added, “Funny…just talking about that made me think of Lula. I don’t know why.”

“Didn’t your dad check up on her with the Stone?”

“Mm-hm, just a few hours ago. It looked like she’d made some new friends back on Earth.”

“I wonder if she’ll want to bring some of them back with her.”

“She might. Whether it would be allowed, I can’t say. There were extenuating circumstances that brought her to us in the first place.”

“Because she’d been touched emotionally by Desmond. I don’t suppose there’ll be any more cases like that.”

“Probably not,” said Timothy, facing Lucy. “Guess we’ll have to settle for being touched emotionally by the ones we have available.” The two smiled at each other and kissed.

Shortly after they left the mezzanine, they were approached by Matilda, who invited them to have a private dinner with her and Bryant that evening. It had become a tradition for her to do so when a new councilmember was elected, the last ones being Jessica and Norman.

Not far away, Michael waited patiently, sitting on a bench in the hall outside the ward, occasionally chatting with passersby. Presently the door opened, and out came Cynthia and Herbert, both in surprisingly high spirits, even sharing a laugh.

“Sounds like you two have patched things up,” Michael said as he and Cynthia embraced.

“Well, we’ve arrived at an understanding. He doesn’t say anything bad about mice, and we don’t punch his lights out. No, seriously, we agreed we overreacted, both of us.”

“Yeah, we did.” Herb rubbed the back of his head. “So, anyway, we’re cool now. I gotta get going, so I’ll see you guys later.”

After Herb left, Cynthia explained that she’d invited him to have dinner with her and her family and to bring any guests he liked. “I thought it’d be the best way to show him there were no hard feelings left.”

“That’s great, Cynthia, I’m really proud of you.” More quietly, Michael added, “So…are you looking forward to tomorrow?”

“Are you kidding? It’ll be so great, and what a surprise it’ll be for everyone. Well, maybe not Tim; I haven’t told him, at least not directly, but he’s probably figured it out by now.”

“I’ll bet. Now, Nicodemus, on the other hand…we haven’t told him, and he’ll be the one officiating. I feel like we should tell him tonight. It doesn’t seem right to spring it on him at the last minute.”

“Yeah, I know. Well…how ’bout after Dad leaves to get Norm and the others?”

“That sounds good. Of course…all this is dependent on whether or not we’ll feel like celebrating tomorrow.”

“Oh…you mean your Dad and Louann. They will get better, Michael. Tim thinks so, and they believe it too. That’s good enough for me.”

“For me, too, I guess. I still wish something more concrete would…” Michael sighed. “Well…come on. I guess we don’t need to keep sitting here.”

They moved on, strolling through the halls and galleries, their conversation turning to Boris and Seelah’s recent good news. “I guess he’s not so worried about that vision of his anymore,” Cynthia observed.

“Or what it might mean for us. Maybe he’s heeding Tim’s advice.”

“Well, either way, it’s wonderful for them. I wonder who’ll be next.”

“Heh…well, truth to tell, I’d be surprised if you and I didn’t have a bun in the oven right now.”

Cynthia laughed in agreement. “Well, outside of you and me, I’d bet on Orland and Lana. Or Louann and Teelo, after she’s past this crisis.”

“Well, I know they’ve—” Michael interrupted himself. “Hey, what’s with the brouhaha?”

By now they’d made their way to a corridor that opened out into the main foyer, where a small but growing crowd was gathering, with a very spirited row at its center. Michael and Cynthia could make out some familiar voices: Timothy, Matilda, Bryant, Colbert. It hadn’t escalated to a shouting match yet, but passions were running high. They spotted Herbert in the crowd and sidled up to him.

“What’s going on?” Cynthia asked him.

“As far as I know, someone said something bad about Nicodemus.”

Several started speaking at once, but Colbert and Timothy managed to bring the crowd to order. “Now,” began Colbert, “Ira: you were saying that Nicodemus may have been responsible for something. What is it?”

“Well, um…uh, that he, well, did something to Kimball and Louann, and maybe he meant to do it.”

“I see. And from whom did you hear this? Don’t worry, no one’s going to be punished here, we just need to know.”

“Well…it was…my buddy Horace.”

“And did he come up with this idea all on his own?”

“I don’t think so. He just said he’d heard it, he didn’t say who, and I didn’t ask. Guess I probably should have.”

“Very well. Now, I’m sure you remember what you’ve been taught about rumors.”

“Uh…yessir, we…shouldn’t go around repeating things we hear if there’s nothing to back it up with.”

“Precisely.”

“I didn’t say it like I believed it, I…I said it like I thought it was a joke, nothing that anybody could possibly take seriously. I mean, it’s not really true…is it?”

After a slight pause—a pin-dropping moment, as Timothy would later describe it—Colbert answered, “Absolutely not. The truth about our friends’ condition has yet to emerge, but until then, we will keep any idle speculation to ourselves and continue to offer them our best wishes. Is that clear to everyone here?”

Everyone answered affirmatively, and most of the crowd broke up. Colbert and Timothy looked at each other knowingly. Tallus was definitely on to something at the meeting. And in any case, what Colbert said was hardly a lie, because the plain, unvarnished truth wasn’t known yet.

Cynthia shook her head. “Now why would anyone try to spread rumors like that? Why would Nicodemus want to hurt anyone?”

“He was there when Dad and Louann were stricken,” said Michael, “but he wouldn’t…I mean, on purpose…would he?”

“There is still much we don’t know,” said Colbert, “but until we do, this is a situation that should be nipped in the bud.”

A plan of action was quickly discussed, and those remaining prepared to carry it out. “I guess our dinner date’s going to be delayed a bit,” said Matilda to Timothy and Lucy.

“That’s all right,” said Timothy. “This is too important to wait.” So saying, he and Lucy left quickly to check out their hunch.

A little over half an hour later, Teelo was on his way back to the medical ward after leaving the girls with Michelle and Brummie. On the trail between the colonies he made his way, anxious to return to his beloved’s side but feeling some small regret as well. Whether that was the right thing to do or not, he’d done it and there was no turning back. For now he’d need to concentrate on Louann and seeing to her needs.

He moved on, thoughts only on her, and so he didn’t even notice that first voice saying, “Hey, here he comes now,” and calling his name. Only when the small group of mice had sidled up to him did he take notice.

“Teelo!” said Michael good-naturedly. “On your way to the ward?”

“Uhm, yeah. It’s been over an hour…”

“Do you have a few minutes?” said Johnathan. “We really do need to talk.”

Teelo glanced back and forth, visibly nervous. “Well, I…guess so. What about?”

“Why’d you do it?” Johnathan asked point-blank.

“Ah…do what?”

“There’s no use denying it,” said Timothy evenly. “Lucy and I were just up to see Louann and Kimball, and she told us about how you left sounding almost angry last time.”

“She said you kept going on about having to do something,” added Lucy, “and that you couldn’t just sit and wait, and it was just so frustrating.”

“It’s frustrating for all of us, make no mistake,” said Johnathan, placing an arm around Teelo’s shoulders. “But we can’t go around spreading misinformation and rumors.”

“But what exactly…do you think I…” Teelo suddenly looked resigned, shoulders sagging under the weight of their stares.

“We just talked to Horace,” said Cynthia, “and he told us how you came up to him and just said out of the blue that Nicodemus may have hurt Louann and Kimball on purpose.”

“It’s a good thing we investigated this early,” said Michael, “but we still have to spread the word further that it’s only a rumor.”

Teelo sighed and sat down on a nearby bench, running hands along his muzzle. “I’m…so sorry, Johnathan...everyone. I just…didn’t know, I didn’t think…I didn’t think at all.” Tears formed in his eyes. “I’m just so scared, I…can’t bear the thought of losing her. Especially if she’s having more babies, I’d…be losing them, too.”

Johnathan sat down beside him. “Teelo…once, when I’d thought my Madeline had been close to death, I said much the same thing to her. ‘If I’d lost you,’ I said, “I don’t know what I’d have done.’ And she looked me squarely in the eye and said, “I know just what you’d have done. You’d have gone home to our children, to raise them and love them and be strong for them, because that is the only thing you could do.’ It really surprised me at the time to hear her say such a thing, but I knew she was absolutely right. So what we have to keep in mind now is that just because we don’t understand what’s wrong with Louann and Kimball—yet—doesn’t mean we have to fear the worst. They’re not believing it themselves, and I think there’s something to that.”

Teelo looked up, nodding, trying to smile. “I know you’re right, Johnathan, they told me that. It’s just so hard to…” He sighed again. “But I’ll try, I promise I will.”

“Good. Now…we just need to ask one more thing of you, and that’s to help us spread the word to quell that rumor.”

“Yeah, sure, I’ll help you.” So far, this hadn’t been too difficult, as Johnathan and many of the other council members had been approached directly by those who’d heard this rumor and were anxious for more details. They were told that it was completely untrue and to tell the same to anyone else who brought it up.

In the remaining hours before sunset, the rumor had been thoroughly debunked, and though it became common knowledge that Nicodemus was present when the patients were stricken, his seemingly larger role was kept secret for now. It was also decided that the three-day-old curfew be lifted, with the provision that no one venture outdoors alone after dark and to continue to be alert for anything unusual or out of place, since none could be absolutely certain that the danger had passed. Even so, it was welcome news for many, especially those whose habits were normally nocturnal.

Nicodemus answered the knock on his door and embraced the first of his guests. “I’m finished with my regular duties for the day,” said Jessica as she smoothed the fur on Nicodemus’s neck. “So,” she added quietly, “if you like, we can have all night together.” From behind her came the expected giggles and chortles from the two youngest. “Quiet back there.”

Nicodemus laughed as he welcomed Jessica and her children inside. “So…how do your patients fare?”

“Still no visible change. We’ve got them on very mild painkillers, and it seems to be enough. They’re resting comfortably.”

“And they still say they’ll be okay,” added Stuart.

“Yeah, even though we couldn’t help them,” said Shirley. “They just keep telling everyone not to worry.”

“I’m sure that’s a good sign,” said Nicodemus. “A pity Teelo didn’t heed that advice too well.”

“Yeah, he kind o’ overreacted, didn’t he?”

“Perhaps, Stuart. But he only did what he did out of fear of losing the one he loved most. It was very much what your mother, and many others, went through with you only yesterday.”

“Yeah…I know.”

“Could you find out anything? You know, about what’s going on?”

“Very little, Shirley. It still feels as if my efforts are being deliberately blocked. It’s become quite the cliché of late, but perhaps all any of us can do is to simply wait and see what develops.”

“Are you still going to stay in here?” asked Diane. The others were also very interested in hearing his answer.

Nicodemus thought for a moment. “Well, at this point…I believe sequestering myself away would make little if any difference, so…when you are all ready, we can adjourn to dinner.”

Shortly, they all left for the dining hall, chatting more about the day’s events and plans prior to bedtime. To celebrate the lifting of the curfew, the children were planning on a nocturnal stroll, as were many others, accompanied by Cynthia, Michael and others, and would sleep at the Brisby home tonight. There were many who expressed their approval to Nicodemus for his decision to lift his “house arrest,” having seen no logical reason for it; but some appeared, while talking to him, to be walking on eggshells, as if they wondered if there weren’t some truth to the rumor, even though it had every indication of being thoroughly debunked.

They continued socializing in the dining hall after dinner; and when sunset arrived there was almost a ceremonial feel as those who planned to be out and about this evening made ready to do so, eager to declare the curfew dead and buried.

After Jessica and Nicodemus saw her children off, she realized just how unworried she was for their safety out there, though there were other misgivings. “I have to admit that it doesn’t feel quite right, wanting to spend the rest of the night with you. I feel I should stay up in the ward, even though they’ll be watched all night.”

“It’s been a day of great anxiety and worry for all of us, my dear. We shouldn’t deny ourselves the chance to lend comfort to one another.”

“I know. I just hope it all blows over soon, however it does.” They continued socializing with others over the next few hours before retiring to Nicodemus’s quarters.

There, they sat together talking for over an hour, boosting each other’s spirits, before moving to his bed. They made love slowly and tenderly before slipping into slumber.

Not far away, in the Brisbys’ spare bedroom, Shirley was having a bit of difficulty sleeping, unlike Diane at her side. Turning on her left side, she saw, in the neighboring bed, Stuart lying awake as well, staring at the ceiling. She slid out of bed and over to her twin’s side. “You too, huh?” she whispered.

“Yeah. Dunno why.” At Stuart’s side, Clifford also slumbered away.

“I wouldn’t worry about Lula. She’ll be okay.”

“I’m not worried about her, not at all.” His tone was not at all defensive as he turned on his side. “I was just thinking about Lilia, and the way she acted when we met up with her out there.”

Both remembered well how, just over an hour ago, they’d stepped a short ways from the rest of their party and heard Lilia’s voice from behind a fallen log, sounding for all the world like she was arguing with someone, though it was her voice and hers alone. “No!” they heard her say repeatedly, and also mention Ellis’s name and what sounded like a plea to be left alone. They found her just sitting upright alongside the log, and when they asked if she was all right, she seemed not to hear right away, then she gave a start. They described what they’d heard, and she said she must have dozed off for a moment and was dreaming. The siblings escorted her back to their party, and eventually all returned to the Mouse colony for the night.

“That was strange,” agreed Shirley. “But she might really have been dreaming.”

“Probably. I just get the feeling that it has something to do with what’s been going on. I don’t know how, but…”

“It does sound like the other thing with her, when it’s like she was two different people. It sounded like she was arguing with herself.”

“That was a whole different thing, though. This has got to be something else.”

“Well, whatever it is, we shouldn’t do like Uncle Teelo, and go around telling stories before we know what’s going on.”

“You don’t have to tell me. I guess we have to just wait and see, just like with Grandpa and Aunt Louann.” They said their goodnights and Shirley slid back into bed. Both were soon asleep.

Chapter 40 - “…he wasn’t the same…”

As the two patients slept peacefully, Samara turned another page of the book before her, one of well over a thousand from Freethorn’s library which had been hand-transcribed from Tallus’s memory. She took another sip of tea and soon was staring wide-eyed at the page, giving a visible shudder.

“Morning, Sam,” came a voice behind her.

Though it was whispered, it still gave her a start. “Oh! Good morning, Bernie. Is it time already?”

“Sure is.” Bernadette set down an armload of notebooks on the desk. “That must be some book. What’s it about?”

“It’s a collection of scary stories. The one I’m on now is about a man who gets put under a curse, which he laughs off. Then he wakes up the next morning and…well, I don’t want to give away too much, but let’s just say he wasn’t the same as when he went to bed.”

“Sounds pretty wild,” Bernadette said as she looked over Samara’s notes. She looked over at Louann and Kimball, still sleeping soundly. “Looks like it’s been a pretty uneventful night.”

Samara got to her feet, stretching limbs. “Yeah,” she said with a yawn. “They’ve been sleeping like babies all night. And I’m about ready for some of that myself.” She picked up her teacup and book and moved into the next room.

Bernadette gently nudged Kimball awake. He groaned and snorted as he opened his eyes. “Oh...Bernie. Good morning. It is, isn’t it?”

“Well, it’s definitely morning, and I hope it turns out good. How are you feeling?” She began taking his pulse.

“About the same. Still got that dull ache down there, but I’m pretty sure the worst is over.”

“Well, we all hope so. I just wish that...” She looked directly at his face, leaning in more closely.

“What is it?”

“I’m…not sure, but…I could swear your ear looks different than before, almost as if…there’s less of it missing.”

“Really?”

“Good morning over there,” said Louann from her bed. “What’s going on?”

“Morning, sweetie,” said Kimball. “We don’t know yet, but I think we’re about to find—aah!” Kimball jumped as Bernadette touched his ear.

“Well! It wasn’t that sensitive before, was it?”

“Not since it healed over. At least not like that. I wonder if…” He looked over the rest of his body, still covered by a blanket, then looked up at Bernadette. She started to pull the cover aside. Once it was all the way off, she moved around the bed to examine the other affected areas, and couldn’t conceal her surprise, drawing in breath. Kimball leaned forward for a closer look, and his reaction matched Bernadette’s.

“What’s happening?” asked Louann.

“I-I don’t know what to-to call it,” stammered Bernadette, “but…”

“But I think…” finished Kimball, “we may…have to call it…wondrous…miraculous.” He was almost breathless, scarcely able to believe his eyes.

A few minutes later, the “miracle” had attracted quite an audience, as Samara and Bernadette apprised the rest of the medical staff and a few councilmembers on the situation as well—and as little—as they understood it.

“…and by the time Bernadette came to relieve me, it had been a good six hours since I’d last taken their vitals,” reported Samara. “They’d both slept peacefully all night, and were covered the whole time, so of course I had no idea anything like this was happening to Kimball.”

“Well, I guess you couldn’t have,” said Ages. “But we still can’t jump to conclusions on what the end result will be.”

Kimball had hardly spoken since the initial discovery but now said, “I can’t say for sure either, my friends. But I still think we have a miracle on our hands here, as great as Stuart’s recovery.” He looked down at his right hip, and what protruded from it where his leg used to be: this new growth which appeared to be just a blob of pink, raw flesh, that inexplicably appeared literally overnight. Though Kimball wasn’t uncomfortable with several looking upon it at once, some of those present were clearly uneasy, so unnatural was its appearance. Yet, Kimball remained steadfastly optimistic as ever, as certain as he and Louann had been since this crisis (if it could be called such) began, that they would recover fully. His only complaint about the situation was that he was hungry—more than usual, in fact—so Bernadette left to get breakfasts for him and Louann.

Ages bade everyone else to accompany him into the next room. “Well, you’ve all seen it for yourselves,” he began. “If anyone has any ideas, let’s hear them.”

“I think there’s one we all have in mind,” said Johnathan, “and frankly, I can’t blame anyone for not wanting to say it out loud. Even with everything else that’s happened, it’s too fantastic.”

“What Tim suggested at yesterday’s meeting,” said Tallus. “Regeneration. That’s it, isn’t it, Johnathan?” There were many gasps of surprise but also expressions of agreement; fantastic or not, none who’d looked upon Kimball could deny this is how it appeared.

“Oh, now, this is going too far!” Ages said, voice rising, throwing arms into the air. “What are we, rodents or lizards? You’re actually suggesting he’s growing himself a new leg?”

“Something is definitely growing there,” said Samara, “and we’ve all seen his ear and his tail, too. There is new growth in all three places where there was loss of tissue.”

“Yes, of course,” said Ages with a sigh almost of resignation. “But what are we to do? Just throw everything out that we already know? It’s as if we’re suddenly expected to—to just accept so much that makes no sense, as if it’s the new order of things?” He shook his head and turned away, seemingly embarrassed by his own outburst.

“He has a point,” said Johnathan. “We are dealing with the unknown here; but just because it’s an unknown quantity doesn’t mean we should assume the worst for them. We have to keep giving hope, to them and ourselves.”

None could disagree; and yet, most would readily admit to feeling some degree of helplessness, since they were essentially at the mercy of someone or something completely alien to them. They had just begun to discuss the point when a minor commotion arose in the ward.

“What’s all the—” Ages said upon entering the room. “Oh, good morning, Patricia.” She was obviously in a state of near-shock from seeing Kimball in this new state, and he and Louann were hurriedly reassuring her.

“I’m all right, love. I know it looks strange, even frightening, but we’ll both come out of this all right.”

“Dad’s right, Mom. In fact…I feel more than ever that we’ll be…intact, whole when this is all over.” Louann raised a hand to the right side of her head, and winced slightly, but seemed untroubled by whatever caused her discomfort.

The gesture didn’t go unnoticed. Both Ages and Patricia asked how she was feeling, and her reply was one which, Ages would remark later, came as little surprise. “Would you…look at my right ear?”

They both did, gasping. “It…looks like it’s growing back, just like your father’s,” Patricia said breathlessly. It soon created quite a stir among everyone present, but after Bernadette returned with the patients’ breakfasts, everyone but medical personnel and Patricia agreed to take any further discussion elsewhere, and leave them to dine in peace.

The latest change in the two mice’s symptoms spread quickly, and all Freethorn was again abuzz with speculation. Many were curious to see them up close, but Ages continued to be adamant that the situation not become a sideshow, with only immediate family and a limited number of others allowed to visit.

Nicodemus took a deep breath as he and Jessica paused before the door to the ward. “It’ll be all right,” Jessica said, touching his shoulder. “Believe me, they’ll be very happy to see you.”

“Yes, I suppose. Well, after you, my dear.” They passed through, and the patients’ greetings immediately rang in their ears, more effusive and enthusiastic than Nicodemus was prepared for.

“Our dear friend Nicodemus!” said Kimball from his bed, arms spread. “How delightful!” Louann greeted him similarly.

“Well, you’re obviously feeling much better,” said Nicodemus, approaching Kimball’s bed first, knowing what to expect but still unable to completely restrain his surprise at the sight. “How…do you feel now? Does it hurt at all?”

“Still just a dull ache, nothing I can’t deal with.”

“And that’s without any painkillers,” added Jessica. “We haven’t given them any since last night.”

“Indeed.” Nicodemus nodded approvingly. “And you, Louann? How are you?”

“About the same. Just a mild headache. They asked me if I wanted anything for it, and I said…I don’t even know why, but I almost wanted to feel it, like…I needed to feel like…something was working. It’s hard to put into words.”

“And…you both still feel that…this will all work out for the better?”

“Indeed we do,” answered Kimball. Louann nodded her agreement. “I feel more than ever that, whatever does happen, I will cherish you for the rest of my days….even if you weren’t directly responsible.”

“Well,” began Nicodemus, unprepared for such a level of thankfulness, “I can only hope to…continue to be worthy of that honor.”

As he said this, Louann’s mate and children entered the room. They went straight to her bedside, where she assured them she was feeling better, showing them how her right ear was growing new flesh; as if, Teelo immediately concluded, it were growing back to its old appearance, before her accident.

Jessica was about to show him how the same thing was happening to Kimball, on a greater and even more unbelievable scale, when he first noticed Nicodemus, giving a start. “I, uh…didn’t expect, er…I guess you heard about…last night, what I did.” Teelo scratched his head. “I’m sorry, I…I just lost my head, I guess.”

Nicodemus smiled reassuringly. “You’re in love, Teelo, and worried about those you love; and you reacted accordingly. You may not have exercised your best judgment, but you have since acknowledged your error; and no permanent harm was done.” He touched Teelo’s shoulder, half-expecting him to shrink back; but he stood firm.

“They tell me…you don’t know why this happened, but…it hasn’t happened to anyone else. Even Jessica, and you and she have been together a lot.”

Louann expressed how proud she was of him, after which he and the girls returned attentions to Kimball. After they’d seen the changes in him for themselves and been given the lowdown on what had been happening, Teelo suddenly appeared struck by a major revelation. He quietly but urgently exchanged words with Louann, then said to everyone: “If Kimball’s leg is growing back, and his tail and ear, and…and if Louann’s ear is too, then…what about her eyes? She could see again, couldn’t she?”

“We…had considered the possibility,” said Jessica. “But until we know what’s really going on here, we shouldn’t get our hopes up.”

“I still feel that, no matter the outcome, things will be better, maybe for all of us.” Louann squeezed Teelo’s hand and invited Sharla and Tess to snuggle with her.

Patricia entered the room and greeted everyone, expressing surprise to see Nicodemus but pleased he’d decided to end his self-imposed “house arrest.” She sat on the edge of Kimball’s bed and held his hand. “I tried to return to work on my project,” she confessed, glancing toward Nicodemus. “But I couldn’t help it, I…I just feel so torn. Oh, Kimball…I know you said to try to throw myself into it, but…I just can’t help but worry. I mean, look at this!” She indicated the new growth at his hip. “It’s just so unnatural, how can I not worry?” She looked contrite and added, “I’m sorry, I don’t mean to bring everyone down.”

“Don’t worry about it, love,” said Kimball.

“Unnatural it may appear, but your own feelings are entirely natural, my dear,” said Nicodemus. “And if all we can do is wait, then we may as well be optimistic.”

“I know, Nicodemus, and I am trying.” Patricia’s expression suddenly brightened. “Oh! I almost forgot. Johnathan’s getting ready to go to Timphon to recall the exchange party, and everyone who wants to greet them will meet at the big burr oak in about two hours.”

“Well!” said Kimball. “I’d clean forgotten about that, even though we discussed it yesterday. I must say, we’ll have far more surprises in store for them than we’d thought.” None could know then just how great an understatement that would prove to be.

“And perhaps they’ll have the same for us,” suggested Nicodemus.

A familiar flash of light, and those who’d come to see Johnathan off brought their hands down from their eyes.

“Well, off he goes,” said Michael. “It’s going to be great having everyone back, but…”

“But what?” asked Cynthia, as the group moved away from this spot between the colonies, close to the site of Stuart’s recent “accident.”

“Oh, I probably shouldn’t be saying this, but…I have to wonder if they’re not safer where they are now, at least until all this weirdness blows over.”

“Oh, Michael, now you’re talking like yesterday! Tim still believes they’ll be all right; your Dad and Louann, that is.”

“Yeah, and you’re almost making it sound like we should all evacuate from here,” said Lucy.

“And we’re all pretty decided that that’s not an option,” added Myrna.

“Okay, okay,” said Michael. “There’s no need to gang up. It was just a thought. But the point is, we still don’t know what else might be coming, and we can’t take anything for granted. I don’t think I’m being excessively cautious or pessimistic here.”

“No, you’re not, sweetie,” said Cynthia, squeezing his arm. “And we do have plans of our own today, don’t we, which we’re still looking forward to?” She gave a subtle wink.

“Cynthiaaa…”

“What? What great secret are you guys sitting on?” Lucy grabbed Michael’s other arm, jumping up and down.

Michael looked exasperated. “We just...need to meet somebody first, and then…”

“A big announcement, right?” cut in Bertie. “Gosh, sure can’t imagine what that would be…”

Michael looked at Cynthia, sighing. “We’ll never lose this crowd now, so we might as well tell them.” Cynthia agreed; and, managing to keep the “crowd” down to just six (the rest of the group, mostly rats, having left already), they told them of their wedding plans.

“Wow, that’s amazing,” said Teresa, coming out of a hug with her sister. “Congratulations! Boy, Jessica was right on the money when she said you’d do this in a big way.”

“I’ll say,” said Martin. “Man! Our own little Cynthia! Who’d have thought it?”

“So once we round up Nicodemus,” said Karen, “we can let everyone else know, right?”

Timothy suddenly came around the tree trunk by which this impromptu meeting was held. “Hey, everyone. Did I miss Dad’s leaving already?”

“Uh, yeah, you did, Tim,” said Cynthia.

“Oh, well, that’s okay, now we can prepare for the big return.” Acknowledging the apparent halt of conversation, he added, “Did I miss something else?”

Agreeing that if anyone should know in advance, it would be Timothy, Michael and Cynthia filled him in. He stared silently for a moment, a rarity for him; and then offered his congratulations, adding that he was sure Nicodemus would be honored to officiate.

“Hmm…‘not easily shocked,’ huh?”

Timothy acknowledged Lucy’s remark before saying to Michael, “If you don’t mind, I’d like to steal this young lady of yours for a little while.” The twins moved over to a private little hollow beneath a nearby oak root.

“Wow…married!” said Timothy after they sat down. “That’s just…ah…what can I say, I’m speechless! I’m happy for you both, Cynthia, I really am.”

“Thanks, Tim.” She kissed his cheek. “But I can’t believe you were so surprised.”

“I’m not. I mean…it’s not like I wasn’t expecting it. It’s just…I guess…it’ll change so much between you and me, and the relationship we’ve always had.”

“Oh, Tim…” Cynthia had fully expected this. She leaned her head on his shoulder. “You’ll always be my number one soulmate. I love Michael with all my heart, and we won’t have secrets from each other. But it’ll still be that way between me and you, too, just like it’s always been.” She squeezed his hand.

“I know. I guess…I just needed to hear it from you, to make sure things hadn’t changed. It’s silly, I know…”

“Well…just wait until you and Lucy start getting more serious. I’ll probably start getting a little ‘silly’ myself.”

Timothy kissed her cheek and they continued discussing the point, agreeing it probably wouldn’t become a major issue for them, mentioning in passing that he and Lucy might well be getting “more serious.” Cynthia was thrilled but promised to keep it between them.

As they prepared to return to the others, who had continued to hang around nearby, Timothy remembered the news he was going to share a few minutes ago.

After doing so, Teresa said, “Wow…they changed that much just since they woke up?”

“Yes, and even Mr. Ages is starting to believe this is something that’ll benefit them.”

“Aaaaoouww!”

“I’m sorry, Kimball, but this is necessary.” Bernadette eased up a bit in her examination, which to her patient was just a lot of poking and prodding. “I know it’s sensitive, but—”

“Sensitive? My friend, sometimes you have all the sensitivity of a one-ton boulder!”

Bernadette laughed. “Well, I think that’s enough for now.”

“At least until the next really noticeable change, eh? Which could be well within the hour, the way it’s been going.” Kimball sighed. “Oh, I know it’s necessary. None of us ever expected to experience anything like this. As optimistic as I still feel, I’m beginning to feel as if we’re…someone’s test subjects.”

Bernadette raised a brow. “I can’t blame you for feeling that way. And who knows, there may be something to it, with all the talk of this ‘presence.’”

“And this ‘test of our resolve,’ with the anomaly-creatures and the storm,” said Kimball. “If that’s what they are, I guess those weren’t the last of them.” In the next bed, Louann gave a moan and stirred, having gone back to sleep within the last hour.

“Now, let’s have none of that language,” said Ages quietly from the doorway of the adjoining room. “Not until we have more concrete answers. And let Louann have her rest, too. Bernie, would you step in here, please?”

Away from their patients’ ears, Bernadette ran down the results of her just-completed examination. “It’s just as we suspected. There really does seem to be bone growth. I’m not ready, either, to state beyond a doubt what’s happening to him; but, with every passing hour there are new developments, literally. Something is definitely growing where his leg used to be, and it shows no signs of stopping.”

“You may well be right. His ear and tail, and Louann’s ear, are showing all the signs of being restored, so I suppose I may have to accept this whole ‘new leg’ idea after all.” Ages shook his head. “What is the world coming to? Next I’ll be expected to believe that any of us could fly, just by willing it.”

Bernadette gave a small laugh. “I wouldn’t go that far. But then, there’s always—”

A cry arose from the next room. Ages and Bernadette immediately recognized Louann’s voice, and dashed to investigate. She had started to awaken when Kimball gave his howl of discomfort, but now she stared straight ahead, gaping.

“Louann, what’s wrong? Are you all right?” Bernadette touched her shoulder.

“Bernie, I…It…” She turned her head, facing Bernadette squarely. “There’s light, I…I can see light! Am I still dreaming?”

“No, definitely not. Can you see my face?”

“I…I can see light around you, I think…I can make out the outline of your head. It’s still dark, but…it’s so much better than before!”

“It’s really happening,” said Kimball, “just as Teelo said! Just as my leg’s growing back, Louann’s getting her sight back!”

Ages and Bernadette looked at each other. Neither would admit it then, but both knew that recent events, with their own internal logic, were leading toward that very conclusion.

By the big burr oak, the steady hum of conversation was interrupted, as expected, by the sudden flash of light heralding the return of those whose friends and loved ones had gathered here. When everyone looked, a party of six mice and six rats stood at the spot, re-orienting themselves to their surroundings.

“Wow, look, Daddy! We’re really back!” exclaimed Todd as he and his siblings looked all around.

“That we are,” said Norman as his children rushed to greet familiar faces at the front of the crowd. They laughed and shrieked as they greeted their “close” cousins and their Aunt Jessica, as Jordan and Portia’s family were reunited with their friends and extended family.

“Boy, you guys won’t believe the stuff that’s been going on here!” enthused Stuart. “I wouldn’t even know where to start.”

“Well, Johnathan’s already given us the basics,” said Norman. “I can’t wait to meet Nicodemus. A whole new body, that’s really amazing.”

“Well, he was the main reason we’d planned on recalling you all early,” said Johnathan, “but there were other developments…”

“Which you barely touched upon,” said Jordan. “We’re to be ‘debriefed,’ then?”

“You can call it that,” said Justin to his brother-in-law. “So, whenever you’re ready, we can begin right here, as soon as some others arrive…”

“Hey, there’s Teresa, Dad,” said Martha, pointing. Norman turned and saw her, arms spread in greeting.

“Welcome home,” she said as they embraced. “I’ve really missed you.”

“I thought about you every day,” said Norman, oblivious to Lisa and Todd’s chortling. “When we get a bit of time alone, I’ve got a surprise or two.” He quickly added, “For everyone, not just you. Though I’d bet they’re not as big as the ones you have for us.”

“Well, the jury’s still out on most of ours,” said Justin. “Actually, all of them, when it comes down to it.”

“Well, we can get started on them anytime,” said Isabella, indicating the approach of several more mice and rats, with Nicodemus, Patricia, and Madeline leading the group.

Over the next several minutes, Norman and his children were reacquainted with the rest of their extended family—with notable exceptions. Carla was the first to ask, “Where’s Grandpa and Grandma?” and many noticed that, though Teelo, Sharla and Tess were present, Louann was not. Johnathan and Timothy quickly assured them that their absence tied in with one of those “other developments” but was no cause for alarm, and they’d be able to visit them soon. Nearby, Teelo assured them silently that neither he nor the girls would spill any details prematurely.

They were properly introduced to Nicodemus, of course; and with help from Justin, Johnathan and others, were given the condensed version of his “resurrection” and return in Rollo’s body. He and Jessica were honest about their new relationship, as planned; and Norman reacted much as Jessica had expected, with the same kind of concern they’d always shown each other, since their “traveling” days after leaving Sampson: “I’m glad you’ve found someone, Jess, but I really hope you know what you’re doing.”

That was the least of it, as Norman and the other returnees soon found, as they were told of the anomaly-creatures; Stuart and Shirley’s “sibling power” that seemed to do away with them for good; the “unnatural” storm that seemed to permanently cripple Stuart only to be proven, by this same power, to be as false as Stuart’s own injuries; and finally, the bizarre condition that struck Kimball and Louann so suddenly, that increasingly showed signs of healing past injuries as if they’d never happened.

“So…can we see them?” ventured Carla.

“Not yet, I’m afraid,” said Johnathan. “Not until Ages and the others give the okay.”

“They said they needed to run some more tests,” said Justin. “All they would tell us is that their patients were fine but that it would be best if there were no visitors for the time being.”

There was some confusion and mild anxiety over this news, but it was tempered by curiosity over the rest of the story, especially where Stuart and Shirley were concerned. Their cousins were ready to proclaim them as heroes, as many Freethorners already had; but their uncle was careful not to heap too much praise on them, largely in deference to Clifford and Diane, telling them that they too will find their own special talent or ability someday.

“Well, since we’re all up to speed now, I guess we’ll leave you all to get settled back in,” said Justin.

“I need to get back to Medical,” said Jessica. “We’ll certainly spread the word if there’s further news.”

Michael and Cynthia looked at each other, knowing the time was right. After they called for the crowd’s attention, and before Jessica could leave, Michael began: “We thought now would be the best time to make this announcement, with my whole family together again, and before Nicodemus has to leave us. We…Cynthia and I…have decided to make…our love, our union, official.”

“And,” Cynthia quickly chimed in, “We want Nicodemus to help us make it official; if he’s willing, of course.”

There were many expressions of surprise giving way to congratulations, though the surprise wasn’t universal. Cynthia’s parents told her how they’d guessed they’d make the announcement after the exchangees’ return, but were genuinely surprised they’d want Nicodemus to officiate.

Nicodemus’s own surprise was genuine, but he was quick to allay any doubt, however small, about his willingness. “My children, it would be the greatest honor and privilege for me to officiate over your union. All you need do is choose a time and place.” He embraced each of them.

“We’re really glad you accepted,” said Michael. “I just hope that…whatever time we choose, a few things are resolved by then.” He looked at Cynthia and added quickly, “It’s not that I don’t believe Dad and Lou will get better. I just always feel better when things are resolved.”

“Under the circumstances,” said Nicodemus, “I can understand your being in less than a celebratory mood.”

“We don’t want to be wet blankets or anything,” said Cynthia. “Especially when there’s so much to be thankful and optimistic about.” Indeed, there seemed to be little, if any, dampening of enthusiasm. Lunch was still being served, so the exchange party adjourned to the dining hall, where there would be more detailed accounts told of recent experiences. Stuart and Shirley were visibly chomping at the bit to tell their uncle and cousins all about their experiences, with help from their friends.

“Well,” said Jessica to Norman, “Once more, I’ve got to get to Medical. I wish I could be more definite about when visitors are allowed.”

“Well, we’ll make it up there soon, hopefully by that time.” Scanning the crowd, Norman added, “Say, there’s Lilia, over there with Ellis. It’s good to see her out and about like this, and she seems quite happy, too. Boy, I can’t imagine what all that must have been like for her, having two different personalities.”

“She has adjusted well since then, but…she’s still very private, and doesn’t share everything that’s on her mind; but that’s true for all of us, isn’t it?” She looked at Nicodemus, each smiling as they noted how they’d kept their mutual feelings a secret from most at first. Stuart and Shirley, meanwhile, were reminded of their own observation of Lilia’s odd behavior from last night, but remembered their promise not to “tell tales out of school.”

As many moved on to meet at the dining hall, Jessica told Nicodemus that she wished him to meet her at Medical later, even before other visitors, only saying he should be there for what they’d expected to happen.

Chapter 41 - Portents of light and dark

There it is, my journey’s end finally at hand, thought Gwinthrayle as the last forested hill gave way to the familiar creek and gardens, in turn giving way to the tan-and-silver structure he called home, its domes and curves bringing a strong sense of relief and comfort to this weary traveler.

As his feet again made contact with the terrace adjacent to the pavilion, he felt momentarily as if he might stumble, then he steadied himself and walked toward the entrance, again thinking that this trip may have taken more out of him that he’d thought at the outset. Glancing down, he caught sight of a waktini trotting across his path, pausing to look up at him, seeming to welcome his approach.

“Ah, what a fine welcoming committee we have here,” he said as he knelt, offering the tiny creature his hand. It jumped onto his forearm but seemed uncertain of what to do next, its head bobbing to and fro before it jumped off, slipping into the nearby broad-leafed shrubbery like a stream of liquid gold.

Gwinthrayle straightened, contemplating the waktini’s behavior, so unlike the one that Lucy made friends with a week ago. He was distracted as he approached the door and saw the note rolled up inside the door handle. It was from Nicodemus, stating he’d dropped by to find Gwinthrayle not at home, though he was aware of why he was gone and wished him good fortune on his journey. Gwinthrayle sighed as he gestured, weaving the simple spell that “unlocked” the door, or more accurately removed the barrier that blocked anyone else’s access to the house in his absence. Would that you had greater success than I, my friend, he thought as he entered. He was sure that Nicodemus had no better luck in getting past the barriers that had impeded his own investigation, considering Nicodemus’s past inexperience in utilizing his powers in this dimension.

As he moved on to the pantry, he recalled the waktini’s uncharacteristic behavior. It had seemed nervous, distracted, as if preoccupied. Knowing that waktinis, more than most other creatures, are sensitive to disturbances in the environment, even ones several klivaphs away, he knew he’d best take this seriously, as a possible warning. He selected a few jorthna berries from the cold storage area and moved on to the study, where he stood in front of his Orb of Disclosure. After a moment’s concentration he made a sweeping motion with his arm.

Slowly an image came into view. His eyes grew wide and his jaw dropped, the berry he’d been chewing almost dropping out. He quickly collected himself. As the image faded, he immediately made to return outside. There would be no rest for him yet, he knew as he weaved another floating spell, one which quickly sent him sailing away toward the north.

“Are we gonna see Grandpa and Aunt Lou now?” said Lisa as the rat couple her father had been conversing with moved on.

“Yes, as soon as Aunt Jess and the others say it’s okay,” said Norman.

“I still don’t get it,” said Martha. “Why is that so important?”

“I wish I knew, hon. We just have to trust that it’s the best thing for them.” Right now, they knew no more than the general population: that the patients’ symptoms had changed, but no other details other than that they seemed to be in no danger. There was no real worry or anxiety, since they’d known Jessica all their lives and trusted her and her colleagues to know what’s best.

Of course, as with the general population, there was no shortage of speculation: “Lucy says it really looks like a new leg.” “Maybe he’s growing a new head!” (Giggles and chortles.) “Where his leg used to be? Don’t be silly, Todd!” “But they said his ear’s growing back! And his tail!” “Aunt Lou’s ear, too!”

“All right, kids, let’s settle down a bit. We’ll know soon enough what’s going on.” As Norman said this, they came upon the waiting area outside the ward, where several of Norman’s siblings and their families, and other mice and rats conversed quietly, though there was clearly an air of impatience about. He was a bit surprised upon seeing some of those waiting.

“Mother! They won’t even let you in?”

Patricia stood to hug her eldest son, then they sat down. “They’ve been as secretive with me as anyone. All Jessie will say is that they think it won’t be long before...something else happens, something more definite.” She greeted his children with hugs and welcomed Lisa and Todd onto her lap. “I’ve taken it seriously, of course, just as I’ve always taken all of you children seriously. But I still can’t help wondering: why all the secrecy? Even though I know it’s not just Jessie’s decision.” She went on to describe how she and everyone else waiting here had been encouraged to keep occupied with other things; and, though she herself had tried to return to her painting, she and the others found it near-impossible to stay away after the word had spread that there’d been drastic changes, even just since she’d seen Kimball earlier. Working on her painting had reminded her that Nicodemus had been allowed in the ward, and no one else, another great source of speculation.

Norman observed Teelo and his daughters among the crowd. He was visibly anxious, and Norman remarked on how difficult it must be for him to be kept from Louann’s side.

“Come on, Teelo, buck up,” said Bertie. “You know what they say: bad news travels fast. We haven’t heard a thing yet.”

“Bertie’s right,” said Orland. “Just keep telling yourself: whatever they have to tell us, it’ll be good. A big surprise, but the good kind.”

“Speaking of surprises,” said Lucy, nudging Bertie, “isn’t that Tara over there?”

Bertie looked to see his seemingly-mismatched paramour at the doorway of one of the examining rooms, speaking to Bernadette. Before she was done, her eye caught Bertie’s across the hall; and as she approached the crowd, Bertie felt trapped for a moment. What could he say to her? He felt a bit relieved when Lucy broke the ice, picking up on Tara’s own curiosity about Kimball and Louann, Bernadette obviously having not disclosed anything to her. She and Bertie exchanged little more than casual-sounding how-are-yous; but as she was leaving the hall, the two made eye contact one more time. Was there something more she wanted to tell him? He couldn’t be sure. So much of this relationship stuff was still so new to him. Maybe he should try to meet her later alone.

“Hey, Bert,” said Orland, “just what is up with you and her these days?”

“Hey, come on, Orland,” said Lucy.

“It’s okay, Luce,” said Bertie. “We’re just taking kind of a break from each other, that’s all.”

“By the way,” said Lucy to Orland, “where’s Lana? In class?”

“Uh-huh. She should be finishing up and on her way soon.”

Soon more mice arrived, including Lana, Ellis, Lilia, Boris and Seelah, who were quickly informed that there was nothing new to tell.

“Another ‘definite maybe,’” summed up Orland, Lana on his lap, after the two finished kissing their greetings. “The latest in a series, collect ’em all.”

“That’s been this whole situation, all right,” said Ellis. “Everything’s up in the air, wait-and-see. Nothing’s definite. It’s really getting old.”

“Aren’t we all,” said Bertie dryly. “Say, Lilia, what do you think of all this?”

She seemed surprised, then answered, “I guess…whatever Timothy says, and he thinks it’ll all come out fine.”

Timothy himself was just sitting quietly, as he’d been since this vigil began. He was well aware of how he’d become something of a living barometer for this situation, with everyone looking to him to keep him or her abreast of how it was going. Currently, he felt as positive as ever that nothing bad would befall Kimball or Louann, but knew the possibility of a turn for the worse, and he wouldn’t be able to hide any subsequent change in his own feelings. It would make him the harbinger of bad news, something he dreaded, for all he knew no one would blame him. He looked at Boris and Seelah, noting how happy they were over their own recent good news. He had an impulse to ask Boris directly if he still felt if his vision of impending doom and gloom was valid, then checked himself; now was definitely not a good time. Obviously, if Boris did feel that way, he wasn’t letting it get him down now. He may even have written it off completely.

Timothy mused on how different their abilities were: Boris would have these visions come to him completely unbidden and unexpectedly, making him almost dead to the world for brief periods; and have these visions invariably turn out to represent places, people and events that would affect him later, though they wouldn’t necessarily be a literal representation of future events. Timothy’s intuitive ability, on the other hand, never brought him visions and was felt entirely on an emotional level, and was always triggered by the onset of a situation which would look as if it might have a negative outcome. It would take the form of a strong feeling of confidence, as he still felt now; but if this feeling didn’t come to him, it could mean a bad outcome was imminent, though sometimes the feeling of confidence would come later.

He looked at his younger siblings sitting in a little circle on the floor with Norman’s two oldest as they regaled their playmates with tales of their adventures in Timphon. At least they didn’t seem to need any prompting to keep cheerful and optimistic. Now, some of the adults, on the other hand, were still glancing Timothy’s way occasionally, as if ready to pick up on the slightest change in his mood. He thought back to what Nicodemus had told him days before, about his being in a position of leadership. Certainly this was one of those times, his recent placement on the council serving to underscore it. Still, he would never have believed that “his time to lead” would take a form quite like this. He decided to forestall any further musing on the subject, and listen in on Martha and Carla’s description of their first visit to Timphon’s central marketplace.

They didn’t get very far into their story before the door to the ward opened. Clifford scurried to his grandmother’s side, hoping she hadn’t noticed his surreptitious attempt at eavesdropping. Jessica and Ages both emerged, making a point not to open the door too wide, galvanizing everyone’s attention. Neither spoke for a few seconds, but neither appeared ready to deliver bad news either.

“Patricia,” began Ages, “would you come in here, please? And Teelo, as well.”

“And bring the girls with you, Teelo,” added Jessica.

All four leaped to their feet and filed inside. “Be patient, everyone,” was all Jessica would say to the others before she and Ages followed, leaving a lot of headshaking, shrugs and all-around befuddlement.

“Well,” said Michelle, “at least now Mom can’t complain about being left out.”

“Yeah, but we still don’t know diddley,” said Bertie. “Why just them?”

“I think I can clear some things up,” said Bernadette, coming from the examining room. “There has been a major change, and there was a reason it’s been kept hush-hush all this time. In fact, it was Kimball and Louann’s idea.”

Once inside, everyone’s eyes immediately fell upon the two patients, but saw them in a less-than-expected way. Louann was sitting alongside her father’s bed, while Kimball was sitting upright. There was Nicodemus, too, standing on the opposite side. It looked as if the three had been in the middle of a normal conversation. Louann’s head turned quickly after they entered, a surprising enough response which became more so as she stood fully upright, showing no sign of unsteadiness. She faced Patricia directly, her eyes meeting her mother’s, expression one of unbridled joy. She said nothing but rushed forward, again not stumbling or faltering, straight into her mother’s arms.

“Louann…sweetie, are you…all right?” Patricia asked.

“I’m…more than all right, Mom,” Louann said haltingly but with elation. “I can see! I can see you, I can see everything and…everyone.” Her eyes fell upon the ones standing behind Patricia, instantly realizing their identities in spite of never having actually seen them clearly until today.

Teelo, Sharla and Tess could only stare silently, slackjawed, for a moment. For all they’d hoped for this very outcome, it was still the most amazing thing they’d ever seen. “Lou, you can…actually see us?” The girls echoed their father’s question.

For a moment Louann could only answer with a nod, breathless and speechless. Then she managed to say, “Teelo…Sharla…Tess. Oh, my god, you’re…so beautiful!” All four nearly collapsed to the floor as they embraced as one.

It was a moment all present knew would be the emotional high point in the lives of this young family. Patricia and Jessica embraced and wiped each other’s tears and then joined Ages and Nicodemus at Kimball’s bedside. None present could find words at this moment if they could speak, and even Ages was visibly choked up, shaking his head in disbelief of this latest apparent miracle.

Soon all in the room were gathered around Kimball’s bed, marveling at how the growth of his new leg—which, by now, even Ages had given up denying as such—had continued unabated. It was now half the length of his good one, and though no fur grew on it yet, it was already turning color from its initial raw, pink appearance to a more normal grayish skin tone. It was still quite sensitive to touch, and Jessica reminded the children of its for-now hands-off status. Nicodemus explained how he’d been brought in at Jessica’s suggestion, her idea being that perhaps if he were “closer to the action,” as it were, especially at the time of such dramatic developments, he might get close to the truth of what’s behind them. “I was hardly disappointed, though,” he said, “not when the results can bring such happiness.”

Louann, finally able to speak again, gave her father a hug and a kiss on the cheek. “Isn’t it wonderful, Dad? We’ll both be able to do so much we couldn’t for a long time.” She looked at Teelo, again overcome with emotion over how she could now look upon the face of the one she owed her life to and who had loved her unreservedly and unconditionally and who had given her two beautiful daughters whom she also could look upon for…

“Ooh! Jessie, I can’t believe I forgot!” Again Louann was too overcome to articulate her meaning, so Jessica stepped in to inform the newcomers of one more piece of good news: that this morning’s examinations confirmed that Louann was indeed pregnant.

“…and so,” Bernadette concluded after a deep breath, “I’m sure you all now realize why we chose to wait for the right moment, when Louann had regained enough of her sight to at least see people up close reasonably clearly.”

Johnathan, who, with Madeline, had joined the group waiting outside the ward in the middle of Bernadette’s explanation, added: “And why Louann’s family and mother were let in first, so she could have that moment with those she loves most.”

“That was a very thoughtful and beautiful thing you did for them, Bernie,” said Madeline.

“It sure was,” agreed Michael, “even if it did keep the rest of us on pins and needles.”

“So when can we see them, already?” asked Martha, she and her siblings more impatient than most.

“I think that’ll be left up to them,” said Norman. “If Lou’s as well as you’ve told us, you won’t need to keep her much longer.”

“It’s looking that way,” said Bernadette. “I’ll give them a little longer before checking on them.”

Seconds after she said this, Jessica stepped through the door. “Norm…everyone…Dad and Louann say: ‘The more the merrier.’” She started back into the ward, motioning for anyone to follow.

“Anyone,” of course, became “everyone,” as the hall quickly emptied. Inside the ward, the celebration over this unexpected good fortune continued. Congratulations abounded, as much for Louann’s pregnancy as for her blindness and balance problems being cured, as she moved freely about the room, needing no aid to keep her balance as she became as a whirlwind, drinking in the sight of each member of her extended family and anyone else in attendance, giving each a big hug before moving onto the next, beside herself over her rediscovered ability to see those she loved as well as hear, touch and smell them. Her joy, laughter and tears quickly became infectious, the news of Michael and Cynthia’s betrothel compounding the mood; and Ages, despite his initial fretting over so many visitors to “his” ward, was no exception. After all, it wasn’t every day that someone barely able to see or walk unaided made a nearly 100 percent recovery, with every indication that it wasn’t over yet; and it happened right before his eyes, never mind the cause or source.

And Kimball? Though he wasn’t receiving quite as much attention as his daughter right then, he didn’t mind at all. Though the turnaround in his condition had proven to be at least as dramatic, and easily more startling, this was Louann’s moment in the sun and he couldn’t think of doing anything to spoil it. He was hardly being neglected, though. Patricia was at his side almost the entire time, and everyone came by to gape and marvel at how his new leg was coming along. He wouldn’t allow anyone, even any of the medical staff, to refer to it as a “growth” anymore: “It sounds like I have some horrible disease!” Though he was resigned to being confined to the ward for the time being, he was determined that when it came time to leave, he would walk out upright, head held high, on his two good hind legs, instead of the awkward, half-hopping, three-legged gait he’d been using.

As the initial excitement quieted down, it was decided that Louann would be able to go home today. Though it had been determined that her sight wasn’t fully restored, Louann herself was positive that just since she’d seen Teelo and the girls for the first time less than an hour before, her sight had definitely improved; and if it weren’t 100 percent now, it soon would be.

After Louann and family (and most others) left the ward, discussion continued in their wake. Kimball, feeling no need for rest after all the excitement, began a speculative and largely fanciful discussion with Nicodemus, Johnathan and others over further possible “miracles” and what they could mean for their future on Lahaikshe.

Norman and Teresa paused along the trail leading to the east side of the Rooftop. “Alone at last,” he said as he drew her to him. As they embraced, they spoke quiet endearments, saying how much they’d missed each other and looked forward to catching up, though—for now at least—not speaking of love.

As they moved along “upstairs,” Teresa said, “Was it hard for you to get away?”

“No, not really. I think my kids could use a break from me for a while.”

Teresa laughed. “Well, my boys are in good hands right now.” Briefly she recalled how Sarah—who was babysitting them now—had greeted Norman upon his return; looking to Teresa to be regarding him with more than simple admiration, something that, somehow, didn’t bother her as much as she might have expected.

Halfway up the trail, she said, “Well, no one seems to have followed us up here, so…do you think you can tell me why we’re here? Where are we going?”

“You’ll see. Come on, you like surprises, don’t you? Like when your dad showed you your new quarters the day you returned?”

Teresa rolled her eyes. “All right. And if you told me what it was, it wouldn’t be a surprise, et cetera.” She laughed. “Well, what’s one more, after everything else this week?”

“Really. Maybe this can’t top getting your legs or eyes back, but…well, I’ll let you decide.”

They continued on until they reached the Rooftop, from which they could see across the Great Red Plain to the edge of the forest, beyond which lay Timphon (where Norman and family had spent the past two weeks), Gwinthrayle’s home, and many other locales Teresa was familiar with. It was always an impressive view, but it too was familiar, so…

“So…are we supposed to meet somebody here?”

“You could say that.” Norman shaded his eyes as he scanned the skies, at first directly overhead, then closer to the horizon. Teresa made to say something, but decided to reserve comment for the time being, and when Norman looked at her and said, “It shouldn’t be too long,” she only replied with a mildly impatient “I’m waiting” look.

It was after about seven minutes of this that Teresa noticed something in the sky other than a few clouds. “Say, there’s a mhys’haspa.” She pointed toward it, but Norman had already taken notice of it; and, it almost seemed, was pleased at its appearance, almost as if… No, that’s silly. Dismissing the notion, she added, “Did you hear that we had one visit us the day after you left?”

“Mmm…yeah, just a bit. I wonder if this is the same one.” He definitely sounded preoccupied, but Teresa made no mention of it, instead describing more of that earlier encounter, emphasizing how she and her sons had a “front-row seat” for its visit. As she did, the mhys’haspa could definitely be seen to be coming both closer to Freethorn and lower in altitude than when they first spotted it.

“…and then Torrance and Hazel decided to view him up close. They went right up and touched him on the side, and he just looked at them. All along, he was very casual, and…”

“Excuse me, Teresa, I have to, um, do something here…” Placing hands on either side of his muzzle, Norman gave a high-pitched, five-note whistle, seemingly directed at the mhys’haspa. Before Teresa could ask if it was, he repeated the “song”; and as she watched, jaw steadily dropping, the great flying creature descended further, bringing its flight path ever closer to the spot where the two mice stood.

“Norman, maybe we should stand back,” said Teresa, not afraid for their safety but still cautious, and not yet ready to admit the possibility that the mhys’haspa was responding to Norman’s summons—if it could be called that.

Norman did step back a short ways to allow their guest more landing room. It flapped its wings to allow it to descend vertically onto the surface of the Rooftop. It landed easily and remarkably lightly, carefully folding its wings afterward. Norman strode right up to it, stroking its muzzle and making clicking and trilling sounds. It responded with a low, contented-sounding rumble from its throat.

Teresa approached more slowly, more out of disbelief than caution. “Okay, Norman, you’ve surprised me. So how did you ever…I mean, in only two weeks, you can…talk to mhys’haspas?” In past encounters, Johnathan and a few others had learned to communicate with them on only a rudimentary level, mainly enough to ask them to keep out of their vegetable gardens.

“Well, it was almost by accident. Long story short, I met an old Rusay man who told me how he’d learned it when he was young, and not just communicating with them, either.”

By now Teresa recognized this one as the same that had paid Freethorn a call before. “Gwinthrayle said he knew of a few who could, and he knew at least one personally, when they were younger.” She stroked the beast’s broad neck.

“That was probably him. Adiuma was his name, and he did mention Gwinthrayle: ‘the old wizard of the eastern hills,’ he called him. So…are you ready to take a ride?”

Teresa stared. “You-you’re not serious? He’ll actually let you…”

Norman got close to its ear and made more clicking and whistling sounds. In response, the mhys’haspa crouched lower, and allowed Norman to leap squarely onto its upper back.

Teresa shook her head. “I don’t believe this. Gwinthrayle said it takes months, even years, to get them to…to even let you on its back!”

“Well, even Adiuma said he’d never seen anything like it. Apparently, I’ve got a rapport with them that, according to him, no Rusay has ever had. But when I found out I had it, right away I thought of you, and how you used to fly with those crow friends of yours. So…are you ready? Don’t worry, he’ll let you on too. Just jump on like I did.”

Teresa took a deep breath, still scarcely able to believe it; then she tensed and propelled herself behind Norman. The mhys’haspa showed no adverse reaction to having two mice on its back. Norman prepared himself and Teresa, instructing her to lie on her abdomen and hold onto their mount’s neck-ruff. He lay down likewise alongside her and gave their mount another “request”—as opposed to command, as he would put it later. Now, he explained, the mhys’haspa would take them where they wanted and would follow further directions once they were airborne.

“We’re really doing this, aren’t we?” Teresa said as she took hold of a clump of fur.

“Well, if you don’t feel like it…”

“No, let’s do it, if we can.”

“Then brace yourself.” He gave another whistled request, and the mhys’haspa raised its wings and pushed itself upward. Its passengers held on tightly as it flapped its wings, at first swiftly as it sought to gain altitude, seemingly taking little more effort than usual in spite of the added burden. Teresa’s heart beat like a triphammer. It was the first she’d flown like this in over two years, and she was immediately transported back to that first time Jeremy had given her and other family members a ride, way back when. It was a flight both petrifying and exhilarating, and an experience she immediately knew she’d have to repeat as often as possible. And so she had, but when Jeremy and his mate Beatrice had moved out of the area, no more opportunities arose, because her family had made no more acquaintances with crows or other birds that would be willing or able to oblige them.

But now…as this majestic flying creature so unlike a crow soared on updrafts to take them ever higher above the rust-colored plain, she felt like a young girl again. This time, though, with this less-familiar creature bearing them aloft, there was an added element of uncertainty that she found made it more exciting. She turned her head toward Norman and leaned closer, kissing his cheek.

“How do you like it so far?”

Catching her breath, Teresa replied, “Well, I…still can hardly believe you mastered this so soon, and I’d like to hear all about it, but…right now, it doesn’t matter! I just love it!”

“I’m glad.” Norman raised himself to a more upright position, and indicated it was all right for Teresa to do likewise. Now they were both on their haunches, though still keeping a firm grip on their mount’s ruff. With a better view of their surroundings, they could see they were now over the forest. Norman explained how they could direct the mhys’haspa to turn to the left or right by gentle tugs on one side of his nape or the other. Similar motions would prompt him to ascend or descend. All the while they were on its back, it would execute no maneuvers that might dislodge its passengers, such as banking too sharply.

“So,” Norman then asked, “Where do you want to go?”

“Does it matter?’ said Teresa. “We’re flying!” She curtailed her enthusiasm enough to add more sensibly, “We probably shouldn’t be gone too long, though. No one knows we’re out here.”

“We’ll give it about a half-hour or so. In the meantime…west, north, south, you name it.”

“Okay, well…I’ve been wanting to see Lake Vin’hag again. Tim and the others swung by it on the way to Gwinthrayle’s last week. Wait’ll you see the ta’nakrivs, they’re really amazing.”

Lake Vin’hag lay due south, and all it took was a slight tug on the right side of the mhys’haspa’s nape; and sure enough, he wheeled around till they were headed in that direction, then Norman eased his grip and they were flying straight again. Teresa couldn’t get over how easy he made it look, and wondered if this newfound ability of his was one more indication that they truly belonged here on Lahaikshe. How could it not be so, that one not native to this world could have such a rapport with some of its creatures? Could it possibly extend to other species besides mhys’haspas? But no, these are all questions for later. For now, this was a moment to revel in and savor.

Soon, a small body of water came into view. Teresa confirmed it was Lake Vin’hag, dead ahead, so on they continued.

“I can see those trees already,” said Norman, “the ones that look like giant cattails. What are they called again? Teresa?” He glanced over to see her staring intently at another area of land, off to the left. “What is it? What do you see?”

“I’m not sure. It may be nothing, but…something doesn’t look right.”

Norman shaded his eyes. “You mean that open area?”

“Yeah. I don’t remember seeing it before, at least not one that big.”

“So do you want to swing by there?”

“Could we? I’ve got to see this up close.”

“Well, now you’ve got me wondering, so…” Norman reached over to her side and showed her how to steer the mhys’haspa to the left, and then resume a straight course once the open area was straight ahead.

Soon they were close enough to more accurately gauge how large it was, and how unnatural it was starting to look to both of them.

“It doesn’t look like anything’s growing there,” observed Teresa.

“Yeah, and look at the contrast with the—” The rest of Norman’s statement fell away as their mount made a sudden sharp dip. With their insides doing somersaults, both mice tightened their grip instinctively.

“Wha-what’s he doing, Norman?” an almost-breathless Teresa managed to say.

“I don’t know…” Norman leaned closer to the mhys’haspa’s ear and “spoke.” Seemingly in reply, it made a low groaning sound that neither had heard from its kind before. It did stabilize its flight enough, though its passengers could tell it was still agitated about something. Its wingbeats seemed stiffer and less relaxed, its head turned from side to side almost jerkily, and they could feel its back muscles tensing.

“What would possibly upset him like this?”

“I don’t know, but…Adiuma said that they’re sensitive to a lot of things Rusay aren’t; and us too, I guess.”

“Hey, I think we’re… Are we turning away from the…”

“I didn’t ask him to, but we definitely are.” The mhys’haspa was veering away from the site. Norman tried to get to turn back, but it refused, only giving the same low groan. Its passengers looked at each other with the realization that whatever had it spooked, it had to be connected with what lay ahead, and that they weren’t the only ones who thought there was something decidedly unnatural about the place.

“Well, I can’t and won’t force him,” added Norman, “so I guess we’ll turn back to the lake.”

“I still think we should have a look at it up close, Norman,” said Teresa. “It might be something we should all know about.”

Bowing to her greater experience with this world, he agreed. “Yeah, maybe you’re right.” He glanced over to his right. “I guess we could land as close as he’ll allow, and we can hoof it the rest of the way.” He directed the mhys’haspa to descend, and it began to, though it seemed as if it would prefer to turn away completely and put much more distance between itself and the source of its fear.

A small clearing came into view, and they made for it. Soon, the mhys’haspa had brought them down to it, landing gently. The beast was calmer now, but Norman knew this was as close as it would accompany them.

“Poor creature,” said Teresa as she stroked its neck. “Why would he have been so scared of that patch of land? If that’s what did it.” She slid off its back to the ground.

Norman did likewise. “There was definitely something in there he didn’t like. Either that, or…”

“Or maybe the fact that there seems to be nothing there. Maybe that’s it. Well…” She turned, shading her eyes, scanning the area. “I think it’s this way.”

“Are you sure about this? We don’t know how long a walk this’ll be, and it’s sure to make us late.”

“I know, but we’ve got to find out what we can. It’s got to be serious.” Teresa looked at the mhys’haspa. “He’ll wait for us, won’t he?”

“I’ve already asked him to,” said Norman, “and he agreed.” Teresa took his hand and they started off through the forest. The mhys’haspa, seemingly much calmer, settled down and began grooming itself.

“Well, it was a nice ride anyway,” said Teresa with a sigh, smiling faintly at him. Along the way, Norman told her more details of how he met Adiuma and first realized his own rapport with mhys’haspas.

They’d only walked for about twelve minutes, through woodland that was mostly free of underbrush and easily accessible, before they could see its edge just ahead. Relieved that they had been heading in the right direction, they quickened their pace. But before they’d even reached the edge, both felt some apprehension, and looked at each other, realizing they shared the feeling. Was it because they knew not quite what to expect ahead, or was this a small degree of the same aversion the mhys’haspa felt? Either way, there was no turning back.

Soon, they reached it, stopping dead in their tracks, gaping at the awful spectacle before them, taking it all in in an instant but still finding it hard to fathom. It was nothing but dust and ash that greeted them, all across the roughly-circular plain, flat enough for them to see almost all the way around and that it stretched on for three, maybe four miles.

“My god, Norman,” Teresa finally said, “what could have done this?”

“Nothing natural, that’s for sure. Has Gwinthrayle or any other Rusay ever described anything like this?”

“No, never. Look at how it stops right here, with such a sharp border.” She stood with legs spread slightly. “Look. I can stand on the ground that’s still normal, and on…where it isn’t.”

Norman looked down the border, marked by trees that looked very much like ones that had close neighbors until recently, not at all like a normal forest’s edge. Even with his relatively brief time on Lahaikshe, he could tell this much. He knelt and picked up a handful of the colorless ash, letting it sift through his fingers. “It sure wasn’t a fire, not the way it stopped so abruptly.” He picked up another handful of ash, examining it more closely. “Look at this. I’ll bet all of this is plant material, but…it’s like something drew all the life out of it and…just crushed it, literally.”

“And if it happened here…” Teresa took Norman’s arm, expression revealing the dread they both felt. “We’ve got to get back now, tell everyone!”

“You don’t have to tell me twice.” Norman took one more look across the plain, then started to turn; then did a double-take, reacting to something he’d glimpsed. “Teresa, look!”

They both saw it clearly: something floating several feet above the plain. A mhys’haspa? Though it was hard to gauge distance over such a flat area, they could tell this was something much smaller, and definitely floating instead of flying, and approaching swiftly, appearing every bit as unnatural as the plain it traversed.

Both mice felt the urge to flee, but Teresa hesitated. “I think we should see what this is, or who.”

“If it’s a ‘who,’ he’s probably gloating over his handiwork, and ready to add us to it!”

“No, I don’t think so.” Seconds later, the approaching figure was definitely recognizable as a Rusay; and then, as even more. Teresa’s expression brightened and she began waving her arms. “Gwinthrayle! Gwinthrayle, over here!”

But the approaching figure was already well aware of the two mice’s presence, and had been making this approach specifically to meet them. Soon they were close enough to recognize faces, upon which Gwinthrayle came down to ground level. “Well, Teresa! And...Norman, is it? You and your family returned to Freethorn, I gather.”

“Yes, not two hours ago. It’s good to see you again.”

Teresa was less restrained, giving Gwinthrayle a big hug. “Oh, are we ever glad it’s you! Do you have any idea what happened here?”

“No, not as yet; but I came here specifically to investigate something unnatural. You might say a little waktini told me.” He went on to describe how, almost by accident, he’d discovered a similar phenomenon clear across the world and had spent the past few days making the round trip to investigate the matter. But even with help from his old colleague S’porssig, his investigation proved next to fruitless, as if some unknown force were blocking their efforts.

“Nicodemus said you’d been away,” said Teresa, “but even he wasn’t sure why. And come to think of it, he said he’d run up against something, too, when he’d tried to investigate those other things, something that blocked him…”

“Whatever’s going on, this is getting scarier by the minute.” Norman looked over the dusty plain again. “If this has already happened twice…” He could only complete his sentence with a shudder.

“Gwinthrayle, can you get us back to our mhys’haspa quick?” asked Teresa.

“To your…” It occurred to Gwinthrayle that he hadn’t asked how these two came to be here. “Well, of course I’ll take you where you want, and you can explain on the way. Take my hands, both of you.”

Chapter 42 - Miracles and visions

Across Freethorn, the latest news from Medical was, naturally, the main topic of conversation; and though many believed it to be good tidings, there were some who still felt it prudent to take a wait-and-see attitude, just because so much about Kimball and Louann’s recovery was so unnatural. Invariably, the counter-argument would be that the experiments that made them all what they are were just as unnatural. At least, some pointed out, it was a fair bet that the NIMH treatments had nothing to do with it.

Johnathan and Madeline Brisby were firmly in the latter category; and as they presently walked arm-in-arm along the trail to the Mouse colony, he was mostly silent for a minute. Then, anticipating his wife’s question, he told her that recent events had gotten him thinking about his first, unwilling, stay on this world, and especially all they’d learned about the Stone’s origins, when brothers Pharsal and Arvasa brought a sample of the raw ore from that inhospitable, hostile dimension, at the cost of Arvasa’s life.

“I still wonder just how much Pharsal knew, back when he set so much in motion,” mused Johnathan. If there’s some kind of unseen presence here that’s responsible for all this strangeness, he almost surely would have had to have come in contact with it, considering his history; and especially, how he was able to reach the Dark World.”

“Do you think that...even if he were aware of it, he may not have told us anything about it?”

“It’s possible. For reasons of his own, maybe, or he may have thought it unimportant to us at the time. He certainly couldn’t have foreseen that we’d all be living here someday.”

“His time was so brief after his spirit was drawn out of the Stone, that maybe he just simply didn’t have enough time to tell us.” Madeline sighed. “I’m starting to wonder if we’ll ever truly know what’s going on.”

“With the trouble Nicodemus has been having getting answers, I wouldn’t hold my breath. I’m not ready to join the doomsayers, though; Boris’s vision notwithstanding.”

“Do you think…that means something bad’s in store for us?”

“Of course, I want to say no, absolutely not. But Justin’s right, we can’t just dismiss anything out of hand either. And I’m starting to feel as if…I’m the one, or really you and I, with our command of the amulet, who will have to be vigilant, always alert for signs of the next big threat that might force us to move. Again.” Johnathan sighed, and they paused to embrace.

“It’ll be all right, darling. Whatever happens, we’ll still have each other. All of us will.”

“I know, but…it just feels like we’d be letting everyone down, after going on for so long about how safe it is here; especially the new mice, who knew nothing of us, and the sales pitch we gave them…” He sighed again, shaking his head. “I know. If I didn’t have something to worry about, et cetera. So…on to less weighty matters. It’s your turn helping out in the kitchen tonight, isn’t it?”

This was a duty everyone in the council performed on a rotational basis, including Justin. The idea had been proposed two years before, and it had gone over well, surprisingly so to some. Since the Rats’ ordeals of breaking down and giving up their old home and relocating to Thorn Valley, a greater sense of egalitarianism had predominated. Everyone was already helping out in the farm fields, so most felt that helping to prepare and serve meals and to clean up afterwards would be another good way to keep everyone grounded.

Madeline laughed. “Of course! Mine and Jolene’s. So I guess I’ll…”

A quiet, moaning sound interrupted her. They looked toward its source, coming from the opposite side of a nearby tree, and went to investigate. A young mouse sat, head down, leaning sideways against a root. Both Johnathan and Madeline took him for Boris at first, given his recent troubles; but they quickly saw his fur was of a lighter color. As he became aware of their presence, they could see it was Reuben, apparently surprised that he’d attracted anyone’s attention.

“Is everything all right, Reuben? Anything we can do?” asked Johnathan as they both crouched in front of him.

“You can tell us, dear.” Madeline stroked his shoulder.

“And if you want it kept secret, you got it.”

Reuben tilted his head back, breathing in deep. His first instinct was to tell them it wasn’t serious, nothing he couldn’t deal with on his own. But no, those days were gone. He had friends now, people who cared about him. Yes, he could do this. “Well, I…I’m not sure where to… No, I do know. It was the day Nicodemus arrived, and that part of him inside me left me, like with Lilia and Boris. You remember how I had a lot to think about, and I left to be alone. Well, your son Martin came to me and…well, he said things that made me think, that helped me put things in…in…”

“In perspective?” offered Johnathan.

“Yeah, that’s the word, perspective. It’s like I suddenly realized…I could do more with my life, make new friends, meet new challenges. And I succeeded, I really did. They—Martin and Karen—accepted me as a friend, made me feel…wanted. I helped them with their babies, I learned a lot about taking care of them, and…it’s like they were teaching me, too. And I started taking my classes more seriously, and helping out in the fields more, and I found it to be so easy, now that I no longer felt I had to take care of Lilia all the time. It was all good, I…was sure it was.”

“But there was still something troubling you, wasn’t there?” asked Madeline.

Reuben nodded. “I’d see how happy Martin and Karen were together, the…love they have for each other. And their friends Lambert and Bertha, too, and so many others. Even Lilia…found love with Ellis. And you two! That story about how you were stuck here on Lahaikshe…” He indicated Johnathan. “…and he was sending messages to you, Madeline, with help from Gwinthrayle, to let you know he was still alive, and…still loved you. It was so amazing, like your love drew you back together, even though you were so far apart.

“But…who do I have? I know, I have people who care about me, I really believe that. I just…need more. I want to have…someone to love like that, who loves me. It’s…within me, I know I can do it.” He placed a hand on his chest. “I didn’t think it was…such a problem until today. But I saw how happy Kimball is, with all that’s happening to him, and Louann, too. I’m happy for them, I really am. But at the same time, it’s like…it just made it worse for me. I just started feeling so down, and then I’d start thinking about the past, and how I just didn’t seem to appreciate any of you, or what you did for us, even though I knew it wasn’t all my fault. It just got to be…too much, and…” Reuben hung his head, unable to hold back the tears.

For the next minute, the pair silently comforted him, and Johnathan considered that this certainly qualified as a matter less weighty and easier to deal with or give advice on. He told Reuben he once wrestled with the same matter years ago, and later that same day, Madeline came into his life. “That’s not to say you’ll meet your special lady today, Reuben, but she’s waiting for you, wherever and whoever she is.”

Reuben dried his eyes with a handkerchief and managed a smile. “You…really think so?”

“Of course, dear,” said Madeline. “It may take a while, but it will happen.”

“I…do appreciate what you’re trying to do, but…there aren’t too many female mice around here that are…eligible, that’s the word.”

“This is true,” said Johnathan. “But what about Zenia or Amelia?”

“Well, I like them, and we’ve gotten to know each other better, but…I don’t know, their kids are my half-siblings. It wouldn’t feel right.”

“Well…how about Sarah?” suggested Madeline. “If anyone’s eligible, she certainly is. Or…if you didn’t mind waiting a few years, one of the younger girls might turn out to be the one. Why, the last time you visited us, Shawna told me how much she liked having you around. I think she has a real crush on you.”

“I like her too, and all the younger kids. It’s just that…”

“You don’t want to wait,” finished Johnathan. “Very understandable.”

“That’s true. And I don’t think Sarah is…interested in me too much. So…what else could I do, besides return home? You know, back to Earth, and look for someone there?”

“That would be the only other option,” said Johnathan.

“I know you probably wouldn’t want to do that, though,” said Reuben. “You know, that whole thing about not having too many mice that didn’t get the treatments at NIMH, like you did.”

“Yes, we have discussed that matter, and we haven’t made any real conclusions about it yet.”

Johnathan nodded. “In fact, there’s been plenty of evidence to suggest that they become more like us after living among us for a while.”

“And I’m the earliest example of that,” said Madeline. “From our first days together, I felt like I’d changed in so many ways, and not just from being in love.” She looked over to Johnathan fondly. “And we later found out that I had become like Johnathan, right from the beginning, just by being his mate.”

Reuben nodded thoughtfully. “Uh-huh. And that was because of the NIMH treatment, wasn’t it?”

“Well, as far as we can tell, that was it, and that it’s probably unique to me,” said Johnathan. “How far it extends, and whether or not any other of us could be the same, the jury’s still out.”

“And you know how in the school, they’ve all been doing so good: Teelo, Zenia, Brummie, all of them, learning just as well as the rest of us. Do you think it’s something in this world, at least in their case?”

“With everything else that’s happened, it’s possible.” Johnathan paused to reach into the bag he’d been carrying and pulled out a piece of fruit. “We think Mr. Ages might have that same capability with Alma, with the way she’s blossomed. But nothing’s definite…yet.” He took a bite of the pale green fruit that looked much like a miniature pear, with pale yellow flesh. He drew out another and handed it to Madeline.

“It’s strange, but fascinating.” Reuben looked closer at what Johnathan was eating. “What is that? I don’t think I’ve eaten one of those yet. It smells really good.”

“It’s a kiatheio. Most of us just call ’em kias for short.” He handed it over to Reuben, this kind of food-sharing being a very common and casual thing here.

Reuben took a bite and his eyes widened. “Wow, it’s really delicious. Kind of hits you at first, but…mmmm.” He took another enthusiastic bite.

“You sure can’t stay mad or downhearted for long after having one of those. Guess I should have offered you one sooner.” Johnathan took out another one for himself.

“It’s all right, Johnathan,” said Reuben, with mouth still partially full. “I’m really glad we were able to talk like this. You both helped a lot.” He went to hug each of them. They soon picked up their previous discussion. “You know, if it’s something in this world that’s making the natural mice more like us, could it be something in the air, or maybe the water?”

“I wouldn’t rule it out,” said Johnathan. “It’s definitely something we haven’t been able to perceive…yet.” He again made a point of emphasizing the last word.

“Or…something in the food,” Madeline said quietly. They each looked at the kias in their hands, then at each other, unsure of what more to say; then, shrugging, each simply took another bite.

Bertie looked out over the lake, shading his eyes as he turned his gaze toward its north end, where swimming lessons were being conducted, the young students’ shrieks and laughter further reminding him of why he was here.

He turned away, sighing, facing the bank in this “traditional” meeting place, expression reflecting a mixture of curiosity and impatience. He recalled how, up in Medical a little over an hour ago, he’d given Norman a mild needling as he and Teresa were getting ready for some private catching-up time. He was ready to spend some time with Louann and Teelo after she was discharged when he was approached by Bernadette, who took him aside and quietly told him Tara wanted to meet him privately at their “usual” spot.

Now he wondered: why did she want to meet him now, after all this time? It had only been six days since their last meeting, when they’d mutually decided to take a break from each other; but of course it had seemed longer. Certainly she must have come to some kind of definite decision; he’d pretty much left things up to her to choose whether or not to continue their relationship. It was never really a spoken agreement, but Tara had so many other male rats to choose from; whereas for Bertie, as with Reuben, eligible female mice were in decidedly short supply. So it was understood implicitly, or seemed to be, that the ball was in her court. Of course, he hoped she didn’t want to just end it outright; he still had feelings for her, beyond a doubt, but…

Tara’s abrupt arrival interrupted his thoughts; she simply leaped over the sod-bank without announcement, landing right in front of Bertie suddenly enough to startle him. “Hi, Bertie,” she said simply.

“Hi yourself. You tryin’ to give me a heart attack, or what?”

“Sorry. I just…well, there’s been so much to think about lately, and I’m not just speaking personally.”

They chatted for a few minutes about Kimball and Louann, about what they’d been doing since last they met; but Tara finally admitted she was stalling. Bertie, still patient enough to let her make the first move, finally said, “So…what have you decided?”

Tara breathed in deep. “Well…you remember all we talked about last time? Well, something’s come up, and…it just feels so weird, having to tell you…” Bertie kept silent, but his curiosity was certainly piqued.

“I went to Medical this morning, as you know, and…well, I suspected it before, but now I’m sure of it. Bertie…I’m pregnant.”

Bertie’s jaw dropped. “Whoa…I guess I…shouldn’t be surprised.”

“Er…why? What are you saying?”

“I know, you’ve told me how much you wanted kids, and I guess you just couldn’t wait. It was Thurman, wasn’t it? I guess you ’n’ him have definitely made up…”

“Why are you saying this?”

“Hey, it’s no secret you’ve been seen with him. He can obviously give you something I can’t provide. But that’s okay, I was prepared to step aside. I hope you’ll be real happy. He is ‘your own kind,’ after all…”

“Bertie, will you shut up and listen for a minute?” He fell silent. “Now I know how this looks. Yes, I have been with Thurman. But, Bertie…you’re the only one I’ve joined with. It’s been just you.”

Bertie stared. “Oh, come on! I may be younger than you, but you’re not talking to a fetus here! Everyone knows that’s impossible! Even Tallus, and he knows more than anyone else, he’d say—”

In one swift movement, Tara had snatched Bertie off his feet and had him pressed against the bank, the two of them eye-to-eye. “Bertie…I mean it. I’m serious. There’s been no one but you. This is your baby I’m carrying.” Her tone, so familiar to Bertie from the many times they’d shared their thoughts and feelings with each other, reflected the deepest sincerity she could muster; and this, paired with the look in her eye, equally familiar, was all it took.

“You…you mean it. You are serious. But…but how?”

Tara set him back down. “I don’t know. Nobody does. But I have all the symptoms. I’ve got a little one growing in me, and it can’t possibly be anyone’s but yours…and mine.”

Bertie looked up at her face, then at her belly. He placed an ear against it. “Wow, I just…don’t know what to say, Tara. It’s the last thing I ever expected to hear.”

“You’re not the only one.” They both sat down.

“So…does anybody else know?”

“No one but Jessica and Bernie. I told them I’d tell you first, or anyone else I wanted to tell, before making it known to everyone.”

“Uh-huh. And what about Thurman?”

“He doesn’t know yet.”

“No, I mean…what about him…and you? He did visit you a day or two after that big meeting, didn’t he?”

“He did, but it was just to talk. He told me he really made that ‘your own kind’ remark mostly out of jealousy. We talked for a good hour or so, and I explained to him just how much I did care for you, and he was clearly disappointed that I wasn’t interested in him that way. I’ve always liked him, but I’ve never really seen him and me as a pair. He left looking so dejected that I couldn’t help feeling sorry for him. That’s the main reason why I decided to stay behind instead of going to Gwinthrayle’s. I guess…I did have some doubts, and I thought the best way to deal with them was for you and me to try to avoid each other. I know that’s not easy around here.”

“And…how about you and him? Did you…you know, avoid each other?”

“We only saw each other briefly, casually, after we had our talk, and never alone. I basically told him the same thing I told you, that I just thought we shouldn’t see each other for a while, without coming right out and saying that I needed to make a choice.”

“But I guess you did, finally…”

Tara nodded, and they embraced. They sat silently for a few more minutes, Bertie stroking Tara’s abdomen, moved beyond words by this development. Finally he said, “So…I wonder how it’ll turn out, how it’ll look…”

“I guess it’ll look like both a rat and mouse, but…any way it looks, it won’t matter.”

“I know what you mean. Tara, you know I’m gonna do all I can to really be a father to…to this child. I gotta admit I’m not really ready yet, but…of course, we’ll have plenty of help.”

“We sure will. I just wonder, though: we raised enough controversy just being together. What kind of reaction…will this get?”

“Well, we know not everybody’s going to be a jerk about it, like Herb or Velma or…that guy…”

“Thurman…”

“Yeah, him. But let’s remember what else was said at the meeting.”

“Right. If anyone finds he or she just can’t handle it, they can take a hike.”

“Mm-hm. But I’d still like to know how this is possible. Maybe Nicodemus could shed some light on it.”

“Why him? Seems like more of a medical or biological matter than something he’d…” Tara gave a faraway look. “Or would it?”

“Something in this world has got to be behind it. After all the other weird stuff that’s happened here…Hmm, come to think of it, Gwinthrayle would probably have some ideas.”

“Yeah, I haven’t met him yet, but…well, maybe we should concentrate first on telling everyone here.”

“Yeah, you’re right. You’re not…worried about anything, are you? I mean, since this is, well, kind of an unnatural thing to happen… Oh, boy, pretty bad choice o’ words, I guess.”

“That’s okay, Bertie, I know what you mean. And I’m not worried. I guess as long as it feels like a normal pregnancy, with no complications…then I’ll treat it like a normal one, and concentrate on looking forward to being a mom.”

“Yeah. And I know you’re gonna be a great one. Well...” Bertie stood up. “Who do we tell first?”

Tara followed suit. “How about we start with your folks?”

“Okay. Then yours?”

“Guess that’ll work. And from there, it’ll just spread as it will, I guess.”

They made their way up the bank and started across the meadow, hand-in-hand toward the colonies. For the most part they were silent, each imagining how to break the news. “You know,” said Bertie at length, “if that ‘presence’ everyone’s talking about is behind this, I guess we ought to thank him, or her, or whatever.”

“You think it’ll really show itself to us, in some way?”

Bertie shrugged. “Probably not, but it’d be the least it could do, after putting us through all this.” A little further on, they discussed the anomaly-creatures, and how close either had gotten to them.

“I was with the group that saw the ‘haunted house,’” Tara reported.

“Oh, yeah? With the tentacles?”

“Uh-huh. It was scary at first, and did it smell—whoo! But I watched it from a distance till it just vanished. So…how about you?”

“Nah. I missed all of ’em. I’m waiting for the book.”

“Oh, yeah. When Tallus’s group gets everyone’s accounts down, that’ll make for some great reading.”

Again Bertie thought about the possibility of the ‘presence’ revealing itself; then Tara called his attention to four approaching figures.

“Well, I’ll be darned,” said Ellis.

“Wow, it’s a BertieTara! Haven’t seen one of them in a while!” said Orland, making Lana laugh. Lilia just spoke quietly to Ellis and looked pleased and, it seemed to Bertie, unsurprised over this new development.

“So you guys were able to patch things up, huh?”

“Yeah, Ellis, we sure did.” Bertie clapped his brother’s shoulders. They chatted about the day’s remarkable events and other matters; though, as planned, Bertie and Tara kept silent over their little secret. Even as they talked, Bertie still couldn’t help wondering if Lilia knew more than she was telling, something he wouldn’t have been able to explain then. How could she possibly know, unless word leaked from Medical, unlikely as that may be.

Presently three more mice approached: Timothy, Lucy and a worried-looking Seelah. “Uh-oh,” said Ellis quietly. “I hope this doesn’t mean they’re fighting again.” It was a natural possibility to offer, considering Seelah and Boris were rarely seen apart. Lilia was the first to ask if she was feeling all right.

“I’m fine, Lilia…everyone. Thank you for asking.”

“She’s a bit worried about Boris,” confided Lucy.

Seelah explained how Boris had been so cheerful since their good news yesterday, spurred on by today’s developments; but in the past hour, just since she’d left him alone for a few minutes, he’d seemed distracted. Their exchanges were cordial but seemed forced, as if he were hiding something that weighed upon him. When she asked him, he would only say that there were things he needed to think about, but he promised he wouldn’t keep her in the dark for long. “So I left him alone, because I knew I could trust him to keep his word. But now…I just…I’m afraid he’s had another vision like his last one.”

“And you think he’s trying to spare you the worry,” offered Ellis.

“I don’t know what to think. He was so afraid that the last one…meant such bad things for all of us. And if this is more of the same…”

“Then we should be concerned for all of us, and not just Boris,” finished Timothy.

“You don’t think it really means we’re in danger, do you, Tim?” asked Orland.

“I wish I could offer something more specific. If we knew what it was that that first vision meant, then we could take some kind of action, like evacuation. But until we do…”

“Hey, c’mon, people,” said Bertie. “We don’t need all this doom ’n’ gloom, especially now that so many things are going so great.” He turned and smiled at Tara, crouched beside him.

She responded in kind and added, “And we don’t know that Boris had another vision, let alone one like that first one.”

“Or if that first really meant any kind of disaster for us,” said Orland. “We can’t just go skipping around tra-la-la, but we can’t be developing permanent worry lines over some disaster that may never come. We gotta have evidence first, and so far, what do we have? Zilch!”

“Oh, I agree, Orland,” said Timothy. “All that I said only applies if Boris had a repeat of his vision from two days ago.”

“Even I don’t know that he did, not for sure,” said Seelah. “It might have just been the news about our baby.”

“Like, maybe he’s not sure he’s ready?” offered Lucy.

“Something like that. I guess that would be better, but…”

“Yes, it would,” came a voice behind them. “It would be so much better, my love.” Boris approached them, face drawn, making no secret that there was indeed a great weight upon him. Seelah rushed to embrace him, then they sat down. The others quickly rallied around, curious and concerned.

“Boris, please tell us what’s wrong,” Seelah implored him, rubbing his back and shoulders.

“If it’s another bad vision,” added Timothy a bit bluntly, “tell us about it and maybe we can figure it out.”

Boris knew he really hadn’t the right to hold it back, but he was still reluctant. Then, steeling himself, he began. “I…saw, in front of me…an open field, like this one, and there was a crowd running towards me. There were rats, mice and Rusay alike, all looking terrified, like they were running for their very lives. I found I could recognize all of them except some of the mice, I don’t know why. I continued moving the opposite way, because I had to see what they were running from. I couldn’t see anything unusual: just grass, trees, the lake; and then, it was like dead calm, no one else around. Then I saw her, just ahead of me: a young girl-mouse, sitting with her head between her knees. I thought she…might be Seelah at first, but then she looked up, and…it was Lula. She looked like she’d been crying her eyes out all day. I asked her what was wrong, and she’d only say, ‘I’m so sorry’ over and over, and ‘I didn’t know.’ Didn’t know what? I asked. Then it started getting dark, like a storm arriving suddenly. I looked back down at Lula, and…and she said ‘I didn’t know’ one more time. I touched her arm, and then…then her body turned to ash and crumbled away. I backed away, and now everything was turning gray, just…just dust and ashes, and...now it was just like the other one. I knew that this all meant…something we couldn’t stop.” Boris paused, looking at Seelah, eyes brimming with tears. “I just couldn’t bring myself to tell you, Seelah, not when we’d been so happy.”

Others had gathered to hear his account, including two Guard rats. One of them, Kevin, advised Boris carefully and diplomatically that the council should hear about this. Though reluctant to tell it again, Boris agreed.

After Kevin left, the others speculated on what, if anything, this vision portended. No, it wasn’t like the last one, but Boris himself believed it related to it directly, with its imagery so frightening and seeming to point so specifically to his friends and adopted home facing some unknown danger. Could it really mean such utter devastation as he felt it did? How did recent bizarre events fit in, if at all? And Lula…what part could she possibly play in this?

These questions and more were discussed in depth after Johnathan, Justin, Nicodemus and many others arrived and Boris had repeated his account for them. As they did, Bertie and Tara excused themselves to meet his parents, still up in Medical. This prompted a bit of curiosity among friends and siblings, but the main topic was still what could or should be done in reaction to Boris’s vision. No one suggested it be dismissed completely, but what to do about a premonition of disaster that carried no hint of a cause, or any clues that they could discern that would point toward its prevention?

At one point, Timothy was asked if he was getting any impressions from all this, but he couldn’t report anything so far, believing that it would have to look more like a crisis situation for his intuition to kick in. And Nicodemus, as he weighed this new information, felt a flash of the same feeling of déjà vu he’d felt just before his return to Freethorn two days ago. Brushing the thought aside, he announced that he may have an idea about the vision’s meaning. “And,” he added in a confessional tone, “I believe I know how it may tie in with Boris’s previous episode which caused him such distress.”

Making sure he had the attention of Boris’s friends as well as present councilmembers, he described how, at Gwinthrayle’s last week, he’d given his guests a “world tour” via his Orb of Disclosure, and at one point it showed an area on the opposite side of Lahaikshe which seemed to raise some surprise in him, though he managed to hide it from the others. “It was an area which appeared, on first glance, to be no more than desert; but if one were to examine further, it would be revealed to be decidedly unnatural.”

“I remember at least two desert scenes,” said Ellis, “but what was special about this one?”

“Well, when I asked Gwinthrayle almost that very question, he advised me to keep the matter between us for the time being, at least until he’d had the chance to investigate the matter for himself. I’d questioned since then the wisdom of this, but now…the right time has surely arrived. You see…that desert area had, until recently, been—”

“Hey! What’s going on over there?”

All eyes were drawn first toward Kevin, who had seen it first and alerted everyone, and then toward this new anomaly. Conversation quickly ceased as everyone gazed upon this strange, shimmering field that glowed brightly but didn’t hurt the eye to look upon it. It was shaped like an arch, with its base against the ground…like a doorway? Its initial appearance immediately brought to everyone’s mind the anomaly-creatures which most believed to have passed from the scene. Accordingly, many wondered if they should try to prove its unreality by willing it away.

One among them, though, had a much different take on the situation. “This is it,” said Boris quietly but fearfully. “Th-this must be it, it’s coming!” Seelah held him more tightly.

“We don’t know that yet,” said Johnathan. “We have to be calm about this.” As cool and collected as he sounded, he knew that if this were the fulfillment of Boris’s vision, there would be no use in running, if it came true in the fashion he believed. Suddenly he recalled what Nicodemus was starting to tell them about that desert area. It had previously been—what? Not desert? Did it undergo some kind of disaster that…

“Something’s coming out!” said Justin.

All eyes were riveted on the spot now, and all could perceive the small movement underneath the bizarre glowing archway.

Chapter 43 - New arrivals

All who observed could scarcely take a breath. Something small, no larger than any of them, was emerging from the glowing field, just as one might pass through a doorway. No, not one—two. It was a pair of them, clinging to each other, suddenly stopping in their tracks, looking up and down, snouts waving to and fro, whiskers twitching as they took in their surroundings.

“Mice…they’re mice!” Johnathan was the first to say.

Justin turned to Kevin. “Did you—”

“Brutus and the rest of the gang are on their way,” said Kevin. Anticipating Johnathan’s question as he did Justin’s, he added, “They are strangers, and we don’t know what’s going on yet.”

“Understandable,” said Johnathan, barely glancing away from the sight. “You guys just do what you have to.”

“Wherever they come from, I don’t think they’re dangerous,” said Timothy confidently. The pair of newcomers had by now noticed the group of mice and rats observing them, but they took greater interest in the “archway” that had brought them here.

In seconds, it was obvious why. Two more adult mice emerged, accompanied by three children, and the first two looked delighted and embraced them. “We made it! We’re really here!” they were heard to say. Three more followed; then, it was as if a floodgate were opened, as mice by the dozens poured through.

Justin looked at Johnathan. “This isn’t…something to do with the Stone you haven’t told us about, is it?” he asked in spite of seeing the amulet around Johnathan’s neck and not glowing, indicating it wasn’t currently at work.

“Nothing it’s told me, and it’s told me nothing. But wherever these people come from and how they got here, it looks like we’d better get the welcome wagon oiled up.”

The newcomers continued to stay clustered together, as if knowing that to be the appropriate thing to do. Suddenly the glowing aperture vanished. The mice all returned their attentions to each other and their new surroundings. “Are we all here?” “Did all of us make it through?” were some of the questions their unwitting hosts could hear.

All observing the group looked at each other, uncertain of their next move. After a few long seconds Johnathan said, “Well, they do seem harmless enough.”

“And whatever means they used to get here, it was certainly their intent to come here specifically.” As he said this, Nicodemus noticed Brutus and some of the other Guard rats arriving.

“Strange mice, all right,” said Brutus matter-of-factly. “There must be at least fifty of them.”

“They’re strangers, all right,” said Kevin, “but nowhere near as strange as how they got here.”

The Guard rats started to move toward them, but Nicodemus said, “Wait, Brutus. Perhaps Johnathan and I should make the first overtures.”

“All right,” Brutus agreed. “But we will be close behind you.” Johnathan and Nicodemus boldly strode forward to the mice at the forefront, two of whom in turn came forward a bit hesitantly, though they obviously were eager to meet their hosts.

The pair, a male and female, extended hands, smiling. “Hello,” said the female. “I’m Sibelle, and this is Dupree.” Johnathan and Nicodemus introduced themselves and welcomed them to Freethorn, after which their expressions brightened.

“It’s just as she told us!” said Dupree. “Johnathan…Nicodemus! I can’t wait to meet the rest of them!”

Johnathan looked closely at the pair; had they met before? The names had a familiar ring, too, but…

Before he could say more, Sibelle came forward, giving Johnathan a hug. “You do remember us, don’t you, Mr. Brisby?” Without waiting for his reply, she looked past him to the Guard rats, not at all surprised or intimidated. “I’ll bet the big one’s Brutus! Lula said he was very nice, a ‘gentle giant,’ she called him…”

Their hosts couldn’t contain their surprise. “Did you say…Lula?” asked Johnathan. “Is she here among you?”

Among the spectators, who still hung back but were eager to meet the newcomers, Ellis said, “There. You see, Boris? They’re just mice like us, not bringers of doom.”

Though he was much calmer, Boris said, “Maybe they are harmless, but something…could still happen.” He shook his head. “I’m sorry to keep talking like this, but I can’t deny what I’ve been feeling.”

Timothy rubbed his chin. “‘Mice like us’…I wonder if that’s literally true, and that’s the reason they’re here.”

Lucy frowned. “How can that be? Your dad used the Stone to track down all of Vincent’s kids. There can’t be any others, can there?”

Lilia had, all this time, appeared largely unruffled by these new developments and said quietly, “Yes, all of them, all the children gathered together at last…”

Ellis turned. “What’s that, Lilia? You sound like you know something about—”

“Hey, there’s a mhys’haspa!” Timothy shouted. Everyone looked up.

“Looks like it’s headed this way, too,” observed Lucy.

Meanwhile, Johnathan and Nicodemus just barely had had time to ask more about what Lula had to do with this when the newcomers also noticed the mhys’haspa, reacting with a mixture of fear and wonder. Their hosts quickly reassured them the creature was harmless. “Now,” Nicodemus said to Sibelle and Dupree, “If Lula is here, we really need to—”

“Nicodemus!” came a familiar voice. He and Johnathan turned to see Lula negotiating her way through the crowd. She rushed up to him, giving him a big hug. “Hi, Johnathan!” She greeted him the same way. “Oh, it’s so great to be back!” she bubbled. “Hi, Brutus!” She waved to him. “Is Mother Pat here? Oh, I’ve got so much to tell her! And everyone! Oh, I can’t wait… Oooh, look, it’s a mhys’haspa! But, wait…who’s that with it?”

The mhys’haspa was close enough now for everyone to see that there was a small figure floating alongside it, which several quickly recognized as Gwinthrayle; but more startling was the presence of the two figures on the creature’s back.

“Johnathan, that…that’s Teresa!” Nicodemus observed. “And isn’t that Norman, too?”

“It-it is,” Johnathan could only stammer, briefly wondering what other surprises this day had in store.

“Wow, they’re actually riding a mhys’haspa!” enthused Lula. “That’s so awesome!”

“Not as much as how all of you came to be here, young lady,” said Johnathan, regaining some composure. “You’ve got some explaining to do.”

“Oh, I know,” she replied, “and I can’t wait to tell you!” That would have to wait, though, as the mhys’haspa, accompanied by its two passengers and free-floating traveling companion, alighted in the meadow.

Gwinthrayle approached Nicodemus and Johnathan as Teresa and Norman slid off the mhys’haspa’s back. “My friends, I know our appearing here like this comes as quite a surprise, but there is much else that needs to be told first.”

“We got a lot to update each other on,” agreed Johnathan, “not the least of which are our new guests here, and they only arrived before you. How we don’t know yet.”

Norman made some sounds in the mhys’haspa’s ear, patted its neck, and stepped back as it raised its wings. The eyes of the newcomers and many others were unwaveringly trained on it as it rose into the sky; though one of the newcomers, who was the last to pass through the archway and as yet unnoticed by those whose attentions were otherwise occupied, was more concerned with recovering from the experience and was being helped to his feet by two others, telling them he was feeling stronger and that he wanted to meet their hosts and let them know he was back to stay.

All over Freethorn, nearly everyone who was aboveground had taken notice of these strange goings-on, and word had spread widely to those indoors as well; and a steadily-increasing number were converging on this area just off the edge of Lake Nicodemus’s north end, where those already present had barely begun to get answers to the questions they all had, in part because it was difficult to decide with whom to start.

Soon, though, Johnathan and Nicodemus had determined that the matter Gwinthrayle had brought before them was the more urgent one, and so they gathered with the other councilmembers to discuss it. Norman and Teresa were still anxious over what they’d seen on their brief excursion, but they knew Gwinthrayle was better equipped to recount what they’d seen and what it could mean; so they joined Brutus and others in questioning the newcomer mice and, for the time being, keeping them all “herded,” something which none of them raised any objection to. Except for some brief anxiety over the mhys’haspa, none appeared at all uneasy or reluctant about being here. Rather, everyone was in great high spirits, and they were eager to get acquainted with what they seemed to regard as their new home.

“Now let me get this straight,” said Brutus. “This…doorway just appeared in the air, and you all simply stepped through it, and now you’re here?”

“It’s true, every word,” said Sibelle.

“It happened just like Eric said it would,” added Dupree.

“Eric?” Brutus raised an eyebrow. “Well, I’d like very much to meet this Eric, and hear his side of the story.”

The name raised curiosity in others within earshot. “Norman, did you hear?”

“Eric’s a common enough name, Teresa. Either way, I’d like to hear his story too.”

Lula approached the pair, visibly hesitant. “Oh, Teresa, I…guess we should have tried to tell you right away…”

“Tell us what, Lula?” Then, before either could say more, Teresa saw three mice making their way toward the front of the crowd. Her eyes grew wide and jaw slack. “No...it can’t be…”

The male mouse at the center of the trio, being steadied by the other two, reacted with far less surprise, and in fact seemed to expect this reaction. “Hello, Teresa. It’s…been a long time,” he said quietly.

“Teresa? Are you all right?” Norman touched her shoulder. “It is him, isn’t it? Your Eric?”

But Teresa barely seemed to hear. She turned to one side, covering her eyes, trembling; then she looked at Eric again, meeting his eyes for only a couple of seconds. “I…I’m sorry, I can’t…I have to…” Unable to say more, she turned away and walked off. Almost immediately, she passed a group that included her mother, who asked what was wrong.

“Mother, I…just have to think.” Teresa continued on before Cynthia or Martin could protest, leaving them to find out very soon what had caused her such turmoil.

Lula, meanwhile, was near tears, genuinely not expecting such an extreme response. “Ooh…that couldn’t have gone worse, could it? Maybe I should go talk to her.”

“It’s…all right, Lula,” said Norman. “It’s not your fault. She’ll be all right, too. It’s just…none of us expected this.” He approached Eric. “I’m Norman, Eric. We met briefly the last time you came here with…with Teresa.”

“I remember.” Eric shook his hand. “She’s…very fond of you. Lula told me.”

It was an awkward moment by any standards, mercifully cut short by the entrance of Madeline and her party. “Eric! My goodness, it is you! You’re alive!” She embraced him without further question or hesitation, this one who had become almost as much an adopted child of her and Johnathan as Lula was to Patricia and Kimball. “Oh, no wonder Teresa’s so upset. But she’ll be all right. Both of you will. Oh, Eric!” She hugged him again.

“Thanks, Madeline. It’s good to see everyone again.”

Behind her, Martin and Karen looked at each other, perplexed, as did Cynthia and Michael, before Teresa’s siblings came forward to greet Eric with equal enthusiasm, especially the four youngsters, who were quicker to accept seeing him alive and well. Shawna in particular had the most emotional reaction, wrapping her arms around his waist, tears streaming down her face.

Reuben seemed to have other matters on his mind as he scanned the crowd of strangers—quickly catching sight of Lilia, Boris and others mingling within—but was quickly distracted by other cries of recognition as the others were reunited with Lula. Her appearance was startling enough, but the surprises were far from over.

“Mrs. Brisby? Madeline?”

Madeline couldn’t put the name to the face at first; then her eyes grew wide as she put her hand to her heart. “Janice? My goodness, it really is you!” As she embraced her old friend and neighbor, two other mice approached. They also remembered Madeline and her children, being two of Janice’s children. Martin and Cynthia quickly recognized their old neighbors and playmates as well. Lula was silent but proud of the fact that she’d helped to arrange this reunion.

“So are we going to be neighbors again?” asked Janice.

“It does look that way. Oh, we have so much to catch up on!” Madeline introduced her youngest children to Janice, who told them she’d spent her entire life by the creek their parents formerly lived by, up until being found by Eric.

“But…why are you here now?” asked Lyndon.

“Well, dear…Eric tells us that…we belong here, all of us, because we’re like you, all the mice and rats that live here.”

Madeline and her children looked at each other and at Janice in disbelief, then at Eric. “Is this true, Eric? How can you know that?” Then she quickly added, “No, you don’t need to tell us now.”

But Eric just shrugged and said, “I can’t really say how, but I just know it’s true.”

A short ways away, Ellis spoke with one other small group. “So, Eric here just brought you all here by this doorway. Where did it come from?”

“Even he doesn’t know,” said Dinda. “At least he didn’t say so.”

“But he knew what to do with it,” added her mate Okell.

“Will we have to stay like this much longer?”

“Probably not too long, Adell,” said Timothy. “Most in our council are busy right now, but they should have time to listen to your story soon. I know I’m really interested in hearing what Eric has to say.”

“And Lula, too?” chimed in Adell’s mate Kernin. “She said she knows everyone here, too.”

It was the first Timothy’s group had heard the name, eliciting no small surprise in all but Lilia, who, unnoticed, merely smiled and nodded to herself.

Timothy and Lucy began making their way to the front of the crowd, where they could already see Lula with Madeline and Brutus—though they had yet to recognize Eric. Boris and Seelah followed, both mindful of Lula’s presence in his vision and wondering anew: what was she sorry about? What is it she should have known? Could she know something about a possible threat to come?

Lilia, meanwhile, seemed content to make new friends among the newcomers; something which, Ellis noted with some pride, she wouldn’t have done so readily only two weeks ago.

“Lilia, this is Wyn,” said Marnie, directing her to one mouse who, though reticent and reserved in her manner, appeared as fascinated with her new surroundings as anyone. “She only joined us yesterday, but she’s really looking forward to seeing everything and meeting everyone here.”

Lilia, seeing much of herself in the shy young girl, couldn’t resist giving her a big welcome hug. “Such a sweet child. Oh, it’s so wonderful having you here. All of you, gathered together in my bosom at long last…”

Wyn was surprised but pleased, giving a quiet thank-you, but Ellis’s reaction was quite different. He scratched his head. There she goes again with that talk. “Child?” Wyn’s only a little younger than her! No doubt, there was far too much that had gotten far too confusing lately.

Elsewhere in the crowd, Orland and Lana noted how Guard rats Kevin and Lol were busy giving brief interviews and taking down the names of the newcomers on a notepad, along with notes on respective relationships where there were mates or children or other family ties. Lana sidled up to Lol as he interviewed one female and her two children, and sneaked a peek at the list, which already had twenty-odd names.

Almost instantly, she looked startled and turned to Orland. “They’re here! They’re somewhere in the crowd!”

“Who is?”

“Three of my family! They’re on the list!” She started scanning the crowd urgently.

“Let me give you a boost,” said Kevin, who hoisted her above everyone’s heads. In seconds, she announced she’d spotted them. Lana quickly thanked Kevin, grabbed Orland by the hand and led him to the front of the crowd.

Eric had been tight-lipped thus far about details of his survival and how he’d gathered all these mice and met Lula, and—most unbelievably—apparently led them all here, mainly because he’d been advised already to wait until the council was ready for him. He’d only say that even he wasn’t sure of why and how he’d been able to do all this, but would tell all he could.

“I remember how scared you seemed before,” said Karen, “as if you couldn’t cope with just being here on Lahaikshe. I guess that’s not a problem now, is it?”

“I don’t feel like that at all now, Karen. Somehow, it’s like I knew I wouldn’t be.”

“Wait till you see your boys,” said Cynthia, taking his arm. “They are just adorable. Sarah’s looking after them now.”

“I’m looking forward to it. And I just know that Teresa’s a great mom to them.” Eric had already brought up the subject of Sarah before they did, mentioning that Lula had told him how his sister had kept Teresa company since just before her sons were born and had moved here with them.

None present who had known Eric previously could get over how much calmer he was now, more accommodating and given to taking things in stride. Not far from everyone’s mind, though, were the burning questions of how he’d survived. If he had been snatched away by that hawk, how did he escape? And if he hadn’t, why couldn’t he return to Teresa? Certainly there were almost as many questions about Lula; by now, it was certain that this was the fulfillment of her “mission,” but how did it all come about?

Further discussion was interrupted by a shriek that made some of them jump. They, as well as Janice’s son and daughter, looked up to a face familiar to all of them. Lana was instantly able to match them to the names she’d spotted on Lol’s notepad. They responded in kind, with hugs quickly following.

“Sibelle! Dupree! Mama!” she finally managed to say. “I can’t believe it, I never thought I’d see any of you again!” She introduced Orland to her sister, brother and mother, and the din they raised attracted others’ attentions.

“Eric, you never told us our sister was here!” Sibelle said, giving Lana another hug.

“I just told Janice myself,” said Madeline. “We all knew Lana was her daughter, but we never expected you to be reunited this way!”

“I’m sorry I couldn’t tell you either,” said Lula. “I knew Lana pretty well, but I didn’t know she was in your family.”

“That’s all right, dear,” said Janice. “It made for a lovely surprise.”

“It’s great that we’re all together again and everything,” said Martin, “But if all of you are ‘like us,’ what about the rest of your family? Why just you three?”

“I don’t really know, Martin,” said Janice. “I outlived my husband Kory, and I’ve seen all of my other children grow old faster than us, in the time since you all moved away to that Thorn Valley place. Lincoln, Dean and Dewey all moved away and we’ve lost track of them. All three of us have questioned it nearly every day, but we’ve learned to live with it pretty much, even though it’s made us feel so different. It had become…so lonely for us, almost.”

“Well, you needn’t feel that way ever again,” said Madeline. “Not here. If you really are like us, however it happened, you will all have a home here.”

They went on discuss how Lana had come to be here, courtesy of Orland, and how Janice, Dupree and Sibelle had moved further down the creekside sometime before Orland met Lana, which is how they’d missed meeting when Johnathan and Patricia visited the young couple and later brought them here almost two months ago. Sibelle and Dupree also explained how, upon their arrival, Johnathan hadn’t recognized them at first, nor recalled their names as two of Janice’s children. They’d decided to wait till their mother had caught up with them before explaining their past associations, but it was cut short when Johnathan left to confer with the council.

“Speaking of Dad,” piped up Lyndon, “When’s he and the council gonna be done over there?”

Amidst all these reunions, all in this circle had practically forgotten about that matter that was being discussed very intently a short distance away, despite the outlandish way it was brought to Freethorn and the fact that one of its deliverers, Norman, was with them now.

“I guess…it’ll be for as long as it takes.” Madeline looked at Norman, knowing he had to know something, but not wanting to pressure him into revealing something he shouldn’t without the council’s approval. He recognized her curiosity and confirmed her suspicions, then offered to tell them about how he’d discovered his talent for mhys’haspa-back riding.

“…and so we returned to Freethorn as swiftly as possible, knowing you’d need to be informed of this most urgent matter.” Gwinthrayle paused and sighed. “And now, I fear, all of you know as much as Nicodemus and I.”

“Perhaps,” Nicodemus added, “withholding this matter from you was not the best plan, but I’d believed Gwinthrayle’s assurances that he’d identify the source of these now twin calamities. Given his much greater experience in this world overall, I had no cause to disbelieve him.”

“A perfectly logical conclusion,” agreed Tallus.

“Considering how we had our hands full here,” added Justin, “it’s probably just as well.”

“But Nicodemus had no more success in solving our mysteries,” said Colbert. “If this ‘presence’ we’ve theorized is blocking your efforts, what can any of us do?”

“For starters,” said Johnathan, “we can review what we have learned. It’s pretty clear now what Boris’s latest visions represent, at least the ‘crumbling’ part.”

Nicodemus nodded. “And this feeling of déjà vu I’ve had…I’ve experienced it several times since my sabbatical, especially after hearing about Boris’s visions; and I’ve even taken to wondering if I may have had a direct encounter with the site of the second disaster, but then had my memory of the encounter wiped away somehow.”

“But even if that’s true, Nicodemus,” said Colbert, “how would it help us now? (With all due respect.) There’s so much going on that’s so confusing, so contradictory. There have been these two big disasters that wiped out all life in those areas, with who knows how many more to come or how close to us, at the same time we’ve had these ‘tests of our resolve,’ as you believe they were, which we seem to have passed.”

“And Kimball’s and Louann’s recoveries would seem to be rewards for that,” added Johnathan. “I know, Colbert, it is confusing. And I don’t want to just say that we need to wait for further answers, but…we do need to bring others in on this.”

“Timothy and Boris, certainly,” said Tallus, nodding, “and perhaps Madeline.”

In short order, it was agreed that those three should be brought in, but no one else for the time being. But what about their new mouse friends, who’d been all but forgotten amidst all this discussion? What, if anything, did they have to do with any of this? It was quickly decided that getting their story (and Lula’s) should be the next order of business.

Johnathan made his way over to the new group, where he could already see his wife’s and other familiar faces among the unfamiliar; and received more surprises as he found others that were familiar but unexpected. He now recognized Janice and her two now grown children, and one other whose presence provided the greatest shock, enough to prompt Johnathan to bring him over as well as Madeline, Timothy and Boris.

Most in the council recognized Eric as well, and some welcomed him back and congratulated him on whatever hardships he’d obviously had to overcome for his survival. Naturally they were very interested in hearing his story, and those who’d seen a distraught Teresa pass by understood why now. But further details would have to wait a little while longer, as the newcomers needed to be updated on the other sudden, unexpected matter deemed more serious.

At the conclusion, there was silence for a moment. Since Timothy and Boris, especially, would likely have a particular insight on the situation, the others were curious to hear it.

Timothy spoke first. “I know…you were all hoping I’d have some…definite feeling about this. I can’t really say I do, but…that’s probably only because nothing looks threatening yet. I hope.” He sighed.

Boris had been silently mulling this new information, though not looking especially worried. “I guess…this explains my vision; or some of it.”

“Now we know there’s a real threat,” said Madeline. “But what can we do?”

“We can’t just keep running,” said Orson. “Where would we go, considering that this force, whatever it is, could strike anywhere on Lahaikshe?”

“Unless…we return to Earth,” said Simone. “Maybe this is a sign we don’t really belong here.”

“Simone, I can’t believe my ears!” said her husband Graham. “You’ve never spoken that way before! You were always…full of ideas on our lives here, and how we should look ahead.”

“But it is a possibility, isn’t it?” said Isabella.

“It is,” agreed Justin, “unfortunately. But let’s not forget that this affects all living things here, Rusay and Freethorner alike.”

Johnathan recalled his conversation with Nicodemus during their recent visit to Earth, about fate seeming to lead them all to Lahaikshe, about choices, about the possibility of being forced to return to Earth and what they might do in that event. Even so, he said, “I think we’re getting ahead of ourselves here, people. We still haven’t gotten the story from Eric and our new friends.”

“Which may yet shed light on other things,” added Tallus.

“Well, I’ll be happy to tell you all I can,” said Eric, “but I can’t imagine what all that other stuff would have to do with me.”

“Neither can any of us,” said Johnathan. “But so much has happened here lately that’s strange and unexplainable, and your story might prove to be the missing piece of the puzzle.” After the council agreed to allow a wider audience for the story, the group moved over to where the new mice were still being interviewed and “catalogued.”

On the way, Timothy said to Boris, “I think I understand your vision a little better. When Lula said she was sorry and ‘I didn’t know,’ she might have meant she didn’t know that she and Eric had brought all these mice here just to come face-to-face with some disaster.”

Boris nodded thoughtfully, though it was apparent he was still haunted by the vision. “That does make sense. And it would explain why I didn’t recognize some of the mice I saw. Come to think of it, one of them did look like Eric here.”

Lilia and Lula had spent the past few minutes catching up, again seeming like long-time friends as Lula animatedly described her experiences in Thorn Valley before Eric had found her. To Ellis and Reuben, it seemed a very normal scene, with none of the odd, cryptic statements and behavior Lilia had displayed recently; the latest only minutes ago, with Wyn.

Johnathan and Madeline found that they’d have some catching up to do as well, not just with Janice, Sibelle and Dupree, but with yet others they’d known previously: this time, two mice from Thorn Valley, named Mitchell and Sadie, who had been acquainted with the Brisby family. They, too, claimed that they’d been gathered together and brought here because they were “like them,” meaning the Rats and Mice from NIMH and their progeny. Though none had been specifically asked for details, there was virtually no volunteering of them either. Lula explained that everyone had agreed to defer to Eric for when he was ready to tell his story.

“I’d say that time is at hand,” said Nicodemus. “Wouldn’t you, Johnathan?”

“Beyond a doubt. But if this is going to affect us like I think, all the mice should be here. Classes should be about finished for the day, so…”

“Perhaps we needn’t bother, Johnathan. Look.” Madeline indicated another group arriving, mostly mice. Patricia, Jessica, Bertie and Tara were at the forefront, shepherding a group of children, but more surprising was the sight of Kimball being carried by Bernadette.

They greeted the newcomers as Bernadette carefully lowered Kimball to the ground. “When we’d gotten the word of what was happening, he insisted on coming along,” she said, sighing in mock frustration. “I tried to tell him, he should probably wait a while longer, to make sure he’s strong enough, but nooo…”

Kimball chuckled. “She really does care. But I promised I’d take it easy, and I will. But there’s no way I was going to miss any of this, even if I couldn’t walk out of the ward under my own steam.” He was wearing a robe that covered most of his body, including his new leg, believing that displaying it openly at this time would be too much of a distraction.

Louann and her family had also arrived, and she was still occupied with greeting those she was seeing for the first time, drinking in all her surroundings as well, still giddy from her returned sight and all the experience was bringing her.

As others in the council rallied everyone, including the newcomer mice, to regather a short ways away in Oak Park, Madeline approached Patricia, Bertie and Tara. “We’d heard you were back together. Congratulations. I guess you wanted to give your parents the good news first.”

“Yeah, that and…other things,” Bertie said, rubbing the back of his head.

“My folks, too,” said Tara.

Madeline looked at Patricia, who only smiled, looking as one who was sitting on the most amazing secret. Before Madeline could ask, though, Lula came running up to greet her surrogate parents.

“Oh, I can’t wait to tell you all everything!” she bubbled, finishing giving “Mother Pat” a big hug. “There’s just so much, but they’re getting Eric ready to tell his story.” Lula looked over to where Johnathan was preparing Eric, who was looking a bit reluctant at the prospect of telling his story in front of such a large crowd. Lula also spotted Jessica and went to greet her next, and then she spotted another welcome face among the mouse children who’d just arrived.

“Stuart!” She dashed over to him, and he was every bit as happy to see her and not the least self-conscious about it. As they came out of their embrace, she said, “I thought…maybe I’d made you feel bad by not giving you a bigger goodbye.”

“It’s okay, Lula. That doesn’t matter now. So much else has happened since you left, and…well, I guess we’ll have to talk about it later.”

“Oh, we will.” Lula gave him another hug. “I’ll probably have to help Eric with his story, but we will get together.” She looked up at Jessica. “Is that okay?”

“Of course, dear.” Jessica kissed Lula’s forehead, then Stuart’s. “I’m so proud of you, Stuart.”

“Aw, Mom, it’s nothin’.” Still there was no obvious embarrassment in him as he and Lula parted, both looking reluctant, even as his younger siblings giggled. His twin Shirley was more respectful.

As everyone moved on to Oak Park, Lyndon asked, “Dad…Nicodemus was s’posed to be…you know, gone forever. And so was Eric. Is anyone else coming back?”

Johnathan thought for a moment. “We’ll see, Lyndon. We’ll see.”

“Hey, there was the…the fox guy, too,” recalled Shawna. “Tuh…Turlokeen, that was his name.”

“Okay, kids, let’s shelve this discussion for now.” And yet, Johnathan couldn’t help but think: I was believed dead too, and yet… It was tempting, almost, to joke about no one in their community staying dead forever. Equally compelling, too, was the idea—perhaps no more than a whim—that there could be a connection. Didn’t all of them—Nicodemus, Eric, Turlokeen and certainly himself—have Lahaikshe in common, if only to set foot on this world? He tried to push the thought back, and looked forward to taking in Eric’s tale.

Chapter 44 - Eric’s story

Within minutes everyone present had gathered in Oak Park. Eric was directed to the same tall rock that Nicodemus had spoken from the day of his arrival. As Lula took her place near the front of the crowd, Jessica took hers near Nicodemus. The newcomer mice still stayed together as a group, all looking as patient as ever. Brutus called for everyone’s attention, though at this point there was little need.

“Friends,” began Justin, standing before the rock, “as all of you are probably aware by now, our friend Lula has returned from her trip to Earth, and with her came another mouse some of us knew, but who was believed gone forever: Eric. And they brought with them other mice, but exactly how we don’t know yet.” He went on to describe the shimmering aperture he’d witnessed himself, and all that happened after, including the entrance of Gwinthrayle, Teresa and Norman, but without going into their exact circumstances.

In the crowd, Cynthia said to Madeline, “Speaking of Teresa, she should really be here. I can understand her running off, but…”

“There she is now, with the babies,” said her youngest brother Kirk, pointing.

“Yeah, and Sarah’s with her,” added his twin Vanessa.

They looked up to see Teresa and Sarah, each carrying a baby, both already looking up to the figure sitting on the rock. Kirk and Vanessa got up to greet them with hugs. Madeline quickly followed.

“I’m sorry I ran off like I did, Mother…everyone.” Teresa embraced her mother. “I feel like a coward. It’s just…I couldn’t think of anything else right then.”

“It’s all right, sweetheart, and Eric understands. It’ll all work out. We just have to believe…everything will.”

Teresa realized Madeline had probably heard from Gwinthrayle about what she and Norman had seen out in the wilderness, which had certainly contributed to her own earlier upset. For now, though, some reunions and introductions were in order.

“It seems,” announced Justin to the crowd, “that there’ll be a slight delay in Eric’s story.”

Eric had already come back down from the rock, standing gaping and speechless, moved profoundly at seeing his sister for the first time in months, and his own children for the first time ever. Sarah came forth, and brother and sister embraced silently, tears welling. “I’m so glad you’re here,” he managed to say. “Lula told me you came here with Teresa.”

“I helped your boys into the world,” she said, kissing his cheek. “And now it’s time for you to meet them.”

In short order Eric was holding Tyler and Eric Jr. in his arms, unable to speak again as they stared at his face, wide-eyed. They were clearly delighted to meet him, reaching out to touch and smell him.

“It’s amazing,” Cynthia whispered to Teresa. “It’s as if they recognize him, but aren’t sure how.”

Teresa could only nod, eyes moistening as she swallowed a lump in her throat. She looked into Eric’s eyes, and both felt an enormous sense of family unity: their family, finally whole. All in the Brisby family, and others nearby, felt the same, holding their spouses and children closer to them.

At length Eric said, “Well…I guess I’ve got a story to tell. I’ll definitely see you all later.” He kissed his sons and handed them back to their mother and aunt, and reluctantly took his place back atop the rock. He looked around at the crowd, taking a deep breath. He cleared his throat and began.

“I hope...you can all hear me out there. I know you all thought I was…gone forever, like Justin said.” He paused, his eyes again meeting Teresa’s. “Well, even I’m not entirely sure how it happened, but I’ll tell all I can now.

“I guess you know about that day when Teresa and I were just outside our home in Thorn Valley, and…I spotted a hawk flying toward us. I shouted at her to take cover, and she ducked inside in time, and…I thought I had enough time to follow, but it turned out I didn’t. Next thing I knew, I was knocked flat on my stomach. I could hardly breathe, but it didn’t hurt, at least not at first. I was able to turn my head enough to see the hawk looming over me. It bent its head down toward me, and I…tried to cry out, but I couldn’t make a sound. I knew…in the next moment, it would start tearing at me with its beak, and I thought of Teresa, and our babies, and how much I loved them and wanted them to be safe…”

Eric paused, breathing in deep; and Teresa again felt a pang of shame for running away. After all he’d been through, how could she do that to him? Then she decided against further self-reproach and to concentrate on the rest of his story.

“But,” Eric continued, “that didn’t happen. It was almost like the hawk had done its worst and couldn’t do any more to me. Then it spread its wings and took off with me in its grip, but it was strange. It was like…though its claw surrounded me, I couldn’t feel it, not entirely. It landed on a tree limb, and again it couldn’t seem to touch me with its beak. At the time, I didn’t think about why at all; I was still sure I was about to die, especially since it was starting to hurt from where the talons had started to dig into me.

“The hawk took off again, and next thing I knew we were at its nest. The next minute was almost a blur, but I can say for sure that the hawk still couldn’t hurt me, or even touch me; and I knew, like something inside telling me, that I’d be able to get away. I got to the edge of the nest and looked down to the ground, so far below; and still, it was like I knew I could do this and I didn’t have to be afraid. So I just simply…stepped off the edge. But I didn’t fall, at least…not like someone would normally. It’s more like I just floated down to the ground.”

A murmur ran through Eric’s audience, along with a collective realization that there would be more unexpected surprises to come.

“Again, it was like I didn’t even have to think about how or why this happened, but only that I needed to get to someplace the hawk or anything else couldn’t get me. I was shaking terribly, and numb, not over the shock yet; but I was still able to get to a crevice within some big rocks that seemed safe enough.

“I rested there and was able to fall asleep for some time. I woke up thinking about Teresa. I knew she was probably safe, but she had to be worried sick about me, and I soon realized she probably believed I was dead. I wanted to try getting back to her, but two things prevented me. First, the wounds I’d gotten weren’t as bad as I’d thought, but they still made it painful to do much moving around, so I decided to stay put and let myself heal a bit more. But then….it was like back in the hawk’s nest, when something inside seemed to tell me what I should do; and now, it was telling me there was something else I would have to do as soon as I was well enough.

“So I stayed put for over a week, only going out to gather food. But there was still this…impulse, I guess you’d call it, inside me, telling me there were other mice, who would probably all be strangers to me, but I knew I needed to go out and find them. I asked myself how and why, and why them? What was so special about them, whoever they were? I couldn’t get any answers, at least not yet. But I soon found out the answer to how I’d do this.

“By that time I was pretty much recovered, but…it’s hard to describe, it’s like it didn’t feel right for me to leave yet. I guess it’s because I started feeling a little like I did when I came here before. But when it did feel right, I started thinking long and hard about how I’d escaped the hawk. Up till then I’d hardly thought about it, but now I went over every detail I could recall, and I wondered if I could make something like that happen again. So I climbed to the top of a tall rock and took a running leap off the edge. Would you believe it, I floated down to the ground light as a feather. And then I realized that the other strange thing about my survival also came from me, somehow. I’d made a shield, a barrier around myself that kept the hawk from tearing me to pieces! He’d wounded me at first because his attack was so sudden and, I guess, because I hadn’t used this ability yet. Of course, I didn’t even know I had it until then, but I realized that it protected me after the hawk attack. When it had me in its grip, it actually had the ‘shield’ in its grip, with me inside it. But at the nest, I was able to use it to slip out of its grip and keep it from touching me again.

“Well, when I realized all this, I knew: no matter what this impulse, this inner voice was telling me, I had to try to return home. I was still in Thorn Valley, and with these new abilities, I knew it’d be a snap. So I willed myself to rise up in the air so I could get my bearings. At the same time, it felt so wonderful to be able to do this. Just like that, I figured out my location. I could see the big pit where your colony used to be, so I headed that way. I was confident that if a hawk tried to attack me in the air, I’d be protected like before, and this time I’d be prepared. It didn’t happen, though, and soon I’d found my way back to our old home. Inside, though, there was no sign of Teresa. Right away I realized her parents must have come to take her back, with their Stone. I was disappointed, but I was happy that she was safe and with those she loved. But it did mean this mission I felt I should carry out, I’d have to do alone. I also realized that she’d had our babies, so I knew it was just as well.”

Many in the crowd realized the similarity of Eric’s talk of a “mission,” whoever or whatever appointed him to it, to that of Lula. Apparently it was the same mission that had caused their paths to cross, and its goal was now equally obvious. But both had already stated there was still much they didn’t know about it; would any of them ever know, or would it remain as mysterious as all the other recent strangeness?

Eric continued: “So I waited for some sign, for something to come to me, to tell me what to do and where to go next. And again, just like that, it did. I used my floating power to take me to the northern end of Thorn Valley, where I knew I had to go. I came upon two mice, who I knew instantly were the right ones; I just felt drawn to them. Their names were Mitchell and Sadie, and they were mated and had three children. I learned that they were acquainted with Johnathan and his family, who had known them from when they’d visited that part of the valley, but they’d had really no traffic with the Rats. I told them how I’d felt drawn to them because there was something ‘special’ about them, and they just perked right up. They told me how they’d both felt different from their fellow mice, both within the past year or so, before they even knew each other. They’d both had the experience of other mice steering away from them, even shunning them outright, apparently because they now felt different emotions and learned things differently. Not everyone treated them bad, but when they learned about each other and met for the first time, each of them was just so relieved that there was someone else like the other. That relief turned into love, and they married and had a litter of three about six months ago.” Eric looked for the young family in the crowd, and they waved to each other.

“Another thing they told me was how, when I first met them, they felt drawn to me, as much as I was to them, and it was like they could trust me instantly and completely, even though we were strangers. I didn’t think much of it then, because there was so much else to their story that was more important, since it reminded me of Teresa’s family and their rat friends. I told what I knew about them, how their elders had things done to them by the humans at that NIMH place, and now they were smarter and more long-living than other rats and mice. I asked Mitchell and Sadie if they’d ever tried to make contact with them, and they said they’d considered it, because they knew they were different, too; but they weren’t sure if they’d accept them either. But I was sure there had to be a connection.

“Anyway, as we got to know each other, I started to wonder: was it just them? And if so, what would I do then? It was about this time that I got to thinking about Sarah and our mom. I wanted to tell them about this new ability of mine and show and tell them all about this stuff that happened, and I wondered if I could find them myself; but I soon realized that I had no way of knowing exactly where they were, just somewhere in the south end of Thorn Valley.

Well, it would be a while before I knew what happened, because I felt like I was being ‘called’ again. So I told my new friends I’d be back, and I took off again, though I didn’t let them see me leave in my ‘special’ way. Again, I didn’t have far to go; and since I was heading for the southeast side of the valley, I wondered if it was Sarah and Mom that my ability was actually drawing me to, but it was someone else. Geraldine was her name, and just like Mitchell and Sadie, she told me a story much like theirs, except she knew next to nothing about the advanced rats and mice. She thought she’d seen some of them exploring in her neck of the woods, but no more than that. But she did report having a period of feeling different than before and having other mice shun her.

“When I heard this, it occurred to me that this had to be the answer to my question. With Geraldine’s story sounding so similar to Mitchell and Sadie’s, it couldn’t be just them. They were ‘gifted’ or ‘special’ mice, and it was clear that I was too. It was like a homing instinct that led me to Mitchell and Sadie and then Geraldine, and I knew right then and there that however I got these abilities, it must be my purpose to seek out other gifted mice like us.

“I decided right then to tell her about these new abilities of mine, and I gave her a little demonstration too, willing myself to float in the air a few inches. Her eyes about popped out of her head, but she got really excited about it and asked me if I could do this with someone else. And right away I found that I could! I decided to ‘fly’ her to meet Mitchell and Sadie, so I had her hold on tight to my arm, and off we went.”

Eric laughed, adding, “She clung to me like a sandburr at first, but by the time we landed, she was laughing and thrilled from the experience. As she got acquainted with Mitchell and Sadie, more realizations came to me. First, I knew there’d be more than just the seven of us. Second, there would have to be a place for us all to gather, where we’d all be safe. And finally, once that was done and I’d located all these mice, we’d then move on and join all of you here. I didn’t know then how it would be done, but I knew the day would come.”

“And we saw the results today,” said Johnathan. “I’m sorry to interrupt you, Eric, but…is there anything you can tell us about how all these powers came to you, and what or who this ‘inner voice’ was?”

Eric shrugged. “I’ve asked myself that a lot recently, Johnathan. Best I can figure, it must’ve been something here, on this world, that touched me in some way.”

Again a murmur ran through the crowd. Many had by now suspected the ever-mysterious “presence” of being behind this, but why did it choose Eric? The fact that he was so much in the dark about it, at the very least, didn’t come as much surprise.

“Anyhow…once I knew what I had to do, I knew my first move would be to find the right kind of shelter for all of us. So while Geraldine stayed with the others, I set out the next morning. I could just picture it: a dry, spacious cave with entrances small or hidden well enough to keep intruders out. I searched and searched for hours, covering a lot of territory, before it occurred to me: the ideal place would be high up, on a high bank or cliff, that only I could reach with my abilities, and still small enough that only small birds would be a problem.

“It took a few more hours before I found our ‘Safe House,’ along just the kind of high, rocky bank I had in mind, overlooking the river to the north of Thorn Valley. After I returned and told them all about it, it took a bit of cajoling, since they were reluctant to leave their old homes. But I’d already convinced them that this was the best thing for them. I guess that effect I had upon them when we first met still held. It felt kind of weird, their believing everything I said without question, even though I was sincere and meant everything I said. But I didn’t let it bother me much. Instead, I concentrated on what I believed would happen in the end: that we’d all go someplace much safer, with others like us. So I took all of them to the Safe House, in two trips; first with Geraldine and Mitchell, second with Sadie and the three kids. I was still so amazed, as much as they were, that all anyone had to do was hold onto me, or have me hold onto them—as long as we were touching—and they’d be flying along with me.

“Once we’d started making ourselves at home there, almost immediately I got ‘the call’ again and left to find others like us; and over the next few weeks, it got to be an everyday routine. I covered quite a lot of territory in gathering these mice. I don’t know from miles, but it sure took a long time to get to some of them. This ‘homing instinct’ of mine had one heck of a reach! I found some living in human towns, on their farms, in woods and meadows. I didn’t find any others in Thorn Valley, but some were in areas close by, like Janice, Sibelle and Dupree living near the creek where Teresa’s family used to live. And later I found out they used to know each other, quite a surprise.

“It all went on like this into the winter, and it gave me a lot of satisfaction, because I was able to give them better shelter, a feeling of belonging from being with others like them, and hope for a better future. But there was something missing. I wanted to be able to tell them more about this place I would eventually take them to, but from the little contact I had with the Rats while I knew Teresa’s family, and what little I knew—next to nothing, really—about this world they’d gone to, I couldn’t tell them much.

“Then, one day, I got ‘the call’ back to Thorn Valley. At first I thought it could be Teresa I’d sensed there, or her mom and dad, maybe come back to look for me, especially when I felt drawn right back to our old home. But it turned out to be Lula instead. Sure was a surprise hearing about who she was and where she’d come from. She told me she’d had Johnathan bring her here but she wasn’t sure why; but after I’d brought her to the Safe House, she was sure that her mission was to do what I couldn’t: to tell them all about this place, prepare them for it. Though she told me she hadn’t been outside…Freethorn, that’s what you’re calling it now, right? I knew she could do a better job at it than me.”

Below the rock, Lula smiled shyly, modestly, but was obviously beaming, proud of her accomplishments.

“And when she told me that Sarah was there too, after she’d come to Teresa just before she’d had our babies, and helped to deliver them and keep her company and everything, I felt even more that I had to fulfill this mission, so I could finish it and return to them, even though I knew it might be a shock to see me alive. She also told me how our mom had died not long before then, and…the news just…really hit me harder than I ever would’ve expected. I realized all the more just how much I’d changed, probably both me and Sarah. We were more like Teresa’s family now, that was clear as rain; and their Rat friends too. Even with what little traffic we’d had with them, especially Sarah, I knew it had to be true.

“So, Lula and I compared stories, and we realized that it had to be some…creature, some living being on this world that touched our minds somehow, both of us, and gave us this mission. It made it more important to us, knowing that so much was riding on what we did and said. With each mouse I found and brought to the cave, we could see that every one of them was ‘special’ like us. Everyone had stories similar to Mitchell and Sadie’s and Geraldine’s, that they were all very much aware that they were different from their fellows and were sometimes shunned by them, and each thinking he or she was the only one. Some, though, had mates who weren’t ‘special,’ and children, too, and of course we couldn’t leave them behind. And in one case, two of them, Monte and Marnie, found each other shortly after I brought them to the Safe House, and now they’re in love and want to raise a family. It was certainly good for all of us to be able to get together and know that we weren’t freakish or strange and that we all really belonged somewhere. And when Lula arrived, it made it even better, even if it was only for a few days.

“But I knew the time was coming soon, and earlier today I knew it had arrived. I’d made my last ‘pickup’ yesterday—our newest friend Wyn—but I hadn’t felt ‘the call’ since. I’d already suspected she was the last, but earlier today I got a much different sensation. Not only did I realize it meant I had made my last pickup, but also I knew it meant it was time to move on. It was like—it’s still hard to describe—like something building, growing inside me, but it wasn’t painful. I didn’t know exactly what was going to happen, but it was enough for me to be able to tell everyone that they should get their things together and get ready to go.

“That’s when the really weird part happened. My body started to glow, like there was a light inside me. It was only from the front part of my body, and it got brighter and brighter until…it seemed to leave my body and form a…a door, a glowing door in midair. I knew, beyond a doubt, what it was for, and I shouted for everyone to start passing through it. Some were reluctant or even scared; but others, especially Sibelle and Dupree, encouraged them, telling them they’d be all right and they could trust me now, just as they’d looked up to me and trusted me all along. And Lula…she was so thrilled, I think she wanted to be the first one through, but she saw how reluctant some still were, and so she helped Sibelle and Dupree get everyone calmed down and organized.

“Soon a line started forming. I reminded everyone that once they got there, they should all stay together, and stay put in one area. Mitchell and Sadie were in front, and they said ‘Here goes,’ and stepped up to the glowing door slowly and poked their faces into it, but you couldn’t see their faces on the other side! They stepped back and told everyone what they saw: grass, trees, blue sky. ‘It’s all there,’ they said. ‘What are we waiting for?’ They went through it all the way and, sure enough, it’s like they disappeared completely, even though I knew they’d made it. All along, I knew that I had made this glowing door to the other world; how I didn’t know, but I was sure I’d be able to keep it going until everyone was through, including myself.

“Sibelle and Dupree were next, taking Mitchell and Sadie’s kids with them. And then everyone followed, staying in an orderly line. Lula was almost last, and then it was just me and Monte and Marnie. We started through it, and…I found myself feeling a bit weak and tired, apparently just from keeping the door going. I felt almost like I wouldn’t make it on my own, so Monte and Marnie supported me, telling me it was the least they could do for me after I’d brought them together. Then we went through, and I guess you saw the rest for yourself. Once we were through, the door vanished, and here we all are now.”

Eric sighed, looking around at all the faces, most etched with disbelief over his claim that he’d utilized a power within himself to accomplish such a monumental task, though many realized the power’s possible origin.

“We noticed you still looked tired after you arrived,” said Madeline. “How do you feel now?”

“Oh, still a bit tired, but better. I’m just glad to be here again, and to be able to do this for my new friends. I know none of you expected to have all these new mice dumped in your lap, but…I just knew it was the right thing to do all along.”

“And…could you do any of these things now?” asked Justin.

“You mean…could I float, or put up the invisible shield? Well, let’s see…” Eric concentrated and, after about fifteen seconds, reported, “I guess not. In fact, I get the feeling I’ll never be able to do any of that again. But, somehow, it doesn’t bother me. It’s like…I’ve done all I need to with those powers, and I don’t need them anymore. Though I guess I’ll miss ’em a little…especially the flying part, that was amazing. So…I guess I should ask, because none of you brought us here and you weren’t expecting us…are we welcome here?”

Justin and the other councilmembers all looked at each other in a moment of silent deliberation. None could think of saying no outright; and it would be a simple enough matter to prove that these mice were like them, and therefore did belong here. Eric, by his words and actions, had certainly proven to be more than an ordinary mouse, even without those mysterious powers; and, thus far, all the newcomers had told stories of being different from their fellows, but not all from birth; in fact, most, such as Janice, Sibelle and Dupree, claimed it had started after they were already mature, or close. How they got this way would certainly take a bit of detective work; but for now, what other choice was there?

Tallus stood. “I propose that until it can be definitively proven that our new friends do not belong among us—something which, even now, I suspect is most unlikely—we should treat them as we have past newcomers, and welcome them with open arms and open hearts, as full citizens of Freethorn.” The proposal met with unanimous approval.

Eric, still atop the rock, stood upright a bit shakily. “Did you all hear that? We’re all welcome to stay.” It was obviously welcome news to all to hear it officially, though few doubted it would be otherwise. Still, there were other details that needed attending to before the New Mice—62 strong, including Eric—could be allowed to leave the immediate area. Ages and his team were already bringing in equipment for medical exams, and had begun interviewing everyone on health matters—mainly on any communicable diseases or internal parasites any may have presently or had in the past. As for external parasites, such as fleas, ticks or mites, a batch of the standard treatment—the “dip”—was already being prepared. Only after each and every one of them had gone through the treatment would they be allowed to leave the area and mix more freely with their new neighbors. All the while, councilmembers, Guard rats and others circulated among the new mice, hearing more of their stories and answering questions, doing all they could to orient them to their new home before they’d see more of it. Temporary living arrangements were also being made, with Rat and Mouse alike agreeing to put them up in their quarters until permanent lodgings were ready.

Yet…how permanent would the arrangements be for anyone in Freethorn, or throughout all of Lahaikshe? It was a matter not far from the thoughts of all who’d heard Gwinthrayle’s “crumbling land” account. For those unaware of it, there was much talk about the impact this sudden influx of population would have on Freethorn. Certainly there was plenty of room for all, but some considered the possibility of friction between the rat and mouse populations, with the latter’s ranks swelled so greatly. With recent cases of untoward remarks being apparently resolved and largely attributed to youthful indiscretion, none believed anything especially serious could happen now. Of course, it was all dependent on whether these mice would be definitively proven to be advanced; but then, if it were proven untrue, could they be rightly denied a permanent home in Freethorn?

As the afternoon wore on, some returned to their daily tasks while some remained to continue getting acquainted with the newcomers. Amid the bustle of activity, two stood apart, deep in discussion, raising some curiosity about what they could be talking about with such apparent seriousness.

“So, if worst came to worst, all of Freethorn could be evacuated back to Earth; but for your people, Gwinthrayle, eventually there would be no place left to hide.”

“Indeed, Nicodemus.” Gwinthrayle paused to wave to some of the Rusay visitors as they passed by.

“Perhaps…if we could summon every sorcerer across Lahaikshe, pool all our resources, the cause for these disasters could be found. You mentioned an associate of yours the other day, I believe…”

“Birantha, yes; an associate and longtime friend. I haven’t had the chance to contact him yet but I’m positive he’s aware of the situation. And yet…it may be no more than wishful thinking, but…I feel very strongly that events may play out in our favor very soon.”

Nicodemus raised an eyebrow. “Justin spoke of these ‘hunches’ of yours, in particular the one you experienced when all of you faced down that Ghormfisk fellow in taking back the Stone. In my old life, I experienced the like frequently, but now, not at all.” They’d already discussed the subject at length during Nicodemus’s visit, how his telekinetic ability had carried over to this new form, accompanied by others, but his precognition did not.

“Well, in my case, you may consider it instinct born of decades spent practicing the mystic arts. I only wish I could offer some solid reassurance.” Scanning the crowd, Gwinthrayle could see some of those who’d been apprised of the possible crisis circulating among the new mice, knowing how worried all of them must be but putting up a brave front. “Especially now that so many have come here with the promise of a better life.”

“Indeed. I still feel, though, that the timing could be in question. Why would Lula feel inclined to carry out this ‘mission’ just as we may be directly threatened by this disaster? And how does Eric fit in, and those amazingly powerful abilities of his? I have to wonder if, before my time here is over, we will learn any answers. Just since Johnathan and I returned from our trip to Earth, we’ve had mystery stacked upon mystery, and all our efforts yielding few results.”

“Yes, and all of you have become convinced that an unknown force in the world—an ‘entity’ or ‘presence’—is at work here. Something which is the stuff of legend or bedtime stories for children, even among those such as myself. And yet, given the evidence, I couldn’t rule it out.” Gwinthrayle had already been apprised of all the strange events that had recently occurred in Freethorn.

“Ellis and Lilia approached you about that very subject, did they not, when we visited you?”

“Yes, after Lilia’s encounter with the min’hathio, and she was positive she’d heard a voice, as if telepathically, that couldn’t have originated from the creature. And then Lula, following her devastating loss, seemed to have a similar visitation, after which she appeared not only to recover from her loss but have a renewed purpose as well. And now…” Nicodemus scanned the crowd, catching sight of Lilia, Ellis and others being introduced by Lula to some of the newcomers. Nearby, Teresa, Sarah and Eric were sitting and conversing quietly. They appeared to come to an agreement, and all got to their feet, carrying the two youngsters and heading away toward the colonies.

“Well,” said Gwinthrayle, “at least Teresa seems well on her way in accepting her mate’s return.”

Nicodemus nodded. “Johnathan told me of how she and he had both compared their situations: when she’d first lost Eric, how she was certain he wouldn’t return to her as Johnathan returned to his family after being presumed dead. And now…” Nicodemus looked up, sighing. Teresa’s situation, though much different than his own, nonetheless struck a sympathetic chord. “Now…we must continue to seek a way to head off any further devastation.”

“Agreed.” Gwinthrayle again scanned the crowd. “I believe it’s time I spoke with Lilia myself.” As they both approached her, she looked up, her eyes meeting Nicodemus’s and smiling, as if knowing it was her they needed to meet with. Nearby, Jessica was busy giving the “dip” treatment to two youngsters while explaining its importance to their mother. Her eyes met Nicodemus’s, and she smiled and waved. He wanted to tell her all about the possible danger they were in, but he also wanted to believe in Gwinthrayle’s hunch. Would this all play out in a manner that would take them out of danger? Either way, it was inevitable that everyone would have to be told, and soon.

“It’s good to see you again, Gwinthrayle,” said Lilia with much less reticence than expected. “I want to thank you again for letting us into your home and everything.”

“It was my pleasure, Lilia. In fact, it was your visit, or one incident then, that I’d like to discuss with you now.”

“Oh…you must mean the min’hathio,” she guessed.

“Precisely. We need for you to describe for us again, in as much detail as you can remember, what you’d felt and this ‘message’ you said you’d been given.”

“It is of the utmost importance, my dear,” added Nicodemus. “For, you see, other events have come to light since then, that took place outside Freethorn, but which could still place everyone here and all over the world in grave danger, and your experience may provide clues in how to prevent it.”

“Oh, I…I see.” Lilia looked genuinely surprised. “Well…I don’t know what else I…” She looked down as if trying to regain her train of thought, and didn’t seem to notice Ellis’s approach.

“What’s going on, guys?” he asked casually.

Lilia snapped back to attention. “No…there is more I can…” She suddenly looked distressed. “No…please!” She closed her eyes, holding arms close to her torso.

“Lilia? What’s wrong?” Ellis looked at Gwinthrayle questioningly.

Before he could answer, Lilia gasped and her head jerked upward, eyes wide open. Gwinthrayle kneeled in front of her and gasped in turn. Nicodemus’s astonishment was just as great. Ellis was so stunned he staggered backwards, landing on his rump.

Chapter 45 - Elle

“So…it’s all true, isn’t it?”

“Every word, Grandpa,” said Shirley confidently.

“That’s right,” added Stuart. “We never felt like Eric was putting us on, or anything. Every word of his story was true.”

“Yes…or if not, he certainly believes it is.” Kimball looked up to see Johnathan and Justin approach. “Well! Are things any clearer yet?”

“I’d like to say a pattern’s starting to emerge,” said Johnathan, “but I wouldn’t go that far yet.”

Justin nodded as he crouched. “Outside of the ones that made direct contact with Johnathan and his family, there’s nothing to suggest any connection with any of us. The closest thing I’ve found so far was the one who said he’d once watched a group of rats enter the peach orchard where he lived—Burrum, that was his name. He was fearful of them and so didn’t get too close, but he could see them climb a tree and help themselves to some fruit. Then, after they’d left, he got curious enough to examine the area. He found several mostly-eaten peaches and finished one off. Then he went home and thought about what he’d just witnessed. The next day, as he put it, he never felt the same again.”

Johnathan nodded thoughtfully. “That could’ve been us, all right. We did pass through at least one peach orchard on the way to our first colony. How long ago did he say it happened?”

“He could only say it was a long, long time ago, longer than he ever expected to live. Oh, and before you ask, he did think he might’ve seen a mouse or two moving among the rats, and among the rat-scents that lingered, he thought he could make out a strange mouse-scent as well.”

“So there was at least indirect contact,” said Kimball. “Unless…Is it possible that…the peach he ate could have had…some influence on him?”

Justin’s eyes widened. “Just because…one of us had eaten it before? Is it possible? What do you think, Johnathan?”

After a whisker-rubbing pause, Johnathan said, “I was just reminded of a conversation, just hours ago, that Maddie and I had with Reuben. It was about…how some of the other newer mice, the ones not originating from NIMH, have become more like us, just from living among us. We suggested it could be something in the air or water, or even the food, but…none of us were really serious…”

“…Or were you, without knowing?” added Kimball. “Either way, I think we have something more to chew on here.”

The others stared silently in apparent reply.

“Yes, I know it was a bad pun, but…” Kimball realized that Justin and Johnathan were looking past him. He turned and his eye first caught Gwinthrayle, looking just as intently at someone from which he, Nicodemus, Ellis and a growing number of others found themselves unable to turn away.

“It’s Lilia,” said Stuart. “Why does she…look like that?”

“She’s all…weird and sparkly,” said Shirley, wide-eyed.

Lilia walked slowly among the crowd, gazing back and forth, looking pleased. But what riveted everyone’s attention was the way the light seemed to catch her. It was as if she were “more there,” as some would later describe it. Her fur seemed to glow almost iridescently, and if one were to look into her eyes, there would be a sensation of being able to fall into them. She seemed oblivious to the curious stares even as her attention seemed focused on everyone around her but on no one in particular.

Johnathan moved toward Gwinthrayle and Nicodemus, noting how they seemed as mystified as anyone. Good Lord, now what’s up with her? He almost asked the question aloud, and it certainly was on the lips of many others.

Gwinthrayle and Nicodemus described how this condition came over Lilia all at once as they were talking to her. She’d suddenly appeared to be in the throes of some inner turmoil, as if another personality were fighting for control…again. Her physical appearance underwent this bizarre change, as if one now literally looked upon her, and only her, with different eyes.

“And since then, she hasn’t uttered a word,” Nicodemus went on, “only looked around at everyone as she does now…almost as a monarch would with her subjects.”

“But what the heck is wrong with her?” asked a worried Ellis, an edge of desperation in his voice. “I thought…I thought she was over all this weird, other-personality stuff.”

“Evidently not,” said Gwinthrayle. “But we must be calm, my boy. This may yet play out in a positive way.”

As they watched, two other mice—Reuben and Timothy—approached Lilia directly. Timothy was more hesitant, but Reuben clasped her by the shoulders and jostled her. “Lilia—what is this? What’s happened to you?”

And then she finally spoke. “To see…this land…through such eyes as these…too long has it been.” The voice still sounded like Lilia’s, but there was something extra added, as with her appearance: a strange, “breezy” quality. Her manner still seemed distant and preoccupied, her reply to Reuben seeming more like an observation made to herself.

“Too long since what?” said Reuben. “What do you mean? What’s wrong with your voice?”

“I’m not sure if…she can even hear you,” said Timothy. “But I don’t think she’s in any danger.”

“I concur,” said Gwinthrayle, approaching from behind. “Something, some outside entity has taken command of Lilia’s mind and body, perhaps after lying dormant within her for days, perhaps since…”

“Since she met the min’hathio!” exclaimed Ellis. “That’s it, isn’t it, Gwinthrayle? It did this to her, somehow!”

“I believe…the creature may have more provided the means for delivery, rather than being the actual perpetrator.”

“Whatever this is and however it happened,” said Johnathan, “if this is a separate entity, then it’s here for a reason. I think some of us should stick by her, to watch her and try to get her…‘it’…to tell us more.”

Nicodemus, Gwinthrayle, Johnathan, Timothy and Justin were quickly elected, but Reuben and Ellis insisted on coming along as well. “You can’t stop us,” said Reuben. Nicodemus suggested to Jessica that Stuart and Shirley accompany them too, their mutual truth-finding ability being of possibly great advantage. She gave her permission, cautioning all of them to be careful.

For some ten minutes Lilia carried on in this manner: gazing slowly about at her surroundings and making similarly cryptic statements that weren’t replies to questions about who or what “she” was or what her business was. Reuben and Ellis were becoming especially impatient with this lack of progress.

“I can’t wait any longer, Johnathan,” announced Reuben, and without waiting for a reply, again stood directly in front of Lilia and clasped her by the shoulders. “Lilia…listen to me! I’m your brother, Reuben! You’ve known me all your life! Why are you acting like this?”

Johnathan was about to say something to try to calm him when Lilia spoke again. “The child speaks…with love for this one. Concern. Worry. Confusion. Perhaps…it is time.”

“Time for what?” said Ellis. “Who are you, and why have you taken over Lilia?”

“Ellis, please,” cautioned Nicodemus. “If she’s the kind of entity I suspect her to be, we may not want to risk angering her.”

Lilia turned toward him and Gwinthrayle. “You are…both of you…workers of ambient energies. Keepers of arcane knowledge, and yet…children as are all who exist upon this sphere.”

Ellis’s jaw dropped. “Nicodemus…you know something, don’t you? You have some idea about what kind of being…she is, don’t you?

Before Nicodemus could reply, Lilia faced Ellis directly and said, “I am…what I have always been.”

“Boy, has this place changed! I barely got a look at it last time, but now…wow, all these new quarters and everything…” Eric’s head turned continuously as the newly-united family walked the main corridor of the Mouse colony.

“We had to accommodate a lot of new people,” said Teresa, “and it’s not going to be over soon, from the looks of it.” She and Sarah continued leading Eric down the hall to the family quarters.

Eric sighed. “Yeah. I just hope…I didn’t bring them all here for nothing, after what we learned back there.”

“They’ll get to the bottom of it, Eric, I’m sure they will.”

“Well…after what I was able to do, I guess anything’s possible.”

“They will,” said Sarah confidently. “It’s supposed to be so safe here, that’s what your Dad and Justin and everyone’s been saying.”

Teresa just smiled and nodded, looking down at Eric Jr. in her arms. On one hand she didn’t want to erode Sarah’s confidence, but she had already gained a strong sense—as did many others—that there would be no easy solution to this crisis.

They soon approached one doorway, and both women looked forward to seeing Eric’s reaction upon seeing what lay on the other side. They were not disappointed, as he was surprised and momentarily disoriented—as much as Teresa and Sarah were initially—at the near-identical appearance of the place to the rock grotto that housed their home in Thorn Valley. They showed him all around, telling him how Johnathan had used the Stone to reshape it, and letting him know that this was his home now as well, if he desired. For a short while they were able to forget about any imminent crisis as they concentrated on setting up new living arrangements.

A short while later, the group made its way along the trail back to Oak Park, eager to be back in the center of the action. They were joined by three more—Amelia and her sons Thomas and Grey—who had all been napping for the past hour or so and missed all the excitement. Teresa and Eric had just finished giving Amelia the greatly-condensed version of recent events.

“So all these new mice are like your father and Mr. Ages, as if they had the treatments at NIMH too?”

“That’s right, Amelia,” said Teresa, “we don’t know how or why yet, but...it’s really going to change things.”

“I can imagine. I wonder…are any of them…you know, single, unattached?”

“Uh-huh,” replied Eric. “Quite a few.”

Amelia and Sarah exchanged pleased looks. “That’s good,” said Amelia. “I’ve thought about Vincent a lot the past few days, and I know he wouldn’t want me to be alone and not try to find someone else.”

“I’m sure you will,” said Teresa. “And Zenia, and Reuben, and…others, as well.”

Eric looked over to her, saying nothing but understanding her meaning and the decision she may still need time to make. He looked down at Tyler in his arms, and the child smiled and reached up to tug at his father’s ear, squealing.

Teresa silently reflected on how Eric was dealing with this situation with no apparent jealousy and such great calm, even with the knowledge that she and Norman had been growing closer. It was all the more remarkable, given the barely-believable task he’d so recently accomplished.

Her musings were interrupted as they came to the edge of Oak Park, and specifically by the approach of four young rats, including her friend Hermione and her fiancé Garner. “Hi, Teresa,” greeted Hermione. “Have you heard about Lilia yet?” She described the bizarre changes in Lilia and how Johnathan, Justin and others were trying to figure them out.

As the group continued on, Eric said, “Lilia…she’s the white mouse, isn’t she?”

“Yes,” replied Teresa. “There’ve been a lot of…unusual things happening with her. It’s like she can’t catch a break. I just hope this isn’t—”

Another interruption arrived very swiftly. “Eric,” said Lula breathlessly, stopping almost on a dime. “It’s Lilia. She’s glowing like…a lot like you did before you made the doorway. Oh…are you and Teresa back together?”

“We’re…working it out, Lula. So where are—” Teresa interrupted herself as she saw the motley group approach, with a strangely-changed Lilia in the forefront.

A look of recognition was seen to cross the white mouse’s features as she saw the mice before her. She came right up to Eric, who looked upon her with as much wide-eyed disbelief and wonder as the others, including the little boy in his arms. “You are…the one who delivered the other children. Safe…all safe within my bosom at long last.”

And something in her words and appearance seemed to strike a responsive chord with Eric as well. “You…you made me that way somehow. You kept me from being killed by the hawk, and…everything after that. Somehow, I…know this. But how? I’ve never even met you before today.”

“The reason for that, Eric,” said Nicodemus, “is that this isn’t Lilia speaking to you now, but another being that has taken command of her body—one which very likely had given you the abilities that brought you and those others to us today.”

“Yes,” said Ellis, “and one that should stop beating around the bush and start making with some straight answers.”

Again Nicodemus made to caution him, but Lilia said, “And you…are the one who would be life-mate to this one…giving freely of yourself as she would you.”

“Yes, I am,” said Ellis carefully. “And if you know that, then…you know why I’ve been talking this way. The thought of her being hurt…I just couldn’t bear that. She’s been through enough.”

Lilia smiled reassuringly. “This one…will come to no harm, my child. She will be returned to you whole and content. It is regrettable…that her will and consciousness must be subjugated even for this short span.”

“That’s all well and good,” said Johnathan, “but until then, why do you need her? We know you’re here for a reason, and we’re all waiting to hear it.”

The young mouse turned toward him. There was a brief moment of tension as she looked upon him with an expression at first impassive, and Johnathan felt as if he could learn everything in an instant just by gazing into those ancient, seemingly bottomless eyes. She then gave the same smile she gave Ellis as she looked him up and down, her gaze settling briefly on the amulet against his breastbone. “And you…the one called Johnathan…who led your people away from the fear and hostility that threatened to overwhelm you…to where you would thrive, and feel free and welcomed.” She again looked at the Stone and appeared ready to say more, but then she seemed to check herself.

With the group approaching the greater part of the crowd, she made a sweeping gaze, appearing to acknowledge their bemused and bewildered expressions. “It…is time. I have had…adequate time to fully assimilate, and…all of you deserve to know.” With that, she moved surprisingly quickly toward the larger group. Her “entourage” continued to follow, burning with curiosity and anticipation, most certain this was a being who could provide answers to so many questions plaguing them. Some, though, were still concerned over whether Lilia would truly emerge from this state unscathed.

“What do you suppose she meant by ‘fully assimilate’?” Ellis wondered.

“Near as I can tell, Ellis,” replied Nicodemus, “is that this spirit lay dormant these past few days, and only now was able to place herself fully in charge of Lilia’s body.”

“I don’t like the sound of that,” said Reuben. “Not at all.”

“She’ll be all right,” said Timothy. “I’m sure of it. We just need to keep telling ourselves, it’s only temporary. This spirit won’t be inside her for good, just like…er, I mean…” He looked at Nicodemus apologetically.

“It’s all right, Timothy. We can only hope that this being’s departure from Lilia will benefit her, as I expect my own departure from Rollo will for him.”

Stuart and Shirley had observed and listened to it all, and privately reminded each other of what they’d overheard from Lilia last night, as if she’d been arguing with herself. It was starting to make sense, they realized, and they were eager to see what would follow.

As the group followed Lilia back to the larger gathering, they could hear the hum of conversation diminish almost to nothing. All were eager and anxious to hear why this strange being walked among them, and still she appeared to acknowledge their curiosity.

“If she’s getting ready to speak,” Justin said, “perhaps we should direct her to the top of the rock where Eric was, so everyone can see and hear her.” Then, to their surprise, Lilia headed straight for the rock herself, nimbly climbing to the top, as if she’d overheard the suggestion, though all were sure she couldn’t have; more likely, she simply remembered, through Lilia, that it was an appropriate point to speak from.

Among the newcomer mice, many were still receiving the “dip” treatment. As Janice paused in the middle of helping Madeline treat two youngsters, she looked up to the rock, seeing Lilia surveying the crowd. “She’s…so strange to look at. What do you think is wrong with her, Madeline?”

“I don’t think…it’s a matter of wrong or right. More like…different, but also very important to all of us.”

The being looked down at the body it commanded, as if noticing it for the first time. “The physicality of this form…so unlike that of the Rusay. So well suited for scaling and climbing.”

Nicodemus was reminded of his own scrutiny of the form he wore, on his first night here, and for a moment he wondered: just how long did this being intend to be here and in control of Lilia’s body? Did it come here to pass on information, or did it have further designs, perhaps on all of them?

His thoughts were interrupted by Jessica’s approach, as Stuart and Shirley wormed their way past him to reach their mother first. “So,” she inconspicuously asked, “did anyone learn anything?”

Nicodemus briefly summed up for her the language the being had used, which, however cryptic, definitely pointed toward the prospect of having some vexing mysteries solved. Jessica looked toward the white mouse with the strange almost-glowing appearance, again looking around from her perch at the expectant crowd, and felt a sudden sense of determination. Nicodemus knew there were matters especially close to home that she needed answers for. Both looked down at Stuart and Shirley.

“Whatever’s going on with her,” said Stuart, “she’s telling the truth.”

“Or at least she believes she is, like Eric,” added Shirley.

Nearby, Teresa, Eric and their children took their places with other members of her family. Madeline was delighted at seeing how much more like a true family they looked, and at hearing that they were starting to feel that way as well. She advised them both to trust their feelings if they had any doubts now, and allow time to make things clearer.

Further away, another who would be concerned with Teresa’s welfare was instead concentrating, as were many others, on their visitor, who looked ready to address the crowd. As Norman helped quiet the others, he caught sight of Teresa with Eric. Just as well, he thought, and inwardly vowed to bow out and let them rediscover each other. But would they get the chance, or any of them get a chance for anything? If this being inside Lilia—or anyone, for that matter—knew how they could avoid the kind of destruction he and Teresa had seen firsthand just hours ago, could anyone make any long-range plans?

After Lilia had been standing atop the rock for a good minute, many wondered: what was she waiting for? Most were readily willing to believe that this was some kind of spirit native to Lahaikshe possessing Lilia now, something which few would have believed two weeks ago; but the combination of Nicodemus again walking among them and recent bizarre and troubling events made everyone much more receptive to such concepts. But if this was the case, why was she just looking around at everyone, as if surveying her domain? Nicodemus’s earlier comparison of a queen and her subjects was on many minds.

“Forgive me,” she finally said, and everyone grew completely silent. “I am, as are many of you, given to reflection and contemplation. And in seeing all of you before me, I am more certain than ever that events proceeded as planned.”

At the forefront of the crowd, Justin stood. “Excuse me, but…what events do you mean? The ones that brought us here to Lahaikshe?”

“Or perhaps,” cut in Brutus, “recent ones that none of us can explain, like strange storms, serious injuries that suddenly reverse themselves, bizarre anomalies that just come and go…”

Justin turned to admonish him, but Lilia said, “You have every right to such impatience. There is information that should be shared…in order for the solution to be realized.”

The solution to what? Justin, among many others, again felt the urge to ask, but none acted upon it. It was apparent to everyone that patience was in order, but also that there would be no further beating around the bush.

“Events were set in motion years ago which brought you all here. And even with that accomplished…tests were necessary, as proof of your worthiness.”

A collective gasp rose from the crowd, the words resonating the strongest with those who had recently heard, first-hand, similar statements from the same lips.

“‘All of us are worthy,’” Nicodemus quoted privately to Johnathan. “The very words we’d heard from Lilia two days ago. Obviously, this entity had already begun to assert its personality within her by then, possibly earlier.”

“Yes,” Johnathan agreed, “and it sounds like our suspicions about those ‘tests’ were on the money.”

Lilia continued: “To have another race enjoy the bountiful treasures of this world…my world…was a very desirable thing…with so much room to grow.”

Gwinthrayle’s brow furrowed. Desirable for whom? If this was a being that was truly of this world, perhaps even an integral part of it…

“When I was fortunate enough to witness such a race…in truth, a pair of races…nascent, in their infancy…I was…fascinated, intrigued by the possibilities. I observed their bid for freedom, followed by the devastating depletion of their number. It was a great effort…perhaps the most costly I had ever made…for me to intervene directly, all to aid these noble souls toward fulfilling their destiny…to lead them to where they could truly prosper. The result of my intervention was witnessed by all today. But…there is still much work yet to be done if this new life, this prosperity, is to be preserved.”

Johnathan stood. “If I may…it’s obvious that we are the pair of races you refer to. And the depletion you mentioned…that would mean us mice, the ones that didn’t survive the escape from the NIMH lab. You talk as if…it was our destiny to end up here, on Lahaikshe. Just days ago, Nicodemus and I had a discussion along those very lines. If you had a hand in that, in our coming here…then I think the least we can ask of you is to tell us who and what you are; or at the very least, a name we can call you.”

Lilia looked directly at Johnathan, who for a moment again thought he may have crossed a line. But she only gave a smile—one many would describe as matronly—and said, “Then…you may call me…Elle.”

Johnathan sighed. Well, I asked for the least, and I got it, he thought.

Justin frowned. “Elle…for Lilia?”

“Or perhaps,” Gwinthrayle added, “for Lahaikshe?” Even as he spoke, sudden realization washed over him, a distant memory restored. None noticed, with all eyes fixed upon the bizarrely-glowing mouse upon the rock; but he knew, beyond a doubt, that this wasn’t like the déjà vu that Nicodemus had reported experiencing. He was positive that he actually did have a previous experience with this being that called herself Elle, and he looked toward the Rusay families, in particular Sithpha and Dinilom’s eldest daughter. Tuintwom appeared equally fascinated by these proceedings, no more or less than the others, as if she had no recall of the direct role she played in that previous interaction.

Gwinthrayle laid the thought aside as “Elle” readied to resume speaking.

Chapter 46 - Interventions

“Now…on the matter of the intervention I spoke of. For many years…centuries, by your reckoning, I would send a tiny sliver of my consciousness, my essence—a ‘shard,’ one may call it—beyond this plane, to other dimensional realms. To define the shard in terms beings such as yourselves might understand, imagine being able to shed a small portion of your consciousness and still have it think as you do, and then send it out on ‘missions,’ where it would ‘report’ whatever it observed back to you. This would come to be the primary purpose for these shards, but eventually not the only one. The spectacle of evolving life, in infinite form and variety, has always held great fascination for me. This shard would observe the life-forms of each world for a time, and when recalled, it would add to my store of knowledge. It had become…my passion, very much so, to see the day-to-day struggles of these creatures. So many of them, in every shape and form; and living in every possible environment, many of them unique, unimaginable or unknown to other worlds.

“In all this time, there were certain beings, in particular circumstances, which I especially felt drawn to observe. On many worlds were species which, due to the right combination of environmental conditions, were able to grow and prosper to a greater degree than their fellows, and develop greater sophistication and intelligence, and culture and civilization. And, even more than this, there were those which were smaller in stature and were still able to develop sentience…such as yourselves and the Rusay. Many of these, under other circumstances, would surely have become prey for larger and more powerful creatures. Many shared worlds with larger sentient races, and in some of these the two races remained unknown to each other for millennia. These smaller races held a particular fascination, and I felt drawn, time and again, to send a shard to record every facet of their cultures.”

She paused for a moment, her sweeping gaze pausing in Johnathan’s general direction. He was sure she was looking directly at the Stone again and couldn’t help wondering if she knew something about it they didn’t.

“My interest,” Elle went on, “was motivated largely by concern…as you might reckon it, the kind a parent has for her children. And these shards I would send were purely for observation…until recent times, when a plan began to form; and more recently still, when I endeavored to take direct action to see this plan reach fruition.

“My interest in these smaller races became such that, in time, I sought to refine the composition of my shards, their makeup; so that they would be drawn to these smaller races and actively seek them out. When I first sent a shard to your world, your Earth, it was with no specific foreknowledge of a smaller sentient race living there. But in searching for one, it found…something which I had never encountered before. Members of two species, small in number, were having their very genetic makeup altered artificially, by means of the scientific knowledge and expertise of this world’s dominant race. There was a dawning intelligence there, one that their captors were unaware of, at least to the degree they believed. Again, I was powerless to do naught but observe. It was…troubling to know that even as their self-awareness grew, and consequently their desire for freedom, it was to be denied them. Equally troubling were the circumstances of their creation…at least at first. The very notion of these creatures having their life-forces altered in this fashion I found disheartening, repugnant even. But I knew there was no turning back, and I became increasingly fascinated with the implications.

“So it was that when you were able to engineer your own escape, it was very heartening to see; but also dismaying, shortly after, to observe the heavy losses suffered by the mice. But it was clear that the rats were destined to become the progenitors of an entirely new race. I was already certain that the advanced characteristics you all possessed would be inherited by your offspring; but whereas the rats would have the greater genetic variety, the two surviving mice, both male, would have no choice but mate with ‘ordinary’ females. Their children might very well inherit in full their fathers’ advanced characteristics, but beyond that? Surely, their genetic lines would be diluted in time. Once I was certain that what all of you wanted was to make your own way in the world and form your own society and culture, then could a plan be initiated.

At that time, I was unaware that three other of the mice had survived. My powers of observation were, unfortunately, limited in their scope, and so I could only concentrate on the main group which escaped together. Therefore, I believed that those two mice—Johnathan Brisby and Cyril Ages—held the key to the survival of the advanced mice as a culture, but more like them would be needed. Surely, they had deserved as great a chance as the rats to develop into a genuine culture; and soon, a plan was in place that would ensure they had that chance.”

As Elle paused, many looked toward the “new” mice, many of whom themselves realized where the narrative was heading. “I think,” Sibelle whispered to her mother, “this is where we come in.”

“Until then, the shards I sent out could do no more than seek out smaller races and observe them. These fragments of my consciousness worked best in a liquid medium, usually water. It would move physically from location to location quickly, with the speed of thought. I may have been observing you from the smallest body of standing water, such as a dewdrop or a rain puddle; or from liquid in motion, such as a running stream or skipping from raindrop to raindrop during a storm. Most often, though, it was easiest to exist within the very moisture in the air, especially on humid days or when mist or fog prevailed. And all the while, none of you would be aware of my scrutiny.”

Many were reminded of the fog that rolled into Freethorn over a week ago, the one that seemed to some to have a preternatural quality. Was she observing them then, perhaps even controlling its movement?

“But now…this new shard I sent to Earth would do much more than simply observe. This one would again be placed in water, but in the right body of water—a place where rainwater had collected—at precisely the right moment. That moment would arrive when one of the two mice—Johnathan or Cyril—would pause to quench his thirst. But only one; not both. He would believe it to be mere water he was taking into his system; but along with it, he would also be ingesting this portion of my very life-essence—a portion whose function, from that point forward, would be to enable him to replicate his advanced characteristics in others of his species, working through his own bodily fluids.”

She paused, acknowledging the widespread astonishment this statement prompted. Tallus was the first to catch his breath long enough to say, “And this part of the plan…may we assume it was a success?”

“Indeed it was.”

Many looked toward Johnathan and Ages, many already weighing the implications and knowing what the next question had to be and expecting it to come from one of them; though each could hardly say a word to save his life right then.

Ages was finally able to stammer, “Well, I…I ca-can’t imagine it was…it was me. It must have been Johnathan…wasn’t it?”

Elle nodded slowly and smiled.

Johnathan and his family looked at one another, stupefied. “Dad,” said Teresa, her hand on his shoulder, “What does this mean? For us, or for anyone here?”

“Yes…” Johnathan moved closer to the rock. “Yes, what does this mean, Elle? Was I…responsible, without knowing, for making all these new mice what they are now? You said…my bodily fluids played a part. What are you saying, exactly?”

“I am saying,” said Elle, her tone as even and measured as usual, “That this portion of my life-essence would work with your own unique body chemistry; and through your bodily fluids interacting with those of members of your own species, would enable you, Johnathan—rather, did enable you to share the gifts you received while you were a part of the humans’ experiments. The most effective method was through mating, but it could also be accomplished through something as simple as sharing food, with even a trace amount of your saliva being ingested by the other individual.”

Johnathan and Madeline looked at each other, agape, full realization swiftly coming upon them and many others. Madeline reached out to touch Johnathan’s face. “Johnathan…if what she’s saying is all true, then…it was this…‘shard’ of hers that made me into one of you. We’d assumed it was the NIMH treatments that gave you that ability, but…”

“But instead…” Johnathan suddenly looked up at Elle. “Now, wait…we’d always thought that…I’d influenced her that way by…her being my mate. And now…you’re saying I’d made others that way by…sharing food?” He’d scarcely begun to realize the potential for such an ability, if true.

“I would urge you, Johnathan and Madeline Brisby, to search your memories, to cast your minds back to the day when you first discovered the truth about what you’d believed to be a difference in how you aged.”

The pair looked at each other, recalling that all-important moment, shortly after their reunion over two years ago; and seconds later they began talking at once. They stopped, laughing nervously; then Johnathan went on, “We willed the Stone…to show us the moment that I’d first made Maddie…like me and Cyril and the Rats. And it showed…a moment when we were sharing food.”

Madeline groped for words for a moment. “We’d both forgotten about that. It showed us, after that…a more intimate scene, and we thought…that was where it began. But it was actually…”

“…when we were sharing a strawberry. And…and…” The full implications were coming upon Johnathan more swiftly now, enough to make it difficult to put his thoughts into words.

Timothy stepped in. “If he could do that by sharing food with Mom, then…he could have done the same with…any mouse. That is what you’re saying, isn’t it, Elle?”

Elle just nodded, leaving a flurry of discussion, quiet but excited.

“It does add up,” said Justin, “provided this is all true.” He looked toward the Brisbys, the two embracing, unable to find words for the moment.

Nearby, Jessica looked down at her eldest children. She motioned subtly for them to keep silent, and whispered, “Is it true?” Stuart and Shirley both nodded.

“It pleases me,” continued Elle, “that you respond with skepticism, rather than readily accepting all you are told.”

Johnathan and Madeline continued embracing silently, momentarily caught up in a rush of memories of their first days together; and how, upon learning the truth—at least partially—over two years before, they were able to see so much in a new light, especially the many ways her knowledge and abilities outperformed those of her peers among naturals. Many of the Rats listening recalled the same, from the day she’d come to them for help, especially her understanding of human speech, enabling her to fully comprehend not only the meaning but also the implications of Mr. Fitzgibbons’ telephone conversation; and using her own reasoning power and ingenuity to escape the birdcage and warn the Rats in time of the humans’ impending arrival. They’d given little thought to the implications at the time, because they had to concentrate on thoroughly dismantling and vacating the Rosebush colony, and moving on to their new home. But when her new status among them had been confirmed later, many apologized to her personally for the initially ill treatment some—not just Jenner—had subjected her to: calling for her to be sent away, thinking her business couldn’t be theirs; even with the knowledge that she was Johnathan’s widow, as had been believed.

Nicodemus spoke next, giving voice to some of his friends’ thoughts. “When Johnathan first told me he’d found a mate, and about the ways he’d seemed to influence her, we’d speculated that this may have been a unique ability within him. It appears we were correct, but how little we understood the true nature of that ability!” He especially recalled fondly how, when he’d directed her to read a passage from his journal, she’d done so with only a little difficulty. Without that influence, she wouldn’t have been able to master reading or writing at all.

“And now, we have these ‘new’ mice,” brought up Tallus. “Are we to understand, Elle, that Johnathan, through this ‘shard’ of yours, was responsible for their present state, and that it was mainly, if not solely, through sharing food?”

“Precisely,” answered Elle. “It may have been a case where Johnathan, out of kindness, shared a morsel with a stranger he’d just met, or one had sampled a bite of something from which Johnathan had eaten his fill and then discarded. The effectiveness of this method was not absolute; perhaps 40 to 50 percent of those mice received this gift. But as this day clearly demonstrates, it was effective enough.”

Elle looked out over the crowd, her gaze pausing longest on the group of newcomer mice, many of whom were searching their memories for when they’d have made contact with Johnathan, directly or indirectly. For those who had actually met him—Janice, Sibelle, Dupree, Mitchell, Sadie, and most certainly Eric—there was no doubt. Others recalled an unusually-generous stranger which could have been him sharing his food with them. Others had seen strange rats, sometimes with a mouse or two tagging along, and avoided them directly and investigated the site later—such as Burrum, the one who’d seen them in the peach orchard. Still others drew a complete blank; but all held in common the realization that, at some point in their lives, they’d undergone a drastic change; and that now, they were all where they truly belonged.

“This would explain a lot, all right,” said Justin, “but what about those other mice among us who were naturals, such as Amelia here, or Alma or Brummie or Seelah?”

“Yes…yes, they’ve all shared food with me since their arrival,” said Johnathan. He recalled how some, on their first days here, would be reluctant or cautious to try unfamiliar foods, and Johnathan would take a bite to show them it was safe for them and then pass it on to them. “If I…still have this ability, then they’ve probably benefited from it as well, haven’t they?”

“You may judge,” said Elle. “Have not all of them become like you in many ways?”

“My first day here,” said Nicodemus, “I noted how curious it was that they had all done as well academically as their peers, how they had blossomed, as if it were simply the right learning environment for them. In conversations I’ve had with all of them, I could scarcely detect a difference between them and anyone else in Freethorn, so it would be my assessment that all have received this gift.”

“I’m not taking any chances,” came a voice from behind Johnathan. He turned just in time to see Amelia approach him. Before he could say a word, she had gripped his face with both hands and placed her lips firmly against his, slipping her tongue into his mouth! He was so surprised he could only go with the moment, not wanting to force her away from him.

Though she checked herself quickly, Madeline couldn’t entirely suppress a laugh, in spite of the impact this latest information still had on her, because she—along with Timothy and Cynthia—was instantly reminded of the kiss of gratitude Zenia gave him the day of her arrival. Everyone viewing this scene knew why Amelia did this, but many still couldn’t help feeling amused at Johnathan’s predicament.

After Amelia broke off the kiss, she looked squarely at Johnathan with a look of immense gratitude. “Thank you,” she said, sounding almost ready to cry as she stepped away.

“I’m sorry, Johnathan,” said Madeline, taking his arm. “It was just so sudden and unexpected, that I couldn’t help…”

“It’s all right, Maddie. You know…Amelia, that probably wasn’t necessary. I…we’d shared meals with you several times, and so you probably…already…” He brought a hand to his face, shaking his head. “Oh, God…I still can’t get my brain around this whole idea.” He looked squarely at Elle. “If all you’ve told us is true…then, what sort of being are you, who can…change someone so greatly?”

“Indeed,” said Tallus, “someone with the power to effect major changes in one’s body chemistry—one’s very genetic makeup, yet. A being that can make use of one of us and use her to speak through, like some god of human mythology speaking through an oracle.”

“An apt comparison, Tallus,” said Nicodemus. “Perhaps more than we can imagine.” Stepping directly in front of Elle, he said, “My lady…we in Freethorn have been beset by many perplexing mysteries in recent days, which we have attributed to an unknown ‘presence’ peculiar to this world. Is this indeed such an entity speaking to us now through our friend Lilia?”

Elle nodded. “You may consider me…to be such an entity.”

It was not the straight yes-or-no answer many had hoped for, but Nicodemus knew it would probably have to do for now. “Thank you. Now…there are other mysteries as well, ones which concern the one addressing you now. The fact that you are able to make use of the body of a mortal being such as Lilia to this degree…suggests that my own situation may have been brought about with your involvement. Hearing you admit your role in changing Johnathan as you have only reinforces the suggestion.”

After a short pause, Elle answered, “I was preparing to impart this very point to you all. You are correct, Nicodemus. Not only your current situation, but…much more, going back to the days following your Escape.”

The statement prompted a ripple of low discussion throughout the crowd, though much of it didn’t so much express surprise as suspicions confirmed. Johnathan stood and gave voice to the basic question on the lips of most: “So…does this mean you sent one of your…shards to make changes to Nicodemus as well as me?”

“And,” Nicodemus added, “its makeup had to have been much different than Johnathan’s?”

“You are both correct,” answered Elle. “It was several weeks following Johnathan’s ingesting of the one which gave him the ‘replicating’ ability. I could not confirm as yet whether it had the desired effect, but he suffered no ill effects either. So I endeavored to initiate the next phase of my plan. I continued to observe, utilizing my more conventional shard, how effective Nicodemus was as the Rats’ leader, and so I decided early on that he should remain so for as long as possible. To this end, the makeup of the shard I ‘sent’ to him would bestow abilities upon him that, I believed, would offer a higher degree of protection for himself and his fellows, enabling his people to endure as a society. And yet…even I could not fully predict the effects it would ultimately have upon him; owing, I have since concluded, to my own unfamiliarity with creatures not of my own world. These effects would eventually play out fully, in ways that would prove surprising even to myself.

“I continued to observe how at least two new abilities manifested, the most dramatic being one of telekinesis. I would watch as he made use of it in the construction of your first colony and his continued leadership overall. Yet no other abilities, save that of precognition, presented themselves. If there were others, I could only presume that they yet lay dormant within him and he would eventually discover them. But perhaps more important was another factor that I had not foreseen: owing to the unfamiliarity with Earth creatures I spoke of, he was aging faster than his fellows. It was not at the rate of ordinary rats, but still…it would be likely to subtract precious years from his life.”

Elle paused a moment as the information sank in. There were whisperings of “She did that to him?” and the like; while others, especially the elders, looked to each other willing to believe wholeheartedly in this explanation of a long-running mystery. Many had noticed the tone of regret in her voice. For others, though—not the least of whom was Justin—there was a growing sense of uneasiness over one aspect of Elle’s account, one which would not stay unaddressed much longer.

Madeline Brisby recalled her first visit to the Rats and how, following Nicodemus’s account of their origins, it had occurred to her that his agedness almost seemed to contradict his story: if the NIMH treatments had slowed the aging process, then why was he so old and wizened? He couldn’t have been at such an advanced age all along, since the treatments, could he? She couldn’t bring herself to ask him directly, and when she and Justin spent time together preparing for her cat-drugging duty, the matter had slipped her mind completely, with so much else to occupy her. It wasn’t until her visit to Thorn Valley four months later that she did discuss the matter with Justin, but all he could tell her was that it was a mystery to everyone, Nicodemus included.

Even as his friends looked upon him with concern, Nicodemus, for his part, only sat quietly, weighing this new information. Jessica took his arm, and he silently reassured her.

Elle continued: “It was, perhaps, too soon. I had believed that I had refined the content of this shard to the point where its compatibility with Nicodemus’s physiology was at its greatest. Yet there may have been little more that I could have done, given the unfamiliarity I spoke of. So I do feel compelled to apologize to you personally, Nicodemus, for my error.”

“What’s past is past, my lady, and so your apology is accepted,” said Nicodemus. “And yet…considering this intervention of yours, on the part of Johnathan and myself…and your awareness of all we’d been subjected to at NIMH…then I’m sure you could see how we might see this as…little more than an experiment on your part.”

The very word prompted a strong reaction from many, of which Justin was next to give it voice. “Now granted, we haven’t heard your entire story yet, but…from what you’ve told us so far, it sounds like we’ve been nothing more than test subjects to you, especially Johnathan and Nicodemus. We did not escape that status at NIMH only to become the same for someone else. It was bad enough that Uhrstegg considered us, especially Nicodemus and Jenner, just pawns to be manipulated, like chess pieces. To ever be used like that again, as just someone’s plaything, is something we swore, after the Escape, that we’d never be again.” An upwelling of agreement rose from the crowd.

“I would submit, my lady,” said Tallus, “that, since you claim to have continued monitoring us over the years, you would certainly understand why we’d be averse to being regarded that way.”

“Please don’t misunderstand us,” said Simone. “If you are responsible for our living here now, whether directly or indirectly, then we’re not ungrateful, because we’ve certainly felt welcome here.”

“Certain recent events notwithstanding,” added Graham.

“All right, everyone,” called out Johnathan. “It may not be as bad as she made it sound. Although…from what you’ve told us so far, Nicodemus and I certainly were test subjects for you, any way you slice it. You gave him these abilities that he didn’t ask for and put me in the position of…a savior, almost, one that would save an entire race from extinction. Sure, it’s a good thing—a great thing that all these new ‘advanced’ mice have joined us, but I never asked to be put in this position.”

“Your feelings are justified, Johnathan Brisby,” said Elle, “but think back to the time just after you and your friends escaped captivity. You were filled with elation and exhilaration over your newfound freedom, but it was tempered by the losses of your fellow mice. Now…if I had been able to use an oracle then—as now with this one—to meet directly with you and Cyril Ages, and to ask one or both of you if you wanted this gift, would you have accepted?”

Johnathan looked down for a moment, lost in thought, then looked over to Ages. They looked at each other, nodding. “I think…given the choice, either of us would have. Provided, of course, we believed your story.”

“And the jury’s still out on that right now,” said Justin. “If you truly want us to believe you now, Elle, then you owe us more of an explanation of…just what kind of being you are, as we said earlier.”

“Indeed,” agreed Nicodemus. “Some of us, myself included, have theorized that this entity could be considered to be…an integral part of the very makeup of this world. Is this how we may further consider you?”

Elle looked straight ahead at no one in particular. “I am…as old, perhaps, as this very world. There was a moment, ages ago, when self-awareness came upon me, but I cannot state unequivocally whether that was also the moment of my creation. I am…what I have always been.”

It was an answer as unsatisfying as the previous one, but Nicodemus realized they probably would receive no more specific information about Elle’s origins.

Patricia addressed her next. “You said you later found out that Vincent, Kimball and I had also survived. Did you ever try to do with one of us, what you…did with Johnathan?”

“It was…under consideration. But…later events indicated such an action would be…unfeasible; for I had found that my initial and successful attempt had proven to be at a greater cost than I had anticipated. However, I continued to maintain a shard that would only observe, as before, so that I could continue to observe your progress through the years. These observations bore out the success of my efforts. It became clear that Johnathan was indeed passing on his advanced characteristics to other mice besides Madeline. As I said, the effect wasn’t always successful, but those for which it was are all gathered here today.”

“So this plan of yours,” said Tallus, “or at least this phase of it, was successful. But Johnathan was not made aware of this ability until now. If you were unable to use an oracle to inform him, could there have been some other way?”

After a pause, Elle replied, “This…was my first, and thus far only attempt at influencing living creatures in any way outside of those native to Lahaikshe. So I could not determine absolutely at the outset the precise results, or the degree of effectiveness. Perhaps…had I taken more time to refine the composition of my shard more precisely, then Johnathan may have been aware of his new ability after ingesting it, though he may not have been aware it was from something he’d ingested. He may have thought it an ability that stemmed from the human experiments.”

“Which we eventually did, these past two years,” said Johnathan. “But only insofar as my influencing Madeline.”

“And he kept on influencing the other natural mice in our community,” added Madeline. “Alma, Eric, Sarah, Brummie, Stollie…that was why they’d blossomed so much since joining us.”

“It’s why we’ve done so well in school, isn’t it?” chimed in Brummie.

“And all it took was…sharing food with him?” inquired Alma Ages. She looked at Cyril, who looked almost disappointed.

Nearby, Zenia and Amelia looked at each other, smiling. Or sharing a kiss with him, both were thinking.

Chapter 47 - Rewards and benefits, but not without questions

All that Elle had told them was still sinking in; and even with all the revelations about the enormous and profound changes exacted upon him, Nicodemus found himself giving more thought to those put upon Johnathan.

“Just imagine if he were aware of this ability all along,” he said. “Why, our Johnathan may have been ‘recruiting’ new mice to our ranks right and left!”

“It would have changed things drastically for all of us, all right,” agreed Justin. “But perhaps we should concentrate on what has happened. Obviously,” he said, addressing Elle, “Nicodemus’s resurrection has a connection to your treatment of him.”

“Yes,” agreed Nicodemus, “It’s clear that the fragmenting of my soul-self had to have been an added effect of your shard.”

“And then there’s Ghormfisk, and the Stone,” added Johnathan. “I’ve gotten the impression that you know something about both that we don’t. Since the Stone originated here, and Ghormfisk spent so much time here, courtesy of the Stone…” He paused, taking a deep breath. “I’m sorry to barrage you with so many questions, but…I’m sure you can appreciate our position.”

“Indeed I can, Johnathan, and I am prepared accordingly. Regarding Nicodemus: from being in close proximity to him presently, I am now aware of all that had befallen him in his first life’s final months, and since; and how much of these experiences were driven by the shard I had given him. As he had suspected, it gave him the potential for many other abilities other than what manifested: precognition and telekinesis. But again, I had little control over what abilities actually developed, nor could I attempt passing on another shard to Nicodemus; to do so would have risked his health and well-being. But there was an occasion, which some of you have probably realized, when the shard—which in many ways acted as an entity within Nicodemus, since it was a portion of my own consciousness—asserted itself in a new way.

“But before that happened, there was the matter of two others that figure prominently in the story: Pharsal, creator of the Stone, and the one you termed your ‘mystery creature’—Ghormfisk, alias Uhrstegg. I know some of you have speculated, almost since your arrival here, whether some unseen hand was guiding you to a life on Lahaikshe. These two were indeed ones who played an important role toward that end…and another was myself.”

She paused as a murmur rose from the crowd, less one of surprise than of confirmation. “There was a specific reason for this motivation…but first I would tell you more of the roles I and those others played.

“It was during your elders’ ‘wandering’ period that I had made the choice, but a way of bringing you all here did not immediately present itself; obviously there would be no easy solution. But two catalysts soon presented themselves: Pharsal’s creation of the Stone, and Ghormfisk—now calling himself Uhrstegg—making his entrance on Lahaikshe. Given that both events involved breaches of Lahaikshe’s dimensional barrier, they came to my attention immediately.

“The first event happened even before your time in human captivity. I witnessed Pharsal and his brother Arvasa’s return from the Dark World—the otherdimensional realm from which they sought a sample of the mineral unique to that world. As you know, they’d gone there out of a desire for adventure and youthful daring, but the journey cost Arvasa his life and nearly Pharsal’s as well; but he survived and fashioned the Stone from the sample they’d obtained. He utilized his own considerable skills in placing capabilities upon it, ones that he believed should be utilized by one with the proper qualities of compassion and heroism. You also know how Pharsal had passed on the Stone to his fellow sorcerer Birantha and then some months later died in an accident, after which his soul-self was drawn into the amulet, by his own directive; and that Birantha retained custody of the Stone until it was purloined through trickery by a visitor from another dimension calling himself Uhrstegg.

“What you do not know was that I was very much aware of Pharsal’s spirit joining with the Stone. It was of considerable interest to me, knowing what an object of great power it could be in the right hands; and so of equal interest were the reasons for this joining. I found I was able to communicate directly with Pharsal’s spirit within the Stone, and so I learned of the personal motivations behind his decision. These events were of great significance, I knew; but I had no need to utilize Pharsal and the Stone in any immediate plan of my own, nor could I perceive any harm in their existing like this. Eventually, though, they would play perhaps the most crucial role."

Many in the crowd, not the least of whom were Johnathan and Nicodemus, were beginning to understand that role, if not Elle’s motivations for placing them in it.

“It was after I’d sent the shards that were ingested by Johnathan and Nicodemus—indeed, after you’d established your Rosebush colony—that I saw how the Stone might play that role. Thus I paid another ‘visit’ to Pharsal within the Stone and told him of my plan, which he agreed to. Even one such as I could not control the Stone, but I knew that Pharsal might be able to exert his will upon it from within, utilizing the capabilities he’d already bestowed upon it. My plan—rather, our plan—would require, essentially, a courier, one to bring the Stone to the right location where it might be found by the right individual: one who, I believed, possessed the heroic qualities Pharsal had in mind to be worthy to bear the Stone.”

Many eyes looked to Johnathan, who barely noticed, engrossed in Elle’s account as he was.

“All I needed was the courier; and by happenstance, it arrived on Lahaikshe in the form of the ‘green stranger,’ Uhrstegg. I observed as he impersonated Gwinthrayle in order to gain access to secrets his fellow sorcerer Birantha may possess. Perhaps the greatest of those secrets was, of course, the Stone, which he secreted away and then took control of. At first, neither Pharsal or I were aware of Uhrstegg’s mental condition, but once the Stone was in his hands we realized it quickly: how the psychological trauma of losing the last of his people—or so he believed—had resulted in the kind and altruistic Ghormfisk developing the second personality Uhrstegg, which desired personal power for little more than mischief-making.

“Even knowing this, I knew there would likely not be a better opportunity, and so I directed Pharsal to steer Uhrstegg to a particular destination dimension, even to a very specific location within it.

“Most of you are no doubt aware of that location, and of whom I had intended Uhrstegg to meet there. In the simplest terms, I had Pharsal home in on the portion of my essence within Johnathan Brisby. I was already certain that once Pharsal had brought them to that place where Johnathan would shortly arrive, little would need to be done to have the Stone fall into his hands. It was perhaps something of a gamble, but it proved correct, for Uhrstegg was so disoriented upon his appearance that he dropped the amulet, and Johnathan was barely aware of his presence when he found it.

“I found that I was unable to communicate directly with Pharsal within the Stone while they were on Earth, so there were some details of what transpired afterward that I learned later. Pharsal was essentially on his own as far as any further actions he might take were concerned, but I was still able to observe goings-on via my observational shard. I could not predict what Ghormfisk or Uhrstegg would do, precisely how they might interact with the Rats or Johnathan; though I was aware that his intentions were likely to interfere with your progress. This was confirmed after you’d begun making plans for living independently from your human benefactors, plans which put two former friends at odds with each other.

“You all know what that led to: the spell Uhrstegg placed upon Jenner, placing him and Nicodemus at even greater opposition. But his spell against Nicodemus was more personally dismaying for myself, for I would have hoped that the portion of my essence within him would have provided a degree of protection from a mystical spell cast by another. But, as I said, the shard within Nicodemus acted very much as an entity unto itself, even as it was thoroughly integrated within his physiology; and however it was a part of my being, I could neither predict nor control all the ways it would affect him—or not.

“And so Uhrstegg’s spell affected his memories, causing him to forget many specific details that might have benefited his people, many of which concerned what he’d learned of the Stone. Thankfully, it didn’t impede progress on your Thorn Valley Plan. But around that time came another important event in how my shard had influenced Nicodemus. You remember it, I’m sure: your conversation with Johnathan about the “lost” Mice from NIMH, after which you experienced what you’d termed an ‘attack’ on your senses, which left you with lost memories restored and increased power within you.

“It came as equal a surprise to me as you, but only I knew the incident’s true nature: the fraction of my essence within you had succeeded in counteracting Uhrstegg’s spell. This was what enabled you to recall your earlier conversation about the Lost Mice from over a year before, just prior to Uhrstegg’s spell. And shortly afterward, this feeling of increased power enabled you to realize a previously dormant ability, compelling you to enlist the help of your associate Vernon to construct a device out of scrap which, upon its completion, became a conduit for this ability: to view past and present events. You immediately seized the opportunity; recalling your past curiosity about the Lost Mice, you used it to trace their whereabouts and discover the ones that yet lived, and the children they’d sired. Consequently, this was also the first I had learned of the existence of these mice.

“You resolved to do something to help them, especially Vincent and his children, most notably Rollo, and you were on the verge of sharing your discoveries, resolving as well to use your new ability to trace the Stone’s origins. But what happened next, alas, reinforced what I’d already observed: that the ‘enhancing’ shard’s effects upon you were unstable and unpredictable, its strength subject to fluctuation. The counteracting effect proved to be only temporary, and the effort you’d expended in this latest operation required rest; and afterward, Uhrstegg’s spell was able to reassert itself to the point where you’d forgotten all you’d discovered about the Lost Mice, before you could rally the others or write down anything.

“But here was the unpredictability effect again: you retained your knowledge of your new viewing device and its functions, but you had no memory of the recent discoveries you’d made with it; and so the Lost Mice would continue to be lost to you for some time. In time you would postulate that use of your viewer was hastening your accelerated aging. Alas, this was all too true.

“The next truly pivotal event, of course, was Johnathan’s disappearance, and with him Uhrstegg, who had already deceived Johnathan that evening by impersonating Nicodemus when the two consulted, and now made a play for the Stone. And…the true nature of this event, I am aware, has long been a mystery to you all, most of all Johnathan and his family. So…yes, it was Pharsal, asserting his will over the amulet on my instruction, who directed it to bring both of you to Lahaikshe. Just as Uhrstegg’s appearance on Earth was not a random event, his and Johnathan’s journey to Lahaikshe was equally preplanned by myself and Pharsal, in a reversal of the earlier process.”

Indeed, it didn’t come as a big surprise at this point. Still, many looked to Johnathan and Madeline, expecting at least a hint of anger; but in fact neither felt any at all, only a need to hear the rest of Elle’s story, as did nearly everyone else, with many prepared to ask the overarching questions, among them: why? What was the point of the plan she spoke of?

“There is little more I can add to events in subsequent months of which you are not already aware: Madeline’s dire predicament which led to her discoveries of her husband’s and the Rats’ shared heritage, her timely warning of danger; and Pharsal, successfully asserting his will over the Stone’s power, enabling it to save her children. The Rats moved to their new home and thrived there, and Madeline and her friends were able to trace Johnathan to Lahaikshe and bring him home.

“But Nicodemus? Yes, as I’m sure it’s clear to most of you by now, my influence on him extended to the terrible events of that fateful night, and beyond. In a fashion I never could have predicted, your earlier desire to help Vincent and his children—in particular Rollo—had somehow created a strong enough link to transfer your soul-self, your life essence, to these others. My shard had, in effect, acted on my desire to keep you as the Rats’ leader even in the event of your demise. Months before, there was that small ‘window’ of time in which it was able to temporarily overcome Uhrstegg’s spell; and in that time, you had built your viewing device and tracked down Vincent and his offspring. It now seems that your strong determination to help Rollo was what the shard had drawn upon to preserve your life; though why it had divided your essence among Vincent, Lilia, Reuben, Boris, Doris and Ardo as well as Rollo is something of a mystery. Apparently it stemmed from your desire to help all of them and bring them into the fold. In any case, that portion of my essence ‘traveled’ with your soul-self even as it left your old body, and became a part of all these mice, the largest portion of which was within Vincent.”

“And the core of my soul-self was within Rollo,” added Nicodemus, “with, apparently, the ability to observe faraway happenings, even without benefit of my viewing device, enabling me to keep track of those I’d left behind, and more.”

“This is all well and good,” said Justin, “but from the start you’ve been talking about a ‘plan’ for us, as if your goal all along has been for us to live here.”

“I have,” Elle replied simply. “But before I detail the reasons, there are others who have played important roles whose stories need telling first.”

“Like Eric, I trust,” replied Nicodemus instantly. “With all he was able to do, you obviously had a hand in that too.” The crowd murmured in agreement, with Eric probably the most curious to hear the answer.

“Many of you recall,” Elle continued, “how greatly Eric suffered after the arrival of this land and yourselves on my world. You had determined it was an aversion to being torn from his own dimension and world and being suddenly thrust into an alien one. You presented theories as to why he was the only one so affected; but ultimately, your determination seemed to be borne out as, upon his return to Earth, he seemed his ‘old self,’ as you might put it.”

“But that wasn’t it at all…was it?”

“There was indeed more, Johnathan, than any of you suspected. The aversion Eric felt was indeed my doing, though it was not the result I had hoped for. I had chosen him for…a special role, you might call it, believing him suitable for the task required to gather all the ‘new’ mice together and bring them to their new home.”

As she paused again, Johnathan asked, “But why Eric? Why was it necessary to pick him for that task? Why not just have me use the Stone to gather together the new mice?”

Elle paused, then said, “There was a specific reason for not recruiting you and the amulet, Johnathan; but now, I believe the higher priority should go to Eric’s story. I chose him specifically because I believed one whom Johnathan had caused to become advanced—as Eric certainly had by that time—would be best suited to seek out other such mice. My initial contact with him was as it was with Johnathan in many ways; it was easier because I did not need to send a shard across dimensions, though this one was again much more elaborate than one that would simply observe. This one I was able to refine much further than the one ingested by Nicodemus; and largely because it did not undergo an interdimensional journey, it would not lose any of its potency. This one would also be ingested when Eric was given water. Yet…even with this one, there was a degree of unpredicability, given your different physiology; so while my plan for him ultimately proved successful, initially the shard he’d ingested had traumatized him to a degree, giving him an urgent feeling to flee Lahaikshe and return to Earth. This was certainly what I had intended for him; if events had proceeded as planned, he would have had the urge to return to Earth with an actual mission in mind, rather than feeling a need to return there for his very survival. I am most abjectly sorry, Eric for forcing such an experience on you.”

“Oh…well, that’s okay now, I guess, since everything worked out for the best. But, that…shard-thing you passed on to me…if it was inside me the whole time, why’d it take so long to do anything, to show itself?”

“This type of shard, Eric, like the ones ingested by Johnathan and Nicodemus, was one that I knew would have to lay dormant within you for a time while it acclimated itself to your bodily systems. I was certain, from its initial effect on you, that that effect would be lessened or disappear completely upon reaching Earth. That it did, but on the occasion when you and Teresa returned to Lahaikshe, you felt the same trauma as before, with that portion of my essence returning ‘home.’ Though I was aware of your return, I decided against trying to make any direct contact to refine the makeup of the shard, because it could have resulted in further trauma for you. So you and Teresa returned to Earth, and again you seemed to recover. But the shard again went dormant, and its full effect upon you would still be many days away, though it might manifest sooner if your life were in danger. The latter proved to be the case, as I’m certain you’ve all realized by now, when Eric’s life was threatened by an earthly predator. You’ve heard his story, how his newfound powers of a protective barrier and flight saved his life, and how realization of his mission came upon him, and how it was fulfilled today. All that I can add to his own account is that there was also a charismatic effect that he conveyed to all the mice he found, one which would aid him in convincing them to come with him and trust in all he told them, a quality that would draw them to him. It was perhaps unnecessary, but I felt it would provide further insurance of the plan’s success.”

In the crowd, Lula recalled the strange feeling that washed over her upon her first meeting with Eric, which at first she’d taken to be that of love. She felt relieved learning it wasn’t, even though those strong initial feelings seemed to fall away after that first day in his company. Either way, now there’d be no chance of any rivalry between her and Teresa, or between Eric and one she might feel genuine love for.

“Now,” Elle continued, “as some of you have no doubt surmised, Eric’s last act on his mission was also the last use of his newfound powers. They were intended to last only through the fulfillment of his mission. Again, Eric, my apologies if you’d believed your new abilities were permanent. But had they not been designed to be temporary, they may have proven too great a strain on you.”

Eric gave a modest shrug. “That’s okay. I’m just glad to have accomplished all I did. As long as I’m back with those I know and love, that’s all that matters.” He pressed his face close to Teresa’s and squeezed Sarah’s hand.

As pleased as Johnathan was with this resolution, he was still a bit vexed at Elle’s earlier evasiveness on why he couldn’t have used the amulet to gather the new mice. But hardly had the thought come to him when it was swiftly overtaken by sudden realization, a near-epiphany. Beside him, Madeline could feel his body tense, their emotional rapport conveying to her the near-shock he was experiencing.

Before she could ask what was wrong, she knew; and suddenly Johnathan shot to his feet, eyes fixed on Elle, for a moment seemingly unable to form words. Then he said, “I could have used the Stone to see…what really happened to Eric!”

At his side instantly, Madeline added, “He’s right! Both of us could have! But it’s like…it never even occurred to us to try!”

“This was your doing again!” Johnathan declared with no trace of doubt and even a hint of anger. “How could…how could you have possibly wanted us to believe Eric was dead?”

Before Elle could answer, Teresa joined them, face registering shock but also determination. “He was my husband, my love! The father of our children, and I thought he’d never get to know them! Is this true, Elle? Did you do…something to us, to make us forget?”

Elle appeared to many to be genuinely taken aback; and after another moment of silence, she nodded slowly, sadly even. “This was…my doing as well. It was a side effect of the shard given to Eric, which was ‘programmed’ to allow nothing to stand in the way of fulfilling his mission. There was, in simple terms, a spreading effect to it; and you, Teresa, were the first it had spread to. It had the effect of ensuring that you would not question the circumstances when Eric was to begin his mission. I could not have foreseen that such a tragedy would befall you, and for that I am most abjectly sorry.”

After the barest pause, Johnathan spoke next. “This was…something else owing to that unfamiliarity with Earth creatures?”

“I must confess it was, and—”

But Teresa wasn’t finished. “How could you do this to us?” she demanded. “I thought he was gone forever! Sarah and I both did, and she’d just lost her mother! I thought his children would never see him! I thought…we all thought…” Unable to continue, she sat down, face in hands, her parents and husband comforting her. There were further rumblings from the crowd, most expressing sympathy for her.

Justin spoke next. “All right, everyone…I’ll admit that what Elle’s told us so far may be troubling, but she still has a lot to share with us. Let’s reserve further judgment for when she’s finished.”

“I agree,” said Johnathan. “Elle…this spreading effect: that was how it kept Maddie and me from investigating further, wasn’t it?” Elle nodded. “So what about the rest of us? Did it keep everyone else in Freethorn from even making the suggestion?”

“In truth, the effect did spread to all, but most here had assumed that you had already made the check, and so they did not bring up the subject to you.”

Johnathan looked around at Madeline and Justin; and though it was obvious that her answer was less than satisfactory, it would again have to do.

Teresa still wasn’t finished with her, though. “I suppose…I’ll have to take you at your word. But why the deception? Why put Sarah and me through all this? Was it because…I would have interfered with his mission?”

“I believe,” Elle said, her tone as patient and even as ever, “that if you cast your mind back to the day your parents arrived to bring you and Sarah to Freethorn, it may become clearer.”

Teresa and her parents looked at each other, running the timeline of events over in their heads; and they realized how, had they used the Stone to find Eric, they’d have seen him still recuperating from the hawk attack, after which they surely would have gone to him and taken him to Freethorn as well; though it may have been under protest, since he may have felt by that time that he had a mission to fulfill. Plus, he may have still felt the same aversion as before. And if he’d convinced them to let him and Teresa—and probably Sarah as well—stay in Thorn Valley, would they have all joined Eric in his mission?

She made to give voice to these questions, but then Eric and Sarah looked upon her, appearing largely untroubled by this revelation, and silently encouraging her toward the same. The three embraced, and though not a word was spoken, Teresa felt sufficiently reassured to allow Elle to continue. While she was glad that Eric was alive and well, it was an open question whether she’d be able to forgive Elle for the deception.

“So Eric did have a mission,” said Justin. “Lula also spoke of a mission, and it turned out to be the same one. But why was she chosen?”

Elle confirmed what Lula and Eric had already suspected: that someone with more direct experience with Freethorn and its people would be a great help in preparing the newcomer mice for their new life there. “It is true,” Elle went on, “that someone who had lived his or her entire life in this community may have been better qualified. But Lula, I felt, needed the responsibility. She had suffered greatly in the past day, that day of her great despair over learning the fate of her family on Earth, and she came perilously close to giving in to her despair. Through her tears, I was able to make contact with her, and reassure her that she had much to live for. I had not originally planned on having someone go to Earth to aid Eric in his mission, but now I knew such a responsibility was what this one needed, to give her a renewed sense of purpose and help her realize her self-worth.”

Lula strode forth to the rock, looking up at Elle. “You…you saved my life. I…I don’t know how to…to thank you.”

“I could not bear to witness such suffering, Lula, especially when it could have resulted so tragically, for yourself and all who know and love you.”

Lula said no more, instead climbing to the top of the rock and crouching in front of Elle. She embraced Elle for nearly a minute before returning to Patricia’s side. She offered her handkerchief, kissing Lula’s forehead as she dried her tears.

Nearby, Stuart looked at Jessica. “Mom, I…I had no idea it was that bad for her. She really…almost took her own life?”

“Yes, it’s true, dear. I thought it best at the time if you didn’t know. I hope you’re not mad.”

“No, I…I’m not. I guess…as long as she’s okay now, it doesn’t matter.”

Jessica thought about what a great thing Elle had done for Lula, and how it seemed to contrast with other things, especially the one directly concerning her son. She recalled Teresa’s earlier tirade and felt like confronting Elle right then, but decided the right time was yet to come.

For now, further matters needed to be clarified. Next up: Lilia. Why did Elle choose her as her oracle, and was there a connection to her earlier problems?

“Shortly after the arrival of Freethorn, I decided an oracle was necessary so that I may address you directly on certain matters. Lilia—this one—became my choice based on factors which…I am not certain I could convey in few words, but my reasoning was similar to that which I reserved for Lula, later on…perhaps more so, because I saw Lilia as one who needed to break free of the state of near-isolation her past life experiences had placed her in, and such a unique responsibility might help her gain self-confidence and realize her own importance. My initial contact with her was intended only to test her suitability. Unfortunately, though, it resulted, at least partially, in the condition which many of you witnessed in recent days. I was not aware of the precise influence of the portion of Nicodemus’s soul-self within her until I’d made that contact. Apparently, her predisposition toward such a condition combined with that portion of Nicodemus’s soul-self, complicated further by my intervention, resulted in the duality some of you witnessed. Fortunately, the condition was resolved upon Nicodemus’s reintegration. But I still wanted her for my oracle; I had considered making another choice, but decided my first to be the best, plus I wanted to convey to her my regrets over what my earlier intervention had done to her. This time I would administer my shard in a manner different than through water, one that would utilize one of my world’s native creatures.”

“This is where Lilia’s encounter with the min’hathio in my gardens comes in,” said Gwinthrayle. Ellis recalled most vividly Lilia’s account of the meeting, how she’d felt drawn to the tsadavhi grove, where the min’hathio had kept her company, at one point seeming to receive (from the min’hathio?) a message of reassurance and apology, and at another receiving an affectionate lick from the creature. Was that where the portion of Elle’s essence was placed within her?

Elle confirmed Gwinthrayle’s statement and Ellis’s guess, and then some. “There was a small residual effect remaining in Lilia’s brain from my first contact, through which I was able to draw her to the tsadavhi grove. The area it lies within is one like many on Lahaikshe in which ambient energies are especially prevalent, manifesting themselves in a variety of ways, and so was the nearest place where this procedure could be best carried out.” She further confirmed how the shard was passed on to Lilia through the min’hathio.

“Once this was done, my essence would lay dormant within her, as it did with Eric, until the appropriate time; and till then, she would be unaware of its presence. However, even now, again owing to my unfamiliarity with non-native creatures, it interacted with her own persona differently than planned. Sometimes it would cause her to make statements and take actions she could not explain, and at least twice she became aware, for brief moments, that there was a presence inside her, making her uneasy and fearful. But thankfully, it was not enough to cause any real disruption; and, as I’ve already stated, she will be returned to you whole and unharmed in any way after I’ve completed my mission.”

“And part of said mission, I trust,” said Nicodemus, “involved the many strange events that we’ve witnessed during that same period. From the days before your persona took over Lilia completely, you’ve referred to ‘worthiness,’ and ‘tests’ which were necessary. Those strange anomaly-creatures, which were exposed as the shams they were…the sudden windstorm which nearly proved fatal to one of our children…”

“One of my children,” added Jessica, stepping closer to the rock. “One who almost died all because of this…this ‘test’ of yours!” There was no mistaking the edge of anger in her voice; and even knowing the kind of being she was directing it toward, many didn’t envy Elle right then for facing this mother’s wrath. Behind her, Stuart and Shirley looked at each other in near-embarrassment, as if ready to ask her not to make such a big deal about it.

But the ancient being merely smiled, appearing more than ready to meet the challenge. “My dear Jessica…I would never have allowed Stuart to die, regardless of how it may have appeared.” She looked up to address everyone again, and Jessica stepped back, feeling strangely appeased, at least for the time being.

“My children…I spoke before of having another race share in this world’s riches as do the Rusay. My first and foremost criterion would be that, like the Rusay, you would need to abhor and actively resist the ways of hate and violence in resolving differences. From my years of observing you on Earth, I was certain I had made the correct choice in all of you, even considering you were a new race still in its infancy. But once you were all here, I realized that further scrutiny was necessary, especially with the influx of new mice. How would the majority population—the Rats—deal with this? I have observed many examples of disparate races on other worlds that coexist peacefully, and others which cannot entirely overcome their differences. Which category would you fall into? There were signs which seemed to point to the latter, which troubled many of you to the point of holding a meeting for the purpose of bringing any differences out into the open. Those differences appeared resolved, but would these resolutions last, especially in light of the imminent arrival of even more mice?

“Given all this, I felt that a series of tests were in order. As you’ve already surmised, they were intended to test your resolve in making Lahaikshe your permanent home, but there was also the question of how fully you would work together and rely on one another’s strengths and talents, to face these mysteries. Would you see through the illusion, or allow those anomalies to drive you away? Once I’d seen that the former choice had won out, I felt one more test was in order. How would you react to something more familiar in appearance, but still uncharacteristic for this part of the world? Therefore, I decided upon the illusion of an intense storm, the effects of which would also be illusory. It was not my intent that any one of you should be hurt, and I am most regretful for the anguish and worry Stuart’s apparent injuries incurred upon his family and friends. But he, and everyone else, genuinely believed the storm and its effects, including the falling limb, to be genuine. Those effects would continue to seem genuine only until someone believed with all his or her heart that they were not; and Stuart and Shirley, with their mutual talent for distinguishing truth from fallacy, were the first to do so. What followed was exactly as I’d hoped for, with the collective will of all who dwell here causing the storm and its remaining effects to fade completely.”

“As many of us had determined,” said Tallus. “May we assume, then, that we all passed your tests with flying colors?”

“Indeed you may, Tallus. There are…important tasks yet to be performed, but…the worthiness of your two races, of each and every one of you, to take your place among this world’s creatures, is beyond reproach, inarguable.”

“Well, we…appreciate your thinking of us so highly,” said Justin carefully, “but there are still things that aren’t clear.”

“Not the least of which,” added Nicodemus, “is a matter which directly affected two of us in a most radical fashion; and, only within the past few minutes, I recall fully how I was the catalyst for it.”

“I think he means us,” chimed in Kimball. “My daughter Louann and me. Something was passed on from him to us, wasn’t it? And you set it in motion, didn’t you?”

“It was…the first of rewards for your people,” Elle said, stirring small discussions in the crowd.

“When I returned to Freethorn…” began Nicodemus, regaining everyone’s attention, “two days ago, in the midst of what appeared to be a wind- and thunderstorm, I sought to trace the source of the disturbance; and what I found was Lilia, apparently having just taken shelter. I was certain that she was at the center of the disturbance in some way, if not its actual source. When I took her hand to escort her home, that was the moment she, or rather you, passed a portion of your energies on to me, wasn’t it? But I did not retain the memory of this event. I remember now feeling these strange sensations that almost caused me to pass out; and as I lay on my back recovering, I was aware that she’d passed something on to me, and that some other entity was responsible, very likely the one who had created the anomaly-creatures and the false storm. I didn’t voice these suspicions aloud, though, and Lilia seemed equally mystified by what had happened to me. However, by the time I was on my feet again and feeling back to normal, it was as if…we’d both forgotten the entire incident, and resumed concentrating on returning to the colony.”

Johnathan recalled his earlier conversation with Madeline in which they’d discussed how much Pharsal may have known while inside the Stone. Knowing now that Pharsal and Elle had planned some of this together, he wondered about the reason for Pharsal not mentioning her, or his denial of knowing anything of why the Stone came to Earth or took Johnathan to Lahaikshe. Was he pledged to keep these points secret, or was Elle able to affect Pharsal’s memory, even in his spiritual form? He pondered confronting her about this now instead of waiting until they’d heard more of her story.

“Yes,” Elle continued, “it was a memory loss designed to be only temporary, as I knew I would not be able to reveal myself at that time, because my persona still required time to become fully assimilated within Lilia’s body. It was for similar reasons that I’d blocked the efforts of yourself and Gwinthrayle and S’Porssig to investigate the source of recent disturbances. It was too soon for me to reveal myself to you. Still…before that would happen, I felt that a reward was in order for your worthiness; and…one of the most logical choices was for the two who had suffered the most radical physical injuries, to have them healed, the body parts regenerated.”

“So,” Nicodemus ventured, “rather than pass on your healing energies to them directly, you used me as a go-between.”

“Yes. One such as yourself, I knew, would be best suited for the task. This type of shard could be easily passed on through an oracle, but this one could not do it herself, as it may have proved injurious to her; but one already versed in working ambient energies would be much better suited.”

“And those healing energies would only be passed on to the ones they were intended for.” Nicodemus looked toward Kimball and Louann. Both had been silently absorbing this new information. Many expected Louann to thank Elle as Lula had done, but she was still so overcome with emotion that she could only sit quietly with her husband and daughters.

Kimball had Bernadette help him stand upright on his good hind leg, then he said, “My lady…I know I speak for my daughter as well as me. We…owe you a debt of gratitude, but how it could possibly…be measured, I just couldn’t…” Equally overcome, he could only conclude with a barely audible “Thank you.” He sat back down beside Patricia.

“The power you command,” said Tallus, “is indeed considerable, to accomplish such feats. I think…there can be no doubt of the kind of being you are. Yet…you’ve referred to a ‘mission,’ and a ‘solution’ to some problem. There are many of us who believe we know what that problem is, but its…true nature still needs clarifying.”

“Yes, and there’s the matter of…further rewards,” brought up Johnathan. “You said that…healing Kimball and Louann was only ‘the first’ of them, did you not?”

Bertie and Tara looked at each other, both struck by the same realization. Bertie moved closer to his parents, whispered something to them, and they nodded their approval. Nearby, Tara did the same with her parents; and soon, both of them stood together, drawing much attention from those curious about what they’d have to say.

Tara swallowed hard, trying to conceal her nervousness; but she and Bertie agreed that it was best to bring this out into the open now, since everyone would know eventually. “I just learned today…that I’m going to have a baby. And there’s only one who could possibly be the father, and…he’s standing right beside me now.” Bertie just nodded silently.

Amid the expected reactions of astonishment and disbelief, those few who’d known already lent their support, acknowledging that, impossible as this claim sounded, Tara and Bertie wouldn’t be making it if they weren’t absolutely sure. Elle silently took in their support of the mismatched pair until the obvious next question was posed: Was this, too, her doing, one more reward for the Freethorners’ worthiness?

“It was,” Elle replied simply. “I had…observed this pair’s wish to have their coupling be fully accepted by their fellows. I knew their feelings to be genuine, and that they would want to conceive a child if it were possible. And so, even before I had begun conducting the ‘tests,’ I began the process to enable them to do so, making changes to them to make them genetically compatible, in the belief that such a conception would help to draw your two races even closer.”

There was a moment—which one inclined to making puns might call a pregnant pause—during which nearly everyone could only look upon his or her neighbor silently; with many of them, especially if the neighbor was one of the other species, having a strong sense of looking upon him or her in an entirely new light.

The moment passed when Bertie approached the rock and said, “You know…Elle…there are some here who would say that…this was just another experiment, what you did for Tara and me. That may be true, I dunno…but any way you slice it, this was something we wanted; or would have wanted if we thought it was possible.” He scratched the back of his head. “I guess I’m trying to say…thanks. However you did it, we’re really grateful.”

He looked up at Tara beside him; she crouched and embraced him. His parents and siblings all had virtually the same thought: that they would never again think of him as simply cranky, difficult-to-please Bertie.

Jessica came forward again, obviously not entirely appeased. “This may be a good thing you’ve done for them, and it’s good that you’re being forthcoming with us…but you still haven’t convinced me that my son’s life was never in danger, even though you say you wouldn’t have allowed him to die.”

Elle made to answer, but Stuart spoke up first. “But I never thought I was going to die, Mom, not really. Unable to walk, maybe, but that was only until Shirley told me she thought it wasn’t real, and then we proved it together.”

“Yeah,” said Shirley, “and Stu’s being crippled probably wouldn’t have lasted either, because everyone would’ve figured out eventually that the storm was a fake, and everything it did too.”

Jessica embraced them both. “All right,” she said to Elle, “you…and my children have convinced me. But…what about their ‘sibling power’? Is that your doing as well?”

“Theirs is an ability originating entirely from within, as have the special and sometimes unique talents and abilities many among you possess, all originating from your particular genetic combinations.”

“We’ve always believed,” said Justin, “that those abilities were another result of the treatments at NIMH, that they interacted with the unique body chemistry of each of us. And our children and grandchildren have developed the same way. So…except for Johnathan and Nicodemus, that’s something you’ve never had a hand in. Those abilities came entirely from within each of us.”

“You are correct, Justin. And now, here on Lahaikshe, may those talents be fully realized…in ways, perhaps, beyond what you can imagine now.”

Norman, sitting with his children, already knew full well the truth in this statement. A few months ago, he wouldn’t have known a mhys’haspa from a muskmelon, but now…

Johnathan nodded, pausing in his whisker-fiddling. “Yes. Well…I guess that would bring us to the question of…why? Why do all this for us? I know you’ve said you took a special interest in us from the beginning, mostly because our creation was unlike anything you’d seen before. But you’ve also hinted that…you’ve been guiding us toward living here, as if it were our destiny to take our places here on Lahaikshe, just as Nicodemus and I have discussed recently. And we have thrived here, beyond a doubt. But why go to all this trouble? And…how or what do you gain by all this? What’s in it for you?”

“Yes,” added Tallus, “and did you not also say that in carrying out this plan of yours, it cost you in some way?”

Elle paused for a moment but did not appear at all reluctant to answer such pointed questions. “As I have already told you…to have other worthy beings, in addition to the Rusay, enjoy the benefits of being a part of this world, to share in its bounty and beauty…this was my desire. This was all that was ‘in it’ for me.”

She then turned directly to Johnathan. “Once again, Johnathan, I would ask you to cast your memory back to the time when you’d been unwillingly ‘exiled’ to Lahaikshe. You’d been torn from all you’d known and loved, but your pain was mitigated by all you’d found here: the kindness of its people, its peace and tranquility. Did you not find it to be the closest thing to earthly legends of a paradise or Utopia that you’d ever imagined? When your wife and friends found their way here, did you not feel a degree of reluctance to leave, in spite of your strong desire to return home?”

“Yes, I did,” Johnathan replied unhesitantly, “to both questions. I certainly considered it my second home, someplace I’d want to return to, and bring others with me. But not permanently, just to visit. Or…or did I?”

The question hung for a moment before Elle continued. “During your time here, Johnathan—specifically, the time immediately following your arrival in the Cavern of Change—I made contact with your mind, but it was superficial. I did not influence your thinking in any way; rather, I believed there would be a good chance that events would proceed in a fashion which would eventually result in your leading your people to a new life on Lahaikshe entirely on your own, with no prompting or suggestion from me. After you had begun to discover more of the world and its people, I considered using an oracle to meet with you directly. However…there have been times when the degree of control I possess over Lahaikshe fluctuates. This was at a time when this control was at a low ebb, so using an oracle was not an option. So I could only observe, but I soon realized my earlier belief stood a greater chance of being realized, as I saw Johnathan’s expressed fondness for the world, its people and its natural resources, for all he yearned to return home. For all this, the period of time Johnathan spent here and for all it may have pained him, it gave him all the more time to gain a fondness for Lahaikshe. I knew what awaited you on Earth, Johnathan: happy reunions with family and friends, a return to a life you loved; but there was also the possibility of your people being discovered by humankind, and all that would entail. To predict the future with absolute certainty is beyond my ability; but in this case, I was confident, before your return to Earth, of what the ultimate outcome would be.”

Johnathan thought silently for a moment. “I remember…how, more than once, I would suggest, in casual conversation, what it would be like if we lived on Lahaikshe permanently. It was always just between Madeline and me, like before we went to sleep; but I never thought it a serious possibility, let alone something that we’d be forced into by circumstance, like human intrusion.”

“And yet,” said Justin, “it happened. So what you’re saying, Elle, is that there was no outright manipulation, no...suggestions offered to Johnathan subliminally or however you’d define it?”

“You may judge, Justin. Now…I would ask any of you who have spent enough time on this world to learn details about its history, its geography, climate, its flora and fauna: have you not compared it to your native world? How is it possible, I am certain you have asked yourselves, that in contrast with Earth, there are far fewer serious natural disasters such as earthquakes, hurricanes, floods; and those that do occur are centered in uninhabited or sparsely populated areas? Or how few of the Rusay suffer serious illness or die from painful or debilitating diseases? Or how, among the higher animal species, there is little of the violence that characterizes the animal kingdom on your Earth, with virtually no carnivores? Or how, in spite of these facts, there would always appear to be room for all, Rusay and lower species alike, with neither experiencing problems with overcrowding or overpopulation?”

She paused, allowing her audience a moment before going on. “Yes, I see a great many of you have pondered these questions, which will likely lead to more. Perhaps…the largest of them will be answered in the course of what I am about to tell you.

“Throughout the many years I had observed life and events in those extradimensional worlds that support life, I have perceived the existence of…beings that constitute the very essence of each world…a personification of its life-force. Yet…very few are blessed with a degree of control that allows them…to strongly influence their world’s biospheres, its climate, its overall suitability to support life.”

Another seemingly-deliberate pause followed, broken by Nicodemus: “And these beings…would contrast sharply with yourself, with the degree of control you possess…over Lahaikshe?”

Elle looked away for a moment, as if in regret for having disclosed too much; then she looked squarely at him. “You are correct, Nicodemus.”

The pronouncement met with awe in some, skepticism in others; and many, especially the newcomer mice, found it hard to be impressed just because the concept was so unimaginable. Still others, though, echoed the sentiments of Ellis, who whispered to Timothy, “So…she finally admits it.”

Sithpha paused in his furious note-taking and stepped up to the rock, notepad still in hand. “So…you’re really the one responsible for…the kind of weather we have, and other things that make our lives better?”

“You are correct, my child. Unlike most others of my ilk, I have been blessed, by whatever natural forces that created me, to be able to create and maintain a world that truly nurtures those creatures who dwell upon it; to allow them to live lives which, while not entirely free of adversity and hardship, give them a great degree of hope, of belonging, of freedom from want.”

Sithpha nodded, fascinated, then returned to his family and resumed recording his impressions. Seeing this, a thought occurred to Nicodemus: considering what this being is and is capable of doing, Sithpha and his fellow Rusay seemed to react to Elle almost casually, as if she were little more than a stage magician revealing her secrets.

Nearby, Gwinthrayle pondered the same matter, with other questions regarding this being soon to follow. Why was she revealing so much to them, when virtually nothing was known about her—even by him—indicating she had to have kept her very existence a secret all these millennia? And why now?

“Now,” Elle continued, “I would ask any of you to feel free to satisfy any further curiosities you may still have, and ask any question of me as you see fit.” There were many raised hands and enthusiasm to match, especially from the younger ones.

Gwinthrayle had several pointed questions of his own, but before he give voice to any one, Nicodemus steered him away, excusing himself to Elle on behalf of more than just the two of them. And soon, a small group was assembled away from the main crowd, some of whom were already gathered at the rock, ready to have Elle answer their questions.

“I believe I know why you convened this group, Justin,” said Gwinthrayle. “It’s about the devastated lands, is it not, and whether we should bring up the subject now in front of everyone?”

“That, and a few other things that I’m not sure we should bring up in front…of her.”

“You still harbor doubts about her story, don’t you?” said Tallus. “As do we all, it appears.”

“In truth, Tallus,” said Gwinthrayle, “I have ample reason to believe in the veracity of her account. For you see…this is not my first encounter with this being.”

“Gwinthrayle, are you serious?” asked Justin incredulously. “Why didn’t you tell us this before?”

“I felt it would have made little difference, and I believed there was a chance she would bring it up first.”

“So when did this happen?” asked Johnathan. “Was it before you knew me?”

“On the contrary, Johnathan, it was another momentous occasion involving you, your wife and your friends: when they arrived, over two years gone, to find you and bring you home. More accurately, it was the day after your departure.” He described how, at a moment when he and Sithpha’s daughter Tuintwom were alone, she was, without warning, bizarrely transformed, now claiming to be the oracle of a being calling herself Elle. The possession gave the girl the same otherworldly appearance she now gave to Lilia. Elle told him that she’d had a hand in some recent events; and without going into great detail, took credit for making the change to Johnathan that resulted in the change in Madeline. She also claimed responsibility for diverting Ghormfisk’s people from Lahaikshe to their new home. With this came a most cryptic statement: that she’d done so because she’d deemed them unworthy of making their home here; but another race may yet prove to be worthy.

The others all looked to each other. “Well, that squares with what she’s been telling us now,” said Johnathan. “She had to have been referring to us.”

“And,” said Justin, “it implies that Ghormfisk’s race, the…Sut’hrim, was it?…that they were unsuitable to live here.”

Johnathan rubbed his whiskers. “Yes…and if there was any specific reason, it may have had to do with what happened on their old world.”

“Yes, they essentially destroyed it, and themselves,” recalled Madeline. “Ooh…so horrible and tragic…”

“Did you know this all along, Gwinthrayle?” asked Justin.

“No,” he answered quickly. “The memory of our conversation fell away immediately after she’d released Tuintwom. It was shortly after she’d begun her narrative today that I remembered this earlier meeting.”

“She said,” began Johnathan thoughtfully, “that she was unable to use an oracle to meet with me when I first arrived here. Yet, she was able to use one to meet with Gwinthrayle the day after we’d all gone back to Earth.”

“I believe,” added Nicodemus, “that she hinted that she could have done so later, but saw no need to. And yet she did use an oracle.”

“It’s confusing, all right,” said Johnathan. “But it does prove that she is capable of altering memories. And, too, she made you forget how she passed some of her healing essence along to you, just as she made Gwinthrayle forget their earlier meeting! She admitted it fully! It was only temporary, but…Maddie and I were discussing earlier today how, if there were such an entity as Elle here, she could affect people’s memories, make anyone who did find out about her forget about her existence.”

Madeline added, “Yes, and we even wondered if Pharsal was telling us everything he knew about the Stone, once he was drawn out of it.”

“And Elle said she was working with Pharsal within the Stone,” said Justin. “Even in the state he was in, essentially a ghost, could she really alter his memories?”

“That may be,” said Gwinthrayle, “or it’s possible that Pharsal felt obliged to her to keep it secret. But perhaps the more urgent matter should be what we’d just discovered so close to home.”

“The devastated lands, you mean,” said Justin. They quickly reviewed what few details they knew.

“Well, we can’t put off that one subject forever,” said Johnathan, “because who knows when and where it might happen again.”

“We don’t want to cause a panic,” said Madeline. “Perhaps we should just bring the whole council together again, and then Elle…” She paused as she noticed Gwinthrayle’s expression.

“Gwinthrayle?” said Arthur. “You look like you’ve seen a ghost. What is it?”

“It’s…a detail which…oh, I can scarcely believe I forgot; and this one I cannot blame on Elle. In my investigation in Asarals, I found that that first event occurred…on the very same day that Freethorn, this very land, made its arrival on Lahaikshe with all of you.” Before the others could react out loud, he added, “I had only returned from my mission hours ago, and had no time to rest, before I needed to investigate this second event. I feel I should apologize for letting something so vital slip my mind.” The aged sorcerer sighed, looking more his age than usual.

“It’s all right, Gwinthrayle, we can’t blame you for being tired and having a lot on your mind,” said Johnathan. “But that’s got to be more than coincidence.”

“But if the two are connected,” said Tallus, “does it mean that…introducing this new tract of displaced land into this world…threw things off balance, perhaps?”

“If so, I hate to consider what that implies,” said Johnathan.

“It does make a certain amount of sense,” agreed Arthur, “that something as big as that could cause some disruption in the world’s…biosphere, that’s the word. It’s beyond my expertise, but it’s possible it could have had some adverse effect.”

“If she really is what she claims,” mused Tallus, “she’d have to know something like that.”

“I agree,” said Johnathan. “She’s definitely been evasive about a lot of things, like why she chose Eric for this new gathering operation, when I could have done it with the Stone.”

“Indeed.” Tallus paused in his chin-scratching and turned to Gwinthrayle. “My friend, considering your area of expertise, with so many years, even decades behind it, it’s difficult for me to grasp how a being such as her could be an unknown quantity to you.”

“Tallus, you’re not calling Gwinthrayle a liar, are you?” Johnathan immediately looked apologetic. “I’m sorry, that was uncalled for.”

Tallus held up both forearms. “It’s all right, my friend, we’re all uncertain of what we’re dealing with. But I know you and Madeline and Justin have known Gwinthrayle the longest and can surely vouch for his sincerity. But there has to be a reason, wouldn’t you agree, that he wouldn’t know of one such as Elle?”

“It is true,” said Gwinthrayle, “there is no one definitive reason I can give. There are legends among my people, across the entire world, of a ‘mother-spirit’ said to live within Lahaikshe and watch over it. But save for a handful of isolated tribes here and there, they’re regarded as nothing more than bedtime stories for children, pure entertainment.”

“Humans have tales of a similar being on Earth, but it’s regarded much the same way,” observed Tallus. “As pure mythology, like so many other beings invented by human imagination to explain the nature of the world and the universe.”

“But this one seems to be the real thing,” said Justin. “I don’t think we can completely discount that anymore, especially seeing what happened to Louann and Kimball. Restoration of sight is one thing, but limb regeneration?”

“And the means through which she carried out those ‘miracles,’” added Nicodemus. “Myself.”

“And look at what she did for Johnathan,” said Madeline. “Why, it’s as if she gave him the gift of life itself. And there’s Bertie and Tara…”

“Yes…” Tallus rubbed his chin, nodding. “I think, though, that we should return to the subject of our memories of her, or lack thereof. It’s occurred to me that there may have been any number of occasions in the past when she may have revealed herself like this, and this would explain quite handily why there are no records of her, or why few if any Rusay truly believe in her existence.”

“But why would she not want the Rusay to remember her?” asked Madeline. “What harm could it do?”

Johnathan shrugged. “Who knows? If she’s anything like those mythological gods, this could be like a…a capricious whim of hers, something not meant for mere mortals to understand.”

Gwinthrayle looked over to the crowd gathered around Elle, and mused how, if she could be considered like unto a deity, one wouldn’t know it from the crowd’s reaction. They, including the Rusay visitors, seemed to regard her as a teacher or sage at best, not at all as one to be held in awe, or praised or worshipped. Could this hold some clue as to why the Rusay seem not to know of her?

“But what about us?” said Justin. “When all this is over, will we remember any of what happened today? Will we remember she possessed Lilia, or any of the things she told us? Will we remember any of the recent strange events, like the anomaly-creatures?”

“Or will we remember them, but not in the same way?” finished Nicodemus. “The changes in Kimball and Louann, for instance, we might remember as having been initiated in some different fashion.”

“Yes,” added Tallus, “and what about all the written accounts? My crew and I have been recording everything that’s happened in great detail. Will those records survive, or will they be altered as well, or become so many sheets of blank paper?”

“I wonder if we should confront her with this theory,” said Arthur. “Maybe try to plead with her not to do it with us, if she’s planning on it.”

“Even if we did that,” said Justin, “she could deny she’s going to, and then go ahead and wipe our memories of her anyway.”

“Maybe,” brought up Madeline, “by the time that does happen, if it does, it won’t matter. Maybe we won’t need to remember her.”

Johnathan rubbed his whiskers, nodding. “It’s just possible that there could be some benefit in our not knowing of her. She may have had a very good reason for keeping her existence a secret from the Rusay, and she could have one equally as good for us.”

“And yet,” brought up Gwinthrayle, “she imparted that information to me on our first meeting, wiped my memory clean of it, and is now allowing me to recall it again. Perhaps, in the end, we will all recall what we’ve learned today.”

Justin sighed. “There’s so much about this that makes little or no sense, seeming almost contradictory. I suppose…we should let it lie for now, at least until after we’ve discussed with her what to do about those devastated areas. I don’t like the idea of having our minds and memories messed with at all, but if it happens, there may be nothing we can do to prevent it.”

“Understandable, my friend,” said Nicodemus, “considering what Uhrstegg did to Jenner and me, way back when. But let’s not forget: Elle did admit to making me forget how she passed her healing essence to me, and I did regain that memory. That may have been only because she allowed it, but that shows that it can be only a temporary effect. In fact…in discussing this now, another recent experience comes to mind, the memory of which had also left me; something that may explain the feeling of déjà vu I referred to earlier.

“The day after I’d left on my sabbatical from Freethorn, I’d been encamped in a forested area to the southeast when my meditation was interrupted by some kind of disturbance not far away. As I prepared to investigate, I heard a rumble that grew steadily louder from beyond a nearby ridge; and, realizing what it probably meant, levitated myself to safety. It was in the nick of time, for seconds later a large herd of tysthals came thundering over the ridge and down into the narrow vale, over the spot where I’d been sitting less than a minute before, all appearing very agitated and intent upon getting themselves as far as possible from the area, obviously very near, of the disturbance. I levitated higher until I could see it for myself…and…”

“It was the second devastated area, was it not?”

“It was, Gwinthrayle. I came all the way to its edge, long enough to examine it up close as you and Teresa and Norman did; then I made for Freethorn, intent upon warning you all. But when I was only half a mile away, perhaps, from the site, I returned to ground level, suddenly unable to recall where I was going, or why. I settled down again in this new spot and resumed simply exploring the area and meditating, only remembering that I’d simply chosen to move on to a new location, for no specific reason or any sense that anything was amiss. The next day I’d sensed another disturbance in the area, precipitating my return, and that was what triggered a sense that I’d experienced a similar reaction recently.”

“But now you remember the entire incident.” Justin looked over toward the area where Elle was taking questions from the crowd. “I wonder…if Elle’s allowing you to remember this now, why couldn’t she earlier? Shouldn’t we have known about this as soon as possible?”

“Perhaps she felt it wasn’t the right time,” mused Gwinthrayle. “It may have been too soon, before she’d taken full control of Lilia, just as she blocked our efforts to investigate recent phenomena.”

“Whatever the reason, it’s high time we got the lowdown on the ‘crumbling’ situation.” Justin again looked toward Elle. “Look at how open she’s being to us. Why would she be spending so much time and effort to tell us so much, if she’s only going to take away our memories of her later?”

“And not only ours, but presumably our Rusay friends as well,” added Tallus. “Would she allow them to spread the word about her to their fellows?”

“You know,” said Johnathan, “earlier, there were a couple of occasions where it almost seemed as if she were reading our minds. I wonder if she’s aware right now of what we’ve been discussing.”

“Perhaps,” said Gwinthrayle, “though I would suspect there are limitations to what she can do while using an oracle, considering that that whole process didn’t appear to be easy for her.”

“Limitations or no, it’s high time we tackled our big problem head on,” said Justin, “and bring her in on it.”

“I agree,” said Johnathan. “Still think we should just limit it to the council, or—” He was interrupted by a sudden commotion from the crowd.

“Somehow, Johnathan,” said Nicodemus, “I believe that choice may have been taken out of our hands.”

As the group went to investigate, a pair of rats approached them. “Is it true, Justin? What he said about some disaster near here?”

Justin and Johnathan looked at each other, not allowing their dismay to show over Nicodemus’s hunch being confirmed. “We’re…going to get to the bottom of the matter, Orpheus…Corinne. Right now, we need to have everyone calm down.” Councilmembers were already calling for order, and with the approach of Justin’s group, the crowd quieted further.

“All right, everyone,” said Justin with both arms raised. “Obviously, someone said something that’s gotten you all worried. Now, it’s true that we in the council, and a few others, know of something that’s happened not far from here. I won’t kid you; it’s something bad, that we would definitely describe as a disaster. We don’t know what it means for us yet, but we’re positive that Elle knows all about it and why it happened, and what can be done to prevent its happening again. We thought it should be kept secret, to prevent any panic, at least until we knew how it could be resolved. Obviously, that choice has been taken away. Right now, it doesn’t matter who it was that brought it out. What’s important is that we get to the bottom of the matter, and find out what can be done about it.”

Elle was, of course, well aware of this new discussion, and for now, only listened silently, showing little outward reaction—though few noticed.

Seeing one in the crowd standing and raising his hand, albeit a bit hesitantly, Justin added, “We’ll take questions later. Right now, we all need to stay calm and—”

“Er, Justin,” Johnathan interrupted, “I think we should take this one now. Go ahead, Boris.”

“I-I’m sorry, J-Johnathan,” Boris stammered. “I don’t-don’t know why I did it, I just…I couldn’t help it. Those visions I’d had, they were just…too much, I couldn’t keep it to my…my…” He sank back down, unable to say more. His wife and friends comforted him.

“It’s all right, Boris,” said Johnathan. “We know how rough this has been on you, and we forgive you. But now…I think we’re all agreed now that the full story of what’s been found so far should be fully disclosed.”

None in the council disagreed, though there were visible signs of reluctance. Gwinthrayle began by describing his accidental discovery of the first great disturbance in Asarals, and his own investigation and what he found firsthand; and how he’d returned home only hours ago, only to become involved in this new investigation of an identical disturbance much closer to home. Teresa and Norman joined in, describing their own discovery of it while on mhys’haspa-back.

“Now,” Gwinthrayle added, “we believe our respected guest Elle possesses much knowledge on this matter, which we hope she’ll be willing to share.”

All along, Elle had continued to listen patiently, and now she nodded silently, showing no reluctance to share what all believed she had to know. “There…is a reason for these twin calamities, and a means for the prevention of future ones. That means…lies with you, Johnathan Brisby; or more specifically, with the jewel you wear.”

Johnathan’s jaw dropped. Madeline took his arm. “Johnathan, can it be true? Please, Elle, tell us how it can be done.”

“I’ve already tried using the Stone to get to the source of the trouble, but I had no luck,” said Johnathan. “What else can be done?”

“You misunderstand, my children,” said Elle as evenly as ever. “The amulet cannot be used to prevent such disasters. You see…it is use of the amulet that has led to them.”

Chapter 48 - A mother’s prerogative

The wave of shock and disbelief that swept over the crowd was like a force unto itself. How could such a thing be? All who knew of the Stone’s power were well aware of what an enormous benefit it had been to them these past few years, especially in recent months when it had rescued them from eventual, if not immediate, capture by humans; and delivered them to this new world which, however alien in appearance, had seemed to welcome them, an impression that now seemed to be borne out by this one who claimed to personify this world’s very essence. And now she’s telling them that, even as all the “children” were now gathered here, safe in their new home, that home is now in jeopardy by the very means that brought most of them here?

When Johnathan could find his voice again, he said, “It…it makes no sense. How could using the amulet lead to…to something like this? Our coming here, using it to bring Freethorn here… that’s what caused that disaster? Both of them?” The fact that this very possibility had been raised and discussed by this small group just minutes ago didn’t lessen the shock now. All looked to Elle, many certain that a new round of explanations was in order.

“And yet, Johnathan,” said Gwinthrayle, “there is that coincidence of dates and events which we cannot dismiss, and which we’d already suspected to be more than coincidence.”

Johnathan nodded ruefully and turned to Elle. “All right, then. If we never use the Stone again, then our problem is solved, right? There wouldn’t be any more disasters like this, would there?”

“It is possible. Yet…the only way to ensure, beyond a doubt, against further disruptions to this world’s biosphere, is for you to give it up completely. Even its further presence could yet prove to be dangerous.”

The shock and disbelief continued among Freethorn’s citizenry, not in the least for the two who would be most directly affected by such an action. Surrender the Stone completely? Johnathan and Madeline looked at each other, heads shaking, unable to fathom taking such drastic measures, or why it would be so necessary. Yet, hadn’t they discussed the possibility, just minutes ago, that it was their bringing Freethorn here that had that strongly adverse and destructive effect upon the world?

“Now hold on a second,” Justin finally said. “Elle, I hope you’re planning to give a full explanation for this.”

Elle nodded silently. “To do so would require further disclosure of the nature of this world; how its very character, and that of all those who dwell upon it, had evolved over the millennia into their present form. First…most of you, I am certain, know of the origins of the Stone, in particularly how the brothers Pharsal and Arvasa sought a sample of a particular mineral from what’s been referred to as the Dark World, and how this mineral has unique properties that gave it potentially enormous power.”

“Of course,” said Johnathan. “But how is that connected to Lahaikshe?”

“It is connected more intimately than you realize. You see…that extradimensional world in which this mineral exists, from which the amulet was fashioned, is very closely associated with Lahaikshe; and, in part, owes its very existence to my efforts to create the paradise you know Lahaikshe to be today.”

“Does this mean,” ventured Madeline, “that you’re responsible for creating that world the Stone is from? The one so terrible and violent and inhospitable to life?”

“Pharsal barely escaped the place with his life,” Johnathan recalled, “and it killed his brother. And you…willingly created this place? Why?”

“I’m willing to hazard a guess here,” said Tallus, “that it was necessary to achieve a state of balance, so that Lahaikshe could truly become a paradise for its people.”

“Precisely, Tallus. That ‘Dark World’ lies within what may be best described as a ‘pocket dimension,’ one of small physical dimensions, infinitesimal compared to the one we exist within presently, or any of the others you’ve known including the one containing your native Earth—all of which even I cannot determine their ultimate size. But this Dark World, existing within its own self-contained ‘universe,’ if you will, is indeed the end product of my campaign to make Lahaikshe what it is today.

“Imagine, if you can, a Lahaikshe characterized by frequent violent natural disasters, and near-constant warring among the Rusay, born of fear and mistrust. This was the state my world knew for several millennia after my own state of self-awareness took effect. I was only beginning to discover the range and extent to which I could consciously affect and influence the natural forces in earth and sky—at first, little more than changing direction of the wind or lessening the severity of an earthquake. But I had nothing to compare myself or Lahaikshe to, no frame of reference from which to determine whether ours was a typical…relationship, you could say. That is, until the day I discovered, almost by accident, the existence of other worlds: sister worlds in other dimensions that also supported life. Succeeding decades would yield further discoveries, both in how I could interact with my world and about these sister worlds; but none was more significant than the one—again very much an accident—in which I realized my ability to do more than observe goings-on in the sister worlds; I could now send a small portion of my very essence—a ‘shard’—to those worlds, across the dimensional gulfs. In doing this over subsequent decades, I discovered the existence of beings such as myself; and the more worlds I explored, the greater became my basis for comparison. I now realized that, among beings such as myself, the degree to which I could affect the natural forces on Lahaikshe was of a degree which was almost unique. From that point on, I endeavored to do all I could to make my world more livable for all its creatures, certain it was well within my power.

“I was especially concerned that the Rusay, having already begun to develop culture and civilization, could continue on a path that would, through continual squabbling and disagreement, only bring them endless, needless suffering. There was already much kindness and generosity among them, but I feared that they might never reach a state in which these more positive aspects would one day become dominant and become the foundation for their civilization. I had observed far too few civilized races achieve such a state, and I became determined that the Rusay would, and whatever form of direct intervention from myself that would be necessary, I would carry it out.

“It was a relatively fast process—only some two centuries—to bring Lahaikshe to the state that you know today. Natural occurrences such as earthquakes, volcanic activity, abnormally high precipitation and violent weather conditions were now limited both geographically and in their severity, to where they would not cause inordinate suffering among the Rusay or less-evolved citizens of Lahaikshe. Among the latter, the roles of predator and prey are virtually nonexistent, offering these ‘lower’ creatures the chance to develop and evolve in ways in which they might otherwise not have the chance. Gone, too, are diseases that would maim or cripple or kill. Yet, in spite of all this, there are no problems with overcrowding, or with any one species, including the Rusay, causing a strain upon the world’s natural resources. This is due to another form of intervention on my part, one which has slowed the rates of reproduction for all these species.

You may question the rightness of such an action, or consider it too great an intervention, but you have seen the results for yourselves. You may consider it to be as a mother’s prerogative to take care of her children as she sees fit.”

None knew quite what to add. Could they question the rightness of her actions, given what she is, to guide and nurture her subjects or children or however she regards them, as she believes is best?

Arthur and his family were seated near the Rusay visitors, and he and Melinda marveled at how restrained their reactions were to this news. They sidled up closer to Sithpha and Dinilom, and Arthur voiced aloud this observation. “It seems odd to us,” he added, “considering that…she’s telling you such important things about your people and their development over the past several millennia. And yet…you’re only just taking notes like before. Don’t you feel any…awe, reverence toward her?”

Sithpha looked toward Elle, then back at Arthur. “Well, sure, we feel some, I guess. But look at how she’s appearing to us, in this form. And she’s not trying to come off sounding all superior.”

“She seems to regard us as equals, almost,” added Dinilom. “So I guess we’re just doing the same for her.”

It seemed a satisfying enough answer for their rat friends, given what they’d long known of the Rusay’s accepting nature. But could they possibly regard this being that could be considered as a deity as they would their next-door neighbor? Truly, there had to be more to this nature than they’d ever imagined.

After she’d allowed her audience a minute or so for discussion, Elle continued: “Yet…all these changes I’d wrought, made only with the best intentions, had other effects which even I couldn’t have foreseen, and they began in the earliest stages of my campaign.

“Perhaps…the simplest way to describe these effects is to consider the changes I had made as a removal, or rather sharp reduction, in ‘negative’ elements—elements which, rather than simply vanish, collectively remained as a force unto itself, taking on a life of its own. This force manifested as a storm more intense than had ever occurred in my memory, combined with seismic upheavals of equal intensity, all concentrated in an area of perhaps ten miles in diameter, now rendered completely uninhabitable. Things may have remained that way, were it not for a fact that quickly became apparent: that with such violent natural forces concentrated in such a small area, especially those occurring beneath the surface, they could eventually do great harm to the entire planet, even threaten to tear it asunder.

“Upon realizing this, my first inclination was to undo what I had done, which I could have accomplished. There was, perhaps, a brief moment of doubt, in which I questioned the rightness of my actions. But I quickly concluded that I had acted solely out of love and concern for the well-being of my children, and that alone was enough to justify my actions. To this day, I have not wavered from that belief.

“And so, I sought another solution in dealing with these negative elements. I tried at one point to shunt them off into another extradimensional world, one that was uninhabited, but it proved beyond my capabilities. But I soon discovered that I could isolate them into an area unreachable by conventional physical means, but still closely tied to this dimension. Thus came the creation of the pocket dimension to house—permanently, was my intention and hope—these negative elements.

Once I had accomplished this, this new reality quickly evolved into the form you are familiar with from Pharsal’s story, characterized by corrosive acid storms, tremors of unimaginable magnitude, and a form of pseudo-life: formless wraiths that constantly fought each other. These were all unforeseen developments, but the most important one I discovered several decades later, on one of my routine monitorings. There now existed, within a physically small area, an ore of potentially great power to any wielder of mystical energies who knew exactly what he had and how to utilize it. As you know, this was the ore from which the amulet was fashioned, and I knew of its potential from the first time I had sent one my shards into the Dark World. I still cannot state for certain how and why the negative elements formed these particular physical aspects, especially this mineral with its unique qualities; but knowing of its potential, I attempted to effect a change, a mutation in its makeup toward something more benign. But I found this impossible without risking weakening the barrier separating the Dark World from Lahaikshe.

“So this ore, with its potential for great good as well as great destruction, remained as it was within the Dark World for many centuries, inviolate and undiscovered, until some twelve centuries ago. To describe the finer details would take more time than necessary in our current situation, but I will say it involved an extradimensional sorcerer who, along with a Rusay sorcerer, discovered the Dark World and the ore’s potential; leading to a betrayal, a brief but destructive weakening of the barrier, and a rallying of sorcerers from all across Lahaikshe, alerted by myself. In the battle’s aftermath, the enemy—such as he proved himself to be—was defeated, and there was a renewed effort on my part to protect Lahaikshe from threats from without, resulting in the dimensional barrier of which some of you are very familiar.”

Gwinthrayle nodded knowingly, having had perhaps more direct experience than any other living being on Lahaikshe in dealing with this barrier, in all the years he’d hosted extradimensional visitors and worked spells to send them home. “May I venture a guess,” he asked Elle, “that when it was time to send home each of my guests to his or her homeworld, that you were well aware of our efforts and may have even taken a direct hand yourself?”

“You are correct, Gwinthrayle. At the moment each was to be transported, I allowed a small ‘giving’ of the barrier, lasting only until the task was completed, all without tipping my own hand. There were other effects following the earlier conflict which you know very well. My increased vigilance toward outside threats meant changes in the world’s mystical energies, so that certain spells worked differently or not at all.”

“Ah,” said Gwinthrayle, “the most notable of which would have to be one that would allow instantaneous teleportation from one point to another.”

Elle confirmed what many knew firsthand, most notably Madeline, Johnathan and their rat friends, dating back to when all but Johnathan were flown by Gwinthrayle to his home after their rescue from Ghormfisk’s prison; and then, the next day, to confront Ghormfisk and regain the amulet. Elle added that a spell of instantaneous teleportation could contribute to a weakening of the barrier between Lahaikshe and the Dark World.

“And what about those mystical ‘hot spots?’” brought up Johnathan. “We’ve been made well aware of those since before we moved here.” Indeed, three of them—the Cavern of Change, the conical valley, and the site of Gwinthrayle’s home—were well known to his family and others.

“These areas you speak of,” Elle began, tone as even as ever, “can be considered, in simplest terms, a byproduct of my influence over Lahaikshe. Of all of them, the Cavern of Change became the one most uniquely suited for welcoming interdimensional visitors…as it will serve the best for the procedure we must perform this day.”

“Indeed,” added Tallus, “but there are other matters that I think require more immediate attention. You mentioned, Elle, that this earlier conflict on Lahaikshe resulted in some destruction. Just how much, and was it the same kind that’s happened twice recently?”

“To your second question, yes. As to its extent, it resulted in five more areas around the world being rendered as lifeless desert, with some having recovered partially since; though others, such as one familiar to most of you, have changed little in the intervening centuries.”

A familiar one? many wondered. Some quickly realized her meaning, with Justin voicing it first: “The Great Red Plain outside Freethorn! That was one of the affected areas, wasn’t it?”

“Correct, Justin. And I am particularly pleased that this was the area in which you chose to settle, for you have brought life back to a land which saw very little for twelve centuries.”

“We appreciate that, Elle,” said Johnathan, “but now all life here may be in danger. And I’m beginning to understand why. It’s because of the Stone’s origins in the Dark World, isn’t it?”

“But Johnathan and I have only used it for good,” said Madeline, “never for selfish or destructive purposes. How can that…not make a difference?”

“Apparently,” Elle answered, “there are natural forces beyond even my control that cannot differentiate the intent of the amulet’s user. It was something I had realized in the aftermath of the earlier conflict, and this was a major factor in my decision to erect the interdimensional barrier. But over the centuries, I found that my own control over the barrier could not always be maintained to the same degree, resulting in fluctuations at irregular intervals, which I know some of you are also familiar with. These fluctuations would often go hand-in-hand with ones that affected my control over the world’s biosphere, such as when I could not use an oracle to meet with Johnathan on his first visit because I needed to concentrate on other matters. At times, my activities on other worlds seemed to make the fluctuations worse, most notably when I sent the shards to Earth that changed Johnathan and Nicodemus, which is why I never made such an attempt again. This was why I had said that the effort had cost me.

“Knowing all this, I needed to become ever more vigilant to possible threats from without, and it could be…arduous at times, even with my ability to divide my concentration on almost as many fronts as I wished. But now that the secret was out in at least one other dimension about the Dark World’s ore of power, I knew it would be sought by others eventually. Even so, it was at a time when the barrier was at an especially low ebb that the brothers Pharsal and Arvasa were able to enter the Dark World.”

“And go on to create the amulet,” said Nicodemus. “Which, you now claim, poses a danger to us all. Please tell us, then, how and when it became clear to you that its use posed a danger.”

“Forgive me for saying,” said Tallus with a tinge of anxiety, “but I hope further explanations won’t take much more time, if the situation is as urgent as you’ve said.”

Many others agreed; and so, with assurances that action would be taken soon, Elle continued: “As I said: I had unknowingly aided you, Gwinthrayle, in returning home your interdimensional guests. On these occasions, I was unaware of any genuine harm such actions could wreak upon the dimensional barrier. After each one, I could detect no weakening or any other adverse effect, and so I had not anticipated what would come later with the advent of the Stone.

“As I told you, I had already made arrangements with Pharsal for the future disposition of the Stone. I was well aware of the capabilities Pharsal had bestowed upon it, most notably that of interdimensional travel, which would help make Ghormfisk the unwitting courier that would deliver it into Johnathan’s hands. But though this operation was a success, there was an immediate and unexpected adverse effect felt. There was a weakening of the barrier separating the pocket dimension housing the Dark World from Lahaikshe—slight, but requiring my immediate attention. The effect was corrected rather quickly, but I knew that with the amulet likely to return here, it would certainly happen again. When Johnathan Brisby and Ghormfisk were sent back here by the amulet, the effect was much less serious than before—because, I realized later, the amulet stayed on Earth.

“But when Madeline Brisby and her friends arrived here seeking Johnathan—with the amulet—the effect was immediately felt, again requiring my full attention. And certainly, after Ghormfisk had taken over the amulet the effect was exacerbated, requiring even greater attention. Because of this, I could not take direct action when Ghormfisk trapped his ‘enemies,’ much as I desired to. But I knew that Gwinthrayle had been tracking Ghormfisk’s activities and so would likely find and rescue those he’d trapped. This he did, and when the amulet was reclaimed and used further, ultimately to send Ghormfisk to his people’s new world and return Gwinthrayle’s guests to Earth, I could sense no further degradation of the Dark World’s barrier. My estimation then was that further use of the amulet on Lahaikshe would cause no further degradation; or, that if it did, it would be no more serious than before and it would be a simple enough matter to bring it under control.”

Gwinthrayle felt like asking about that earlier occasion when she had approached him, using Tuintwom as her oracle, in the same fashion as she did now with Lilia; but he decided against it, not wanting to delay her any more than necessary at this point. Obviously using an oracle at that time wasn’t a problem for her, however brief it was; yet, was there a specific reason for her approaching him then, or was it just a whim on her part?

Elle continued: “I was well aware by this time that the amulet’s connection with the Dark World must surely have been the major factor in the barrier’s weakening—not once, but twice. But I was also aware of the possibility of Johnathan employing the amulet to lead his people to a new home on Lahaikshe. I knew of the tremendous boon it would surely be to all his people, and thus I made it my first priority to see that all of you eventually made your new home here. I chose not to employ the method I am using now to approach Johnathan and warn him of the possible danger in using the amulet on Lahaikshe, although I had numerous opportunities when he and family and friends came to visit. I believed—due to a degree of overconfidence, even vanity—that the danger would be minimal and easily overcome.

But even when I knew that your Great Migration was imminent, when the amulet would transport not only Johnathan and his people, but their very home as well, I still believed that even such a huge task would not have the effect that it did. Certainly…I did not wish to believe it could happen, because this Migration was precisely the event I had striven for and anticipated. But when the task was done, I quickly found I was not adequately prepared for a breach of this magnitude, and so could not prevent the disaster in Asarals, in which a portion of the Dark World’s corrosive atmosphere crossed over into Lahaikshe and laid waste to an area which, as you noted, was fortunately sparsely populated. It was…dismaying, to say the least; but even as I realized that the danger may not be over, I was still determined to proceed with my plan to bring the new mice here, since they had remained undiscovered up to that point. I had quickly realized that making use of another for this was safer than Johnathan using the amulet, otherwise I may have alerted Johnathan in some fashion. As it was, he and his colleagues did uncover the existence of Vincent’s children, and I allowed use of the amulet in bringing them here, reasoning that this was a ‘smaller’ use for the amulet which would do little if any harm.

“But once more I would be shown how unpredictable these natural forces could be, even as I had been responsible for their present configurations. Though you had not used the amulet for such a large task since the Migration, apparently any continued use had a cumulative effect which resulted in the second breach just days ago, laying waste to an area much closer to you. Again it was uninhabited by Rusay, though not by other animal life. But were it to happen again, even I cannot predict where, and the loss of life could be much higher. It is now my estimation that the amulet’s mere presence on Lahaikshe, whether used or not, would pose a danger.

“And now…the decision must be made, the only one which I am certain you now realize must be made. This, in fact, was the primary reason for my using an oracle to speak before you now, to impart to you these facts which would allow you to judge their veracity for yourselves.” Elle looked squarely at Johnathan and Madeline Brisby. They looked at each other, each clearly unready to commit to such an undertaking.

“After all we’ve been through…all that it’s done for us…could we…how could we just give it up, just like that?”

“Maybe…Johnathan, we don’t…need it so much now. We’re all much safer here on Lahaikshe than on Earth.”

Johnathan sighed, nodding. “And we do understand this world so much better now. In spite of the…errors in judgment she’s made, Elle has worked hard to make this world what it is.” They looked down at the ruby-red jewel against Johnathan’s chest, then at each other, nodding.

“Dad, Mom, you’re…really going to give it up, aren’t you? Just like that?”

“We don’t have any other choice, Martin.” Johnathan stood up, followed by Madeline, both stepping closer to the rock. “All right. You’ve convinced us. So…how will this be done…and where?”

“I think she mentioned the Cavern of Change, Johnathan,” reminded Madeline.

“Yes,” confirmed Elle, “that is the nearest location that will be suitable for the task.”

“Now wait,” cut in Justin. “Before we finalize any great plans here, there’s one more thing I think we should know. If they kept the Stone but didn’t use it, what’s the worst that would happen?”

After a moment of silence, Elle replied, “There are powers at my command that are considerable, yet not without limits. Though I can divide my concentration on many fronts, it still requires a significant amount to maintain this world to keep it in the state I committed to long ago. I am acutely aware that the amulet is linked directly to these disturbances but cannot guarantee that I would be prepared to deal with any further ones. I can state beyond a doubt that the chance is significant, even if the amulet goes unused. That is the ‘least’ that could occur.”

“And that ‘least’ could occur with greater loss of life, as you’ve pointed out,” said Nicodemus. “So may we assume that a worst-case scenario would be to have the barrier to the Dark World fall away completely, with its substance, its ‘negative elements’ invading Lahaikshe in full?”

“Precisely, Nicodemus. A much wider area of land would initially be devastated, but what would follow in the ensuing days would be worse. Conditions as they were millennia ago would prevail, with increased instability in earth and sky as well as in the minds of its people. Your own people could even be affected as well as this world’s native creatures, with overall much more misery and unhappiness. And I can anticipate your next question: could I not simply repeat the process I began long ago, to return Lahaikshe to its present state? The answer I cannot state unequivocally, but I am positive that it would be a much slower process than the two centuries it took before, perhaps even a millennium or longer.”

Justin looked around at his fellow councilmembers, and finally at Johnathan. Though the matter hadn’t been put to a formal vote, he said, “I guess it’s unanimous, then, that this is the only viable course of action.”

“Nothing lasts forever,” said Arthur, “and Lahaikshe is still likely to be much safer for us than Earth.”

“I’ve always tended to resist change,” said Velma, “but this is too important. I’ve come to enjoy my life here as much as anyone, and we’ve come too far, and have too much to look forward to, to let our lives be threatened now.”

“All right, then,” said Johnathan, breathing in deep. “Just tell us what we have to do.”

Soon a small party was gathered at the east side of the Rooftop, looking across the Great Red Plain toward the forest and one particular jagged rock formation that rose upward from it. They had largely finished their goodbyes to those gathered to see them off.

“Hard to believe,” said Johnathan, “that we’re actually going to do this.”

“I know,” agreed Madeline, taking his arm, “but if it really is necessary, then—”

“Hey,” said Timothy, “looks like we’ve got more company.”

All looked to where he pointed and recognized the new arrival as a Rusay like Gwinthrayle, some quickly realizing his identity. Many were reminded of Gwinthrayle’s similar airborne entrance earlier today as he accompanied the mhys’haspa bearing Norman and Teresa.

“Why, that’s Birantha, isn’t it, Gwinthrayle?” said Madeline.

“Indeed it is. We’d scheduled a meeting for just after my return, but I hadn’t time to inform him of further developments.”

The floating figure immediately took notice of the group gathered atop the Wall as if waiting specifically for him. He quickly touched down. “Well,” he said almost cheerily, “it seems I’ve arrived at an opportune moment.” His eyes widened as they fell upon Elle.

Both Johnathan and Justin couldn’t help seeing some humor in his arguably ill-timed entrance, though they knew that he, being a sorcerer of equal repute and talent to Gwinthrayle, could be of help to them in what was to come, especially given his knowledge of the Stone.

And so Birantha was given the greatly-condensed version of the events of this day and what led to them, and he confirmed that he had just visited the site of the calamitous event only miles from Freethorn, he and Gwinthrayle having missed each other by a few hours.

Once apprised of the situation, Birantha volunteered his services; and soon a party of seven was rising upward, quickly moving across the Great Red Plain, leaving wishes for good luck but also anxiety and some trepidation among those that remained behind.

Chapter 49 - Disintegration

“I guess it has been a while. I don’t remember it taking so long to get from point A to point B.”

“That’s probably because we didn’t know where we were going, Justin,” said Madeline, laughing nervously.

“We came here once since then, to show the kids,” said Johnathan. “Still not much to look at.”

No one in this party could conceal their anxiety over what was about to take place, for all they were yet uninformed of the specifics. They continued to follow the soft white light provided by Gwinthrayle’s “little messengers,” as Johnathan had come to call them during his original time as his houseguest, illuminating the narrow passage taking them ever deeper, further from the surface and daylight to their destination.

During this new “tunnel trudge,” Birantha was further updated on the job at hand and its importance. The Brisbys and Justin had seen him only once in the two-plus years since their first time here, and though he was aware of Freethorn’s entrance into Lahaikshe, he hadn’t the chance for an actual visit yet. He promised he’d make time once this crisis was resolved.

Presently the seven emerged into a chamber only a little higher than the tunnel but some four feet in diameter. Everyone formed a semicircle and gazed all around the room.

“So this is the famous Cavern of Change,” said Tallus. “It’s not much to look at, all right, but if this is where we’ll get the job done…”

“You still haven’t told us, Elle,” said Nicodemus, “precisely what we’ll hope to accomplish here.”

Without hesitation, Elle detailed the plan, leaving everyone agape, even Gwinthrayle, Birantha and Nicodemus, scarcely believing it could be done even if it were necessary for the well-being of Lahaikshe and its people.

Johnathan shook his head. “I guess…if there’s absolutely no other way, then…we’d best get it over with.”

“Now just a minute,” said Justin. “Elle, you only said before that Johnathan had to give it up. You said nothing about…anything like this!”

“And it sounds so dangerous, too,” said Madeline.

“I agree,” added Tallus, “and especially in such a confined space. Should something go wrong, where would we take cover, especially those of us who can do naught but watch?”

After a pause, Elle replied, “All of us will be shielded from whatever forces may be released—those whose presence is necessary for the procedure to be carried out successfully, and the rest of you as well.”

Justin, unable to completely conceal his trepidation, asked, “Are you sure that…I mean, have you ever done anything like this before?”

Elle turned toward him. “Not this exact procedure, no. But I am far more aware of my limitations and the scope of my abilities than I was when the Dark World was first isolated, and I am intimately familiar with the forces at work there. And now…we must not delay any longer. We must proceed.”

Johnathan looked at Madeline, tugging at his whiskers nervously, wishing it weren’t necessary for both of them to be there, though Elle said it would be because both had command over the amulet. Nicodemus, Gwinthrayle and Birantha stood ready for further instructions. Justin and Tallus stepped back, hoping fervently that Elle’s assurances of safety for all of them were guaranteed but still not regretting coming along, knowing what a pivotal event this would be.

In the center of the semicircle, Elle stepped forward. Her eyes closed and a look of intense concentration came upon her features; or rather, Lilia’s. Some had continually needed to remind themselves today that this was Lilia’s body, and even with Elle’s assurances that Lilia would be whole and unharmed when this was all over, they wondered if she could truly be the same, though her life had already changed considerably in the past two weeks.

Elle opened eyes. A steely-blue glow emanated from them. She turned, facing each of the participants; and, though they felt no different, all knew something had changed. “You are now all shielded from physical harm. Johnathan…present the amulet.”

Johnathan had already taken it from around his neck and held it out, glancing at Madeline, who only nodded, both still visibly reluctant. As he turned it over, their eyes fell upon the nearly-forgotten inscription upon it: “You can unlock any door if you only have the key.” They looked into each other’s eyes, neither knowing precisely how to articulate what they felt; but surely both hoped fervently that the actions taken this day would prove to be the key to resolving this crisis.

It left his hands and became suspended in midair between him and Elle. A gesture from Elle, and the jewel separated from the pendant, which clattered to the floor of the cave. Impulsively, Madeline crouched to retrieve it. Johnathan started to caution her, but Elle indicated it was safe to do so. Once Madeline was back on her feet, Elle said, “Now, both of you who command the jewel…you must focus all of your concentration upon it—its powers you directed and commanded in times of need, what it has meant to you and your people, the sum total of your experiences with it.”

The pair did so, gazing upon it, looking almost enraptured as the jewel hung suspended before them. Elle concentrated herself, speaking inaudible words and gesturing with her hands. The jewel began to glow red. Seconds later, a globular transparent field appeared and surrounded the jewel, arcs of multicolored light dancing across its outer surface. Johnathan and Madeline gazed upon this new spectacle but didn’t break concentration, waiting to be told when to do so and for further instructions.

Gwinthrayle and Birantha were ready for their part. Nicodemus, though possessed of mystical capabilities, was nevertheless thankful for Birantha’s participation, having not had the degree of training the two Rusay sorcerers possessed. Tallus and Justin, who would mainly observe, were anxious over what would come next but couldn’t tear themselves away if they tried.

The next step was heralded by the appearance of a tiny point of light to one side of the field encasing the jewel. It appeared very innocuous, not unlike a firefly hovering in midair, but all knew its import, and that the light was only there as a marker or beacon. For what lay behind it was a place where no light could escape—because there was none.

“She’s really doing it,” said Justin to Tallus quietly. “Even knowing what the energies in that place can do, she’s deliberately opening a portal to it.”

“Under controlled conditions, Justin, let’s not forget.” Elle had assured them that, out of all the naturally-occurring mystical “hot spots,” the cavern space where they now stood was the one best suited for a critical operation of this nature.

Ellis stared out over the plain anxiously, shading his eyes as if straining to catch any sign of activity, for all he knew the distance would make it next to impossible. He breathed in deep, trying to relieve the tightness in his chest.

“C’mon, Ellis, take it easy,” said Lucy, sidling up to him, putting an arm around his shoulder. “It’ll be all right. They know what they’re doing.”

“Don’t you think I’ve been telling myself that?” Ellis sounded more apprehensive than angry; still, he looked contrite and added, “I just…can’t help feeling that…Lilia’s not gonna come out of this in one piece.” He sighed. “I know that…Elle promised she’d be all right, but…can even she guarantee it’s all gonna go as she planned? She even admitted that she’s made mistakes before.” He looked contrite again. “I know, that kind of talk doesn’t do any good.”

Timothy approached them, placing an arm around Lucy and pressing his face close to hers. “So…anything yet? Any good signs?” she asked him.

“Nothing yet. I think I’d have to actually see what’s going on to…feel anything.”

“And from this far away, who could tell?” Ellis sighed. “Have you talked to Boris?”

“Yeah, I did, and so far, nothing. Maybe that’s just as well, though. I don’t know how many more of those visions he can take.”

Here on the east side of the Rooftop, all those maintaining this vigil were trying hard to keep morale high. The eight Brisby children, for the most part, stuck together as a group, the older ones reassuring the younger ones that both of their parents would return safely, though all admitted to uneasiness over both of them going on this mission.

It had already been decided that there should be a liaison committee to ease the transition of Freethorn’s new arrivals into their new lives; and so, to help keep those waiting occupied, organization and recruitment for the committee was proceeding full-steam, with Isabella, Patricia and Jessica spearheading the project. Some were more than happy to throw themselves into it in order to keep from worrying about friends and loved ones off on this mission which, despite the principals’ assurance of success, all knew couldn’t possibly be without a degree of risk.

Timothy, Lucy and Ellis approached Reuben, who’d been keeping his own solitary vigil. He looked ready to protest their intrusion, as expected, but he accepted their assurances that Lilia would return safe. He even admitted that he was concerned for the others almost as much, especially Johnathan and Madeline.

Presently Norman approached them and asked to “borrow” Reuben for a while; and Reuben, his spirits sufficiently lifted and curiosity piqued, accepted. What could Norman want with him, he wondered, since the two hadn’t had much contact with each other before? Norman quickly got to the point, describing how his mother and twin were helping to organize the liaison committee.

“Sounds like a good thing,” Reuben said with a shrug. “But what does it have to do with me?”

“Well…I think it’d be good for you and me both, because we’re in pretty much the same boat.”

“How do you mean?”

“We have the same need, I believe…for companionship, a mate.” Reuben looked slightly taken aback, but couldn’t disagree outright. “I thought…Teresa and I were getting closer, and then Eric pops back into her life. I knew right off it would have to be her choice, and I can’t blame her for choosing him. And I’m glad for her, I really am. And her kids seemed to accept him right away, too. They’re an actual family again, and that’s great. So…the only thing for me to do is bow out, move on, and try to find love again.”

Reuben nodded thoughtfully. “I see what you mean, Norman. I guess…I’ve been moping a lot lately, it’s been obvious to anyone. So if…we both help out with the new mice, we’ll get to know some of them pretty well.”

“Exactly. And we know already there are plenty of eligible females among them.”

Reuben nodded again, clearly finding the prospect more and more appealing. “Well…there’s Jessica over there. I guess we can tell her we’re both volunteers, right, Norman?”

Norman seemed distracted for a moment. “Oh, er, right, Reuben. C’mon, let’s go.” As the two moved on, Norman glanced back over to where Teresa and her family gathered, her siblings and her new family alike. He was happy for her, he again told himself. This is the right thing for her.

Timothy had rejoined the rest of his family and had resumed gazing across the Great Red Plain. Cynthia was quick to recognize the look of intense concentration on her twin brother’s face; though everyone who had listened to Elle’s story was given much to think about, she knew there had to be more on his mind than simple speculation of their parents’ mission.

“What are you thinking about, Tim?” she asked, taking his arm.

“It seems to me,” he said thoughtfully, “that there are some major details—or maybe just one—that Elle left out.”

“Oh?” said Simone, who was just within earshot. “What would that be, Tim?”

“Well…she talked of ‘allowing’ interdimensional visitors to come to Lahaikshe, which Gwinthrayle would take in as guests. Two of them, Kalfomenda and Tugrelho, we actually came to know as friends. But I wonder…with all her talk about our people being worthy to live here, is it possible that…how do I put this…those earlier visitors were test cases, I guess you’d call them.”

Simone nodded. “I had much the same idea. She actually came out and admitted that she deemed Ghormfisk’s people, the Sut’hrim, unworthy, and so…”

“So she didn’t give them a chance to even get a foothold here; though she couldn’t prevent Ghormfisk from coming here with Dad via the Stone.”

“Yes…she didn’t say how closely she monitored events on their world; but it’s plain to see that the basis for her rejection was what they’d done to it, essentially destroying it themselves, rendering it unsustainable.”

“So,” put in Cynthia, “she thought they could make as big a mess of things here, eventually.”

“Exactly,” said Timothy. “And I also thought…our friends’ race, the Kantiri, and who knows how many others, may have also been ‘evaluated’ when one of them came here. Remember how Turlokeen came here originally? It was because Dirndrayo’s spell went awry, supposedly. But Elle may have had a hand in that.”

“Hey, yeah…” said Cynthia. “Look at how much that resembles the way Daddy came here. Didn’t we talk about that once, not long after Gwinthrayle first told us Turlokeen’s story?”

“We did. Now, I can’t help wondering if Elle considers his people rejects, with us favored over them. Maybe…it doesn’t really matter.”

“In any case,” said Simone sagely, “we should consider ourselves lucky and honored to have been chosen.”

Timothy nodded in agreement. “It’s a little troubling, though…about the Sut’hrim, I mean. They’re living in this new world, and they seem to be treating it well, not taking their good fortune for granted. By all indications, they’ve sworn to not let things get as bad as before; but who knows what the future will bring? I guess…Elle thought it was too great a chance to take.”

“Well, whatever fate holds for them, it has nothing to do with what it holds for us…and especially them.” Simone looked out, eyes focusing anew on the jagged peak marking the entrance to the cavern where so much hung in the balance.

“Now…Gwinthrayle, Birantha…you must prevent the portal from opening prematurely, while I initiate the next step. Nicodemus, you will assist.”

The pair initiated the spell which placed a glowing field around the point in midair where the portal to the Dark World lay. As soon as the field was in place, they found that it required great concentration to maintain it. Their faces reflected their efforts, and it reminded them all of how powerful those forces were, lurking beyond this point of light; in spite of the portal’s tiny size, which Elle assured them would be sufficient for the task, and in spite of her estimation that the process would go more smoothly here in the Cavern of Change.

Elle instructed Johnathan and Madeline to begin the next phase of their concentration. “You must regard the amulet as if you are rejecting it, willing it away from you. This is critical to the process and it must be done, even if it goes against your nature.”

The two looked at each other, each feeling the reluctance the other had. Before today, neither could imagine treating the Stone as something to be scorned or rejected, after all it had meant to them—so much more than decorative jewelry, it had become almost like a member of the family, as if it were alive. But Elle had already reminded them that it wasn’t, and that at best it was a form of pseudo-life, not unlike the mind-invading wraiths that inhabited the Dark World from which the amulet also originated.

The pair nodded at each other, knowing it had to be done, and concentrated anew. We don’t need you anymore; your time has passed; you are nothing more than a tool that’s outlived its usefulness. They tried their utmost to make themselves believe these thoughts, which they knew were being projected directly to the glowing orb inside the multicolored force-bubble.

As the two mice continued their mental barrage, the two sorcerers, assisted by Nicodemus, continued to hold the forces behind the portal at bay; and Elle was free to begin her next step. She raised both arms and looked to the jewel, her eyes seemingly overflowing with the same steely-blue glow. It seemed to merge with the force-bubble, the lights dancing across its surface also shifting to the same shade of blue, making the jewel inside appear to glow purple.

For over a minute, everything seemed to be in a holding pattern, with no noticeable change, at least to the eyes of Justin and Tallus; then it began. It was subtle at first, and the two rats thought their eyes were playing tricks on them. But the following seconds confirmed it was indeed happening as Elle said it would.

“She’s actually doing it. All this time, I thought it was practically indestructible.”

“Apparently, Justin, what one can create—even indirectly—one can also destroy.”

Before their eyes, pieces of the jewel were flaking away, at first thin like the skin of an onion, but soon giving way to thicker and larger ones. As it did, a low rumble, like thunder, seemed to accompany it, steadily increasing in volume, as if a miniature storm were raging inside the bubble. Elle maintained her concentration on the task until the jewel was reduced to many small pieces, and it wasn’t about to end there. The pieces still large enough to be seen were continuing to break apart; and the greater and finer the fragmentation, the more intense the “storm” was becoming—just as Elle had briefed them beforehand. The mystical energies that had been harnessed by the jewel’s crystalline structure were now floating free, contained by the force of Elle’s will inside the globe while the Stone continued to disintegrate, almost to a molecular level. Presently Elle told Johnathan and Madeline that they’d completed their role. They fell back to join Tallus and Justin.

“Just look at that,” said Madeline with more awe than regret. “I can’t believe that…we helped to do this.” She fingered the now-empty pendant she wore.

“I know,” agreed Johnathan with noticeably more regret. “And the forces we must have set loose in there…I don’t know, this may sound weird, but…suddenly, it feels a lot more claustrophobic in here.” Indeed, even for creatures such as these, accustomed to confining spaces as were their natural counterparts, everyone was wishing that this process could be carried out aboveground and out in the open.

Now the sorcerers’ field restraining the portal needed to be merged with the one containing the sundered elements of the jewel. It appeared almost innocuous, like two soap-bubbles touching and becoming one, or the reverse of a single-celled organism dividing. But all knew the next step was probably the most critical. Nicodemus, Gwinthrayle and Birantha awaited the signal from Elle, after which the beacon would go out, indicating the portal to the Dark World was now open. In the following seconds, the reduced remains of the jewel would be “shepherded” through the aperture, returning them to their original home, after which the portal would close. The energies released from the jewel would then be dealt with, contained within the bubble until they could be tempered enough to be dissipated within the earth. The issue had already been raised about the wraiths native to the Dark World: even in those fleeting seconds when the portal would be open, could one or more get through? But Elle assured them that if it did happen, it would be contained within the bubble, and if it were to get loose, it couldn’t survive in this world’s environment.

Nicodemus couldn’t help feeling that his role wasn’t all that necessary, though he knew that his contribution—mainly assisting in keeping the Dark World’s forces at bay—was most vital.

The four observers looked back and forth at the tableau before them, hardly breathing as they anticipated what would follow. What had been the Stone—that strange and wondrous object that had been the source of so much frustration and even anguish, but mostly working for the benefit of all their people—now appeared as a cloud of glowing, sparkling purple pixie dust, dancing in swirls and eddies at the bottom of the globe, moving toward the beacon.

As the beacon was extinguished, everyone tensed, half-expecting some more dramatic action to follow. But it appeared to proceed according to plan, as the jewel’s sundered remains flowed in a sparkling stream through the portal. Madeline and Johnathan clasped hands, looking at each other with throats tightening, again wishing it hadn’t had to come to this.

“Looks like this is it,” said Justin.

“Let’s not forget, Justin,” reminded Tallus, “that this is only half of it. And I’ve the feeling the easy part’s over.”

Soon none of the sparkling cloud could be seen. “The portal is now closed,” Gwinthrayle announced out loud. He and Birantha and Nicodemus turned attentions fully toward the force-bubble housing the released energies.

“The next step,” said Elle, “is mine to perform alone.” Addressing the trio, she added, “If I require assistance, you will know.” She then approached the glowing sphere, which seemed to greet her with a more thunderous roar than before, as if in anger. She raised arms and concentrated anew; and again, over the next few minutes, nothing seemed to change. As the others watched in near-silence, Elle moved arms up and down slowly as if caressing the sphere. The forces contained within continued to give the impression of a raging miniature thunderstorm, with multicolored flashes and streaks dancing about constantly like lightning, completing the image.

Then…a single spot of glowing green, brighter than the bubble’s contents, appeared on the bubble’s side, and all knew a change was about to occur, or at least an obvious one. Sure enough, a stream of the mystical energy came snaking out from the aperture, turning in spirals around the room. Let this be over and done with quickly, thought most in the group; but in Gwinthrayle, there was a sudden foreboding. Did Elle really have the situation as much in control as she’d indicated? And there was still the memory issue: how would they remember any of this when it was over, if at all?

There was no more time to speculate. Without warning, the aperture widened, and the snake of energy likewise grew thicker, then split into multiple branches like a mythical hydra, each spiraling wildly, with the “storm” sounds growing ever louder. Everyone felt a growing sense of danger but hesitated to ask Elle whether this was all part of the procedure, or if the situation was—quite literally—spiraling out of her control. Gwinthrayle, Birantha and Nicodemus each wondered if she would call on them for assistance soon, and felt close to asking out loud. The others couldn’t help feeling their fight-or-flight instincts rising, in spite of Elle’s assurance of their safety.

All this happened in a matter of seconds; and in those that followed, most heeded their instincts, ducking and covering their heads. The green streaks continued pouring from the bubble, spiraling and bouncing off the walls in an increasingly-frenzied fashion as the thundering sounds continued to grow in volume.

“Elle!” shouted Justin, even as he wasn’t sure she’d be able to hear. “Is this supposed to happen? Do something!”

Johnathan and Madeline were crouched low, clinging to each other. Hearing Justin’s voice, Johnathan looked up to see what would happen next—just in time to have his vision filled with one bright green filament of light, giving him no more time to wonder, or to think about anything before it made contact…

Chapter 50 - More recovery and rediscovery

“Marty, I’m sure they’ll be all right. They’ll come back safe.”

Martin Brisby looked away from the plain and forest beyond Freethorn, taking his wife’s hand. “It’s not that, Karen. I was just thinking…has it occurred to anyone that…with the Stone gone, we’ll be cut off from Earth for good? Unless Gwinthrayle, or maybe Elle, can arrange something, we won’t be able to leave Lahaikshe at all.”

“We don’t yet know how this is all going to resolve, Martin,” said Arthur. “But even if that were the worst-case scenario…it would hardly be the worst fate we could face.”

Martin sighed. “You don’t have to tell me, Art. I love it here. Most of us do. It’s just…we should still have the option, shouldn’t we? I guess…having the Stone practically spoiled us, like we’ve just taken for granted being able to go where we want.”

“But isn’t it enough that we were able to go where we’d be out of danger, and to grow and thrive?” opined Melinda. “I know I would always miss Earth, but…if I absolutely had to stay here, I wouldn’t—”

All conversation halted as a low rumble, lasting only a few seconds, reached everyone’s ears. All looked toward where the sound originated: across the plain, to where the rocky outcropping that jutted upward from the forest marked the entrance to the Cavern of Change. In the following moments came perhaps the most dreaded sight imaginable: a cloud of dust or smoke, or both, began rising from that very location. Sounds of distress began rising from the crowd, with some bursting out in tears almost immediately. Those whose outward reactions were more low-key still felt their hearts leap into their throats and stones form in their stomachs.

“My god, what’s happening over there?” Melinda’s question was echoed, often verbatim, throughout the crowd.

“I don’t know,” replied Arthur, “but this still doesn’t mean anyone’s in danger. They still could’ve been protected from harm.”

“But we’ve got to find out what’s happening!” exclaimed Martin. “We can’t just stand here, and do nothing but wait.” He looked over to Isabella, who was obviously trying to appear calmer than she felt as Arthur and Melinda consoled her.

Nearly everyone’s eyes were riveted to the spot on the horizon, perhaps none more than Timothy’s. His friends gathered around, almost afraid to speak before him, anxiously awaiting his reaction to the terrible sight.

Interminable seconds later, he said, “I…don’t know, I can’t…feel anything. Not yet, anyway.”

“You need to be there, don’t you?” suggested Lucy. “You gotta get closer to what’s happening!”

Timothy looked back across the plain. “Yes…yeah, you’re right, Lucy,” he said quietly, trying to sound as confident as possible. “All we need’s a way to get over there quick.” He looked over the crowd, already getting an idea. Every kind of speculation imaginable was being brought out. The Rusay guests were receiving their share of queries: could this be a natural phenomenon, geological in nature, or from a fire or something else unrelated to their friends’ mission? But they were as mystified as anyone.

Timothy was about to voice his idea when others started beating him to it: “Look! Isn’t that a mhys’haspa?” “Hey! Uncle Norm could ride it over there!” “He can find out what’s happening!”

In short order, Norman had signaled the soaring creature to come down, the crowd parting to allow it room. He’d quickly recognized the mhys’haspa as the one he and Teresa had flown with earlier in the day, and it was entirely agreeable to another “mission.” Norman hoped it wouldn’t be as hesitant as before to approach their destination. It was quickly agreed that Timothy was the most logical choice to accompany Norman. There were quick cautions for the two mice as they climbed onto the mhys’haspa’s back, and soon they were airborne.

Most of the debris cloud had settled back to earth, and through the haze that remained in the air one would be able to view the full extent of the blast’s aftermath. Rocks, boulders, and uprooted and splintered trees lay scattered about. Except for a small group of tysthals milling about at the outskirts of the debris field, all was still and silent.

Then…almost at the field’s center, stirring sounds could be heard, growing gradually louder, unmistakable signs that something was working its way to the surface. Soon there were the obvious visual signs as well, looking like nothing so much as the burrowing of a mole just before emerging into daylight. But when the surface debris began floating away in a decidedly un-mole-like fashion, there could be no doubt that this was no mere burrowing animal, or a single one.

“Was that the last one, Gwinthrayle?”

“Indeed, Justin. We have finally emerged.”

“Thank goodness.” Justin sighed with relief. “How are you holding up, Madeline?”

“I…I’m all right, Justin. I’m sure…everything will be all right once we reach Gwinthrayle’s.” She tried her best to sound composed as she looked at the unconscious form in Justin’s arms, cradled like a child. Inwardly, she couldn’t banish the thought: Dear God, what happened to him back there? Will he ever be the same again?

“I’m sure it will, for both him and Lilia,” assured Justin. As they continued climbing over the jagged, recently shattered pieces of rock lining the tunnel, they glanced at the white mouse cradled in Tallus’s arms.

“Still breathing normally,” Tallus reported. “Just as she has been.”

Nicodemus, bringing up the rear, aided Gwinthrayle and Birantha in ensuring that the tunnel would remain open until they were all aboveground again. “She should be all right, but the Cavern of Change won’t be the same again,” said Gwinthrayle. “All the stone and earth above it has been shattered.”

One by one they clambered over the few remaining inches of the tunnel toward daylight, greeted by the early-evening sun hanging low in the sky. When they were all out, they gathered in a circle, patting and brushing the dust from their skin, fur and clothing as Gwinthrayle prepared the spell of transportation.

Looking at Johnathan in the full daylight, Madeline couldn’t suppress her fears and doubts. “Oh, Nicodemus…Justin…what’s going to become of him?”

Nicodemus embraced her, allowing her to cry on his shoulder. “Johnathan’s been through worse than this, my dear. We must convey our most positive thoughts for his full recovery.”

“I-I know, Nicodemus. Thank you.”

Tallus looked down at Lilia, recalling the last time he’d carried her in his arms like this, when she’d impishly asked if he’d like to toss her so she could resume her celebratory night-dance. He hoped she’d have such a moment again.

“What I don’t understand,” offered Justin, “is how that…whatever it was, filament of mystic energy, got through to him like that, when all of us were supposed to be protected. And why just him?”

“It does appear as if…Johnathan were singled out, somehow,” observed Nicodemus.

“Yes…but for what?”

“I wonder how much of this was seen or heard back in Freethorn,” mused Tallus, looking up at the dissipating dust cloud. “It would surely have raised much anxiety. Perhaps one of us should stay here, in case someone comes to investigate.”

“Norman!” interjected Justin. “He could fly here on a mhys’haspa!”

Everyone agreed it could very likely happen, and shortly, Tallus agreed to be the one to stay there and pass on what information he could to whomever might arrive, and Gwinthrayle agreed to check on him after an hour or so if necessary. It was hoped Tallus wouldn’t have to wait here that entire time by himself, but he was prepared just in case. Soon Gwinthrayle, Birantha, Nicodemus, Madeline, Justin (still carrying Johnathan), and Lilia’s still-slumbering form were rising in the air as Tallus waved goodbye on the debris-strewn ground.

They all got their bearings on Gwinthrayle’s invisible “platform” as it moved off over the forested hills. Madeline looked up at Justin again. “I guess that…whatever happens to Johnathan, at least there’s been a greater danger averted.”

“I feel the same way. And I know he would, too.” Justin crouched and gently set his friend down. “But I wouldn’t worry. Gwinthrayle will get him fixed right up. Just like she found out about that connection between the Stone and the destruction that already happened, and knew just what to do about that.”

“Yes. Ah…Justin, did you say ‘she’?”

Justin looked puzzled. “I did, didn’t I? Don’t know why I’d make a mistake like that. We’ve both known him long enough.” They both laughed.

Nicodemus, at hearing Justin’s apparent slip of the tongue, felt an odd, strangely familiar sensation. Déjà vu? Probably; it’s a common enough phenomenon, and it typically defies attempts to deduct its origin logically. Yet…why would such a simple slip—a transposed pronoun—trigger it, as if Justin really meant to say that someone else, who happened to be female, was responsible for solving this latest crisis? But no, if this is a genuine mystery, it will have to wait. He looked at the still forms of Lilia and Johnathan, then to the rolling hills that lay beneath and still ahead of them, beyond which lay Gwinthrayle’s abode, where they could more properly determine the nature of the two mice’s conditions, even if it meant simply waiting for them to wake up.

“Enjoying the ride, Tim?”

“Yeah, it’s great, Norm. Wish it was under better circumstances.” Timothy craned his neck to see over the mhys’haspa’s shoulder. He could make out the edge of the forest just ahead.

“I know what you mean. I guess you’d know better than me, but…I can’t believe the worst has happened, in spite of what we’ve seen and heard.”

Timothy just nodded, ready to take in what lay ahead, hoping to get a positive impression from viewing the (presumably) ruined site. Norman continued steering the mhys’haspa toward it, still guided by the hazy remains of the debris cloud. Thus far their mount hadn’t shown any obvious discomfort at being directed there, which Norman found a little surprising.

And then, all at once, it came into view. The two mice gaped in amazement. The debris field wasn’t as wide as they’d expected, but it was still an awe-inspiring sight, unlike anything Timothy had ever seen or heard about on this world. No doubt, something must have gone awry on their mission to de-power the amulet, but did it mean anyone was killed or critically injured? Determined not to anticipate the worst, Timothy swallowed hard. Norman, equally determined to concentrate on the job at hand, had the mhys’haspa circle the area and bank just enough to give Timothy a better view.

They made one entire circuit, and Norman was about to ask Timothy if he was getting a positive impression yet when he suddenly pointed urgently. “Norm, there’s somebody down there! See? He’s waving to us!”

Norman immediately requested their mount to circle to a lower altitude. Sure enough, someone was waving his arms, trying hard to attract their attention.

“It’s Tallus!” exclaimed Timothy. “And…yes, things are definitely going to be all right.”

“Great! Well, I’ll try to bring him in for a smooth enough landing.”

Madeline Brisby breathed in deep and swallowed the lump in her throat as she and Justin sat on the sofa watching Gwinthrayle and Birantha, on either side of the bed, running their tests upon the one who lay upon it. Nearby, Nicodemus stood ready to assist again, though it was clear to him that this was outside his area of expertise. On the left side of the room, Lilia lay on the divan, looking as if she were simply napping, her breathing normal.

Madeline sighed and looked up at Justin. She managed a smile as she took his hand, resting her head against his arm. For both, the scene brought to mind a similar one almost two and a half years earlier, when she lay in the same bed recovering from an ordeal that nearly cost her her life. While arguably more serious than the situation Johnathan was in now, at least her condition was easier to understand and treat. But not even the two sorcerers could determine—at least not yet—precisely what happened to Johnathan back in the now-destroyed Cavern of Change, or what could be done now.

“They’ll find out what’s wrong with him,” said Justin, matching Madeline’s thoughts. “It’s just a matter of time.”

“I know they will, Justin. I was just thinking…that, with our emotional rapport, I ought to have some…some inkling of what’s happening with him. I guess it’s…not much different than it is when one of us is asleep. But still…”

“Still…after everything he’s been through, he’s been the same old lovable Johnathan all along, hasn’t he?” They both laughed. “He’ll emerge from this unscathed, you’ll see.”

“I guess so. And you know what? Maybe it’s just from talking about it now, but suddenly I don’t feel worried, not at all. In fact…I’ll bet the protections the Stone placed upon both of us will be an enormous help.”

“Say, that’s right. It gave you both that recuperative ability, the one that helped you recover from our ordeal with Uhrstegg.”

“Yes, and neither of us have really learned the full extent of how it may have benefited us.”

“Well, given all that, I’d say we have nothing to worry about.”

“And that,” added Nicodemus, joining them on the sofa, “given with the abilities of our Rusay friends, should serve him in good stead.”

“That’s all perfectly fine,” said Justin, “but what about Lilia? There’s been no change in her condition in…what, two, three hours now?”

They all looked at the white mouse still in the midst of a deep and seemingly peaceful sleep. They recalled how, after the new mice arrived in Freethorn, Gwinthrayle (along with Norman and Teresa) had followed with news of his findings. But in the midst of his story, Lilia suddenly collapsed, not unlike Kimball and Louann the previous day; but unlike them, she fell into what appeared to be simply a very deep sleep, from which none had been able to rouse her. After Gwinthrayle was through detailing his findings and made his conclusion that Johnathan needed to give up the amulet, it was determined that Lilia should be brought along, as it was suspected that her condition may be a factor in what had been happening, with the unusual things that had already happened to her.

“I wonder,” said Madeline, “if all we should do with Lilia is just simply…wait for her to wake up?”

“It sure looks that way. At least she seems to be in no danger.” But Johnathan? Justin looked to him again just as Gwinthrayle and Birantha appeared to conclude their tests. Madeline sounded as confident as Timothy about a positive outcome for her husband, and it raised his own optimism. But they both knew they’d find a specific, concrete explanation of Johnathan’s condition to be the most satisfying.

Madeline looked down at the now-empty pendant she wore around her neck—empty, that is, save for the inscription on the back. She read it quietly to herself, silently praying that the key to this latest crisis would be found quickly.

“My friends,” Gwinthrayle began as he and Birantha approached, “we have concluded that the energy filament that struck Johnathan down did indeed specifically ‘seek him out,’ as it were. Recall that those energies were previously harnessed by the amulet, which he commanded.”

“It was as if they weren’t ready to part company with Johnathan just yet,” added Birantha, “and now those energies are apparently assimilating within him, becoming a part of him.”

“But the end result,” said Gwinthrayle soberly, “is something at which we can only guess.”

“But he is out of the woods, isn’t he?”

“We believe so, Justin. There’s no known precedent for the body of a mortal being to be able to contain such energies; but even so, we don’t expect Johnathan to be crippled in any way.”

“I think I understand now,” said Madeline, expression brightening. “Some of it, at least. I started feeling that Johnathan would become well, and…it must be because I also commanded the Stone, so there must have been some kind of connection still.” She sighed. “‘Commanded’…it still seems so odd to say it in the past tense.”

“Indeed, my dear,” said Nicodemus, “but we must continue to believe it was for the best.”

“We’ve little choice now, I suppose,” said Justin. “Uhm…Gwinthrayle, is something wrong?”

“I don’t believe so, Justin,” he said, turning toward the window. “But we are about to have visitors.” They all looked out upon the terrace to see nothing unusual; then, abruptly, a mhys’haspa sailed into view, circling for a landing a few feet away. And he wasn’t alone.

“I’ll be darned,” said Justin, jumping to his feet. “I knew he’d come through!” Gwinthrayle led the group to the side entrance; and once outside, everyone waved to attract the attentions of the mhys’haspa’s passengers. In short order Gwinthrayle had admitted his new guests, who were enthusiastically welcomed. Everyone immediately began bringing each other up to date.

“So once I have enough to report back,” said Norman on the way back to Johnathan’s room, “me and ‘Oscar’ out there will swing back and pick up Tallus, and then it’s back to Freethorn, while Tim stays here with you.”

“Everyone must be so anxious over there,” said Madeline. “I wish there was more we could tell you right now, but I guess it’ll have to be enough for everyone to know that nobody was hurt.”

“When we saw and heard the explosion,” said Timothy, “everyone couldn’t help imagining the worst, even me.” He took his mother’s arm, leaning his head on her shoulder.

“Well, we’re all right now, sweetheart, even if it…doesn’t look that way for all of us yet.”

Ahead of them, Gwinthrayle had returned to the room first, and now approached the others still in the hall. “Johnathan seems the same, but Lilia has apparently awakened.” Apparently? everyone wondered. They quickly saw what Gwinthrayle meant. The divan was empty, but the sliding door to the terrace was open, something he’d overlooked till just now. Just as Nicodemus reached the sliding door, Lilia met him there just coming back in, giving a small yelp of surprise, then laughing and embracing him.

“Well, Lilia,” said Nicodemus as she looked around curiously at the others, “you’re obviously feeling much better.”

“I feel…very well rested. Hi, everyone.” She gave a modest wave. “Why are we all here? And what’s wrong with Johnathan?”

“We believe he’ll be fine,” replied Gwinthrayle. “But we have some questions for you as well.” He introduced her to Birantha, telling her that he’d helped them in the vital operation they’d just finished. Madeline led Timothy to his father’s bedside, filling him in on his condition. As Gwinthrayle and Lilia sat on the divan, he asked if she felt anything unusual before she passed out.

“All I remember is…just feeling really sleepy, more than I ever did before. And…really nothing else until I woke up here. I don’t even remember dreaming. It almost seems like I did, but…” She shrugged, smiling. “All I know is, now I feel wonderful.” She got up, spinning herself around. She then looked apologetic. “Oh…I guess I shouldn’t act so happy with Johnathan like this…”

“It’s all right, dear,” said Madeline. “We’re glad you’re better now. A lot of us were concerned for you, especially Ellis and Reuben.”

Lilia approached Norman. “Can I come back to Freethorn with you when you’re ready, Norman?”

Norman paused in his note-taking. “’Fraid not, Lilia. Old ‘Oscar’—that’s sort of my pet name for the mhys’haspa—can’t handle more than two riders, and I already promised Tallus a lift back. I’ll give your best to Ellis and Reuben, though.”

“Oh. I guess I wouldn’t mind staying a little longer, then. I do like it here.”

Norman regretted not being able to stay longer himself, but he was mindful of the job at hand and resumed his note-taking. Once certain he had enough to pass on to those anxiously awaiting some good news, he passed on his best wishes for Johnathan’s recovery, and left to prepare “Oscar” for the return trip. Mhys’haspas don’t fly at night, so the approach of sunset gave his departure an added urgency.

An hour passed. With no change in Johnathan’s condition, and the sorcerers’ continued insistence that they could do nothing more for him except await his awakening, his family and friends took stock of the events of the past few days since Gwinthrayle had hosted Timothy, Lilia and his other guests in his home. Many of those events had still gone unexplained.

There was the near-accidental discovery of the recent disaster in Asarals, for which Gwinthrayle left to investigate personally after his guests had gone home. There was Lula’s trip back to Earth, where her anticipated reconciliation with her family was cut tragically short; and her abrupt recovery from her grief, accompanied by her curious compulsion to return to Earth—specifically, Thorn Valley—to fulfill some kind of mission. Johnathan and Nicodemus took her there, and then set out on their “grand tour” of Earth. Upon their return, Nicodemus met Jessica and confessed his feelings for her, after which he left on a two-day sabbatical, ostensibly to further work through the dilemma of his promise to Rollo versus his desire to stay in this body and pursue a relationship with Jessica. It was a mostly uneventful two days in his absence, save for two things: a disturbing vision of doom from Boris, and an unusually-strong windstorm which fortunately did no real damage, though it was so sudden that many had to take shelter wherever they could—including Lilia, who met a returning Nicodemus. He and Jessica agreed to keep each other company as a loving couple for the remainder of his time in Rollo’s body. The next day a mysterious malady struck down Kimball and Louann, both of whom had touched Nicodemus moments before. It cast a small amount of suspicion upon him, but it was forgotten as the ultimate effects of the “malady” came to light, with the gross physical injuries both patients had suffered in the past on their way to healing completely. No one, including Nicodemus, could explain it any way other than that of strange, unfathomable forces peculiar to this world having bestowed these favors upon them—further proof, many concluded, that they truly belonged on Lahaikshe. But events that unfolded earlier today cast doubt upon the idea. Following the return of Norman and the rest of the exchange party, he and Teresa made a terrible discovery while on mhys’haspa-back only a few miles from Freethorn—an area reduced to dust and ash, as if all life had been sucked out of it, exactly like the one in Asarals investigated by Gwinthrayle, who not coincidentally rendezvoused with Teresa and Norman at this new site of destruction. Back in Freethorn, Lula returned in a most unexpected way in equally unexpected company: Teresa’s presumed-dead mate Eric and 61 other mice suddenly appeared as if stepping through a doorway in the air. Barely had Freethorn time to even wonder how this could be when Gwinthrayle, Norman and Teresa returned. Though Gwinthrayle had urgent information to share, he urged the council to allow Eric and Lula’s story to be told first. At its conclusion, Johnathan seemed to have an epiphany of sorts, a sudden realization that the new mice were essentially his doing, and that many of the newer mouse residents of Freethorn had benefited from his influence as well. A check with the amulet definitively proved past connections, though mostly indirect ones, between Johnathan and a random sampling of the newcomer mice. His use of the amulet for this led Gwinthrayle to share with everyone the results of his investigation: mainly, that he and fellow sorcerer S’Porssig had traced the cause of the twin disasters to use of the amulet, and in the process uncovered the connection between Lahaikshe and the “Dark World” from which the amulet originated, though the full nature of that connection remained a mystery. In the midst of his story, Lilia mysteriously fell unconscious, seemingly into a deep sleep from which she couldn’t be awakened by conventional means. Gwinthrayle then shared the shocking conclusion he and S’Porssig had reached: that Johnathan must give up the amulet to avoid the risk of any more “crumbling land” disasters. Thus followed the trip to the Cavern of Change to carry out the procedure, accompanied by a newly-arrived Birantha and with a still-unconscious Lilia brought along. The procedure was only a partial success, or at least seemed so at the time. The jewel was broken down and returned to the Dark World, but the released mystical energies couldn’t be controlled entirely, despite Gwinthrayle and Birantha’s best efforts. They burst outward with enough explosive force to destroy the Cavern—save for the filament of energy that seemed to “return” to Johnathan—though everyone was shielded from physical harm, and likewise the noise of the explosion didn’t damage anyone’s hearing. Johnathan, however, fell into a comalike state like Lilia’s, and so once everyone was back on the surface, Gwinthrayle brought everyone except Tallus to his home, positive the nature of their conditions wouldn’t remain a mystery there.

“…And now Lilia’s awake like she’s just up from a nap. But Johnathan…” Justin got up from the divan and looked over to Madeline and Timothy still keeping their bedside vigil; then he walked over to the terrace door where Lilia already stood, again wearing her cloak. They both looked out upon the sunset bathing the surrounding vegetation in a rosy-orange glow. “Beautiful evening out there.”

“Mm…yes, it’s lovely, Justin.” Lilia looked up at him and smiled, then asked Gwinthrayle for permission to go outside. He gave it, and Timothy volunteered to keep her company.

“Hope you don’t mind my tagging along,” he said as they took one of the trails leading down into the gardens. “But after what happened before…well…”

Lilia just laughed. “No, it’s all right, Tim. I just felt I…had to be outside.”

“I was feeling a bit cooped up too. Don’t get me wrong; we still don’t know what’s wrong with Dad, but I do know we really needn’t worry.”

They continued chatting about those they looked forward to seeing again back home, and Timothy mentioned how Reuben appeared to be seeking out one to call his own among the new arrivals, news that pleased Lilia. Soon the path brought them close to the ravine within which lay the tsadavhi grove. They both recalled how she’d felt so strongly inclined to see it up close, and met the min’hathio inside the grove—an encounter frightening to her at first, but quickly becoming a friendly one. Each one paused to gaze in the ravine’s direction, then they looked at each other.

Lilia gave a small laugh. “I was just…thinking now, that…I don’t know, it’s like there’s more to it, more details I should remember.”

Timothy raised an eyebrow. “Wow…that’s exactly what I was thinking. And yet…we both clearly remember what happened that night: you went to the grove and met the min’hathio, you fell asleep and we found you. Now why would both of us feel that way? It may be only coincidence, but…maybe we should head back, tell Gwinthrayle about this.”

Lilia agreed, and so they retraced the path back to the house. It was within sight when they heard themselves being paged.

“We’re coming, Justin,” Timothy shouted in reply. Certain of what this meant, he took Lilia’s hand and they both dashed for the terrace door. Justin was just outside, glancing back and forth between indoors and out.

“Is Dad awake, Justin?” Timothy blurted, he and Lilia catching their breaths.

“We think that… Well, you’d best see for yourselves.”

The three entered the room to a bizarre sight. Johnathan was floating in midair above the bed, almost to the ceiling. Below him, the bed was also airborne, bumping against the wall. Around them, one object after another was also taking to the air in the same fashion. And it didn’t stop with inanimate objects.

Lilia gasped, grabbing Timothy’s arm as their feet left the floor. Her cloak was billowing out as if she’d sprouted wings. Nearby, the same was happening to Justin and Nicodemus.

“As I was saying to the others,” said Gwinthrayle to the two mice, “this is most definitely not my doing.”

“Nor mine,” said Birantha. “Obviously the energy Johnathan absorbed is…” He paused as he also became airborne. “…is playing a part here.”

Soon everyone in the room was floating as if in zero gravity; including Madeline, who was still near the bed when it began floating, but her expression betrayed no surprise. She looked resolutely at Johnathan, determined this would end with him fully awake and functional, no matter the cause of this phenomenon.

When she was at eye level with him, she reached out for his hand. Gripping it tightly, she pulled herself toward him, bringing them face to face. “Johnathan…you must hear me. Please come back to me…to all of us.” She stroked the side of his face with her other hand.

In apparent reply, Johnathan’s lips moved, but what sounds came forth were mostly wordless moans and grunts. Certain she was getting through, Madeline continued pleading for him to come out of this baffling condition.

Suddenly she felt him grow tense. Without warning, the outside wall behind them opened up, peeling back like the skin of a th’ving. Everyone, including the two sorcerers, reacted in varying degrees of surprise.

“Did…did he do that too?” asked Lilia with a gasp. She was now holding on to both Timothy and Justin.

“Apparently so,” replied Gwinthrayle, nodding.

“You know something, don’t you, Gwinthrayle?”

“Only a hunch, Justin, one I’m certain will be either confirmed or disproven once he’s awake.”

The hole in the wall reached almost from floor to ceiling before it stopped growing. Madeline redoubled her efforts to reach Johnathan, pleading more loudly for him to wake up before something else strange and possibly more dangerous happened.

Then...one eye half-opened and focused on her. “Whaaa…ungh!” Johnathan uttered, then his eyes flew open wide. “Ma…Maddie? Wha…where…”

“Yes, Johnathan, I’m—” Madeline completed her sentence with a yelp of surprise as both of them—as well as everything and everyone else in the room—returned to earth. The Brisbys, still directly over the bed, fell back into it, almost bouncing off but still holding on to each other. The others mostly managed to land on their feet. It was a scene that would have been amusing if not for the uncertainty of the situation. The others recovered quickly and approached the bed.

“Oh, Johnathan, thank God you’re all right,” said Madeline as they embraced. “Even if Tim said you’d be all right, I couldn’t help but worry.” They both sat upright on the edge of the bed.

Johnathan looked around the room, still disoriented but recognizing his surroundings. “Why…why are we here? We were…in the Cavern…”

“You’d fallen unconscious, my friend,” said Gwinthrayle. “So bringing you here seemed best.”

Johnathan acknowledged everyone, including Timothy, who embraced his father and explained how they’d seen the explosion in Freethorn, and how he’d been brought here on mhys’haspa-back by Norman, who then returned to Freethorn with Tallus.

“What do you remember, Johnathan?” asked Madeline.

He closed his eyes, rubbing his forehead. “We were all in...the Cavern, and Gwinthrayle and Birantha were…” He inhaled deeply. “It’s really gone, isn’t it? The Stone?” Everyone nodded, and Madeline showed him the now-empty pendant. “And…the energies from it were contained in that globe, but they started leaking out, and…there was a bright flash right in front of my eyes, and…that’s it. A complete blank until I…” He closed his eyes again, then opened them wide. “I was in the air, wasn’t I? And you were too, Maddie!”

“All of us were, Johnathan,” said Nicodemus. “We believe you had absorbed a portion of the amulet’s energies, and it interacted with your subconscious, causing the floating effect…and then some.”

Johnathan suddenly became aware of an unfamiliar “openness” in this otherwise familiar room. He turned around, gaping at the sight of the calm, clear evening over the adjoining terrace instead of that of a solid wall. “Gwinthrayle, is this a…a remodeling project of yours?”

“I’m afraid not. We regret that we were unable to fully contain the amulet’s energies; and yet, from what Timothy has indicated, and what I myself have suspected, the results may ultimately prove to be a boon, for others as well as yourself.”

Johnathan continued staring at the hole in the wall. “That’s what hit me, wasn’t it? And…then what happened?” Everyone brought him up to date, from the subsequent explosion that destroyed the Cavern up to the bizarre phenomena minutes ago.

Johnathan shook his head in disbelief. “The Cavern…gone, destroyed? And now…” He stood up, looking back through the hole in the wall. “I did this?” He gazed back and forth, reaching out to touch one of the peeled-back sections.

“Apparently so,” said Nicodemus, hand on his old friend’s shoulder. “However unconsciously.”

“What we believe,” added Gwinthrayle, “is that the protective qualities the Stone bestowed upon you, as well as Madeline, had conditioned you, physically and psychologically, for being able to contain those energies released from it; without adverse effects, we hope.”

“As for their effects on you,” said Birantha, “we believe that if you concentrate in the same fashion as you did with the amulet, you will emerge with a full understanding of those effects.”

Johnathan turned and looked upon his family and friends silently; then, nodding, he sat on the bed and closed his eyes. The air grew thick with anticipation over the next few minutes, during which hardly a word was spoken. Timothy, to little surprise, continued looking as hopeful as ever, even eager, and some wished his ability could be more specific in giving details of an outcome.

Finally, Johnathan’s eyes opened. Still no one spoke; including Johnathan, who only smiled, got to his feet, and returned to the hole in the wall. He raised his arms and took a deep breath. Everyone gasped to behold what followed. The hole was closing back up, the peeled-back sections now “unpeeling” so that in seconds, the wall had been restored to its original form, with no visible cracks or anything to indicate that there had ever been any change at all. Johnathan turned to face the many surprised expressions; including that of Timothy, who, for all his confidence, still couldn’t know the specific outcome.

“I know,” said Johnathan simply. “I know how I was affected, and…it definitely is a good thing.” He then rose in the air again, and this time all knew it was entirely voluntary. He held out one hand, and soft white light seemed to emanate directly from his palm. He acknowledged the looks of disbelief and wonder that prevailed in the room, except for the two sorcerers, for whom it was more a case of having suspicions confirmed. The light ceased and he returned to floor level. “I guess I shouldn’t show off so much; but then, I think I’m going to be like a kid with a new toy for a while to come.”

“I think even I’m beginning to see what that new toy is,” said Justin. “The capabilities of the Stone—at least some of them—are within you now, yours to command as if you still possessed it.”

“It’s true, isn’t it, Johnathan?” Madeline clasped his shoulders. “Then…it’s as if we haven’t lost the Stone at all!”

“But,” ventured Timothy, “what about the reason Dad had to give it up? If he uses these powers, won’t they still affect the barrier to the Dark World?”

“It was the physical presence of the amulet on Lahaikshe,” explained Gwinthrayle, “coupled with its being the instrument for those energies, that were responsible for that effect.”

“But with Johnathan commanding those energies,” added Birantha, “there is no longer a connection to the Dark World mineral that the amulet was composed of, and therefore any such further destruction should no longer be a concern.”

“It’s true,” reported Johnathan, “just from my bit of meditation, I know that…my awareness of these capabilities is so much greater than when we had the Stone. And from that, I can tell you the extent that they’ll go to, the effects they’ll have and won’t have… I know I’m rambling, but it’s just…so much, such a big change, that it’s hard to put into words.”

“Well, you should have plenty of time in which to do so, my friend,” said Gwinthrayle, “though it may be best for you to stay the night here. Further observation may be necessary, given the sudden onset of this new condition.” Though anxious to return home, Johnathan agreed, and the others agreed to stay on as well.

All had eaten little or nothing since well before their arrival here, so Gwinthrayle led his guests to the dining room. After their late dinner, it would be a while before anyone felt like sleeping, since they weren’t finished discussing this day’s extraordinary events. Even after everyone had been assigned quarters for the night, all of Gwinthrayle’s guests continued their discussion in Johnathan and Madeline’s room for another hour. After the others had gone to their rooms, the Brisbys continued lying awake a while longer, neither ready for sleep yet.

“This is the second important event that’s happened to us inside this room,” observed Johnathan as he stroked his wife’s arm and shoulder, as her head lay firmly against his breastbone. “First was our reunion two and a half years ago…and now this. It’s got to be the biggest single change in my life, and coming on the heels of…finding out that I can replicate my advanced characteristics in other mice, instead of just you. I still can’t quite wrap my brain around that concept. And yet…overall, I don’t feel any different. Not much physically, although I still feel a little weak, but Gwinthrayle says that should pass by morning. And emotionally…well, I’m even more confident now than a couple hours ago that I’ll be able to deal with these new abilities without anything like those two little mishaps. Anyway, Gwinthrayle says those were due to my system not fully assimilating these energies. I still don’t know the full extent of what I can do, but…what’s most important is how I feel about my friends, my family…and you, most of all. I’ll always love you, Maddie, until one of us takes a final breath.”

“Oh, Johnathan…I remember how we’d talked like this after our reunion and we found out…all that you’d done for me. Well, I believe that just as much now, if not more. No matter what happens, I just couldn’t stop loving you.”

Madeline pulled herself up to Johnathan’s face level. They pressed bodies closer together, nuzzling, kissing and caressing each other, quickly reaffirming that the strong, passionate feelings they’d held for each other all these years were as constant as ever, and that not even a change of this degree would make a difference.

Chapter 51 - The truth reemerges

It had been quite a first night for the newcomer mice. Though all had been assigned temporary quarters, not everyone was comfortable with them right away; and so some of them had opted for accommodations in more natural spots like burrows and hollow logs. A few even felt adventurous enough to put to the test the assurances of Lula, and many others, of how safe it was here, and so they spent the night “camping out” in the open, under the stars. No matter where anyone spent the night, for most sleep didn’t come right away, with everyone excited to be in such a new and different living situation. For some others as well, sleep came with some difficulty, in the wake of Tallus and Norman’s return and update on the situation “out there.” Some amount of anxiety was inevitable; though there was relief that Lilia appeared to have recovered fully, especially with Reuben and Ellis, Johnathan’s status was still up in the air. By morning at the earliest, Norman had reported, they should know more.

So it was that a small group had reconvened atop the east side of the Rooftop before sunrise. If there was any sign of worry, it didn’t show; rather, everyone seemed in great high spirits as they discussed the previous day’s events and what may yet be in store. Some picked up the threads of conversation from the previous evening.

“I guess it’s not so bad for most of us,” said Martin, “but what about the new mice? Some of them might decide they don’t like it here and want to return to Earth.”

“We still don’t know yet if that’s impossible,” reminded Arthur.

“I know, and there are worse things, and all that. Personally, I know I’d miss being able to visit other worlds, like Tikinda. And there’ll always be things about Earth that I’d miss.”

“I would too,” said Michael, “but there’s a lot of this world we haven’t seen. I know I’m looking forward to seeing more.”

Conversation turned to Johnathan, and how well he was doing. All Norman could report last night was that he seemed to be in no danger, and that they only needed to wait for him to wake up. There was also much talk of the planned goodwill trip to the lands west of Freethorn. Presently others joined the group, including Isabella and her children. She had been especially relieved to hear of Justin’s safety, after witnessing the explosion from afar, and now they were ready to give him a big welcome home.

Lucy, meanwhile, pestered Norman for more details on his and Timothy’s flight last night, and for when he’d be able to take her for a ride. Others discussed Kimball’s and Louann’s miraculous healings and what else this world held in store. But no matter the topic, everyone paused occasionally to look to the east, hoping to see their friends and loved ones returning by some unorthodox, but very welcome method. There was no real anxiety in the group, but there was a growing sense of impatience, which the younger ones were most apt to express aloud. What was taking so long?

“I never would have imagined,” said Janice, looking out over the plain, “that coming here would mean so much more than just having a safer place to live. To think that…this whole world could have been in danger from Johnathan using that stone.”

“Well, they say it’s passed now,” said Dupree, “though I’m getting a bit impatient myself.” After a pause he added, “Mother…are you still…you know, kind of angry with Johnathan? You know, after what we learned yesterday?”

Janice sighed. “I guess not. If it’s true that he had no idea what he was doing to…to us, then…I can forgive him, I suppose. Not that there’s really anything to forgive.”

Last night, Janice, Sibelle and Dupree had discussed their reactions to Johnathan’s so-important revelation. They hadn’t the chance to discuss it with him directly before he and the others had to leave; and there’d been some speculation over whether or not he’d really been unaware of this capability. There was no real anger or resentment, and in the end they agreed to make time to discuss it with him the next day, when they had the chance; provided, of course, he would return safely.

Dupree looked over to Sibelle, whose attentions seemed to be elsewhere. Further down the guardrail, Norman and Reuben were talking, and Dupree could clearly hear a sigh from his sister.

“So…” he said, giving Sibelle a nudge, “which one?”

She turned with a start. “I don’t know what you mean.” But it was obvious from her tone that she did.

“It’s Norman, isn’t it? I saw you last night, you couldn’t take your eyes off him.”

“You’re always exaggerating.” Sibelle nudged him back. “You come up with stuff right out of thin air.”

A flash of white light, bright yet not painful to look at, seemed to reply to her. It was enough to startle everyone, but for many it was also familiar, and the very welcome sight of those who now stood in its wake made it more so.

“Wow, Johnathan, you really did it,” the one rat among the group said. “All by yourself.” Justin immediately locked eyes with Isabella, and she and their children rushed to greet him.

The Brisby children did likewise with Johnathan, Madeline and Timothy, but their joy and relief soon gave way to confusion. “It’s really true about the Stone, isn’t it, Dad?” asked Martin. “And what did Justin mean, ‘all by yourself’?”

“Just like he said,” said Timothy, coming out of an embrace with Lucy. Johnathan allowed Nicodemus to explain what happened, after which Johnathan gave a small demonstration, levitating a foot into the air. He asked Arthur to pick up a small pebble and toss it at him. It never touched him, instead deflecting off an invisible barrier. He returned to earth amid numerous oohs and aahs.

“So,” said Martin carefully, “if you can do that much, and since you did bring everyone here with this power…then what about transporting between dimensions?”

“That’s one I haven’t put to the test yet, Martin. But I can tell you it would be limited, nowhere near the scale of what the Stone could pull off. Like maybe with one passenger, that sort of thing.”

“No more moving huge tracts of real estate and population, in other words,” said Tallus. “But that’s a task we can only hope won’t prove to be necessary ever again.”

“I couldn’t have put it better,” said Johnathan, taking Madeline’s arm. They agreed to schedule a general meeting as soon as possible to bring everyone else up to date, and so the group prepared to go back down below.

Some among them, though, chose to stay a while longer. Nearly unnoticed among the other reunions, two others had stolen away to a more secluded area of the Rooftop, one with a flower garden that afforded them a degree of privacy. There, they spent several minutes just embracing silently, needing no more than each other’s nearness.

“Oh, Lilia,” Ellis finally said, “I just can’t tell you…what a relief it is that you’re back to normal.” He pulled back to gaze upon her, caressing her face with both hands. “After all else that’s happened to you, I just hope that…that’s all. I love you, and I don’t want anything to get in the way of our happiness.”

Lilia just nodded her agreement and told Ellis she loved him, nuzzling around his neck and ear.

When next they spoke, they recalled how, the day before the trip to Gwinthrayle’s, they’d met close to this spot and Lilia had gotten her first good look at the view across the red plain, and they’d discussed how enthralled she’d been with watching Karen nurse her babies, and their own future plans. They discussed these plans anew.

“It’s funny, isn’t it? We’re little more than kids ourselves, and here we are talking about spending our lives together, and having children.” Indeed, though Ellis was, with his litter-mates Bertie and Lucy, as physically mature as human children of around 14 years, and Lilia only a little older, they were in many ways more mature emotionally; and these two now truly believed they’d overcome earlier misgivings over whether they were truly ready to commit themselves to each other and the children they’d have together.

“I know I really feel that…I am past all those strange things, and they’ll never happen again,” said Lilia. “There’s nothing to keep you and me from…being together.”

Ellis nodded, smiling. “And if something does come up…well, look at Johnathan and Madeline. After all they’ve been through, they’re still together, and their love is still…so strong, so deep. We should be able to…to meet challenges the same way, whatever they are.”

Lilia just smiled, embracing him again. Ellis showed her how to kiss, which she hadn’t learned before, and they did so silently, tenderly, for nearly a minute; and afterwards, they recalled the trip to Gwinthrayle’s, including her encounter with the min’hathio.

“I almost forgot,” Lilia told him. “Last night, Timothy and I went near that spot again, and…we both got the feeling that…there was more that we should…know, or remember, about that. We were going to tell Gwinthrayle about it, but I think it slipped both our minds. It might…not have been important anyway. But still…”

“Hmm…there’s still so much else that’s got everyone stumped, that doesn’t surprise me. Dad and Louann recovering like they did, and those powers Eric had, which he thinks something here gave to him…and that’s like Bertie and Tara, too, having a baby together; and Johnathan suddenly realizing that he was…making other mice like us without knowing it. And now he has all these new abilities. Strange stuff, all right, but it doesn’t scare me. It’s like so many are saying: it just means that we’re welcome here, we belong here. Just like…I belong here, with you.”

They embraced and kissed again, sinking back into the greenery, this time allowing their senses to carry them further, oblivious to their surroundings, needing only to lose themselves in each other.

This general meeting proved significant not only for its main purpose of briefing everyone on Johnathan’s new abilities, but also for the presence of Freethorn’s newest residents, who were allowed plenty of time to voice any questions or concerns they might have. There were many questions about the history of this colony all the way back to the days at the NIMH lab, and even before then, details of which had only been given in small doses thus far. So a history class, to be headed by Tallus, was scheduled for later, which all the newcomer mice were encouraged to attend. This would be followed by walking tours of Freethorn, inside and out. But before any of that would happen, one previously-scheduled event would take place, one that some suspected would grow to proportions greater than originally planned.

Kimball had been well enough to attend this meeting, and though he still couldn’t walk on his new leg, he was willing and eager to show everyone how much further it had progressed. It almost matched the length of the normal left one, and fur was starting to come back in. Muscle growth was still slow, but it was far less sensitive to touch than yesterday, and it was estimated that with a few days’ physical therapy, it would be fully functional. “We may never know,” Kimball had said in an emotional address to the assemblage, “who or what was responsible for these miracles, this and the restoration of Louann’s sight. But I know I’d be comfortable in not knowing, even for the rest of my life, if it meant our continuing to live in freedom as we have been.”

After most had already filed out of the meeting hall, some, including the entire Brisby family, stayed a little longer.

“It’s really true, isn’t it, Daddy? You can close your eyes, and you can see things just like you could with the Stone?”

“It’s true, Cynthia. And it was really only a few minutes before the meeting began that I realized I could do it.” Indeed, Johnathan had taken everyone, including his family, by surprise when he’d brought up this particular new ability to everyone. As proof, he accurately described, for those who volunteered, details of what they had experienced in the recent past: details of one’s particular work project two days ago, one’s child doing an acrobatic routine, one goofing off a little while working in the fields, and other details only those individuals would know. It was especially convincing when one of the newcomer mice confirmed Johnathan’s description of what he’d been doing the day Eric had found him and brought him to the Safe House.

“This almost makes you like a seer, someone with second sight,” said Justin.

“Except it’s only visual, right, Dad?” said Martin. “You can see these things, but there’s no sound to go along with them.”

“That’s right. Just as it was with the Stone.”

“And only you can see them,” said Madeline. “Unlike looking at the amulet’s face.”

“Boy, that seems a little unfair,” said Martin. “Guess we shouldn’t complain, though.”

“True,” said Johnathan, “but I get the feeling that might change in some way, after I’ve been doing this a while and have had more practice. But that’s for another day. Somebody here has a big day ahead of her.” He looked at Cynthia, smiling.

She got up and gave him a hug. “I guess…I’d better go prepare.” She smiled at Nicodemus and left the hall, accompanied by two of her rat friends.

“Our little Cynthia,” said Madeline, sighing. “It seems like only yesterday she was playing hide-and-seek and carrying her doll everywhere.”

“But she’s always been sure of what she wants,” said Teresa.

“And she definitely wants Michael,” added Martin with a chuckle. Teresa gave him a “tsk” and a half-hearted swat on the arm. “What? I’m not wrong, am I? They’re all but married now, they spend so much time together.”

“But this is what both of them wanted,” said Timothy, “to have Nicodemus be the one to make it official.”

“It does leave me out,” said Justin with a chuckle, “but I couldn’t think of denying him the honor.” Lucy leaned over to whisper something in Timothy’s ear, and then both of them excused themselves.

“It looks like somebody else has some definite plans,” said Karen, winking at Martin.

“Now let’s not sound like old gossips here,” said Jessica, though she did wonder if the young couple had a genuine surprise in store.

As they walked the corridor leading to the main entrance hall, Cynthia and her friends went over the details of this afternoon’s ceremony. Though it was expected to be fairly low-key, all knew there would be festivities aplenty afterward, celebrating not only the new couple’s official union but also yesterday’s resolution to the crisis which potentially threatened all life on Lahaikshe; and, last but hardly least, to continue welcoming the newcomer mice to their new home. But for now, there were last-minute details to attend to. The planning thus far hadn’t been especially elaborate, as far as making the ceremony like a human wedding, though some details were favored: the flowers, some of the wording; and the custom of the bride and groom not seeing each other until the ceremony. They knew it was based on an old superstition but decided to humor it for fun, though it meant staying as far from each other as possible during the general meeting.

“So, you’ll be moving in with Michael tonight?”

“Sure will, Nat.” Cynthia crossed her arms, hugging herself. “Oh, it’s going to be great, our own place at last!”

“And you’re gaining all these new neighbors,” said Mary Louise. “Isn’t it amazing how quick things can change?”

“It is amazing. They’re already getting ready to draw up plans for quarters for all the new mice.”

“Speaking of big changes,” said Natalie, pointing subtly, “here’s someone who’s had a few.”

Coming up the hall the opposite way were Lilia and Ellis, arms around each other’s waists, looking almost oblivious to anyone but each other. Many had noticed how they’d slipped into the general meeting a few minutes after it had started, and throughout it looking much as they did now, intoxicated with each other’s presence. They both waved hello at Cynthia and her friends as they passed by.

“They are such a cute couple,” observed Natalie.

“And not one I’d have expected a few weeks ago,” said Cynthia. “When I first met her and Reuben, she hardly said a word, though I could tell right away she wanted to know all about where I came from.” They watched as Lilia did a perfect cartwheel. Ellis tried to do likewise and flopped down onto his side. They both laughed undaunted as she helped him up, the two kissing before moving on.

Mary Louise sighed. “They’ll be just like you and Michael before long.”

Cynthia nodded. “I think they’ve already arrived. Tim and Lucy too.”

“Look who’s arrived now, Cynthia,” said Natalie. “Your old buddy.”

Behind them came Herbert, moving along very purposefully, greeting Cynthia and her friends as he recognized them.

“Say, Herb,” said Natalie as he drew up to them. “I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but there’s certainly an awful lot more of ‘them’ around here lately…”

“Come on, Nat, give him a break,” said Cynthia. “We’re cool now.”

But Herbert was unfazed. “Sure, I’ve noticed. Now if you’ll excuse me, I’ve got some people to meet.”

In a masterpiece of timing, a group of the newcomer mice approached from the opposite end of the hall. “There you are, Herbert!” said Janice, leading the pack. “I thought you might have forgotten us.”

“No way, Janice,” the young rat replied with a remarkable degree of familiarity. “I wouldn’t have missed this for the world.” He looked back at Cynthia and her friends with a knowing expression. As they looked on astonished, the younger mice in the group rushed to him delightedly as if he were a favorite uncle. He hoisted one of them to his shoulders and they all walked off, two other children taking his hands.

Mary Louise shook her head. “I didn’t know he joined the liaison committee.”

“I wouldn’t have guessed it either,” said Cynthia, “But I guess it goes to show, anybody can change.”

“Anybody can be wrong, too,” said Natalie, “about somebody else.” She shrugged, and the three resumed discussing Cynthia’s wedding plans.

“Dad? Are you awake?” Jessica stroked Kimball’s shoulder.

“Oohf…oh, Jessie! I must’ve dozed off.” He looked around at the familiar confines of the medical ward.

“I shouldn’t wonder, after all that excitement last night and this morning. A bit too much too soon, if you ask me. And Sam tells me you were pretty restless last night. But I guess we all were.” Jessica was unable to stifle a yawn herself. “I wish I hadn’t said that.” She laughed and added, “Anyway, you have some visitors, if you feel up to it.”

He did, so after a little preparation Jessica let his visitors in: his oldest grandchildren Stuart and Shirley and their friends, twins Torrance and Hazel. Delighted as always to have any visitors, especially children, he greeted each with a big hug. They talked animatedly about their new friends and neighbors, Michael and Cynthia’s wedding only a couple of hours away, and Kimball’s erstwhile roommate.

“Boy, Aunt Louann just can’t get enough of looking around at everything and everybody,” said Stuart.

“Well, she is seeing it all for the first time,” Kimball reminded them.

“We just met her on the way up here,” said Shirley. “She bear-hugged all four of us and kept saying how beautiful we all were.”

“I think I’ll be kind o’ glad when she gets over it,” added Stuart. “I mean, it’s great she can see and everything, but, you know.”

“Oh, I know, Stuart. But let’s allow her her joie de vivre. She’s entitled to it.” All the while they’d talked, Kimball kept his leg covered, though it was obvious his young visitors wanted to see it up close. So he obliged them, drawing back the sheet and taking in their astonishment.

“Wow, it’s gotten so much bigger since last night,” observed Shirley.

“Or even since the meeting,” added Torrance. “I’m sure of it.”

“Can we touch it, Grandpa?” asked Hazel. Kimball liked to consider himself grandfather to all the mouse children, not just his biological relations, so he generously allowed any of them to call him “Grandpa” if he or she wished.

“You certainly may, sweetie.” All four children laid hands on the limb carefully. He demonstrated how strong it had become by lifting it off the bed for a few seconds; still not for as long as he could his good left one, but there was no reason to doubt this new right leg would soon function equally well, at which time he knew he’d be walking out of the ward with no aid from anyone or anything, as he’d already vowed. He also showed off his left ear and his tail, both of which had by now regrown so much new tissue that they appeared completely normal.

“I know they’re saying it’s…something in this world’s essence or something,” said Shirley. “But I still wish we could…have someone we could come up to and say: ‘Thank you. We’re really glad you did this for us. It’s a beautiful thing.’” The others nodded their agreement.

“I know, love,” said Kimball. “It’s strange, but as I said this morning, it may have to be enough to just be able to say ‘Thank you, world.’”

“Yeah, I guess.” Shirley touched the limb again. Stuart did the same. “I still wonder, though…” As she said this, the siblings’ hands touched.

As one, they both drew back, hands still touching as if unable to let go, expressions identical as if they’d both experienced a sudden shock.

“Hey, guys,” said Torrance, “what’s going on?”

Again, as one, they seemed to recover. “Uh, nothing,” said Stuart. “Nothing really big. I just remembered…there was, uh…some homework I wanted to get done before the wedding.”

“Yeah, me too,” said Shirley, nodding emphatically. “Yeah, since we got the rest of the day off from classes ’n’ all…”

“Oh! Well, do what you have to, then,” said Kimball cheerfully. “We’ll see you kids at the ceremony.” The two excused themselves and left.

“That was kind o’ weird,” said Torrance. “Just taking off so suddenly…”

“They know their priorities,” said Kimball. “I’ll bet you two have a little homework yourselves.”

“Some, sure, but it’s no big deal.” Hazel shrugged.

Jessica came in from the next room, curious at the twins’ sudden exit. When told the reason, she expressed admiration for their improved study habits. Their friends continued chatting with “Grandpa,” until Kimball decided he needed to rest up a bit more for the big day ahead.

In one of the corridors a short way from the medical department, two siblings paused. “Okay, this looks good.” Stuart steered his sister toward an out-of-the-way hidey-hole under a curved staircase, where they both sat down. Once certain they were out of sight of passing traffic, they began to talk.

“Okay, Stu. You…you go first.”

“Okay.” Stuart breathed in deep. “It’s like…I knew what did it. Or, I guess, who did it, who gave Grandpa his new leg, and Louann her sight. A spirit or something.”

Shirley drew in breath. “That’s exactly the impression I got, just as you touched me. It’s like…it took you and me together, to…to understand it.”

“Yeah…to get to the truth.” They both paused, gathering their thoughts, both realizing that it was their mutual touch that had triggered this event. But more than that, they both felt, somehow, that they had been aware of this apparent truth about Kimball’s condition, but then they had…what? Forgotten it? How could they possibly forget something like this?

Without another word, they joined hands again. Both of them gasped, clenching eyes shut as a jumble of memories, or what seemed to be, filled their minds. It took only a few seconds; then they both opened their eyes, releasing each other’s hand.

They could only look at each other at first. Both felt short of breath, a little light-headed. Shirley said, “Oh, Stu…did you…see all that?”

“Yeah, Sis.” They embraced, leaning their heads on each other’s shoulder, and were silent a minute or so more.

“There was…a storm, wasn’t there?” Shirley finally said. “Bigger, stronger than the one we had…or did we have it for real?”

“Yeah, it…I don’t know. There was a strong wind, it blew down a limb, and it…it…”

“It hurt you…bad, real bad. But then…it’s like we found out it didn’t, not really.”

“It doesn’t make sense. It’s like we forgot it, and so did everyone else. And there was that…big, weird snake, too, wasn’t there?”

“Yeah! It was glowing, dripping fire…and those other weird things…”

“That we were able to just…make go away. The snake, I mean. And then there’s Lilia…”

Shirley gasped. “Yeah…and she was glowing really strange, and calling herself…” She paused, and then they said together: “Elle.”

“And she was telling this really long story,” Stuart continued, “about who and what she was, and all she’d done.”

“Yes! To Johnathan, and…and Eric! She gave them the ability to do those things!”

“Shh! Let’s keep it down,” Stuart whispered as he took a cautious peek from their hiding place.

Shirley waited until they’d silently confirmed that no one had overheard. “Yeah, you’re right, Stu. I shouldn’t have gotten so loud. But we should tell somebody, shouldn’t we?”

Stuart scratched the back of his head. “Yeah…Mom, at least, I guess.”

“Or maybe Johnathan…or Nicodemus. We gotta tell somebody. This is big, too big to keep to ourselves.”

“Maybe…maybe we could…I mean, for now.”

“What do you mean?”

“I don’t know. Maybe…it wouldn’t matter if we kept it to ourselves, at least until…the right time.”

“Yeah...I think I see what you mean, Stu. Maybe…just as all this came to us out of the blue like this, maybe we’ll also know…when the time is right to tell somebody.”

“And who to tell. Maybe…he’ll also know, just like we did.”

“Yeah. It’s a pretty awesome secret, but…it just feels right to keep it for now.”

“Hey! I’ve got another idea.” Again making sure no one overheard, Stuart continued. “We told Grandpa an’ them we had homework, right? Let’s make like we really do, but we’ll really be getting this all written down.”

“That’s a great idea, Stu! Then when we do tell somebody, we’ll just give ’em our ‘report,’ and it’ll be all there.”

They discussed further details before leaving their hiding place, wanting to get this project started right away. As they set out for the library, they paused to look around at the surrounding rooms and corridors of the Rat colony, for a moment getting a sense that it was all not quite as it appeared; then they moved on.

Chapter 52 - Ceremonies

Nicodemus yawned and stretched limbs. Well, it’s almost time, he thought as he sat upright. He looked around at the surrounding branches. He’d known since the day he’d first discovered it that this was the perfect place for solitary reflection, though this was really only the second time he’d visited the spot. Indeed, he hadn’t felt the need to, especially since he and Jessica had found each other. But considering what he was being called upon to do today—even though he’d gladly volunteered for it—he’d wondered how he might deal with it afterwards. Now, having decided it wasn’t so critical an issue, he knew it was time to prepare; and, accordingly, stood up from the hollow at the base of the limb and began making his way down the trunk tail first.

“It’s about that time,” came the greeting when Nicodemus was about four feet from the ground.

“Indeed it is, my good lad,” said Nicodemus, dropping the rest of the way down on all fours and then straightening.

“I still say,” said Brutus, “that you’re enjoying the irony a bit too much.” He chuckled. This irony was especially apparent looking at these two side by side now, that the smaller of the two could be the father of the other, much larger one, in every way but biologically.

“Be that as it may, Brutus, I do appreciate your sticking by to see that I was not disturbed.” They moved on toward the site of the ceremony beneath the big burr oak, quickly encountering others along the way, many of them wrapping up walking tours of Freethorn for the newcomer mice. Nicodemus explained for their benefit how and why he was officiating over this wedding. Most understood by now the reason for his leaving so soon, and the highly unusual way in which he was leaving; but many felt as troubled as longtime Freethorners that it had to be so.

The decorating committee had worked all morning, and now those who had arrived early were admiring the results. Wildflowers from all over Freethorn had been gathered and now adorned nearly everything in sight. As in past ceremonies, an archway which would play a simple but meaningful role had been fashioned from cornstalks and also florally decorated. There hadn’t been any wedding ceremonies performed since Nicodemus’s arrival, but he’d been thoroughly briefed on past ones; and he was pleased at the degree with which they’d emulated human ceremonies, so he was especially looking forward to playing the lead role in this one.

Following the return of Johnathan and his party from Gwinthrayle’s last night and the promise of further disasters averted, the council had agreed the news warranted making this day a special one of celebration, though a decision hadn’t yet been made to make it an annual holiday, like the one nearly two weeks before marking the day of Nicodemus’s return. At any rate, classes were dismissed early and all work was suspended in late morning; and the event taking place beneath the big burr oak was only the beginning of the day’s festivities.

“Isn’t this all just amazing, Boris?” Seelah sighed as she and Boris strolled about the site. “It’s so lovely.”

“They’ve outdone themselves, all right. And I’d be willing to bet we’ll have more ceremonies like this after Nicodemus leaves us.”

“Oh…you mean no one will want it done simple anymore. Not just a couple pledging themselves to each other, or…Boris?”

Boris had stopped in his tracks, staring straight ahead. Seelah knew well not to interrupt what was surely happening to him, but couldn’t help feeling some uneasiness, in light of recent events. But after only about ten seconds, he blinked and looked at Seelah smiling, and she knew immediately this was no vision of doom he’d just experienced.

“What was it? What did you see?” She quickly noticed, though, that her curiosity was shared by others who’d witnessed his sudden trance.

Boris noticed as well. “Sorry, everyone, but this one’s private.” He led Seelah away, and once out of earshot of anyone else, said, “Actually, it’s not that private, but…if this is true, I wouldn’t want to spoil the surprise.” He described his vision to her, and she readily agreed that it should be kept under wraps for the time being.

Nicodemus stood and watched as the steady stream of openly-invited wedding guests poured in, some taking their seats in the chairs brought out, others standing or sitting in little groups on the ground, on nearby rocks and logs, and even up in the lowermost branches of the oak. As usual, he gladly obliged any who wished to chat, but when Jessica approached him everyone knew to allow them their privacy.

“I know you’ve been looking forward to this, but…oh, I’m not sure how to say this…you’ll be…starting off Michael and Cynthia on their new life together, when you…you and I…”

“I know, Jessica. But I am already reconciled to the irony of it. And…though our present relationship is something I believe in with all my heart, I have always placed the needs of others before my own. Seeing these young ones off on this new chapter of their lives…is the single greatest thing I can imagine doing in these few days we have…next to loving you, of course.”

They embraced. After about a minute, Nicodemus again regarded the growing crowd and knew it was time to start the ceremony. Jessica took her seat with the rest of her family, and Nicodemus moved to the front of the flowered arch. The buzz of conversation eased, and the music began playing. Kevin and Lol had selected one of their original pieces for the ceremony, one known perhaps the best by Justin, for whom Kevin had “previewed” an early version of it in the days leading up to the move to Lahaikshe.

It fit the mood perfectly now, especially as the tuxedo-clad groom began strolling up the center aisle. Michael silently acknowledged everyone’s greetings as he approached the arch. Once there, the bride followed suit, holding a bouquet and wearing a simple but elegant white gown, smiling radiantly.

Many and varied were the types of wedding ceremonies conducted in this community since the tradition began over two years ago. Some closely emulated those in human society, while others were given a more individual stamp; though all had in common the flowered arch, the exchange of vows, the officiating by Justin or occasionally Johnathan—and in this one case, Nicodemus. Easily the most individualized of them was the one performed for Boris and Seelah, who, profoundly impressed by the first one they’d attended here, prevailed upon Justin to make things official for them as well. They and everyone attending wore no clothing to the event, the bride and groom believing it an appropriate nod to their origins and a fitting tribute to Doris’s memory. Rules on clothing, to begin with, were never as strict as in human society, and so virtually no one raised objections. Many saw it as a way to symbolize their break from Earth while acknowledging the happy couple’s own beginnings.

Today’s ceremony was largely conventional; though one common human tradition had been all but done away with here: the father of the bride “giving away” his daughter to the groom. It had been widely agreed that its origins were completely irrelevant to them. Accordingly, Johnathan was seated with the rest of the family, with not a dry eye among them.

With both bride and groom side by side, Nicodemus began: “My friends…we are gathered here today to celebrate the union, in the bonds of matrimony, of Michael and Cynthia. When they first asked me to officiate their union, I was greatly honored, of course, for this privilege; but events transpiring since then have given this day a new resonance, a deeper meaning. Those events—and their resolution—mean a new beginning, a brighter future for all of us, all our peoples, not just for these two whose love and continued happiness we are here to celebrate. Let this day also remind us that love should always be our motivation, the driving force behind all our actions—the most important thing, if not the one thing, that will guide us into that brighter future.” Nicodemus placed hands on the couple’s shoulders, and they faced each other.

Cynthia breathed in deep, a little nervous but receiving silent encouragement as she gazed into her betrothed’s eyes. “Before you or any of your family arrived here, I never thought…much about love, about…falling in love with anyone. It wasn’t something that I’d…” She laughed, still a bit nervous. “Oh, I’m sorry, I shouldn’t have…”

“It’s all right, Cynthia,” said Michael softly, hand under her chin. “You’re doing fine.”

She nodded, collecting herself. “When your father told us all about his children, what they were like…I wanted so much to meet and get to know all of them. But when he told me about you…I found it was you I wanted to meet especially. I still can’t quite explain it, but…when we did meet, it’s as if everything fell into place. Whether it was fate, destiny…now I can’t imagine us not finding each other, not falling in love and…finding out how perfect we are for each other. I love you, Michael…with all my heart and soul.” She took his hand.

“When I first came here,” Michael began, “I had just gone through a period where…I wasn’t sure if I’d ever find love. Then this…beautiful, kind, generous creature took my hand and showed me around my new home, and told me all about herself, her life…and it awakened feelings in me that I knew, deep down, that I always had. And now…well, to make a long story short, now I’m standing here, before the one I’m…prepared to spend the rest of my life with. And I’m hoping…that it will be a long, long story. I love you, Cynthia. I want you and me to be mates for life.” He took her hand so that now they held each other’s hands with arms crossed. They both looked toward Nicodemus.

Briefly, he found himself wishing it were Jessica and himself standing there, preparing to start a new life together. His eyes met hers where she sat with her children, certain—hoping?—she was having the same thought. Again came the question of whether Rollo would have the same feelings for her after he’d gone, with half of him wishing it would come true and the other resenting the idea. Then he forced his attention back to the beaming couple before him.

“My children…my friends. You have vowed to pledge yourselves to one another for the rest of your days. Are you prepared to take the next step?”

“We are,” came the reply.

“Then, Michael, son of Patricia and Kimball, and Cynthia, daughter of Johnathan and Madeline…I now pronounce you husband and wife. And now…cross the threshold into your new life together.” Nicodemus stepped aside to allow the pair, with arms still crossed, to walk under the flowered arch. This simple but touching ceremony completed, they stopped, looking excitedly at each other, and embraced and kissed, applause and cheers meeting their ears; along with more tears, especially from the parents of the bride and groom.

Nicodemus then gave a nod to the newlyweds, who called for everyone’s attention. “We’ve decided,” began Michael, “that since this is such a great day for us, we can afford to be generous.”

“Come on up, guys,” said Cynthia.

Timothy and Lucy stood from their chairs, glancing at their parents and each other with looks that seemed to say “This is it,” and made their way to the center aisle past an astonished Martin and Karen.

“Hey, where’re you guys going?”

“I may be wrong, Marty, but…I think Michael and Cynthia meant they’re not the only ones getting married today.”

This seemed to be borne out as Timothy and Lucy were joined by other couples: Ellis and Lilia; two Rat couples, Ephraim and Ophelia, and Benjamin and Karina; and, probably most surprisingly, but somehow fittingly, Bertram and Tara.

“Wow, those two are really going ahead with it,” said Teresa, echoing the sentiments of many.

“Well,” said Velma, sounding surprisingly restrained, “I hope for their sakes they know what they’re doing.” At her side, Colbert gave her shoulders an approving squeeze.

Once the initial surprise wore off, there were many expressions of approval, compliments at how well everyone had kept this under wraps, and shouts of good luck directed to all the new couples. Certainly it made sense that they would want Nicodemus to do them the same honor, given his yet-closer departure. And so, he gave all five couples some last-minute briefing on how he would carry this out, having them line up two-by-two.

“Well, she sure made her mind up in a hurry,” said Lambert. “Karina, I mean.”

“I’m happy for her,” Bertha said, genuinely respectful of her former rival. “Benjy’s a great guy.”

As preparations were made for the additional ceremonies, Michael and Cynthia had rejoined their families, receiving a near-endless stream of hugs, tears and good wishes.

“I can’t believe you guys kept this under wraps so well,” said Martin, embracing his newly-wed sister. “So who else knew?”

“Well, just Mom ’n’ Dad, and Michael’s folks, and Nicodemus, and the others’ parents too.” Cynthia’s younger siblings all converged on her at once, nearly bowling her over.

“It wasn’t easy, keeping it a secret,” added Michael. “But who doesn’t love a surprise?”

“A surprise for some, maybe.” Everyone looked for the source of this statement, and saw Boris and Seelah nearby, looking at each other and smiling.

“How did you—” began Michael, then he answered himself. “You had one of your visions, didn’t you?”

Boris nodded. “I saw a double line of both rats and mice just like what we have here now, with Nicodemus standing before them, and I knew instantly what it had to mean.”

“And I thought we were sounding like old gossips before,” said Jessica. She looked toward Nicodemus and alerted the others that he was ready to start.

When everyone was settled again, he said, “My friends…only this morning, I had fully expected to solemnize only one union this day. But this…this is six times the honor.”

Many cheered and applauded the sentiment, but others’ reactions were more subdued. Reuben smiled and nodded in approval, but there was an unmistakable melancholy about him.

“Lilia’s going to be fine, Reuben,” assured Boris. “You know Ellis will be nothing but kind to her.”

“I know, Boris. It’s just…such a big change…for both of us.”

“Nothing stays the same forever. And one of these days, that’ll be you up there. You’ll see.”

Norman, seated behind Reuben, gave his encouragement as well, reminding him of what both of them hoped to accomplish as the crowd grew quiet again. Reuben, for no reason he’d be able to give, scanned the crowd and found himself locking eyes with Sarah, seated next to Teresa. She smiled at him, and he smiled back, a bit uncertainly. Surely, he thought, she’s just caught up in the occasion. He faced front as Nicodemus prepared to marry the next couple.

Over the next twenty minutes, each pair would read their individual vows and “cross over” into their new lives. It was all very spontaneous with next to no rehearsal, very come-as-you-are; but each individual speech was heartfelt and genuine.

Timothy and Lucy were first. Many were surprised that these two were marrying this soon, well aware of all their talk of taking things slowly and naturally and that they’d given no hint of any such plans. Timothy tried to keep his speech as brief as possible, describing how the friendship he’d struck up with Lucy on her first day here developed slowly into the love they now shared. Lucy leavened hers with humor, referring to Timothy as her “old wise one” but ending with a declaration of love that was as heartfelt as anyone’s.

Ellis described how he knew there was something special between him and Lilia from the day they first laid eyes on each other; and through all the trials they’d faced together—about which he avoided going into detail—he realized how much he cared for her and wanted to continue caring.

Lilia was visibly nervous but was as determined as the others to express her feelings about this special day: “I never thought…while growing up, that anything like this would…ever happen to me. But now, especially since coming here to Lahaikshe, I know that…anything is possible, it’s so wonderful. My brother Reuben and our mother Nina took care of me so well, but now…” She seemed uncertain of how to continue for a moment, then said, “Now I want to care for someone else, and have him care for me, as mates. I knew, I think even the day I came here, that Ellis was the one. He’s stayed with me through thick and thin, and I always knew that he really, really cared. I love you, Ellis, and…I want to be with you always.”

Many who’d known of Lilia’s recent trials were amazed at this new turn in her life; such an extreme change for someone who, upon her arrival, hardly spoke a word and always deferred to her brother. For Reuben’s part, even though he wasn’t getting married this day, he realized just how much he’d changed as well, that he could let her go like this and even be happy for her.

“Wow…your sister and my baby brother,” said Norman, hand on Reuben’s shoulder. “Amazing, isn’t it?”

Reuben could only nod in agreement as they watched the new marrieds cross the threshold and Nicodemus prepare for the next couple. Ephraim and Ophelia both described how their participation in the recent visit to Gwinthrayle’s reinforced their resolve to see more of Lahaikshe and forge boldly ahead to the future—together. The second rat couple, Benjamin and Karina, described their childhood friendship which became love only since just before the move to Lahaikshe, mentioning how they’d both wrestled with choices before deciding upon each other. Lambert and Bertha smiled at each other, thankful over the couple’s final choices.

The final couple to be wed was Tara and Bertram—appropriately, with Mouse couples and Rat couples followed by a mixed mouse and rat couple, united in matrimony by one who was very much a combination of the two. Tara’s speech proved the longest, mentioning how their relationship was proof positive that love can sometimes take the most unexpected form but still believing that, since she and Bertie were intellectual and emotional peers, their love should be no less legitimate than anyone else’s. She also acknowledged those who shared this view and thanked those who had lent their support.

“If there’s anyone else to thank,” she concluded, “I guess it would be whatever forces in this world, or maybe Lahaikshe herself, that allowed us to…have this new miracle that we just found out about yesterday. I guess it’s just more proof of how much we…all belong here, and that Bertie and I belong together.” She crouched to allow herself to look directly into her beloved’s eyes. “I love you, Bertie; more than I ever would have thought possible. And I’ll have you for as long as…you’ll have me.” They joined hands crosswise as the others did before.

“Tara,” Bertie began, “I love you and everything about you: your smile, your voice, your scent, how it feels when you hold me, and I hold you. It may be unusual, you and me feeling this way…but it’s real, and I want it to stay that way for a long, long time.” He looked toward Nicodemus, signaling the end of his short-but-definitely-sweet affirmation.

Nicodemus completed his part, and added his applause to the many cheers after the newest newlyweds crossed the threshold, Tara scooping Bertie off his feet and spinning him around clutched to her breast.

Johnathan, Justin and others made announcements about upcoming events later in the day, after which Nicodemus urged everyone to continue the day’s festivities, however large or small, as he or she saw fit.

Tallus reminded those of the newcomer mice present of his history class, which would begin as soon as everyone could be gathered together. All but a few were already present, so some of the liaison committee left to round up the others. It was decided to hold the class here at the wedding site, even as some of the decorations were still being taken down.

Many and varied were the types of celebrations in Freethorn this day: large and free-wheeling, small and intimate. But some were still trying to make sense of recent events, ones that concerned the future of all in Freethorn or even all of Lahaikshe, but also ones felt on a smaller, more personal scale.

One so affected made his way now, though not alone, along the trail that ran alongside the Wall.

“I think this is the place,” said Stuart. He took a deep breath. “Well, wish me luck.”

“It’ll be okay, Stuart,” said Shirley. “Go on, she’s waiting.”

“Okay, Sis. Thanks for coming this far.”

Shirley surprised her brother by giving him a good-luck peck on the cheek. After she left, Stuart moved into the narrow gap between the two rocks and thought about how strange that he and Shirley could confide in each other so easily lately. Jessica thought it a bit odd as well but was pleased at this sign that her children were growing up. But after what they had learned earlier today—or seemed to learn—it was certainly fitting. This mutual ability they discovered by accident seemed to have come into play days before, and may have even saved his life; but somehow they, and apparently everyone else, had forgotten the incident, and much more besides. They’d spent as much time as they could before the wedding taking down their experiences on paper, and were reluctant to interrupt it; but now other matters were taking precedence, perhaps equal or greater in importance, at least to him.

And then, she was there before him, sitting on a round stone. His heart leaped as Lula noticed him, jumping to her feet to embrace him, appearing every bit as happy to see him. They sat down together.

“I’m so glad you could make it, Stuart. We haven’t had the chance to get together since I got back.”

“Yeah, it’s great. I think…this is the first time it’s ever been…just you and me, nobody else. So…are you feeling okay? You didn’t look too happy at the wedding.”

“Oh, no, I’m all right. That was nice of you to ask. I guess…I was just happy that they were so happy, but…at the same time, I couldn’t help thinking about…Desmond, and…what it could be like if…he were here now, and he and I…maybe…” Lula turned away, but didn’t look sad to Stuart. Instead…

“You’re not embarrassed, are you? ’Cause you don’t have to be. I mean, I never knew my Uncle Desmond, but everybody says he was the greatest. You couldn’t help liking him.”

She turned to him, smiling. “He was wonderful. I guess…because he can’t be here now, and I know that, and everyone else knows it… Maybe I was a little embarrassed. But I’m glad you understand.” She sat closer, and they drew arms around each other’s shoulders.

“So…it sounds like you really had fun while you were back on Earth, with Eric and the new mice.”

“Oh, it was great, Stuart, but short. But it was just so awesome to be able to help out like I did, and be a part of something so big. I’ve had a lot of them come up to me and thank me for getting them ready to come here.” She sighed. “I just wish that…Mother and Curry and Bron could be here now, just like Desmond. I just know they’d like it here as much as I do.”

“They sure would, I bet. I think they’d be proud of you, too…just like I am.”

Lula looked upon him with gratitude. “You’re so sweet, Stuart.” She nuzzled up to his shoulder. “Oh, I know I shouldn’t be talking like that so much. I know Desmond’ll never come back, or my family, even if we didn’t always get along. But I still believe like I did that first day, when I said to Mother Pat that she’s my family now. Everyone here is.”

Stuart recalled how he’d learned yesterday that Lula, grieving over the loss of her family days earlier, had contemplated taking her own life. The news had struck him to the heart, and he’d felt a need to reach out to her in some way but didn’t know what he would say. Now, though, he just stroked her arm and shoulder and said, “You sure do have family here, Lula. And friends. Really good friends.”

Lula looked in his eyes, her own brimming with tears. “I’m so lucky. You’re just the…sweetest friend anyone could have.” She drew both arms around him, and he reacted in kind, the gesture feeling very easy and natural to both of them. They continued to sit closely, silently, for another minute.

“This is nice, isn’t it?” said Stuart. “I feel like I could sit here with you like this all day.”

“Yeah. Me too.” Lula sighed. “You know… Stuart, I feel…kind o’ like it was unfair of me to talk so much about…the ones I’ve lost, when…well, you lost your own father.”

Stuart was a bit taken aback that she would bring up the same kind of subject that he was reluctant to, but he wasn’t hurt or offended at all. “Don’t worry, Lula. It wasn’t unfair at all. And I like talking about him.”

“Didn’t your mom say that she met your dad while hiding from a barn cat?”

“Uh-huh. The way she describes it, it almost sounds like fun.” He went on to describe the account, and over the next 30-some minutes they regaled each other with more stories from their childhood experiences. All the while, both of them silently reveled in each other’s closeness, neither able to articulate just how much this time together meant for them.

Afterwards, they visited the memorial garden to pay respects to Desmond, and to Stuart’s father, Harley, and his aunt Vera; then, Lula left to attend another event, one expected to benefit many in the Mouse colony, newcomers and earlier arrivals alike.

“So, is everyone ready?”

“I think so, Johnathan. But are you sure you want to do this? Or all of it today?”

“Madeline has a point, Johnathan.” Patricia looked around at the group of mice, adults and children alike, seated in a rough circle on the ground on the east shore of Lake Nicodemus, while others—Eric, Lula, Janice, Norman, Reuben—moved about the circle. “It looks like you’re apt to get full before you’ve covered everyone.”

Johnathan laughed. “So I’ll take small bites. Remember, I did have a light breakfast. And anyway, if I do get full, we can continue this tomorrow.”

The trio moved into the circle, where, in its center, a table had been set up. It was laden with a variety of foodstuffs, of both Terran and Lahaikshean origin, but not for an ordinary meal. It all began looking very ceremonious as Johnathan made to address the group. The liaison members paused in their briefing and all sat where they were.

“Friends,” he began, “I guess I could begin with the old cliché: you’re probably wondering why I’ve asked you all here today. Well, some of you already do know, some of you may have guessed. But before going into detail, let me say…how proud and honored I am, as all of us are, to have been able to do so much for all of you; and to continue to do so, beginning with that reason you’re all gathered here. Many of you have just attended Tallus’s history class, so I’m sure all of you are aware of the time we spent at NIMH, and what we’d gained there, and how we made our escape. But how much more was happening that we never suspected, that we had no inkling of until just yesterday, until after our newest residents arrived.

“I, and everyone else, are now fully aware of this…ability which, it seems, I’ve probably had from the beginning, certainly since just after the Escape. The benefits we received at NIMH—the original twenty rats and those of us mice who survived—can now be passed on to virtually any mouse, and I can do it through my own bodily fluids. Even to me, it still sounds…strange, bizarre. But I’d already done it with Madeline, the love of my life, probably from the day we met; but for a long time I was unaware of it, and so I’d worried for so long unnecessarily about our aging difference, which was never really there to begin with. I know many of you were mystified by your own differences from your fellow mice, but of course it’s no longer a mystery. However, in the course of our interviews with you, we know that some of you do not have these advanced characteristics; ‘naturals’ is the word we use to describe you. In the case of those of you who arrived yesterday, some of you have mates or children who are not ‘advanced’ as you are, but of course we couldn’t leave them behind. And some of you who have been here for a while may not have yet received—at the risk of sounding arrogant—the benefits that I can give you.”

Johnathan selected a blackberry from the table, then went on: “This, then, is why we’ve brought you all here.” He approached one family of new arrivals that had been briefed by Norman. “Now, your name is Anja, I believe?” Anja nodded, and Norman helped Johnathan with the other names. “I’m sure I’ll have all of your names and faces put together before the week is out. Now…I know the basics of your story, Anja, Hondo; and it really does my heart proud that you were able to find each other as you did.”

Anja was especially touched, having spent much time alone and feeling largely rejected until she and Hondo were able to connect emotionally within the past year—a story all too common among the new arrivals. She thanked Johnathan, and he continued.

“And now…you and your children can be assured of having more happy days, months, years together.” He took a bite from the berry, then handed it to Hondo, who took a bite from the same part of the berry Johnathan had taken his. The procedure was repeated with the two youngsters, Moe and Cora, with special care taken that they do just as their father did.

As Madeline watched Johnathan chat with the young family, she wondered with some amusement if any of the female newcomers—or males, for that matter—would want to kiss Johnathan like Amelia did yesterday, and Zenia when she and her children arrived here. If so, she was sure she wouldn’t be jealous; but all the same she found herself hoping that none of them would.

Soon he moved on to the next beneficiaries: Marie, her husband Newell and sons Tony and Kimball II. It had been agreed that some of those mice who were naturals, or half- or quarter-naturals, or at least were upon their arrival, would also take part in this ceremony. For those for which it could be determined beyond a doubt had already benefited—such as Alma and her children—their participation was deemed unnecessary. For these others, all had been briefed beforehand on the precise benefits, in case they hadn’t already been made clear to anyone. Unsurprisingly, none had declined to participate; and so, Johnathan would be kept busy for the next 90 minutes or so. It may not have been necessary to take even that long, but he wanted to make sure each of the newcomer mice had special attention, receiving an individual “welcome aboard” as had Anja and Hondo, because this was a whole new life they were embarking upon, in so many ways, so the importance of this ceremony wouldn’t be taken lightly.

It was another masterpiece of timing that, just as Johnathan was finishing with the last of his charges, it started raining lightly. Most left to take shelter as the rainfall increased, but the newcomer mice marveled at how small the individual raindrops were—just one example of how different things were here, it was explained, with many things, including the native lifeforms, scaled down in size. Many were so taken with the difference that they elected to stay outside a while longer, reveling and dancing about, some until they were soaked to the skin.

There would be no dampening of spirits this day by any means. Inside, members of the liaison committee were conducting tours for the newcomers, showing off all the facilities and some of the living quarters, all the while explaining community standards and ground rules, welcoming and answering any and all questions.

There were lengthy and spirited discussions, including one that had been a long while in coming, extending naturally from the day’s earlier ceremonies.

“I remember…how, the day after I’d met Johnathan, I began having feelings, emotions, of a type and depth I’d never before experienced. I didn’t quite know what to make of it all then, but since then I’d learned it was his influence broadening my emotional range, matching it with his.”

Johnathan smiled at Madeline, nodding. “And evidently many of our new friends—and some old friends, like you three—had a similar experience, but not all of you reacted to it the same way.”

For a moment, Janice was lost in thought as she looked out the bay window of this alcove off the Mouse colony’s main corridor, watching the gentle rain fall. “So…that must have been why…I reacted as I did when you told us you were moving away from the creekside.”

Sibelle and Dupree looked at each other, recalling the incident with some amusement. “You did make quite a scene when you stormed out of our dinner together, Mom,” said Sibelle.

“I’ll say,” agreed Dupree. “But we were influenced the same way, and we didn’t react like that. But I guess that proves your point, Johnathan.”

“So it seems. But we were reminded of how much that was like the way Sarah behaved that time last year, some time before she and her mother Audrey moved further away.”

Johnathan, Madeline, Eric and Sarah all recalled well the day, over a year ago, when the two siblings were the Brisbys’ dinner guests, as they’d been several times before. They’d long known that their hosts were unusual for mice—as much as their rat friends—but after Johnathan detailed for them many of the reasons why, Sarah abruptly excused herself. The next time she’d seen them, a few days later, she couldn’t completely explain her actions, only that the discussion had triggered a feeling of great uneasiness in her. Shortly after, she decided to accompany her mother to a new home further to the south, with nary a word to Eric, who had opted to stay where he was, closer to his “second family.” Audrey, Sarah explained more recently, had always been uneasy herself around the Brisbys—a reaction not uncommon among natural mice—though she’d never expressly forbidden her children to socialize with them; and this was her main reason for wanting to move further away. Sarah’s own initial apprehension, they realized now, stemmed from Johnathan’s influence on her—from simply ingesting a trace amount of his saliva—triggering a reaction that, remarkably, was the polar opposite of her brother’s. From the stories they’d already heard from the other newcomer mice, this wide variance of reactions was quite common.

“And that difference in our reactions,” Eric observed, “Must have been a lot like the one between you-all.” He indicated Janice, Sibelle and Dupree.

“That’s right,” agreed Sibelle, “though it wasn’t exactly the same. Mom didn’t shun you outright, but…”

“But instead I just had a big hissy-fit,” finished Janice, shaking her head and chuckling. “I still feel like I should apologize, Johnathan.”

“Why, Janice?”

“Well…not so much for that, because that was such a long time ago. But I was lying awake last night, thinking about how…you had influenced us three, but no one else in our family. It was a mystery, for so long, why Kory grew older faster than me, and finally died. And when we finally learned why yesterday, I felt like…I needed to blame you, somehow, for that, even as I knew that you were unaware it was happening to any of us. And here you were, out there, risking your life for all of us, and, well…by this morning, I could have kicked myself for thinking that way. We talked it over before you returned, and we agreed that we needed to discuss it and square things with you.”

“Well, I think we’ve done that, Janice. I’m so sorry about Kory, even if…there was no way I could have known. But…if you like, I can use my abilities to track down some of your other children back on Earth, bring them here…and they can be made as we are, too, if they choose.”

Janice, Sibelle and Dupree all grew wide-eyed. “Could it really be done?” asked Dupree. “But yeah, I guess it could, if you still have that ability.”

“At this point, it seems likely.” Johnathan paused; with so much else happening, he’d barely begun to ponder all the implications of that ability and how far he could take it. “But of course, I’ll leave that decision up to you three.”

“So it seems. But we were reminded of how much that was like the way Sarah behaved that time last year, sometime before she and her mother Audrey moved further away.”

The discussion shifted toward the more immediate concern of new living quarters, for which Johnathan would again be firmly at the center of things. He’d been looking forward to putting his new abilities, passed from the Stone to himself, to the test, especially that of shaping stone and metal.

Presently Arthur arrived as scheduled, and he advised Johnathan in carving out another new living space, though he needed little aid by this time. He’d done this many times before with the amulet, but he was still getting the feel for the amulet’s old capabilities being within him to command. Some, like simple levitation, came more naturally; more labor-intensive tasks, like rock-shaping, required greater concentration. Still, for this task, he did allow many of the new mice to watch, albeit from a safe distance.

Though his audience had been instructed to keep as quiet as possible, it was hard for many to avoid expressing aloud their awe as they watched solid rock become as malleable as putty: forming hollows, entryways, shaping and reshaping as if a living entity in itself. But in a matter of minutes, Johnathan announced that he was finished, allowing his audience to view his handiwork up close. It looked very much like any of the other apartments, and once further details were attended to, like piping for water, it and the others he would create over the ensuing days would be ready for occupancy. Though this test boosted his confidence greatly, he felt he should pace himself and take the next few days to create more quarters, certainly until after more definite plans were drawn up.

Already, though, there was a flurry of activity in the Mouse colony, as many moved into new quarters, especially the newlyweds. Reuben agreed to let the quarters he and Lilia shared be Lilia and Ellis’s now, and so he was moving in temporarily with Martin and Karen. Cynthia and Michael kept busy moving her things into his quarters. Bertie elected to move in with Tara in the Rat colony, at least for the time being. Timothy and Lucy laughed and joked with Boris and Seelah as they helped the new couple move into one of the already-existing vacant apartments. New accommodations were made for Eric, for the new life he’d share with Teresa and their children, with Sarah continuing to stay with them for the time being.

Johnathan looked up to call out a greeting to Martin, Karen and Reuben as they passed by with armloads of Reuben’s belongings. Then he returned his attention to the plans spread out on the table before him—the “more definite” plans which were now on a fast track to being put into action. The table stood in the same alcove as his earlier discussion with Janice and the others, and he, Arthur and others were sketching out on paper ideas for how the new living quarters would be laid out.

“Well, there are all kinds of room for expansion for the second level.”

“And we can keep adding to the south as needed,” added Arthur. “Not so much to the north, though.”

“We’ll need to plan for other facilities, not just living quarters,” reminded Simone.

“A whole new medical facility, not in the least,” said Ages, sounding not especially thrilled at the prospect. “Certainly we’ll have to get some new people trained.”

“You’ll be up to it, Cyril, like always.” Johnathan jauntily patted his friend’s back. He turned to see Nicodemus looking not at the plans but toward him, with a faraway look. “Uh… Nicodemus? Are you still with us?”

“Pardon me, Johnathan…everyone. I must confess, my mind was elsewhere.” He recognized his friends’ curiosity and added, “It was on a matter concerning you, Johnathan. It…may be something you would prefer we discuss alone.”

“I’m sure it’s not too personal. Go ahead, Nicodemus.”

“Well…it has occurred to me that…with your newly-discovered ‘replicating’ ability, the potential is near-limitless for what you could do for virtually all mice of your species back on Earth.”

“Oh, yes, it’s occurred to me too.” Johnathan looked up at the ceiling, sighing. “Provided that this ability is still in me, and just as strong, I could help any number of mice that wanted these…benefits. And then bring them here, even if only one at a time. At its most extreme, I could start thinking of myself as a…a savior, a messiah of an entire species.” He paused again. “I was lying awake for a good hour last night thinking about it. Could this possibly be…my destiny? Was I really meant to…to transform all these mice, take them from an existence that could hardly be called a life, compared to us; where they’re at the bottom of the food chain, and their lives are so brief and filled with danger; and bring them to where they can grow and thrive, and live and love as we have? How…how can I know?”

None present knew how to reply to such a weighty matter. Such a responsibility would indeed have an enormous impact on everyone: on Freethorn and ultimately on all of Lahaikshe, with such a huge influx of new population; on Earth, where the loss of these mice would, at its most extreme, have an ecological effect, with a significant link in the food chain gone; and on down to Johnathan himself, and those closest to him, whose personal lives would be permanently, drastically altered. If they were to weigh the entire matter now, it would have to be put before the entire council, of course; and considering the matter spread before them right now, it would have to be addressed urgently.

“Well,” offered Nicodemus, “I have pondered the way in which the realization of this ability came upon you, and its timing. Why here and now? It came upon you as Eric and Lula were finishing up their story, and you used the amulet to confirm past connections with some of the new mice.”

“Enough for us to know that it was all true,” said Simone. “But why now? As if Eric telling his story was enough to trigger this realization?”

“Could it possibly be something here, the same unseen force on Lahaikshe which we’ve attributed so many other things to?” Arthur scratched his head. “But then, that still begs the question of ‘why now?’ since Johnathan had already spent so much time here.”

Johnathan rubbed his whiskers. “You know…maybe it’s just from our discussion now, but now I’m thinking…maybe it is all in the timing. Maybe…there is a reason I realized it when I did, as if…I couldn’t before, or…it’s like the knowledge couldn’t be passed on to me sooner. Or something like that. Either way, now I’m thinking that…I should give the whole matter more time, not try to come up with any kind of plan now, just wait…for what, I don’t know exactly, but…”

“Another epiphany of sorts, perhaps?” ventured Nicodemus.

“Yeah, maybe that’s it. If it could happen once…” Johnathan looked up to see Justin and Isabella approach.

After greetings, Justin said, “I get the feeling we’ve been discussing more than architecture here.” The couple was brought up to date on the main points, after which Justin added, “Well, that’s definitely not something to rush into. You take as much time as you need, Johnathan, to think on it.”

“I couldn’t imagine having such a responsibility on my shoulders,” said Isabella. “To be able to affect so many lives like that, in such a profound way…it’s so huge.”

“Let’s not forget what’s he’s done already that’s affected all our lives,” pointed out Arthur.

“True,” said Johnathan, “this would be one more thing—one huge thing, potentially, but…maybe not so much.” He sighed, shrugging.

“Well,” said the ever-pragmatic Ages, “if we’re going to wait on that matter, then I suggest we return to the one before us now.” They all did so, discussing the possibility of whether any of their new tenants would prefer lodgings similar to the Rusay guest quarters, with their nearly freestanding architecture.

Chapter 53 - A “what-if” adventure

Those selfsame guest quarters had become quite the hot spot of late, with their current tenants more than willing to share them with their hosts. And so, as evening fell, the two Rusay families opened their doors to guests, as they did five nights ago. This time, though, it was largely on behalf of the newest residents, all of whom were encouraged to attend. One family of newcomers was so fascinated with the architecture of the guest quarters that they asked Johnathan if he could design a home like this for them, and he replied that they’d already discussed the possibility and that he could easily work it into their overall plans.

“…And so Dad willed the Stone to take us all back to our hosts’ home, and of course they were relieved we were all safe and sound. And I can tell you, Martin and I both learned a pretty good lesson.”

Those who were hearing Timothy’s account of the “flintarak adventure” for the first time sat enraptured as he brought it to a conclusion. Even those who had first heard it three nights ago, or even prior to that, welcomed the chance to hear it again. There arose a chorus of “More!” and “Tell us another one!” and Timothy told them he’d be happy to but needed a breather first.

As their hosts served drinks, Janice said to Madeline, “He still tells such an amazing story…so gripping! And this one is really true, isn’t it? Rodents like us, but the size of dogs? Amazing!”

“It’s all true, every word,” confirmed Madeline, thanking Dinilom as she set down a tray laden with cups of girin and smilath on a nearby low table. As they drank, Sibelle and Dupree recalled how Timothy entertained their family as well as his own with stories when they were creekside neighbors.

“Even that young,” said Sibelle, “he’d have us on the edge of our seats.”

Dupree nodded his agreement. “I could never figure out where he got it all.” He took his first sip of girin. “Wow, this is great stuff.”

“We’re glad you like it,” said Madeline. “Timothy’s stories and the girin. In fact, even after all these years, even I don’t know how he does it.”

“Same way I keep my heart beating, I guess,” said Timothy as he sat next to his bride Lucy, “or keep my liver functioning. Or…”

“We get the picture, Tim,” said Teresa. “It just comes naturally.” Eric and Sarah both chuckled.

Madeline turned to a nearby group that included Reuben and Lilia, and said again how glad she was that they could make it here, since they’d missed Timothy’s last storytelling session.

“So what’s next?” asked Sibelle.

“How about something made up?” suggested Shawna. “He tells really good made-up stories.”

“Or maybe one based on a dream,” offered Cynthia. “Like the one you had our first night here, remember? The one where you made a slingshot to get rid of a snake, and Martin was acting and talking weird…”

“And the girl who said she loved him,” chimed in Lucy, “who wasn’t me…”

“Come on, Lucy,” said Timothy, “you know that was long before you and I met.” After a pause he added in mock dismay, “I knew I’d regret including that detail.”

“Ooor…” put in Cynthia, “maybe a ‘what-if’ story would be better.”

After thanking Cynthia for the “save,” Timothy explained for the benefit of the newcomers: “It’s a fictional story, but also based on real experiences we’ve had. It’s a story that explores what could have happened if certain things, certain events had worked out differently, or one or more of us made different choices. For instance, I came up with one, not long after we came to Lahaikshe, that asked, ‘What if Martin and Lambert had met Kimball while he was making his way to Thorn Valley to warn us?’”

“Hey, yeah!” enthused Lucy. “Tell that one, Tim!”

Timothy took a sip of smilath, savoring the flavor for a moment. “Actually, there’s another one I came up with a year or so ago, but in light of recent events, I’ve had to revise it considerably.” He looked toward Nicodemus, sitting with Jessica and her children, and gave a wink.

“Ah…I am to be the ‘star’ of this one, I gather?”

“That’s right, Nicodemus. I call it ‘What if Uhrstegg hadn’t put his spell upon Nicodemus?’”

Many in the crowd reacted positively to the premise, including Lucy, who’d been a little disappointed that Timothy hadn’t gone with his first choice. “Now there’s a possibility I’ve pondered myself recently,” said Nicodemus, nodding. “Do tell, Timothy, so that I may see how our versions compare.”

“All right. But I have to warn you all: not everyone may come out of this very well…including you, Nicodemus.”

“I would be surprised if any of us were exactly the same, my boy. I do have one concern, though: the newcomer mice are only now learning about our history, and I wonder if telling an alternative version might not lead to some confusion.”

Those newcomers present all agreed it should be interesting, with Janice summing up with the statement, “A good story is a good story.” All urged Timothy to proceed.

He cleared his throat, and then began spinning a tale which took his listeners back to the days of the Rosebush colony, at a point in time in which Johnathan’s family was still unaware of his ties to the Rats or that other of the mice from NIMH had survived.

Johnathan has his conversation with Nicodemus about the latter possibility, and Nicodemus, after pondering the matter, decides to take the matter to the council. But in this version of the story, Uhrstegg does not make his move against him, because his more reclusive and shy personality, Ghormfisk, is in charge at this time and is hiding out. Therefore, Nicodemus is able to make his case unimpeded; but, though it makes for some lively discussion, the council concludes that there is little they could do from where they are. He’s reluctant to let the matter lie completely, though; and after he returns to his office that night, the means to resolve it comes to him most unexpectedly.

Nicodemus feels inclined to construct his viewing device—over a year before he otherwise does—which, upon completion, he immediately uses to check their old comrades’ status. Justin and Arthur are both on hand to witness its first use, and their discovery generates tremendous excitement. Johnathan and Ages are contacted, and in the process of this flurry of activity more of the Stone’s capabilities are discovered. In short order they not only have the means to be reunited with Kimball, Patricia and Vincent, but they also uncover the existence of the mysterious stranger that Johnathan had barely glimpsed at the time he’d found the Stone.

An inner circle is quickly formed, which also includes Tallus; but though the truths they uncover are considerable, they’re as yet unaware that this stranger, Ghormfisk/Uhrstegg, had already put his spell upon Jenner, who regards these new developments with interest, though he isn’t allowed in on any of the sessions with the Stone or the viewscreen. The reason is simple: Nicodemus had already experienced a premonition centering upon Jenner being a threat to the colony’s existence, but with no more specifics—at least at first. In the days to come it becomes centered upon both Jenner and the Stone, and so he continues to act upon his earlier sense of caution regarding the Stone and keeps its location a secret from Jenner.

The aforementioned flurry of activity also results in Johnathan and Nicodemus uncovering the stranger’s contact with Jenner, and in surprisingly short order Uhrstegg—or rather Ghormfisk—is located, captured without a struggle, and brought in for questioning. Even from what little they’d seen of him in their earlier observations with the Stone, they’d seen how markedly different his behavior had been—so unlike his present, more fearful demeanor. If they weren’t absolutely certain that this was the same creature, they’d have sworn they were dealing with two different ones; and Tallus is the first to theorize that he may be suffering from a dual-personality disorder. Johnathan is able to confirm that this is the “mystery creature” he’d scented the day he found the Stone, but questioning him yields little in the way of results. What little he says is unintelligible, though they were able to discern that his name is Ghormfisk. For security reasons they’d decided to not have the Stone present during their questioning, and so they can’t understand each other without its still-unknown translating capability. They are well aware there is a connection between the two but are hesitant to give the stranger a chance to retake the Stone—were he so inclined—before they know more about it and him.

Plans are made for contacting their lost mouse comrades; and it’s also decided, after much discussion and soul-searching on Johnathan’s part, to disclose everything about his past to his family. With the return of this major part of his past it’s mutually decided that he shouldn’t put it off any longer, taking the chance that Madeline would deal with the knowledge just fine. Of course it would mean revealing everything, including the supposed aging difference; but Johnathan makes good, telling all to his family that night, adding that he’d take them to meet these mysterious friends of his the next day. To his immense relief, she’s not troubled to learn about the aging difference, only concerned that he’d worried so much over a matter that seems a minor point to her. Of greater concern was meeting these friends of his, so the next day they all pay a visit to the Rosebush colony—including Timothy and Cynthia, who are only a few weeks old.

Though at least two of the rats raise some small protest over ‘outsiders’ being there, Madeline and their children are by and large welcomed and embraced as part of them. Nicodemus tells them more of their history and their plans for the future, one of which—to live self-sufficiently—is in its formative stages. Jenner had already begun expressing opposition to it—another reason for his exclusion from these behind-closed-doors sessions. More of these sessions over the next few days yield more truths, via the Stone and Nicodemus’s viewscreen: mainly, the offspring Vincent had sired and their current statuses. But of the extent of Ghormfisk’s influence over Jenner, nothing can be definitively proven this way, mainly because he, as Uhrstegg, had conducted so much of his activities while using his powers of invisibility.

Closer to home, though, is a matter that had caused Johnathan much past consternation: the aging difference that he’d been afraid to disclose to Madeline. He recounts his past conversations with Nicodemus over the matter, in particular the one they’d had just after the mice had met; and further discussion and investigation leads to a startling discovery: that the aging difference was never there to begin with. The first logical explanation was that it was a change wrought by the NIMH treatments, but this was vastly overshadowed by their immense mutual joy at knowing they could now grow old together. They want to share it with everyone, but they agree it should be kept secret for now since it was disclosed via the Stone.

Jenner, meanwhile, is becoming annoyed by his exclusion from these sessions, and decides to visit the guarded room where Ghormfisk is being held. The guards allow him an unescorted visit with the “green stranger”, seeing no harm; and Jenner, as baffled as anyone by this creature’s very existence, tries to communicate with him. Ghormfisk is less fearful than before, responding to the humane treatment he’d been given; but Jenner’s mere presence triggers the personality change back to Uhrstegg. With no other witnesses, he turns invisible in front of Jenner; and before he can alert the guards, Uhrstegg knocks Jenner unconscious and flees unseen and undetected. When Jenner comes to and tells his story to Nicodemus, Justin and Johnathan, they express outward disbelief, not letting Jenner know that they’d indeed learned quite a few things about the green stranger. They give Jenner the benefit of the doubt, but their suspicions have been raised, since they’re as yet unaware of the extent of Jenner’s involvement with the stranger: were the two of them in cahoots, full partners, or was there something else going on, something more subtle? They are aware of his powers of invisibility, but unaware of his preference for manipulating others and watching the results from a distance over more direct involvement.

It presents a dilemma for the inner circle: while they’re certain there is already a connection between the two, Jenner seemed sincere in his contention that the stranger is as much a stranger to him as anyone else. But they’re already aware of how Jenner had changed lately: speaking out so vehemently against their proposed plan, his coldness and indifference toward his family. Johnathan is the first to suggest that the stranger may have some influence over Jenner without Jenner being aware of it—which of course was the absolute truth, though they wouldn’t confirm it for some time. But Nicodemus’s suspicion of him is by now so great that he’s certain Jenner is planning to take the amulet and that he’d be able to use its power for his own designs.

Jenner isn’t oblivious to their suspicions, especially since they continue excluding him from their meetings—though he’s unaware of the specific reasons. He becomes suspicious himself now, believing they may have made important discoveries about the Stone. He’d only witnessed its power once—the day Johnathan found it—and though his curiosity about it hadn’t waned, he hadn’t yet reached the point where he was obsessed with possessing it. For the time being, he decides to bide his time. Even his close encounter with the one who had fanned his own opposition to Nicodemus had no effect on his current state of mind, unaware as he was of any prior contact.

The inner circle reaches out directly to the Lost Mice, unbeknownst to anyone else, using the Stone to pay a visit to the Davises. Kimball and Patricia are thrilled to learn the Rats had established their colony and are thriving so well, and that Vincent had also survived. They’re fascinated with Johnathan’s ability to use this amulet to get from place to place so easily, and they’re all but ready to make a new home near him and the Rats; but Nicodemus decides that any such decision would be better left for later, after the Rats’ future plans are more firmly in place—perhaps even after they’d moved to their projected new colony, further away from humankind’s world. The Davises are disappointed, of course, but agree to be patient and abide by the decision.

Next they pay a visit to Vincent at his home, though not without some apprehension as it is inside NIMH. He’s equally pleased to learn of their progress but less enthusiastic than the Davises over the prospect of moving from his present residence. They tell him how they’d discovered the children he’d sired with his temporary mates and that if he wants to meet them, that can be arranged.

But what of Uhrstegg? Following his escape from the Rats’ custody, he’d retreated to the hollowed stump where he’d made his headquarters and began reassessing his plans. He hadn’t planned on being found out, preferring to remain behind the scenes even when his “puppet”, Jenner, had been standing right before him. He weighs his options: to approach Jenner with the idea of an actual partnership now that his secret was out, or to make for other parts; but he stays on, largely because of the Stone, which he might want to take back eventually. And so he bides his time as well, continuing as before with no set plan or agenda, knowing he can still mask his presence. He still lacks awareness of his own dual identity and that it was as Ghormfisk that he had been so easily captured, and this would prove to be his undoing in an unexpected manner.

Within four days after Nicodemus had discovered the surviving Lost Mice and the Stone’s power had been more fully utilized, even more startling discoveries had been made: in tracing the green stranger’s origins with the Stone, Johnathan found him as having previously lived on an other-dimensional world, a fact he’d already discerned implicitly by his use of the Stone. From his and Nicodemus’s readings they knew it to be possible, if not from the simple fact that the stranger was unlike any known creature on Earth. Tracing one truth led to others, including the Stone’s extradimensional origins as well: from Pharsal and Arvasa’s journey to the Dark World to Pharsal’s leaving the Stone in Birantha’s custody to the green stranger—his less-pleasant personality obviously in control—purloining it, taking command of it and coming to Earth with it seemingly at random.

Amidst this, Nicodemus experiences a premonition, a much more pointed one than usual, concerning Justin being in danger from Jenner, whom he foresaw assaulting Justin when the two were alone, and leaving him for dead. He tells both Justin and Johnathan of this, and they decide that they wouldn’t try to avoid such a situation. A plan is hatched, which would involve Justin spending more time in Jenner’s company than usual. Positive that Justin would be in no danger as long as they weren’t completely alone, Nicodemus endeavors to get a sense of what Jenner might be planning while keeping things as casual as possible, to make it look as if it were only out of Justin’s own curiosity and not as if he were “spying” for Nicodemus.

Over the next few weeks, the Plan proceeds in earnest, with Nicodemus participating in the hike that brings them to Thorn Valley; Johnathan using the Stone to make further visits to Kimball, Patricia and Vincent; and even contacting Vincent’s temporary mates and enabling him to meet the four children he didn’t know he’d had with them. When Johnathan visits the second of Vincent’s mates—Maisie, mother to Rollo and Ardo, Nicodemus comes along to better assess what could be done to help Rollo’s condition. Though Maisie does have some amount of resentment toward Vincent for abandoning her, she’s willing to see him again in the future, and welcomes any help in dealing with Rollo.

Justin, meanwhile, begins his campaign to endear himself more to Jenner. Not surprisingly, Jenner does at first react to Justin’s overtures with some suspicion, knowing very well of his status with Nicodemus. Justin tries to convince Jenner that he doesn’t take Nicodemus’s plans for him very seriously—an image that he’d already been projecting. Jenner actually seems convinced that Justin is genuinely skeptical of the Plan.

The fateful day comes after the return of Nicodemus’s expedition and the announcement that they’d found a suitable location in Thorn Valley. Jenner tells Justin he’d made an important decision and to meet him that night in a location away from the colony and aboveground—a location both know to be frequented by Dragon, the farm cat, but Jenner thinks it all the more appropriate to ensure they’d be alone. Justin reports this to Nicodemus, who encourages him to go ahead with it but to be careful, because this could be the break they’d been waiting for.

Unbeknownst to Jenner, when he and Justin meet at the prescribed location they are not alone. Johnathan, bearing the Stone, is nearby, downwind of the pair but close enough to intervene if necessary. Justin expresses concern for their safety, not letting on his suspicions; but Jenner seems in no hurry to detail his plan, hemming and hawing until Justin turns his back for little more than a second. Jenner suddenly strikes him from behind with a club. Over Justin’s unconscious body, Jenner sneers about how he knows that Justin is “spying” for Nicodemus, and now he intends to just let him lie there to let Dragon deal with him as he will, and no one would know Jenner was involved, except maybe Nicodemus, who he would no doubt deal with later in some fashion.

Johnathan intervenes then, too late to prevent Justin from being assaulted; but he is able to prevent Jenner from escaping, using the Stone to hold him fast—to Jenner’s great surprise, not expecting it to be used this way. But the surprises are far from over.

Just as two Guard rats arrive to take away Jenner for questioning, a red glow emanates from the Stone, enveloping both Johnathan and Jenner. The two vanish into thin air, with a flash of light from the amulet, which simply drops to the ground. The guards are totally unprepared for anything like this and start calling out for them; but all the commotion has drawn Dragon’s attention, and now the guards have to fend off his attack and protect an unconscious Justin. They have weapons with which they’re able to discourage the cat fairly easily; but with no sign of Johnathan or Jenner about, they can only take the Stone into custody and Justin to safety.

Justin isn’t badly injured, and comes to once they’re safely below; but upon reporting to Nicodemus neither he nor the guards can explain what happened to Johnathan and Jenner; and not even Nicodemus’s viewing device can trace their present whereabouts, leading him to theorize that they’re nowhere on Earth. Given what they know of the Stone’s origins, it’s not unlikely, but he has no idea why it happened or what to do about it. He sends for Madeline and breaks the bad news to her, and she’s understandably upset, expressing frustration that he can’t tell her more, but accepts that he and Justin won’t rest until they find her husband. Likewise, Nicodemus informs Matilda that Jenner is missing, leveling with her about the Stone’s power being responsible. Though she and Jenner had drifted apart of late, she’s still concerned, because the circumstances were so bizarre.

But, of course, the missing pair are very much alive: the Stone’s power transported them to the Cavern of Change on Lahaikshe, where they find themselves lying dazed, conscious but unable to move for several minutes. By the time they’re mostly recovered, Johnathan expects more hostility from Jenner; but he’s as genuinely baffled by their experience and only wants to know what happened. Johnathan proposes that they put aside any differences they may have and try to get their bearings.

Jenner agrees, and as they make their way to daylight, Johnathan decides to level with Jenner about those behind-closed-doors meetings, especially the further discoveries about the Stone; though he admits there was still much yet to discover, considering what had just happened to them. He tells Jenner about the previous contacts Ghormfisk, the green stranger, had with him, which Jenner still swears up and down he doesn’t remember. When Johnathan tells him that Ghormfisk seems to have had two personalities and that the more conniving one may have had some adverse influence over him, Jenner becomes angry, but not at Johnathan—he wants to see Ghormfisk punished for messing with his mind.

The two share a first, astonishing look at this world they find themselves in; and in the course of exploring it, Johnathan is all but convinced that whatever influence Ghormfisk may have had over Jenner, it has diminished by now or gone altogether—because they’re no longer in the same dimension? Jenner even admits that his opposition to Nicodemus was irrational and that staying on the Fitzgibbons farm indefinitely probably wouldn’t work in the long run, admissions that seem to clinch the idea.

During the day they have peaceful encounters with Rusay, this world’s native race, and late in the day the mismatched pair is found by the sorcerer Gwinthrayle, who takes them to his abode. In describing how they’d come to be there, Uhrstegg, which Gwinthrayle and his fellow sorcerer Birantha know to be the name of Ghormfisk’s less-pleasant alternate personality, is confirmed to be the source of their troubles, just as the Stone is confirmed to have originated there. They become Gwinthrayle’s guests as he and Birantha search for the means to send them home.

Back on Earth, there are days filled with worry and uncertainty as Nicodemus’s own efforts to find their two missing fail to yield results. He continues trying to will the Stone to work through him, as he’d tried many times before, but is still unable to fathom why it sent Johnathan and Jenner away, let alone where. He and Justin continue to assure Madeline and her children that whatever happened to Johnathan, he’s certain to still be alive. One way or another, he and Jenner will come back. As little as they understand the Stone, they’re positive that it had to have sent them away to a specific place and for a specific reason.

As for Ghormfisk, there had been no sign of him since his escape; as Uhrstegg, he’d been blocking Nicodemus’s efforts to find him via his viewscreen. But one day, entirely out of the blue, a visitor literally appears on the Rats’ doorstep: the green stranger, with his milder personality apparently back in charge. He allows them to take him back into custody, actually seeming to welcome it. As before, they can’t understand each other, but working largely through drawings and pantomime, he’s able to convey to them that he felt safe and comfortable during his time here, having been fed and sheltered, preferring this to living like just another animal.

It’s an unexpected turn, to say the least, and it prompts a council meeting to debate what to do with him. Could they just keep him on as their “guest” indefinitely? Could he be shamming, only here for a chance at the Stone? But if he could turn invisible, couldn’t he have already done so? They recalled the reaction he’d had to seeing Jenner before, and with him out of the picture at least temporarily, it might lessen the chance of him reverting to Uhrstegg. But Nicodemus also believes, given Ghormfisk’s past connection to the Stone, that it should be kept out of his sight and not be discussed or referred to in his presence.

On Lahaikshe, Johnathan and Jenner actually grow closer, having so much in common now: they’re both essentially stranded there, separated from all they know and love. Johnathan is by now convinced that Jenner is free of any outside influence, as they while away the hours exploring the surrounding countryside and meeting the people, but also speculating on what’s happening back home and discussing what they’ll do after they return. Johnathan especially is confident that they will, though he can’t explain why, precisely.

Back home, Madeline is convinced by Nicodemus to move her family to the Rosebush, at least until Johnathan’s return. She’s now able to help the Rats with their future plans, certain that Johnathan would agree that they’d want to make a home in Thorn Valley with the Rats. She and the older children are enrolled in their school and swiftly make new friends, finding that they have more in common with these rat children than most mouse children they’ve met.

For those first few weeks, Madeline has little contact with the Stone; but then, almost on impulse, she asks Nicodemus to let her look at it, believing it might be a source of comfort in Johnathan’s absence. He allows it, with neither prepared for what follows: the amulet glows in her hands, and, unable to look away, they see on its face an image of Johnathan in an unfamiliar setting. Seconds later it fades, but she has no doubt about its meaning: that not only is she able to control the Stone as Johnathan did, but he—as well as Jenner—is alive and well.

It’s as great a surprise to Nicodemus, who hadn’t expected another to be able to control it so readily—unlike the green stranger, who appeared to have used other means. But they instantly recognize the potential in this new development; and over the next two hours, they test what she can do: transporting her away for short distances, simple levitation of herself and objects. Madeline takes to her newfound command of the amulet very readily, understandable considering she was already well acquainted with its capabilities. But it quickly becomes clear, especially as she tries another look at Johnathan, that their highest priority should be to use it to go find her husband and Jenner and bring them home. There’s only a brief debate, mainly concerning the idea that Johnathan had been sent by the Stone to this other place for a specific reason—and Jenner basically only along for the ride—and that, maybe, he isn’t meant to return right away. In the end, Madeline’s main point in favor of this mission—“I don’t care about that, I just want my husband back!”—wins out.

A mission is quickly planned; Madeline is impatient, though she agrees that they can’t just rush off. Justin immediately volunteers to accompany her, and thinks they should bring at least one other Guard rat; but, she unexpectedly suggests, one other should make the trip with them: Ghormfisk. He obviously belongs there, wherever “there” is, more than here; and Nicodemus gives his approval, but urges caution in case he reverts to his “trickster” personality and tries to make a play for the Stone.

After a brief council meeting, Nicodemus and the mission party go to the secure room housing Ghormfisk. He’d been made comfortable and well provided for, as before, and even taken on escorted tours of the colony. But though he’s appreciative, he’s getting a bit restless and starting to ask what they plan to do with him eventually. Now, Nicodemus conveys to him that they’re taking him along on a little trip, gently suggesting that he allow himself to be blindfolded before they begin. He agrees out of curiosity, but the truth is that they prefer he not witness, at least not right away, their use of the Stone.

The four of them—Madeline, Justin, Melvin and Ghormfisk—join hands in a circle; all but Ghormfisk concentrate on making their destination the same as Johnathan and Jenner’s, and having the Stone accompany them. It works, the Stone bringing them to a pitch-black cavern, with all of them feeling exhausted, but not for long. Ghormfisk seems to recover faster, and to the others’ surprise, is heard to say, “I—must—have—it!” as he crawls closer toward Madeline.

But the others had planned for this probability. The Stone had shown them how Johnathan and Jenner had found themselves in this same cavern, and that something had caused them to collapse upon arrival. Upon further study, they’d determined that it was an effect produced by the Stone when performing a more sizable task; and so, the “rescue party” had prepared for the same. They were also aware that this transference could trigger a change in Ghormfisk to the “trickster”, who could attempt to take the Stone; so they planned accordingly. Justin and Melvin formed a protective phalanx around Madeline, making it that much more difficult for Ghormfisk to get at her, or more specifically the Stone. For her part, Madeline tried her best to fall forward so that the Stone would be beneath her, uncomfortable though it might be for her.

The plan works, and though hearing Ghormfisk speak in English is surprising, the two rats, weak as they all are, are able to protect Madeline and ward him off. But instead of staying in the cavern, Ghormfisk crawls away on hands and knees out of the chamber. The others are still too weak to follow him, but by the time they recover sufficiently, they find it doesn’t matter; Ghormfisk had “escaped” via the wrong tunnel, the one that dead-ends instead of leading to the surface. The Stone is by now providing illumination, and when they catch up with Ghormfisk, Madeline uses the Stone to hold him fast and bring him with them through the tunnel that would lead them out.

Shortly, they discover the Stone’s translating capability; and so, during the “tunnel trudge,” they question Ghormfisk—whose “new” persona calls himself Uhrstegg—though he isn’t especially forthcoming, saying only that this world isn’t his and that he’d escape them yet. This world, they wondered? It becomes all too clear once they reach the surface: this is an entirely different world than Earth they’ve found themselves in.

The surprises continue to come fast and furiously: barely had they begun their trek down the trail they found that they’re met by three individuals, two of them familiar: Johnathan and Jenner, accompanied by a blue-skinned humanoid named Gwinthrayle, who offers to take them all to his home. There is quite a mixture of emotions at this meeting: the Brisbys’ unbridled joy at their reunion, curiosity and confusion over this strange place and this representative of its people, Justin’s indignation over Jenner’s past assault on him, and surprise upon seeing the green stranger among the rescue party and apparently their prisoner, and that Madeline now has command of the Stone. There is anger from Jenner at seeing the one who had treated him like a pawn, which Johnathan and Gwinthrayle are able to temper; and, too, there is skepticism from Melvin that his father had actually been a pawn. Explanations proceed as Gwinthrayle brings everyone to his abode: that this world is called Lahaikshe, his people Rusay, and that all of them are now his honored guests; and that he may be able to do something for Ghormfisk, which he confirms is equally a stranger to this world.

There’s much more story-swapping at Gwinthrayle’s home, beginning with how, upon coming here, Jenner had no hostility toward Johnathan; and how, as they suspected, Gwinthrayle had confirmed that Uhrstegg’s spell upon Jenner had fallen away. They meet Gwinthrayle’s colleague Birantha, and together they detail the Stone’s origins and are able to treat Ghormfisk’s dual-personality condition. Before the day is through, they’d all heard his story of how his condition had been the result of an intense psychological trauma from losing his people, an event quickly proven to be false. Johnathan uses the Stone to send him to his people’s new home—an unsatisfying resolution for Jenner, still quite perturbed over having been Uhrstegg’s pawn over little more than a whim on his part. But he looks forward to returning home as much as the others, anxious to square things with Nicodemus and his wife and children. Melvin is by now convinced that his father’s feelings were genuine and vows to help him set things right. Gwinthrayle offers his departing guests a standing invitation to return anytime, and they accept. Even in the relatively short time Johnathan and Jenner had been here, they’d developed quite a fondness for the place, a feeling shared by those who’d come here to bring the pair home as well.

The foregoing situation, of course, closely parallels the one that actually happened, but this one takes place at a much earlier point in time, its resolution occurring some two years earlier. And in this case too, they are left with lingering mysteries, mainly how and why the Stone “chose” Johnathan and Madeline, which seemed not a random choice. But now they’re able to concentrate all their energies on the Thorn Valley Plan, which proceeds apace. They resume paying regular visits to Kimball, Patricia and Vincent, and firming up plans to bring them and their children into the fold once they’ve relocated to Thorn Valley. The Stone is now being utilized to move people and materials to and from the valley, speeding up progress considerably. Matilda is convinced to take Jenner back. Jenner is shown firsthand how the Plan is proceeding, and is further convinced that it’s worthwhile. The Brisby children are enthralled with the amazing story their daddy has to tell and look forward to seeing this “new” world for themselves someday.

There is still the apparent mystery, though, of why the amulet ‘chose’ Madeline, as if she were truly one of them. Johnathan had believed that from the time they’d met, he’d influenced her in some way, to the point where she was more like him, something she believed herself. Could this be a clue? Did Johnathan himself hold the key, as if this were a unique ability or talent? For now, though, they concentrate on their renewed family life while becoming even more a part of the Rosebush community, eventually to become the Thorn Valley community.

Using the Stone in their outside operations, especially in moving personnel and materials between the Fitzgibbons farm and Thorn Valley, means avoiding Dragon is hardly an issue, and so Johnathan is never called upon to perform cat-drugging duty. They’re still careful to conduct outside activity in as much secrecy as possible; but the fact that Dragon poses so little a threat prompts some to exercise less-than-perfect judgment.

Martin Brisby, like his sibs, had become very much a part of the Rats’ community in recent months, attending their school and making new friends. But there was that streak in him, of adventurousness bordering on recklessness, that leads him to venture outside the Rosebush one afternoon, disregarding any cautions, especially the ones about not going aboveground alone or in broad daylight. His midday jaunt soon brings him to the garden, specifically that big, unusually-shaped stone he’d wanted to see up close. But barely before he knows what’s happening, he finds himself cornered by Dragon, with no way out.

Dragon pounces upon and pins Martin, who screams for help; but, before the cat could inflict any serious injury, help arrives in the form of Johnathan and the Stone. He wills it to pull Dragon up and away from his son, after which he whisks them away to safety.

Though the immediate crisis was over, he’d overlooked one important detail: that the scene hadn’t gone unwitnessed. Mr. Fitzgibbons and his son Billy had been nearby when, upon hearing Dragon giving forth an unnatural-sounding “rowr,” witnessed their pet floating through the air for several feet, after which he made a gentle landing and took off like a rocket for the house. They approached the area he’d floated from and were just in time to see a mouse, or perhaps two, briefly surrounded by a red glow that was followed by a brighter flash, after which he was gone. Neither believed his eyes, of course, but father and son quickly realized they’d seen the same thing. But what was that, exactly? After searching the immediate area, they had to conclude that this was one of those things that one just can’t explain.

Down below, Martin is determined to have no serious injuries, though he is badly shaken and chastened over his own recklessness. But the fact that he had been out in the open prompts Johnathan and Nicodemus to use their own resources to make sure there were no witnesses; and, alas, they find that there were. But how much did they actually see? Johnathan volunteers to do a little spying to find out, and so he “sits in” on the Fitzgibbons’ dinner, staying out of sight and listening in. Sure enough, Mrs. Fitzgibbons gets quite an earful from her husband and son about the bizarre sights they’d seen in the garden. They discuss what to do or who to tell and conclude that they should do or say nothing, at least for the time being. Johnathan is relieved to hear this, as are the others when he reports back; but they agree that the situation should be monitored closely in case word does get out.

Their concerns are well-founded. It seems that Billy Fitzgibbons lets slip some details of the incident to a friend or two at school, and in short order it gets around to a less-than-reputable newspaper. They print a story on it without even actually having interviewed anyone in the family. Their name isn’t even included, and a lot of details are different from what actually happened, so it wouldn’t be taken seriously by anyone…or would it? At any rate, Nicodemus and company do get wind of the story, realizing it could mean increased outside scrutiny to the area.

This proves true, at first in the form of a relatively harmless curiosity-seeker or two poking around, promptly confronted and chased off the farm by Mr. Fitzgibbons. But one day an official U.S. government vehicle comes by with two agents inside. They ask if there was any truth, or even an inkling, to the tabloid story. The family is actually amused that the government would actually have any interest in such a story, but they tell all they know. It seems good enough for the agents, though, who begin poking around themselves. The entire colony keeps below while this is going on, but Nicodemus and Johnathan are using the means at their disposal for observing their activities. There is some consternation when the agents take their investigation to the rosebush; everyone is prepared for an emergency evacuation, but thankfully the agents don’t find the colony’s entrance because it had been so well concealed.

They leave, apparently satisfied at finding nothing; but the objects of their search agree that that was too close for comfort. It’s quickly decided by unanimous vote that the move to Thorn Valley should be completed as soon as possible. In addition, Johnathan and Madeline would use the Stone to keep tabs on the activities of the two agents over the ensuing days. Were they finished there, or would they return with other people or equipment? This way there should be no surprise raid; if they returned, the Rats would already have gone, leaving no trace.

Again their concerns are well founded. Within a week the government agents are seen closing in, with reinforcements; and this time they’re definitely equipped to capture or kill their “lost property.” But this particular lost property had planned for this very well, having already relocated most of their population to Thorn Valley, leaving a skeleton crew of some sixteen rats, plus Mr. Ages and the Brisby parents, whose children had already been evacuated. Work on the new colony had been stepped up considerably, having been made easier by utilizing the Stone. The agents’ estimated time of arrival was closing in fast, but now all that was necessary was to deconstruct the remaining facilities and transport them out, erasing the last vestiges of the Rosebush colony’s presence. They succeed beautifully, with the agents coming up with no evidence whatsoever of any intelligent rats, despite all the equipment they’d brought.

The entire population is now safe in Thorn Valley, a good year and a half sooner than they would have otherwise relocated. Everyone is flush with the success of this day, but there would still be a great amount of work to be done. Over ensuing weeks, they continue settling into their new home, setting up the remaining facilities and living quarters. Many adjust quickly to the idea of more readily carrying out their activities in broad daylight, though some take more time to adapt. Life in this corner of Thorn Valley settles into a rhythm much different from that underneath the rosebush, marked by a more relaxed attitude and a sense almost of liberation; even though they weren’t really prisoners at the old colony, it now seemed that they were in comparison.

As he’d promised, Johnathan brings newcomers into the fold. The Davis family is thrilled with their new home, and days after their arrival Patricia gives birth to the newest Davis children, Bertram, Ellis and Lucille. Vincent, determined to overcome his agoraphobia, successfully makes the move as well. His temporary mates, Nina and Maisie, and their children, are brought in as well. Nicodemus takes Maisie’s son Rollo under his wing to see what he could do for his condition. Vincent’s latest temporary mate, Daria, and Boris and Doris, the three-month-old twins he’d fathered, are also taken in; and before long, Daria agrees to be Vincent’s permanent mate.

With some effort, Vincent is able to adjust to his new living situation; and as he learns more about the history of this community, and with his well-established penchant for record-keeping, he partners with Tallus in maintaining the colony archives. He grows especially curious of the Stone and its potential, and sits in on many a session with Johnathan and/or Madeline as they use it to view scenes from the past.

In ensuing weeks, Nina, Maisie, and Daria feel increasingly at home there as well, as much as their children. The former two don’t resent Vincent’s presence and aren’t especially uncomfortable around him; but he’s nothing if not observant, and one day he approaches Johnathan with the idea that the three mothers of his children had changed since their arrival. He’s not the first to notice that the natural mice are starting to become more like the advanced mice in their overall manner, but he is the first to suggest that something—or someone—there is responsible.

Before long Vincent has a particular someone in mind: Johnathan. He’s unable to say precisely how he arrived at his theory, but Johnathan knows him well enough by now to take him seriously. He does some investigating with the Stone with Vincent looking on, and they discover a possible connection: that Johnathan had shared meals with all three of the naturals—more accurately, specific foodstuffs. He and Madeline were already aware that she’d become like him by virtue of being his mate; but was there more to it?

Further investigation seems to confirm that sharing food played a big part, and it all leads to the discovery that Johnathan had been doing this since the Wandering days, and that there were many mice out there who’d been so influenced. One of them is tracked down and directly approached: Burrum, who years ago had eaten from a peach that Johnathan had fed from earlier while the Original 22 passed through an orchard. He agrees to be brought to Thorn Valley where he becomes a test case of a sort; and the tests he agrees to be put through seem to confirm that Johnathan had indeed unknowingly made him into one of them. The one that especially clinches it is the reading test; Burrum takes to it very quickly.

Johnathan himself is able to come to terms with this knowledge quickly, and work continues on seeking out as many others that can be tracked down with the Stone, and bringing them in as well. All tell similar stories of being shunned by most of their peers, and all accept the offer to settle in Thorn Valley. As for Vincent, who had put all of this in motion, he’s still unable to articulate how he’d been able to “connect the dots” as he had; but it increases his standing in the community considerably. There had been some doubts in the beginning about his being able to fit in, but he’d tried and for the most part succeeded in overcoming his agoraphobia and now is not only feeling more at home but is even offered a seat on the council.

Work to track down and bring in these newcomer mice continues throughout the colony’s first winter in Thorn Valley. Events continue to match closely those that really happened, but at earlier points in time. Another important difference is the content of the colony’s population, with almost as many Mice as Rats now. The Brisby children were now growing up with not only all the advanced Rat children but with other advanced Mouse children as well. Lasting friendships, and more, which otherwise would never have occurred or would have occurred later, were now being forged. Plus, Nicodemus and Johnathan utilize their resources to keep tabs on any possible future intrusion into their new home. Just as they hadn’t been taken by surprise at the Rosebush, neither would they be caught unawares if NIMH was able to track them to Thorn Valley.

Another big concern, especially for Nicodemus, is Rollo. He’s certain he could do something for the lad, perhaps utilizing his own extraordinary abilities which are still something of a mystery. There are many sessions where he attempts to connect with Rollo mentally. More and more, Nicodemus is making it his foremost personal mission to get through to Rollo, even bring him out of the state he’s in as best he can. His mother is skeptical of this at first, even resentful, but she eventually comes around once she starts seeing actual results, in the form of Rollo being able to form actual words—especially “Mother.” His brother Ardo, who had always been devoted to him, is thrilled at the prospect of having a brother who would be able to interact with him the way he’d always wished.

Unfortunately for Nicodemus, it’s becoming more evident that his time is short, and it gives his mission an added urgency. The reasons for his accelerated aging, he’d assumed, were largely the result of his special abilities gradually wearing away at him, an assumption that would eventually be proven true.

Into the spring, events that matched actual ones but earlier in time continue to unfold: the Brisbys welcoming more children into the family, Justin getting married, and even a confirmed bachelor like Mr. Ages finding a mate as well. The Brisbys and others take up Gwinthrayle’s open invitation and visit his home on Lahaikshe, in the process gaining an even greater fondness for the place—even suggesting half-seriously that they could move to this world permanently, since it seems so well-suited for them.

It’s a suggestion that leads to a surprising amount of serious discussion back home. Some, such as Jenner, aren’t especially receptive: could they really pull up stakes and move from Thorn Valley, especially considering they’d just begun to settle in here? But all the while, they are continuing to monitor the situation with those government agents that had almost discovered them on the farm and others they communicated with—anyone and anything that would indicate possible human encroachment. There are debates over whether the humans would give up their search or continue; and if the worst-case scenario does come to pass, where would they go?

But a more immediate concern centers upon Nicodemus and Rollo. Nicodemus is certain he won’t last much longer, and arrangements are made to have him and Rollo be guests at Gwinthrayle’s home, where he and Birantha would search for means to help both of them. Nicodemus had already relinquished leadership to Justin and Johnathan, who promised to continue to monitor possible outside intrusion.

Inevitably that intrusion becomes imminent; but they are, as before, prepared to take action. It had been almost two years to the day since they’d moved to Thorn Valley; the matter had been discussed time and again, and now they all knew the time for mere discussion is over. Everyone knows what form that action would most likely take. There are many, Jenner being the most vocal, who chafe at being forced to move again, though he’s thinking more pragmatically these days and is willing to go along with the majority. There is even discussion of not only evacuating the entire population to Lahaikshe, but of bringing a piece of Thorn Valley as well, and of whether it could be done. It’s agreed that they would not wait until the last minute, with the humans closing in, but the move would be done in stages, climaxing with the colony itself and adjacent land, once it was determined it could be done. Nicodemus was notified of the plan and gave his blessing and approval.

The end result is that this colony of advanced Rats and Mice makes its new home on a world alien yet welcoming, as if by destiny—again, just as it did in actuality, but at an earlier point in time.

And Nicodemus and Rollo? After considerable research by their sorcerer-hosts, a spell had been weaved, one which would, at the moment of Nicodemus’s death, transfer his spirit into the body of Rollo, where he would attempt to heal Rollo’s brain from within. A few weeks after the entire community had relocated to its new location on the Great Red Plain, the moment comes when Nicodemus’s aged body fails him completely. He is surrounded by those he loves most when he passes on peacefully.

The spell works as planned; it does not allow him to talk through Rollo’s body or otherwise be completely in charge of it, but now he can restore Rollo’s brain to normal interaction with his body. It’s a complete success, and now he’s able to truly “meet” his family and friends for the first time.

Everyone is sorry to bid farewell to Nicodemus, but their sorrow is mitigated by his success with Rollo, and with the knowledge that they would be much safer in their new environs. And too, there would be many discoveries to come, not the least of which would be the situation Freethorn—and all of Lahaikshe—would face concerning use of the Stone, which may well have played out as it had in reality.

Chapter 54 - Goodnights

“And so…if there’s anything more to add, it’s that these people would go on to make the best life and future they could on this new world…just as we will.”

Timothy took a deep breath at the conclusion of his story, taking another sip of smilath. From his audience there was a moment of silence before cries of “amen” rose from the crowd, followed by compliments on such an absorbing tale.

Nicodemus nodded approvingly. “Wonderfully done, my lad. It is indeed possible that whatever path our lives may have taken, they may very well have led right here, as if by destiny.”

Toward the end of the story, Timothy had appeared to Nicodemus a bit uncomfortable when he’d reached the part about Nicodemus’s help for Rollo following his death; but Nicodemus had let him know silently that his presumed faux pas didn’t bother him, even though the hoped-for results of the corresponding event, two days hence, couldn’t yet be known for certain.

“And to think it could have actually happened that way,” said Janice.

“Yeah, with all of us coming together years ago,” added Dupree. “Who knows what things would be like now?”

“And Lyndon ’n’ I were born earlier, weren’t we?” said Shawna. “And Vanessa and Kirk probably would’a been too.”

“That's right,” said Cynthia, “though you wouldn’t have been exactly the same. Mom might’ve had two girls or two boys instead.”

“And you weren’t kidding, Tim,” said Lucy, “when you said not everyone would come out very well.”

“I see what you mean,” said Boris. “My sister Doris and I came here with our mom, and…Nicodemus survived, and so did Jenner, but…some of us weren’t even born.”

“Hey, that’s right,” said Seelah. “Vincent only had children with Nina, Maisie and Daria, but…not with the others. And you and I never would have met either.”

“And I never met Harley,” said Jessica.

“Hey, that means we wouldn’t have been born either,” said Stuart.

“Or else we’d be different,” said Shirley, “’cause we’d have a different dad.”

“Same with Vera and me,” said Norman. “There’s no telling who any of us might have hooked up with,” he added with a laugh. He glanced toward Teresa, whose eyes momentarily met his.

“I might not have met Eric,” added Teresa. “And so he wouldn’t have come with us here. Of course, he would have been too young for me then.”

Eric nodded thoughtfully. “So I sure wouldn’t have gone through…all that I did later.”

“So we weren’t born either, were we?” said Torrance. “Or our younger sibs.”

“Wow, that seems a little weird,” said Hazel.

“It’s not fair,” said Ronjack, folding his arms and scowling.

“It’s just a story, Ronnie,” said Hazel.

“That’s right,” said Boris. “We’re all here now, alive and well, and that’s what counts.” He moved closer to his little half-brother. “Otherwise, I couldn’t do this!” He tickled Ronjack, playfully wrestling him to the floor amid shrieks and giggles.

Nicodemus chuckled. “I know some of you are thinking that it was not the fairest of trade-offs, that some survived who otherwise would have died, and many of you weren’t even born. Fate can indeed be capricious, sometimes with no apparent rhyme or reason for a particular turn of events. But I hold firm to the belief that there are a certain number of souls waiting to be born; and so if Timothy’s story were the reality, all of you would be here among us now, if not exactly the same.”

“You know, Tim,” said Boris with a more cheerful Ronjack on his lap, “I’d like to think that your story chronicles actual events that happened somewhere, someplace beyond our ken. It’s really comforting knowing that my sibs and I could have actually come to know our father, and that he and my mother could have been happy together.”

“And that Doris could have survived too,” said Seelah, kissing Boris’s cheek and leaning on his shoulder.

There was more post-story discussion, including much among those newcomer mice present, who marveled at the possibility that any of them could have been a part of this community so much sooner. Kimball and Patricia expressed their approval of Vincent’s part in the story, especially his role in uncovering Johnathan’s special abilities. Burrum was still excited from the idea that he’d been included in the story and had actually played a pivotal role, being the first of his kind to be “discovered.” Martin assured Timothy that he wasn’t bothered by the less-than-flattering role he played—compromising the colony’s security—though he kiddingly cautioned his brother that the newcomers might be led to believe that he’d been nothing but a problem child. And there was a brief debate about who Mr. Ages would have married, since Alma, like Eric or Sarah, would surely have been no more than an infant or yet unborn when the colony moved to Thorn Valley.

Some of the guests excused themselves, most to their own quarters or to meet with other friends or family, but two sought a little private time on the guest quarters’ flat rooftop. Teresa and Eric stood at the railing, gazing out upon the night. It had been raining off and on throughout the day; but in the past hour it had stopped, and the moon had begun to peek through the clouds, casting its silvery glow over the land. From there they could see Lake Nicodemus, appearing to glow with the moonlight, its smooth surface occasionally broken by the ripple of someone enjoying a nocturnal swim. Bits of conversation and laughter reached their ears from below, but it only enhanced rather than intruded upon the mood the evening was beginning to cast upon them.

They’d hardly spoken a word since coming up here, but now Teresa gave a contented sigh and said, “It’s going to be so nice. I know I always believed that, ever since I came here with the boys, but…after all that’s happened these last two days, and after hearing Tim’s story…I believe it more than ever. Oh, it’s going to be such a great life, Eric…for you and me, and for everyone. How can it not be?” They embraced.

“You know, baby,” said Eric at length, “all the time I was still on Earth, gathering all these mice, getting them ready to come here…it felt so great, it was just the best thing I could have been doing right then.”

“It really was. I’m so proud of you.”

“But you know…all that time, my thoughts were never far from you or our kids, and the day I’d be back with you again. I think that’s what kept me going the most, even though I knew that…you probably thought I was dead and you might have found someone else. But just knowing that you were back here and safe…I guess that was enough. Now…you and our boys are what’s most important to me. It sure is going to be a good life. I love you, Teresa. Nothing’ll keep us apart, ever again.” They kissed, continuing to murmur endearments; then they returned their attentions to the view.

Soon they were aware that they weren’t alone. “Hi, Teresa. Hi, Eric. I know I’m probably intruding, but…”

“It’s all right, Norman,” said Teresa. “What can we do for you?” She knew full well, of course, what was coming; and soon, Eric excused himself and went back inside.

Norman breathed in deep. “Well…first, I wanted to let you know that…there’s no way I’m going to try to come between you and Eric. You and he belong together, anybody with eyes can see that. And after all he’s been through, and all he’s done for us, for Freethorn…I couldn’t do that to him. So…whatever you and he decide, that’s what goes. I’ll abide by it.”

“Well, I appreciate your telling me, Norman. I’m glad we had…the time together we did have, but I’m also glad you understand about Eric. Two days ago, I never would have believed he would be back in my life. But now…all the old feelings have come back, for both of us, and he and the boys have taken to each other like they’ve always known each other. It just…all feels so right. We’re a real family now, and we both want us to stay that way.”

“And I hope you do, Teresa. I’m really happy for you both. I know when Eric and all the others showed up like they did yesterday, I didn’t know what to make of it, like everyone else. But I knew right away things wouldn’t be the same, in so many ways. I’ve had time to think, and…well, we have all these new mice now, and there are more than a few single females among them; and after hearing Tim’s story and all that talk about choices and possibilities, well…”

“I did notice that look you gave me in there. But it’s all right, I understand. And you’ll find someone, Norman. I’ve heard there’s one or two who are definitely interested in you.” Teresa gave a coy smile.

“Well, I’ll admit that’s part of why I joined the liaison committee.”

Teresa put a hand to her mouth, finding the admission humorous. “Well, whatever you choose, or whoever…we’ll always be here for each other, won’t we? Just to have someone to talk to, or share a laugh, or who’ll just listen…”

“You bet, kid. Always.” They embraced. There was no need to say they’d “still be friends.” If asked, both would surely reply, how could they not be? For now, they wished each other good luck before going back inside.

Back in the guest quarters, a few of the Rusay visitors’ guests still remained; but most had left by now, especially those mice who had moved into new quarters and living arrangements, eager to spend their first nights together as married couples. The atmosphere throughout Freethorn was at once relaxed and charged with excitement and anticipation.

Teresa and Eric carried their sleepy-eyed youngsters to their quarters, where their houseguests—six in number—were already “camped out” for the night in the courtyard that duplicated the one outside the home they shared briefly in Thorn Valley. Sarah was there already, having left the party earlier, and was having a pre-bed chat with their guests. After putting the boys to bed, her brother and sister-in-law joined them for a few minutes before saying their goodnights. They looked in on Tyler and Eric Jr. again, silently watching them fall asleep completely. Before retiring, Sarah took a moment to tell the couple once again how happy she was about their reunion.

Shortly, after both had brushed their teeth and undressed, Teresa stood in front of the full-length mirror, brushing the fur on her neck and the side of her face as they discussed possibilities in Sarah’s love life. Teresa had noticed her interest in Norman after his return, and she’d heard that she might be interested in Reuben as well. Certainly both of them had many choices, especially now; it would be interesting to see how it all played out.

“Are you excited about starting classes tomorrow, Eric?” Teresa asked as she brushed her left arm and side.

“Uh-huh. It’ll be interesting.” Eric came up behind her, stroking her shoulders.

“You’ll be sharing classes with a lot of kids, but there’ll be plenty of adults too. And I bet you’d have a thing or two to…teach them…” Teresa’s voice fell away as Eric drew his arms around her, nuzzling her neck. She set the brush down, sighing deeply as his hands roamed over her torso.

“Teresa…oh, baby, I missed you so much…” he whispered in her ear.

Teresa turned, gazing into his eyes, stroking his face, responding eagerly to his overtures. A thought occurred as they embraced tightly, about how thankful she was that she and Norman hadn’t taken things very far. She paused to put out the light before they moved to the bed. They hadn’t shared it last night, believing it best to give themselves at least one day to adjust to this new situation. Now, neither doubted that that was all the time necessary. They laughed and sighed as they tumbled into bed.

“Oh, Eric,” Teresa said breathlessly after a lengthy kiss. “This is like…our first night together in Thorn Valley…only so much better.” Indeed, it was the uncertainty of their situation and their sudden aloneness that had fueled their reaching out to each other that night, but there was none of that present now.

“I know,” Eric said hoarsely, caressing her back and sides. He made to say more, decided it unnecessary, and kissed her again.

Timothy and Lucy paused after closing the door and turning on the light, looking around at the quarters they now shared. “Honey, we’re home!” Timothy announced with a grin. Lucy laughed, embracing and kissing him. They sat down on the loveseat together, at first just cuddling and kissing silently.

“They really liked your story tonight, Tim,” Lucy said at length. “So did I.”

“Thanks. There was that moment toward the end that was a bit awkward, even though Nicodemus assured me he didn’t mind.”

“I can’t imagine what that must be like. I don’t know how Jessie seems to handle it so well. And she really loves him.”

“They both say they’ve accepted what’ll happen. We just have to take their word, I guess.” After a pause Timothy added, “There was something else, at the end of my story, when I mentioned the situation we recently faced. I got that feeling again, that there’s something missing, something important about that whole situation that…I don’t know, it’s like we all forgot it, like collective amnesia. I guess I first got it at Gwinthrayle’s yesterday, when Lilia and I went by the place where she met the min’hathio. It’s not like my usual intuition either. I don’t really know what to make of it, but…I also get the feeling that it’ll become clearer eventually.”

“Well, old wise one…I wouldn’t know what to say about that, but…you and I might as well…get ready for bed.”

Timothy easily discerned the nervousness in her voice, as well as the subtext. “Well, I’m…ready when you are.” He was aware of his own nervousness as they stood up together. When it feels natural for both of us, and not like we’re forcing it, he thought as they prepared to brush their teeth and make other preparations for their first night together as a married couple.

Afterwards, they walked slowly into the bedroom and climbed into bed, resuming their conversation. Recalling how some were surprised at their marrying this soon, they discussed the point anew, though there really wasn’t much to discuss now, since that had been done pretty thoroughly the night before, when they and many of their friends met at Tara and Bertie’s quarters. In the course of an hour-plus, they’d solidified their plans for today, agreeing that not only were they ready to take this important step, but others were as well; and in surprisingly short order, all five couples had agreed to make the next day’s event into a mass wedding. When Nicodemus was approached on the matter, he agreed without hesitation to make the occasion “six times the honor,” and the parents of all the prospective brides and grooms were also told, all pledging to keep the plans under wraps—except for Johnathan, of course, who was told privately after his return from Gwinthrayle’s and this morning’s general meeting and gave his wholehearted approval, once he was over the initial surprise

Now, this new happy couple continued their discussion; really just small talk, which became even smaller as they continued to kiss and hug, allowing their hands to roam more and more freely. Any remaining nervousness faded as they became more attuned to each other’s feelings and desires, as if in a trance, neither saying a word but allowing plenty of sighs and moans to leave their lips.

Timothy finally said, “Remember, Lucy…a few days ago, when…I said you’d find your own special talent one of these days?”

Lucy looked up from nuzzling and kissing his chest. “Yeah?”

“Well…I have the feeling we’re both going to find out what it is tonight.”

Lucy gaped for a moment, then she laughed and gave him a playful swat on the arm before returning to her ministrations.

Across Freethorn, there was a mood, greater than in recent days, of new beginnings, of reaching out; of indulging in the company of friends and family, in small groups or more intimate meetings. In the Rat colony, one couple, easily the most unique mated pair, were just saying goodnight to friends.

“Well, alone at last, babe,” said Bertie as Tara closed the door. They sat down together on the sofa, Bertie on Tara’s lap, head against her chest. They talked about recent events, both typical and untypical; and their plans for the future, immediate and long-range.

“It does feel strange,” Bertie said at length, “being the only mouse in Freethorn making his home in the Rat colony. ’Course, it wouldn’t have to stay that way. They’re saying the differences between the colonies could become smaller eventually.”

“Mm-hm. And some of the new Mice who’re staying with some of the Rats for now might make more permanent arrangements here.”

“It’s like there’s less and less difference between us, the longer we’re here. I wonder…could anyone else do what we’ve done, or are we a one-shot deal?”

“Who knows? I guess…if anyone’s willing to test the theory…” Tara sighed, placing one hand on her abdomen.

“Heyyy, what’s wrong? You’re not worried about little Alonzo in here, are you? How he’ll turn out?”

Tara looked at Bertie, seeing the earnestness and genuine care in his eyes, and smiled as she thought of how much he’d grown lately, how responsive to her moods he’d become. “No, sweetie, not really. It’s just…I don’t know, just hormones, I guess.”

“It’s going to be great being parents, Tara, for both of us. I just know it. And he…or she is going to turn out perfect, just beautiful.” He lowered his head, putting an ear to her belly. “Hey, little squirt, I can hear you swimmin’ around in there…almost. You’re already taking after your mom.”

Tara laughed and kissed his crown, and the pair discussed possible names, besides “Alonzo,” and how many she could be carrying, though the initial examinations suggested only one. They continued talking for another thirty-odd minutes before retiring.

Nicodemus and Jessica, just returning from their nocturnal stroll, paused at one of the Mouse colony’s entrances to chat with Janice, Sibelle and Dupree for a few minutes before proceeding down the corridor to his quarters.

“Did you notice Sibelle, when we were talking about Norman?” said Jessica. “The way her eyes lit up…just like during the party. She could hardly take her eyes away from him.”

“Yes, and he seemed to be returning her affections, as well.”

“I do hope he’s settled things with Teresa, though, now that she and Eric are rebuilding their life together.”

They continued their slow stroll, mostly in silence, soon passing the quarters Ellis and Lilia now shared. They could clearly hear bits of conversation punctuated by laughter and sighs, and they smiled and moved on, discussing how much the young couple deserved their present happiness. A little further, and they passed the home of Michael and Cynthia, whose presence was perhaps more obvious, with their moans and sighs of passion filtering out into the corridor for anyone to hear. It was a sound which, in most human societies, would elicit reactions ranging from embarrassment to outrage. But these creatures have little such precepts about sexual behavior; and so Nicodemus and Jessica merely smiled at each other and proceeded to his own quarters, taking a noticeably faster pace than before.

They stopped by Jessica’s quarters to look in on her children, who’d be spending tonight on their own, and probably tomorrow night as well; their mother being certain it posed no problem, and with Stuart and Shirley eager to prove how responsible they were in looking after their younger siblings.

In Nicodemus’s quarters they sat down together, embracing and kissing, keeping any conversation light, mostly on plans over the next two days. They’d agreed since this morning to avoid referring directly to what would follow and to strive to live in the here and now, spending as much time as they could together. Yet, even as they settled into bed, wrapped in the warmth of each other, both knew, deep down, that this may not be best; that the opposite extreme, staying separate, could be the best way to ensure Nicodemus’s being able to successfully carry out the “turnover” plan—provided he was still fully committed to it, despite his oft-stated insistence that he was. But their needs, physical and emotional, to love and be loved, were too powerful for either to deny or suppress; and, both would insist, well worth the risk and something they had as much a right to as anyone. Indeed, who would deny it?

They fell asleep quickly after making love, with barely another thought of what may lay ahead.

Not far away, another married couple, though not a new one, were contemplating how recent events had affected them. As Alma Ages finished tucking in the children and making her own preparations for bed, she looked upon Cyril lying in bed already, staring at the ceiling. He smiled at her as she settled in beside him, nuzzling his shoulder.

“What are you thinking about?” she asked casually.

“Oh…nothing important, just…” Cyril sighed. “I suppose I should tell you. When we learned…about Johnathan, how he was able to affect other mice to become as we are…including you…I was, I suppose, a bit troubled about that…”

“Why, Cyril? Was it because…it wasn’t you?”

“Yes, yes. It’s irrational, downright silly even. When we consider that there were many others besides you that were affected…”

“But…he found that it was when he and Madeline shared food with me, when they and you first visited my family.” They both remembered well that visit over two years ago, during a goodwill day trip around the north end of Thorn Valley—one which eventually led to Alma’s estrangement from her family after she and Cyril were married.

“I know, I know. I guess…because we’d already speculated that your time with me had influenced you like Madeline with Johnathan, at least in part, that…oh, like I said, silly and irrational. I mean, it’s not as if I resent Johnathan for it; he didn’t even know it was happening.”

“Cyril…” Alma cuddled up closer to him, rubbing his chest. “I’ll always be grateful to Johnathan, but…it’s you I chose, it’s you I love.”

“I know, Alma…my love. I feel the same way.” He leaned over to kiss her. “I mean, it sounds almost as if I’m jealous, but really it’s just…” He paused to look upon her smiling face in the dim light. He chuckled. “Silly nonsense, that’s what it is.” He reached over to pull her closer to him. “What isn’t nonsense is…that you and I should have a long, happy life together…thanks to Johnathan.” They kissed again.

Before going to sleep, they discussed others that had seen the same benefits, one family of newcomer mice in particular: Ivy, her husband Brant, their son Fred and daughters Jean and Kay. They were another family that had lived in Thorn Valley and been visited by Johnathan the previous spring, with Ivy the one who had received his benefits. Her husband and children were among those involved in the “passing-on” ceremony this afternoon, and it was during it that their family connection with Alma was revealed: Ivy was her niece, the daughter of her older brother Roger, who had left home before Alma had met Cyril. Further inquiries had revealed that all in Alma’s immediate family at that time—parents Jesse and Mona, and siblings Zack and Trudi, as well as Roger—had passed on naturally. Alma had remained estranged from them since becoming Mrs. Ages, at first not highly concerned with anything but her new life with Cyril and their growing family, remaining adamant that if there were to be any reconciliation with her old family, they should be the ones to make the first move. For the better part of two years she hadn’t wavered, having become so much a part of this community; though, following the Great Migration to Lahaikshe, she’d expressed some regret at not trying to reach out to them. But now, at least, she could look forward to having more family near her again, and getting to know them.

Chapter 55 - Exhibitions and confessions

The next day, work continued to get the newcomer mice acclimated to their new environment, with plans for more permanent living arrangements going ahead full-steam. In the morning, Johnathan again used his “amulet power” to reshape the rock to create a new set of living quarters, finding he had a greater degree of control than last night’s try. He again allowed some of the newcomer mice to watch, explaining how this was only the beginning of a project which, at present, was estimated to take two weeks, possibly less.

Not far away, another project was just nearing completion; and by late afternoon, its creator had the word spread that it was ready for viewing, but not yet by the general public. First there would be a more private viewing, for a select few.

When the knock upon the front door came, Patricia dashed to answer it with the enthusiasm of one much younger.

“Welcome, welcome, everyone!” she greeted each of the guests with a hug as they entered the apartment.

“Where is it, Grandma? Over there?”

“Now, Clifford,” said Jessica. “Let’s be patient, shall we? You know we’ll all get to see it.”

Kimball walked in from the next room, aided by a crutch, and all four of the children dashed to greet him, surprised not only to see him there but how well he was getting around.

“Wow, Grandpa,” enthused Shirley in the middle of a hug, “we didn’t know they were letting you come home today.”

“And letting you walk upright,” added Stuart, “even if it is with a crutch.”

Kimball laughed. “Well, they couldn’t see any further reason to keep me. My leg is so much stronger now, they think I’ll be able to toss aside the crutch in a day or two. I might not even need much physical therapy for it.” He looked down at Clifford and Diane, stroking their heads. “I’ll be outracing you kids before you know it.” He looked up to Nicodemus. “And you, my friend…until I know for sure who to thank for this, you’ll continue to do for now.”

Nicodemus readily accepted Kimball’s gratitude; but, unnoticed by the others, Stuart and Shirley exchanged knowing looks. How much longer? each asked inwardly. They’d have to share what they knew with someone eventually.

Patricia steered everyone toward her studio, explaining how she’d put in the finishing touches last night and allowed the paint to finish drying overnight. Everyone gathered in front of the three easels, still covered with a sheet.

“She wouldn’t even let me get a look at it before now,” remarked Kimball with a chuckle.

“Well, the long wait is finally over,” said Patricia, standing before the easels. “I wanted to hold off on anyone seeing my last two days’ work until I put in those finishing touches. I think they give it just the right look I wanted to achieve to more properly make this a fitting monument. So, without further ado, may I present…” She turned and pulled away the sheet. “…‘Nicodemus, Past and Present.’”

Everyone had to catch his or her breath upon seeing the finished product. Though all had seen it as a work in progress, there was no doubt the “finishing touches” made it worth the wait. The first of the three panels depicted Nicodemus in his prime, as he was after the Escape from NIMH, standing at the crest of a hill, regarding the just-breaking sunrise with a determined expression, ready to lead his followers into a future they would make for themselves. The second portrayed him as he was toward the end of his first life, still every bit the dignified, commanding presence despite his agedness, standing in front of his desk in his office, with his viewscreen to one side. The third panel presented him as all in Freethorn knew him now: in Rollo’s body, with many of the younger residents, those who’d only known him this way, surrounding him as he regaled them with stories. Patricia allowed her audience to view the work up close but warned them not to touch anything yet, as the paint might need a little more time to set completely.

“Ah, yes,” said Kimball with a hint of awe, “that is certainly how I pictured you and your fellows, Nicodemus, just after you’d escaped, forging boldly ahead, letting nothing stand in your way…” Indeed, the basic design of the first panel had been Kimball’s idea. “Oh, you were right, love, in waiting till now to unveil this. Those new pigments add such depth, it’s amazing.”

This added depth had an even greater effect on the youngsters. Clifford moved back and forth continuously, alternating between viewing the work up close and further away, trying to fathom how something painted on a flat surface could appear as three-dimensional as this. Diane couldn’t help giggling at this, though she was equally awestruck. “I feel like I could reach right in there!” she exclaimed.

This “3-D” quality was having a different effect on their siblings. “Look at how the colors of the sunrise stand out,” Shirley pointed out.

“Yeah, like it’s more than just…sitting there on the canvas,” observed Stuart. “Kind of like Lilia when she…uh…”

“Er, when she’s…out at night, in the moonlight, and her fur almost seems to glow.”

“Yeah, that’s the way Ellis described it.” The twins caught each other’s eye briefly, hoping Stuart’s near-slip hadn’t aroused anyone’s curiosity too much.

The middle panel probably held the most fascination for this group, since none of them had known Nicodemus at this stage. They’d all known, of course, that he’d looked like this once, but to actually see him brought to life in this way put a whole new slant on their history lessons. Everyone’s attention was soon riveted on the third panel, where they quickly recognized some familiar faces among Nicodemus’s audience, including their own. Though Nicodemus—in Rollo’s body—was clearly in the spotlight here, as in the other two panels, it was his own suggestion that he be surrounded by those who’d only known him this way.

The children had more classes to attend, so after a quick snack they were sent on their way. At the Rat colony, Stuart and Shirley paused in the corridor on their way to Thorn Valley School, telling Clifford and Diane to go on ahead. After they’d left, the older pair headed for the same hidey-hole under the stairs where they’d met yesterday to discuss the same matter they needed to discuss now.

“I hope they believed us back there,” said Shirley.

“I think they did. I’m sure we sounded natural enough.”

“Boy, what would they say if we told them the truth: that Lilia glowed like that when…she was taken over by Elle?”

“‘Elle? What’s an Elle?’” Stuart laughed, then sighed. “We’ve got to tell them some time, though.”

“Maybe if there’s something we could actually show them, some kind of proof…”

“Not written proof. That’s definitely out.”

The day before, they’d visited Tallus’s team of scribes that was recording the past few days’ events, without letting them know they knew something they didn’t, and found that they hadn’t written anything about any bizarre anomalies like flaming snakes, or Stuart being injured, or any “Elle.” However, during their visit, Tallus casually remarked how he’d gotten a peculiar feeling while looking over his crew’s latest efforts: that they’d worked on fewer pages than it seemed they should have. “You’re not calling us lazy, are you, Dad?” his daughter Alcina had joked, and the matter was dropped, with none taking it seriously. But their young visitors were certain it was based on much more than a hunch or odd mental quirk. No, they must have completed more pages than it appeared now, because they had so much more to write about. What actually happened to those pages was a mystery, though they hoped it wouldn’t remain so.

“Well, if there’s no kind of physical proof we can give,” said Shirley, “then we should tell someone soon. Maybe tonight.”

“I’m starting to think you’re right. Maybe Nicodemus; if anyone should know about this, it’s him.” They both got to their feet. “Well, we better get going or we’ll be late.”

They emerged from under the stairs, heading for the school. “I’ll bet Lula’s already there, waiting for you,” said Shirley with a “wink” in her voice, knowing Lula shared his next class.

“Oh, gimme a break, Sis.”

“I’m not making fun, Stu. I think it’s great. Besides, I consider her to be my friend too.”

“Oh…well, thanks, Shirl. Just promise me you’ll keep it that way, and I won’t make fun of you ’n’ Torrance.”

“Deal.” The siblings paused to give each other a quick hug before they entered the double doors of Thorn Valley School.

After the private viewing was over, Patricia moved “Nicodemus, Past and Present,” as well as all the preliminary sketches, out to a well-lit alcove in the Mouse colony’s main corridor, so that it may be seen and appreciated by the rest of Freethorn and its guests. And see and appreciate they did: throughout the better part of the afternoon, virtually everyone came by, some more than once. Patricia stayed there almost the entire time, usually with Kimball at her side, taking in the accolades but managing to stay modest about her work. Many complimented her on how fast she’d completed it. Others who had seen examples of the work of human artists told her this one would give many of them a run for their money. The Rusay guests offered to put her in touch with local artists they knew and possibly arrange to have one or two of them be included in the next exchange party. Some, including some of the newcomer mice, told her they believed they may have artistic talents as well but hadn’t had much of a chance to express or develop them.

Patricia would later say that a turning point came for her when one of the newcomers, Challo, was so impressed he virtually demanded of Patricia that she teach him to paint like that. Could she, indeed, teach as well as continue to work on her own creations? The matter was discussed at length with family and friends during the remainder of the exhibition; and by the time it was over, tentative plans had been made for Patricia to begin a whole new career.

To another of the newcomer mice, viewing her work seemed to bring a different kind of inspiration. Teja, who was about as mature as Lula, sat in front of it for a good fifteen minutes, spending several of them with eyes closed, prompting curious stares from onlookers. Patricia asked that Teja not be interrupted, curious herself to hear the girl’s own account of what she was experiencing. “It was like looking into another world,” was how she summed it up, describing how gazing upon the three-paneled work acted as a springboard for her own imagination, triggering in her a flight of fancy in which she could observe further adventures in the lives of those depicted, almost as if she herself had been an observer or participant in them and not simply making it all up. Reuben was among those present when she described these “further adventures” in detail, and he was reminded of Boris’s descriptions of his late sister Doris’s storytelling prowess. Of course, this quality reminded everyone of Timothy as well, whom Teja had only met briefly, but now she looked forward to knowing him better. Reuben offered to introduce her more fully to both Timothy and Boris, and the two left the hall together.

Both Nicodemus and Jessica had been present off and on during the exhibition, and both were present to help Patricia at its conclusion with bringing everything back to her studio.

“Well, you have at least three definites for your class,” Kimball told Patricia along the way. “Once the word is further spread…well, who knows?”

“I wouldn’t want it too big,” said Patricia. “Maybe only a dozen or so. I’d want to give my students plenty of individual attention. But it’s going to be a wonderful experience, I’m sure, for myself and them.”

“Of course,” agreed Kimball. “So…I wonder if Reuben has met his special someone today.”

“You mean Teja, Dad?” said Jessica. “She’s a bit young for him, don’t you think?”

“It could be her, or someone else. But she’s the same age as Lula, and she was definitely in love with our Desmond.”

“She certainly was.” Patricia sighed. “Oh, I wish he could be here now, with all of us.”

“I know,” said Jessica. “I’ve wondered, though: would he feel the same about her?”

“Sadly, we’ll never know,” said Nicodemus. “But she certainly has one who loves her now…whether or not either of them is aware.” Everyone agreed, having observed Stuart and Lula when they came by after classes, the smiles and gestures between them strongly indicating a genuine and growing affection.

“To think of my little boy…actually in love…” Jessica sighed, looking wistful.

“Yes,” said Patricia warmly, “and we may find ourselves as great-grandparents before long.”

“Mother! Now that’s really rushing things.”

“Perhaps, Jessie,” said Kimball. “But a year from now: again, who knows? Look at your youngest siblings only yesterday. And one of them’s already a father-to-be.”

Jessica looked at Nicodemus, concerned for him from all this talk of long-term love affairs. But he only acknowledged her concern with a nod and a hint of a smile.

After all of Patricia’s materials were back in her studio, Nicodemus and Jessica stayed on for dinner; discussing, among other things, the “empty nest” feeling Patricia and Kimball were beginning to experience with the departure of their three youngest children; even though all of their children except Bertie lived in the Mouse colony, and Lula still lived with them; and they had houseguests as well, including Janice, Sibelle and Dupree.

As evening fell, the mood across Freethorn was, like last evening, marked by anticipation and hope for a great future, but it was tempered by more imminent events—or more accurately, one event. None were aware of it more acutely than the pair who, after spending several hours socializing, were now preparing for one more night in each other’s company. They made a stop at her quarters first.

“Mommy’s here!” came a young voice just after they were inside, its owner dashing out from the bedroom to greet them.

“Diane, don’t be silly!” Jessica said as she scooped her daughter up in her arms. “It’s back to bed with you.” Diane leaned over for a hug from Nicodemus on the way into the bedroom, where her siblings had all settled into bed but had been waiting up. Jessica and Nicodemus chatted with them for a few minutes while tucking in Diane beside Shirley.

“Stu’s been acting really funny all night,” remarked Diane. Unseen by either adult, Stuart threw his sister an annoyed look from the other bed. Beside him, Clifford giggled. Stuart gave him a little poke.

“Cliffy, Diane, you know that’s not nice,” admonished their mother. They both apologized, then Jessica said, “If there’s something you need to tell me, Stuart, you know you can anytime.”

“I know, Mom. It’s nothing, not a big deal. I guess…I’m just glad you gave me and Shirl another chance to, you know, be on our own like this.”

“Yeah, that’s it. We can look after the little squirts just fine.” Shirley grabbed and tickled Diane.

Once everyone was settled down again, they all said their goodnights, after which Jessica put out the light and left with Nicodemus.

“I’m sure there was something else Stuart wanted to say,” remarked Jessica as they strolled down the corridor. “Something to do with Lula, I’ll bet.”

“Shirley seemed a bit preoccupied as well. Perhaps she and Torrance are growing closer as well.”

“It still seems like…they’re rushing into love, but…” She laughed. “I’m their mother, can you blame me? I know they can’t stay children forever, and I had a pretty quick courtship with Harley myself…”

“I suppose it’s just…the fact that we’re all in this new setting, an entirely new society. It can change one’s perspective greatly.”

“I guess so.” They soon reached Nicodemus’s quarters and entered silently. It had become almost customary for them to embrace and kiss as soon as they were alone, and they did so now, without putting the light on first. Their embrace had a different quality than usual: more subdued, less passionate; and though both were aware of it, neither acknowledged it out loud, even after Jessica put the light on and helped Nicodemus straighten up a bit as they chatted about their day, with much talk about Patricia’s exhibition and the reactions to it. They continued conversing after sitting down together.

“Oh, did I mention I talked to Seelah just after noon? She and Boris have settled on names already, and Vincent’s their first choice for a boy. They discussed it with Reuben and Lilia first in case either of them had designs on it, but according to Seelah, they were only too happy to let her and Boris have it first. Now, for a girl, their first choice is Doris, but I know they’ve planned on that for a long time.”

“I know they’ll be happy with…whatever choices they make…”

“Nicodemus? Are you…” But Jessica suspected very quickly what lay behind his apparent distraction, and that it may have been building all evening, if not all day. “Whatever it is, you know you can share it with me.”

Nicodemus turned, looking her straight in the eye. “Oh, Jessica, I…I’ve found it…increasingly difficult to pretend that I’ve…completely accepted my taking leave tomorrow of you and…and everyone.” Before Jessica could say anything, he stood and began pacing the floor. “I swore that when this day arrived, when we’d have our last night together, I would…face it as I knew I must. Even after you and I began keeping regular company, I was still determined to remember my original purpose…my promise to Rollo. I still want to see this fulfilled, Jessica, with every fiber of my being. He deserves to live a normal life. I’d come to love him like a son during the time we spent ‘within.’ I knew there would be…a very good chance I wouldn’t find a way for both of us to remain here; and yet, I still thought…I would be able to face it as I’d planned. But looking at you now…your lovely face and form, smelling your scent, and hearing your voice…it’s just…” He stopped pacing, and Jessica, now standing, could see tears forming in his eyes as he shook his head.

Jessica embraced him, at a loss for what to say to comfort him. He’d been such a pillar of strength, of conviction; and to see him like this now was quite unexpected.

Finally he said, “I’d thought that…perhaps it would have been best for us to stay separate until my leaving. I think…even last night, even while we made love, the thought crossed my mind.”

“I’ve thought the same. But we’re just…too far gone now, aren’t we? And I still feel like I did when we had that discussion a week ago, when you and Johnathan returned from your trip. I still accept your leaving, and I want you to help Rollo. I do accept, I really do, that…it will be an entirely different personality in this body, and I’ll be seeing him from now on, perhaps…even having feelings for him as I do for you. Of course I’d want you to stay if it were possible, but…I also want you to do the right thing.”

They looked upon each other’s face. Nicodemus stroked her cheek. “As do I, my dear. And I’d sworn not to let the possibility of you and Rollo…falling in love affect my decision. And I’m positive that I’ve not let it become an issue at all. It’s still just…become so difficult to…”

A tapping at the door interrupted him; a familiar one, actually, in a distinctive pattern, much like the one from four nights ago, when they’d just decided to keep regular company. It was familiar to Jessica, too, but they’d just finished putting them to bed. What could they need now? Nicodemus answered the door; and sure enough, it was to a pair of familiar young faces.

“Hi, Nicodemus. Hi, Mom,” said Stuart.

Shirley started to add something, but Jessica said, “What are you two doing up again? We just put you to bed.”

“Actually, Mom, it’s…Nicodemus we need to talk to.” Stuart scratched his shoulder.

“It’s really important, Mom. Please?” Shirley spoke with such earnestness, with expressions on both their faces to match, that Jessica considered giving in with no question—but only for a moment.

“Whatever it is, you can tell your own mother, can’t you?”

“We, uh, can’t really explain why not, Mom,” said Stuart, “at least not right away.”

“Maybe later, but…now we…really need to tell Nicodemus.” Shirley’s tone carried an edge almost of desperation.

“Perhaps,” offered Nicodemus, “if I hear what they have to say, I can convince them to share it with you as well.”

Jessica sighed. “Well…all right. Come on in, and I’ll wait out in the hall.” She was clearly not happy with this development, for more reasons than one, but did as she promised.

“Well, now,” said Nicodemus as soon as they were alone, “I trust you both have a good explanation for this.” Despite the sternness of his words, he found he actually welcomed the interruption.

“We really do,” said Shirley with the same earnestness.

“I know it doesn’t look too good,” said Stuart as he and Shirley sat on the divan, and Nicodemus on a chair facing them. “It’s almost like we just kicked Mom out o’ here. But yesterday, something…well, it’s hard to explain.”

“Actually, it kind o’ started a few days before, but yesterday, it’s like we found out about it…or…”

“Children,” Nicodemus said as patiently as ever, “just start from the beginning.”

“Okay.” Stuart breathed in deep. “Yesterday, when we visited Grandpa in the ward, we were talking about how he and Aunt Louann recovered like they did, and wondering how it happened; you know, like we all have.”

“And I touched Stuart’s hand, and suddenly it was like…we knew the truth, about that, and other things too.” They went on to describe how they believed that recent events actually played out differently than how they and everyone else remembered them, with so much more happening: the frightening anomaly-creatures; the twins’ initial discovery of their shared ability that foiled those anomalies; the abnormal storm and Stuart’s injury, again both proven to be hoaxes; and, most notably, the momentous events from two days ago, which, along with those earlier mysteries, centered around a being whose existence had been only theorized and who—if the twins’ contentions were to be believed—was responsible for everyone’s subsequent collective (and selective) amnesia.

Nicodemus listened intently to it all without interrupting; then, nodding, he said more to himself: “If this ‘Elle’ does exist, truly…it confirms so much. Gwinthrayle and Birantha confided to me, two days ago, that in reviewing the events of the day, even they found hard to believe some of the things they were able to do with their own skills and abilities, especially breaking down the amulet and returning it to the Dark World. But now it seems that it was ‘Elle’ who initiated the process.”

“Tallus thought something was a little weird, too,” said Stuart, and he and Shirley described their visit the day before, with Tallus’s “peculiar feeling” that his crew should have had more to write about.

“Perhaps the only evidence is anecdotal at present,” said Nicodemus, “But still…” He placed hands on the twins’ shoulders. “My friends, this ability the two of you share is truly remarkable, to think that it could be powerful enough to see through the illusion she placed in all our minds. Perhaps not all would be explained, though: such as why she saw fit to alter our memories to begin with, or how one of her power would be unaware that your abilities could foil her efforts.”

“But…but you do believe us, don’t you?” Stuart asked anxiously.

“We couldn’t make up something like this,” added Shirley. “Tim’s the storyteller around here, not us.”

Nicodemus smiled reassuringly. “You wouldn’t have been so driven to tell me if you weren’t convinced you were right. Even in the brief time I’ve known you, I can’t imagine otherwise. Indeed, what would be the point of making up such a story? Therefore…yes, I do believe you.”

They both rushed forward to hug him, thanking him profusely. “I told you, Sis,” said Stuart, “that if anyone would believe us, he would.”

“And I was happy to indulge you,” said Nicodemus as the twins sat down again. “I have to ask, though: why wait until now, when you’d made this discovery yesterday?”

“We just had a feeling,” said Shirley, “that the time was right to tell someone.”

“Yeah, so we joined hands, and we knew you were the one.” They also described how they’d been working on a report that, when completed, would describe in as much detail as they could remember all of these events that were now remembered differently or not at all. They’d have given this report to Nicodemus now, but this inclination to share this information had come upon them sooner than they’d expected, before the report was finished.

Stuart now joined hands with Shirley again. “And now…it seems even more right for us to tell you.”

“Yeah, like…it’s something you really need now, something you can use.”

Nicodemus nodded. “And perhaps…this will prove to be true. Perhaps in time everyone will know of this. But for now, who else should be told, if anyone?”

The twins looked at each other. “Well,” said Stuart, “Mom, maybe, but no one else for now.”

“Yes,” Nicodemus agreed, “such information could lead to widespread anxiety and confusion. But your mother, I’m sure, will keep it a secret for now.”

“Yeah, we thought so too,” said Shirley.

“Maybe we should leave out the part about my getting hurt really bad,” said Stuart. “Or when we all thought I did.”

“At least for now.” Shirley yawned.

“Well, you can count on me to be discreet. And you can leave the task of telling her entirely to me. And now both of you need your sleep.” Nicodemus stood, kissing each on the forehead.

“We’re sorry you…have to leave tomorrow,” said Stuart seemingly out of the blue.

“We’re really going to miss you,” added Shirley, “but…we know you want to do the right thing, too.”

Nicodemus was speechless for a moment. “Indeed I do. And your mother feels the same, too.” He embraced them both. “Oh, she has every reason to be proud of you. As do I.” He saw them to the door, telling them they could send Jessica back in. They all said their goodnights.

Twenty-odd minutes later, as they were mostly finished preparing for bed, Jessica looked away from Nicodemus, shaking her head. “You really believe all this? That this…‘Elle’ was responsible for so much strangeness, and then altered our memories? And…Stuart and Shirley found out about it through this…shared ability of theirs?”

“As I told them, there was every reason not to doubt them.”

Jessica stood and began pacing the floor. “They can actually…know the truth of a situation….by joining hands? Why, I never would have suspected…that anything like this could…could happen.”

“It is just as astounding to me. But let’s not forget all they discovered, and what it could mean for everyone here.”

“I-I know what you mean. It’s just that…these are my children we’re talking about. I know none of us are ‘ordinary’…but this!”

“It differs little from Timothy’s and Boris’s particular talents, something that comes naturally, like your own aptitude for medicine and chemistry, or your mother’s for her art. Or…”

“It’s all right, Nicodemus, I get it. But this does mean that…this ability of theirs actually came to light days ago, but that Elle creature made us forget about it. I wonder…she must have known that their ability would see through her…changing our memories, so why’d she do it in the first place?”

“We’d pondered that too. Perhaps it was an experiment of sorts. Who can fathom the reasoning of a being such as her?”

“We’ve got to tell somebody about this. Johnathan, maybe, or Justin…”

“Eventually, everyone will, I’m sure. But I think for now the task should be left to Stuart and Shirley. Just as they felt the time was right to tell me, they will know who to tell next.”

“How did they know…it was right for you now?”

“The way they put it, they thought knowing would be of great help to me. And the feeling I have now is that it has helped. It’s difficult to articulate precisely, but…it seems that knowing that this being—this living embodiment of Lahaikshe herself—truly exists has placed my situation in a different light. I believe now, truly, that I will be able to face…what I must do tomorrow with no hesitation. Or at least…much less than before.”

Jessica sighed and embraced him. They stood thus, silently, for another minute before moving to the bed. They sat side-by-side, talking quietly, their conversation intimate, mostly on their time together these four days past. After a little over an hour, they settled down to making love, both vowing silently to make this night last as long as possible.

A few doors away, the Brisby household was settling in for the night. The four youngest children were already asleep in their rooms, and in the bedrooms previously occupied by the four oldest, their houseguests—Mitchell, Sadie and their three youngsters in one room, Monte and Marnie in the other—were also drifting off to dreamland. The two heads of the household, however, had found it more difficult to sleep, largely due to the momentous events in the day to come. Madeline had just begun to drift off when there was a sudden motion from the other side of the bed, along with a groan. She looked up to see Johnathan sitting up, shaking his head.

“Johnathan? What’s wrong?” She sat up beside him, taking his arm.

“I-I’m not sure, Maddie, it’s…maybe these…new abilities are…not quite right, maybe…I’m not seeing things right yet.” He looked squarely at her. “I’m sorry, babe, that was…a little incoherent, wasn’t it?”

“Well…what did you see? Were you…looking at something that happened in the past?”

“I…thought it was. I was just…conducting another little test, getting a look at what was going on here while Nicodemus and I were on our trip to Earth. I thought it might help me relax a bit. But the first thing I saw was you, and our little ones, and…they looked really worried about something, and you were reassuring them. Of course I wondered what the fuss was about, so I traced events back to whatever it was that got them riled up, and… oh, Maddie, I can barely describe it. There was this…grotesque creature that…seemed to threaten some of the other children, but not ours. It was blocking their way on one of the trails, lying on its back, but…it was as if they couldn’t get around it. It looked…almost human, but it changed shape, it had a huge, ugly mouth, it looked like it was trying to swallow them. And then…it just vanished, and they all took off for home.”

“Johnathan…are you sure you weren’t dreaming?”

“I wish,” he said, sighing. “But believe me, I know I was as wide awake as I am now.”

“You could…only get a picture, but no sound, just as with the Stone?”

“Yeah. I mean…obviously, nothing like that happened while we were gone, right? So it must be these new abilities taking a while to fully assimilate, or something like that.”

“Maybe Gwinthrayle would be able to tell you something.”

“Maybe. But there’s no precedent for this, for my situation. I don’t know if…” He laughed. “Oh, I don’t want to be pessimistic, maybe it is nothing to worry about.” He lay back down and yawned.

Madeline did the same, stroking his chest. “Let’s give it a day or two. Maybe you’ll be seeing things more normally.” They kissed goodnight, and Madeline silently mused on how almost-casual she could be about all these changes in Johnathan, extreme as they were. But then, this was Johnathan. In their nearly-six years together, she had become accustomed to facing and accepting anything that came along where he was concerned. How could she not? The thought brought renewed contentment, enabling her to relax and drop off to sleep.

And alongside her, many of her thoughts were echoed in Johnathan. She’s right, it’s probably just these new abilities needing a little time to fully adjust to me, and me to them. Gwinthrayle and Birantha already said as much, didn’t they? So let’s just sleep on it. With that, he took a deep breath, feeling more ready to slip into slumber. Then came the thought: What if that’s not it? Could that have actually happened, even though nobody had described anything like it to Nicodemus or me? No, that’s ridiculous. And yet…maybe if I gave myself one more “test,” just to double-check…that wouldn’t hurt, would it? Just one more, and then we’ll get some sleep…

Chapter 56 - Turnover

Jessica opened her eyes and yawned. Her first thought was of her medical duties, and how she might be a bit late in starting today; then she remembered she was taking the day off, and why. She also realized the opposite side of the bed was empty, even while facing away from it. She turned around to see Nicodemus sitting in the middle of the floor, facing away from the bed. She sat up quietly, knowing it best not to disturb his meditation, and moved to sit on the edge of the bed.

She sighed, recalling their night of shared passion, the fulfillment of mutual need; perhaps the greatest such night they’d spent together, but also the last one. There was no avoiding it, she knew. Today was the day, and she couldn’t keep the tears from her eyes, for all she’d prepared herself and tried to convince herself she’d accepted it fully. Come on, she thought, pull yourself together. After all, it’s not as if he’s leaving completely. Rollo will be in his place, and it’s entirely possible that…

She lay back down on her side, covering her head with a pillow as she felt a sob rising to the surface, as if it would be enough to keep him from hearing it. But at this moment, she couldn’t care less about appearing strong and stoic. Blast it all, Nicodemus was the man she loved and she was losing him today and she was entitled to a good cry. Still she tried to keep herself as quiet as possible.

Yet, all too soon, she felt a gentle touch upon her arm. She pushed the pillow away and looked up. Nicodemus’s expression was at once filled with compassion and regret as he helped her upright again and allowed her to lean against him, her tears moistening the fur of his shoulder. Presently, she looked up at him. She swallowed hard. “I guess…we’d better get ready to meet the children for breakfast.” She managed a smile as she stood, moving towards the bathroom.

As she washed her face, Nicodemus was at a loss for what more to say to comfort her, just as he’d been mostly silent since ending his meditation. What more could be said that hadn’t been already? It was looking very much as if their positions had reversed themselves since last night, with him more readily accepting his departure than her. Yet, they both knew there’d be no turning back now. It had become quite the paradox, this day’s event; one both anticipated and dreaded. He wondered which would predominate, when the time came…

“Well…we should get ready now.” Jessica’s breaking the silence was almost startling to Nicodemus, who’d barely noticed her finishing drying herself off. He agreed and the two dressed, mostly in silence. When both were ready to go to breakfast, she said, “I’ll be all right, Nicodemus. I’ll be able to get through today, I promise.”

He kissed her cheek. “We both will. There will be as much gained as lost today, perhaps more.” As they left his quarters, they were greeted by her children, who’d been sitting waiting patiently all this time. They moved on together for the dining hall.

All work, classes and other activities throughout Freethorn were proceeding as normal, but not without a marked subdued quality. It was especially noticeable among the elders and others who’d been around since the Rosebush colony, but those who’d only known Nicodemus in the past two weeks were contributing to it as well. Even some of the newcomer mice were expressing disappointment, having realized quickly what he’d meant to their new friends.

So it was that, in early afternoon, all in Freethorn, with very few exceptions, put aside their daily tasks and began making their way to Oak Park. It was becoming almost a daily routine, many remarked, with the clearing beneath the big burr oak becoming more and more favored as a gathering place over the interior main assembly hall. The reason for today’s gathering was, of course, as routine as other recent ones—that is to say, not at all.

“It looks like we’re the first ones here,” said Boris, gazing all around the clearing. “Not that that’s anything to brag about,” he added with a sigh.

“But we should all be here for this, shouldn’t we?” said Seelah, pressing her head against his shoulder. “For something this important?”

“Yeah. I know.” He looked up to see a small party of Rats arrive. Behind them came Patricia and Kimball with a party of newcomer Mice, plying their hosts with questions. The clearing was filling quickly, with Rats, Mice and Rusay arriving via the trails leading to it; including Nicodemus, accompanied by Jessica and her children, arriving virtually unheralded, as if he were simply here for the same purpose as everyone else and not as “the Mouse of the Hour,” at the center of the gathering. Presently one “outside” guest arrived in the same free-floating fashion as he done two days ago, accompanied by two mice on mhys’haspa-back. Gwinthrayle came soaring in over everyone’s head, quickly descending to take his place among these others here to see this transition through. Many greeted him as his feet touched ground.

Before long, seating was organized for everyone as it had been three days ago for Eric’s story—and for one told by one other, those in a small inner circle believed. The two that knew of Stuart and Shirley’s sibling power, and what they’d learned with it, had continued to keep the matter private. Jessica hadn’t really had the chance to discuss the matter in detail with them, but she let them know that, whatever this would ultimately mean for all of them, she was very proud of them.

Nicodemus stayed by his adopted family briefly, speaking little; then he began making his way to the top of the rock. The buzz of conversation throughout the gathered throng had died down completely by the time he stood atop the rock, ready to give his address.

“My friends…my neighbors…my children. All of you are well aware of the reasons for this gathering. Many of you wish…that events did not have to transpire in the manner that has been planned. I will not lie to you, or be dishonest about my own feelings. I regret that another way could not have been found for both of us—Rollo and myself—to remain among you. But I feel compelled to remind you: that this was never intended to be anything but a temporary arrangement. Granted, it became less temporary, perhaps, than I had originally planned. But this body is, after all is said and done, rightfully his; and he has as much right as I, or any of us, to a full life here, among all of you…where he belongs. I know many of you are looking forward to meeting the ‘true’ Rollo. I know I can expect all of you to treat him kindly; but I must also remind you that, though it will be the same body, he will not be the same and he will have no direct memory of my experiences these two weeks past. I know this may sound obvious, but I’m sure the change may prove disorienting for some. I can assure you…Rollo will certainly experience change, of even the more disorienting kind, even wrenching. So again I say: treat him with kindness and patience, for it will be an entirely new life for him, full of things familiar or mundane to us but completely new to him.

“You are all embarking on new lives here on Lahaikshe, especially those of you who have only recently joined us. You have a bright future, full of hope and discovery. Continue your cultural exchanges with the Rusay, a good and noble race. Explore more fully this world which your peoples now share. That human aphorism known as the Golden Rule—to treat others as we would have them treat us—must always be applied. But whatever you do, whichever direction you take culturally or physically—let love be your guide, let it be the primary motivator in whatever action you take, whether it is that felt for a mate, a child, a parent, a friend, any other fellow creature; or for this world in general, which has truly embraced and adopted us as its own.” Nicodemus paused, his gaze settling upon Jessica and her children, seated front and center, his expression noticeably wistful.

Elsewhere in the crowd, Isabella leaned in close to Justin, giving a sigh of empathy. “Oh, Justin, this has got to be…affecting him more than he’s letting on.”

“I know, hon. But we’ve got to assume that he’s worked things out.”

“I suppose,” Nicodemus resumed, “that if any more needs to be said, it’s that…I am so proud of all that’s been accomplished here, and I know you’ll go on to even greater things. I love each and every one of you.”

With that, he stepped down from the rock and began circulating among the crowd, giving more personalized final words to many. It had already been agreed that Nicodemus would try to keep these last goodbyes as brief as possible, though he knew how difficult it would prove for some; especially those who’d known him the longest.

These included Tallus and Angeline, whom he talked to first, recalling Tallus’s diligent record-keeping from their earliest days since the Escape; and encouraging him and his helpers to continue to do so, believing it more important than ever to record and preserve their people’s history. The pair was determined to not make this too emotional a goodbye, but couldn’t restrain the tears entirely.

Others weren’t nearly as stoic. Cynthia and Michael gave Nicodemus their thanks once again for his presiding over their wedding yesterday, but Cynthia, despite her best efforts, ended up crying on his shoulder. She collected herself soon enough, though, enough to acknowledge that he was doing the right thing for Rollo. Michael promised he’d be at the forefront of those helping Rollo adjust, having been his original sponsor and helping to bring him to Freethorn.

Justin recalled his and Johnathan’s conversation with Nicodemus after he’d returned from meeting “within” with Rollo to arrange the two-week “in-charge” period, the one now nearing its conclusion; and though he brought up this exchange now with Nicodemus, they didn’t discuss it in detail, in deference to Justin’s wife and children. Still, they both knew, it was true that, essentially, Nicodemus was going to die…again. But both also recalled Johnathan’s contention that most, if not all, would accept Nicodemus’s departure quite well. This seemed to have been borne out; even now, while the atmosphere could hardly be described as festive, it wasn’t that of a funeral either. Certainly, the decision to level with everyone on the matter right away was the correct one. In spite of all this, Justin and Isabella couldn’t completely avoid expressing sorrow, and saying how much he’d be missed.

“You’ll always be in our hearts and our minds, Nicodemus,” said Isabella, embracing him. “God bless you.” She wiped away a tear.

“I know this is entirely your choice,” said Justin, “but I still can’t help feeling like…there’s something more I could do or say to…I don’t know, make things different in some way. I guess it’s just because of the way we lost you the first time, when…I should have heeded the warnings about Jenner. I know it’s irrational, considering everything since then.”

“Including your leadership of this colony, my friend,” said Nicodemus. “And its successes in the years since. All that I’ve seen here these two weeks past has only served to reinforce what I said to you on my first day here: that all this directly reflects that leadership. To that I can only add: keep up the good work.”

“I’ll…try my best,” said Justin, managing a laugh. “Just as I know you’ll…try your best with Rollo.”

“We all do what we must.” They embraced, giving the last of their private farewells before Nicodemus moved on.

To Timothy he repeated his congratulations on gaining a seat on the council, reminding him of their conversation while en route to Gwinthrayle’s. “Never doubt your capacity for leadership, Timothy. You will most assuredly prove to be one who will help to lead this community toward a bright future. Even within the last day, I have come to believe every more strongly in that future.” This last, somewhat cryptic statement was one Timothy would do a bit of puzzling over in the next day or so; but for now, he and Lucy gave their farewells, again not entirely without tears.

This was the case for many others: including Boris, for whom Nicodemus hoped would only have visions that portended good fortune; for Lilia, who’d felt an especially strong connection to him after all they’d unknowingly shared with each other; and even to Brutus, who by now had no trouble accepting this young mouse as his father, but would now have to accept another in the same form. It was the first time anyone, even Deena, had ever remembered seeing Brutus this overcome with emotion.

Throughout it all, Nicodemus had to keep his own emotions in check, as he continued making these final rounds, personalizing as much as possible his final words with each, including the newcomer mice, many of whom felt inclined to have last words with him in spite of their brief acquaintance. Of those he’d known longer, there were many whose parting words and gestures would make his own parting that much more difficult; and one in particular. But he’d known and anticipated this all along, and was prepared to bear the brunt of this day’s emotional toll.

“I don’t believe I’d told you,” he said to Patricia and Kimball, “just how happy and thankful I was that you and your family were finally able to take your rightful places among us.”

After embraces, Patricia said, “We were always thankful to have each other, even during that time when we weren’t getting along so well. But now…we can hardly imagine living, or being anywhere else.”

“We are all where we belong,” said Kimball. “I’ve never felt that more than in the last few days.” He sighed as he looked down at his restored leg. “For your part in this…and for your help in seeing that I made it to Thorn Valley, on the back of my rabbit friend, I’ll always…cherish your memory. Though even if I never knew any of that, it still would have been enough just having known you.”

Patricia voiced her agreement, then thanked him for allowing her to make him her “project.” Nicodemus praised her artistic talent and the project’s successful completion, and wished her continued success in her future endeavors.

“Gwinthrayle,” Nicodemus greeted his fellow sorcerer, “it has been a most enlightening and delightful experience to make your acquaintance. You’ve been most helpful in allowing me access to your library and broadening my knowledge and understanding of your world, and I’m glad we, along with your associate Birantha, had the chance to work together to save it from further destruction.”

“It’s entirely possible, my friend, that without your help, it would have been difficult, if not impossible, to carry out that procedure.”

“Entirely possible, indeed. And I’m certain there are aspects to that whole affair that…we may not have realized, and that could become clearer in time.”

Gwinthrayle nodded, noting the ambiguity in his statement; but, though he wondered if there was a hint of something Nicodemus knew that he may not be privy to, he decided against any questioning on it. Instead he said, “Well, one thing is abundantly clear: this sacrifice you’re making today is one that will be long remembered, by your people and mine.”

Nicodemus could only nod in agreement before the two new friends exchanged final goodbyes and Nicodemus moved on to a group of mouse and rat children, with Stuart, Shirley and Lula at the forefront. He told the twins much as he told Timothy, that their mutual ability to uncover the truth would likely prove vital to the future of Freethorn. He said this privately, since this ability was still mostly a secret—at least since everyone’s memory had been altered. He also reminded Stuart and Shirley to do as they did yesterday, and wait until their own intuitions told them the time was right before telling anyone else of the truth of recent days which their ability had informed them.

“You know, Nicodemus,” said Stuart, “I gotta say that…you were nothing like I expected. You always treated…everyone like your friend, kids and adults alike.”

“We were all equals to you,” agreed Shirley. “That was really great, so nice of you.”

“I couldn’t see being anything less, my friends. And I value greatly, and equally, the friendship and love I’ve received in turn from everyone here.” He let all four of his “adopted” children know how much he regretted leaving them so soon after coming into their lives. Even the two younger siblings, Clifford and Diane, were surprisingly accepting of his leaving.

Lula, by contrast, found it difficult to “keep it together” and was soon weeping on Nicodemus’s shoulder. “I know…you’re not completely going away,” she managed to say, “but…it-it’s so hard, I promised I wouldn’t cry…”

After comforting her some more, Nicodemus told her, “Lula…I hope that you’ll always keep in mind that…you have something to contribute, something to say that’s worth saying, as much as anyone else here; and that you’ll always be loved.”

“I-I’ll remember, Nicodemus. Thank you…so much.” Stuart had come up beside her, arm around her shoulders. He offered a handkerchief, which she gratefully accepted. Nearby, Jessica looked on, tears coming to her eyes as well, more from seeing how sensitive and gentlemanly her eldest son was with Lula than from Nicodemus’s imminent departure—though that would surely follow shortly. She watched him give his final farewells to her children and their friends before he moved on to a pair that he would surely miss as much, if not more than her. Amid hugs and tears, their words for him were much like those from Justin and Isabella, regretting having to see him essentially die again but reaffirming their understanding of his reasoning.

“I remember,” Madeline Brisby said at length, “how I was a little intimidated by you that first time. But after hearing you talk of how close you were to Johnathan and tell me all about his and your beginnings together…I knew that I had nothing to fear and you and the Rats were true friends, in spite of the rather chilly reception I’d gotten earlier. And your talk of ‘courage of the heart’…I don’t think I understood it fully until after…you had gone. But after all I’d faced…I knew.”

“And that courage stood you in good stead the following year, when you discovered Johnathan was alive. It was surely what drove you to venture into worlds unknown, not knowing what awaited you, until you had found each other again.”

“And she surely surprised me,” added Johnathan. “All the time we were apart, I’d wondered how she and the children were getting along without me, especially believing I was dead. But once we were all together again and I was brought up to speed…I knew I’d had little cause to worry.”

“I just hope,” said Madeline, tears flowing, “that that courage is enough to…let you go.” She embraced Nicodemus, kissing his cheek. “I know Rollo will be here, and you’ll succeed in making him better…”

“…And we’re looking forward to that, we really are.” Johnathan sighed, embracing them both. “But it sure won’t be the same.” They reminisced briefly on their recent “world tour” of Earth, and conversations during it in which, they now agreed, they’d given each other much to think about. More embraces and final goodbyes followed before Nicodemus moved on to the one who, if he were so inclined, would most likely make him break his promise to Rollo.

He and Jessica approached each other slowly, taking each other’s hand, each wanting nothing more than to wrap themselves in each other and never let go. Instead, they quietly embraced, staying mostly silent save for a few words murmured in each other’s ear, each having more they wanted to say to each other but not knowing what words could possibly be adequate. Those surrounding them averted their eyes to allow them as much privacy as possible in this, their final moment together. Those who would be attending in the procedure to come approached, ready for when he’d be ready to begin.

Finally Nicodemus and Jessica gazed upon each other one last time, expressions at once filled with longing and understanding. “I’ll never forget you, Nicodemus,” Jessica said simply.

“Nor I you, Jessica.” And with that they parted. Nicodemus turned toward Ages, Bernadette, and Samara—standing silently, expectantly, with little obvious emotion. He took a deep breath, and for a moment pictured himself turning on his heel and rushing back into Jessica’s arms. Then he said simply, “I’m ready.” He took another deep breath and sat down, then lay flat on his back, taking a moment to gaze upon the mostly-clear blue sky above one more time before closing his eyes.

“He’s really going through with this.” “I couldn’t imagine doing something like this willingly.” “It’s like he’s literally lying down and dying.” “What must be going through his head right now?” “Or Jessica’s? It must be awful for her.” These were the sentiments given voice throughout the crowd, among others, though most attending were silent, finding any words inadequate. Some considered what it would be like afterwards: what will Rollo, the true Rollo, be like? Will Nicodemus be able to heal Rollo exactly as he’d planned?

Some even found themselves wondering: is Rollo really worth all this? And with the thought would come a reminder that this was Nicodemus’s plan, it was what he wanted, and he’d had a long time to know the true Rollo while they’d both resided within his mind, and Nicodemus had certainly believed all along that Rollo was well worth it. And Rollo was the rightful owner of this body, after all. Some would later confess to mates and friends these thoughts, even admitting feeling ashamed to even consider them.

On either side of his prone form, the three who would be attending him throughout the process sat, ready to begin monitoring his vital signs, knowing it wouldn’t be necessary until Nicodemus actually began the process—by his estimation, some four to five minutes after his—that is, Rollo’s—eyes had closed. Ages, Bernadette and Samara had exchanged their last goodbyes with Nicodemus already, like everyone else, but neither could find the words to express what it was like to be so close to the process as it happened. All three looked down at him, studying the young mouse’s face, wondering what Nicodemus was experiencing right now.

For the second time today, and for the last time ever, Nicodemus made the journey within, drawing his consciousness further and further inward until he reached the shadowy, grey-tinged mist-shrouded plain that was a manifestation of Rollo’s subconscious mind. Once standing upon it, or seeming to, he knew just where to find his young friend, or rather the form his soul-self took.

Rollo was already rushing to greet “Teacher” almost before Nicodemus could actually see his form. As they embraced, Rollo said excitedly, “This is it, isn’t it? We-we’re actually going to do this now! I can’t wait! I’m actually going to live, really live, in the world outside!”

“I—yes, Rollo, and…as soon as you’re ready, I will begin the process.”

During their “inside” time together, Rollo had proven to be most observant of and responsive to changes in Nicodemus’s mood and would even seem to know what was on his mind. Indeed, how well could two keep secrets while, in effect, sharing the same brain? So now, he said, “I’m very happy, Teacher, but…I can tell that…you want to stay with your people. I know that you also want to help me, you still want me to live like you have.”

“Indeed I do, Rollo. But I also want you to remember what I told you earlier today.” Nicodemus briefly recounted their conversation from this morning, during a meeting within that Jessica had been unaware of, when she thought he was simply meditating. Among other things, he had confessed that he’d had moments of weakness in which he considered reneging on his word, even making excuses for staying in charge longer. But coming within and seeing—indeed, feeling—Rollo’s eagerness to start a new life reinforced his resolve to adhere to his promise.

“So…I’m ready any time, Teacher.”

“All right. I guess if there’s anything more to say, it’s…that I cherished the time we shared here, for all that I didn’t understand why or hadn’t planned it. I truly came to love you like my own son, Rollo.”

“I love you, too…Nicodemus.” The two embraced. “Will I…remember you when I…I’m out there?”

“Perhaps. I cannot say how much of your experiences here you will retain. But I’m positive the lessons I’ve taught you will carry over in many ways.” They both sat down. “The mists will be lifting for you very soon, Rollo. Now…close your eyes, and concentrate on that life to come, that you are looking forward to with anticipation and joy.”

Rollo did so, and Nicodemus did likewise, concentrating on his own task. To an outside observer—if one were possible in this situation—one would only see this mismatched pair, a young mouse and an aged rat, sitting facing each other silently. But so much more was happening here which, if observed, would not appear dramatic but was expected to produce dramatic, life-altering results.

The scene “outside” was very much the same, with everyone mostly standing or sitting, waiting. There was a steady drone of muted conversation, though most were silent. The medical staff was continually monitoring Rollo’s vital signs. His pulse and respiration were slower than normal, but steady. Nearby, Johnathan and Michael were waiting to step in after Rollo awakened. Everyone agreed that they should be the ones to begin orienting Rollo to his new life here, since they were the ones who had gained his trust and brought him to Freethorn, and Rollo would probably recognize them before anyone else and be most apt to trust them now. Jessica, meanwhile, sat silently, surrounded by her children, her parents and siblings also close by. She’d agreed to not participate directly in the monitoring, believing herself too close emotionally to the matter; though she was still adamant that once Rollo was awake, she would play a major part in helping him adjust.

The moments went by slowly with no obvious change, and some were growing visibly impatient, some even anxious. What if Nicodemus couldn’t cure Rollo as he’d planned, and he’d remain the way he was before, or be even worse off? Of course if he were, Rollo would still be taken care of very well; but surely, considering how long Nicodemus had planned for this, positive he’d be able to carry it out successfully, how could he not?

Bernadette set Rollo’s wrist down gently, for the fifteenth time, and reported that his pulse was unchanged, still slightly below normal. She sighed. “Just think of what’s going on in there. He’s actually altering the chemistry of Rollo’s brain, something even human doctors can’t do with patients with similar conditions, and it’s his own mystical skills that are making it possible.”

“And the amount of time he spent trapped in there, getting to know Rollo’s brain very well…that had to be a great help in his getting the job done now.” Samara sighed. “We hope. I was just thinking about that story I was reading, about the man who had a curse put on him and woke up changed drastically. That was just before we discovered Kimball’s leg, tail and ear growing back, and I thought, wow, this was just as drastic, though it was hardly a curse. But now…” She looked down at Rollo. “He’s going to wake up a whole different person. Now that’s drastic. I know, it’ll be the one who actually owns this body. But we’d gotten so used to him as Nicodemus.” She placed a hand in front of his nose, feeling his breath on her palm.

“It’ll be strange for all of us,” agreed Bernadette, “but I’m looking forward to meeting him.”

“Yes,” said Ages. “So am I.” Clearly he wanted to say more, being such an old friend and associate of Nicodemus. Alma, nearby with their children, looked on concerned, hoping he’d confide in her later.

Jessica and her children alike had hardly uttered a word, but now Clifford said, “It’s taking too long. When’s he gonna wake up?”

“Be patient, sweetie, it’ll happen.” Jessica pulled him closer to her, stroking his head. “I don’t know how long, and he’ll wake up, and…then he’ll be Rollo, someone new for all of us to meet.” Inwardly she added: And then what? How will they feel toward each other? Yet, there was little apprehension in her, but a determination to take things one step at a time, for as long as it would take for the precise nature of their relationship to become clear. It may prove to be an effort, since she’d certainly be reminded of Nicodemus every time she looked upon him. Since this process began, she’d twice fought back the impulse to rush up to Nicodemus and beg him to stay and not go through with this, but she’d made a point of keeping her family close by, as an incentive to resist any such foolish and impulsive act. She had to remain strong for them. And, as she and Rollo get to know each other, well, who knows? A true love may develop between them; or on the other hand…

A new flurry of spoken words, though still quiet, came from those attending Rollo, interrupting Jessica’s thoughts. Was he starting to awaken? The question was on the lips of everyone closest to the scene. But though Rollo had yet to awaken, his pulse and respiration were quickening, and his eyeballs could be seen to move about beneath his eyelids. Something was definitely going to happen soon.

Four more minutes passed before sounds began to issue from Rollo’s throat. His lips parted and he took in a deep breath. His head swayed slightly. His eyes suddenly flew open, and a small yelp escaped from his mouth. Yet he didn’t appear frightened as his eyes scanned back and forth, taking in his surroundings—at first the sky and treetops above; then his eyes fixed on Ages. Opposite him, Bernadette and Samara had already backed away as planned, believing it possible that Rollo might be apprehensive or frightened by the sight of any rats, at least initially. Johnathan and Michael now came forward in their places. Some forty minutes after Nicodemus had first lain down, he was now—apparently—waking up as Rollo.

The word was quickly spreading throughout the crowd, but everyone still managed to keep conversation low-key as instructed, to avoid startling Rollo and ease his transition into the community. There was no mistaking, though, the increased air of excitement and anticipation.

“Hello? Can you hear me?” Michael leaned in close to Rollo’s still-prone form as he quietly spoke, without yet touching him.

Rollo instantly reacted, looking directly at Michael’s face, and then noticing Johnathan. He looked back and forth between them, studying their features. Again sounds issued from his throat, but much more intelligible. “I…I hear.”

Johnathan and Michael looked at each other, smiling and nodding. “Do you know us?” Michael asked.

But Rollo still had to acknowledge his personal reality. “I…I speak? This…voice, my…voice?”

“Yes,” answered Johnathan gently. “It’s your voice, you’re speaking…to us.”

Rollo, becoming more self-aware by the second, sat up abruptly, looking all around, eyes resting on Ages for a moment, then scanning the crowd, not at all disturbed by the mix of mice and rats and the occasional blue-skinned humanlike being. He looked up at the sky and treetops, gazing back and forth, his expression one of pure wonderment, before looking back upon Johnathan and Michael. “This…is the place, the…safe place?”

“Yes!” Michael replied, almost shouting. “You remember, don’t you? We came to your place, and asked you if you wanted to come with us.”

“Yes. You…M-Michael.” Michael could only nod, hardly able to speak. “And you… Johnathan.”

“Yes! I’m Johnathan. And do you remember your name?”

“I…my name…Rollo. Yes! I am Rollo.” Smiling now, Rollo reached out to grasp both mice’s hands.

There was an audible reaction from everyone close enough to hear, and again the word quickly spread. It seemed to prove definitively that Nicodemus had succeeded in restoring Rollo’s brain to normal. But it also drove the point home ever further that Nicodemus was not coming back.

Michael and Johnathan were now helping Rollo to his feet. “If you’re ready, Rollo,” said Johnathan, “there are plenty of others here I’m sure you’ll want to meet, and who’ll want to meet you.”

Rollo was now upright, but seemed preoccupied. “There is…someone else. He…was Teacher. Is he here?”

Johnathan and Michael exchanged wary glances. It had been an open question, how much Rollo would retain of his existence within. “Who…is this teacher, Rollo?”

“He…was with me…” Rollo looked all about him. “But not like you…with me now.” He closed his eyes. “The mist…gone…he said…it would lift.”

Johnathan and Michael again exchanged glances, nodding. He definitely remembered something, at least vaguely. “Rollo,” Johnathan asked, “do you remember…what you did just before we brought you here?”

Rollo seemed to struggle with the memory for a moment, as if trying to recall details of a dream. “Teacher and myself…we were sitting and talking, in one place, but…in another place…I had a stick…and I moved it around in…in the snow, making…letters? Yes, that’s what he…he…”

“You mean…Teacher?” asked Michael. “He taught you how to make them?”

“He…I know he was not…really with me, but…” Rollo looked down, still unsure of how to describe his shared experiences with “Teacher.”

“The letters you were spelling,” Johnathan went on. “That was Teacher’s name you were spelling. Do you remember it?”

Rollo closed his eyes. “Ni…Nic…Nicode…mus. It…he is… Nicodemus. But…” He looked Johnathan squarely in the eye. “Where is he now?”

“It’s a long story. Let’s just say he was as real to you…” Johnathan paused to collect himself for a moment. “…as we are to you now, but in a different way.”

“That’s right,” said Michael. “And we’re just as real as your mother and brother Ardo were to you.”

Rollo stared off into space. “My mother, she…she didn’t want me, she…made me leave.” He shook his head. “But Ardo…cared for me, helped me get food, wanted to be with me, and he…he…” Rollo looked ready to go into shock, his breath quickening. “The cat, it…took him and…” His legs gave way beneath him, and he collapsed to the ground, his body suddenly wracked by heaving sobs. Johnathan came down beside him, helping him partially upright and allowing him to cry on his shoulder.

Michael put his hand up to his face, filled with regret. Cynthia came up beside him, taking his arm.

“Geez, I can’t believe I said that.”

“It’s not your fault, Michael. You couldn’t know he’d react that way. It would have come up eventually anyway.”

Boris and some of his half-siblings approached slowly. “Why’s he crying so much, Boris?” asked Toyah with concern.

“Well…I think it’s because before, he couldn’t show his feelings like you or I. But now that he can…he can truly mourn his brother for the first time.” Boris wanted to offer comfort right then, as the one who could most fully sympathize, having lost his sister Doris the same way; but all had been advised to not rush in too soon.

Not everyone was as hesitant. Jessica got to her feet, unable to bear Rollo’s suffering, for all she was as aware as Boris of the reason for it, even its necessity.

Patricia touched her daughter’s arm. “Jessie, are you sure you should go to him this soon?”

“We’ll have to face each other sooner or later, Mother.” She moved closer to where Johnathan still comforted Rollo, holding back till he seemed more ready.

After another minute, when Rollo was more composed, he put a hand to his face, feeling the wetness around his eyes and also noticing the same on Johnathan’s shoulder. “Why…wet?”

“They’re called tears, Rollo. They come from your eyes when you’re sad. It’s completely normal. I’m sorry about what happened to Ardo, we all are. We wish he could be with us now, but…there are many others here who care about you and want to help you. You believe me, don’t you?”

Rollo looked up, nodding. “I…believe you, Johnathan.”

“If you’re ready, then, we can meet them now.” As Johnathan helped Rollo to his feet again, the first of them stepped forward.

“Rollo, I’m Boris. We met when you first arrived here. Do you remember?”

“Bo-ris. I remember. You…brother?”

“Well, not like you and Ardo; we have the same father but different mothers. It’s a lot to explain, but…first, let me introduce you to the others.”

Those others—Reuben, Lilia, Torrance, Hazel, Toyah, Avila, Ronjack, Thomas and Grey—were all gathered, eager to welcome him into the fold. It was a scene much like that of two weeks before, except this time there would be joining of hands only in greeting, not as a prelude to a strange and alarming phenomenon. Rollo, for his part, seemed not at all overwhelmed by the attention; though still a little hesitant, he appeared to relish the chance to meet his family, meeting each new introduction with eagerness. Nearby, another awaiting her chance made her move, recognizing the appropriate time to do so.

“Rollo,” said Michael, “I have many brothers and sisters, too, and one of them especially would like to meet you. This is my oldest sister, Jessica.”

She’d hung back before, deciding to defer to Boris and his sibs who were, after all, kin to Rollo and should come first. Now, Jessica extended a hand, a bit nervously, half-believing he’d recognize her outright. “Hello, Rollo. It’s…wonderful to meet you at last.” She fought back the impulse to blurt out, “Do you remember me?”

But Rollo seemed almost to read her mind, studying her face as he did Michael and Johnathan, as if there were more than a glimmer of recognition. “J-Jessica. You…Teacher, Nicodemus…he told me she was…the one who…who would be sad when…he left.” He was gesturing with his hands, obviously determined to choose his words carefully. “He left…you when he was…he was…”

Jessica was ready to step in and complete his sentence for him, but Johnathan, standing behind Rollo, gestured to her silently, believing it best not to put words in Rollo’s mouth and to continue to hear what Rollo could recall on his own.

“He was…” Rollo looked down upon his own body. “He was in me…and he was talking in my voice. And that is…how you knew him.”

All listening were amazed at how thoroughly he seemed to have grasped the situation. “Yes, Rollo,” said Jessica, hand on his shoulder. “That’s exactly how…we knew him.”

But Rollo wasn’t finished. “He said…he could not be here after…he helped me to be with you and…talking to you, like…more like you, different, better. He…could not stay.” The tears returned, though not as intensely as before.

Jessica felt a powerful need to comfort him but again restrained herself, offering her shoulder as did Johnathan, stroking his upper back. After another minute, she said, “Nicodemus…made such a great sacrifice in what he did, to bring you to us.”

“It’s true, Rollo,” added Johnathan. “We’ll all miss him greatly, but now…we’ll be able to get to know you—the real Rollo, the true Rollo.”

Rollo seemed appeased, and became more and more curious about his surroundings. He made sweeping gazes of the treetops and the crowds of mice and rats. “Home…” he said distantly. “This is home now?”

“Yes, Rollo, this is home. And if you like, we’ll introduce you to more of your new neighbors.”

Johnathan directed him toward Justin and his family, and even before reintroductions, Rollo recognized Justin from two weeks ago, when he accompanied Johnathan and Michael to bring him to Lahaikshe. Though he’d never met any rats before, he was pleased to meet them and bemused by how their children could be the same size and even larger than him, and yet could still be children. All the Freethorn children had been instructed to treat Rollo as if they were meeting for the first time even though they’d become so accustomed to knowing him as Nicodemus. It seemed by now, though, that if one were to slip and call him by the wrong name, Rollo probably wouldn’t become especially upset. He was introduced to other Rats and Mice as well as the Rusay visitors, and seeing them and hearing about their world outside Freethorn filled him with even greater eagerness and curiosity, so much so that he looked almost ready to break down and cry again. There was a lot for him to see and experience, he was assured, but there would be plenty of time for all of it.

A small group was quickly organized to show him around, including Jessica, Boris and Tallus, and they began with more of the outside before bringing him to the Mouse colony, where he’d be shown everyone’s quarters. It would be later decided if he preferred moving into the apartment occupied by Nicodemus or moving in with someone else, depending on whether he wanted more private quarters. Afterwards he’d be taken on a tour of the Rat colony, where he’d be given the basics of their history, though he probably retained at least some of what Nicodemus had taught him.

As they prepared for this last leg of the tour, Jessica opted to stay behind, telling Patricia she wanted to talk for a while in private. Rollo was curious as to why, noticeably reluctant to continue the tour without her. But Jessica assured him they’d be seeing a lot of each other in the days to come.

Most of Freethorn returned to regular activities for the remainder of the day. Since most classes were over, the children were mostly outside playing, swimming, helping out in the fields; and so the corridors of the Mouse colony were near-silent as Jessica followed Patricia into her parents’ quarters. In her studio, Patricia had continued keeping “Nicodemus, Past and Present” (still its unofficial title, though it would obviously need to be changed) on display. Jessica had specifically asked to come here, and now stood in front of her mother’s masterwork, gazing upon it, nodding slightly, not appearing especially sad.

Patricia came up beside her, taking her arm. “Are you all right, Jessie?”

“I’m fine, Mother. I was just thinking…how will Rollo react when we show this to him? The third panel is actually of him, not Nicodemus.” She sighed. “I guess it…will be a while before…I can totally accept this.”

“Of course, sweetie, I understand. I was just remembering how…Nicodemus confided in me his feelings for you, while he was posing for me.” Patricia shook her head. “I’m not sure why I even brought it up. Certainly by that time, things wouldn’t have turned out any differently.”

“I know. I’d been wondering, almost from the beginning, if my feelings for him were actually for Rollo. He’s the one who had the physical attraction to me originally, and I definitely felt the same attraction soon after. Maybe that was because…I was coming into my latest estrus cycle, but…nothing can change how I felt emotionally. I really loved him, Mother. Maybe…I’ll find that I love Rollo just as much, and he’ll have feelings for me.”

“He really was reluctant to see you stay behind a few minutes ago. I think you do hold…quite a fascination for him already.”

“Oh, I definitely noticed. I wish things could be settled between us quickly, but I know that’s not too likely. I knew that I’d be in this situation once…Nicodemus had gone through with his plan. I knew what I’d have to deal with. And all along, I said that to him, and that I’d be able to handle it. I still believe that, Mother. And I meant what I said to him, to Rollo, that we will be seeing each other a lot in the days to come. I feel…it’s the least I can do for him now, to help him adjust to his new life.”

“It’ll all work out, Jessie. You’ll see. Just take things a day at a time. I know you’ll do fine.”

“Thanks, Mother. I have to confess, though…last night, he…Nicodemus admitted that he was wrestling with last-minute doubts, and that he was actually considering…not going through with it, staying in charge of Rollo’s body so that we could stay together. And…a part of me, deep down, wanted this, wanted that to be his final decision, wanted to shout out loud, ‘Stay with me, don’t go,’ even as we both knew how unfair that’d be to Rollo.” Jessica sighed, moving to a nearby chair. “Was I being selfish for feeling that way? Was I wrong?”

Patricia sat down beside her. “You only wanted the one you love to stay with you. There’s nothing wrong with that. Who wouldn’t feel that way?”

Jessica laughed. “I guess I knew that. But thanks for saying it anyway.” She kissed her mother’s cheek.

“I hesitated to bring it up before…but since you were in your cycle, there’s a chance that, well…”

“…that I might be pregnant. I know. If so, it’ll just be one more thing I’ll deal with a day at a time.”

“But hardly a small one. If you are…”

“Rollo would have to be told eventually, I know. Because, after all…it would be his child, wouldn’t it?” She sighed. “And not Nicodemus’s. Oh, I don’t want to sound negative, it’s just that…it’s all so complicated, more than just where…we meet, we fall in love, we mate, we have kids. But then, we were both adults, we knew what we were risking. And…I can do this, I know I can. Whatever happens, however either of us ends up feeling about each other.”

They went on to discuss how careful Jessica would need to be with Rollo’s feelings, knowing he’d have to be naïve in the ways of love and overall inexperienced in interacting with others. Certainly his social skills would have to be built from the ground up, but both agreed that he could turn out to be a fast learner, given what they’d already seen. The two sat a while longer, discussing other matters before Jessica decided to go to medical for an hour or two to catch up on some work. Patricia, meanwhile, needed to make preparations for her first art class tomorrow.

Rollo was given the full tour of the Rat colony and those outside areas he hadn’t seen yet. Everything he was shown was explained to him carefully, and though he mostly just listened quietly at first, he quickly opened up more, plying his hosts with a seemingly-constant barrage of questions. To their surprise and delight, he appeared to comprehend nearly all the answers. Certainly much of this was attributable to Nicodemus’s teachings “within,” but it appeared more and more that Rollo was indeed proving to be a fast learner.

“Teacher said…the rest of the world is…different from Fr…Freethorn.” Rollo shaded his eyes as he and his guides stood atop the west wall, gazing across the plain.

“That’s right,” said Ellis. “Our Rusay guests, Sithpha and the others, are from out there, and there are many more like them.” He and Lilia had joined the group for this part of the tour.

“No…bad animals…no pr…predators.”

“That’s right,” said Tallus, “just as Michael and Johnathan told you before they brought you here.”

Rollo was suddenly gripped by a wave of emotion, gasping and eyes moistening. Lilia embraced him. The others hesitated before saying more, already knowing that Rollo would probably be given to “episodes” like this for some time.

“There’s a lot for you to see and do here, Rollo,” said Boris as Lilia dried Rollo’s tears with a handkerchief, “and it’ll be so much fun showing it to you.”

“To you, and all the other mice that have just joined us,” Tallus reminded them. “So you’re definitely not alone in being new to everything.” It had already been decided that Rollo should be treated, as much as possible, as any of the other newcomers would, without any special privileges; as tempting as it might be for some to give him more special treatment, since everyone would, for some time to come, be reminded of Nicodemus when seeing or talking with him.

Before moving on to the path back to ground level, Tallus put Rollo up on his shoulders to allow a wider view of the plain. He was suitably impressed, and even more enthused at one day seeing the lands beyond. Tallus told him of their plans for a goodwill excursion, certain that there’d be a place for him on it.

On their way down the path to the ground, Rollo, still on Tallus’s shoulders, was given more details on the classes he’d begin attending tomorrow. Right now, though, his greatest concern was his empty stomach, since it had been several hours since he’d eaten—or rather, since Nicodemus had eaten for him—and so they were now headed for the dining hall, where he’d have his first meal in Freethorn.

“You’ll definitely be eating better here than you were where you grew up,” said Boris. “And the variety—oh, it’s amazing, Rollo. Not only foods brought from Earth, but ones native to this world, too.”

“Skuvurnees, kiatheios, th’vings…” Ellis paused to smack his lips. “Mmm…just talking about them makes my mouth water. And sessvits…you really loved to…uh, I mean Nicodemus, he, well…when he was in your body…” He paused, sighing. “I’m sorry, Rollo, I…guess you know that we’re all used to Nicodemus being here, in your body.”

Rollo looked off in the distance, then down at Ellis. “I…understand, Ellis. Your words…do not hurt me.”

“I think, Rollo, that many of us will make little slip-ups like that for some time,” said Tallus. “But no one means you any harm. It’s just a simple mistake, and we all make them.”

“I will…still understand...Tallus.”

“We all truly want you to feel at home, like you’re one of us…which you are, of course.”

“I am…at home, I feel…that I am home.” Rollo gave a wistful smile. “He…will be back.”

Tallus’s eyes widened and the three mice looked at each other gaping, almost stopping in their tracks. Glancing at Rollo sideways, Tallus asked tentatively who he meant.

“I…do not know. I said…he will be back? I…cannot say why…I said that.”

“Did you mean…Nicodemus?” blurted out Boris. Lilia put a hand on his arm, a gesture of caution. Tallus threw him a stern look.

But Rollo still appeared untroubled. “I…may have meant him. I was thinking about Nicodemus, as you were. But…I do not remember why I…”

“Perhaps,” ventured Tallus, “you meant Nicodemus will be back…in your mind, in your memories, as he will surely be for all of us.”

Rollo’s confusion seemed genuine, but he appeared satisfied by the explanation. “I remember him…still, but not…many things he said. I did before, but…not now.”

It was something Tallus and others, including Nicodemus himself, had theorized: that in time Rollo’s memories of Nicodemus and their relationship “within” would fade. This new statement seemed to bear the theory out, but Tallus decided not to address it directly. “I would wager, Rollo, that the lessons he taught you have stayed with you, and you will retain them for a long, long time.”

Rollo just looked off silently again, sighing; then asked Tallus to set him on the ground. They continued down the trail and on to the Rat colony. During the trip, Rollo said nothing of their recent conversation, but still showed no signs that the previous conversation troubled him at all.

The group brought Rollo to the dining hall for lunch, where he did prove to have a big appetite, sampling a bit and sometimes more of all the raw fruits, vegetables and grains, and more elaborately prepared dishes spread before him. His hosts frequently cautioned him to slow down or risk an upset stomach. Oddly, though there were many foods he couldn’t have eaten before, especially the Lahaikshean ones, he repeatedly remarked that some of them smelled and tasted familiar. His hosts realized that he was “remembering” what Nicodemus had eaten on a purely sensual level rather than a conscious one. Nicodemus had taken an especially keen liking to roasted sessvits; and, as he had pondered himself, this fondness carried over to Rollo, who was once again advised to slow down and not get greedy. He seemed to immediately take the advice to heart, apparently having been similarly advised by Nicodemus, though he said nothing about actually remembering such advice.

Many dropped by during the meal, curious about Rollo’s status. Throughout it all, Boris, Lilia and Ellis never brought up Rollo’s earlier cryptic statement. All wondered, though, whether Tallus’s explanation was correct, or did Rollo mean that he believed Nicodemus would literally be back, in some way? None wanted to press him on the issue and risk upsetting him; and if his memories “within” were fading, it may not even be an issue for long, if it ever was to begin with.

For the remainder of this day, no one would ask him about it, and he’d make no further statements of the like. And if anyone were to bring it up the next day, he would claim no memory of such a statement. More and more, it appeared that those who believed that Rollo’s memories of his “headmate” period with Nicodemus would, in time, fade completely would prove to be entirely correct.

Before long, Jessica arrived with her children, and as promised took charge of Rollo for the rest of the day. While their time together wasn’t a teaching session per se, Jessica did answer any questions he had on life in Freethorn, especially those concerning interpersonal relationships. He was quick to recognize that he still had a few things to learn in that department: that it was wise to not speak too impulsively and to put some thought behind what he says, and to put the feelings of others before his own. Throughout it all, Jessica was able to keep her own feelings in check, and by the end of the day she was surprised at how easily she’d been able to accept that this was Rollo and not Nicodemus. The children also handled the situation remarkably well, even the younger ones. Each of them managed to refrain from calling him by the wrong name; though it was clear that they missed him as he was, for all they welcomed him as Rollo. Lula joined them for about an hour, and she was equally discreet. She and Stuart were more open by now of their growing mutual affection, and Rollo seemed to pick up on this. His actual commentary was limited to simply observing aloud how much the two liked to be with each other, but he seemed to understand much more, appearing to derive vicarious pleasure from seeing the two youngsters together.

They spent most of their time together in Jessica’s quarters and in the area just outside the Mouse colony, though it wasn’t until quite late in the day, when Rollo was feeling a little tired from the day’s excitement, that he was introduced to the quarters Nicodemus had occupied and which were now his if he so chose. There had been some concern that he might not want private quarters, but, as with the food, he took to the idea very well. He was given a full explanation of his furnishings and how they were used, after which they left him alone.

He lay on his bed, actually relishing the chance to spend some time alone to reflect on the day. His thoughts were mainly limited to all he’d experienced thus far, though he certainly looked forward to tomorrow and all it promised. The kindness and genuine caring he’d received from everyone he’d met had a great impact on him, of course, and from one in particular. He felt, as he had all day, a great sense that Jessica was one to be treated especially kindly, though he didn’t really know why. Was there someone, one individual, who told him this? He sighed, deciding it didn’t really matter. It just seemed right and natural, as much as it did just to be here, so much that he almost felt like weeping…

Chapter 57 - Speculations and departures

Not far away, the Brisbys were in the outer courtyard of their home with Justin, Isabella, Sithpha and Dinilom, gathered around the leaning rock.

“I’m sure Jessie will be careful of his feelings,” said Isabella, “but he seems so vulnerable now. Everything’s so new to him.”

“That’s true,” said Johnathan, “but he seems to have adapted quite well so far. And let’s not forget, he’s got plenty of company as far as ‘new’ is concerned.”

Justin nodded. “The whole makeup of this colony has changed overnight, even more so than just after our Great Migration. There’s no telling how different things would have been, what directions we’d have otherwise gone in, without such a big influx of Mice.”

“We’re still not equal in numbers,” added Madeline, “but we do have almost twice as many mice as we had before. It’ll make quite a difference, I suppose.”

“Everyone I’ve talked to thinks that only good things can come out of this,” said Justin, “and that we do have a lot to look forward to.”

“Everyone we’ve ever talked to thinks it’s all right that you’re here,” said Dinilom. “As long as everyone respects each other, no one has said they expect any future problems, as least nothing major. So I guess a few more of you are all right.”

They went on to discuss other points, such as speculating over whether earlier signs of possible anti-Mouse prejudice by Rats would be a problem, or if it ever was. They discussed the Rusay guests’ departure tomorrow morning, following the scheduled arrival of Pinphila and Dornphinsal, who would also be shuttling the next exchange party, two more Rat families, out of Freethorn. They discussed Gwinthrayle, who had already returned home, and how much he’d done for them in recent days.

Going unvoiced, though, was a matter that had been on the mouse couple’s minds since this morning but kept to themselves—at least until after the Rusay pair had left for their quarters for the night. After briefly conferring between themselves, the Brisbys disclosed to Justin and Isabella Johnathan’s visions—or “lookbacks” as they were already starting to call them—from last night and this morning. The first of them was disturbing enough, with its evocation of a bizarre creature menacing children and then vanishing into thin air, but the second was perhaps more troubling: while everyone was heading for shelter inside the Rat colony during an abnormally-strong windstorm, a tree limb came down on top of Stuart, Jessica’s son.

“He appeared to be injured pretty badly, but when I brought it up an hour or so, I saw him recover fully like nothing happened, just springing out of bed, literally.” Johnathan shook his head. “I didn’t tell Maddie about that one until this morning, ’cause she was already asleep. But it didn’t stop there. I didn’t try any more lookbacks today until after we were through with Nicodemus and…the turnover. But the next one…well, I chose a moment that centered on Nicodemus, and it was like a waking nightmare. He was facing down this creature that…I guess would best be described as what humans would conceive a demon from Hell to look like.” He briefly described a creature that seemed to be composed of mud and gravel, with veins and eyes that glowed red, horns and facial spikes that looked like blackened wood, and seemed to generate great heat from its mouth.

“As usual, I couldn’t hear anything so I don’t know what Nicodemus said to it, but after a little while it went away just like that other one, like it was never there.”

He paused, taking in the rat couple’s mystified expressions. “At first, I chalked it up to my poor brain needing a period of adjustment for these new abilities, or something like that. But I’ve made other lookbacks, to other recent times, and there was nothing that seemed out of the ordinary, or different from what actually happened.”

“Or at least…what we remember,” added Madeline.

Justin nodded. “I wonder…is it possible that someone or something has affected our memories?”

“All of us?” wondered Isabella. “Who or what could do…or would do such a thing? And why?”

“I don’t think even Gwinthrayle or Birantha have that kind of power,” said Johnathan. “Not that I’m suspecting them.”

“Well, whatever actually happened,” said Justin, “there’s definitely a pattern to these lookbacks of yours.”

Johnathan nodded. “Illusions, bizarre creatures that up and vanish, and a serious injury that just reverses itself. It’s as if we were…being tested or something.”

Justin’s eyes grew wide. He shook his head. “Wow…when you said that just now, it struck a…really familiar chord.”

“As if we’d been really discussing such a thing? I know, I felt it too.”

“Well, I’m all but ready to say it beyond a doubt: that someone did change our memories.” Madeline took Johnathan’s arm. “And that it was your ability that uncovered it.”

“But if it’s true,” pondered Isabella, “what is it that we shouldn’t remember?”

“I don’t know,” said Johnathan, “but I’ve a feeling, maybe only a hunch…that someone here in Freethorn knows something about it.” He stood upright. “Come on, let’s all go inside. I want to try something, and I’d prefer it if no one overheard.” The four filed inside, and after doublechecking to make sure none of their children or houseguests were present, they all sat in the front room.

“I haven’t tried doing this while giving a simultaneous play-by-play, but we’ll see how it goes.”

“How far back are you looking, Johnathan?”

“Just three days ago, Justin, just before we went to the Cavern of Change; about, say, an hour before.” So saying, Johnathan closed his eyes, and after about fifteen seconds began describing his lookback to his audience.

It was nearly fifteen minutes later before Johnathan brought it to an abrupt halt, opening his eyes and leaning back on the couch, looking exhausted. Madeline was ready to lend comfort though he assured her he was all right. His lookback had taken much longer than he’d expected, due to his frequent skipping ahead in time and reluctance to end the session too soon.

The four reflected on what he’d described: Lilia not simply falling into a deep sleep—an event that made no sense to begin with—but appearing to undergo a bizarre transformation with an apparent personality change and a strange, almost glowing appearance? Her sitting on the rock telling a lengthy story to everyone, and then accompanying those who went to the Cavern? Her apparent initiating of the process that broke down the amulet, instead of Gwinthrayle’s?

“Well, began Justin after a pause, “whatever this all means, I’m all but ready to join Madeline and say that is what really happened. And what you said before, Johnathan: that someone here does know something.”

“And the one most likely candidate would be Lilia,” said Johnathan. “After all the other…unusual stuff with her…”

“I can’t believe she’d be responsible,” said Isabella. “And what could we do now? Question her, interrogate her?”

“She and Ellis are so happy together now,” added Madeline. “I’d hate to think of spoiling things for them so soon.”

“I don’t think that’d do any good,” said Johnathan. “This transformation she underwent, it had to have been imposed on her. I’m certain she wouldn’t know a thing now.”

“She says she only remembers passing out, and then waking up at Gwinthrayle’s,” said Justin, “just as we remember it. I think you’re right, that that’s all she really does remember.”

“It’s too bad you couldn’t hear any of that story of hers, Johnathan,” said Isabella. “That’d tell us so much, for sure.”

“Yeah. Well…” Johnathan breathed in deep. “I suppose we should just give it another day or so, see what develops. Whatever this is, we should probably tell the council about it tomorrow.”

“I’m sure it’s nothing to worry about, Johnathan,” said Madeline. “Whether this is just your new abilities needing adjusting, or…something else.” Justin and Isabella offered their own encouragement, and then left their hosts alone for the night.

“I know I shouldn’t let myself worry this much,” confessed Johnathan as they sat down again. “It’s just…I guess it’s the feeling like…I’m losing control, that I’m experiencing things that…just shouldn’t be.”

“I know, love. But it will be all right. Just like when you were first sent here, and Gwinthrayle helped you reach me with his spells. When I received them, I didn’t know what to make of them, especially since we all thought you were dead. But I never once doubted my sanity. I knew that, whatever it was, it was something that I was meant to experience, and a puzzle to be solved.”

Johnathan nodded. “And this is no less than that, I know.” He kissed his wife’s cheek, and they discussed less weighty subjects until their children and houseguests returned to settle in for the night.

Most Freethorners, Rat or Mouse, long-timer or newcomer, were doing the same, most anticipating the day to come with greater enthusiasm that they had in recent days. For some, though, there was business that just couldn’t wait until then.

“Ellis, what’s this all about? Why do we need to do this now?”

“I’m sorry to be so secretive, Lil,” said Ellis as he closed the door to their quarters. “But I wanted to get everyone together first.” Before Lilia could ask who they were meeting, Ellis was already tapping quietly on the door of one of their immediate neighbors.

“Ellis…Lilia. What’s going on?”

“Sorry if I woke you or Seelah, Boris…but this just couldn’t wait. I needed to tell somebody now.” Ellis reminded him of an incident from this past afternoon, adding that this tied in with it. Intrigued, Boris said he’d join them after telling Seelah he’d be back soon.

The three moved on to one of the newly-occupied apartments, whose occupants were also just settling in. Instead of bringing up the afternoon’s incident, Ellis reminded Timothy and Lucy of their trip to Gwinthrayle’s, and in particular a lengthy story their host had told to them, and now he thought that story had given him insight on more recent events.

“So,” Timothy asked Ellis as the group proceeded down the hall, “who are we meeting next?” He asked this as one who already knew the answer.

“Well, he’d be over in the Rat colony, and I wouldn’t want to leave him out because of that, but…”

“Hey, where’re you guys headed?”

They all turned around to see Bertie and Tara approach. “We were just talking about you, bro,” said Ellis. They quickly compared notes and discovered they were here for similar reasons. Now they had one more stop to make, the last one of the night.

“Johnathan, are you coming to bed soon?” Madeline approached her husband, still sitting in the darkened front room.

“Oh, I guess so.” He stretched limbs and stood, smiling at Madeline, always appreciative of her tolerance of his penchant for moments of deep contemplation.

“I hope you’re still not too worried about your lookbacks,” she said as they embraced.

“I’m okay, babe.” He lightly kissed her ear. “If there is a solution, I hope it’s sooner instead of later. Either way…”

A knock on the front door interrupted them. They went to answer it together, wondering who’d come calling at this hour.

“Hi, Mom. Hi, Dad,” came Timothy’s greeting. “I know it’s late; actually, we all know, but…”

“…But we just had to tell someone right away,” finished Ellis.

“Well, you may as well all come in,” said Johnathan, “though we’ll need to keep things quiet.” Madeline then suggested it may be better to go someplace where they wouldn’t disturb their children or houseguests’ sleep, so in short order they’d all gathered in Timothy and Lucy’s new quarters up the hall.

“Now,” said Johnathan with mock sternness after all eight had taken their seats, “this had better be worth all this trouble.”

“Well, it’s an idea we had,” began Ellis. “Both Bertie and me.”

“Just about the same time, too,” added Bertie. “See, a little while ago, Ellis was telling me about this afternoon, when he ’n’ Lilia were helping with Rollo, showing him around ’n’ stuff…”

“…And he said something—Rollo, I mean—that about stopped us in our tracks. Nicodemus’s name came up, and Rollo says, right out of the blue: ‘He will be back.’ He didn’t come right out and say he meant Nicodemus, and he said he wasn’t even sure why he said it, even when…we asked him if he meant Nicodemus.”

“Thanks, Ellis,” put in Boris, “but I was the one who kind o’ jumped the gun on that. But anyway, Rollo didn’t seem especially bothered by the question.”

“We didn’t tell anyone else about this,” said Ellis, “at least at first. I mentioned it to Bertie and Tara when Lilia and I met them for dinner, but nobody else. But I couldn’t stop thinking about it. And then when we were getting ready for bed, Lilia just casually mentioned Gwinthrayle, and whether he could find out more. I started thinking about our visit to him last week, and that story he told us about…ah, what’s his name…”

“Turlokeen,” finished Timothy.

“I know, I know. And the ending of that story…that’s when it hit me.”

“He jumped straight up in the air, just about,” added Lilia, laughing.

“Just about hit my head on the ceiling, too,” added Ellis. “Anyway, you know what happened after Turlokeen died.”

The Brisbys looked at each other, nodding with realization.

“And the same thing occurred to me,” said Bertie. “That’s why we came down here. So what do you think? Could the same thing happen to Nicodemus?”

Johnathan thought for a moment. “Well, he did, in essence, pass on here on Lahaikshe…just as Turlokeen did. It’s altogether possible.”

“So,” ventured Ellis, “do you think that, when he and Rollo were, you know, inside, that he told Rollo he’d be back somehow? And that he was sure about it, like he planned on it?”

“Oh, I wouldn’t even try to draw any conclusions,” said Johnathan. “At least not until someone stands up and says, ‘How do you do? My name is…’” He paused, shaking his head, smiling. “Well…I don’t want you to think I’m making light of this. It’s definitely possible. There’s plenty of evidence that reincarnation really happens here, and Turlokeen’s case is just one of several, all over this world, that seems to prove it definitively.”

“Well, if it does happen to Nicodemus,” said Timothy, “would he be reborn as a Rusay, or as one of us?”

“One of us, of course,” said Lucy with a laugh. “I mean, he’d have to be, wouldn’t he?”

“Makes sense to me,” agreed Bertie. “What do you think, Tara?”

His seemingly-mismatched mate seemed preoccupied, looking down, one hand on her belly, as if the life within her was speaking to her; then she gave a small start as she noticed everyone else looking to her. Before she could reply, Bertie gave voice to what all were thinking: “It could be our baby, couldn’t it? That’d really make sense, wouldn’t it, Johnathan?”

“Hey, yeah!” added Lucy. “’Cause he’s already lived life as both a rat and a mouse, and now it’s like he’d be both!”

“A combination of the two!” said Bertie.

“Now, let’s not get carried away, people,” said Johnathan. “This is all fascinating, but it’s all just speculation, and it may not ever happen. And I’m not sure it would work that way, since your baby was conceived while Nicodemus was still here, or before.”

Everyone agreed it was a good point; and so Johnathan urged everyone to sleep on it, after which he and Madeline bid their visitors goodnight.

Back in the corridor, they could hear further discussion ensue behind them. “It’s all wishful thinking,” said Johnathan as Madeline took his arm, “but then, few if any of us wanted him to leave.”

“And he wanted so much to stay. I know what Jessica must be going through, though the circumstances are so different from when you were separated from us.” Madeline glanced back briefly. “I wonder if we should…”

“Should what? Oh…you mean, maybe we should advise them to keep tonight’s discussion private? Or at least away from Jessica, maybe, to avoid getting her hopes too high.”

They continued discussing the point as they approached the interior door to their quarters, but halted it upon seeing they had further company, a trio that included one who put the sentence “We were just talking about you” on their lips, though they kept it to themselves.

“There you are,” said Jessica. “Monte and Marnie said you’d probably be back shortly. I know it’s late, but…”

“…But it’s really important, Johnathan,” added Stuart quickly.

“We thought maybe it could wait till morning,” said Shirley, “but it just…seemed right to tell you right away.”

“They were so insistent, and…from what they’d told me already, I understood why.” Indeed, the urgency in the children’s voices and their earnest expressions were enough to convince the Brisbys as well, though both were getting the feeling they wouldn’t be getting much sleep tonight.

They gathered in the outer courtyard, where the children told a tale which, on its face, seemed to be of deception, with all the events of recent days unfolding differently from what everyone remembered. But it would bring an enormous sense of relief to Johnathan, who would realize that the bizarre scenes he’d encountered in his lookbacks weren’t as private as he’d thought; especially upon hearing Stuart and Shirley’s account of Stuart’s apparent injury, exactly as Johnathan had seen it. The matter would generate much discussion in ensuing days, especially after it would be shared with the council tomorrow.

Morning saw yet another gathering under the big burr oak, but this one was more specifically like the one from nearly three weeks ago, especially since it centered upon some of the same individuals.

“Well, Sithpha, Dinilom…it’s been great having you all here. We hope you can make it back someday.”

“Thanks, Melvin. You and Judith, everyone here…you’ve all been the greatest hosts. I was saying to Dini the other day, coming here was the third best thing I’ve ever done, after marrying her and being a dad.”

Dinilom moved closer to her husband, rubbing his cheek with hers. “We’ve seen and heard so many things we never thought we would. It’s really been the experience of a lifetime.”

“And a lot of it was unexpected for us, too,” said Arthur. Inwardly he added: And you don’t know the half of it, believe me.

Nearby, some of the Rusay children were getting in some last-minute playtime with their new friends, though others were in tears over having to leave. One even said she wished she could stay here forever. This was Tisphi, who still sported an immobilized and bandaged toe, still not completely healed after her little misstep, which hadn’t dampened her enthusiasm for the place at all. Jessica, who had treated her that day and had tracked her progress since, gave her a big consoling hug and promised to pay her family a visit someday.

Rollo, meanwhile, was more concerned with recounting to Jessica’s children and anyone else within earshot his first morning of classes and how well they went and how he couldn’t wait for more. His enthusiasm was infectious, and it all but eliminated any doubts anyone may still have harbored about Nicodemus’s turnover. Nearby, Ellis still couldn’t help wondering about Rollo’s cryptic declaration, but he’d promised Lilia and his friends and siblings he’d refrain from asking Rollo about it directly. He hadn’t brought it up himself since; and even now, it seemed more and more as if he wouldn’t even remember making the statement.

Stuart and Shirley were thrilled with Rollo’s progress—as was Lula, always close by Stuart’s side—but their minds were never far from this morning’s excitement, after being secreted into a council meeting and presenting their just-completed report on “What Really Happened.” It had been a bit nerve-wracking for them but also quite the thrill, being up before the entire council. They’d been prepared for a certain amount of skepticism, but Johnathan supported their claims all the way, able as he was to corroborate their recollections with his lookbacks. By meeting’s end, the council was unanimous in agreeing that events had unfolded differently and their memories had been altered, and that it was most likely “Elle,” this entity that had allegedly taken possession of Lilia, that had been responsible.

The obvious next question: What now? It was agreed there’d be little point in telling everyone and risk a lot of worry and uncertainty. Perhaps in time everyone would remember; after all, “Elle” had essentially allowed three of them to uncover the truth by utilizing their own abilities. She had apparently even had a hand in Johnathan’s new command of the Stone’s capabilities, so she had to have known that he, at least, was capable. Once again, a wait-and-see approach was concluded to be the way to go.

Nearby, the new Rusay arrivals were becoming acquainted with their new surroundings and temporary neighbors, as were the two haisk’ves that had drawn the carriages that brought them here—the same pair as on past visits, being attended by drivers Pinphila and Dornphinsal. At the foot of the north entrance the carriages waited to shuttle not only the outgoing visitors back to Timphon, but the next group of exchangees from Freethorn as well, this being the first time back-to-back exchanges were being done. Accordingly, larger carriages were being used this time, which, it was estimated, wouldn’t put undue strain on the haisk’ves, which would also be pulling double the passenger load.

As the new visitors were being directed to the guest quarters, those departing finished their goodbyes and began making their way to the archway that was Freethorn’s north entrance leading down to the plain, accompanied by a small party to see them off on their final departure, including Justin and Johnathan, who had welcomed the last party of exchangees, and some of their families. Some of the Rusay and Rat children were allowed to ride on the haisk’ves’ backs on the way down the ramp as the adults recalled some more of their recently shared experiences.

As Pinphila and Dornphinsal were finishing hitching up the haisk’ves to the carriages, Justin said, “Well, Sithpha, Dinilom…Morobphra, Miatati…all you great children…it’s been a wonderful two-and-a-half-weeks having you as guests. I guess it goes without saying, but…our doors are open to you any time you just want to drop in.”

“Well, we’ll definitely keep that in mind, Justin,” said Sithpha as he finished placing his family’s belongings on the first carriage. “It’s sure been amazing. And to think…we were here to see all that business with the Stone get resolved. If not for that…well, we’re just glad it all worked out for the better. Gwinthrayle and Birantha probably saved a whole lot of lives, all over the world.”

“They certainly did,” said Johnathan, with just a hint of hesitancy in his reply.

“We’d surely stay longer,” said Dinilom, “but there’s a lot back home we need to catch up on.”

“For us too,” added Morobphra. “But I’m sure we’ll take you up on your offer one of these days.” He looked down at Tisphi, still pouting over their departure; then he scooped her up in his arms, assuring her he’d make good on his promise. Visibly pacified, Tisphi joined the other Rusay children in boarding the carriages. Isabella finished giving Gwinthri one last hug before handing the toddler over to Dinilom. The other Rusay children were already discussing animatedly what they’d do once they were back home. Farewells were completed for the two departing Rat families: Arthur, Melinda and their three children Sarah Jane, Lysette and Wallace; and Jolene, Godfrey, their three children Tina, Heidi and Zachary, and Karina and Benjamin (Jolene’s youngest daughter with first husband Sullivan, and Karina’s new husband).

Shortly, with everything and everyone on board, two flicks of the reins put the haisk’ves in motion. One last round of farewells and goodbye waves accompanied the carriages’ departure, their wheels and the haisk’ves’ hooves raising only a small amount of dust that was normally present on the Great Red Plain surrounding Freethorn—the plain which, they now knew, had its origins in a long-ago disaster similar to two far more recent ones, which were hoped to be the last this world would ever see.

Perhaps these thoughts were on the minds of some of those watching the carriages recede further in the distance. They all looked at each other, then turned to ascend the ramp, conversing on how great it was having them here and how the new group of visitors probably wouldn’t have an experience here that would be nearly as interesting.

At length Johnathan said, “It feels almost like…we should have told them.”

“You mean about ‘What Really Happened?’” said Justin. “Yeah, I know what you mean. Considering this is their native world and all.”

“But then, it would be like we’d need to tell everyone,” added Madeline, “wouldn’t it?”

“It would do no more good than our telling everyone in Freethorn,” agreed Johnathan. “At least…as long as nobody actually recalls events that way.”

“Except Stuart and Shirley,” reminded Isabella. “It must be strange for them, being the only ones. So much for them to bear.”

“I know,” said Justin, “but so far they seem to be bearing up really well.”

“They told Nicodemus about it, didn’t they?”

“They did,” replied Johnathan. “And it didn’t ‘trigger’ any memories in him, any more than it did us. Even with my abilities, seeing these events differently, I still remember them the way ‘Elle’ wanted us to.”

“Maybe,” suggested Madeline, “we don’t really need to remember her being among us, or her existence at all.”

“But Stuart and Shirley do, and someone like Elle would have to know of their abilities…” Johnathan shook his head. “Oh, I guess there’s no use wracking my brain over it.”

“The kids don’t remember all of what Elle said,” said Justin, “but apparently she regards us as her children—adopted children, perhaps, but still just as much hers as the Rusay. And, I guess…when it comes down to it, we all are, in a manner of speaking. As a race, we’re in our infancy, with much to learn still.” He was very much aware of how he was echoing his own thoughts on earlier occasions, most memorably when the party Madeline had led to bring Johnathan back to Earth had returned, and Justin was more acutely aware than ever that he himself still had much to learn. It would be a never-ending process, he knew—hoped, even—as long as any of them still drew breath.

Johnathan as well looked to the future, knowing it to be perhaps a greater learning experience, what with his new abilities passed on to him from the red amulet. He was actually quite confident in this, having commanded it for so long; but of greater uncertainty was the matter of his newly-discovered “replicating” ability and its implications. An awesome responsibility, this—having the means within him to bring an improved quality of life to others, with the actual numbers probably limited only to the amount of time and energy left to him in this life. But he’d already pledged to concentrate on the more immediate concerns of building quarters for the new arrivals—most of whom were looking to him for guidance as they adjusted to their new lives—and continuing to be a loving husband and father, grandfather, friend and helper.

The four friends continued on up the ramp to reenter their world-within-a-world.

Epilogue

Gwinthrayle paused for a moment after stepping out on his south terrace, taking in the mix of scents from his gardens before setting out on his usual early-evening constitutional. The mix was never entirely the same from day to day, due mostly to differing times for individual species of plants to be in bloom. But this one in particular gave him a special sense of contentment, that all was right with the world and as it should be—not just in his corner of the world, but in the whole of it. Of course, recent events contributed in no small part to this feeling: a major catastrophe that potentially would have affected the entire world had been averted, after all. His thoughts fell to those who had aided him in the effort, one of whom was no longer among his friends in Freethorn. He’d been there to witness the turnover and had thought much since about how much Nicodemus had sacrificed willingly.

As he began strolling down the trail, his thoughts regressed to earlier times when he’d hosted other interdimensional guests, up to and including Johnathan, and helped them return to their home dimensions. He’d enjoyed meeting all these diverse beings, gaining genuine friendships with many of them and knew that others could follow. He hoped it were so; recent events notwithstanding, his life had been largely uneventful lately. One thing had become clear, especially with the arrival of Freethorn and its residents, and that’s that he’d allowed himself to become too isolated. He felt the need to return to earlier times, when he’d circulated more freely among his fellow Rusay—certainly more than fellow workers of magic like his good friend Birantha, who had left for his home late yesterday.

Three tysthals crossed his path in front, pausing to browse near the umatay tree. A bit further, a few waktinis emerged from a patch of tall minphiss, their skins catching the sunlight, pausing to extend their tiny necks to look up and down the trail before crossing. They were most likely the same ones that so charmed Lucy and her friends, Gwinthrayle guessed. He always enjoyed having guests, and this most recent hosting had been the most enjoyable in years, perhaps decades; and it was due in no small part to the presence of children, of Lucy’s age and younger, seeing everything for the first time with wide-eyed wonder.

Of course, Lucy’s being a child was relative, since she and Timothy were a married couple now. He’d congratulated them on his visit yesterday, wishing them and the other new marrieds every happiness. But this also reinforced the idea that he himself might need a change in direction. He’d had love affairs in his younger days, but he’d long considered his calling to be an impediment to a lasting marriage. Perhaps now was the time to change all that. The idea of a child of his own appealed to him more and more, perhaps even more than having a wife. Why, even at his age he was certain that any number of young ladies could be found that…

He slowed his pace, reacting to a sound that he thought may be out of place. He was on the trail leading toward the creekside meadow that was a favorite of his guests. The sound definitely came from that general direction, so he moved on. There it is again: a small splash, accompanied by a vocalization that was definitely Rusay, a pleasurable, contented sound. Well, it seems I may be playing host again, he thought as the meadow came into view.

Upon reaching it, his suspicions were confirmed: a child, around seven or eight years of age, splashing about happily a short ways from the near bank. Upon closer approach, he noticed a small, neat pile of discarded clothing, and that its owner was a girl, still not aware of his presence as she moved into the deeper water, submerging completely for a short while. When she resurfaced, she swam up to the bank, facing Gwinthrayle directly, eyes closed. She shook her head and brushed the excess water from her face before opening her eyes. Seconds later she gave a small yelp as she noticed she was being observed.

“Hello there, little one,” Gwinthrayle greeted his guest cheerily. “My apologies for startling you.”

It took her a few more seconds to find her voice. “Do…do you live here?”

“Indeed I do. I am Gwinthrayle, and these are my gardens. You are most welcome here.”

“Gwin…tha…rayle. I-I’ve heard of you. My daddy said you lived around here.”

Gwinthrayle sat down cross-legged on the bank. “And your daddy…is he here as well?”

“No. I was with him, and my mommy and big sister, but I got lost. I don’t know how. I thought I was gonna catch up with them, but I guess I got further away from them instead.”

“That must have been frightening for you.”

“I was frightened. I called and called, but I got no answer. I cried for a little while, but then I remembered Daddy talking about you, and I thought I could find you, maybe, and then you could help me.” She related her story calmly, obviously having overcome any earlier upset. “And then I saw the creek, and your house up the hill. I was gonna go up there first, but I wanted to cool off too. I couldn’t help it, I just took off my clothes and jumped in.” She grinned impishly.

Gwinthrayle laughed. “Well, that’s perfectly all right, little one. You needed to refresh yourself. And your daddy advised you correctly about me. I will do all I can to bring you back to your family. Now…what is your name?”

“Sanphi. And, oh! Thank you for helping me.”

“It’s my pleasure to help others, Sanphi. Now, you must be hungry after making such a journey.”

“Oh, yes, sir, I haven’t eaten at all since breakfast. But I really like the water, too. May I stay a little longer?”

“Of course, my dear.” They continued chatting, Sanphi telling Gwinthrayle more about her family and their hiking trip, during which she’d strayed from them; and her home and friends and favorite things. She paused occasionally to do a little swimming and diving, eager to show off for her host, obviously being very much at home in the water.

After a few more minutes, she announced she was ready to come out, looking forward to seeing Gwinthrayle’s home and getting some food and drink in her before returning to her family. She climbed up onto the bank, casual about her nudity, as were most Rusay when swimming or bathing.

“Oh…I guess I need to wait till I’m dry before I put my clothes back on.”

“Hmm…perhaps. Or…” Gwinthrayle said a few words to himself, gestured, and a miniature whirlwind suddenly formed around Sanphi, who gave another yelp of surprise. He told her not to be frightened and allow it to dry her thoroughly. She quickly adjusted, giggling as the warm rushing air tickled her. She splayed limbs to allow it to reach every corner of her body.

“I think I’m dry now,” she announced, and Gwinthrayle ended the spell. She was still laughing as she moved toward her clothing. “You really can do wonderful things, sir.” They chatted some more as she dressed in the near-unisex warm-weather outfit favored by children in this region: a vest that came to just above the navel and tied at the bottom, short trousers that came to mid-thigh, and shoes very much like those worn by humans, well-suited for walking.

After she finished lacing them, Sanphi jumped to her feet. Gwinthrayle stood upright, not nearly as quickly, complimented his little guest on how nice she looked, and took her hand. He led her to the trail leading back to his house, up the gently sloping hill, pointing out some of his rare plants along the way.

Here and there they again encountered tysthals and waktinis, the latter of which Sanphi had seen only once before. Gwinthrayle also gave her a sample of how they’d go to find her parents, weaving a brief floating spell, making her squeal with delight. She’d hardly forgotten her appetite, though; and so, after bringing her inside his abode, he conducted a brief tour of the main floor, after which the two adjourned to his pantry.

After dishing up her plate, he led her to a nearby dinette, where they both sat. Sanphi dug in enthusiastically, reducing a th’ving to an empty peel in about two minutes.

“Well, you were hungry. But you’ll risk an upset stomach eating so fast.”

“Sorry,” she said in between bites of the bananalike fruit. “Mommy says that, too, but mmm! It’s hard to go slow.” They continued chatting about her home and family, and his life here, touching upon his visits to that piece of “new land,” Freethorn, and his friendship with its residents. Sanphi found this especially fascinating, mentioning that her family hoped to visit there someday.

At length she asked, “Do you have any kids?”

Gwinthrayle paused a moment. “Once…almost. But that’s a long story.” He looked away wistfully.

“I’ll probably be a mommy someday.” Sanphi popped a roasted sessvit into her mouth.

“And I’m sure you’ll make a fine one, my dear.”

After a pause she said, “Actually…this is an honor I can claim even now…many, many times over…”

“Oh? At so young an age—” Gwinthrayle caught himself, realizing Sanphi’s sudden change in voice and demeanor. He faced her directly, and found himself reeling from the sight. She still looked like a Rusay child, but there was a bizarre otherworldliness about her now, as if one were viewing her in more than three dimensions. In addition, her eyes had become seemingly-luminous pools, as if one could dive in to untold depths. Her voice, too, had an otherworldly quality to it, still normal but with an additional “breezy” overtone to it. Bizarre as it was, it was an appearance strangely familiar to Gwinthrayle, but before he could say a word, his brain reeled from strange sensations that almost made him fall out of his chair. Very quickly they subsided, but the aftereffect proved much more significant than a passing headache or dizzy spell.

“You…” he began as he steadied himself. “You were…in Freethorn, and you…possessed Lilia. You are…Elle.”

“That is how you may know me…again.” She placed a jorthna berry into her mouth, her manner actually seeming casual. “This body does require nourishment. I will continue to provide for her.”

“You changed…everyone’s memory of you. So that none would know it was you who…made those changes in Johnathan, and Eric, and…there were those anomaly-creatures they reported…”

“All my responsibilities, yes.” Elle finished peeling another th’ving and took a small bite.

“I’d confided to Birantha that…it seemed that such a task as breaking down Johnathan’s amulet might be beyond my abilities, even with his assistance. But it was the two of us who actually assisted you.”

“Indeed, mage.”

“And…two years gone, after I’d bid Johnathan and the others farewell, you…took control of a Rusay child, Tuintwom. My memory of that encounter was altered following your departure.”

Elle paused to swallow. “This is so. I felt it expedient at the time.”

“Then I am sure, my lady, that you may anticipate my next question.” Elle only nodded, taking another bite of th’ving. Gwinthrayle cleared his throat. “And that would be…why? Why all the secrecy? Especially after giving us so much information—not only to me, but to everyone in Freethorn—about how you’d influenced the development of this very world and its people. But then you changed all our memories. Why? And…why are you here now, allowing me to remember again?”

Elle paused again before giving a reply, a tendency Gwinthrayle actually found to be familiar. “In anticipation of other questions…this child will be returned to her own control unharmed, as was Lilia. It is…much easier to assimilate within one born of this realm, a swifter process as well; as is relinquishing control to one. It is true that her misdirection that led her to you was partially my doing.”

“And you never would have allowed any real harm to come to Sanphi, I know, just like Lilia and Tuintwom; just as you anticipated that I would help her. And yet, you had a reason for bringing her to me, so that you may address me now.” Gwinthrayle decided right then against further questioning of her motives, knowing she would most likely say no more than what she’d come to say. And again she was in no hurry to reply, taking another big bite of skuvurnee first, leaving an awkward silence in the room.

“Some…clarification was in order,” she finally said. “And I believed you to be the one best suited to hear my words. I had already stated my motivation for having the advanced Rats and Mice of Freethorn make their home here. But there were other considerations as well. Throughout the millennia that I have observed the development of civilizations in dimensional realms outside my own, I have seen much unhappiness and strife, much uncivilized behavior among supposedly civilized peoples. On one occasion I sent a shard to one realm and was so distressed by what I had seen that I contacted its native world-spirit.” Sanphi/Elle paused to place two more sessvits in her mouth.

“Hmm…your counterpart, of course. And what were the results of this meeting?”

“It yielded very little inasmuch as affecting her actions, or lack thereof. She claimed an inability to affect the motivations or actions of her people, and I had good cause to believe that it was not due to lack of will on her part. I came away from this encounter with heavy heart for the plight of these people, but also with an even greater confirmation of my own uniqueness. It was not long after this that I began working harder to establish a new order for Lahaikshe and its people.

“But I suppose this is a digression. I spoke before of the unhappiness and strife in many dimensional realms I visited, and in almost every case, there was present in the minds of its people an inclination to believe in unseen forces as being responsible for natural phenomena; forces that are personified, regarded as actual entities, in spite of a lack of physical evidence to support their existence.”

“Deities…gods, in other words. But there are beings such as you, who would surely be deemed gods by such people.”

“I have found…that the existence of such entities has little bearing on whether or not the people believe in them. It would appear to be an inborn tendency, little different than the instinct for self-preservation. But where there are these beliefs, there will invariably come with them disagreements on how these beings should be worshipped, with each side unwavering in its beliefs and only a relative few individuals willing to bridge the gap. And just as invariably, there will come rivalries, unreasoning hatreds, grudges held for generations, even outright war.” She paused to swallow a mouthful of skuvurnee.

“But the Rusay,” said Gwinthrayle thoughtfully, “lack such a tendency. We all share a love for our world, but we do not recognize any specific being as being responsible for its existence. Now…I do recall your earlier story about how, before you made those great changes in the world, the Rusay race was one of those afflicted by violence and strife. Did we, indeed, have this tendency then, and was it the root cause of all our ills?”

“No,” she replied without hesitation. “The Rusay evolved and developed without the inclination toward worship in their genetic makeup. It has, indeed, made them nearly unique among all the races I have observed—nearly, but not completely.” She placed the last bite of skuvurnee in her mouth.

Gwinthrayle raised an eyebrow. “And another such race…or perhaps a pair of races, would be our friends in Freethorn.”

Sanphi/Elle nodded silently, swallowing and reaching for a napkin.

“I believe I understand. This was yet another criterion for your allowing them to settle here. I observed this myself in Freethorn, when you addressed everyone, Freethorners as well as their Rusay guests; and all regarded you with great respect, to be certain; but not as one to be worshipped. And yet…in spite of this, you still saw fit to alter everyone’s memory, so that none would remember your walking among us.”

She finished wiping her face with the napkin, replying only with a small smile. Gwinthrayle’s next impulse was to ask her why, but he quickly realized it would probably be of no use. He wondered if she would approach anyone in Freethorn in this way; considering she had earlier revealed herself to them as well as him, then wouldn’t it follow that—

Then he realized: Freethorn…Johnathan! And those young Mouse siblings, whose names escaped him at the moment, with their mutual truth-finding ability… “Surely, my lady, you must be aware that there are those who could quite possibly uncover the truth on their own, without your restoring their memories as you did mine.” Again his guest replied with a smile and a nod. “Then…may I conclude that this was yet another test, one that is perhaps still ongoing? And that, perhaps, its ultimate conclusion is contingent upon what they do with their knowledge of the truth?”

This time Gwinthrayle was sure he’d get a more definite reply than a nod; and in that, at least, he wasn’t disappointed. “No more tests…will be necessary. And now…I feel I must apologize for making such an abrupt departure when last we met. There was…little other choice, given the chaotic circumstances. But we may yet meet again, mage. For now, farewell.”

Gwinthrayle was utterly unprepared for such an abrupt pronouncement. “My lady—hold! Will I still recall this—” Yet, even as he uttered his truncated sentence, he knew the answer.

“Gwinthrayle…are you all right?”

He shook his head slightly and looked up to see Sanphi standing before him, curious and concerned. Where had his mind gone just now? he asked silently. Then he remembered. Collecting himself, he replied, “My apologies, little one. It seems I let my mind wander again.” He stroked her smooth head. “Well, if you’ve eaten your fill, we’ll set about tracking down your family.”

“Oh, yes, I’m ready.” Sanphi gave a small belch, holding her hand up to her mouth and giggling.

“I’ll take that as a compliment, my dear.” Gwinthrayle led her to his study, inwardly chastising himself for allowing his attention to waver, returning to that faraway time when he’d been charmed so by Dasimi, speaking so seriously of marriage and children…yet it was Sanphi who had unwittingly helped to take him there. It almost seemed as if there was yet another matter that had distracted him; as well as thoughts of Dasimi, or instead of?

He dismissed the thought as he steered his little guest toward his viewscreen. He instructed her to concentrate on her family and where they were when she’d seen them last. Holding her hand, he uttered a command, made a sweeping motion with his arm, and an image appeared. Sanphi drew in breath suddenly, marveling at the scene before them. Here were her parents and sister searching around rocks and trees and bushes, Sanphi obviously being the object of their search. This was just after they’d missed her, explained Gwinthrayle, who then brought the scene up to the present, so that she could see that they were still searching for her and had enlisted others to help.

Gwinthrayle concluded the viewing with another sweeping motion. “I can now take you directly to where they are now, Sanphi. Are you ready?”

“Oh, yes, of course! Oh, thank you, Gwinthrayle, thank you!” She threw her arms around his torso.

“You’re quite welcome, child. Let’s go outside now.”

“I’d kind o’ like to stay here a little longer,” confessed Sanphi as they approached the door to the terrace, “but they’re so worried I guess I shouldn’t.”

“Well, I’d enjoy having you, but you are right. Someday, perhaps, I could have your entire family as guests here. I will make the offer when we reach them.”

Once completely outside, Gwinthrayle told her to prepare herself. Sanphi’s feet danced up and down, in anticipation of the trip back to her family as much as for their impending reunion, as Gwinthrayle initiated the spell. Still holding her hand, his feet as well as hers left the ground and stayed up. After she confirmed she was ready, with great enthusiasm, the two ascended further into the warm midday air; then moved forward over the gardens and creek and low hills, gradually picking up speed until they reached a still-relatively-low top speed. Sanphi took in their surroundings eagerly, head constantly bobbing back and forth. Just wait till I tell them all about this, she thought as her host’s abode receded further behind them.